JOHN "FRYER- CHINESE- LIBRARY- GERMAN NEW AND PRACTICAL METHOD OF LEARNING THE GERMAN LANGUAGE BY D B EMIL OTTO, PROFESSOR OF MODERN LANGUAGES AND LECTURER AT THE UNIVERSITY OF HEIDELBERG, AUTHOR OF THE 'FRENCH CONVERSATION- GRAMMAR' AND SOME OTHER CLASS-BOOKS. EIGHTEENTH EDITION. HEIDELBERG. Published by JULIUS GRQOS. LONDON. 1878. PARIS. D AVID NUTT, 270 Strand. A. FRANCE, 67 Rixe Richelieu. AGENCIES FOR AMERICA: NEW-YORK. BOSTON. L. W. SCHMIDT, 24 Barclay-Street. SCHOENHOF & MOELLER, (Box 1817.) 40 Winter Street. . ♦ MAIN LIBRARY JOHN FRYER CtflNISE LIBRARY The Bight of Translation and Reproduction is reserved. Preface to the first edition. Within the last few years , the study of the German language in England has become so universal, that the appearance of another German grammar in addition to the comparatively few that have hitherto been published, will scarcely excite surprise, especially as the book mostly in use with the English student, viz. : 'Ollendorff's New Method of learning German', is in reality no grammar, but only a book of exercises, affording the pupil no system- atic and connected view of the grammatical rules, neces- sarily to be observed in German. The difficulties of the language are not removed by Ollendorff's Exercises, they are simply avoided. However a mere grammar, i. e. an assemblage of grammatical rules , without practical appli- cation, is equally unfitted to satisfy the pupil desirous not only of comprehending and reading, but also of writing and speaking the language. The present 'German Grammar' will conduce to the attainment of all these objects. It is based on the so-called Conversational Method, first applied by the author of this book in his 'Fren ch Conversation-Grammar', which work has met with great success in Germany, and has distinctly shown that this method is the easiest , quickest, and the best calculated to assist the pupil in overcoming the difficulties of a language. This ' German Conversation- Grammar 1 combines the grammatical and logical exposition of the German language with the constant application of the different forms and rules to writing and speaking. The book is divided into Lessons, each complete in itself, and containing in systematic arrangement a portion of the grammar , followed by a German Reading exercise, in which the different forms are applied to whole sen- tences. An Exercise for translation into German comes next : the lesson being concluded by an easy and familiar IV Preface to the first edition. Conversation , re-embodying the matter introduced in the previous exercises. It is impossible for a more practial method of ac- quiring the art of speaking German to be conceived , than for the pupil to be questioned in German by his teacher on subjects already familiar to him by translation, and for him to endeavour to give a fitting reply. In a short time the ear becomes so familiarized with the strange accents , that the teacher is understood , the tongue at the same time acquiring a fluency , to be attained by none of the other methods. The author's practical experience in teaching his mother-tongue to foreigners, warrants him fully in making this assertion. The advantage of conversational exercises is evident. Whoever has occupied himself with the study of modern languages, is aware that by far the most difficult thing is, to comprehend the foreign idiom. Accustomed from the very beginning to understand the easy questions the teacher addresses to him in German, and to answer in the same language on subjets already known to him from the foregoing Reading exercise and translation, the learner exercises equally his ear and tongue, and will in a short time be enabled to express his thoughts fluently and correctly in the foreign idiom. The book is divided into two Parts or Courses ; the First Part contains the complete Etymology , that is , the ten parts of speech, considered in their nature and in- flections, including the irregular verbs, with only the plainest syntactical rules requisite for translating the exercises. The Second Part contains the complete Syntax and the more difficult and idiomatical parts of the grammar. This part, as the most essential, has been systematically explained in clear and accurate rules, all of which are illustrated by the necessary examples , and followed by fitting Exercises and German Reading-lessons , both with the requisite words. Free Exercises, Materials for conver- sation and a few German dialogues conclude the Grammar. Lastly, a few Specimens of German poetical literature, some of which may be advantageously committed to memory, are introduced in the 'Appendix'. In respect to the mode of employing this Grammar, the Preface to the sixteenth and seventeenth edition. V author begs that he may be allowed to offer teachers and pupils a few suggestions. The rules with their examples and the 'Words' should be first learned by heart, and the German 'Reading Exercise' read and translated into English. This done, the ''Conversation'' should be read, then the Exercise for translation ( s #ufgabe) put into Ger- man and, when corrected, written out fairly and gone through again. Finally the ' Conversation' should be read or committed to memory. The pupil may commence with the Reading lessons and with the easier poems in the 'Appendix' as soon as the teacher considers him sufficiently advanced, even though he should not have gone through the whole of the first Part. Heidelberg, September 1856. Preface to the eighteenth edition. The method followed in this grammar*) and the im- provements made in the preceding editions having been so much approved by the public as to cause it to be adopted by many schools and private families, as 'the best German Grammar' and 'one of the most useful class- books', the author as well as the publisher have spared no trouble to make it as perfect as possible. They flatter themselves that by this new edition, carefully revised and more elegantly printed, it will be found more deserving of the increasing patronage it has hitherto experienced, and they trust that it will materially contribute towards promoting the study of the German language in England and America. The author^takes this occasion to inform those who wish to learn German that he has written also a smaller grammar, entitled : 'An elementary Grammar of the Ger- man language, combined with Exercises, Readings and Conversations (price only two marks) which retains exactly *) Explained in the Preface to the first edition. VI Preface to the sixteenth and seventeenth edition. the same method as this larger one, and is destined for first beginners. Further also in connection with it an- other little book which is much needed: viz. 6 German- JE/nc/lisli Conversations. A new methodical guide for learning to speak German'* He begs leave to mention also that he has recently published: Supplementary Exercises to the German Grammar and further two little volumes: 'Materials for translating English into German with grammatical notes and a Vocabulary', firstf) and second Part, intended for proficient learners. When they have gone through the grammar, the use of these little works will certainly prove useful in giving them a greater facility not only in ivriting but also in speaking German correctly. A Key, containing the translations of the English Exercises into German, the necessary notes and trans- lations of the pieces of German literature contained in the 'Appendix', and some specimens of German letter- writing, has been published")")-) for the convenience of those who are unable to procure an efficient teacher. The new edition of it exactly agrees with this edition of the Grammar. Further the author begs leave to say, that he has published a 'First German Book'*) for the use of younger pupils who are to acquire a slight practical knowledge of the elements of the German language, before commencing a regular grammatical course; likewise a German Reader the first part of which contains: Easy Headings, fables, little stories etc., the second: Select Readings in Ger- man literature; the third: German plays, each with notes and a Vocabulary all three in new editions. Heidelberg, March 1878. D R - EMIL OTTO. t) 4th edition 1876. — ft) l±th ed. 1877. — *) 5th ed. 1877. Extract from "Rochester Daily Union' Nov. 10. 1865. Heidelberg, Germany. To the American Student coming to Germany. One of the most difficult questions for the American student to get properly answered, when he is about to start for Europe for purposes of study is, where to find the best place to set himself to work. Many waste a good part of their time before they find they have not been properly advised on this point. It makes a vast difference where the student of German pursues his studies, not only as to the purity of the language spoken, but as to the ability of those who lecture on the topics he may wish to hear .... It is a singular fact, but an undeniable one, that the most difficult thing to find in Germany is a good teacher of the Ger- man language. The want of a good system of text books, and the fact of having been instructed orally, and by lectures, renders the native German teacher incapable of following a system of instruction that the better disciplined mind of the American student demands. It must not be supposed that German teachers are deficient in knowledge. On the contrary their attainments are a matter of wonder. They speak several foreign languages with as much ease and fluency as their own. But they acquire languages much more readily than the American student, and therefore fail to comprehend the difficulties which a foreigner finds in their own. They almost invariably use English and French methods in teaching their own language, and these do not meet the necessities of the^ase. I have often had occasion to remark that, until some German linguist took the trouble to put himself in the position of the English scholar, and to comprehend the difficulties which the German language presents to the foreigner well enough to perfect a system of instruction adopted to the case, the correct comprehension of the spirit and letter of the German would be the lot of a very small proportion of those who study it. Woodbury's method, which is mostly used in America, is found to be very faulty, when any one tries to use VIII Extract. what they have learned from it in intercourse with Germans. The German is not pure, and many of the classifications are wholly incorrect, therefore half the time spent in learning it, is wasted. Ann's method is better German, but it is neither systematically nor progressively arranged. Having been perplexed by the defects of the various systems and text books in use for the English pupils, and the want of systematic and thorough teachers, it has been a source of great satisfaction to have found here at the University of Heidelberg, in the person of one of the professors, Dr. Otto, a teacher who has comprehended and solved satisfactorily the difficulties which his own language presents to the foreigner. He has been a close student of languages, and has not only made many interesting discoveries in German, and originated a most useful system of classification of words, but he has so clearly comprehended the spirit of the English lan- guage as to be able to adapt his discoveries and classifications succesfully to it. As a result of his researches and studies he has published a grammar*) for the English student, which, in my opinion, is better than any heretofore published in Europe or America ; and I earnestly recommend it to all who wish to learn German. Twelve months' trial with other Teachers and systems, added to my own experience in teaching, may justify me in speaking on this point with more assurance than I otherwise would. My conviction is that the student will do better to spend his first four or six months in the beautiful town of Heidelberg. No teacher whom I have found, can take him on so under- standing^ and so fast as Dr. Otto. His systematic application of the rules and principles of his superior grammar, and his extensive acquaintance with German literature and German history render his instructions invaluable to the student of Ger- man Prof. Peck. *) The full title is : German Conversation-Grammar. A new and practical method of learning the German language by Dr. Emil Otto, Prof, of modern languages and Lectjir at the University of Heidelberg. Fourteenth Edition. Published by Jul. Groos, Heidelberg. CONTENTS. First Part. — Etymology. On pronunciation. Letters of the Alphabet Pronunciation of the vowels Pronunciation of the consonants On the Acce nt .... Reading Exercises Parts of speech .... 1. Lesson. On the definite Article 2. „ On the indefinite Article 3. „ Declension of substantives First declension 4. „ Second declension . 5. „ Third declension 6. „ Feminine substantives. Fourth declension 7. k Neuter substantives. Fifth declension 8. (/ Nouns with prepositions . 9. „ Irregularities in the formation of the plural 10. m On the Genders of Substantives 11. „ Declension of Proper (Personal) Names 12. tt Proper names of countries, places &c. 13. H Determinative Adjectives 14. if Auxiliary verbs. §aBcn 15. u Second auxiliary, ©etn 10. „ Third auxiliary. SScvbcn 17. m Auxiliary Verbs of Mood 18. n On the Adjective 19. t Degrees of comparison 20. m On the Numerals 21. m Regular (Modern) Verbs Reading-lesson: %t\op 22. m Passive Voice 23. m On the Personal pronouns 24. m Interrogative pronouns Demonstrative pronouns Pag? 3 4 7 11 14 16 IS 21 23 25 29 32 36 40 43 47 54 59 64 68- 73 78 82 85 92 101 107 114 123 124 133 13d 140 XII Contents. Promiscuous Exercises for Translation and Conversation. II Anecdotes for Translation into German A. dialogue: Dionysius, Pythias and Damon Materials for German Conversation Idiomatical Expressions .... German proverbs Easy conversations 369 374 383 38G 389 392 393 Appendix. A few specimens of German poetical literature. 1. %aMn unb (Sraaitfungeu 397-403 1. 3)a8 §u^n^cn imb bcr 2)iamant. — 2. 2)a3 S3a$letn. — 3. 2>er Ddj[e unb ber (Sfel. — 4. ®er Stnabt unb bie 2)attetn. — 5. 2)cr fttfcfyer. — 6. £>er toeifje £irfdj. — 7. 2te|ob. — 8. SDer 331tnbe unb bcr Safyme. — 9. 2)ie ©djafcgvaber. — 10. 3)cr Stteifenbe. — 11. 2>te Sa&afStofetfe. 2. Sicbcr mtb (Heoteit 403-413 1. 2)er ©rPfce. — 2. ©cfunben. — 3. £erbftfieb. — 4. Sin* tertteb. — 5. @<$roetjevltebcr. — 6. ©cfylaf cm, mcin §erj. — 7. 2Bad)terruf. — 8. 2)e8 25eutfd)en SBatevIanb. — 9. 93abifd)e3 ©otfSiicb. — 10. (Met toctyrenb ber ©cfytadjt. — 11. (Slegte in ben SRuinen be§ £eibetberger ©djtoffeS. 3. Scgenben, ffiomanjen unb SBattaben . . . 413—428 1. ©arfcaroffa. — 2. SDer ©anger. — 3. 2)er (Srlfonig. — 4. 2>er retd&fte prft. — 5. StnbreaS $o\es. — 6. 3)a3 2icb toom bratoen 9Jtaun. — 7. S)ie 23itrgfd?aft. — 8. 2>er Diing beS $otyfrate§. — 9. flofamfcus. 4. Seijrgebidjte 428—435 1. 2>ie §offnung 428 2. fragment au§ bent „2teb ton ber ©lode" . . .429 5. $tamatifdje ^ragmente 436—446 1. 2fo« ©fitter's JWarta ©tuart" 436 2. Sttonotog au3 „2Bitye(m Sett" 441 3. to ©fitter's „3nngfrau toon Orleans" . . .443 GENEKAL INDEX. KB. The figures refer to the paje. 3T6, separable prefix 200. aber, fonbern, attcin 237. About, how rendered 349. Above, how rendered 349. Accent of words 11. Accessory sentence , its arrange- ment of words 361 ; with separ. verbs 203. Accusative 329 ; governed by pre- positions 44, 251, 253; — with the infinitive 316; governed by adj. 329. Active verbs 114. Adjectives determinative 68 ... ; demonstrative 68 ; interrogative 69 ; possessive 70 ; indefinite 70 ; predicative 92 ; Declension of adj. with the definite article 93; with the indef. article 94; without either article 96. Com- parison of adj. 101 ; government of adj. 329; with prepositions 331; adject, with suffixes 98; adj. used as nouns 99. Adverbs, of place 229 ; — of time 229 ; — ol quantity and com- parison 232 ; — of affirmation and negation 233; — of inter- rogation 233, order 234 ; — their comparison 103, 234; their po- sition in a sentence 355; in- version of their position 360. All, with the article 71; without it 273 ; meaning »whole« 294. ma, when not declined 294. •Jlllcm, as conjunction 237. %U, conjunction 240, 241. ^U3 Warn, alS ofc, 246 ; followed by the subjunctive mood 304. "9hi, separable particle 200. Sttt, prep, its significations 344. ^nbertfyalfc, used for jtoettfyaO) 112. Any, how rendered 153, 296. Apposition 62. Arrangement of words 76, 355 . . . Article, the definite 18; the indef. 31 ; contracted with prepositions 45 ; special use of it 269 ; its repetition 271 ; its position 271 ; when omitted 272. As as, how rendered 104. At, how rendered 349. 5luf, sep. prefix 200; significa- tions 344. 2tu8 , pref. 200 ; significations 345. Auxiliary verbs : tjafcn 72, fetn 78, irerben 82 ; aux. of mood 85, 282 ; infinitive of the aux. of mood used for the past parti- ciple 90. B. S3alb, its comparison 103. S3et, prep. 200; signification 345. 33etbe, with and without the ar- ticle 71, 273. By, how rendered 350. C. Cardinal numbers 107. Comparison, of adjectives 101. of adverbs 103, 235. Compound words 12; gender of comp. nouns 57 ; comp. verbs 99 ; comp. prefixes 202. Compound sentences 364. Conjugation of regular verbs 117 ; — of irregular v. 156. Conjunctions, coordinative 237; adverbial 238 ; subordinative 240, 246; relative 248 XIV General Index. Construction of sentences 355. Correlative pron. 146. D. 2)a, conjunction 240 & 242 ; con- tracted with prepositions 137. 2>amtt, conj. with the subjunctive mood 304 ; demonstr. contrac- tion 137. £>afj, conj. 243; omitted 308. Date, how expressed 111. Dative , governed by prepositions 44, 251, 253; by verbs 335; governed by adj. 329. Declension of articles 18, 21 ; of nouns 23 — 42 ; of proper names 60—66; of adjectives 93-98. Demonstrative adjectives 68. Demonstrative pronouns 140. Determinative adjectives 68. Diminutives, their declension 27 ; their gender 56. Do, as auxiliary 90, 118, Note 2. 2)urd) , significations 345 ; sepa- rable & insep. prefix 206. SDiirfeit, its conjugation 89; re- marks on it 288. E. (Sin, indef. article 21 ; numeral 108. (Sittaitber 150. (§S giefct, rendered »there is« 217. (§3 tft, rendered »there is« 217. F. Feminine nouns, declined 36. From, how rendered 350. $iir, prep, significations 345. Future-participle 326. Genitive of substantives 278 ; ex- pressed by toon 279, used with the present participle 319 , gov- erned by prepositions 253 , by verbs 338. (Sent, its use, its comparison 234 & footnote. Government of adj. 329; — of verbs 334—342. ©rofj, its comparison 103. ®Ut, its comparison 103. §akn, paradigm 74 ; used as aux- iliary 117, 157, 195, 223. §od), before a noun 98 ; its com- parison 103. ©e, as a prefix of nouns 56. ©e, as prefix of the past participle 116; omitted 121, 194. ©egen, significations 346. Gender of nouns 51. Imperative mood 309; the past participle used for it 326. Imperfect tense, its use 299. Impersonal verbs 216. 3>n, significations 346. In, how rendered 350. Indefinite article 21. Indef. num. adj. 70, 151; — pro- nouns 150. Indicative mood, use of it 298. Indirect questions 139 Note & 307. Infinitive, used as substantive 312; without JU 313; with jit 314; in the passive voice after »to be« 314; Note; with urn — ju 315; with the accusative 316; after »how, what, where &c.« 316; its place in a sen- tence 355, 3. Interjections 259. Interrogative adj. 69 ; — pron. 139. Intransitive verbs 210 ; with the auxiliary fein 211 & 212. Inversion of sentences 359. Irregular verbs 154; a list 190. Irregularities in the plural 47—52. 3e — bcflo 246 & 105, 10) & 209, 4. General Index. XV £onnen its conjugation 85; re- marks on it 282. L. Saffen, significations and its use as an auxiliary 285. List of the irreg. Verbs 190. 2ftan, indef. pronoun 150. Measure, expressions of m. 278; adj. of m. 329. Sftogen, its conjugation 88; re- marks on it 283. Moods, use of the indicative 29S ; — of the subjunctive 303 ; — of the imperative 309. Sftiiffen, its conjugation 87; re- marks on it 286. Hftutter, its declension 38. N. Sftad), significations 346. Sftafye, its comparison 103. Neuter verbs 210; with the aux- iliary [cm 211. Nouns with prepositions 43 ; their gender 54; declension 24—52. Number, expressions of n. 278. Numerals, cardinal 107 ; ordinal 110. 0. Object, its place in a sentence 356. Oblique narration 307. Of, a sign of the genitive 279. On, how rendered 351. One, after adjectives 108, 152, 2. Ordinal numbers 110. Over, how rendered 351. Parts of the speech 16. Passive voice 124; its infinitive after the verb 'to be* 314. Past participle , used as adjective 129; instead of the present p. 326 ; used absolutely and for the imperative 326 ; its place in a sentence 355. Perfect tense, its use 299, III. Personal pronouns 133. Pluperfect tense, its use 300. Plural, irregular formations 47-51 , nouns with two forms of it 50, V. Possessive pronouns 141. Predicate of sentences 355, 359, 361. Predicative form of adjective 92. Prefixes, their accent 12; insepa- rable^!,^, 195; separable 200; in accessory clauses 203, Obs. ; separable and insep. 206, 3. Present participle how rendered 118; used as adjective 318; as noun 31 9 ; with possessive adjec- tives 321 ; used absolutely 322. Present tense, its use 298. Prepositions, with the dative 44, 1 & 3, 251, 253, 4); with the accus. 44, 251 ; with the geni- tive 45, 253 ; with the dative and accusative 253 ; contracted with the article 45 ; contracted with pronouns 137, 145; re- marks on prepositions 343. Pronouns, personal 133 ; reflective 133, 137, 291; contracted with prepositions 137, 145; interro- gative 139; demonstrative 140 possessive 141 ; relative 143 correlative 146; indefinite 150 remarks on use of pronouns 290. Proper names of persons ; their declension 59 — 62. Proper names of countries &c. 64. Q. Quantity, adverbs of 232, 4). B. 3tedjt tya&en 80. Reflective pronouns 133, 137, 291. Reflective verbs 222. Relative pronouns 143, 5). S. ©e:n, paradigm 78 ; with the past XVI General Index. participle 129; used as auxili- ary 211. ie, as pronoun of the 2nd person 134. <3o, conjunction 242. y i/ta-Ge A & .ct , r ' , / ; / , / r '* . < y y&z^z:^// r //I , // i // , /', ; mZj / r ■ '^/^azo-^^e^ce^. Part I. ETYMOLOGY: comprehending the elements of the language & ****&* OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. On Pronunciation. Letters of the Alphabet. The German Alphabet consists of 26 letters, whiehi are represented as follows: Characters. Name. Characters. Name. % a = a ah (au). SI, n = n emu 39, b = b bey. £), o = o o. G>, c = c tsey. $, » = P pey. 2), b = (1 dey. Q, q = q koo. (5, e = e ey. 9?, r = r airr. 8, f = f eff. ®, f, 8 = s ess. ©, 8= g gay- X, t = t tey. & $=h hah. U, u = u oo. 3, i = i ee. 33, o = v fow (fou). 3, i = j yot. 28, id = w vey. ft, f = k kah. 36, $ = x iks. 8, 1 = 1 ell. % * = y ypsilon. SW, m = m em. 3, S = z tset. Of these, a, e, t, o, i 1, t) are simple vowels , the others are simple consonants. Besides these, there are in German double vowels, modified vowels, diphthongs and compound consonants: Double vowels. — ce 2lct, aa — oo. Modified vowels. Ke, ort, a. De, or 6, o. Ue, or U, u » Diphthongs. *t, at. (St, et. Su , eu. «u, au. ©?, ety. 2leu [, or fiu, Su. Double and compound consonants. <5fc $. ch. — $& = X. ©p. $ sp. <5cty, f$ sh. — d = = ck. - ff, 6, ss. @t, ft, St. £X qu qu. — ng = = ng. ■— fc = tz. 1 t§= = t. <6 Diphthongs. De or D, o. When sharp, this vowel approaches the English aounl iin murderer ; it is very like the French eu in sew£ or Jeune, as: §ofle, of*ter, (Softer, fonncn. — When long, there is no sound answering to it in the English language; •the nearest to it is perhaps bird, heard etc. ; it resembles the French eu in feu, as : SDcfcn or Of en, $ol?4er, §ofy(e, 4>be, 23o*gen. He or U, U. The English have nothing corresponding to this sound. It is exactly the French u in russe, sur etc., as: itfrer, fur, Uebel or Ubel, §>iite, fiu>ren, fittten. 3. Diphthongs. 9lt, at. 2lu, au. $eu or $u, au. 5Ct, which occurs only in a few substantives, is pro- nounced almost like the English % in fire , shy , but a little broader, the a predominating : $at*fer, 2£at*fe, £)am, 2)tot, attain. — at) is no longer used in German, except in a few proper names. 2lu, like the ou in house, sound, as : §au$, an$, auf, $3aum, SKaitnt, a,(au*ben, fauf. 3leu, ciu,. resembles somewhat the English oy in boy ; but whilst here the o predominates, in the German ail the a is more heard; again the second half is not so open as t, but more like the u (French u) , as : §au*fer,. &$du*me, trctu*men, 33rdute (as if spelled §aTtfer, 33dume) . ®, ct (ei>). (£t has always the sound of the English i in mind, as: ntetn, bent, 23etn, fleht, 9?et*nte, ^etten, (St, (Ster.*) Cty was formerly used instead of et at the end of words, and in order to distinguish the two different words of the same sound: fetn {his) and fctyn {to be). This practise is now abolished, and all words having the sound et are mostly written et, as : einer*tet, (St, (Ster, bet, fcet*Iegen. — The further practice of writing the verb fetyn (to be) in all its forms with t) is gradually being discontinued. *) This diphthong et is not to be confounded with it (long t) which is not a diphthong (see p. 4, t). Compare the two words: ietneit and bteuen (= binen); 2GB e in {wine) and SBien ^Vienna). Consonants. 7 dot, tVk (Sit, tU has the same sound as au; it is not quite so broad as the English oi, as : neu, gcute, tyeitte, treu. Pronunciation of the consonants. 1. Simple consonants. 93, B and $), fc, as in English ; but when they end a word or even a syllable followed by another consonant, they are somewhat harder and approach the sound of p and t: 2M, SStrne, fcrett, ab, ©rab, dl--be, ab4egen; £)amm, ber, mitb, £ab*fer, $tnb*Ietn, SIbenb. (5, c. This letter by itself, appears only in foreign words and is pronounced, before d, C, i and t), like ts (the same as j), as: (Ea*far, G£ent*tter, (Sitrone, (Silent; — before the other vowels and consonants, hard like f, as : date, (Soncer't, (So" In (Cologne), (Suftur', (SfoitbiuS, @cta&e. %, f; 8, 1; 2K, m; % n; $, »; %, t and $ j are quite the same as in English, as: fin*ben, auf, 2lffe, fret; $iebe, loben, fatten, ftel, gatfe; -iNann, mtr, tat, jammer, ntmmt ; £afet, £raum, 23ett, betreffen ; Sewer, Sire, (Srempet. t in words ending in ton, which are taken from the Latin, sounds like g (&), according to our pronunciation of this language, as : Seftten = 2ef*jion, portion = ^orjion, Emigration etc. ©, Q, ought always to have the hard sound like the English g in garden, glad, pig, as : ®ar*ten, gebeu, gegen, @la8, $ragen, gtagge, feerg, genug; except in words ending in the unaccented final syllable ig, and their derivatives, where it sounds like id), as: $onig (= ftflnufy), gtfttg = gtfticfy, giitig, toentg, ftfmgticfy, reintgen. It must however be mentioned, that in a part of Germany the (J after each vowel is pronounced soft, sound- ing like d) (see that letter p. 8) : (egen = Ieed;en, 8age = $aa*cf)e, genug = genucfy, §eibetberg = §cibe(berd). g with an n before it (iiq) see p. 9. $, f>, at the beginning of words, is aspirated as in English : fyaben, §etb, §ort, Ijoren, §ut, fyunbert. — Between two vowels the aspiration is so slight as to be scarcely heard : §)ofye, fef)en, ©cfyulje, Miifyen, gier)en. — Before a con- sonant and at the end of words it is mute, but it indi- 8 Consonants. cates in this position tkat the vowel before it, is long: §a$n, d?*ren, &tyxit, Bftoljv, ©trdj, Uljr. 3/ I (y ot ) corresponds with y (consonant) in you, as : 3a, 3al)r, iefcer, Jung, 3ufce, be^afyrt. St, t is like the English k, as : la% lalt, £reu$, flfee, S3a(!cn ; it is never mute before n, as : $nie, $nabe. 3t, X is pronounced shriller and with more emphasis than in English. Its being placed at the beginning, middle or end makes no difference: 9kb, SHufym, Ghffce, bergen, SBurg, fyer, gaar, gfor, giifyrer. 8, f, § is like the English s, and the distinction between hard and soft s (like z) is rather imaginary*). Of course ; double s (= ff) is still harder and more hiss- ing than a single a, because the sound is doubled, but the fundamental sound of s should be always hard and hissing: @oljn = sohn (not zohn), @aft, e. 56, to answers to the English and French v, but is somewhat more open, the lips being less contracted than in pronouncing the English v. This sound requires par- ticular attention: 28em = vine, tt>er, tocmn, tto, ttrifo, enng. JO is never silent nor used at the end of words. 3, J is pronounced as ts in gets or tw'fe, as: je^n, Jit, ba$u, jroet, 3a$f, 3otf, an^te^eu. The sounds of the English /, w? or wh and £A do not occur in German. 2. Double and compound consonants. dfj, d). There is nothing, corresponding to this in English. It has two different sounds : 1) When placed after a, 0, U and cut, its sound is a guttural one and resembles the scotch ch in Loch. It is impossible to define it clearer. The pupil must there- *) This soft s, chiefly in use with the higher classes in northern Germany since the French language has been generally studied in Germany, is quite foreign to the people at large. Double consonants. 9 fore refer to his teacher for the correct pronunciation, as: 2&ad), (acfyen, 2o$, focfyen, 23ud), ftucfyen, auc§, Oiaucfy. 2) The other sound which occurs after c, t, ci, CL, 0, cut, eu and u, and after any consonant is a soft ,,pa- latic aspirate", as: id), StCyt, vctd?, rccfyt, 23ad)e, Sccfyer, rail* d/ern, fyeu*d)e(n, 23iicfyer, U)e(d;e, ijaufc^en. At the beginning- of words (£f) is pronounced like $ r as : (Shrift = Shrift, (St)rtfttan, (ifjor, except in (Sljemte, d)e* mtfd; and G>t)irurg, where it is soft. d)3. When d) is followed by § or f, they are pro- nounced together like ks or z, as : SBac^S = SafS or S&cn; ; thus: Qd)3, Deafen, guctys, guc^fe, ^Id>fet, tvad;fcn. This however cannot be done in compound words : toacfyfam = rcadi) * fam, nadt)fud>en = nad; ■ fudjett, nadH^eii, fcUTcfy-'f^en, — or when the 3 is abridged from e$, espe- cially in the Genitive case : teg SitcfyS, for 23ud;e$ or 2hicfy'$ ;, fees £)adj$ for ©ac^e§ or £)ad^; er fpvacfy'S. & appears at the end or in the middle of a word after a short vowel with the sound of a double f, as in English, as : (Sted, ^ctd, ©tcdert, @lode, Wadcix, bvitden ; — & is never allowed after a consonant. To write ftarcf, SBerd, 33cmd :c. would be incorrect ; they must be spelt : part, 8Berf, ©atrf jc. There are a few compound words in which even cf and f occur together, as : 9ftid*fel)r, £)rudfoften, £)idfcpf. ng sounds like the English ng in long, as : lang, 3itng, ®efang. — The same pronunciation is retained, when n$ is followed by a vowel, as: tange = (ang-e (not falt'ge), fyangen, gutg*er, bringen, ftngen, gehmgen. — In compound words, when the first ends ;n tt and the other begins with gefcuib. Dlt, qu; q is always joined with u; together they have then the sound of fit) as in the English word quire. In German qu is found in few words only: Quarj, qucr, Quirf, Qua!, Quelle. ff or §*) ; the former is used as double s in the middle of a word : taffen, Beffer, miijjen ; the latter is the *) This letter is not compounded, as it appears in print, of f and J, but of f and $ (final s) = f$ ; it sounds like ss (not sz) . 10 Double consonants. final double s (not z) at the end of words and syllables : — tag (= dass), §ag, ©cfylog, mufcte. ty\), pfy has the same sound as f, and occurs mostly in words of Greek origin : (gpl;eit, ^fytfofoptyte, ®eocp;apt}te, *Pf, pf. Here the two letters p and f are united in one sound, uttered with compressed lips : ^fa^l , ^3fetl, Styfet, ^ferb. <8d), fcf) like the English sh in ship, as : parren, enn, bod?/2ftarm, gran, $tnb, §a\\%, £)ad), Iteb. 5) When a simple word is not monosyllabic, it con- sists of a root or principal syllable (©tammftlbe) and of one or more accessory syllables (SftefcenfUBen), and is called a derivative. The latter are partly prefixes , partly suf- fixes, which are never used alone and appear only in con- nection with roots. They are: a) Such as are placed before the root, prefixes (23or* ftCbeit) : be, em£, ent, er, ge, fcer, gcr. b) Such as are placed after, suffixes (SftacfyfilBen) : e, el, en, enb, er, ern, e$, eft, et, tg, tcfot, in, tfcfy, licfy, itng, tgen. These syllables under a) and b) are all unaccented. 1 2 Accent. 6) Hence the first chief-rule : All derivative German words have the accent on their root or chief -syllable, but never on either of the accessory syllables. Examples with prefixes. 33e*nif, &np»fdng, ent*gtng, erjiU;r, ®efcrcmd), 33cr*ntiiift. Examples with suffixes. 2iem, fyerrltcfy, fmbifcfy, £3dum* d?en, Sofyniingen, fyetltgen. • Examples with both. J85c*ruf*cn, (Sntyf anger, (Srf darting, &fdfjritngen, gefcraud)* Itcfy, terloten, entfyved;en, B^giing, $ernmnfcfyungen. JVofe. Nouns taken from foreign languages, having been germanised , do not come under this rule. These mostly receive the accent on the last syllable, as : aupth)ort, Sanbtnann ic. ; — but all combinations of inde- pendent words used by themselves and conveying an idea. Thus : 2ln'fang (the beginning) is a compound word as- well as gifcfy'fang, the first consisting of the two words an (preposition = at) and gang ; the latter of gifd) and gang. This definition is the key to all the difficulties, which as yet could not be resolved by the two theories adopted by grammarians, one of which says : ' the radical syllable of a word always takes the chief-accent'; the other: 'it must be taken by that which has most meaning and sig- nification'. Both principles are deficient, as seen above in the word Hnfang. Here the radical syllable is fang, yet it does not bear the chief-accent, which lies on2ln; Accent. 1$ aior is the first syllable, which does bear it, that which has most meaning and signification. 8) Compound words may consist of substantives, verbs, adjectives, pronouns, adverbs, prepositions, the prefixes HlijL urt,*) or the final syllables : bar, fjaft,ftng, fat, fdjaft, nig, fam, tljum, tetn, et, r)ett , atij and ittfy,*) the accent of which is somewhat less strong. For all words thus compounded, the following is the principal rule ; Each component, even when combined, keeps its accent on its radical syllable. Hence it follows that every com- jpoimd word is pronounced with two or more accents according to the number of components. Euphony how- ever requires, that the latter loses something of its value and weight, so that the first receives rather more stress. This has probably been the reason why other gramma- rians have adopted a full accent and a demi-accent. Ex. : £6fil;6v, 33orr)of, @irigarig, 3D7ittdg, ^dd;rtrf;ten, uriftcfyer, £)fen* xb\)x, SRegcnbogw, fiird;tiniv. Note. It must however be observed that compound particles have only one accent, viz. on their second syll- able; as, for example, compounded with fytn: t)in*ric>, Ijin*auf, fymaiis, r/trtefn, $tn$u. with t?ev: r/erikbigf ctt , 9J?au(bcerbaume , jufdmmen* fomntcn, lingered^, suvilcffefyren, ba$totjdj)en4egert. *) Antiquated words which are no more used by themselves now. 14 Reading Exercise. Sic fiu-ne utti Me ta-be. The bee and the dove, Gt-ne Sie-ne tear bur-ftig; ftc flog ju ei-ner A bee was thirsty ; she flew to a Quel-te, urn ju trin-fen, ab-er fie ttmr-be bon bem well, in order to drink, but she was by the jiro-tnen-ben SBaf-fcr fort -ge-tif- fen, unb tod -re streaming water carried away and was bei-naf)-e er-tvun-fen. nearly drowned. dt-ne £au-be, tt>el-d)c bte-fe$ be-merf-te, ptcf-te A dove which this perceived, picked em 93aum-blatt ab, unb toarf e$ in ba$ SSaf-fer. SDic a (tree-) leaf off, and threw it into the water. The S3ie-ne er-grtff e$ unb ret-te-te fid). bee seized it and saved herself. 9tid;t lang-e nad)-fjer' fa§ bie Sau-be auf et-nem Not long afterwards sat the dove on a 23aum unb be-merf-te nid)t, bag ein 3d-ger mit fei* tree, and perceived not that a hunter with his net gltn-te auf fie jielte. 2)ie banf-ba-re 33ie-ne, gun at her aimed. The thankful bee, toel-d)e bie ©e-faf)r er-fann-te, in toel-d)er ifyre SBofyt* which the danger recognised, in which her bene- tfya-te-rin jtd) be-fanb, flog J)in-$u', unb fta<$ ben factress herself found, flew near and stung the 3&-ger in bie £anb. £)er 6(^u§ gtng ba-ne'-ben, hunter in the hand. The shot went aside, unb bie £au-be toar ge-ret-tet and the dove was saved. Reading Exercise. 15 Die bret Jremtie. The three friends. 1) ©n -Mann t>atte bret greun-be. %\vii x>on A man had three friends. Two of if)-nen lieb-te er fc^r; ber brit-te toar ifym glctdjhgil-tig, them loved he much; the third was to him indifferent, ob-gteid) bte-fer fetn be-fter greunb ftar. Ginft tour-be though this one his best friend was. Once was cr fcor bm JRtcf)-ter ge-for-bert, too er, — ob-fcfyon he before the judge summoned where he, — though un-fd)ul-btg — , bod) t;art fcer-fiagt toar. — 23cr innocent — , yet hard accused was. — Who un-tcr eucfy, fag-te er $u fct-nen grcun-bcn, totll nut among you, said he to his friends, will with mtr gcfy-en unb fiir mid) $eu-gcn? benn id) bin un* me go and for me witness? for I am un- ge-red)t fcer-flagt, unb ber $o-nig jiivnt. justly accused, and the king is angry. 2) £)er er-jte fei-ner greun-be ent-fd)itl'-btg-te fid> The first of his friends excused himself fo-gletd) unb fag-te, cr fon-ne nid;t mit tfym gef)-en immediately and said, he could not with him go toe-gen cm-be-tcr ©c-fdj&f-te. £>er 3^-^ bc-glei-te-te on account of other business. The second accompanied ifyn bis ju ber JM-re be$ 9ttd)t-l)au-fe$ ; bann toanb-te him as far as the door of the tribunal ; then turned er ficfy urn unb ging $u-riicf, au$ gurd)t Dor bem he (himself) and went back, for fear of the jor-nt-gcn 9ltd)-ter. 2)cr $)rit-te, auf toe(-d)en er am angry judge. The third. on whom he the toe'-ntg-jten ge-baut f)at-te, gtng fytn-ein, re'-be-te fiir least relied had, went in, spoke for tfyn unb jeug-te ton fei-ncr Un-fd)ulb fo freu-big, him and gave evidence of his innocence so cheerfully, bag ber $td)ter ifyn lo3-lte£ unb be-fd)enf-te. that the judge him liberated and rewarded. 16 Etymology. 3) 2)ret grcunbc fjat ber 3Wenf$ in btc-fer SBelt; Three friends has man in this world ; line be-tra-gen fie fid) in bcr ©tun-bc be£ $o-be3, how behave they in the hour of death, ftcnn ©ott if>n toot fcin ©e-rid)t for-bcrt? — 2)a3 when God him before his tribunal summons? — The ©elb, fetn cr-fter greunb, Dcr-Td§t if)n guerft nnb money, his first friend, leaves him first and -re #au-fer. grave, and return then back to their houses. 3)cr 2)rit-te, ben cr im 2c-bcn am of-tc-ftcn bcr-gafj, The third, whom he in life the oftenest forgot, finb fci-nc 911 ten SSer-fc. 6te al-lcin bc-glei-tcn are his good works. They alone accompany il;n Ml ju bem Jfyron beg fRicf> - tcr^ ; - fie gef;en him as far as the throne of the judge ; they go bor-tih', fpre-cben fur ifyn, unb fin-ben Sarm-fyer-jig-Ieit before, speak for him, and find mercy unb ©na-bc. «nd grace. Etymology. Preliminary notions. Parts of speech. There are in the German language ten parts of speech : 1) The article, bcr HrtifcC or ba§ ©efc$lec$t«n>ort. 21 The noun or substantive, bag §au|)ttt)ort. 3) The determinative adjective, bag SBeftttttimmgStoort. 4) The (qualifying) adjective, bag (StcjcnfcfyaftStocrt. 5) The pronoun, bag gurU>ort. Etymology. 17 6) The verb, fca8 3ettto0tfc 7) The adverb, baS UtnftcmbSttort. 8) The preposition, ba$ 93orft>ort. 9) The conjunction, baS SSmbettOtt. 10) The interjection, ba3 ?tu$rufn>ort The first six are variable, the four last invariable. The change which the first five undergo by means of terminations, is called declension; it refers to gender, number and case. There are in German three genders: the masculine (bct§ tthinnticfye) , the feminine (ba£ toeibltdje) and the neuter gender (baS facfyltcfye ®efcfyfed)t). The rules concerning the gender will be found in the 10th lesson. There are also two numbers: Singular ((Stnjaljl) and Plural (SWcfyrjctljI) , and four cases, expressing the different relations of words to each other, namely: the nominative, genitive, dative and accusative. The nominative case (SSerfafl) or the subject answers to the question: who? or what? Ex.: Who is learning? The boy (Latin: puer). The genitive or possessive case (SB&effenfalt) answers to the question : whose? or of which? Ex. : Whose book? The boy's book (pueri). The dative (SBfomfafl) answers to the question to whom? Ex.: To whom shall I give it? To the boy (puero) . The accusative or objective case (SBenfctfl) marks the object of an action and answers to the question: whom? or what? Ex.: Whom or what do you see? I see the boy (puerum), the house (domum). Note. For the vocative case there is no particular form in German; if required, the nominative serves for it in all the de- clensions. OTTO. German Conv.-GraTnmar. First Lesson. (grftc Seftton.) On the definite Article. (£)er Beftimmtc grt&fc) There are two articles in German as in English: the definite and the indefinite. The definite article, answering to the English the, is used to indicate the gender of substantives, and has for each gender in the singular a particular form, viz. : masc. ber, fern. bte, neut. ba$, as: ber SKatm the man. bte grew the woman, ba^ &tnb the child. The plural for all three genders is bte, as; bte 3frtafcett the boys. It is varied by four cases : the nominative, genitive, dative and accusative. It will be observed that the accu- sative singular of the feminine and neuter gender, and the accusative plural are always like the nominative. Declension of the definite article. Singular* Plural masc. fern. neuter. for all genders. Norn, bcr bte ba$ the bic the Gen. beg ber beS of the ber of the Dat. bent ber bem to the ben to the Ace ben bte ba$ the bte the In the same manner, the following words are de- clined, which are often substituted for the definite ar- ticle, viz. : Singular. Plural masc. fern. neuter. for all genders. tnefer biefe btefeS this, that jeuer jerte jetteS that tuetdjer teeldje toetcfyeS which? jeter jebe }et>e3 every btefe these jette those toelcfye which? Definite Article. 1 Declension. Singular. Plural masc. fern. neuter. for all genders. N. G. D. A. biefcr biefeS biefcro btefen biefc biefcr biefcr biefc btefcS this (that) btefcS of this btefcm to this biefcS this. Examples. biefc these biefcr of these biefcn to these biefc these. 3)iefer 2ft ann this man. SDtefe %xau this woman. ■3eiie ftxau that woman. 3eber Sftann every man. 2M(fyen©torf [Ace.) whichstick? 3ebeg $tnb every child. Words £cr $omg the king. bet $ater the father. ber Sftann the man, husband. ber ©ol;n the son. ber ©arten the garden. ber 2Betn the wine. ber ©tod the stick. ber §unb the dog, hound. ber fetter, the plate. (Sorter).*) bie Gutter the mother. tie %xa\x the woman, wife, bie £od)ter the daughter. bte $eber the pen, feather, bie £a£e the cat. £te $onio,tn the queen. unb and. 3a yes. S. 3d) fyaoe I have bu fyaft thou hast er fyat he has fie §at she has eg I;at it has Reading Exercise (Ueoung) 1. $)er SSater unb ber ©ol)n. $)ie SRutter unb bag $inb. £)er ©arten unb bag §aug. 3ener ©arten, jeneg §aug. -3d) Ijafce ben ©tod.**) £>u ijaft bag Staffer. £)er .fonia Ijat bag ©d)log. 2)er $ater f>at ben 2Bein. 2Be%n 2Bein tjat er? 2Betd)eg £ttS ©d)tefj the castle, palace. ba« ®mb the child, bag §aug the house. bag 23ndj the book. bag Staffer the water. 9ton no. ntd)t not. §aoe id) have I? aft bu hast thou? at er has he? at fie has she? at eg has it? *) In this and the following lists of words the article precedes each substantive, that it may be learnt at the same time. It may also be observed here, once for all, that these words preceding the Exercises, are to be well committed to memory, as their signification is seldom repeated when appearing in subsequent Exercises. **) The noun governed by the verb fyaben (to have), and by all transitive verbs must be in the Accusative. — All German monosyllabic substantives of whatever gender are alike in the Accusative and Nominative. 1* 20 Lesson 1. SBaffer? liefer §nnb. 2>tefe ta£e. £)ag $inb biefer (of this) gran. 2BeId)eg $tnb? 3ebeg tint). 2Bel$e grau? 2Beld)er Sftann ^at ben §nnb? SBelcfyen ©tod ^at ber Sftann? (§r ^at biefen ©tod. <&ufga0e. 2. Exercise for translation. 1. The king and the queen. The son and the daughter. The father and the mother. The child has the book. The daughter has the book. The man has the {Ace. bell) stick. I have the wine. The man has the water. This father. This woman. This house. The king has the castle. The queen has the book. Which book? Which house? Which pen? This book; that pen. Every man. I have the (Ace.) dog. 2.*) I have not the stick. The child has the stick. That wine and this water. This man has not the book. Which castle has the (Nom.) king? He has that castle. That mother has the child. The woman has the house. The castle of the queen.**) Has the man the book? Which plate? This plate. The son of the queen. The daughter has the pen. Every mother. Every book. Conversation (©^redjiionng) . Jpabe \fy tie geber? 3a, bn fyaft bie geber. §aft bu bag 23ucfy? $ldn, icfy babe bag 23nd) nidjt. §at ber SBatet ben 2Betn? (Sr §at ben SBein. $r>at bie gran bie £a£e? -3a, fie Ijat bie Safce. 28eld)e f a£e fyat fie? ©te hat bie jwige (young) fa^e. §at bag ftnb ben ©tocf ? SRein, bet SSater bat ben ©tod. 2$elcfyeg ©d)lo§ hat bie .fontgin? ©te fjat biefeg ©djtog. §at biefe gran bag $tnb? Stein, {ene gran §at eg (it). $at ber SJiann ben §nnb? 2)er 2ftann §at ben §nnb ntdjt; er hat bie $a£e. 2Betd)c« 23nd) bat ber ©olni? <5r bat ba§ Sud) ber Gutter. §at bie SJhitter bag 23udj? 9cetn, bie £ocf>ter bat bag S3ud). 2Be(d)e geber Ijat bag $inb? (gg Ijat bie geber ber gran. £>at ber SSatcv bag Staffer? Stan, er bat ben SBetn. SSetdjeg §ang l)at ber iftann? (Sr fyat bag £aug ber abutter. *) All the Exercises are divided into two parts. The second part need not be translated at once, but when the pupil repeats, which should be done regularly after 10 or 12 lessons have been gone through. **) Feminine nouns have all the cases in the singular like the nominative : thus, only the article is declined, G. — ber $ontgm. 21 Second Lesson. (3toeitc Scftton.) On the indefinite Article. (®cr urtfcefHmmte Hrtifei.) The indefinite article is masc. tvx f fern. etnc, ?26w£. Ctlt; it is equivalent to the English a or an, and has also three genders ; but in the nominative, the masculine and neuter are alike, viz. : Cttt fflann a man; CtttC $rau a woman; cm $inb a child. It has the four cases; of course only the singu- lar, as, from its natere, it can have no plural. Declension of the indefinite article. masc. fern. neuter. N. em erne em a or an G. etneS etncr eincS of a D. etnem etncr em em to a A. emeu cine em a The following words, which occasionally take the place of the article, are declined in the same way, and have a plural: masc. fern. neuter. masc. fern. neuter. fetn feme fetn no*) unfer unfere unfer our me in metne mem my be in berne fcein thy fetn feme fetn his, its. 3t)r il)r 3>l;re 3fyr your ^ %*\ their Declension. Singular. Plural masc. fern. neuter. for all genders. N. mem meinc mem my metne my G. metneS metncr metneS of my metncr of my D. me'tncm metncr metncm to my rnetnen to my A. metnctt metne mem my. metne my. Examples. 2Mlt SBvubcr my brother. $eht 93rob no bread. Unfer $ater our father. 3fyr 23ucfy [n.) your book. 2fletne <2 Unfere W pan $fe ir)re Scte djtoefter my sister. Uttter our mother. rb (n.) his horse. C her pen. no followed by a noun is fcin. 22 Lesson 2. Words. (Sin ^rennb m. a friend. eine Srrttdjt a fruit, ein 2lpfel m. an apple. eine ©abel a fork. em 23cmm m. a tree. .„ em §Ut m. a hat. ®tttJKc(fcrn. a knife, em SBffel m. a spoon. «« gebermefler n. a penknife, etn ffiocl m. a coat. «* £ l / l *> n - a »• a horse. em %yiet n. an animal. dfhte 33mme a flower. fd)on fine, beautiful, eine SBirne a pear. alt old. feljr very, eine £iofe a rose. jnng young, cine ©tabt a town. gefeljen seen. get en ©ie nitv give me. ift is. toer? who? roa§? what? obcr or. and) also. n)0? where? 77. 2Btr fyct&en we have §aben toir have we? ©ie fyaben j you have Ijaben ©ie ) have you? (tfyr ijafct) J ye have (fyabt iljr) ! have ye? fte Jjaben. they have, fyaben fie have they? Heading Exercise. 3. 3d) fyabe eine SBfame. ©aft bu meine 23lnme? 2Bir fyaben einen gremtfc. §aben ©ie and) einen greunfc? 2)iefer SSttann ift mem greimb. ©ie (fte) Ijat fein 23rot>. ©ie (fie) I)aben fetnen 2fyfet. 9JMn $tnt> Ijat eine 53irne; eg (it) Ijat and) eine 9?ofe. 3fyr ©ofyn unt> -Stjrc iodjter fyaben jjenen SSannt gefeljen. 1 ) SDte $a£e ift ein Xt)ter. SDtc Sftofe ift eine 23lume. ®eben ©ie mir biejeS 33ud). ©ebcn ©ie mir attd) eine 23Iume. SDiefcd §au3 ift nid)t fd)on. Unfere ©tat>t ift fe^r alt. ^wfgaae. 4. 1. I have a rose. She has a book. You have a 2 ) stick. My brother has a pear. My sister has an apple. His child has a knife. We have no bread. Give me a rose. The father has no horse. A dog is an animal. Which pen has the child? The son has a hat. Who has a flower? My daughter has a flower. Where is your mother? That child has no 2 ) apple. I have no (Ace. m.) spoon. That house is old. 3) Her house is beautiful. My horse is young. Have you seen 1 ) the castle? 2. Give (@eben ©ie) this stick to 4 ) my brother. Give this penknife to 4 ) your sister. The apple is a fruit. The 1) In compound tenses the participle past comes last. 2) Accusative masc. einen — feinen ic. (see the foot-note ** p. 19). 3) Adjectives, when placed after their noun, remain unchanged. 4) The word 'to' indicating the dative, must not be translated. Declension. 23 rose is no fruit, the rose is a flower. You have no hat. Where is your hat? Who has 3 seen imy 2 hat? Give me a knife. Give me also a fork and a spoon. He has not his coat. They have no horse. Where is my brother? Where is the rose of my {Gen. f.) sister? Not every horse is fine; this horse is young. Conversation. 2Ba3 fyaben ©ie? §afcen ©te erne Sftofe? §afcen ©ie em *Pferb? $at ba8 £mb lein ©rob? 2$er (who) Ijat mein ©udj? 2Bo tft meine $eber? 2Mdje8 £>au3 bafcen ©ie? 3ft 3fyr ©ofyn Jung? 23e ift mein ftebermeffer? £at unfere Gutter eine 9tofe? 2Be(d)eS Sfteffer ^t "^ht tint)? 3ft tie SKofe eine $rud)t? SBetdjen ©toe! fyaben ©te? 2Ber Ijat mein ©ud)? §aben ©ie SBaffer? 3ft tie $afce em Str)ier? 5>at 3l)re Gutter etnen ©ruber? 3d) Ijafce etrfe ©fume. 3a, id) Ijabe eine 9?ofe. Deem, id) fyabe fein SPferb , t<$ Ijabe etnen §nnb. S)a3 ftinb ^at fein ©rcb. SDeine ©d)tr>efter fyat betn ©ud). ©te (it) tp nid)t ba (there). 3d) tjabe biefeS §an§. (§r ift feljr jung. 3f)r ©ruber ^at e3 (it). 9cein, fie fyat teine 9£ofe. (£3 f)at fein SWefJer. 9Jem, bie aS flint) fyat 3fyr S3ud). 28ir fyafcen fein SBaffer ; aoer (but) nrir fyafcen SSein. 3a, bie fla^e ift ein £fjier. Sfletne Gutter tyat feinen ©ruber, afcer fie §at eine ©dnuefter. Third Lesson. (fcritte Seftton.) Declension of Substantives. (Sefltnatton ber #au}>ttt>orter.) The German grammarians are not yet agreed on the division of the nouns substantive into declensions, and on the number of these. Some adopt 6, others 5, others again 4 or .3, and even 2 declensions only. This distribution, however, is quite arbitrary ; indeed, in this matter there is much irregularity in German. The reason is, that the language was practised and cultivated by different tribes in various ways before a grammar existed. So they where obliged to accept matters as they were and to make the best of them. Notwithstanding, there 24 Lesson 3. are three fundamental ideas, on which, declension is prin- cipally founded, viz. the gender, the termination, and the number of syllables, and though this system presents oc- casionally also some deviations and exceptions, it offers really far less difficulty than any other distribution.*) We state therefore that each of the three genders has its own mode of inflexion, and further that the mas- culine gender admits of three different forms of declension, the feminine of one, and the neuter also of one. Hence we adopt five declensions, the three first of which comprise the masculine , the fourth the feminine, the fifth the neuter nouns, a few exceptions not included. Our division has the great advantage of enabling the learner, on seeing any substantive, accompanied by its article, to refer it to its proper declension. This is not to be attained by any other system. In consequence we state as follows: 1) The first declension comprehends all masculine and neuter nouns ending in el, en, er, djett and lent. 2) The second comprehends all masculine nouns end- ing in e, and most foreign masculine substantives having the accent on the last syllable. 3) The third contains all monosyllabic masculine nouns and those of two syllabes ending in id;, tg and ling, and a few words of foreign origin. 4) To the fourth belong all the feminine substantives. 5) To the fifth all neuter substantives not ending in z\, en, er, cfyen and (etn (see 1). Table of the endings of the five declensions. Singular, masculine. feminine. neuter I. II. III. IV. V. N. — - — e — — - 1 singular -(-) G. — -3 — en — e^ (3) — - 1 no — e« («) D. — - — en -(e) — - j change — - J at all z (0 A. — - — en — *) Most German grammarians adopt only two declensions, the so-called strong declension and the weak one, the former comprising all nouns having in the genitive case 8, the latter those having in the genitive and all other cases en. Despite the great differ- ence in the plurals, this arrangement may suffice for Germans, who know from habit the inflexion of each word; but it is in- Declension. 25 Plural. I. II. III. IV. V. .v. .. - — en » e -> t — n or en — t _^_er G. .>• — en - e •• e — n or en — e » cr D. .. -n — en « en " en — n or en — en » ern A. _-> — en » e _j^* — n or en — c » er These marks _j '_ indicate the modified vowels, a, b f Ot it* Remarks. Before we present the declensions themselves, we think it well to give the following general hints, which may fa- cilitate their study. 1) The genitive case in the singular of all masculine nouns (except those of the 2nd decl.) and of all neuter nouns without any exception ends in &*) (or e$). 2) The accusative singular of feminine and neuter word* is always like the nominative. 3) The accusative singular of the masculine nouns not ending in e is also like the nominative case. 4) The vocative case, in either number, is always under- stood to be like the nominative without the article; it will therefore be mentioned only once. 5) In the plural the nominative, genitive and accusative are always alike. 6) The dative plural of all declinable words terminates with It. 7) All root-nouns (i. e. without the prefix @e*) ending in e form their plural in Ctt without modifying their vowel. 8) All feminine substantives remain unchanged in the singular. 9) Most monosyllables having rt f o f it, or Hit in their root, modify in the plural this vowel into a, o f it, or tin. 10) In all compound nouns only the last component is declined according to the declension it belongs to. First declension. To the first declension belong all masculine and neuter nouns ending in el, CM and cr, besides all diminutives in d)cn and Icilt, which are all of the neuter gender. The only change of termination which nouns belong- ing to this declension undergo, consists in taking $ for sufficient for foreigners, as it does not enable them to ascertain the inflexion of the other cases. *) In a simple $, when polysyllabic, in e$ when monosyllabic. 26 Lesson 3. the genitive singular, and It for the dative plural. This termination tt however is common to all declensions in the dative plural. Words terminating with n do not re- quire an additional n. In the plural, most words belonging to the 1st de- clension modify the three vowels a, 0, U into a, 0, U- Nouns with other vowels or diphthongs remain un- changed. 1) Examples of masculine nouns. Plural. bte S3rftber the brothers Singular. N. ber 33rttber the brother G. beg 33vut>er*8 of the brother ber SBviifeer of the brothers D. bent S3rubev to the brother ben 33viiber-U to the brothers A. ben SBvttber the brother bte Sriiber o brother! o 23vitber! the brothers o brothers! N. ber ©artcn the garden bte GJfivtcn the gardens G. beg ©arteng of the garden bet ©flrten of the gardens D. bem ©arten to the garden ben ©arten to the gardens A. ben ©arten the garden. bte ©arten the gardens. In the same manner are declined : £>er better the father. ber 2tyfel the apple. ber <5d)litfjel the key. ber fylii^ei the wing. ber £efjel the spoon. ber (Sua, el the angel. ber §tmmel (the) heaven. ber Sefyrer the teacher. ber ©d)ulcr the pupil. ber ©ptegel the looking-glass. ber 9ie$en the rain. ber ©ttejet the boot. ber Metier the plate. ber spammer the hammer. ber $ogel the bird. ber ©dmeiber the tailor. ber ©d)t»agcr the brother-in-law. ber (Sitglanber the Englishman. ber Joiner the Roman. *ber 9Ibier*) the eagle. *ber Sropfen the drop. *ber $nd)en the cake. *ber Scaler the painter. *ber Shnertfoner the American. riur. bte 23ater, bte Spfel, bte ©d)(uffet, bte ©d)iiter, bte ©tiefel, bte Setter, bte 2>i3get, bte (SngtStiber, bte Slmertfaner. 2) Examples of neuter nouns. Plural bte Jycnficr the windows ber ^enfter of the windows ben fyenftertt to the windows bte genfter the windows. *) Those marked with * do not modify their vowel in the plural, as : the eagles, bte Stbler ; bte $ud)ett, bte 2Jiater :c. Singular. JS T . bag f^enftcr the window G. beg genjtetS of the window J), bem fjenfter to the window A. bag fyenfter the window. 1 st declension. 27 Declension of diminutives. Singular. N. bag 23aumd>en the little tree G. beg 23aumd)en£ of the little tr. D. bem 33aumd)en to the little tr. A. bag 33aumd;»en the little tree. Such neuter nouns are bag $euer the fire bag SJieffer the knife. bag SBetter the weather. *bag Staffer the water, bag ©tlbet (the) silver. Plural. btc SBiUttttfljen the little trees ber 23aumd)en of the little trees ben 93aumd)en to the little trees bie 23aumd)en the little trees. ba§ $upfer (the) copper. bag Softer the convent. bag Wlittel the means. bag $etld)ert the violet. bag 2ftabcfyett the girl, maiden. mem 3iwtmer my room metneg 3tmmerg of my room metnem ^tmmev to m 5 r room Ittcttt dimmer m 7 room. 3) Declension with the indefinite article. masc. neuter. N. ettt Wiener a man-servant G. eineg 2)tenerg of a servant D. einem £)iener to a servant A. CtttCtt 2)tener a servant. Compound nouns of the 1st declension (see p. 25 ; § 10): 2)er ©rog 'cater the grandfather. Gen. beg ©rogtoaterS :c. bag ^eber'mefjer the penknife. Gen. beg gebermefferS. ber ©»rad)iefyver the master of languages, ber §aug'fd)lu|let the house-key. ber Jjucj'fccgel the bird of passage. PL bie Bugfco^et. bag ©(fylaf'jimmer the bed-room. PI. bie ©djllafttmmer. Observations. 1) The following 10 words originally terminating in en, now very often used without it, belong also to the first de- clension; in the plural they do not change their vowel. ber grteben or grtebe peace, ber SBillen or 2BWe the will, ber $ctfen or $elg the rock, ber ©amen or (Same the seed. ber 23ud)ftabe or 23ud)ftat)en the letter of the alphabet. ber 9?ctmen or 9camc the name. ber ©tauten or@Iaufce the faith, ber ^unfen or $unfe the spark, ber §aufen or §aufe the heap, ber ©ebanfen or ©ebanfe the thought. Declension. N. b er tauten or -iftame the name PI. btc Sftrttttett the names G. beg SGamenS of the name ber -iftamen of the names D. bcm ^tauten to the name ben tauten to the names A. ben teamen the name. bie iftamen the names. 2) The following words are declined in the singular according to this declension, but admit of an irregularity in the plural by taking It. See the 9th lesson. 28 Lesson 3. 2)et Salter the peasant. bet 23atyet the Bavarian, bet better the cousin, bet 9?ad)bat the neighbour, bet ©tacfyel the sting. bet ^antoffel the slipper, ber ©e&atter the god-lather. bet 9ttugfel the muscle. bet ^tofeffot the professor. bet £>of'tOt the doctor. Gen. beg SBauetS, beg betters, beg 9faxte ftenftet (pi.) beS^un* merg. £>et SHenet beg 2lmettfanetg. 2)ie£tovfen beg 9£egeng. ©eben em Septet. Wltin <5d)n>aget. $)etne SBtiibet. 2)etne Sd)liiffel Q>/.). 3d) l;aBe ben ©djliiffel beg 3tmmetg. St Ijat bag 9tteffet feineg 23tubetg. 3)te2Iblet finb SBoget. SDie Spfel finb auf (on) bem Seller. 3)ag Sttabdjeit ift in etnem Softer. 2Bo ift bet ©dmeibet? St tft ntd;t fytet. ^tufgafie. 6. 1 . The garden of the father. The gardens of my brother. I have two spoons. The Englishman has two servants. We are in the room (Dat.). My father is in the garden. Our teacher is old. The man has two hammers. Is your brother-in-law a doctor? These cakes are not good. Where are the birds? They are in the garden. Give me your (Ace.) plate. A bird has two wings. The wings of the birds. The angels of (the)*) heaven. Have you seenf) the rooms of the American? 2. The castle has [a]*) hundred (fyunbett) windows. The book of the pupil. The plate of the girl. We are Americans. You are Europeans. The violets are in the gardens. The pupils are at school (in bet ©d)U(e) . The rooms of my father. I have no silver and no gold. Give me the key of my room. The name of the painter. The benefit of (the) peace. The *) Observe that a parenthesis (. . .) encloses a word to be trans- lated or an annotation, whereas brackets [. . .] signify »leave out«. +) See the foot-note 1) p. 22. 2nd declension. 29 house of my teacher. We have no fire. God is the creator of the heaven and (of the) earth (unb ber (Srbe). Conversation. SSeldje* (what) ift ber 9kme ©ein Sftame ift ©d)nubt. biefe* (Sngtanber*? §aben ©te bie 23i3get gefefyen? 3ft ba* (that) 3f)r ©arten? S55o fhito bte ©d)liifjet mcraes dimmer*? 2Ber (who) ift biefe* 2tfabd)en? 3a, id) fyafce fte (them) gefer)en. (5*iftber©artenmeine*;iftad)bar*. §ier {tub fie. 2$er ift biefer junge Sftann? ©inb ©ie ein Scaler? •3ft er etn (Suropaer? SBer ift in bem ©arten? §aoe id) ba* 23u$ (tyre* $ater*? ipaben ©ie ben ©tod meine* 23ruber*? §aben ©ie ba* §an* be* ©pa* nier* gefefyen? SSer ift tranfl •3ft bet ©yieget ffein? ©tc ift bte £od)ter etne* (5ng* lanber*. (Sr ift ber ©olnt meine* better*. 9cein, id) Bin (lam) fem9Jcaler; id) bin ein ©anger. 3a, er ift ein ©panter. SDie £od)ter meine* Sefyrer*. 3a, ©te fyaben e* (it). 9ceut, id) Ijabe U)n (it) nid)t. 9cein, id) Ijabe fetn §an* nid)t gefeljen. $)er Wiener be* Sftater* ift franf . 9cein, er (it) ift grog unb fdjon. Fourth Lesson. (Sicrtc Seftton.) Second declension. This declension contains another series of masculine words, viz. : 1) all those ending in e. Its inflection is very simple. All the cases, both of the singular and plural, are formed by adding it, without altering the vowel in the plural : Example. Singular. Plural. N. ber $nabe the boy btc Shmben the boys G. be* $nabcn of the boy ber $naben of the boys D. bem $ nabcn to the boy A. ben Sfrtaben the boy. Thus are declined: S)« %\\t the monkey, ber £>cr/fe (£)d)*) the ox. ben $naben to the boys bie $naben the boys. ber £on?e the lion, ber §?alfe the falcon. 30 Lesson 4. bet 33ote the messenger. bet ©tBe the heir. bet 9?effe the nephew. bet Sitefe the giant. bet tBtlabt the slave. bet 3ube the Jew. bet ;J$atl)e the godfather. bet fttrte (§itt) the herdsman bet §etbe the heathen. bet §afe the hare. bet Stctoe the raven. bet ©atte the husband. bet 93ebtente the man-servant. bet ^fratljofe the Frenchman. bet ©ad)fe the Saxon. bet Sftltffe the Russian. bet ^Pteitge the Prussian. bet iiitfe the Turc. (See the 12th lesson. § 9.) Plur. bte Slffert, bte £)cfyfcrt, bte Screen, bie 9kften, bte ^effen, bie §afen, bie gtanjofcn, bte SRuRen, bte ^teugen etc. Note. Further all adjectives used substantively when preceded by the definite article : £>er Stlte the old man. I ber $rctnfe the patient (sick man), ber SKeifenbe the traveller. | ber ©elelnte the learned man. Gen.: be8 2Hten, be3 SttanUn, beg Sftetfenben; pi. bie ©etefyrten. 2) The following words, though monosyllabic, are also subject to this mode of inflexion, doubtless because in course of time they have dropped the letter e. Example. Singular. Plural. N. bet ©tctf i) the count, earl bte (Srafett the counts G. beg ©tafen of the count bet ©tafen of the counts D. bem ©tafen to the count ben ©tafert to the counts A. ben ©tafen the count. bie ©tafen the counts. Thus : SDer §elb2) the hero. bet r^ittft 3 ) the prince. \^ ip i *• **■ bet Sat the bear. bet Sftenftf; man, mankind. Singular. Gen. beg §elben ic. beg §ittften k. beg §ettn k. be§ fatten k. beg S^oren k. be^ S3dten ic. Plural. bte §elben :c. bte Sittftett :c. bte §etteu *c. bte fatten ic. bte £r;oten :c. bte 23citen :c. bieStfteufdjenjc. beg 9ftenfd)en. 3) All masculine nouns from other languages, not ending in ct(, an, aji or r, 4 ) and having the accent on the last syllable, are declined according to this mode of inflexion : 1) Old German: ber ©ratoe — ber §erre. 2) Anglo-Saxon: haeleth (dissyllabic). 3) ber giirft is like the English root first = ber (Srjte. 4) Such as ber ©eneral', Officer,' :c, which belong to the 3rd declension ; see p. 35, 4. 2nd declension. 31 Example Singular. JV.ber©tubent' the student G. be8©tuben'ieu of the student D. bem©tubenten to the student A. ben ©tubenten the student. Such are : 2)er 2lbbofat' the lawyer. t>er ^amerctb' the comrade, ber (Sanbtbctt' the candidate, ber -pfyUofopfy' the philosopher, ber SDufat' the ducat, bet ©otbctt' the soldier, ber SDconarcfy' the monarch, ber hornet' the comet, ber planet' the planet. Plural. bie Stub en' ten the students ber ©tubenten of the students ben ©tubenten to the students bte ©tubenten the students. ber ^rafibent' the president, ber £i)rann' the tyrant, ber 3fefuit' the Jesuit. ber Regent' the regent, ber ©tenant' the elephant, ber 2)tantcmt' the diamond. ber ^oet' the poet, ber (S^rtft the Christian, ber $rtnj the prince. Plur. bie Slbfccfaten, bte ©otbatcn, bte (£l;rtften :c. Words. £)er $aifer the emperor, bte ©eerbe the herd, flock, bte Saute the aunt, ber £orper the body, ber ®rted)e the Greek. S. 3d) ton I am bu toft thou art er tft he is fie tft she is PI. nrir finb we are ©te finb ) you are (tfyr fetb) j ye are fie filtb they are ber 23rief the letter. ber (Sfef (1st decl.) the as3. fennen ©te? do you know. id) gebe I give. tuctr was; ^atte had. 23m id; am I? toft bn art thou? tft er is he? tft fie is she? finb tirir are we? finb ©ie / „ hetb m \ are you? finb fie are they? Reading Exercise 7. £)a8 Sfteffer beg tnaben. 3d) gebe bent $naben ba8 23rob. fennen ©te ben $naben? 2>a3 23ud) etne§ ©tnbenten. 2)er $orper eme§ Ste^anten. £)te Smgel ber Stbler unb ber ^alfeu. 2)te ©otbaten be3 $atfer3. 2)te dtaben finb SSiSgeL £)te fna&eit fyaben $t»et Sftaben unb bret §afen. £>te Surfeit fyaben ©flatten. !Die tofacfen be3 taiferS finb SKuffen. £)a3 ©otb be§ ©rafen. £)er SBrief be§ ftitrften. SDte 9Kenfd)en finb fterbftcfy (mortal). $>er 23vuber be3 ^rinjen Albert. JlufaaOe. 8. 1. The brothers of the boy. These boys are brothers. The name of the student. The sister of the count. The aunt 32 Lesson 5. of the prince. The knife of the soldier. The letter of the president. The emperors Caligula and Nero were (ftaren) tyrants. Do you know the princes? The child has a raven. The Americans have a president. I have seen the diamonds of the prince. The old (alteit) Greeks had (fatten) slaves. Give the gold to*) the Jew. 2. We have seen a comet. Are you Saxons or Prussians? The body of a giant is very large. These two boys are my nephews. Those soldiers are Russians. The Turks are no heathens. We are Christians. These boys are Jews. My comrades are ill. We have no oxen, we have two asses. Give this (Ace.) letter to*) the messenger (Dat.) of the eount. Conversation. §aben ©te ben ©teptjanten ge* fefyen? £aben bte $naben ben Soften, ben £tger unb ben 23aren ge* f efyen ? 2Ber ift btefer Stfann? 3ft btefer ©tubent em ^renge? 2Ber ift fein $ater? £teben ©te (do you like) bie Stffettl flennen ©te btefe ©olbaten? £aben ©te etnen §afen? 3ft t ber SBebtcntc be3 ©rafen etn Uranjofc? §aben ©te etnen SReffen? ©tnb btefe fnaben 3uben? 2Bo ftnb 3tyre tanteraben? §aben bte fallen gtiigett 2Bar ber §etb etn Stofie? 2Btr Ijaben t^n (it) Ijente (to-day) gefeljen. Unfere $naben Ijaben ben Soften nnb ben 23aren aefe^en ; after (but) ntdjt ben Sfctger. Wt ift ber 23rnberbeS ^rafiben'ten. 9?etn, er ift etn ©aebfe. ©etn SBater ift etn $btoofat'. 9?etn, id) ttebe bte Hffen ntdjt. 3dj !enne fte (know them) ntcfjt. Qa, id) fyahe bret §afen. 9ton, er ift etn (Snglanber. 3d) Ijabe gftet 9?effen. ^etn, fte ftnb G>Ijrtften. ©te ftnb ntcfyt Ijter (here) , fte ftnb jn §aufe (at home). Set, aUe (all the) SSogel ^aben SKigel. 9?etn, er ftar etn ©rtecfye. Fifth Lesson. (giinfte Scftum.) Third declension. This declension contains the greatest number of the masculine substantives. In the Singular, the Genitive is formed by adding c$ or 3 to the nominative; in the da- ') to is not to be translated, the dative is meant. 3rd declension. 33 tive, the word remains either unchanged or takes an c; the accusative is like the nominative. All the Plural cases take e, and the dative an n, besides the e. More- over, most of them having a, o, U or ou in the root, modify it into a, b, ii or an. To this declension belong 1) all masculine monosyllabic nouns. Examples. Singular. JV. ber gifdj the fish G. beS gtfcfycS of the fish D. bem gtfdj(e) to the fish A. ben gifdj the fish. Plural btC fytfrfje the fishes ber gifdje of the fishes ben gtfdjett to the fishes bte gtfcfye the fishes. N. bev ©elnt the son G. be§ (Solnt(c)S of the son D. bem ©ol)tt(e) to the son -4. ben ©ol)n the son. bte S8f)tte the sons ber <2>6fyne of the sons ben ©ofynett to the sons bte <5ofyne the sons. N. ber SBaum the tree G. beS 5Baum(e)3 of the tree D. bent 33autn(e) to the tree A. ben S3annt the tree. bte SBailttte the trees ber SBaumc of the trees ben SBaumen to the trees bte 33&ume the trees. Note. Concerning the inflexion of the genitive and dative sin- gular, ti and c, we may remark that the e is only euphonical and in common conversation often omitted, especially in the dative. We may say b c 3 ©ofyn§ for b c S @ofyne£; bem © o $ tt for bem ©oljne ; one sounds as well as the other ; hut we never say beg %\\§i, bcS $fab« or bc8 ^UfcS, this being intolerably harsh. Ob- serve however that with monosyllables the Gen. ti is preferred. Such are : bet £tfd) the table, bev ©tufyl the chair, ber S3erg the hill, ber £>ut the hat. ber ^ing the ring, ber grennb the friend. ber getnb the enemy, foe. ber %\i the branch. ber ©aft the guest, ber gug the foot. ber glug the river, ber gttd)S the fox. ber SBolf the wolf. ber 3 a 5 n tbe tootn - ber £> a v n the cock. ber ©turat the storm, ber £fourm the tower. ber £vannt the dream. ber 2BaH the rampart, ber $oyf the head. ber Son the sound, tone, ber £ofyn the reward. ber died the coat, ber ©tod the stick, ber %an% the dance, ber 33rte{ the letter &c. Plur. Me £tfd)C, bte ©tft^U, bte Sfync, bte 23era,e, bte grcunbe, bte glitffe, bte ©tccfe, bte SBriefe etc. OTTO, German Conv.-Graramar. 34 Lesson 5. Note. The following nouns do not modify their vowel in the plural: !Der % vm the arm. bet £ag the day. bet £>nnb the dog, hound. bet ©djul) the shoe. bet ©tab the degree. bet £)acb,3 the badger. bet 2a<$}$ the salmon, bet 5lat the eel. bet §uf the hoof. bet $fab the path, bet ©toff the stuff, bet ^5unlt the point. Plur. bte 2ltme, bte %a§e, bie §nnbe, bie ©djnlje &c. 2) When such masculine roots have a prefix before them, they are declined in the same manner as if they were simple ; but it must be observed that , being no longer monosyllabic, the euphonical C in the genitive and dative singular is generally omitted. This is also the case with compound nouns of this declension. Examples. Singular. N. bet 93e-fefyl' the order G. be« SBefe^l* of the order D. bem 23efel)( to the order A. ben SBefdjl the order. Plural. N. bte23efefyte the orders G. bet JBefe^le of the orders D. ben Sefefylen to the orders A. bte SBefefyle the orders. Such are : £)er ©efang the song, air. bet ©ebtcmdj custom, use. bet SSotfycmg the curtain, bet Unfatt the accident, bet 2In8gang the issue. Singular. bet 2fyfef*banm the apple-tree be§ 5lpfe(bcmm$ of the apple-tree bem Sfyfelbctum to the apple-tree ben Styfetbcmm the apple-tree. Plural. b t e 2fyf el b a n m e *) the apple-trees bet Sfyfelbanme of the apple-tr. ben Sfyfelbaumen to the apple-tr. bte Slpfelbdnme the apple-tr. bet Dotting the ear-ring. bet §cmbfd)nlj the glove. bet Stro^Ut the straw-hat. bet Uebettod the great-coat, bet Setertag the holiday. Gen. be3 ®efang$ r be8 SBotbangS, be8 STuSganaS tc. Plur. bte SBotfyange, bte ©ebtandje, bte §anbfqn^e tc. 3) This third declension comprehends further the masculine derivatives ending in t$, id), at and ling, as : Singular. N. bet #ontg the king G. beS $8nty* of the king D. bem ^ontg to the king A. ben $onig the king. *) not 9tyfe(68ttnu. Plural. bte ftBtttgC the kings bet $ontge of the kings ben $ontgen to the kings bie ^ontge the kings. 3rd declension. 35 Such are: ber $aftg the cage, ber £e:pptd) the carpet, ber (Sfftg the vinegar, ber §onig (the) honey. ber ^Pfitftc^ the peach, ber ifto'nat the month, ber bungling the youth, ber §artng the herring. Plur. bte $afige, bie Stto'nate, bte 3itngltnge, §aringe :c. 4) Further some nouns of foreign origin ending in a\, an, ax, aft, ux, ox and on, as: Singular. Plural. N. bet ^alaft' the palace hit tyaWftt the palaces G. beS $alctfte£ of the palace ber ^alafte of the palaces D. bem ''palaft to the palace ben ^ataften to the palaces A. ben ^3a(aft the palace. bte ^alafte the palaces. Such are : bet ©enerat' the general. ber 9ftoraft' the swamp, ber ^arbtnal' the cardinal. ber 2l(tar' the altar. ber 2lbmtraf the admiral. ber Dfftjter' the officer. *ber %$otaV the vowel. ber Orenabter' the grenadier, ber $ apian' the chaplain. *ber ^oftttton' the postillion. Plur. bte ©enera'te, bte Rotate, bte 2tttare, bte Offtjie're k. Words. $)er 2Ba(b the forest, wood. bte ■iftafyrmtg the food. ber ©cfylaf sleep, ber Sob death, ber <3tord) the stork, ber better the cousin. ber 2Btnter winter, ber %xo]tf) the frog. toeig white, lang long, brei three, trier four, mtt [dat.) with, aber but. Reading Exercise. 9. 2)te <5c^ne be§ Waters. £>te gtfcfye be§ fttuffeS. 2Tuf (on) bem £tfd)(e). 2Inf ben Sanmen. £>te 23aume be$ 2BalbeS. $)ie 93bget finb in bem 2Batb. £>ie 3 a ^ ue ^ Soften. 9#tt bem ©tocf(e). Stttt ben ^iigen. 3)tefe (Stiifyle finb alt. 3olbaten finb auf ben 2BatIen.. £)te ftnfte ber §&fyue Ijaben <3pornen (spurs). $)te ^alafte ber $ontge finb grog. 2©ir fyaben bte Sepptdfye be3 ^ontcjS gefefyen. §aben <3te bte 2Bolfe unb ^it^fe ntdjt gefefyen? $)te ftrennbe metneS Waters finb fyter. $)te §unbe betneS betters. £>er <5d)laf tft ba§ 23tlb (image) be3 £obe8. §ter finb Sfyre ie U{er) of the rivers. The name of the officer. The herrings are fishes. Do you know those two generals? Yes, I know them (id) femte fie) . The windows of the palace. In the pal- ace of the king. Conversation. 2Bo fmt) bte gifdje? ©ie fint> in ben ^liiffen. 2Bo ftnb metne bret ©olme? ©te ftnb in bent ©avten cber (or) in bent §cf (yard). ^etd>e^ief>atber©$netber? (Sr $at bte 9?ode be« ©ffoterS. ©inb btefe ©tiU)le ait? SDtefc ©ttU)le ftnb nen (new). $on toem foremen ©te? (Of ^ivf©red;en©onmifeven^rennben. whom do you speak?) 2Bie ©tele (how many) Sftonate? 2)vet donate. 2Bie ©tele £age? ®ret obev ©ter Sage, ©©redjen ©te ntdjt son (of) 9?em, nnr fpredjen toon feinen bent ©olme beS SeljrerS? ©djulern. ^te ©tele £inmnefyat bte ©tabt? ®tefe ©tabt Ijat brei SDjiirme. 2Be(d)en ©tod fyabeit ©ie? 3cfy fyabe ben ©tod be$ ©rafen. §aben ©ie feme $rennbe? -3fd> fyatte (h ad ) $*©ei ^reunbe; aber fte finb tobt (dead). 2Bie ©tele guj?c fyat etn§nnb? (Sin §nnb Ijat ©ter &uj$e. 2Ba3 fyabett ©ie gefetyen? -3fd> ^abe bte Suc^]e nnb bie 2Solfe gefefyen. §aben bte ©d)itter etnen $eter* ©ie Ijaben jioet $eiertage. 2Bo ijt bev ©enevai? (Sr ift in bent ^alaft be$ $ontg8. Sixth Lesson. FEMININE SUBSTANTIVES. Fourth declension. The 4th declension comprises all the substantives of the feminine gender. In the singular, feminine words remain unchanged in all the cases. In the plural, they take either e, or n or etu 4th declension. 37 1) The true monosyllables take c in the plural, at the same time softening their vowel. Example. Singular. Plural. N.hfA.^xt §anb the hand bit £attbe the hands Gen. ber $cmt> of the hand ber §cmfce of the hands Dat. ber §cmb to the hand. ben §cinben to the hands. The other true monosyllables are the following 28: £>te Sljct the axe. fete Hngjt fear, anxiety. bte 23anf the bench, toe S3raut the bride. fete SBruft the breast, toe gauft the fist, bte ffrutfyt the fruit. bte ©anS the goose, toe ©ruft the vault, bte §aut the skin. t)te £foft the cleft. t>te ^raft the force, strength, fete .M) the cow. fete $mtft the art. toe %au$ the louse. toe Suft the air. bte Sltjt the pleasure, desire. toe SJtagt) the maid-servant. toe Sftactyt the power. bte 2ftait$ the mouse. toe Sftadjt the night. bte fftottj the distress. bte 9iu§ the walnut. bte ©cut the sow. bte te Sampe the lamp. ber finger the finger. id) fnd)e I seek (for). ber Sftann the man, husband, id) fanfe I buy. retf ripe. bie 2ftild) the milk. id) oertanfe I sell. bie Xante the pigeon. id) lentie I know, rotlj red. S. id) UcBc*) I like or love P/. toir lieBctl we like or love bit ftebft thou likest, lovest (t^v liebet) j (ye) like or er liebi he likes, loves ©ie liebcit j you love, you like, fie lieM she likes or loves. fie UebCtt they like or love. Sieben ©ie? do you like? Reading Exercise. 11. 2)ie Jpanbe beS SJiab&enS. 2>ie ©tragen biefer ©tabt. $)ie fjebern ber ©anfe. £)ie £pren ber $ird)e. £)ie ©tcibte fmb grog. 2)ie fjrarbe ber 9?ofe. S)ie f^tiigel ber SBtene finb ftetn. $)er $nabe ift in ber ©dmte. £)ie $trd)en fmb grog. 2)ie SRofen unb bie Silt en fmb fd)bne (pretty) SBhmten. -3d) Uebe bte 23imen. £ieben ©ie bie 9ftif[e? £)ie 2)?abd)en liefccn bte 93Iumen. $)ie 235gel tyaben $ebern. £>ie finger ber £cinbe finb fletn. 3ri (in) bem SBinter fmb bie Wa&jtt lang. -3d) Itebe bte Sftanfe nid)t; abet (but) id) Uebe bte 53ie-nen nnb bie Stanben. ^ufflaDe. 12. 1. The hands of the ladies. I like the walnuts. The churches of the town. The boys have no pens. The forehead of the man is high (l)od)). I like the roses and violets. The smell (ber ©eritd)) of the roses and violets is sweet (angenefym) . Our hopes are vain (eitel) . We know (fennen) the love of this mothers. The boys are in (the) school. The ladies are in (the) church. In three hours. The soldiers have wounds. Do you know these plants? The cherries are red. I know the daughters of the countess. 2. You know my intentions. The boy has two flowers in his hand. These pens are not good (gut). I love my sisters. The cats catch (fangen) mice. These pears are not ripe. My neighbour sells lamps. The lips are red. We sell our cows and our oxen. These two girls are sisters. My [female] neighbour sells potatoes (^artoff eltt) . The mothers love their daughters. The girls have no needles. The pears are the fruits of the pear-tree (23irnbcmnt8) . Conversation. Stamen ©ie ben Sffemen biefer (£$ ift bie 5riebrid)8ftrage. ©trage? 2Bo finb 3fyre $naben? ©ie fmb in ber ©<^ule. *) This is the present tense of the verb liefcen, and all regular verbs are conjugated in the same manner. 40 Lesson 7. 2Bo fmt meine Vetera? 28er fangt (catches) 9)caufe. 233 ie totele ©djtoefteni Ijat 3fyre Gutter? SSerfaufeu ©ie $irfd)en? 2Bie (how) toicle ©ante fyat ein 3M41 SBon toeldjer garfce ftut tic 8iM>en? §at ter ©oltat SBuntcu? £teben ©ie tie $afceu? 2Bo fiitb tie ®ameu? SBeldje SBlumen lichen ©ie am meiften (best)? 2Bie totele ©tunfceit lebte fcaS £int> (did the child live) ? 2Bie ftnt tie ©trageu ter ©tatt? 2Bo (eben (live) tie gifdje. 2Bo fiut tie ©anfe? 28er toerfauft fartoffehi (pota- toes) ? ©ie liegen (lie) auf tent Xifd% £)ie ftat$m fangeu 2ftaufe. ©ie fyat jtoei ©d)i»cftern unt tret SBritfcev. 9letn, aber roir fcerfaufen 23irnen. (Sin SDtenfc^ Ijat $tt)ei §ante unt jn>ei $uj$e. £)ie 2tppen fmt rotlj. 3a, er fyat mete SBunten. 3d) liebe fie (them) nid)t. ©ie fint in ter $ird)e. 3d) liebe tie SRofen, tieSilien unt tie SBetfcfyen am meiften. (58 lebte trei ©tunten. ©ie fmt fdjmufcia, (muddy). ©ie leBen in tent SBaffer. 2)te ©anfe unt tie (Snten (ducks) fiut in tent §of (yard) . 90Mnc -iftadjbarin berfauft Rax* toffeUi. Seventh Lesson. NEUTER SUBSTANTIVES. Fifth declension. • It includes merely the nouns of the neuter gender, except those ending in cl, Clt, Ct, djett and citt, which belong to the 1st declension. In the singular they borrow the mode of inflexion of the third declension, viz. the genitive is formed by adding e$ or 3, the dative by adding c, which may how- ever be omitted in ordinary conversation. In the plural, a distinction is to be made 1) between words of two and more syllables, and 2) monosyllabic words. The plural of the former ends in C, that of the latter in er with a modified vowel. 1) Example of a dissyllable. Singular. Plural. N. ta« ©efdjeiif' the present btC^cfrfjCtlle the presents, gifts G. te§ ©efdjenfS of the present ter ©efdjente of the presents D. tent ©ejcfyenf(e) to the present ten ©efcfyentetl to the presents A. ta$ ©efcfyenf the present, tie ©efdjeufe the presents. 5th declension. 41 Such are : $)ag ®efeg the law. bag ©efprad) the conversation. bag ©efd)aft the business, bag ©etoeljr the gun, musket. bag ©ebtrcje*) the mountain, bag ©emalbe*) the picture. I>a$ @ebaube the building. bag jjeujjmjj**) the testimony, bag ©efyetmntft the secret, bag 33efenntnij$ the confession. Plur. SDtc ©efefce, bte ©efd)ci 2) Examples of Singular. N. bag $Utb the child tf. beg tinbeS of the child D. bem tinb(e) to the child A. bag $utb the child. Plural. N. bte ®tttbcr the children G. bet $tnber of the children D. bcil Siubcril to the children A. bte $tnber the children. Such are : bag 2lmt the office. bag SBIatt the leaf. bag SBltd) the book. bag (St the egg. bag S3t(b the picture, portrait. bag 9?eft the nest. bag §ul)U the hen, fowl. ba§ §e(b the field. bag £l)at the valley. bag 2Bort the word. bag ftalb the calf. bag ®Ietd)iitJ3 the parable. bag -$ameel' the camel. bag 3nftrmnent' the instrument. bag^onipUment'the compliment, bag papier' the paper. bag detail' the metal. bag SBittet' the ticket. bag GEoncevt' the concert. bag portrait' the portrait, bag Stneal' the ruler. fte, bte ®en>efyre, bte Sftetatte :c. monosyllables. Singular. bag S)orf the village beg $)orf(c)8 of the village bent SDovf(e) to the village bag 2>orf the village. Plural. bte Siirfcr the villages bet 3)Srfet of the villages ben jDorfern to the villages bte SDorfer the villages. bag Steb the song. bag ©djlofj the castle, palace. bag ®elb the money. bag 2antm the lamb. bag §aug the house. bag 2&etb the wife, woman. bag Dad) the roof. bag $tetb the dress. bag £anb the country, land. bag 23anb***) the ribbon. bag ©lag the glass. Plur. bte Winter, bte flatter, bte 53itd)er, bte defter, bte (£ter, bte SBorter, bte §ctufer, bie §iu)ner, bte Scinber :c. *) Neuter words which end in the Singular in e, do not add a second e in the plur., as: pi. bic ©eMrge, bte ©emalbe 2C. **) All nouns ending in nt§ form their plural by adding e, even two feminine as: 2)te tantntfl, knowledge; plMc fteuntntffe. 25tc SBeforgnifj, apprehension; pi. bte SSeforgntf fe. 3)a« 93ebihfmfk the want; pi. bte SBebiirf ntf fc. ***) 2) er 3Saub m. the volume, has its pi. bte 23anbc (3rd decl.) 42 Lesson 7. Note 1. The same mode of inflexion is followed by all com- pound words ending in tfylUU, two of which are masculine: 2)ag $aifertf)Um the empire. I ber 9tad)tt)um the riches. bag gitvftciltfyum the principality. | b ev 3rvtl)Um the error. Piur. bie gurfteutfyumer, bte SReicfotljumev, Die Srrttyiimer jc. Note 2. Some monosyllabic neuter words, especially those ending in r do not take cr in the plural, but c only, nor do they soften their vowel: 2)ct8 $aax the hair; pi. tote £>aate. bag Satyr the year; pi. "Die Sal) re. bag Wletr the sea; pi. bte 9ft e ere. bag SDjier the animal; />/. "Die £fyiere. (For the complete list of them see p. 49, § 9.) Note 3. The neuter word bag §er$ (the heart) admits of an irregularity in the singular and plural: Sing. N. hf Ac. bag §evj; G. beg $erjen8; D. bem §erjen. P/wr. „ „ „ bie ©erjen; „ ber ©crjen; „ ben |>er3en. Words. 3)ie 9lufgafce the exercise. toevloren lost. bag §crn the horn. leid)t easy, light. ber Pouter the Roman. ritnb round, flein small. liegen to lie. id) fet)e I see. arflll greeri. neu new. finben to find, gefuuben found. fd|mu^ig dirty, fyod) high. fingen to sing. ttnetoiel how much? td) !aufe I buy, gefauft bought, biele many. fprecfyen to speak. bie nteiften most. Reading Exercise. 13. £)a« 33iib beg tfinbeg. SDte Stlbev bev tinber. SDic ftarbe beg SBlatteS. 2)te flatter ber ^ftanjen ftub griin. SDie 23aume t>eg ftelbeg tragen (bear) griidjte. S)ie Sftauern jeneg ©djlofjeS ftub fyod). £>er tfihtig fyat mele ©c^loffer. ®ie SSb'rtcr ber 5luf* gafce finb lcid)t. -3d) fud)e bie ?Smmet. 2Biv fyaoen bie $teiber gefauft. 3n ben Sfteflevn bev 33ogel liegen (Eicr. 3)ie (Snglanber iefcen (live) in bent £anbe ber $reil)ett. 2Bo (where) liegen bie {ace. masc.) through the forest (wood). £)ltrd) fete Qt, when denoting time, always take the dative. Prepositions. 45 2Sor bent ^enftet {dat. neut.) before the window. 23or*) etner ©tnnbe (dat. fern.) an hour ago. Examples with the accusative (motion). -3d) gefye an bag ftenfter I go to the window. 3d) gefye liber ben $Iujj I go over the river. 3d) gelje tjtuter bag §aug I go behind the house. ©teflen ©ie eg cor bag genfter put it before the window. 4) Prepositions with the genitive case: 2Bafyrenb during. I ftatt or anpatt instead of. toegen on account of. Examples. SBi'djrenb beg SKegeng during the rain. ftatt or anftatt etneg 23rtefeg instead of a letter. 5) Several of the above prepositions may be contracted with the definite article, in which, form they are in very general use. 5t«t for an bent, as: ant ftcnfter (rest), at the window. an '8 for an bag, as: an'g Senfier (motion), to the window. anf'g for anf bag, as: aufg Sanb (motion), into the country. tnt for in bent, as: tm SBtnter in winter. t* r jj for in bag, as: tn'g SBafjer (motion), into the water. beint for bet bent, as: beint £t)or (rest), near the gate. burd)'g for burd) bag, as: burdj'3 Stlter [ace), through the fire. t)om for Con bent, as: com Ttaxtt [dat.), from the market. Dor '3 for cor bag, as: Cor'g f$fcnfter before the window. itber'S for iiber bag, as: iiber'g Sfteer across the sea. jnm for ju bent, as: $um 23ater (I go) to the father. IttX for JU ber, as: jur Gutter to the mother. Words. 2)er §of the yard. ber SStntcr (the) winter. bag 3Dad) the roof. ber Sftantet the cloak. ber trieg (the) war. 2BtH)etm William. ber $iabe (2. decl.) the raven, gefatien fallen, leben to live. bie £aube the pigeon. bte 9iid)te the niece. ber ffrtefcen peace. bte $atte the cold. bag Sett the bed. fptelen (to) play^ bag §orn the horn. id} effe I eat. fltegen to fly. bag ^rufyftud* breakfast. faufen to buy. tear was. bag 9ftittag*effen (the) dinner. $n §aufe at home. Reading Exercise. 15. 3n bent §ofe (tm §of) . 2Iu3 bem ©arten. 2Inf bem 2)ad). !Dte £aube fttegt auf bag (anf'g) Qadj. 3m $rteg nnb hit grteben. *) See the foot-note *) p. 41. 46 Lesson 8. £)te Winter ftotelen toor bent §au$. $or bet 9?ad)t. 3)er $ogel ft^t (sits) aitf bent SBaitm. £>ie gifdje leben im SBaffer. 2Kein §ut tft (has) ut'S 2Baffer gefatfen. £>a§ gebermeffer be$ ftnaben liegt auf bent £tfd)(e). £)er §mtb itcgt unter bent Sett. SDtefe Sitter finb fur metnen Secret. 3l)re Softer tft bet (with) metner ©djtoefter. £)te ©olbaten ftored)en toon bent £ueg. 2)a8 (that) teat toafyrenb be$ trtegeS. 3d) bletbe (stay) ju §aufe toegen be$ SftegenS. £)a§ SBctt ftefyt (stands) neben ber £l)itre. Urn trier Uljr (at four o'clock) bin id) ^u §aufe. jlufaaOe. 16. 1. Out of the room. Near the castle. I eat with a spoon. After the rain. The oxen butt (ftofjen) with their horns. We see (fefyen) with our eyes (5lugen) . The boys go (gefjen) through the forest. The pupils speak of (toon) the school. We speak of (toon) the weather. I was in the street during the rain. William is on the tree. Go (gefyen ©te) into the yard (Ace). The boy has (tft) fallen into the water. The tree lies in the water. My penknife is in my pocket. Against the door. Put (ftecfen ©te) your penknife into your pocket. My cloak hangs (Ijangt) behind the door. I have seen many flowers in the field. 2. The eggs lie in the nests of the (Gen.) birds. There (e$) was a raven among the pigeons. Before (the) breakfast. We play after (the) dinner. He was in his room. The table stands near the window. Before (the) winter many birds fly (put: fly many birds) across the sea. We stay (bletben) at home on account of the rain. The dog runs (laUft) round the house. Those apples are for my niece, and these pears are for my son. The count was at home at (urn) three o'clock. 2 Two 3 days iago. Conversation. 2Bo ftfet ber $oael ? (gr ftfet auf bent Qad) beS £>auf eg. 2Bo tft SBUljelms (£r tft im ©arten ober im §of. 2Bo tft metn Sttantel? (5r Ijangt gutter ber Satire. 2Ber Ijat metn gebermeffer? (£8 liegt auf bem £tfd). §aben ©ie metnen §ut gefeljen? 3a, er tft unter ben£ifd) gefaUen. xBofyev' (whence) lommen ©te? 3d) fomme toom ffiaxlt (market) . 2Ba8 fyaben ©te gefauft? S^abe Stof el unb ^cuffegefauft. SBoIjtn' (where) gefyen ©te? 3d) gefye auf (to) ben $carft. SBofyin' fttegen totele 23ogel? ©te fltegen tiber'g -Jfteer. 2Bamt (when) fttegen fie fort $or bem SBtnter. (fly off, leave) ? 2Barum (why) fltegen fie fort? SSegen ber Mte beS 2Btnter8. ©inb ©te nod) (still) im 33ett? 3a, tdj bin franf. S33o Ijaben ©te btefe SSetldjen 3d) fjabe fte in bem $etb ge* (pi.) gefunben? funben. Irregular Plurals. 47 §aoett ©te feme (none) in -fteht, id) fanu fehte (cannot — 3fyrem ©arten? any) fiitbeu. $itr toett (whom) ftnb btefe <3te fint> fiir baS $inb meineS $irf<$en? 9?ad^arS. $on roem IjaDett ©te btefe ©e* $on mem em SSatcr unb fcott met* fdjertfe (p/.) erfyaltett (received)? iter SDhitter. $ott roa$ fpredjett tie ©olbaten ? ©te fprecr-ett torn ^rteg (war) . 3ft 3l;re Gutter jit §aufe? 9ton, fte ift tud)t ju §aufe, fie :ft auSgegangeti (gone out). Ninth Lesson.*) Irregularities in the formation of the plural. Most of the exceptions, which in other grammars are included amongst the declensions, are irregular only in the plural. We therefore think it proper to range them all under one head. I. Irregular plurals of the first declension. § 1 . The following substantives take tt in the plural without modifying the vowel: $)er 23ater the Bavarian, bet Salter the peasant, ber better the (male) cousin, ber ©ebcttter the godfather. bet yiadfi ax the neighbour. ber ©tadjet the sting, bet ^antoffel the slipper, ber 2ftu8fel the muscle. Plur. $)te latent, bte 23auent, bte 23ettern, bte 9£ad)barn k. Note. The word ber CEfyaraf'ter has in the pi. bte (Sljarafte're. § 2 . Words taken from the Latin in or with the ac- cent on the last syllable but one, form their plural in oren t 3)er 3)of'tor the doctor; pi. bte £)ofto'rett. ber ^rofef'for the professor; pi. bte ^rofeffo'rett k. Note. 2)er 9flajor' the major; pi. bte 2ftajo're (3rd decl. 4). II. Irregular plurals of the third declension. § 3 . Eight words take in the plural en instead of t X $)er <&taat the state, ber ee**) the lake. Plur. 2)te ©taatett, bte ©traljlen, bte ©d;mer$ett, bte ©ecn jc. *) The 9th and 10th lessons may be reserved for some weeks later. **) Notice: There is also a feminine word bte ©ee the sea (= bag 2Jicer) which has no plural. 43 Lesson 9. § 4. The following masculine nouns take tl in the plural, at the same time modifying the vowel: j£)er 9ftatm the man, husband. bet 2Sdb the forest. bet Sctb the body. bet ©etft the mind, ghost. bet SSittm the worm. bet Sftartb the edge. bet ©ott the God. bet £)tt the place, bet $otmunb the guardian, ber Sftetcfytfyum the riches, bet 3tttf>um the mistake, error. Tlur. 3)ic 9ttantter r bie 2Balbet, bte Sei&er, bie SButmet k. III. Irregularities of the fourth declension. § 5. Thirty feminine monosyllables form their plural in en, without modifying the vowel: !5)te %xi the kind, species. bte 33cu}tt the road. bie 23J)Ut the trace, track. bte Xyat the deed. bte £rad)t the costume. Die Ul;t the watch, clock. bte SBafyl the choice. bie SBelt the world. bte SBafyt the election. bie >$0§l the number, figure. bte £dt the time. Tlur. $)te S3 a^ next ((5ifenual;nert railroads), bte 23cmfen, bte ©ratten, bte&tftett, bte $fltd)ten, bte ©djtacfytett, bte©d)utbett, bte Sfyaten, bie UJjten, bte 2BeIten, bte 3a$ ©cfylafjtnmtet the bedroom, bet §etbe the heathen. Irregular Plurals. 49 Me ©onne arm poor, retcfy rich, trie ($rbe the earth. feeriiljmt celebrated, tmmer always. fyett or flat clear. Beading Fxercise. 17. £>te ©tctdjeln ber 53tene. $>te ^3antof}eht ber ©rafm. £>te SBanern ftnb ntd)t reid). £>te $rofeftoren liefer ©cfyule ftnb be* riUnnt. 2)ie Sfrafylen ber (Sonne finb ftarm. £>ag $tnb (eibet (suffers) grofce ©cfymerjen. Set finb triefe SDiaimer? 2)ie SSurmer lefcen in ber (5vt>e. 3)iefe Ufyren finb feljr fletn. 3d) ferine nietne IjSfUdjten. 2)ie £)ornen ber 9io[en fint) flein. SHefeg 2anb ^at iriele (Stfenbatmen. JtttfgaDe. 18. Where are- my slippers? Your slippers are in your bedroom. The students praise (loben) their professors, but the professors praise not always their pupils. Those forests are very large. Do you know these men? I have seen two tall (gvojje) men. I know my duties. These women are very poor. The peasants have cows and oxen. The beams of the sun are very warm. The cocks have spurs. The water of the lakes is clear. Do you know the names of the gods of the heathens? The roses have thorns. The United (fcer* etntgten) States of (Don) America are very rich. IV. Irregularities of the fifth declension. § 8. Seven neuter words form their plural by taking en: £)ag 33ett the bed; pi. trie sBettett (also SSettetj. bag §emb the shirt; pi. trie £emt>en (also §ember). bag §er$ the heart; pi. bie ^erjen. bag £)fyr the ear; pi. bte Sfyren. bag 3luge the eye; pi. bie 2lu^en. bag (Snbe the end; pi. bte (§nt>en. bag 3ufeft the insect; pi. bie Snfeften. § 9. A few monosyllabic neuter words do not follow the general rule in forming their plural: they take C instead of it, and do not alter the vowel. 1) Those ending in r; they are eight: bag $aar the pair, couple. bag 9tol)t the reed. bag Stfyter the animal, beast. bag Xfyor the gate. Plur. 2)ie§aare, bieSafyre, bieSfleere, bie £Ijtere k. Note. A second r would render the sound too harsh. OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 4 bag §aar the hair. bag $eet the army. bag Safyr the year, bag SD^eer the sea. 50 ' Lesson 9. 2) Those which would be confounded in the plural with similar words ending in cr*) ; they are four: £)ag ©d)af the sheep. bag (Setl (£au) the rope. bag ©djtff the ship. bag ©ptel the play, game. Plur. 2>te ©djafe, bie <5d}ijfe, bie ©ptele :c. 3) Also the following take e**) : £)ag 33etn the leg. bag 23etf the hatchet, bag 33rob the bread, bag SBoot the boat, bag 3)mg the thing. bag ^eU the hide, skin, bag s $funb the pound. bag ©tft the poison, bag §eft the copy-book, bag 5od) the yoke, bag ft'itte the knee, bag Soog the lot, fate. bag 9?efc the net. bag $ferb the horse. bag Dted)t the right, bag diet) the deer, roe. bag Dtetd) the empire, kingdom. bag 9iog the horse, bag (Satj the salt, bag ©djtoem the pig, swine. bag 2Berf the work. bag (Stiicf the piece, bag Reua, stuff - bag ,3iel tne a ^ m ^ en d> goal. P/wr. 3)te 93eine, bie 33eUe, bie *Pferbe, bie SBerfe jc. § 10. The following neuter words of tftco syllables take er in the plural: 3)ag ©emittfy the temper. bag ®efd)led)t the gender, bag ©einad) the apartment. bag ©etuanb the garment, bag Sftecjtmettt 1 the regiment, bag ©pttal' the hospital. Plur. $)te ©emitter, bie ©efd)Ied)ter, bie ©etoanber, bie Sftegtmettter, bie ©pitaler :c. §11. A few neuter words terminated in a( and turn derived from the Latin, take ten in the plural: bag Capital' the capital, fund; pi. bie $ aptta'ften. bag SRineral' the mineral; pi. bie SUUnera'Uen. bag ©tubium the study; pi. bie ©tu'biett. T. Additional remarks on the plural. § 12. Several nouns have a double form of the plural, when their meaning is different: *) For instance, the plural of @d)af regularly formed should be ©djcifer. Now there is such a word: pi. bie @ri)afer meaning the shepherds. Thus: ber ©etler = the rope-maker; ber ©differ the boatman; ber ©piefer the player, pi. bie ©pieler the players. **) Most of them have a double vowel which does not admit of a modification. Where one has been dropped in the German orthography, it appears still in the English words, as : SBrob from bread, ^pfunb from pound, @d)af from sheep, &c. Irregular Plurals. 51 <™„ »u«* I the ^>ench; pi. bte SBSnfe. SDtc 33anf - j the bank; ^ w San!ciL t^o aws*\ I tlie ribbon; js/. trie 23anber. 2)ag23anb*) = { the bond ^ ]g. , ble ^^ bag fcing the thing; j,/. [ *g |FJ£ (contemptu(msly) . 1 ' ( the vision; pi. bte ©efwfyte. bag mxt the word; j* } S|? IS? " BepMa1 ? WOrd,L ' -^ (bte XLi3orte = expressions. bag £anb the country; pi. bie Sanber, and (poet.) bie Sanbe. § 13. There are a great many German substantives which, from their signification, cannot be used in the plural; whilst others are wanting in the singular. To the first kind (no plural) belong: 1) The names of metals : SDa« ©o(b gold. I bag ©fen iron. ba§ <5tlfcr silver. I bag SBlet lead, &c. 2) The names of substances and materials: 5)er §ontg honey. bag 2Bad)g wax. bag gletfdj meat. bag Witty meal, flour, bie ©erfte barley. ber er gug the foot; as: fitnf Sltfc (not gftgc) lancj five feet long, ber £oU the inch; as: met 3 oil ^ re ^ four inches wide, ber @rab the degree; as: ^umn^ta, ©rat) $alte 20 degrees cold. ba$ $funb the pound; as: bret ^funb fyx&tx three p. of sugar. ba$ $aar**) the pair; as: jroet -faar <3d)itfye two pair o/" shoes. ba$ jfcu^enb dozen; as: 6 ©ttfcenb §anbfcfynfye six dozen gloves. baS 23ud) the quire; as: je^n 33 ltd) papier ten quires o/" paper, bet* Sftcmn the man; as: fiinffyunbert iftann Snfanterte 500 foot. bag ©tiid the piece; as: neim ©titcf Sotd*- nine pieces of cloth. § 16. The following words have no singular: £}te Sente people, bte Soften ) the expense, bie llttfoftett ( the costs, bie Setnfletber the trowsers. bie (Sltern the parents, bie drummer the ruins. bie Sttoffett the whey, bie £ruppen the troops. bie (Smnmfte the revenue. bie ^evien the holidays, bie ©efdjnrifter the brothers and sisters. § 17. Substantives compounded with „matm" mostly change it in the plural into * t e U t e : ***) 2>er §anptmann the captain; pi. bie §auptleute. ber §anbct$mann tradesman; pi. bte §anbet§teute. bet ilaufmann the merchant; pi. bte $auf(eute. ber ab(td) hurtful, tapfer brave, ber $affee coffee, ttef deep. fran$ojtfd) French. Man blue, bte ©d)lad)t battle, ber $ranfe the sick (man). bte 23iette the bee. Reading Exercise. 19. £)te Snfeften ftnb ben $riid)ten ber S3aume fdjabttd). "Die £fyiere fjaoen ftette. $)te §aare beg 9ttabd*-en8 ftnb fang. $)te fran* joftfcfyen §eere ^aBen tapfer gefc^ten (fought bravely) . £)te SD^eere *) Feminine words are used in the plural, as : S3ter (Sflen Surf* four ells or yards of cloth; 3cl/-n §{af($en SBettt ten bottles of wine. **) (Sin tyaat also signifies a few, as: tin tyaax £age a few days. ***) (Sfyemamter are husbands; (Sljefeute married people. Lesson 9. 53 fmb tief. $)te $naben Ijaben ifyre §efte ttertoven. £>ie 2Ber!e ber Sttdjter fmb beriifymt. 3Dte 9ttmeralien Uegen in ber (Srbe. $)ie franfen finb in ben ©pttatern. $)er $rembe fyat ^tcei ^aav ©tie* fel unt> t)rei ^3aar ©dmfye. 93tele ^auftente fmt) ret^. 3d} fyabe fimf $funb 3 ucfet mi *> taet ?funb taffee gefanft. 3d) femte btefe Sente nicfyt. SDie SIngen be$ $inbe8 fmb btan. Jlufga6e. 20. These parents have lost all (atte) their children. We have sheep and pigs. My neighbour has no horses. The towns of that country are very small. The rich (vetcfyen) people live in the towns, or in (cmf) the country. The knives and hatchets are sharpened (gefd)liffen) . Open (Ceffnen ©ie) your eyes. We have two ears. In the hearts of the children. The bees are insects. The salts are minerals. The boy was five years old (alt). The sailors have lost four boats. The ships of the merchants are lost. In our town [there] are two regiments [of] riflemen (©dulfcen). I speak of (ton) the battles {Dat.) of the Romans (Corner). Conversation. $ennen ©ie meine ^ad^oavn? 3$ fenne 3fyve *ftad)barn mm Sfyre -iftadjbavinnen. 2Ba« cerfaufen btefe 23ancrn? ©ie fcerfanfen fartoffeht. 2Bo fmb bie ^antcffeln meiner ©ie finb in tfyrem (her) ©d)taf* Gutter? jintmer. 2£er ift ba (there)? 2>te 2)oftoren finb ba. Steben ©te 3fi)re 53ettern? -3d) liebe atte meine SScttcra. 2Ber fmb btefe $errett1 (§3 (they) finb fanftente. 28o finb bte banner? ©ie finb im ©arten. 2Ba3 baben bte i)iofen? ©ie ijaben £)ornen. 2Ba8 fyaben bie §ai)ite? ©te fyaben ©pornen. 2Bie mete 2lugen tyat ber 90? enfd)? ^Der 9Jicnfd) I;at j^et Sfttgen. 2Bte mele Dfyren I?at cr? (§r fyat jWcl Ojren. ©tnb bte 53tenen 93ea,en sftein, fie finb 3nfeften. ©inb 31)te -Pferbe alt? 9?ein, fie finb jnna. 2Ber finb biefe Seute? ©ie (or e§) finb 5Imerilaner. $ennen ©ie bie SBerfe btefeS -3a, feine2Berfe finb fetjr beritlmtt. 3)td)ter§? 2Bie finb bie 2D?eere? ©ie finb fefyr gvcjs unb tief. Wo leben bte $ffen? ©te teben in ben 2Balbern. 54 Tenth Lesson. On the Gender of Substantives.*) (33on bcm ©efd)(ed)t ber ^cmptroorter.) The gender of the German nouns substantive having been established in course of time, not according to fixed principles, but rather by custom and arbitrary use, gen- eral and precise rules cannot be given. This circum- stance renders the study of the German language some- what more difficult than it otherwise would be. The knowledge of the gender however being indis- pensable, we recommend the pupil, when learning a Ger- man substantive, carefully to acquire at the same time the article denoting the gender. We shall therefore ac- company each with its corresponding article. The gender of a substantive may be known either by its signification , or by its termination. A. Masculine (mcmn(tcfy) are: 1) All appellations of men and male animals: $>er SSater the father, ber $omg the king, ber £efyrer the teacher, master, ber ©djnetber the tailor. bcr 2Boif the wolf. bcr 53ar the bear. ber §afyn the cock, ber fibler the eagle Except the diminutives in dj c n and I c t n , which are all neuter, as : bad 5Baterd;en, ba8 ©ofyniein the little son; bag £al?nd)en chicken. 2) All the substantives ending in t f denoting male living beings (see p. 29 & 30) : $)er $nabe the boy. I ber §afc the hare, ber %\\t the monkey. I ber 26tr»e the lion. 3) The names of the seasons, months and days: SDer SBinter winter. ber Sflontag Monday. ber ©ommer summer. ber ^rettacj Friday. ber Sttcri May. ber Sftorgen the morning. ber Suit July. ber 2lbenb the evening. 4) The names of stones : 3)er jDtamcmt' the diamond. I ber 9tubht' the ruby, ber $tefet the flint. | ber <2>tem the stone. 5) Most words ending in en (not cfyen), which are not infinitives**) y as: *) See the footnote *) p. 47. **) These are neuter, see C. 4, p. 56. On the gender. 55 £)er ©arteil the garden. ber 9?egert the rain. ber 23oben the floor, ground. ber Sftitcfen the back, ber -iftamen the name. ber $aben the thread. Except: 2) a 8 $tffen the cushion; ba3 SBecfen the basin; bo8 5Baty>en the coat of arms. 6) Five words ending in double et 2)er ©cfynee the snow. I ber $affee coffee. ber ©ee*) the lake. | ber STfyee tea. ber $tee clover. 7) All derivatives ending in tQ, id), ing and ling: 3)er $ontg the king. I ber §arut$**) the herring, ber £epptcfy the carpet. | ber Simgltng the youth. B. Of the feminine gender (roetfcttcfy) are: 1) All female names and appellations: $)te $rau the woman. l bie tonight the queen, bie £ocfyter the daughter. | bte 3tmme the nurse. Except the words: 2)a8 Setb the wife; ba« ftrauenjtmmer a female person, a woman; bae 2Jiabcfyen the girl, and bag graulein Miss; the two latter on account of their diminutive terminations. 2) All dissyllabic substantives ending in e (notee) , with their compounds, de?ioting inanimate objects (S. p. 54, 2) : £)ie S3htme the flower, bte <2>d)llle the school, bte <3tunbe the hour. bte ©tvage the street, bie Qh'be earth, bie Stebe love. bte $trfd)e the cherry, bie ©trne the pear, bte (Sicfye the oak. bte £cuute the fir. bte (S^>re the honour. bie Jnlje***) the help. Note 1. Hence the sun is feminine in German; bie ©ontte; but the moon is always masculine : b c r 3)2imb. Except the three words : baS Stugc the eye ; ba« (Snbe the end ; ba8 ®rbe the inheritance, in which words the final e is only added for euphony, for Slug, (§nb, (Sib. Note 2. Words like ber 9?ame, ber ©ante K. (see p. 27, Obs. 1) cannot be considered exceptions, as their true form ends in en: ber 92amen, ber ©amen jc. 3) All derivative nouns formed with the final syllables ttf) ( 0K 1 rei the cry, scream ; ber 33ret pap, are no derivatives, but roots. 56 Lesson 10. jDte ©d}metd)elet flattery, trie ©ftafceret slavery, tie ftveifyeit liberty, tie ©tfyonfyett beauty, trie Breuubfd)aft friendship, bte £)anf6artett gratitude. trie Uefcerfefcung the translation. bte £)offnuna, hope. bie ©d)aferilt the shepherdess. trie ^oefte' poetry. trie $erfoit' the person. bte Sflajeftat Majesty. Except: ba$ ^etfdjaft the seal, and ber $ornung, an old word for gebruar February. 4) The few nouns ending in ad)t, ud)t, ulb and unftr £)te ©d)lac^t the battle, bte 9fod)t the night, tie SBltdjt the bay, gulf, trie §iltb the favour. t>te ©ebutb patience, bte ©d)ulb guilt, debt, trie SBernunjt reason, bte Hnhmft the arrival etc. C. Of the neuter gender (f$$H$) are : 1) The letters of the alphabet: bag 33, bag 2ft, bag 3. 2) The names of metals, except: ber &tafy the steel. £)ag ©ofb gold. I bag (Sifen iron. bag <5tlber silver. " bag SBlei lead. 3) The names of countries and places : grattfretd) France ; Sftom Rome. — The article bag however is only used, when an adjective precedes: bag fatfyoltfcfye ©panteu Catholic Spain; bag retake bonbon :c. Except : b t c ©cfytoetj Switzerland ; bte £ilrfet Turkey ; see p. 64. 4) The infinitive mood, when used substantively: $)ag (Sffett eating, bag Srtnfen drinking bag Seben life. bag Sftaudjen smoking. bag Sefen reading. bag SSevguiigen the pleasure. 5) All diminutives in djett and lettl, without exception : $)ag Sftabdjen the girl. I bag £tnbletn the baby. bag §dugd)en the little house. | bag SBliimdjen the little flower. 6) Most collectives beginning with the prefix (&t and which have for their vowel e, t, d, 0, ii, as: £)ag ©ebircje the mountain. I bag ©cbaube the building, bag ©emalbe the picture. I bag ©efdjaft the business, bag ©etuolf the clouds. I bag ©efa^enf the present. Exception: bic ©efd?td)te history. NB. Masc. with ©e are: ber ©ebanfe the thought; b e r ©ebraucfy the use; ber ©efcfymad taste; bcr ©cmdj the smell. Fern, are : b i e ©efafyr the danger ; b t e ©ebint birth ; bte ©etoalt power; bte ©eftalt shape; btc ©cbulb patience, and a few others. 7) Substantives ending in nt§ are partly neuter, partly feminine ; their number however is very small. On the gender. 57 neuter. £)ad 3 eu $m$ the evidence, bad 23ea,rabntft the funeral. bad SBeburfntjs the want. bad ©ebad^tntjj the memory, &c. feminine. $)ie ^tnfternig the darkness. bte ^enntutg knowledge. bte 23etriibnt§ affliction, bte (Srlaubntg permission, &c. D. Gender of compound substantives. The gender of compound substantives is generally that of the last component: bte §)audtfyitre the street-door (from bad §)aud and bte Zljutt) ; bad £)tntenfa§ the ink- stand; ber ^aftdbraten roast veal; btc SStnterjeit winter. Except: b t e ©rofcmutfy generosity , b t c ©auftmutfy meekness, and b te SDentutfy humbleness (from bcr Sflutfy disposition of mind, courage). Note. 2)ie Sutnuort, the answer, is not a compound word. E. Double gender. The folio wing nouns have a double gender on account of their different meaning. masc. £)er 23cmb the volume. ber 23auer the peasant, ber (£f>or the chorus, ber (Srfoe the heir. ber §eibe the heathen, ber §Ut the hat. ber feefer the jaw. ber $Mlbe the customer, ber Setter the conductor, ber ©d)ttb the shield, ber ©ee the lake, ber £fyor the fool, ber ^erbtenft the gain. fern, or neuter. £> a d 23cmb the ribbon, tie, bond. bad S3auer the bird-cage. bad (£f)or the choir. bad (Srfce the inheritance. bte §etbe (or §atbe) the heath. bte §Ut (the) heed, guard. bte liefer the pine (a sort of fir) . bte $mtbe knowledge, news. bte Seiter the ladder. bad ©cfytlb the sign (of an inn)-. bte ©ee the sea. bad £l)or the gate. bad SBerbteuft merit. F. Formation of female appellations. Most appellations of male individuals allow a female appellation to be formed, by adding the syllable in: fern. masc. £)er $ottta, the king, ber fturft ) .. ber $rtft 3 i the P rlnce ' ber iftlakx the painter, ber 9iad)fcar the neighbour. ber ^itnftter the artist, ber (Sngldnber the Englishman bte $imigtn(u)*) the queen. bte ^itrfttn ) ' , bte ^ritiaeffin | the P rincess - bte Sttatertn the female painter, bte ^adjbarin the « neighbour, bte ^iinftlertn the female artist, bte (Sngtanbertn theEnglish lady. *) In the plural all these nouns double their n: flomgtnnen. 58 Lesson 10. 1) When monosyllables, jDer ©rctf the count, ber $od) the cook, ber £mnb the dog. ber 2Bolf the wolf. they modify their vowel: bte ©rtifm the countess, bte ^od)tn the female cook, bte §iinbtn the bitch, bte SBotfin the she-wolf &c. 2) If the masculine ends in t, this letter is rejected : bte Muffin the Russian lady. bte Sfranjofttt the French lady, bte Sonrin the lioness. %tx Sftuffe the Russian, bet $ran$ofe the Frenchman, ber Sotoe the lion. Exception: ber 2>mtfd)e the German, fern, bte 2)eutfd)e the German lady. (See also the Note 1, p. 6t> ) 3) When the gender of persons or animals is denoted by different words, the syllable in is not added: 3Vr SSnt \ the master > Mr -> £>ex £err j the gentleman . ber better the father. ber ©ofytt the son. ber ©ruber the brother. ber £%nut, JDnfel the uncle. ber Dieffe the nephew. bev better the cousin. ber Sfrtabe the boy. ber bungling the youth. ber -Sungcjefefl the bachelor. * ber 23rauttgam the bridegroom. ber 2Bittroer the widower. $)ie Srau ) the mistress, wife, bte £)ame j the lady. bte Gutter the mother. bte STodjter the daughter. bte ©d^roefter the sister. bte Xante the aunt. bte -Rtcfytc the niece. bte Safe (CEoufine) the cousin. ba8 9ftabd)en the girl. ba§ ^rauletn (the) Miss. bteSungfer (Sungfrau) the maid. bte SBraut the bride. bte SBtttroe the widow. $)er £tger the tiger, ber SBtnter {the) winter. bie j&dt (the) time, bte jDidHerut the poetess. tin ©deafer a shepherd. Words. ber ©artner the gardener, ber ©cfyauftneler the actor, bie $iirje (the) shortness, ber ©tern the stone, fycttte, fatten had. Reading Exercise. 21. SDcetne (Sl;re. 3ene ©trafje. Unfere §offnung. 3erte £anne ift ^od). c S)Karm. 2Btr fatten etnen £)iamanten. §aben ©te bte gitrjim gefer)en? ©te tft fefyr (very) fd;on. 2)iefe$ ^rauertjtmmer tft fcl;r jung. Unfer £)r)etm unb unfere £ante fyaben eiu ©d)Icfj in ©pmtten (Spain) . 3Der ©artner fyatte etne &ofe ; bte ©artnerin Ijatte eut rotljeS (red) 33anb. ©eben ©te mtr btefen 23anb fm.J. $)te $rau Ijatte eut §au3cfyen unb eut ©arisen. jUfgaBe. 22. 1. My teacher. His friendship. The count and the countess. This man is a painter. That lady is a princess. Lesson 11. 59 My father is your neighbour. Your aunt is my neighbour. Here is a lion and a lioness, a tiger and a tigress. This woman is a widow. Where is the cook [f.)t My master is old. The baby is young. (The) winter is cold. This diamond is beautiful. Here is also a ruby. My sister is a shepherdess. This oak is very (fefyr) old. Give me a cherry. Which youth (A, 7.) is your son? 2. The friendship of my [female] cousin. The earth is round (rnnb) . The love of the mother. (The) iron is a metal. (The) gold is also a metal. The little house [dim.) . The little horse. A little plate. The shortness of (the) time. Have you seen (gefefyen) the actor and the actress? My daughter is a poetess. I have seen the bridegroom and the bride. My uncle is a bachelor. His niece is very young. Is it a he-wolf or a she-wolf? It is a he- wolf. Conversation. 2Bo tft mem -fteffe? §ier tft er. 2Ber fyat mem ©tocfcfyen? Sfyr tint) I)at e8. 28er tft biefer 2Kann? (Sr tft em timftter. >Ber tft btefe £)ame? ©te ift erne SDtcbterin. ©inb ©te ein ©anger? SRein, id) bin fein ©anger ; meme %xa\x (wife) ift erne ©angerm. §at 3fyt Ojetm em §an§? 3a, er I;at ein §au3d)en. §aben ©te bte S3rant gefefyen? 9ton, id) babe bte Sraut nic^t ge* fefyen. £)er 53rauttgam tft fyter. 2Bo tft bte 23rant? ©te ift franf (ill). Oft ba8 ©olt> em ©tern? ^ein, baS ©olb tft ein detail', ^paft bn ben $imftler gefe^en? 3a, unb audj bte ftimftlerm. -3ft biefer Winter fait? Wetn, er tft ntdjt fefyr fait. §aben ©te etnen §mnb? -3d) fyabt einen £mnb unb erne §iinbm. 2Ber Ijat em ©djlojj? 2)te giitftin fyat ein ©cfylog. 3ft 3fyr £)fyetm ein 3unggefett? 9tein, er tft ein 2Bitm>er. 2Ber ift fyter? 3)te ©djaufyteterin tft fyter. 3ft btefeS Xfyter etne Sonrin? Sftem, e3 ift etne £tgerut. £at ber ©artner metn 23ncfy? 9tat, bte ©artnerm fyat e£. Eleventh Lesson. Declension of (Personal) Proper Nouns. ((Sigenncmten.) 1) The inflexion of Proper Nouns of persons should strictly speaking be formed without the article, and simply by the addition of 3 for the genitive. 60 Lesson 11. Examples. JV. $la'to Plato. G. ?lato'» D. $tato A. $lato. §omer' Homer. §omer'3 §omer £omer. ©cfyitt'er Schiller, ©djtUer'S ©fitter ©djttter. Examp les of Christian names. JV. Snbnng Lewis (or ber 8.). G. Subtotg'S*) (or be« Subnng.) D. 8nbtmg, (or bem SnbnnaJ A. 8nbnug, (or ben Sitbtutg). grtebrtd) Frederick. ^riebrtdj'S (or beS ftriebrtd)) §rtebrtcb (or bem grtebrtd)) grtebrtd) (or ben ^rtebridj). Such are: ©eorg George. I $arl Charles. I §etnrta§ Seben Sefu the life of Jesus. 3)te Sefyre 3efu (Sfyrtftt the doctrine of Jesus Christ. Note 2. The word ©ott (God) is considered as a proper aiame and declined without the article, as follows: JV. ©ott. G. ©otteS of God. D. ©ott. A. ©ott. 5) As in English, the proper name in the genitive without the article often precedes the other noun: ©d)tfler'3 SBerfe the works of Schiller. §ome'r'8 Slia'be the Iliad of Homer. dmt'uen'8 nnb Sttofct'S ^anbfdmfye Emily and Rosa s gloves. Note. The use of the apostrophy with Christian names is not .general, but it should never be neglected in family names. 6) In the dative case, masculine names generally re- main unchanged We say: bet 5>omer, ©on €>d)tfler, ju <§otfje, nnter 2fo,quftu$ *c., not: bet bent §omer, t>on bem ^du'fler JC With Christian names, however, the article is often employed ; we may say : ©eben ©te btefe$ 93ndj bem Staxl, bem Subhrig, bem ^rtebrtcfy, which is better than the old form : $arflt, Subtotgen. 7) The accusative of masculine names should be used, like the nominative, without the article: 3err Mr. ; grew or s D?abame Mrs. ; grfiutetn Miss. ; (t>te) $rcut SBefcer ber $ran 2Beber ber %xau SBeber bie §rau SBeber. 62 Lesson 11. or ber $omg, bie $omgm, ber ®eneraf *e., the latter is de- clined, while the proper name remains unchanged, as : N (ber) §err ete the sixth. bte Slta'be the Iliad. rufe or rufen ©ie call. bie £ante the aunt. geftem yesterday. e$ it. bet 9fto'nat the month. tear was. and) also. Beading Exercise. 23. $)er £mt §etnrtd)'S or ^etnri&'S £mt. £)te 23itd)er 2Cit* Betm'S or SGBifljelm'S 23iid)er. Sorb Srouofiam'S 9?ame. -3d) Uefce Sorb S3t)ron'§ ©ebtdjte. §aben ©te ©djtueV gelefen? -3d) ijabe ©djitter'S ©ebtdjte gelefen. -3d) benfe an Strife, ©ie benfen an Sftarte. §ter finb 2tteranber §nmboIbt'3 Srieffr. ©ara'3 Sttntter ift franl. gfrtebridj 2BtiI)eIm'S ©ofyne. -ftad) bem £obe fart'8 beS ©rogen. 2>a$ Seben §etnrtd)'§ beS SSterten. 3d) ^abe bie Garten be§ §errn Hamilton unb ber graulem ©djntibt erfyalten. taben ©ie (ben) Sftnbotf gefefyen? Diufen ©te (ben) Robert. 2)et teg be8 3lbmiral$ -ttelfon bet Trafalgar ift beriUjmt (celebrated). JtufgctDe. 24. 1. Frederick's hat. Lewis' books. Mary's sister. The reign of the emperor Augustus. I admire (id) betonnbere) Plato. Here is the horse of Mr. Stuart. The laws of Solon. The father of poor Charles is arrived. Have you read the poems of Gee the? I have read many of them (oiete baoon). I have bought two hats for George and Edward. Henry's books are arrived. I have bought the house of Mr. Smith. We read Cicero. We read also Virgil's Aeneid (2fenai'be) and the Iliad of Homer. Cimon was the son of Miltiades. Victoria is queen of England (Oon Snglanb). 2. The name of Frederick Schiller. The life of Charles the Twelfth (be3 3^tf ten )> kin g (Gen.) of Sweden (oon ©d)ft)e* ben^y was an incessant war (etn beftanbtger $rteg) . The brother of Eliza, and Mary's brother are my friends. Henry the Fifth, king of (con) England, was the son of Henry the Fourth; he married (fyeira'tfjete) Catherine, the daughter of Charles the Sixth, king [Gen.) of France (con $rantretd)). Give it to my uncle, the doctor (Dat.J. The reign of the emperor Charles the Fifth (§ 11). Where is Miss Louisa? She (fie) is with (bet) her aunt, Mrs. Walter (§ 8). Conversation. S53o toar RaxVQ 33atcr geftern? @r xo ar in granffurt (Frankfort) . 2Bo ift SntfenS Xante? ©te ift in §ambttrg. £4 Lesson 12. %ixx toen (whom) fyaben ©ie fetcfc f^ixr $avl nnb f^rtebrt^. ©djnfye gefauft? 2Bie Ijetjjt bie tonight con ©ie l^etgt SSxftoria. (Snglanb ? 2Bev tear tfyr ©emal)l (consort) ? $rinj TOert. 2Ber tear ©ofvateS? Sin beritfymtet* (renowned) ^fyt* lofopt)'. 2Bei* tear ber ©ieger (con- $)er englifd)e ^btntral ^elfen. queror) toon Trafalgar? SBer »ar ber Scorer meranber'S 2lrtftoteie§, em gried)ifd)er SSelt* be§ ©rofjen? n>eifer(aGrecian philosopher). $ennen ©ie bie ®ef efce ©olon'S ? 3$ lenne fie nid)t. 2Ber tear ©olon? (Sin atfyenifeber SBetfer (sage). gfe t»cu ftnt> btefe 5Bud)er? ©ie fint) fiir (ben) §errn SJteter. fjftr tten (into jene 23anber? ©te ftnb fiir Sttabame SBalter. 2Bem (to whom) geben ©te 3d)gebefieber2uifeunbbev2Rarie btefe 9?ofen? (or Sutfen nnb 2ftarten). 2Cen rufen ©te? 3d) rufe ffctebrtdj nnt> §einridj. £aben ©te -DcHIton'S „93ertorene3 9Jein, td) l)abe e$ nid;t gelefen. (lost) ^avabieS" gelefen? Twelfth Lesson. Proper Names of countries, places &c. 1) Names of countries, towns and islands have in Ger- man, as in English, no article: jDentfcfylcmb Germany. j Sonbon London. (Sngknb England. ' | Berlin' Berlin. (Sl&ct Elba. Except: bie ©cfytoeij Switzerland, and bie Xiirfei' (£urfet)') Turkey, which are treated as common names: G. and D. ber ©d)tteij; Ace. bie ©d)n>etj. Thus also the names of provinces as: bie ^3fatj the pa- latinate, bie -ftoi'mcmbte, bie SDMban :c. 2) They form their genitive by the addition of $, un- less they end in $, $ or g: 3)ie ^iitffe 3)entfd)tanb'g the rivers of Germany. 2)ie ©tragen SBerttn'S *) , SonbonS, k. The streets of Berlin, of London &c. 3) When ending in 8, $ or g, no termination can be added, and the genitive is expressed by the preposition ijon, as: 2)te ©trctgen con ^ariS the streets of Paris. *) with or without the apostrophy. Names of Countries. 65 Note. The use of the preposition too it is also allowed with other names of countries and towns ; but the genitive is better. Thus we may say as well: 2)ie -protmfte Ooit ©ngtcmb the productions of England. S)ic Stoagen toon 8ont>on the streets of London. 4) When the proper names of countries, places and months are put in apposition with the preceding common name, the preposition of is not translated: £)a§ $i3ni Germany. Defterreid) Austria. Sta'Uen Italy. ©pet 'men Spain, ©viedjenfemb Greece. $retmcn Prussia. ©ad)feu Saxony. SBatcrn Bavaria. Sfctgtftrib Russia. (Sdnoefccil Sweden. Sftottocgen Norway. 2)aitemctvt Denmark. Jpotlant) Holland. Sclo/ten Belgium, bte ^d)loet5 Switzerland. bie Xhtlei}' Turkey. 8) The (national) appellations formed of these names of countries end either in tx or e. a) Appellations ending in cr : 3)er ©UVOVa'er the European. I fcer ©pa'ttttt the Spaniard. t>er ^merila'ncr the American. I foer -Staiie'nev the Italian. *) At before names of towns is sometimes also expressed with flit. Ex. at Frankfort %u grcmfflirt, but ill is the best. OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 5 66 Lesson 12. ber £)eftreier ®eutfd)e the German, ber Srrattjofe the Frenchman, ber ©riedje the Greek. ber ^3reuj3e the Prussian, ber ©d)twebc the Swede. bet* ©ad)fe the Saxon, ber SRufje the Russian. ber $ote the Pole. ber XMt the Turk. ber 3)em(e)8. D. bem ^etn(e) jc. bte (Slbe the Elb. G. and D. ber ©foe. Ace. bte @(&e. bte^tyrett&'en (pi.) the Pyrenees. G. ber^tyrenaett. D. bett$. jc* 11) In English, the names of months and days are considered as proper names, and receive no article; in German both require the definite article, viz. : $)er -Mannar January', ber ^efcritar February, ber Wdx\ March, ber 2tytu' April, ber Wlai May. ber 3tmt June. ber 3itft July. ber Wuguft' August. ber ©eptem'fcer September. ber Oto'ber October. ber 9cofcem'fcer November. ber S^em'fcer December. in January &c. is translated tm Stonttar. ber ©ormtag Sunday. i ber 3)tenftctg Tuesday, ber Sttotttag Monday. I ber Sttttttood) Wednesday. Lesson 12. 67 toer $>onnerffog Thursday. i toer ©amftag \ c . , toer grettag Friday. | or ©onnabento j Saturda y- am ©onntag on Sunday. Words. SBten Vienna. $8(n Cologne. ^artS' Paris. tote Dtoer the Oder. tote §anptftatot the capital, tote jDottcm the Danube. toag ©ebtrcje the mountain, fete 3nfel the island. toa3 Ufer the bank, fait cold, fjranffurt Frankfort. fommen to come, gefyen to go. Reading Exercise. 25. 1. 2)te giitffe SftnglantoS ftnto grog. £>ie Scaler toer ©djtoetj finto fd)bn. 2Bel(^e^ (what) [into tote ^robnfte (SnglanbS? 2)ie ©tragen SBerlinS (or oon S3.) ftnto fdjon. Napoleon toar in ©gt)p= ten. (Sr ftarb (died) anf toer -Sfnfel ©anft §elena. -3d) toar ntd)t in Defterreid) ; aber id) toar in ^rcufjen. 2Be(d)e$ Santo tft bief e-3 ? SDiefeS tft ©riedjenlanto. Bennett ©ie ^ilatoelo^ta? vt&a, id) tenne e3 ntdjt, id) tear ntdjt in Slmerifa. 3ft toiefer 2ftann ein §oflantoer? -Rein, er tft ein 3rlanber; er gefyt nad) Slmerifa. 2. 3dj Wide metnen ©otut nad) parts', ©n'jtao 21'botylj toar Sb'nig oon ©d)toetoen. Bennett ©ie toie ©tatot ^ranffurt? •Sftein, aber id) tenne toie ©tatot Si51n. 2)er Sftonat 2ftat ift toer fdjonfte in £)entfd)lanto. £)er ffijtin tft ein grower Slug. 2fteiit §rennto ift im 3nni angef'ommen (arrived). 2im 2ftontag otoer SDienftag. $avi3 ift toie ©auptftatot $ranfreid)§ (or oon ffranfreidj). £ttfg«0e. 26. 1 . The four largest (grbgten) rivers of Germany are : the Rhine, the Elb, the Oder and the Danube. The mountains of Spain are high (fjod)). Napoleon was in Russia. The banks (toie Ufer) of the Rhine are beautiful. London is the capital of England. What (toeld)e8) are the productions of Spain? The streets of Frankfort are narrow (enge). Where do you come from (SBofyer' fommen ©ie) ? I come from England, and I go to France. 2. My brothers go to Paris. Mr. Banks lives (tefct) in Germany. In which town? In the city [of] Mainz. (The) December is cold; July and August are warm. The streets of Berlin are wide (Brett) - The houses of the city of London are high. Vienna is the capital of Austria. My nephew (is) arrived in September. The Danube is a very large (ein fefyr grower) river. Come (fommen ©ie) on Friday or Saturday. Conversation. 2Bo toaren ©ie geftern? 3d) toar in 2ftannljeim. Unto too toar 3I)t 23rntoer? (5t toar in ^ranffnrt. 5* 68 Lesson 13. 2Mcfye3 tft bie §auptjtabt ton ©pamen ? 9So liegt (lies) Hamburg? 2Bo finb bie $tyrenaeu? fctnen ©ie bie ©d)toei$? 2Bte fyeigcn (what is the name of) biefe jtoet gliiffe? ©inb biefe §crren (gentlemen) ^ranjofen? 2Bo ftarb (died) Napoleon? SBetc^e^ (what) 2anb tft bief e§ ? SBaren ©ie in 5lften? SBo^er' (whence) fommen ©ie? SKo^tn' (where) gefyen ©ie? ©efyen ©ie nad) $ari3? tfewten ©ie bie SDftfei? 2Bie finb bie ©tragen 23erlin$? 3n toeW&era SDfamat tft Ofyr SRcffc augefommen ? Sin (on) toefdjem £age? SGBte mete £age Ijat ber Wprit? 2$ie fciele £age £;at ber gebvuar? 3ttabrib tft bte §auptftabt ©on ©panien. §am&urg Itegt an ber (SIbc. 4)ic ^renaen tiecjen jtotf djen (be- tween) granfretdj unb ©panien. 3d? fenne bie ©djtuets unb 3talien . liefer Ijter tft ber 2ft)ein, jener tft bte $)onau. sftein, mem §err, einer bon ifynen (of them) tft em ©Ranter, ber anbere (other) etn 9iuffe. 2luf ber 3nfel ©anft §etena. £>iefe$ tft granfretdj. sftem, id) tear nid)t in $fien; after id) tear in (Sgwpten. 3d) !omme au$ -Stalien. ■3d) gefye nad) Sftugtanb. 3a, nad) $ari§ unb nad) Sonbon. 3a, id) fenne ©rtedjenlanb unb bie £iirfet. ©ie ftnb Brett unb fdjb'n. (§r ift im ©eptember augelom* men. 2lm £)onnerftag. SDcr ^rtl fyat breigig (30) £agc. 3)er gefcruar fyat nur (only) ad)t unb 5»anjtg £age. Thirteenth Lesson. Determinative Adjectives. {SBejrimmunoSwBrter.) They are divided into demonstrative, interrogative, possessive and indefinite numeral adjectives, and are gen- erally followed by a substantive. I. The demonstrative adjectives are: Singular, masc. fern. biefer biefe jener jene feldjer fofdje berfe(6e biefelbe ber, bie, ba3 namUdje the same. ber, bie, bag anbere the other. neuter. biefeS this, that. jeneS that. foldjeS such. ba3felbe the same. (For their declension see the first lesson p. 19. The are declined like adjectives; for berfelbc see p. 69, 3.) Plural for all genders. biefe these, jene those, foldje such. biefetben. bie nam(id)en. bie anberen. two latter Interrogative Adjectives. 69 1) That is generally translated btefer, btefe, biefeS, unless it stands in opposition to this, in which case it means jener, jene, jeneg. Ex.: Who is that man toer tft btefer 9ft emit? Note 1. This and that, in immediate connexion with the auxiliary verb to be fetn, and followed by a noun, is translated in the neuter form btefeS or ba§, both in the singular and plural (see also the 24th lesson, Ohs. 1 & 2). Ex.: This is my stick btefeS (not btefer) or ba$ tft mem ©tocf. Are these your books ftnb btefeS (or ba§) 3fyve 23iidj>er? Yes, these are my books ja, btefeS (or ba§) finb metue SBiicljcr. 2) €>o(d)er, in the singular, is more used with the in- definite article preceding than alone, and is sometimes followed by it, as in English. Ex. : (Sin fotdjer 2ft arm (or fold/ etn SKcmn) such a man. ©oldje -Maimer (pi.) such men. 3) £)erfel&e is declined as follows: Singular. Plural masc. fern. neuter. for all genders. N. berfelfce btefelBe baffelBc. btefeffcen. G. beffelben berfelfcen befjelfcen. b erf elk en. B. bemfelften berjefljen bemfel&en. benfelfcen. A. benfdku btefetfce baffelfce. btefelben. 4) £>er namltdfye and ber cmbere or etn anberer (another) are declined like adjectives (see the 18th lesson). Ex.: £)te nftmltdjen 2Bi3rter the same words. 3d) bremdje emeu anberu <&tod I want another stick. II. The interrogative adjectives are: 1) Setter? n>eli$e? u>e($e*? which? what? Plural Singular. masc. Jem. N. xod&jtx roeldje G. toeldjeS toeldjer 1). n) eld) em U)eld)ev to eld) e A. toeldjeu for all genders. toeld)e which? toeldjer of which? to rid) en to which? to eld) e which? neuter. toeld)e3 which? toe(d)e3 of which? toetdjem to which? toeld)e8 which? Examples. SBeldjcr 2Bein tft ber oefte? which wine is the best? 2Beld)en 2Beg gefyen em thy. fetn his (its). \ty her (its). unfer our. Sty ) euer)iy° ur ' ity their. Plural for all genders. mctne my. betne thy. feme his (its). xtyt her (its). unfere our. Stye | (euere, cure)) your " xtyt their. The declension of the first three is shown in the second lesson. The last five are declined as Singular, masc. fern. N. unfer unfere G. unfer e$ unferer D. unfer em unferer A unferen unfere neuter. unfer our. unfereS of our. unferem to our. unfer our. follows : Plural for all genders. unfere ^ur. unferer of our. unferen to our unfere our. N. Sty Styt Sty your. Stye your. G. Styt§ Store* 3i)re3 of your. Stytx of your. D.Stytnx Stytx Stytnx to your. Stytxx to your. A. Stytxx Styt Sty your. Styt your. Observe that all these possessive adjectives have no termination added for the Nam. sing, in the masc. and neuter. Ex. : Our friend unfer ^reunb (not unferer ffreunfc). Your horse Sty $ferb (not StytS $fert>). (See also p. 21.) Numeral Adjectives. 71 IV. The indefinite fern. numeral adjectives are: masc. jeber every, each. jebe afler (all) all. afle manner many a mancfye fetn no fetne t>iel much Dtete toeing little toentge The following are used in betbe, pi. both, ntefyrere, pi. several. neuter. jebeS. afleS (all). manege*. fetn. ctel. tr>enig. the plural only: etntge, pi. some, a few. fete metften, pi. most. Plural. (wanting) . afle all. ntandje (some), fetne no. ctele many, toenige few. masc. JV. afler (all) G. afle* D. aflem A. alien Declension. fern. neuter. afle afleS (afl) afler aflcS afler aflem afle afleS (afl). Plural. afle afler aflen afle etntge etniger etntgen etntge. Remarks. 1) When in English the definite article follows the numeral adjective all, it must not be translated, as : All the boys a lie $naben (not afle bte Sfrtaben). 2) % H before a possessive adjective in the singular, remains in the masculine and neuter gender unchanged. Ex. : All our money alt unfer ©elb (not afleS nnfer ©elb). With all your money mit afl 3l;rem ©elb (Bat.). 3) The article after both may either not be translated, or it precedes both, as: Both the sisters bett) e ©dm) eft em or bte betben ©tfrn^cftern. 4) Possessive adjectives, when joined with betbe, must pre- cede, and beibe takes it. Ex.: Both my sisters metne betben ©djtoeftevn. Both our sons unfere betben ©cime. 5) The word some or any before a noun in the singular is better not translated, as: I have some bread tcfy fyabe 23rob. Have you any cheese? l;aben ©ic $58 (or ftafc)? No, but here is some butter, netn, aber t>ier tft Gutter. 6) Some before a noun in the jjlural should not be left out, but expressed by etntge, as: Lend me some pens tetfyen ©tc mtr etntge ^ebern. 7) When, in a reply, some is not followed by a substantive, 72 Lesson 13. but refers to a preceding noun in the singular, it may be expressed by toefdjen, e, $ or b a cott; when in the plural, by etntge; frequently however it is not expressed at all- (See the 25th lesson, II, Obs. 4.) Ex. : Have you some wine? Yes, I have some (to eld) en). Words. $>a$ ©ebattbe the building. bte ^ftat^e the plant. bte (Sltern the parents. ba$ ©djiff (pi. — e) the ship. tobt dead. retdj rich. ber ©elbbeutel the purse. ba3 ®elb (the) money. bet SBletjHft (pi. — C) the pencil. ber ftaufutaun the merchant. nit^ltd) useful. fyod) high. bte SBafe )., . ,~ , fyetlfam salutary, wholesome. bie (Eouftne i the cousin (f™-)' baS Skrgmtgen the pleasure, bte Sfteget (pJ. — it) the rule. gtftig poisonous, ber SBagen the carriage. gefyoren belong, oft often, ber Seller the mistake, fault. Oerfaufett to sell, oerfattft sold. oetonnbern to admire- fd)ted)t bad. ba there. Reading Exercise. 27. 1. ®tefer Sftarni tft retdj. £>iefe $rau tft franf. $)tefe f inber baben feme SBitdjer. 3ene$ §ait3 tft fet>r alt. £>te grttdjte jener S3aume finb bitterer (more bitter), aU (than) bte Sriidjte btefer 93dume. 2Mne iSfterii finb tobt.' Unfer Dfyemt (JDrtfcI) tft ntdjt reicfy; aber feme 33afe tft fefyr retdj. SDtefe ©tubenten Ijaben tfyr ©eft) oerloren. 2Btr fennen alle 9xegeln. -3d; fenne letnen fo(djen tauten. We 9ftenfdjen finb 23ruber. 9ftaitd)er $attfmamt I)at fetn ©elb oerloren. SD^etne iante l)at tfyreit Sfttng geftmben. 2. 3d) l)abe bie ^Pferbe 3l)re$ £)l)etm3 unb ben Sagen uttfereS sftadjbarS gefauft. 3eber 2Renfd> liebt fetn Seben (life). 9tt$t jebeS 2anb tft retdj. ©te l)aben fetnen gc^Icr in 3l)rer 2lufgabe. ■Jfteme beiben 33ruber finb angefotnmen. Me §aufer btefer ©tabt finb i)cd>. Me btefe ^3f(anjen finb Ijetlfam. S)iefe8 finb mdjt merne $ebern. 2Btr fyaben etntge 2%e( gefangen (caught). 2Ba3 fur emeu ©tod i)aben ©ie ba? Sttefyrere ©djtffe finb angefcmmen. JtufgaDe. 28. 1. I love my (Ace.) father and my mother. We love our parents. You love your sisters. The boys have bought some books. Those flowers are withered (oertoetft). The pu- pils speak often of (Oon) their teachers. All men (Slftenfcfyen) are alike (gfetdj) before God. These (I, Note 1) are the pen- cils of my brother. This man has sold all his houses and gardens, and all his horses and carriages. We admire such men. All [the] metals are useful. What (sort of) wine have Lesson 14. 73 you? Which gloves have you lost? This lady has lost all her children. Our friends (have) (finb) 2 ar ^ived j yesterday. 2. We have seen several ships. I have found your purse without your money. We have several friends in Paris. Not all men (Sftenfdjeil) are rich. Each country has its (his) pleasures. I have no letters from my son William. Our king has several palaces. No rose without thorns (3)owen). I will (3d) frill) buy some chairs. These dresses are for both my sisters. Every bird has two wings. The boys have eater* (gegefjen) all their apples and pears. Some plants are poison- ous. I give (ge&e) these fruits [to] my children. Conversation. 2Ber Ijat metnen ©etbbentel ge* 3fyr 23wber Ijat U)n (it) gefmtben* f unbett ? ©inb die Sftenfdjen gliid(td)? 9iid>t aUe 3J?enfd>en ftnb gliirftid). 2Ba3 fiir eut $ogel ift btefeS? (S« ift em SIbter (eagle). 2$er fyat U)n gefd>offen (shot or S)er 3ager (hunter) l;at tijn ge* killed) ? Woffen. 2Ba3 fiir elite 331ume fyafcen ©id (§3 ift ein $eUd)en. 293o finb unfere §iite? 3{)re$nteftnbinmeinem,3intmer. $abt id) $ei)lev in meinev 2tnf* 3a, fete fyaben meljveie ^efyler* gabe? 2Ba$ fiir $ebern tjaben ©te? -3d) l)abe ©tal){ (steel) febevn. 2Ser ift jener junge 9)cann? ©r ift bet 9Mfe raeitieS 9cad)bav8. S&arum finb btefe ©tnbenten fo ©ie t^aben vjt ©elb aerloren. trauvtg (sad)? §aben fie atles ®etb Derleven? 9Jtd)t atteS, a^et btel. &a§ fiir ^Pfevbe fyaben ©ie ge* 3d) fyabestoeiSBagenpfevbeunbettt fauft? keitpfeib (saddle-h.) gefauft. 2Ba3 fyaben bie 3ager gefdjofjen? (Shrige ipafen unb Diefye (deer). §aben ©te etntge gnte gebeni? Me ntetne ftebern finb frf)led)t. 2$a3 fiir 23M)er lefen ©te (do 3d) lefe etntge engtifdje 33itd)et. you read) ? 2Ba3 fud)t ftvtebrtd) (look for) ? Sr fttd)t fetnen SMeijiift. 2)ttt teem finb ©te gefommen 3d) Bin nut euttgen greunbeu ge* (did you come) ? fomnten. $aben ©te 23rtefe toon $vanf* 9cetn, id) Ijabe fetnen 33vtef ev* fnrt eri)alten (received)? fyalten. Fourteenth Lesson. AUXILIARY VERBS. ($tffSjeUto3rtcr.) I) In German there are three complete auxiliary verbs which are not only used by themselves, but are also 74 Lesson 14. required for the conjugation of other verbs; they are: fyaben to have; fetn (fetyn) to be; and toerben to be- come or to be. $obtn (fyatte, gcfyaBt) to haye. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. Present Tense. 3d) I>at>e I (may) have bn fyabeft thou have er (fie, e3) fyabe he (she, it) have nrir fyaben we have tfyr fyabet ) ye have ©te fyaben j you have fie fyaben they have. 3d) fjaBe I have bn ifjaft thou hast tx (fie, e«) fyat he (she, it) has tint fyaben we have (U)r fyabt)*) ) ye have ©te fyaben \ you have fte fyaben they have. Imperfect (Preterite) . 3d) fyatte I had t>U fyatteft thou hadst er (fie, e$) ^atte he (she, it) had mtr fatten we had tfyr l)attet or ©te fatten you had fte fatten they had. 3d) fyatte**) I had bu fyatteft thou hadst ev (fte, e3) fyatte he (she, it) had fair fatten we had ifyr fyattet or ©te fyatten you had fte fatten they had. Perfect. 3cfy fyabe . . gefyabt I have had tm fyaft gefyabt thou hast had er fyat gefyabt he has had ttnr fyaben gefyabt we have had tfyr fyabt gel>abt j ye have had ©ie fyaben gel)abt j you have had fie fyaben Qfyaht they have had. 3d) fyabe §d)abt I (may) have had bit fyabeft gefyabt thou have had er fyabe gefyabt he have had rotr fyaben geljabt we have had tfyr fyabet $d)aU ) ye have had ©te fyaben gefyabt i you have had fte fyaben gefyabt they have had. Pluperfect. 3d) fyatte . . gefyabt I had had bit fyatteft gefyabt thou hadst had er fyatte gefyabt he had had ttrir fyatten $e$abt we had had ifyr fyattet gefyabt j ye had had ©ie fyatten gefyabt 1 you had had fie fyatten gefyabt they had had. 3d) fyatte gefyabt -j-) I had had bn fyatteft gefyabt thou hadst had er fyatte gefyabt he had had nnr fyatten gefyabt we had had tfyr fyattet gefyabt) ye had had ©te fyatten gefyabt \ you had had fie fyatten gefyabt they had had. *) It may be stated once for all, that the 2nd person Plural of all verbs has two forms ifyr and@ie. The latter, written with •a capital ©, to distinguish it from the 3rd person, is the only to be used by foreigners in conversation. **) This form is chiefly used after tt>enn (if), as: If I had toenn idj . . . fydtte (the verb is last). Ex. SBcitn idj ein 23ud; fyattt. +) If I had had toemt id; . . . gebabt fyattt. Aux. verb fyaben. 75 First Future. 3d) toerbe . . Ijabeu I shall have t>u unrft fyaben thou wilt have er toirb fyctbeu he will have tuir toerbeu f/abeu we shall have (tfyr toerbet ^aben) ) ye will have u untrbeft gefyabt fyabeu or bu fyatteft gefyabt thou wouldsn ^ er umrbe gefyabt fyabeu or er fycitte gef/abt he would I % ttnr tuiirben gefyabt fyaben or tort fatten gefyabt we should t ^ ifyr toiirbet gebabt Ijabcu or ijjv r)attet getjabt you would I ^ fie toiirben stfaU i)abcn or fie fatten gefyabt they would ' • Imperative Mood. tic&e have Ijabeu uur L, iia , er foil ^abeu let him have lafiet un« JjaBen \ le * us have fie fotten ^aben let them have. l)abet or fyabeu ©ic have. Infinitive Mood. Pres. Ijctbeu or ju fyabai to have. Past, geljabt fyabeu or gefyabt ju fyaben to have had. Participles. Pres. fyctbettb having. | Past, geljabt had. 76 Lesson 14. 2) The negative, interrogative and negative-interro- gative form of verbs is in German exactly the same as in English, and requires no further explanation. Negative. Pres. 3d) fyabe nicfyt I have not bu fyaft ntd)t thou hast not. er tyat nid)t he has not &c. Fut. 3d) toexbe . . ntd)t fyaben I shall not have. Perfect. 3d) tyabe . . ntd)t gefyabt I have not had. bit fyaft . . ntd)t gefyabt thou hast not had etc. Interrogative. §abe id) have I? | §aben ©ie have you? §abe id) . . gefyabt? have I had? etc. Negative-interrogative. §abe id) nid)t? have I not? | §atte id) ntd)t had I not? §abe id) nidjt gefyabt? have I not had? xBerben ttur nidjt fyaben? shall we not have? etc. Remarks on the German construction. As the chapter on the , Arrangement of words or con- struction' cannot be given until all the Parts of speech have been treated, we may, for the present, remark: 1) That in sentences with compound tenses the German Part. Past must always be at the end. In simple or principal propositions the subject comes first; secondly the auxiliary, thirdly the object (Ace. or Dat.) ; in the fourth place the indirect object, the adverb of place and finally the Participle Past or the Infinitive. Ex. : 3d) fyabe ein 23ud) geljabt I have had a book. £)er $nabe I) at ein 33ud) in ber ©trage gefnnben. The boy has found a book in the street. 2)le Gutter nmb etnen SBrlef Don U)rer £od)ter fyaben. The mother will have a letter from her daughter. 2) Adverbs of time must precede the object: £)er $nabe fyat a, eft em ein 23udj gefunben. The boy found a book yesterday. 3) But when any adverbial expression begins the sentence, then the following verb precedes the subject, as: ® eft em fyafce id) ein 23nd) in t)ev (Strafce gefnnben. Yesterday I found a book in the street. 4) The negation ,.nid)t" follows the direct object {ace.) as: ■3d) fyabe t>a$ 23nd) ni$t gelefen I have not read the book Lit. : I have the book not read. Lesson 14. 77 Words. "jDte Xfyx the watch, clock. Da* Ungluif misfortune. t>ie Sutter (the) butter. t)ie 9^at>e( |>/. — n) the needle. t>er $a3 (the) cheese. ber SBall the ball, (o so. t>a3 fftetfdj the meat. feiue mefyv no more. e8. it. t)te 3)tute the ink. t>er %oX) death, fcajj that, glauben to believe, think. toenn if. geuug enough, tie ,3eit (the) time. augeuetnu agreeable, pleasant, tote ©efeUfdjaft company, party, auf bem 2aut>e in the country. Reading Exercise. 29 1. 3d) Ijafce emeu greunt). §aft t)u aud) etuen {fremiti 1 §a6en ©ie feme ffreunbe? SBir fyaben feme ^reunDe. 2Bir fatten ffreunbe; abet jefct (now) fyabeu nrir fcine mefyr. Jpaben oie ©e* butt) (patience) . §aben ©te s M)t auf (take care of) 3fyve $teifcer. ■3d) toerbe etue neue (new) U()v babeu. 3d) fyabe eiue Uljr gebabt; abet* id) Ijabe fie (it) cerloren. $aben ©te fctel 33ergniigen gefyabt? 2. 2Btr fatten fctele gifdje gcljabt. ©ie toertoen ©efcttfd>aft aeb/abt Ijabeu. SDte ©djiiter fatten rein papier. SBenn totr S3rot> fatten.*) 2Benn nrir gleifdj gefyabt fatten.*) 3l;r touvtoct feiu ©efo ^aben. (5r tcurbe triel Sergnftgen auf t>em ?ant>e geljabt tjaben. ©lauben ©ie, bag er @eto t)at? ©laubeu ©ie, t>ag nrir SBein gefyabt t)aben? ©ie n>erben Staffer gefyabt fyaben. efter ju fefyen? SBaruut finb ©te fo traurtg? 2Ber I;at metit Sebermeffer ge* ijabt? 3a, id) tjabe itjn in einem %abei\ (shop) gefefyen. 3a, er Ijat §anbfd)ul)e gelauft. •ftein, tmr braud)en (want) mefyr. 2£tr fatten $a$ genug ; aber uid)t 23utter genug. 2Bir mareu f efyr cergnitgt (pleased) ; nur fatten grofte ©efettfdjaft. (5$ t>at fetnenSSater bertoren; aber feine Gutter tebt nod) (still lives) . 3d) gtaube ntd)t. 3d) toerbe tjeute (to-day) feme 3eit fyaben; after morgeu. (£r fyat fefyr toenig gefyabt. 3d) r)atte etue ©tat)l (steel) feber. ©te ift nid)t I)ter, fie ift in ©tuttgart. 3d) fyabe mem ©etb oertoren. 3d) toeijs nid)t (I do not know), n>er (who) eS getjabt fyat. Fifteenth Lesson. SECOND AUXILIARY. n (toar, geh>efen) to be. Indicative. | Subjunctive. Present Tense. 3d) bin I am bU bift thou art er (fie, e$) ift he (she, it) is tt)tr fiub we are ©te finb j you are (tfyr fetb) j ye are fte ftub they are. 3d) wax I was bu nmrft thou wast er (fie, eS) u>ar he (she, it) was 3d) fet (fet)) I [may] be bu feteft (fetyeft) thou be er (fte, e§) fet (fet)) he (she, it) be nrir feien (fetoen) we be ©ie feien (fetoen) j you be tfyr feiet (fetyet) J ye be fte feien (fetjen) they be. Imperfect (Preterite). (SBemt)*) id) tuare (if) I were bu toareft thou wert er (fte, e8) toare he (she, it) were *) Ex. If I was or were rich wenn id) rcid) ware. Aux. verb fein. 79 totr toaren we were (iljr toaret) \ ©ie toaren) J ? on were fte toaren they were. toir toaren we were ifcr toaret | ©ie toaren | ^ ou were fie toaren they were. Perfect. 3d) Bttt . . getoefen I have been btt &ift getoefen thou hast been er ift getoefen he has been toir ftttb getoefen we have been (it)r feib getoefen) j ye have been ©ie ftttb getoefen j you have been fie ftttb getoefen they have been. 3d) fct 0etx>efcn I (may) have been bn feieft getoefen thou have been er fet getoefen he have been a) it feien getoefen we have been (il)rfeiet getoefen) jye have been ©ie feien getoefen j you have been fie fetett getoefen they have been. Pluperfect. 3d) to at . . getoefen I had been bu toarft getoefen thou had^t b. er toar getoefen he had been toir toaren getoefen we had been ©ie toaren getoefen you had been fte toaren getoefen they had been. 3d) to are getoefen I had been*) bit todreft getoefen thou hadstbeen er tocire getoefen he had been toir toaren getoefen we had been toie toaren getoefen you had been fie toaren getoefen they had been. First Future. 3d) toerbe . . fein I shall be bn toir ft fein thou wilt be er toirb fein he will be toir toerben fein we shall be ©ie toerben fein you will be fte toerben fein they will be. 3d) toerbe fein I shall be bn toerbeft fein thou wilt be er toerbe fein he will be toir toerben fein we shall be ©ie toerben fein you will be fie toerben fein they will be. Second Future (Fut. Perfect). 3dj toerbe . . getoefen fettt I shall have been. bit toir ft er toirb toir toerben (il)r toerbet) ©ie toerben fte toerben 5 thou wilt he will we shall lye will [you will they will 3d) toerbe . . getoefen fein I shall have been. bit toerbe|t » er toerbe toir toerben (tt)r toerbet) ©ie toerben fie toerben Conditional. thou wilt he will we shall ye will you will they will First 3d) toitrbc . . fein (or id) todre) I should be bn toitrbeft fein (or bit todreft) thou wouldst be er toiirbe fein (or er todre) he would be toir toitrben fein (or toir toaren) we should be U)r toiirbet (©ie toitrben) fein (or it)r todret) you would be> fie toitrben fein (or fie toaren) they would be. If J had been roenn \% . . . gettefen ware. SO Lesson 15. Second Conditional (Cond. Perfect). 3d) roitrbc geroefen fcttt or id) h) arc geftefen I should have been t>u rotivbeft geruefen fern or brt iociveft geroefen thou wouldst l pr cr rorivbe getoefen feirt or er to axe getoefen he would roiv roiivbert geroefen fcht or nriv toaven getoefen we should Sic rorivben getoefen fetn or ©ie toaven getoefen you would fie toiivben getoefen fcttt or fie to avert geroefen they would Imperative. u BijJ gliidlid). 3d) Bin mtgludtid). atcv. SBavert ^Sie geftevn in bev $ivd)e? 9cein! ioiv toaven ju £aufe; roiv toaven Lesson 15. 8f wntoofyt. erben nidjt franf fetn. 3$ Hn fcet (at) bent €>djneiber geftefen ; after mein SRocf n>ar [nocfy] nicfyt fertig (ready) . 3 ft ber ftnafce in ber ©djule getoefen?" 2Bir tuaren geftevn im heater. 3d) nntrbe gUitfltd) few, ttemt id) reid) to are. farl toivb fe^r toergnitgt f etn , toenn (when) er ©ie fiefyt (sees), ©et fleigig, metn <2oInt. ©eten ©ie aufmerffam. Styr ©rogbater "tft fefyr alt getoefen. 5ftetne ©vogmutter tyat dlefyt. Scfy fyabe Un* xeqt. Sung unb fd;im f em *) ift angenefym. c Aufa.a6<\ 32. 1. I am young, you are old. She is very handsome. Our cousin Frederick has been in London, but he has not been in Paris. Be quiet. Be contented with your situation (©telle, /.) I should be contented, if I Swere *not 2iH. I should be rich, if I had been in America. My daughters have been, at the ball (cmf bent S3aU) ; they were very happy. It will be better to go out (auSjugefyen) . It would be easy. The parents of these children have been too severe (ju ftreng). You are right, I am wrong. 2. I should be contented, if you were not idle. Be polite towards (gegen) your teachers. I wish, she were attentive. There are no wolves in England. There were (e3 fraren) no glasses on the table. Be so kind [as] to ($u) give me a glass. My pupils will not be idle. Miss Caroline was very [much] pleased. The knives were not sharp (fdjctvf). We have not bought the butter; it (fie) was not fresh (fvifcfy). I am to go (Note 2) to Berlin. Are we to learn German? I was wrong, my father was right. Conversation. ©inb ©ie gliirftid)? £) \a, id) Bin fefyr gtficflid). 3ft3I?re©dm>efteraud)gtucftid)? £) nein, fie ift fefyr unglittftidj. 2Barum ift fie ungludftcfy ? ©ie fyat afle ifyre $inbev fcevloren. 2Bc tuaren ©ie geftem 2lbenb 3d; n>ar int Sweater. (last night)? ©inb ©ie in ©tuttgart ge* -fteut, id) Bin nidjt ba (there) n>e[en? getoefen. ■9 ft ba8 $inb lange franf ge< (S3 ift etn Satyr (for a year) toefen? franf getocfen. SBatttm toar ber Server unju* £)ie ©dntter toaren trage* fvieben ? 3ft er eft (often) unnjotyl? 3a, er ift immer franf. 3ft ba§ 2ftabd)en berguitgt? 3a, fie ift fefyr bcrgnitgt. ©inb ©te fertig (ready, or 2Bir toevben gleid) (directly) ferttg have you done)? fciu. 3ft ber9#enfd) fterbtidj (mortal) ? SDer Soxpa ift fterMidj ; after bie ©eete (soul) ift unftevftlid?. *) See the foot-note +) p. 77. OTTO, German Cony.- Grammar. 82 Lesson 16. SBctS fagte (said) ber Server? 2Ser ^at 9?ec^t? fatten ©ie aud) 9?edjt? (Sr faatc: ©eicn <2>ie rufytg. 2Mn°$ater I) at ^e^t. 9?ein, id) fyattt Unredjt. Sixteenth Lesson. THIRD AUXILIARY. 28erben to become, to get (to grow). Indicative. Subjunctive. Present Tense. 3d) toerbe I become, I get bu ttnrfi thou becomest cr toirb he becomes teir ttevben we become (Sie fterben or Hjr toerbct y. b. fie toerbeu they become. 3d) fterbe I (may) become bu toerbeft thou become er toerbe he become nnr fterben we become ©ic toerben or ifyr toerbet y. be& fie toerben they become. Imperfect (Preterite). 3d) ttmrbe (i(^ toctrb)*) I became bu tourbefi (toctrbft) th. becamest er trurbe (toarb) he became nnr tDUl'ben we became €>ie nmrbeu or il)t nntrbet y. b. fie tourbeu they became 3d) toiirbe (if) I became bu toitrbeft thou became er ftiirbe he became totr toiivbeu we became ©te hmvbeu or iljr toifrbet y. bee. fie toitrben they became. Perfect. 3dj bin . . getoovben (or toorbeu) I have become (or grown) bu Bift geftorben thou hast bee. er tft gettorben he has bee. tcir ftub getcorbeu etc. 3dj fet getoorbeu (or toorben) I (may) have become (or been) bu feijt geftorbeu (or toorben) er fet getoorbeu (or toorben) k. u. Pluperfect. 3d) tcax . . geftorbeu (or toorben) I had become (or been) bu toarft getoorbeu (or toorbeu) er (fie, e$) tear getoovben :c. 3d) toerbe . . fcerbeu I shall become (or get) bu nnr ft . . toevbeu er nurb . . tcerbeu hrir toerben . <5ie toerbeu . . fie toevben . 3dj xo'dxe geu)orben (or toorben) (if) I had become (or been) bu tocireft getoorbeu (or toorben) it. 2C. First Future. 3d) toerbe . . toerbeu I shall become bu tuerbeft er toerbe tr>ir toerben ©ie teerben fie toerbeu toerbeit toerben. ') tdj ivarb is the older form, and getting out of use. Aux. verb tocrben. 83 Second Future (Fut. Perfect). 3d) n>erbe getoorben (toorben) fein I shall have become (been) bu toirft getoorben (njorben) fein K. JC. 3d) toerbe getoorben (toorben) fein I shall have become (been) bit toerbeft getoorben (toorben) fein JC. JC. First Conditional. -3d) toitrbe . . tverben I should or would become, bn nmrbeft toerben thou wouldst become :c. k. Second Conditional. 3d) toiirbe . . getoorbeu (or toorben) fein, or id) to are .. gc* toorben I should have become or been JC. JC. Imperative SBerbe become (thou) . toevben toir ) , . , er foU toerben he shaU become, fofet nn§ ttevben j * et us Decome - fie fotten toerfcen let them be- toerbet, toevben ©tc become, come. toerben ©ie nid)t do not become. Infinitive. Pres. tcevben or jn toerben to become. Past. gett>ovben (or toorben) fein or $n fein to have become. Participles. Pres. tuerbenb becoming. Past. getDorben (or toorben) become {or been). Note 1. The verb toerben is sometimes translated to get or to grow, as: @r ttirb ait he grows old. | (§8 totrb foat it gets late. Note 2. What has become of . . .? is translated: 233 a 3 tft erben. ©te fterben nag toerben, bettn eS rennet (for it rains). £)iefe8 garner ift fd)mut3tg gen?orbett. (5$ nnrb 9?ad)t; e8 nnrb bunfel. $)iefe ShtaBen tcerben franf; fie efjen (they eat) ju met. 3)a£ 9ttabd)eu nmrbe miibe. 3)urd) ^leig unb ©parfamfeit nnrb man reid). Unfer Wafy Bar ift Balb reid) geiDorben. (5§ rennet; unr toerben nag toerbcn. 2Ba8 ift an« bem ©oljn beS ©djnetberS gettorben? ©r ift ©o(= bat' getoorben. iluffl«6e. 32b. She becomes sleepy. I shall become wise. He has become my friend. The duke became suddenly ill. The boys got tired and sleepy. The trees become green in spring (im $ritf)ting) . I am now rich, but I may (fantl) 2 become ipoor. We shall become contented. Do not become impatient. Your children harm grown very tall. Old (5Ilte) people become wise. It had grown dark. I was once (einft) young; but now 2 I ^have grown old. It rains (e8 regit et) , our friends will get wet. Mr. Brown hopes (fyofft) soon 2 to (ju) 3 get irich. This man has become [a] soldier. What has become of his children? Those boys have become men (banner). I hope (id) fyoffe), you will not become idle. Conversation. SOBarnm finb ©ie geftern nid)t 3d) nmrbe ptofclidj untuoljl (un- gefommett (did y. not come)? well). SBarum gefyen ©te fd)on nad) (£8 nnrb fpat. 3d) mug (must) §anfe (home so soon) ? tint (at) ad)t \Xl)X ju §anfe fetn. SSaitn tuerben bie 23aume grim? 3m grilling, ©tub ©ie ^aufmann getuorbeit? 9tet, id) Bin ©olbat getoorben. SBarnm (why) ift btefeS 9ttab* ©ie fyat ju ciel $ud)en gegeffeit d)en franf getoorbeu ? (eaten) . ©tub ©ie reid) gen>ovbeu? 9?ein, aBer (but) id) roiinfdje reid) ju luerben. ©inb ©ie nag getoorben? 3d) Bin ttid)t nag getoorben; iie rooHcn fie tootten.. 3d) rcotlte I should wish bn toofltcft :c. cv tooflte :c. toir toottten tt: Indicative. Pres. 3d) to ill I will, I wish bu to tH ft thou wishest er to lit he wishes, will toir tooKen 2 ) we will, wish Jtfyv toollt or loottet ) you wills) /u mngt thou must ex ntuj3 he must »iv miiffen we must ( il)t miiffet or miiftt \ you |©ie miiffen j must fie miiffen they must. Imperf. 3d) mugte I had to, I was to or I was obliged. Perf. 3d) I)a6e . . gemugt or miiffen I have been obliged. Pluperf 3d) fyatte gemnftt. 1st Fut. 3d) toerbe miiffen I shall be obliged. 2nd Fut. (id) ttjcrbc gemugt l)aben.) 1st Cond. 3d) miigte or toitfoc . . miiffen I should be obliged. 2nd Cond. 3d) fycttte genutfjt (or — miiffen) I should have been Inf. pres. miiffen to be obliged. [obliged. Part. past, gemnjst. Note. 'I must not' is rendered id) fortrf nid)t. Subjunctive. 3d) miiffe I must bn miifjeft, er miiffe ttnv miiffen U)t miiffet ©te miiffen fte miiffen. 3$ mitgU I should be obliged. 3d) fyabe gcrnugt. 3d) Ijattegemwgt (miiffen) . 3d) toerbe miiffen. *) I shall (1st pers.) is translated: id) roerbe, and the inter- rogative Shall I: toerbe tdj? but when l shall T means am I tof it is in German: fofl tdj? — In the same manner in the plural: We shall is = loir roerben; but shall we {= are we to) foflen rotr? **) Observe that tdj rooflte and tdjfotttedo not modify their vowel in the Subj. Mood or Conditional. Ex. : rocmt tcty . . tt>ofltc. $8 Lesson 17. Words. 3)er 23cmer (pi. -n) the peasant, fyeute to-day. yiitytZ nothing. bie 'jpoft the post-office. afc'veifen to depart, set out. lefen to read. fce$al)len to pay. mid) me. Metoen to remain, to stay. jtvafen to punish. c§ it. auS'cjeljen to go out. glauben believe, fdneifceu to write. fcevfteljen to understand. Reading Exercise. 33. 3d) fann lefen. ©ie founen fommen. 3dj fonnte e3 ntdjt glauben. 3d) mug iljn (him) fefyen. 2Btr muff en abreifen. SSotten ©ie mid) bejatylen ober ntd)t? 3d) toitvbe ©ie bejaljlen, toenn id) fonnte. 2Barum fonnen ©ie utdjt? 3d) Ijabe fein @etb. 3ttan (one) lonnte e§ uidjt lefen. 9ftan fonnte (might) biefe$ glauben. -3d) mug auSgefyen. Start mugte Ijeute in ber ©d)ute ileiben. SBifljelm nrivb morgen $u §aufe bleiben miiffen. SBer (who) ttcttte (lonnte) e$ cjtauben? -3d) cjlaube e3 nid)t. 2Bir toevben bleiben muff en. SSir fonnen ntd)t tmmer tljun (do), toa$ n)ir njoflen. $)iefe ©djitler fottten fleijjig fein. 31jr Wiener fott ben 23rief auf bie $oft tvagen (take). iUfgaGc 33a. Can you write? Yes, I can write. He cannot read. We must go out. They must 2P a y i m e (mid)). The master should punish the boy. *) He would believe nothing. I will buy it. The servant would not (did not wish to) go. Thou shalt not steal (fteljlen) . (The) children should not lie (lit gen) . I could not**) believe that news (biefc ■?£.). Some peasants, cannot read. I will write a letter. Will you take it (ilni . . . tragen) to the (auf bie) post-office? They will not come. She should (or ought [to]) write to him (an iljn). Children must go to school (in bie ©d)Ule). I could not**) understand this letter. My aunt could not read the book. 5, Sttogcn Pres. 3d) mag I may (I like) bu magft thou mayest er (fie, e$) mag he may toil* mogen we may ©ie mogen you may fie mSgen they may. Imperf. 3d) tttod)te I liked. 3dj mod)te nid)t I did not like or choose. Per/. 3d) Ijabe gemod)t. Subj. 3d) mbge I may bu mbgeft er mftge nnr mogen ©ie mogen fie mogen. 3d) mod)te I may, might or I should like. 3d) Ijabe gcmod)t. *) For the position of the Infinitive see the foot-note -J- p. 77. **) The negation ntdjt is to be placed after the object. Trans- late: I could that news not believe (see p. 76 j Obs. 4). Aux. verbs of Mood. sa I 3d) Ijatte gemodjt. 3d) toerbe tuogeu. Pluperf. 3d) fyatte gemodjt. 1st Fut. 3d) rcerbe mogeit I shall like. 1st Cond. 3d) mocfyte (gent) I should like. 2ndCond. 3d) fyatte — illegal I should have likod. Inf. pres. 9D?ogett. | Part. past, gemocfyt. Note 1. I may &c. is very of ten translated 1 n it e n , asr He may go er faun gefyen. — 3d) mod)te nid)t = I did not like. Note 2. The interrogative form : may I? &c. is rendered: barf id>? may we? biirfen n>iv? :c. In the same manner is conjugated: fcermogen to be able, asr 3$ bcrmag e8 ntd?t ju tfyun {Inf. with ju). 6. may, I dare, [I am allowed. &urfen to be allowed, to dare. Pres. 3d) barf I bu barfft er barf luir bitlfeit we are allowed. \l)x biirft or a6en. 1st Cond. 3d) burfte or toiirbe biirfen I should be allowed. 2nd Cond. 3d) fyatte geburft I should have been allowed. Inf. Pres. biirfen. P. past, geburft. Inf. past, (geburft fyafcen) . Negative: 3d) barf ntcfyt = I must not. In the same manner: befciirfen to be in need: 3d} fcebavf jc^ Perf Subj. 3d) biirfe I may bu bi'trfeft er biirfe hnr biirfen ifyr biirfet fie biirfen. 3d) burfte I might bu burfteft er burfte hnr burften tfyr burftet fie burften. 3d) fyaoe geburft. 3d) Ijatte geburft. 3d) toerbe biirfen. Observations. 1) These six auxiliaries are mostly followed by an Infinitive* mood, but they do not admit of $U before the Infinitive. I can (must, will) read id) faun (muj$, tcitt jc.) lefen He ought to come er fottte fotttmett., 90 Lesson 17. 2) If such an auxiliary is accompanied by not, in German the negation nid)t is placed before the following Infinitive: I cannot read the letter id) tann ten SBricf ntd)t lefen. 3) The Conditional seldom occurs in the form id) tourte with the Infinitive : id) nu'hbe fcnnen, id) toiirfre foUen k. ; commonly the Imperfect Subjunctive is used as Conditional: id) fonnte, id) fotlte, id) mitjjte, id) n?ottte, id) mcd)te, id) bfirfte. 4) The compound tenses sometimes appear regularly formed by adding the auxiliary id) fyaht, fyatte K. to the Participle past, as long as they stand by themselves, as: 3d) Ijafce gefonnt, id) fyafce gemugt it. But when these compound tenses are connected with the Jnjinitive of another verb, which is mostly the case, then they take the form of the Infinitive instead of the Part, past : §aben ©ie ten SBricf (efen lonncn (instead of lefcn gctomtt) ? Have you been able to read the letter? $ctvl §at auS'geljen muff en Charles was obliged to go out. 3d) Ijafce e$ nefymen muff en. I was [or have been) obliged to take it. (5r ljat fagcn tool (en (not ge»oKt). He (has) wished to say. 5) When in English the auxiliary of mood is in the Im- perfect tense and the following verb in the compound of the Infinitive, the German way of rendering this greatly differs from the English, viz. the principal verb remains in German in the Infinitive present, and the auxiliary is put in the -Plupcrf. of the Subjunctive mood, as : You might or could (Imp.) have read the letter, ©ie Jjnitcu ten ©vief lefen fimnen. He might have gone tX tyattC gefyen fihmen. I should have done it or I ought to have done it. 3d) Ijntie e3 tljun f often. You ought to have written your exercise. te anSgefycn? 3d) barf ljeutc nid)t auSgefyen; aber morgen. 3$ Ijabe geftevn mein $ferb fcerfaufen too lien; aber id) %abt ntdjt gcfcnnt. £>n magft geljen ober ntdjt. 3d) modjte ntd)t auSgefyen. Sr barf ntdjt in ben ©artcn gefyen. $)iefe SKadjrtcfyt mod)te n>a^r fctn. SBarum bnrfte ber $nabe ntd)t in bte ©djnle gefyen? (£r roar fatal. 9tteut 23ater r)attc geftern fctn $ferb fcerfaufen f onnen; aber er Ijat ntd)t getooflt. SBavum fiat cr e3 ntdjt berfaitfcn tool* I en? (5r braucfyt (wants) e3 nodj (still). £)te $tnber fyaben fptclcn tooflen; fie fatten iBre Slufgabe ternen follen; fte toer* fcen batb jn 33ette gefyen miifjen. Jtttfga0C. 34a. You may 2 believe Ut (eS).*) Z>o you go to (in ace.) the theatre? Do you believe that news? I do not believe it (fte). He may say, what he pleases (tt)a$ er n)tH). May I see, what (ti)a$) you read? I will not go out, it may rain (regnen). Could you 4 give *me (mtr) 2 two 3 florins? I would, but I cannot. The boy must not write. The boys must not write. He was not allowed to remain. I was obliged to (or had to) go to the post-office. The butcher has been obliged to sell the meat. You should not believe it. I know (n?eifj), I ought to do it. [I ought to have read (tefen) it. § 5]. *) See the foot-note f) p. 77. 92 Lesson 18. Conversation. SBotten ©ie 2Betn trtnfen? Wtin, id) nnnfetnenSBetn trtnfen. SSknn muff en ©ie auSgefyen? 3d) mug urn adjt Ufyv (at eight o'clock) auSgefyen. tannft bu fdjretben unb lefen? 3d) fann lefen, obex md)t fdjreibeiu SQBoUen ©ie Gutter unb $a$? *Rein, id) null ft(etfd) ijaben. (Soil Gilbert ben S3vtc( au{ bie SKein, id; mug fefbft (myself) auf ^3oft tvagen? fete ^oft gefyeu. SBotten ©ie 3tyve ^ferbe tier* 9?ein, id) nutt fie ntd)t fcerfaufen . faufcn? 2Barum fonnten ©ie nid)t fom* 3d) war untuofyt unb mugte 5a men? §aufe bleiben. SBarum fyat biefer 2ft ami ben (£v fann nid)t tefen . 23rtej ntd)t gelefen? 3)ttrfen ©ie in§ Sweater geljen? 9iettt, id) barf ntd)t. S)«f id) 3fynen eine tetgarre 3d) banfe 3ljuen (I thank you) . geben? SBarum geljen ©ie nid)t au3? We'd (because) e5 regnet. 3)arf id) fefyen (see), toaS ©ie £) |a, ©ie bitrfen e$ fel)en. fdjvetben? SBivb er balb (soon) abreifen (£r nnrb meUeidjt (perhaps) fjter muffen? bletben fonnen. §aben ©ie bie Sttedjnnng (bill) 3d) fyabe $toei ©utben bejafyfen bejafylen mitffen? muffen. Eighteenth Lesson. On the Adjective. 1) The adjective, in German, is either used predica- tively, to state how a thing or a person is. In this case, its place is after the verb, and it requires no alte- ration at all ; it remains the same for the three genders and for both numbers, as in English: 5)er £ifd) tfl runb the table is round. £)a$ $(etb ift alt the dress is old. 2)te 2iepfel ftnb gut the apples are good. ;Dte $vrfd)en waxen fitg the cherries were sweet. 2) Or it is used attributively, to qualify a noun. Tken it always precedes the noun which it qualifies and is varied for the gender, number or case of the substan- tive, with which it must agree in all these particulars ; as : bet runbe £tfd), pi. bie nmben £tfd?e. The declension of the adjective in its attributive use varies according to its being preceded: Adjectives. 93 I. by the definite article (or a substitute of it). II. by the indefinite {or a substitute of it). III. by neither of them. First form. 1) With the definite article, ber, bte, brtS, every ad- jective takes the inflexions of the 2nd declension, viz. in the nominative case C, in all the following cases sin- gular and plural en, except in the accusative singular of the fern, and neuter gender, which are always the same as the nominative. With this single deviation the ter- mination of all the cases is the same for all three genders. Table of the inflexions of the first form. fern. neuter. Plural for all. masc. Nom. — C Gen. — Ctt Dat. — en Ace. — Ctt — e —Ctt —Ctt — e — c — Ctt —Ctt — c —Ctt —Ctt —Ctt —Ctt. Examples. Singular. Masculine. N. bcr gute 23ater the good father O. be3 gutctt 23ater8 of the good father D. bem gutett $ater to the good father A. ben gutctt SSater the g. f. Feminine. N. bte fdjene 93(umc the fine flower G. ber fdjenctt 23(ume of the f. fl. D. ber fd)6nen 531ume to the f. fl. A. bte fd)i5ne 93Iutne the f. fl. Plural. btc gutctt 23ater ber gut en SSater ben gut en 33atern bte gut en $ater. btc fd^onctt Slum en ber fdjonenSBtuwten benfd)cnen£3fumen btefefyonen 231umen. btc rletnctt £>aufer ber Hem en fiaufet ben Heine n^awfern bte Hem en §aufer. Neuter. JV. ba£ Heme §au$ the little house G. be3 Hctnen §aufe3 of the 1. h. D. bent Hem en §aufe to the 1. h. A. baS Heine §au3 k. Note 1. The article before the adjective denoting suffi- ciently the gender and case of the following noun, these ter- minations of the first form seem to be merely of a euphon- ical nature. Note 2. Observe that the terminations of the adjective are not the same as those of the article or the noun. 94 Lesson 18. 2) The adjectives undergo the same inflexion after these six determinative adjectives which, have three dif- ferent forms for the three genders, viz. : btefer, btefe, btefeS. i manner, mand)e, mandjeS. jener, jene, jeneS. beifelfce, biefetbe, ba§felbe. jeber, jebe, jebeS (every). | teetdjer, n>etct)e, toeldjeS? E x ample s. QDtefer attc Wlam this old man. Gen. btefeS alten Cannes. jDiefer fyofye 23aum this high tree; pi. btefe fyofyen 23amne. 3>ene$ arm e 2ft8bcfyen that poor girl; pi. jene annen 9ftabdjen. 3ebe3 fletgtge $tnt> every diligent child. $on welcfyem fceritfmtten Valine fyredjen n>efter. $)a§ Heine 9ftabd)en. "Crtn fd)oner ©arten. (Sine febene SBlume. (Sin fd)one3 §au§. '3)er SBruber tft gut. 'Die ©dnoeftern fmb gut. 2)ie fdjonen (Garten. £)te neuen §aufer. 3d) Itebe bie votfyen SBlmnen. SDie fyofyen SBaume beS gviinen SBalbeS. 3d) l;abe etnen treuen §unb. . farmer ©uj>j>e ^4. toarme ©uppe. toarme ©uppen warm soups toarmer ©uppen toarmen ©uppen toarme ©uppen. Neuter. JV. frifdjcS 2Bafjer fresh water G. frtf&cn 2Saffer§ 2). frtfd)em Staffer A. frifdjes SBafjer. neue 33iid)er new books neuer 93itdt)er neucn Sud>ern neue S3iid)er. JVofe. The learner will easily see that these distinctive endings of the 3rd form are the terminations of the missing article fcer, tic, fcaS. The only case which differs , is the Gen. sing. , which should accordingly be : gutcS. Here an n has been substituted for euphony's sake, to avoid the repetition of several s (3). 2) When two or more adjectives are placed before the same substantive without an article, they are de- clined in the same way, as: N. outer, alter, roujer 2Betn (some) good old red wine G. gutcn, alten, rotten SBetneS of good old red wine D. gutem, altem, rotfyem SBetrt to good old red wine A. guten, alten, rotten 2Bein (some) good old red wine. N. reid)e, gutta,e Seute rich kind people G. reiser, gitttger Scute of rich kind people D. retcfyen, gutigen Seuten to rich kind people A. retd)e, giitige Seute rich kind people. 3) This third form is also used for the vocative case without or with a personal pronoun : firmer SOiaun! armeS 9)iat)tf)en ! poor man! poor girl! ■3d) (bu, ©te) armer Sftamt! I (thou, you) poor man! SteicS $tnt>! dear child! | Stebe linker! dear children! 3unge Seute or tt)r junge Scute (you) young people! 4) With cardinal numbers and the five numeral ad- jectives : etntge, meljrere, mete, mancfye and mentge (not atle) : 3elm ftarfe Scanner ten strong men. SStele (toentge) treue ^reunbe many (few) true friends. %xm\ fdjone ^ferbe five beautiful horses. OTTO. German Conv. -Grammar. 7 98 Lesson 18. 5) After a Genitive this third form is also used: §etnrid)'8 grofcteS SSerguitgen Henry's greatest pleasure. 3)te 2ftutter, beren fletne $tnber jc. The mother whose little children &c. §err Sett, mit beffen jihigftem (Sofjne id) reiste. Mr. Bell with Avhose youngest son I travelled. Additional remarks. 1) Adjectives ending in el, as: ebel noble, ettel vain^ bnnfel dark, mostly lose, when declined, the C before I: N. ber eble ©raf (not ebele) bte ettle $ran G. beS eblen or ebeln*) ©rafen ber ettten grau D. bem eblen > * ©rafen ber ettlen ^ran A. ben eblen * * ©rafen. bte ettle $rau. 2) Those ending in er and etl do not require the omission of the c in the Nominative, except in poetry ; but in the other cases the former take only tt after X f the latter keep their t t as : (Sin Bitterer £ranf a bitter potion, G. eineS bittern £ranf$. Sine ftnftere yiad)t a dark night, G. $' D. einer ftnftern ^a^t. (Sin offeneS $enfter, G. eineS offenen $enfter$. 3) The adjective Ijocfy remains unchanged when after its noun, but when before, it changes in all the cases the rij into a simple ()♦ We say: £)er 23anm tjt l)6ott magnificent. *iDurbig: IteoenStDnrbtg amiable; efymmrbtg venerable. *»>ertlj: lob enStoertfy praise- worthy; toimfdjenStoertlj desirable. 5) Adjectives denoting a nation are mostly formed by the termination *tf(fy, and written with a small letter, as: amertfamfdj American. bMltfdj Danish. bentfcfy*) German. en g (if dj English, franjoftfdj French, italientfd) Italian. grted)tfd) Greek, ijouanbtjcfy Dutch. ofterretd)tfd) Austrian, potnifcfy Polish, prenfttfd) Prussian, ruffifd) Russian, fadjfifdj Saxon, fdjtoebifd) Swedish, fpcmtfd) Spanish. turftfd) Turkish. 6) Adjectives and participles may be used substantively. In this case they take the article, and must be written with a capital letter, but retain their inflexion as adjectives. Ex. : Adj. fremb, (strange) retfenb, bentfd), gefangen. First form. Declension. Second form. N. ber Svembc the stranger G. be3 $remben of the stranger D. bem gremben to the stranger A. ben ^remben the stranger. Cttt $rember a stranger etneS fjremben of a stranger etnem gremben to a stranger etneit fjrremben a stranger. I. & II. form. Plural. in. form. grembe strangers §r ember of strangers §l*embett to strangers Srembe strangers. N. Vlt grembCtt the strangers G. ber ffrembCtt of the strangers D. ten gremben to the strangers A. tie grembCtt the strangers. Suqh are: ber SRetfenbe the traveller. — eitt ^teifenber a traveller, ber ©etefyrte the learned man. — etn ©eleljrter a 1. man. ber SBebtente the man-servant. — etn 23ebtenter a man-servant, bet 2)eutfdbc the German. — etn 3)eutfd)cr a German, ber ©efanbtc the ambassador. — etn ©efcmbter an ambassador, ber ©efattgene the prisoner. — etn ©ejangener a prisoner. 7) Even neuter nouns are formed in this manner, as: £)a$ @d)one the beautiful. | ©nteS tfmn to do good. ba§ 9Reue, ba3 %itt that which is new (old). 8) After etn)d§ something or anything, ntcfytS nothing, Utet, ftentg and mefyr the adjectives used substantively take the third form ( — c£), as: *) In fceutfd) the i has been dropped before fd). (from beuMfd)). 100 Lesson 18. SS'tel ©Ute8 much good. | ^td)t8 9?ene 8 nothing new (no (5tn)a3 ©d)ted)te3 something or anything bad. [news). 28tr fptedjen son ett»a8 9^u^Itd)em (Bat.). We are speaking of something useful. Words. SDet gtiiljltng spring. etn SlrBetter a workman. ba$ better the weather. bie 2Itbett the work. ba8 ©tfttf the morsel, piece. bte ©efnnbljctt (the) health. ba8 S3tet beer, bie 9fttld) milk. fd)toad) feeble, weak. fttfd) fresh. angeneljm agreeable, pleasant. roofynen to dwell, live. niifcttd) useful. tt)td)ttg important, fitg sweet. bltnb blind. bie Sllpen the Alps. blew blue, gtan grey. bie ^tanffyett the disease. fd)n)atj black, toetjj white. bet 53ed)er the cup, goblet. gefctljtltd) dangerous. bie 9£etfe the journey. ttoEbtingen to perform. bie ©lite the kindness. unmet always. Reading Exercise. 37. 1. 3)te fiiften .tttfdjen fyaben etnen angcnefymen ©efd)maet ttebltdje grilling ift gefommen. 3d) I;abe bie ptaaV ttqen fontgttd)en ©djlb'fjer gefefyen. 3d) faufe gutcn, alten, totfyen 2sem. ©eben ©ie tnit fnfcbeS (new), ttetfceS 23rob. $tet ift fdjoneS, totfyeS ^aptet. £)iefe gran ©etfauft gnte, frtfdje, fiige Wild). 2tteme ttebe, afte, gnte Gutter ift fefyv franf. flleute ga= mitten tooljnen in fleinen §aufetn. 2. 23et (in) fd)Bnem 25etter geljen totr fyajteren (take a walk), bet fd)led)tem (bad) bletben toirju Jpaufe (stay at home) . ©eben <5te mit etn @k« fitge, fttfd) e 9Dmd), nnb etn ©ttid gute3, ttetgeS SBtob. -iRene gtennbe ftnb ntd)t unmet gnte fjteunbe. 3d) fyabe 3fynen etn>a8 SSidjttgeS *n fagen. SBtffen ©ie ettoaS 9tfene$? 3d) toetjs (I know) ettoaS 9ceue8; aber e§ ift ntd)ts 5Ingene^me8. JlufgrtOc. 38. 1. Here is sweet milk. Have you [any] good red wine? Do you like strong beer? The Alps are high mountains. I want (btaud)e or toihtfdje) cold fresh water. The girl sells beautiful flowers. The brave soldiers have severe (fdjtnete) wounds. The rich Jews had little old houses. There (ba) is a poor litfle blind girl. The good mother gives (gtebt) ripe cherries [to] her diligent children. Mr. Asher wears (tragt) a (Ace.) green coat, a blue cloak and a grey hat. A good book is a 1 ) good and faithful friend. It was on a (in etnet) very dark night. The king had a gold cup in his hand. 'j See the foot-note p. 96. Lessoa 19. 101 2. The diseases of little children are often dangerous. My good and amiable cousin is ill; 'I.hafe, seen many dear friends during my long journey. TKey" received me" (fie em* pftn^ett mid?) with great kindness. Clever workmeii; are, always sought [for] (gefud)t). Feeble women *V$taittT# cannot ' perform this work. I am in good health. "Old 'people, young men and women, and little children, walked (ghtgen . . . fpajteren) in the beautiful garden of our kind friend. Read (lefett ©te) something good and useful. The courage (Sftuu), m.) of the brave soldiers was great. Conversation. fft btefer %\v§ tief (deep) ? Sftetn, er tft ntd)t fel;r ttef. ft ftaxl fleigtg ? 3a, er tft em ftet^tger fnabe. 2Ber §at biefeS fdjone 23ifb gc* (Sin beritfjmter, beutfe^er Scaler. malt (painted)? SBelcfyeS tft fein Aflame? (Sr Ijetgt SBhtterfyalter. 2Bo jtnt? 3fyre tteben SHnber? <5te fmb in memem nenen §aufc. §abenar3. bern ber Sftaben? §aben iite, etnen fd)toar* etnen toeigen §ut? jen nub euten toetjsen. Nineteenth Lesson. Degrees of comparison. 1) The comparison, in German as in English, is ef- fected by two degrees, the comparative and superlative. 1) Participles are declined like adjectives. 102 Lesson 19. The, comparative degree is formed by the addition of er, or w^en the adjective ends in e, only r; the superlative by adding ft or jle, precisely as in the English language. Further tjie vowels, a, 0, U are changed in most mono- syllables into (i/o/u'in both degrees. Comp. Superlative 1st form. 2nd form. SKetcfy rich reicfrer ber, bte, bag retd)ft*e or am retcfyftetu fd)6n handsome fd)bner * > * fdjonfte * am fdjonften. lartg long longer * * * lanafte * am lanaften. alt old alter * * * alt(e)fte * am altjten. arm poor firmer * * * armfte * am armften. ftarf strong ftrirfer * * * ftarffte * am flarfftetu . fvomm pious fvimmter * * * frommfte * am frommften. 2) In the comparative degree of adjectives in el (not cr or en) the e is dropped before I, as : ebel noble, Comp. ebler, | Sup. ber ebelfte. bitter bitter, ,, bitterer (not Bittrer), | „ ber bitterfte. 3) In the superlative of adjectives ending in three consonants or in a hissing sound (j, $, g, jcfy) an e is often inserted before ft for euphony (cfte), as: Comp. Superlative degree. ©djled)t bad fdjledjrer geredjt just o,ered)ter fur$ short iiirjer fiijj sweet fitter ber fd)Ied)tefte or am fdjledneften. geredjtefte * am gerecfyteften. fitrjefte * am furjejten. fufcefte * am fiijjeften. Note 1. Adjectives ending in t with another consonant before it, may also insert a euphonical e in the superlative degree, as : alt, Sup. ber ciltfte as well as ber attefte; fait, Sup. ber taltefte or ber fattfie. Note 2. Sometimes the word alter is prefixed to the super- lative, as: ber aller ftarffte meaning the strongest of all. 4) The first form of the superlative ber (bte, ba£) retcfyfte, ber (bte, ba$) ftarffte :c. is the attributive form of the superlative, and is only used when followed by a noun (which however may also be understood) , as : 2)er reicfyfie Sttamt the richest man. !Der ftarf} te Mdn the strongest wine. 3)ie 9?ofe ift bte fct)i5nfte SBtume the rose is the finest flower. 5) The second form am retcfyften, am ftarf ft en ic. is invariable, and used, when the adjective is found after the auxiliary verb fettt (to be), being the last word of the English sentence, as: Degrees of comparison. 103 £)iefer 2Bem tj* am ftarlftctt this wine is (the) strongest. £)tefe Sftofe tft am fdjonfteu this rose is the most beautiful. (£8 ift am neueften (fdjonften) :c. it is the newest, finest &c. Note 1. Another adverbial form of the superlative is: 5luf'3 fcefte, auf§ fd)6nfte K. in the best, finest &c. manner, and a few superlatives of this kind take nothing but ft. Such are: augerft extremely; Ijodjft highly; fyofticfyft most politely; ergebenft most humbly ; fveunbUdjft k. Note 2. The following monosyllabic adjectives change the vowel neither in the comparative, nor in the superlative: SBlafj pale, bunt speckled. falfdj false, frol? merry, fyofyl hollow, fyolb kind. Uty bald, farg scanty, flar clear. Inapp close, scarce. lafym lame, matt languid, mori'dj rotten, nacft naked. platt flat, painty clumsy, rolj rude. ruub round. fanft soft, fdjlaff slack. fd)lanf slender, jrarr stiff. ftol$ proud, ftumpf blunt, toll mad. tool! full. jal;m tame. Note 3. In like manner the monosyllables ending in Oil, as: lait lukewarm; Mail blue, etc., and all adjectives of two or more syllables never admit of the modification ; as : — blutig, bloody, bluttger (not bluttger); — frudjtbar, frudjtbarer; artig, arttger ; befannt, befaunter jc. 6) Some adjectives and adverbs are irregular in the degrees of comparison, viz. : Comp. §od) high Ijofyer higher rtctfye near nofyer nearer grog great, large griper greater gut good tnel much X>\dtpl. many ttentg little ttemge pi. few aern willingly catt> soon bcfjer better mefyr more mefyrere several |toeme« j less ) (mutter) j less icentgere fewer lieber (rather) Superl. ber IjBdjfte or am r/b'djftcn. fcer nadjfte, am nacfyften. t>er gvotfte, amgrofcten. ber befte, am beften the best. t>er metfte, am meiftenmost. bie metften most, am roemgfteit \ (am mtnbeften) ) the iea£?u t)te mentgften the fewest, am Uebften (I like best), am efyeften the soonest. efyer, fritter sooner Note. A few comparative and superlative degrees, origin- ally formed of adverbs or prepositions, have no positive ; these are: Superl. bcr aufjerfk the extremest, utmost, bcr innerfte the innermost, bcr obeifte the uppermost, bcr untcrffc the lowest, undermost. Comp. SDcr aufjcre the exterior (outer) ; bet innerc the interior, inner; tcr oberc the upper, superior; bcr untcre the lower, inferior; 104 Lesson 19. Comp. Super I. bcr mittlerc the middle; bcr fytntere the hinder, hind-; bcr toorbere the front-, fore — bcr ntittclfie the middlemost, bcr fytuterfte the hindermost. bcr Dorberfle the foremost. 7) The declension of the comparative and superlative degree is subject to the same rules as the positive form, and depends upon their being preceded by an article, or not, as: First form. Second form. Comp. Singular (Masc). ein fyofycrer S3aum. cineS tyefycrcn 33aiime8. etncm fairer en 33aum. cincn fyofyercn 53aum. N. bcr fyitycre 93aum the higher tree G. bcS fyofjeren 53aumcS of the higher tree D. bem btffyeren Saum to the higher tree A. ben fyitycren 23aum the higher tree Plural. N. and A. bte fyoljcren Saumc the higher trees | — fyofyere ©aume. Neuter Singular. N. hf A. etn fdjeitercS £>au3 a prettier house G. etneS fdjoneren §aufe3 of a finer house D. etnera }d;oneren §aufe to a finer house. Superlative. N. hf A. t>a§ fd)cufte §au3 the prettiest house G. be$ fdjonften §ctufe3 of the prettiest house D. bem fdjonftett §aufe to the prettiest house. Plural. N. hf A. bte fdjertfiett §au[er the prettiest houses G. bet fd>i3nften ^pdufer of the prettiest houses D. ben fcfybnften §aufertt :c. Third form. Sing. Masc. Norn, befferer $affee, Ace. fceffercn $affee better coffee. Fern. N. hf A. fdjtoarjere $>inte blacker ink. Neut. N. hf A. fd)onere3 ^Better finer weather. Third form. Plur. . Plur. N. hf A. fcfyonere 33tumen. G. fcfyonerer 33(umen :c. Note. We must remark that, when two adjectives are com- pared with one another, which seldom occurs, this must be done by the word me^t (= rather). Ex.: (Sr toax me|r glttcfttdj ati tabfer. He was more (rather) successful than brave. 8) In comparative sentences, as followed by an ad- jective and as, is rendered in German by efcenf o — a(6 or tine, and not so — as, by ntcfyt fo — aU or tine. Ex. : (Sr ift ebenfo jung aU tcfy or tine id) he is as young as L Lesson 19. 105 $atl toot ntdjt fo gliidttcfy, ate fein gteunb SBtfljelm. Charles was not so happy as his friend William. 9) As — again answers* to the German nocfy e in mat fo or boppett fo — * Ex. : (St tft nod) etnmat fo alt (or boppelt fo alt) ate (or tote) tdj. He is as old again as I. 10) When a relation between two comparatives is expressed, the English the — the before them is to be translated jc — befto. Ex.: 3e I;ol)er bet 33erg, befto ttefet ba§ Xfyal. The higher the hill, the deeper the valley. 3e tufytget em Seben tft, befto glitcfltdiet ift e3. The quieter a life is, the happier it is. (See the 36th Lesson on the Conjunctions, 3rd class.) Words. jDev (See the lake. bie 9?ad)baun the neighbour,/. ba$ 2#eet the sea. ber gclb^cvr the general. em S3eild)en a violet. ba3 231ei (the) lead. bet 2lblet the eagle. ba$ ®upfer copper. bet Sliigel the wing. bte <3tdffe the strength. bie $taue the claw. bet 2Beg the way. bet Sptat^ the square, place. gefunbeit found. btett wide, broad. tief deep, ptdd)ttg beautiful. bte Nugent virtue. letdjt light. fdjatf sharp. bet ©totd) pi. ©totdje the stork. fretgeBtg liberal, ftteug strict. bet §al3 pi. §alfe the neck. unglitdlta) unfortunate. bte ©aite [pi. — e) the goose, ungefd)tcft unskilful. bet ©ttaug [pi. — e) the ostrich, toeit far. oft than. Reading Exercise. 39. 1. £)et Brette Slug. 2)et btettete ©ee. £)aS brettfte Stteet- 2>et Slug ift tief; bet (See tft tiefet ate bet Slug; bag 2fteet ift am tief (ien. $atl tft flatlet ate SQSttyefat; et xfS bet ftatffte $nabe. Sftatte tft ftettfta,et ate et Siblet tft bet ftatffte $oge(. St tyat bte Icingften ftlttgel unb bte fcfyatfjten fallen . 3m gtuljttna, finb bte Sage fittjet ate tm (Sommet; abet tm SGBtntet finb fte am fittjeften. £)a3 ©tlbet tft 1'oftbatet ate ba$ fupfet. 2>aS ®olb tft MS loft* batfte 2fletaH. SBetn tft beffet ate SBter. 3)te fpantfd>en SBeine finb bte beften (SBeme). £)tefet Sftalet ift ntd)t fo beriifymt ate' fetn SSatet; abet feme 33tlbet finb ebenfo (as) ftfyon. Unfet £5nfel 106 Lesson 19. (Dfyetm) tft eoenfo retcfy ats unfer better; after er ift ntdjt fo gliicf* Itcfy. $)er befte $affee fommt au§ Slrabtert. 3e fruiter (sooner), "befto beffer. e, § 10) better (the) men are, the iiappier 2 they iare*). Augustus was more successful than brave. The more, the better. It is best. We are richest, when {weim) we 3 are imost 2 contented. Alexander was as ambitious (efyrcjet3taj as Caesar. I am as tall (grog) as you, but my bro- ther is not so tall as you. Conversation. 2Beld)er $Iug ift Bretter, ber £>er 9tycm ift fcici fcretter. 9ie(far ober ber 9ft)cin? 3ft SBttyemt ftarfer *to ffarl? 3d) bettfe (think) ,- flavl ift ftarfer. <5inb bte ret^ften Seute immer £>a3 ift md?t immer ber $afl (the antiQlMtdjften? case.) IMo^tftbaSfoftoarfte^etatf? £>a§ ©olb ift ba« foftoarfte. $tber ttetdjeS tft am nut?ltd)ften? 2>a§ (Stfen ift am mi£ltd)ften. SBelcfyeS fmb bte Beftcu 2Beme? 2)te fpanifdjett SBetne. 2Bofyer' fommt ber fcefte $affee? 2)erbefte$hffee fommt auS^raoten. "28eld)e« tft bte fdjonfte 23iume? Dime Btoetfet (no doubt) bte Sftofe. 3ft 2ufrcb alter al« e§ ift ba§ ftarffte £*>ier? 2Be(d>eS ift bet grogte gifdj? §ctben en? $ennen ©tc eine fdjonere 23tume al« t?te SKofe? SBelcfyeS ift ber faltfte Sflonat in £>eutfd)lanb? ©te ftnb mdjt ganj (quite) fo reif al« bie 23trnen. 2)er (gle^cmf ift bag ftarffte. ®cr SMftfa (whale) ift bcr (jrogte Don alien gtfdjen. Sftem, abet id) f>aBe befjem 2Bein. ©ie ift fefyr fcfyon ; fie ift bie fd)onfte t>on ben brei (S^roeftern. •iftein, id? fenne feine fcfybnere. 2)cr Wlomt Mannar if* bet falteftc. Twentieth Lesson. ON THE NUMERALS. (,3a^tt)orter.) g The numerals are of two kinds, namely: Cardinal and Ordinal numbers. I. Cardinal numbers. ©runfyaJjlen. (Sin, eine, cin or ein§ one. ^roet two. brei three. tier four. fiinf five. fed)3 six. fieben seven. acfyt eight. nenn nine. jefyn ten. elf eleven. jtoolf twelve. breijefyn thirteen. Dterjefyn fourteen. fitnfeefyn fifteen. fed)$efytt sixteen. ftebemefjn seventeen. acfytjeqn eighteen. neunjefyn nineteen. Jttxmjtg twenty. ein unb jtoanjig twenty one. # jtoei nnb jreanjig twenty two." brei nnb jtoanjig twenty three, oier nnb jtoanjtg twenty four, fiinf nnb jtoanjig twenty five. fedjS nnb jtoanjig twenty six. fieoen unb Jtoanjig twenty seven. adjt unb groan^i^ twenty eight, neun unb &ttan$tg twenty nine, bretjjig thirty. etn unb bretgig thirty one, &c, oievjig forty, funfjig fifty. fcd)jig t sixty, fiebenjig seventy, acbtjig eighty, neunjtg ninety, fyunbert*) a hundred, fyunbert unb etnS a hundred and Jloetfyunbert two hundred, [one. bretl)Unbert three hundred. Oicrbunbert four hundred, funfljwtbert five hundred, &c. tcmfenb*) a thousand. *) A hundred and a thousand are in German simply ljunbert and taufenb (not cin fytnbert JC.) ; but the English one hundred, one thousand is rendered by ctnbunbert and eintanfenb. 108 Lesson 20. jtoettaufenb two thousand, jefyutaufenb ten thousand, fitnfjigtaufenb fifty thousand. fyunberttaufenb a hundred thousand, etne Sttitlton' a million. 1800, eintaufent achtfyunbert — or adjtsetynfyunbert. 1805, eintaufent) acfytfyunbert (nub) fiiuf — or adjtjetynljmtbert fiiuf. 1852, eintaufent) ad)u)unbert jtoei unb funfjtg or acfytjefynfyunberi jroet unt) fiutfjig. Observations. 1) The first number etn, eine, ein (joined to a noun), but etnet, einc, eine$ or ein§ (when without a noun), is declined like the indefinite article, which is ia. fact the same word. When used as a numeral, more stress is employed. The plural is only employed with the definite article: bte etn en the ones or some, in which case it is considered as an adjective. 2) We must here observe that the English practice of putting one or ones after the adjective is not admissible in German. When therefore it occurs in English, it cannot be translated, as: a good one = etn guter [masc), or if feminine, etne gute, neuter = ein guteS. Isote. The two numbers j ir c i and bret have an inflexion for the genitive and dative case, when used before a substantive with- out the article: 2>ie ©lcid?l)eit jroeier 2)mctfe the equality of two triangles. 2)a8 SBiiutmtfj breiev ftonige the alliance of three kings. 3) All the numerals up to fyunbert may take the inflection Ctt for the dative plural, when not immediately followed by a substantive. It is however better, not to inflect them at all. SSon breten of or from three. | nut fihtfen with five, unter jrcanjtg among twenty. 4) §unbert and £aufenb, when nouns, are declined, as: N and A. bae§uubert a hundred; bte §Mtberte the hundreds, (tie) £aufenbe (the) thousands. 5) The hours of the day or night are expressed as follows : What o'clock is it? Bie tnel Ufyr ift e3? Two o'clock fttti Ul)t. A quarter past two etn 23tertel nad) $tuet or auf bret Half past two I) alb bret. [(towards three) . A quarter to three bvei 23tertel auf btei or 1/4 *>»* bret. At three o'clock urn or am bret Ufyr. Note 1. With minutes we reckon as in English. Ex.: Ten minutes to five jefyn TOnuten fcor (or big) 5 llfyr. Five minutes past two fiiuf 2fttnuten nadj jroet. Note 2. In before a year must be translated tmSa^T. Ex. : In 1870 tm Satyr 1870. Numerals. 109 6) A person's age is expressed as in English. Ex.: How old are you? SSie alt ftnb ©te? I am twenty years old id) but Jtoanjig 3»afyre alt. 7) The numeral adverbs are: (Stltmal once; jtoctmal twice; bretmal three times &c. 8) By adding txlci to the cardinals, the variative numerals are formed; as: etnertet of one kind; jtoetevlei of two kinds; bmevlet; mererlet; jetntevtct; tnancfyevlet of several kinds ; ctelerlct of many kinds; atlei'tet of all kinds. These words admit of no inflexion and precede the noun. 3ria,en ©te mit jtoeterlei %u&), blaueS unb fd)tt>arjc8. Show me two kinds (or sorts) of cloth, blue and black. 9) The multiplicative s are formed by adding the syl- lable fad) (or faltig) to the cardinal numbers; as: etnfad) simple, single bveifacb triple, threefold ^toeifad) j twofold mcvjad) quadruple boppelt j double jetynfad) tenfold, &c. 10) Sing le, meaning separate, is translated einjetn; but in the sense of only, it is eiti^tg. Ex.: Single words einjeme SBorter. Not a single word fetn etnjtgeS SBort. 11) Only, when an adjective, is also rendered etnjtg, as: My only son mem einjiger ©oljm. Words. fete ftveunbfdjaft friendship. ber SBaHcu the bale. ba§ ©djaf , pi. ©d)afe, the sheep, ber gctnt the enemy, elite 3tege a g° at - gcboren born. bag ©d)n?ein, pi. — e, the pig. ber 3 u for the sugar. bic tul), pi. $ift)e, the cow. bie 3Keile the mile, bet £)d»fe [2nd decl.) the ox. bte 9?ctto(utton' the revolution. bet (Stutoolmer the inhabitant, erne 3n|et an island, bte ©d)tad)t the battle. SStanb Iceland. ba§ Oafyr the year. bte ScmmtooUe cotton. bte 2Bod)e the week. ber Sfteifenbe the traveller, teben to live, nte^v at3 more than, mat times. Reading Exercise 41. 1. -3d) fyabe nut (only) etnen 23ruber. ©te Ijaben nur etne ©d)n>efter. SDte $reunbfd)aft btefer bret Scanner. 2ft etn Dfyeim ^attc newt Sinber. (Sr Ijat bret ©ofyne unb uter £oa)ter cerloren. gwtf ^ferbe fyaben jtoattjta, $uf;e; bentt (for) jebe# $ferb Ijat trier f^iifee. Unter (among) bretfttg 5lcpfe(n n>ar ntcfyt ein guter (Obs. 2). (Sine 28od)e fyat fteben £agc. (Sin Sag fyat trier unb jtuanjig ©tunben. 3)tefc« 2)orf tyat ad^et^wtbert jtoct unb 110 Lesson 20. ttwaitjtg (gimoolmer, unb breilmnbert adjt unb breigig §aujer. 3el;n unb filnf nub soterjtg madjen fiinf unb funfjig. S2 unb 67 marijen 149. 2. 33ier mat (times) 8 ftnb 32. — ©tefcen mat 9 finb 63. — 21 mal 32 ftnb 672. 3d) bin geboren (was bom) im Satyr 1814, unb mem jiingfter SBvuber im Satyr 1818. Sftatyomeb lebte im Satyr 622. 3m3atyr(e) 1492 tyat <5olumbu8 SImerifa entbecft (discovered). £)ie Reformation in £)eutfd)tanb begamt im Satyr 1517. (®ic ©tabt) Sonbon t)at 800 ©tragen, 550 tirctyen unb brei SftilUonen (Sintootyuer. SBtr tyaben 99 fallen Saumtootte ge= lauft. 2)er $ihttg tyat metyr als ^toanjig ©differ ($a(ajle). 3)ie §einbe tyaben metyr ate bretgig ^anonen uerloren. JlufGaOe. 42. 1 . My neighbour has three houses ; I have only one (nut eine3) . Our cousin has five houses. The peasant has 24 sheep, 18 pigs and 11 goats. He has also 5 horses, 8 cows and one ox. A month has 30 days. February has only 28. A year has 12 months, 52 weeks or 365 days. I am 17 years old; I was (bin) born in the year 1835. My father is 48 years old; he was (ift) born 1822. I have bought 46 pounds f^funb) [of] sugar and 100 pounds [of] coffee. In the year 1848. — 3 times 9 make (madjeu) 27. Thirty five and 42 make 77. I have lost a hundred florins. Is it three o'clock? No, Sir, it is half past three. 2. The city [of] Strasburg has 5400 houses and more than 60,000 inhabitants. How much is 8 times 15? 8 times 15 are 120. The battle of (bet) Leipsic took place (fanb ftatt) in the year 1813. The French revolution began (begamt) in 1789. Iceland is an island, it is 400 miles long and 150 broad. We arrived (finb angefommen) in (im) October 1852, and set out (abgereiSt) in January 1853. The traveller has seen more than thirty two towns and ninety five villages. Show me three kinds [of] paper, blue, green and brown (braun) . II. Ordinal numbers. These are formed of the cardinals by adding the termination tt from two to nineteen, and jie to the remainder, beginning with twenty. The first and third however are irregular, making ber erfte, bet btitte. They are declined like adjectives. The 1st ber (bie, ba«) erfte, the 2nd ber jtoei-te, the 3rd ber brttte* the 4th ber oierte. the 5th ber fiinjte. the 6th ber fecty§te. the 7th ber fiebente. the 8th ber adjte. the 9th ber neunte. the 10th ber jetynte. Numerals. Ill the 11th bet elfte (etifte). the 12th ber jtoolftc. the 13th ber bret'jefyn'te. the 14th ber ttterjefynte. the 15th ber fiinfedjnte. the 16th ber fed^efynte. the 17th ber jtebenjefynte. the 18th ber acfytjelmte. the 19th ber neun^eljnte. the 20th ber $t»an$ta,*ftc* the 21st ber em unb jtoanjtgjie. the 22nd ber jtuetu. jtoanjtgfte. the 23rd ber bret u. gtoait^t^fte. the 24th ber trier u. jtuanjtgPc the 30th ber bretgigfte. [etc. the 40th ber merjigfle. the 50th ber fiinfjtgfte. the 60th ber fed^tgfte. the 70th ber fieben^tgfte or fteb* the 80th ber adjtjtgfte. feigfte. the 90th ber neuujtgfte. the 100th ber fyunbertfte. the 101st ber fyunbert unb erfte. the 102nd ber ^unbert unb jroettc. the 120th ber I)unbert uub ywaxi* jtgfte, k. the 200th ber jteet'ljim'bertfte. the 300th ber bretfyunbertfie, :c. the 1000th ber taufenbfte. the 2000th ber j^ettaufenbfte. the 10,000th ber jelnttaufenbfte. the last ber (bte, ba§) lefcte. the 1255th ber jtoolfljwtbert fiinf unb ffoifrajie or ber taufenb jtueifyunbert fiinf unb futtfetgjte. Observations. 1) In compound numbers, the last only can be an ordinal; the others remain cardinals, as: $)er Ijmtbert trier unb $n)an§tgfte the 124th. 2) The ordinals are declined as adjectives in the three genders ; the form of the declension depends upon their being preceded by an article, or not, as: 3)er jefynte Sttcmn the tenth man. Cren.be^ jefynten SftanneS of the tenth man &c. Sftetn britteS ©ta3 my third glass. 3) The date is expressed as follows: On the tenth of May am 3el)nten Wax or ben lOten 2ftat. What is the day of the month = ber ttrietrielte tft Ijeute? It is the 8th e$ tft ber adjte or tt)ir Ijaben ben 8teiu 4) 2)er erfte and ber lei^te assume sometimes a comparative form, when referring to two persons or objects: ber, bte, bd# erftere the former; ber, bte, ba$ le fctere the latter. 5) Of the ordinals are formed the distinctives by the addition of the termination ettS. These are in German: (SrftenS (or erftltcfy) first (ly). jtueiten3 secondly. brtttenS thirdly. triertenS fourthly, &c. jejjntenS tenthly. elftenS eleventhly, &c. 6) The fractional numbers (with the exception of \)alh half) are also derived from the ordinals, by adding the word £l)eU, which however is commonly abridged into tt\ t as: etn SDritt^eU or Srtttet a third; ein SiertljeU or SSiertel a quarter; 112 Lesson 20. em gfinftel jc; ein Scfyntel; cm g^lfte!; brei 2Id)tel 3 /s tns ; tier §nnbertftel 4 /ioo tns ; (tcben £anfenbftel Viooo^s; &c. 7) §alb half and gan^ all, whole, are adjectives and placed after the article, as: %/ 2 jc. These expressions mean two whole ones and of the third the half only &c. Instead of jtixit'balb, which is not usual, we say anbcrtljalb, which signifies one and a half and is xm declined. Ex. : Slnbcrtfyalb 3a^c one year and a half, toiertfydb (Sflcn three yards and a half. We may however say with equal propriety, bret nnb etne Ijalbe <£He or bret ©Hen nnb etne fyalbe. Words. £>er 23anb the volume. mefleidjt' perhaps, bie glafdje the bottle, flask. er ftarb he died. baS 3al;rt)un'bert the century, bag s 3Utet the age. bte Piaffe the class. feet* £fyee tea. fettig, ready, ber ^3apft the pope. bte 9?egie'rnng the reign, bet ijerjog the duke. uerfyei'ra'tfyet married, bet §afe the hare. fleigtg, industrious, diligent. SBvilffcl Brussels. Reading Exercise. 43. 1. £)er erfte Sttotmt be3 britten 3af>re§. £)er jtoette Sag bet merten 2Bcd)e. 3)a« fed)«te Senftet be§ merten ©toaS (story). §err Sftc-btnfon roar 32 2Bod)en franf; in bet btei nnb bretfngften ftarb et (he died) . 3afob ber 3^ cite (James II) ftarb in $tanf* teidj ben (or am on the) tuetjelmten (September 1701. ©eorg III. (ber 2)ritte) rourbe (was) ben 22ften September 1761 in ber Seft* ijiinfter^btci) (Abbey) gefront (crowned). (5r toar bet fetner £l;ron*23efietgnng (accession) 22 Safyre alt. 2. Subimg XIV. (ber ^ienelmte) ftarb tm 3al>r 1715; Snbnrig XV. tm 3af>re 1774; Subnnq XVI. tm Safyre 1783. £>ret nd)tcl finb bte §atfte Don bret Sterlet. SHefeS tft mem fiinfteS ©la*. £>ie Stan toar anbertfyatb 3al)re franf. $ter ift jtocterlei 2Bem, rotter unb rociger. SBiemel Ufyr (what o'clock) t[t c«? (S« tft fiinf Ul)t ober tnefleidjt ein SSiertel auf fedj«. §cinrtd) ber 2ld;te, $i5nig fccn (Snglanb, roar fedjvmal fcerfyeiratfyet. <&ufnaB<\ 44. 1. The first day. The third year. I have the fifth volume. The second week of the seventh month. This is our sixth Lesson 20. 113 bottle. The eighth year of the nineteenth century. The child was a week and a half old. Charles is the twentieth in his class. March is the third, June is the sixth, and December the last month of the year. The duke of (toon) Marlborough won (getoann) the battle of (bet) Hochstadt on the 12th [of] August 1704. He died on the 16th of June 1722. 2. (The) Pope Gregory (©vegor) {the) VII. was an enemy •of the emperor Henry IV. (Gen.) Edward III. took (nafym) Calais on the 3rd of August 1347. I was five times at (in) Paris and four times at Brussels. We set out (ftnb abgeretft) •on the 26th [of] November 1850, and we arrived (ftnb cm* gefommen) on the 14th of April 1851. Peter (-(Seter) the Great died at (in) St. Petersburgh on the 8th February 1725, in the 53rd year of his age and in the 43rd of his reign. Tell me (fagen <2>te mtr) what o'clock it is. It is four o'clock or half past four. I shall go out at (um) a quarter to five. Conversation. 2Bte ©tele tinker %at £>erv (Sr f^at 6 $inber: 2 (Sofyne unb 23rotmt? 4 £ocbter. SSte alt ift fetn altfter <5o^>n? (Sr ift 18 Sabre alt. 23te alt ift feme jitngfte £ocfyter? ©te ift fiinf 3aljre alt. 3n toddjem 3at?rlmnbert leben 28tr leben im 19ten 3afyrl)unbert. tofc? SBte oiel ftnb 30 unb 50? 30 unb 50 ftnb 80. ilBte oid ift 12 mat 12? 12 mat 12 ftnb 144. 28aren 6te geftem aufber3agb 3a, geftern unb l)eute (to-day). (out hunting) ? 28a8 fjaben ©tegefcfyoff en (killed)? 28tr Ijaben 13 §afen gefd)offen. SBdcfyen ^afc (place) fyat ©eorg (Sr ift fdjr ftetfctg, er fyat unmet in bet ©cfyule? (always) ben erften ^3(a^. Xtnb fetn ©ruber Salter? ©alter tft bet 26fte in fetner£laf|e. SBann nmrbe tart V. aeboren? (§r nmrbe geboren tm 3afyr 1500. 3Bann ftarb ^5eter ber ©roge? 2tm (or ben) 8ten ^ebruar 1725. me alt ttar er? ©r ttar 53 Safyre alt. §aben i>lf. tonnen ©ic mtr fagen, nriefctd 3dj f)abe fehteUfyr; aber e§ mag Vfyx e3 ift? f;alb jtoet U$r fetn. 3ft e§ ein SBtertd auf rier? (g$ ift bret SBiertet auf oier. Um toteotd Ufyr fpetfen ©tc? 3d) fpeife (dine) um 12 Uljr. ltmn5teoidU^rgd;en6te3u53ett? Um 10 Ufyr ober Ijaib 11. OTTO, Gorman Conv.-Grammar. 114 Twenty first Lesson. The Verb. 2) a $ 3 e 1 1 tt) o r t General Remarks on Verbs. § 1. There are five kinds of verbs, viz.: 1) active- ox transitive ; 2) passive; 3) neuter or intransitive ; 4) re- flective, and 5) impersonal verbs. 1) A verb is active or transitive, when the action requires an object or person acted upon: 3d) effe I eat (what?) etnen 5lpfel an apple. 3d) liefce I love (whom?) metne ©d)tt>efter my sister. We see that effen and lieben are active or transitive verbs. The object is commonly in the Accusative, some- times in the Dative. 2) A verb is considered passive, when the action con- veyed by the verb, is suffered by the subject itself: SKehte @d)toefter tout) son mir geliebt. My sister is loved by me. $)te 3lepfel tterben gegeffen the apples are eaten. 3) A verb is termed neuter or intransitive, when it implies a state or an action which does not pass over to an object, but remains with the subject: 3d) fd)lctfe I sleep (you cannot say: / sleep something). 3d) gefye I go (not: I go somebody or something). 4) A verb is reflective or reflected, when the object to which the action passes over, is the same person as the subject : 3d) imterfyatte mtdj I amuse myself. (£r tettete fid) he rescued himself. 5) Impersonal verbs are without any relation to a person or thing doing the action expressed by the verb : (£g fd)nett it snows; (£g recjttei it rains. § 2. With regard to their outer form, they are either roots or derivative verbs. All derivative verbs are regular. Note. Prefixes, of course, do not make a verb derivative. Of evgeben or angeben, the radical is not ergeb* or cmgeb*, but geb, er= and an* before geb* being prefixes; hence such verbs are not to be termed derivative, but root-verbs with a prefix or compounds. The verb. 115 § 3. Verbs are inflected by person, number, tense and mood. There are three persons and two numbers. Verbs have six tenses, to denote the time of the action, viz.: 1) The Present', 2) Imperfect ( Preterimperfect) ; 3) Perfect; 4) Pluperfect; 5) First Future; 6) Second Future. § 4. Verbs have six moods to denote the different relations of the sentence to the speaker, viz. : 1) Indi- cative; 2) Subjunctive for Conjunctive) ; 3) Conditional; 4) Imperative; 5) Infinitive; 6) Participle. § 5. There are two different ways of conjugating German verbs; the one is called the modern or regular form, the other the ancient or irregular form. All the verbs are accordingly divided into two great classes : 1) Regular or modern verbs. 2) Irregular or ancient verbs. Regular or modern verbs. A verb is called regular when the vowel or diph- thong of the radical syllable remains the same through- out, when the Imperf. ends in te> and the Part, in t. Ex. : lofc-en — loB-tc — gelofc-t. The modern or regular conjugation comprises, besides many other root-verbs: 1) all those verbs whose radical vowel is o, u or eu. Such are for example : with o : *) fyoleit to fetch ; (oben to praise; fjoffen to hope ; ftopfert to knock; focfyert to boil; loljnen, geljorcfyen :c. withu:*) fucfyert to seek; fd)u(fceti to owe; murren to murmur; fummen to hum, &c. with eu : beugen to bend ; jeugen to witness ; fcfyeuert to shun, &c. 2) those verbs whose radical vowel is modified, viz. : a, 0, XL and CM, as : — to&rmen to warm ; r)oren to hear ; fufyren to lead; tr&umen to dream. Note. The following verbs, being irregular, are the only exceptions : *) The only exceptions to these rules are: 1) with o: font men to come (see the irregular verbs Nr. 42) ; ft oft en to push (109). — 2) with u: rufen to call (110). (These figures indicate the number of the irregular verb between p. 158 and following.) 8* 116 Lesson 21. with a: gebaren to bring forth (Nr. 23); galjren to ferment (139). with 6: fdjttoren to swear (148); eriofcfyen to become extinct (135). with ii: tizgen to lie (142); betriigen (betriegcn) to cheat (111). 3) all verbs ending in $ en, den, d) ten, gnen, etn, cm, tgen and tren or teren, as: tcm^en to dance; padtn to pack up ; acfyten to esteem ; regnen to rain ; fcfymetcfyeltt to natter; beffern to improve; fiinbtgen to sin; ftubtren or ftubteren to study, &c. Except: ft£en to sit (13); Baden to bake (155); erfdjrecfen to be frightened (21) fedjten to fight (137), and flet^ten to twist 138). Formation of the tenses. The Present tense is formed by detaching the final n from the Infinitive, as: 3d) (obe I praise or I am prais- ing (from lob en to praise) ; id) fud) e (from fud) e n to seek) . In the Imperfect the syllable tt (sometimes etc) is added to the radical, as: Iob*te from lob=en; l)or*te from Ijor-en; rebate from reb*en. The Past participle is formed by prefixing the syl- lable QC, and by the addition of t (sometimes tt) , as: ge= lch>t, Qe-I)br*t, ge*ret*Ct All simple and compound verbs (L. 31) take this gc.*) The first future is formed by combining the auxiliary id? foerbe with the Infinitive: icfy toerbe (oben, id) toerbe l)oren, id) tcerbe veben. The Perfect and Pluperfect, by combining the aux- iliary i cfy I) a b e , i d) I) a 1 1 e :c. with the Past Participle, as : id) Ijabt gefobt, id) fyaht gd)ort, icfy fyaht gerebet; Pluperfect tdj Ijattt getobt, icfy tyatte gc^ort :c. This is quite analogous to the conjugation of the English regular verbs. The terminations of the different persons of the Pre- sent and Imperfect tenses are as follows : Present. Imperfect. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. -tt or ete —ttn or etcu teft or eteft —tet or etet (n) -tt or etc, —ttn or etett. *) Not those compounded with inseparable particles, where the prefix ge is dropped (see p. 121, 5). 1. — c —en 1. 2. —ft or eft —t r tt or Ctt 2. 3. — t or tt. — Ctt» 3. Regular verbs. 117 Conjugation of a regular or modern verb. Soktt to praise. Indicative. Subjunctive. Present Tense. 3d) lobe*) I praise, lam praising bu lobft or left eft thou praisest et (fie, e$) lebt he (she, it) praises man lobt people praise ttrir loben we praise tl)t lobt or lobet ) ye praise or ©te loben } you praise fie lob en they praise. 3d) lobe I [may] praise bu lobeft thou mayst praise et lobe he may praise nut lob en we may praise U)t lobet ) ye may praise ©te lob en \ you may praise fie lob en they may praise. 3d) lobte I praised bu lobteft thou praisedst er lobte he praised tttr lobten we praised U)r lobtet) ye praised ©te lobten \ you praised fie lobten they praised. Imperfect. 3d) lobte**) (if) I praised bn lobteft thou praised er lobte he praised nut lobten we praised U)t lobtet ) ye praised ©ie lobten i you praised fie lobten they praised. Perfect. 3d) Ija&C . . gelobt I have praised bu ffttft gelobt thou hast pr. et l)at gelobt he has praised etc. etc. 3d) Ijabe gelobt I may have pr. bu l)ctbeft gelobt thou mayst h. pr. et fyabt gelobt he may have pr. etc. etc. Pluperfect. 3d) Ijatte . . gelobt I had praised feu Ijattejt gelobt thou hadst pr. et Jjatte gelobt he had praised. 3d) Ij'dttt gelobt (if) I had praised bu fy&tteft gelobt k. et fyatte gelobt :c. First Future. 3d) loetbe . . loben I shall praise bu ttnrft loben thou wilt praise et nrirb loben he will praise nut ioetben loben we shall pr. u)t toetbet loben ) ye will pr. ©te toetben loben } you will pr. fie toetben loben they will pr. 3d) toetbe loben I shall praise bu roerbeft loben thou wilt praise et toetbe loben he will praise nut toetben loben we shall praise u)t toetbet loben / ye will pr. £?ie toetben loben ( you will pr. fie toetben loben they will praise. Second Future. 3d) toetbe gelobt I)ctben I shall have praised bu roitft gelobt fyaben :c. :c. K. 3d) toetbe gelobt fyaben I shall have praised bu toetbeft gelobt fyctben ic. :c. :c. *) or lob' in the familiar way. — •*) or lobcte. 118 Lesson 21. First Conditional. Singular. Plural. 3d)n>itrbe . , loben I should praise toir trmrben loben we should pr. bu toiirbeft loben thou wouldst^. tl)r toiirbet loben you would pr. er toitrbe loben he would pr. fie toitrben loben they would pr. In the same manner, conjugated with other auxiliaries of mood: Potential. 3d) fann loben I can praise. t(^ mttjj loben I must praise, id) tmtt loben I will praise. 3d) fonnte loben I could praise, id} foflte lob en I ought to praise. id) tooUte loben I would praise :c. Second Conditional. 3d) toiirbe gelobt Ijctben or ^atte gelobt I should have praised bit toiirbeft gelobt Ijaben or fyatteft gelobt thou wouldst have pr. k. Imperative. Sobe or lob' praise (thou). lobennnrorlafjtnnSloben) let us et foil loben let him praise. totr tooHen loben (praise, fie foflen loben let them praise, lobet or loben Sie praise (you). Infinitive. Pres. loben or jn loben to praise. um ... JU loben (i:i order) to praise. Past, gelobt fyctben or gelobt 311 Ijaben to have praised. Participles. Pres. lobenb praising. Past, gelobt (gelobet) praised. Note 1. The English mode of conjugating the verb to be with the addition of a Part. pres. cannot be rendered literally in German, but the corresponding tenses must be given, as: Pres. I am learning id) I erne; he is learning er lemt 2C. Imp/. I was learning id) lernte; he was learning er temte. Per/. I have been learning id) Ijabe gelemt K. Note 2. Interrogative /orm: Do I praise? lobe id)? does he praise? lobt er? Did I praise? lobte id)? or ijabe id) . . . gelobt? Did you praise, lobten ©te, or ^aben ©te gelobt? ' Negative: I do not praise td) lobe . . . nid)t he does not praise er lobt nid)t. I did not praise id) lobte . . . nid)t, or id) Ijabe . . nid)t gelobt. Do not praise loben <5ie ntdjt. The inflection of regular verbs (Principal parts) , is thus : td) liepe — licfc-te — ge-lieft. Such are : Sieben to love, like, leben to live, to be alive. Jjolen to fetch, to go for. fd)icfen to send. banfen (dat.) to thank, fanfen to buy. legen to lay, to put. fud)en to seek, look for. Lesson 21. 119 tnacfyen to make. fteHen to place upright, lad) en to laugh. $ etg en (dat.) to show. Tcetnen to cry, weep. leeren to empty, fragen to ask. fitHert to fill, facjen (dat.) to say, to tell. rnljen to rest, fptelen to play. toafyten to choose, lefyren to teach. btenen to serve, ^oren to hear. flagen to complain, lemen to learn. tooqnen to live, to dwell, ftrafen to punish. braucfyen to need, to require, cerffyetbtgen to defend. Words. £)er Secret the teacher, master. 9ftemanb nobody. bte Shtfgaoe the exercise, lesson, ber Sarm the noise. ber £afyn the cock. ba$ £atf>, pi. $alber, the calf. ba§ Sttng, pi. — e, the thing, trage lazy. Banen to build. ^er §anbfd)nlj, pi. -e, the glove, finben to find. Itegen to lie. bte $itd?e the kitchen. fraljen to crow, tapfer brave. tie •jftacfyttgatt the nightingale, fcerbtenen to deserve. loer Sftefcger the butcher. btef en 3Jf org en adv. this morning. Reading Exercise. 45. 1. 3&) IteBe meinen 33rnber. £)n IteBft betne ©d^efter. ^Dte gtfdje teben tm 2Baf(er. 2Ba8 !aufen ©ic? £)er £ontg tjat «in ©cfylog gebant. 3)er Ifttaoe lernt. $)er 2efyrer fyat btefen <5d)iiler geloot, tr>etl (because) et fet)r fletgtg ift. £)er $nabe Ijat 'feine 5utfgaBe ntcfyt gelernt. ®et 3Sater ftraft ben tragen ilnaben. '3)te Sautter fptette nut bent $tnb. 2)te tapferen ©olbaten toerben Vie ©tabt fcevu)etbtgen. 3d) fer)e (see) ba$ fptelenbe $tnb. £)te Uttntter nmrbe toetnen, toenn bag $tnb franf toare. 2. 2Btr loben ben pei^tgen <2d)iUer. /. — e, the thing. Der Sttegen the rain. ber @t)rift, pi. —en, the Christian. ber £ob death. bte ^od)in the cook, /. bie Wau$ the mouse. ber $fetfd)er the butcher. gefyordjen to obey. bte Seition the lesson. fcertljctbtgen to defend. Beading Exercise. 46. $>er 5ttann rebet 311 met. 2Bir rebet en itbcr ben $rieg (war). Oeftem I)aBe id) im ftluffe gebabet. 2Ba§ fyaben ©te geantroortet? 3d) anttoortete 9ttd)t§. 2)ic ©filler arbeiteten ntd)t ciet. 3d) ^anble red)t. £>n fyanb el ft unrest. 2)ie £)ame rocute nid)t au8* gefyen; fie fitrdjtete ben Sftegen. §aben ©ie (Sngtifd) ftubtrt? iftetn, id) fyaBe bie beutfd)e ©rammatif ftnbirt. 2)a$ ©d)log tft jerftort. 9?lein 9?ad)bar I)at fetn §an$ cerfanft. 2Q3a« roitn- fd)en ©ie? 3d) fannte ben SSflann nid)t. 2Str fennen bie guten <£igenfd)aften ber $bnigin. 3dj benmnberc bte fd)i3nen 33htmen in Severn ©arten. 2Ber bradjte biefen SBrtef? $)er 23rieftrager Ijat il)n gebrad)t. -Sc^tDugte ntd)t, bag (that) ©ie fyier finb.*) £nf$abe. 46a. 1. The boy works not much. I answered: Yes, but he answered: No. We have waited an hour. We feared the rain. The woman talks too much. Do you admire this beautiful tree? I admire a fine picture. People (man) 2 al- ways 1 admire (admires always) new things. You know the good qualities of that lady. I fear the dog. I feared the cat. A good Christian does not fear (the) death. I have not worked 1) In poetry Imp. fenbete. Part, past gefenbet. 2) 2B enben (to turn) admits of both forms: Imp. id) ttenbetc and td) tvanbte; Part, getoenbet and getocmbt. 3) French savoir. 4) The present tense of toiffen is conjugated as follows: u$ wei§, bit roct§t, er wetfj; Plur. n>ir totjfen, ©ie rciffen, ftc rotffcrt. *) The conjunction bo§ throws the verb last. Lesson 21. 123 much. I have studied my lesson. Did*) you think (have you thought) of me (an mid)) ? Fear nothing, I shall defend you. 2. Did you think*) of (an, ace.) your poor mother? I shall always think of her (an fie). The president has not esteemed his friends. He does not love them (fie). The but- cher kills 2 an 3 x 1 to-day; yesterday 2 he * killed two calves. I liked the little girl, but she did not like me (mid)). Men (t)ie 2ftenfd)en) should love one another (einanber). What did*) the cook {/.) buy? She bought butter and eggs. My nephew has bought two horses. The children have killed a mouse. He saved his life (£eben, neuter). Conversation. 2Ber tent? 2)er tnabe tent. 2Bo teen bte $ifd)e? ( ©ie teen im SBaffer. SBarum ad)ten ©ie btefe %xau 7 . 3d) ad)teif>re guten(£igenfd)aften. 2Ba3 fiird)tet bag 3ftabd)en? ©ie fiird>tet ben Sftegen. lIBarum ftraft ber 33ater feinen (5r Ijat feine 2(ufgabe nid)t ge* ©oint? tent. 2Ber fyat bie ©tabt t?ertr)etbtgt? $)ie tapfern (brave) ©olbaten. 2Ser liegt ba? ©in fdjlafenbeS ttnb. 2Ben (whom) tobt ber Setter? ©r lobt bie ftegigen ©d)iiler. ilann er and) bie tragen toben? £rage©d)itteoerbienen (deserve) ten Sob (praise). 2Ba$ cerbienen fie? ©ie oerbienen ©trafe. 2Ben foil man lieben? 2lfle guten Sftenfdjen. 2Bem f often bie^inber ael)ord)en? 3fyren (Sltern unb Setjrern. $at ber §afyn getrcifyt? 3a, er Ijat jfoeimal gefraljt. unb ftaS gefauft. 2Sa$ berfauft biefe grau? ©ie berfauft 23trnen, $epfel, Ipftaumen (plums) unb ^itffc. 2Ba8 lefyrt biefer 2eJ>rer? (gr te^rt ftranjbfifd) unb (gngtifdj. §at ber 3fte£ger einen £)djfen 9?ein, er fyat jtoei falber ge* gefd)lad>tet? fd)lad)tet. §aben ©ie bie 9tod)ttgalt geljort? 3a, fie fingtljerrlid) (beautifully). Heading -lesson. Sffop. Aesop. ^Cfo^ retf'te einmal in eine Heine ©tabt. UntertoegS 1 be* aegnete er ein-em Sfteifenben. liefer griifcte 2 ilm (him) unb fragte: „2Bie tang mug id) gefyen, bt£ (till or before) id) jene ©tabt erreicfye (reach), bie (which) ,. n>ir bon toeitem 3 fefyen?" „®et)'", (Go on) ant to or tete Sfop. 1) on the way. 2) griifjen to bow, to greet. 3) afar. *) The English Imperfect tense is mostly rendered by the Ger- man Perfect tense, as: I bought it id) fyabe e§ gefouft; especially in a question, as: Did you think? fyaben ©ie . . gcbod)t? J 24 Lesson 22. „3cfy n>et§ tr>ol>I" (well), ernneberte (replied) ber SKetfenbe, ^bajj (that) id) gel) en mug, urn 4 bort* anjufommen 4 ; aber ta> bitte 6 bid), mtr ju fagen, in tote&tel ,3ett ty bort anfomnten toerbe." j&tif," nneber^otte? tfop. 3d) felje (see), bad)te ber grembe, ber fterl* ift ein Warr 9 , id) loerbe U)n ntd)t meljr 10 frag en, unb gtng fort (went on). Wad) einer Sftutute rtef (cried) Sfop: §e ein 2Bort! in jtoei ©tnnben rotrft bn anfommen." £)er SKetfenbe toanbte 11 fid) urn unb fagte: „2Bte id e i g t bu e3 jefct (now), unb toarum 12 fyaft bu mir e8 ntd)t corner 13> gefagt?" — 5tfop emu eberte: „2Bte fonnte id) e§ 2)ir (you) fagen, bebor id) beinen ©ang (or ©djrttt) 14 gefefyen fjatte?" 4) (in order) to arrive. 5) there. 6) I beg or pray thee. — 7) repeated, said again. 8) this fellow. 9) a tool, mad. 10) no- more. 11) tocmbte fidj urn turned round. 12) why. 13) before. — 14) gait, pace. Twenty second Lesson. Passive Voice. The passive Voice, both for the regular and ir- regular active verbs, is formed by means of the third aux- iliary toetben with the Past part, of a transitive verb : ®ettebt nnrben to be loved, ©etabett toerben to be blamed. Conjugation of a passive verb. ©dobt tterbett to be praised. Indicative Mood. Present. Imperfect. 3d) toerbe . . gelobt I am*) bn roirft gelobt thou art er nurb gelobt he is totr roerben gelobt we are u)r toerbet gelobt j ye are ©ie toerben gelobtj you are fie toerben gelobt they are 3d) nmrbe . . gelobt I was bn rcnvbeft gelobt thou wast er nmrbe gelobt he was n)ir ftnrben gelobt we were tfyr tourbet gelobtj ye were ©te nmrben gelobt J you were fie nmrben gelobt they were B. Perfect. 3d) bttt . . gelobt toorbett I have been praised or I was praised bn b t ft gelobt toorben thou hast been praised er ift gelobt toorben he has been praised *) or I am being praised. Passive Voice. 125 totr finb gelobt toorben we have been praised ibr fetb gelobt toorben ) , » , , , <3ie finb gelobt toorben i >' ou N have been P ralsed fie finb gelobt toorben they have been praised. Pluperfect. 3d) tOQV . . gelobt ttJOrbeil I had been praised bu toarft gelobt toorben thou hadst been praised er toar gelobt toorben he nad been praised \X>ix toctren gelobt toorben we had been praised etc. First Future. ■3d) toerbe . . gelobt toerben I shall be praised bn toirft gelobt toerben thou wilt be praised er fciiri gelobt roerben he will be praised toir toerben gelobt toerben we shall be praised ibr toerbet gelobt toerben | . n , . -, ®ie Verben gelobt »ert)cn I y° u Wl11 be P ralsed fie toerben gelobt toerben they will be praised. Second Future. 3d) toerbe gelobt toorben fein I shall have been praised DU toirft gelobt toorben fein thou wilt have been praised k. :c* Subjunctive Mood. Present Tense. SDajj id) gelobt toerbe that I (may) be praised „ bn gelobt toerbeft thou (mayst) be praised „ er gelobt toerbe he (may) be praised „ toir gelobt toerben that we (may) be praised :c. K. Imperfect. 3d) toiirbe gelobt (if) I were praised bu toiirbeft gelobt thou were praised er toiirbe gelobt he were praised K. K. Perfect. 3d) fei gelobt toorben I may have been praised bu feteft gelobt toorben thou mayst have been praised er fet gelobt toorben he may have been praised 2C. K. Pluperfect. SSenn id) gelobt toorben to are if I had been praised toenn bn gelobt toorben toareft if thou hadst been praised toenn er gelobt toorben tocire if he had been praised K. 2C. 126 Lesson 22. First Conditional. 3dj toiirbe getobt toerben I should be praised bit toiirbeft getcbt tuerben thou wouldst be praised er toitrbe gelobt toerben he would be praised :c. k. Second Conditional. 3d) tDiirbe gelobt to orb en fetn / T , ,, . , . t or i$ id are gelobt loorben ( l should have been P raised bu irmrbeft getobt tooiben fetn thou wouldst have been praised er toiirbe gelobt toorben fetn he would have been praised IC, K. Imperative. Sing, ioerbe gelobt.*) P/wr. toerbet gelobt be (ye) praised. Infinitive. Pres. gelobt toerben or gelobt ju toerben to be praised um gelobt $n toerben in order to be praised Past, gelobt toorben fetn or ju fetn to have been praised. Participle. Pres. JU (obenb to be praised.**) Such are : geftraft toerben to be punished, jerftort toerben to be destroyed, getctbelt toevben to be blamed, geadjtet toerben to be respected, belofynt toerben to *be rewarded, oerborben toerben to be spoiled. Words. jDer SXrbettcr the workman. bte §t£e the heat, ber ^etnb the enemy. 3ebermcmn everybody, ber §of the court. betrogen (P.p.) cheated, deceived. Itctdjlaffig negligent. cerbeffert corrected, improved, arttg good, nnarttg naughty, gefprocfyen [P. p.) spoken. er)rltcf> honest, roett because, gerufen [P. p.) called. r)i5fli(^ polite. fdjledjt bad. toofylfett or btfltg cheap, gegeben given. geftoljten (P. p.) stolen, beaten to pay. con by. toenn if. bte ©pradje the language. gefcfyrteben written. Reading Exercise. 47. 1. 3d> luerbe toon meinem Setter gelobt. ^ 3)n roirft nidjt oon tl)m gelobt, benn (for) bn btft ntdjt fletRtg. ®er nn- *) This Imperative is hardly ever used. When a passive Im- perative is required, it is commonly formed with fei pi. fetb. Ex. @ct gelobt or geprtefen, o ©ott! be praised o God! **) The Latin laudandus, a, um. This participle stands before its noun as an adjective, and is declinable, as: An action to be praised eine ju lob en be Jpcmbumg. Passive Voice. 127 artige $nabe tetrb nic^t oon feiner Sautter gelo bt teerben, 2)ie unartigen fnaben teerben ton ifyren (Sttern geftraft teer* ben. 2ftarie tetrb immer bon intent Sftufiftefyrer getabelt, toeil fie nad)taffig ift -JMne (Souftne teirb oon 3ebermann ge* liebt, teeil fie immer artig nnb fyeftid) ift. 3)ie Wiener, teel&e fleigig finb, teerben befor/nt teerben, nnb biejenigen, teefrbe trage finb, teerben getabelt teerben. 3)ie ©tabt tenrbe bon ben ftein* ben jerftort. 2)te Slufgaben tenrbsn bon bem Server oer* beffert. £>er arme 2D?ann tenrbe bon bem ^remben betrogen. 2. $ar( ift geftraft toorben, teeil er unartig tear. 3>te Ufyren fonnten nid)t oerfcmf^ teerben, teeil fie jn (too) fd)led)t tearen. £>ie 9Kabd)en, teeldje U)re 2lufgaben gemadjt (done) fatten, finb betofynt loorben. 2)ie 2trbeiter finb gnt bejafytt teorbeu, ioetl fie oiel gearbettet fcaben. $on teem ift biefe Slufgabe oer* beffert toorben? ©ie (it) ift nod) nid)t oerbeffert toorben, teeil ber Server feine £dt^atte. ©elobt teerben ift beffer alS ge* tab el t teerben. liefer arme Shtabe muj$ belofynt teerben, teeil er fo elrriia) ift. 2)iefe 23riefe miiffen abgefd)rieben (copied) teer* ben, teeil fie fo fcfyted)t gefd)rieben (badly written) finb. Jvuffla6e. 48. 1. I am loved by my brother. This father loves his children, and he is loved by them (Oon ilmen). Mr. Bell is respected by all his pupils. The French language is spoken in (an) all [the] courts of Europe. This ring was given me by my good grand-father. By whom (3Son teem) was this letter written? I was called out of my room. Frederick has been punished by his teacher. Have the young plants been spoiled by the great heat? The roads have been spoiled by the heavy (ftarfen) rain. 2. This boy will be punished; he has not done (gemad)t) his exercise. He was punished also yesterday. This house could not be sold, were it (tecire e3) not so cheap. I am expected at five o'clock; my sisters are expected at seven o'clock. A false (falfcb) man is feared by everybody. This letter must be sent to the post-office (anf bie ^3oft) . My watch has been stolen. To be loved is better than to be hated (get)aJ3t) . Observations on the Passive Voice. § 1. The circumstance, that in English 'to be' is used both for denoting the passive voice and the copula with adjective -participles, renders the comprehension and employment of the German passive voice difficult for an Englishman ; for nothing in his own language in- forms him, when in a past participle construed with the 128 Lesson 22. auxiliary to be, a treatment suffered by the person repre- sented by the subject of the sentence, is indicated. The pupil therefore must always carefully distinguish, whether the past participle construed with to be expresses either the endurance of an action, or the existence in a State which is the result of such an action. In the first case to be must be translated with the German auxiliary tt) er b en , in the second with the auxiliary f etn. For example : This book is (being) much read btefeS 23ltcfy ttuvb fctel gelefett. My friend is convinced mem Sreunb tft iiberjeugt. A. When to be is translated iDCrbcn. § 2. Whenever an agent is mentioned, w r ith a past ^participle and the verb to be, it is considered to be the jpassive voice, and the verb to be is rendered toerbctt. Ex. : Present. 3d) tocrbc toon meuiem better geltefct. I am loved by my father. (I am being loved.) Impf. £)tefe$ (Sdjlog tottrbe t>on bem ©er^og erfccmt. This castle was built by the duke (became built). Per/. 2)te ©tctbt ift fcott ben gctnbett fcerfcrctnttt toorben* The town has been (was) burnt by the ennemies. § 3. When the agent is not mentioned, but under- stood, to be must again be rendered by tt>etben. Ex.: Pres. 3)te ^tfcfce merben mit yitfyen gefangen. (The) fish are caught with nets (viz. are in the habit of being caught by fishermen). Impf. 3)tefc8 ©cfy(oj$ murbe im 3ctf)re 1540 erBaut. Per/. 2>te Stabt tft mebergefcramtt m orb en. Note 1. To ascertain this, the sentence need only be put in the same tense of the active voice. If this can be done without altering the sense, the use of met ben is sure to be Tight. Ex. : 1) People catch (Pres. act.) fish with nets. 2Jion fSngt bic §tf<$e mit Wtfym. 2) The duke built (Imp. act.) this castle in 1540. 2)cr £er$og fcaute btefe« @d)fo{3 tm 3afyre 1540. 3) The enemy have burnt (Per/, act. J down the town. 2>te gcinfcc fyaben bic ©tabt ntcbergefcrannt. All these active sentences are quite synonymous with the labove passive sentences. Note 2, In English, this passive sense is sometimes in- dicated by the Part. pres. being, added to the Part, past, or by the Part. pres. itself. It may be also rendered by Utrttt. Passive Voice. 129 The house is being built or is building baS §au8 tomb geBaut or man fcaut ba« £>au8. Breakfast is preparing ba8 griifyfiiicf tomb (eben = just) gemad^t, or man mac^t ebcn ba8 grityfiiW. Here the pres. tense of the passive voice denotes an action in progress or just taking place. It denotes also a habit, as in the above sentence: 2)te ^tfcfye roerben mtt Sftefcen gefancjen = fish are (usually) caught with nets. Examples of true passives with tocrbcn. Alcibiades was*) banished from Athens. 2Uctbtabe8 tourbe au$ 2ltfyen' cerfcannt. This lesson must be learned. 3)tefe 2luf gabe mug gelernt toerben. Carthage was destroyed by the Romans. $artt;ago rourbe con ben foment gerftort. (The) young trees are planted in spring. 2)te junaen Saume roerbeu tm ^ru^lina gepftemjt or 9ft an pftanjt trie jungen 33dume tm ^rufyling. B. When to be is translated feitn § 4. Sometimes the participle past expresses a state or condition which the subject has already attained, a property, as it were, of the subject. It is then no longer esteemed as a verb, but as an adjective, and the auxiliary to be which is connected with it, must be translated fettt. For instance, w r hen we say: The lady is dressed, we do not mean to say: The lady is being dressed, but rather: The lady is ready, the action of dressing is over ; dressed therefore has here the value of an adjective, and the sentence must be translated : 3)te 2)ame tft angcfletbet {a state). Note. On the contrary, the English expression: The lady is being dressed is rendered in German: 2)te 2>ame tonrb [thtw) angeflctbet. Second Example. — The glass is broken : £)a$ (§Ha8 iji jer&rocfyen. To express this in the active voice, the tense must be changed; it would then be: Somebody has broken the glass. Thus is broken has here the meaning of: has been broken, but not of is breaking or is being broken. When therefore is or are is equal to has been or have been, they must be rendered ifi or finb, and not unto or toetbett, because they indicate a state. *) In French: Ale. fut banni d'Athenes (= became banished). OTTO, German Conv.-Graramar. 9 130 Lesson 22. Third Example. — The gates of the town are shut, means, they have been shut, and are now found closed (in Latin : clauses sunt) , and must be translated : 2)te £ljore ber ©tabt ftnb gefdjloften. — Whereas: »The gates are shut every day at eight o'clock« must, according to § 3 be translated: £)ie Xfyore toerben jeben Rag, urn ad)t Ufyr gefd)Ioffen (clauduntur) . They are in the habit of being shut every day at 8 o'clock or man fdjtiefjt bie £()ore jeben £ag urn 8 Uljr. § 5. In a similar manner, the Imperfect was must be translated tt> at instead of tourbe, when it has the meaning of had been. Ex. : The glass tvas broken, before I came into the room. 2)ag ©tag nmr ^erbrodjen, elje id) tn'g gimmer * am - (In French: Le verre etait casse.) The gates were shut (= I found them shut). 2)ie Sijore to at en cjefdjlofjen. Examples of adjective-participles. I am inclined or disposed id) Hit (jenetgt. I am convinced it is true id) Bin iiberjengt, bag eg tocfyx ift. We were astonished nnr tear en erftauttt. The bottles were emptied bie §tafd)en toaren geteert (= leer) . The castle is destroyed bag ©djlog ift jerftort. The copy-book is soiled bag Jpeft ift befd)innfct (= fdjmnfctaj . § 6. In the compound Preterite (Perfect and Pluper- fect) the English auxiliary : / have been fyc. and a Part, past is always translated: 3d) bin ... toot ben. Ex.: I have been invited id) Bin etngelaben ttJorbCtt* The book has been found bag 23ud) ift gefunben to orb en. You have been seen ©ie ftnb gefel)en toorben. If they had been rewarded toenn fie belofynt tuorben toaren. § 7. Active verbs, which govern the dative, can only be employed in the third person singular with e§, in the form of passive impersonal verbs ; but not in the other persons as in English. Ex. : t n , i e£ nnrb tntr erlanbt (not idj toerbe erlanbt) I am allowed \ QJ . mm ^^ mi ^ He is allowed eg nrirb il)m erlanbt or man erlanbt tljnt. I was allowed eg tenrbe mir erlanbt (man erlanbte mtr). We were allowed eg tonrbe nng erlanbt or man eilanbtenng. Lesson 22. 131 My brother was advised c§ nmvbe metnem 23ruber ge* ratten or man §at meinem SBruber geratfyen. Words. 3)er er ©olbat ift in ber ©dj(ad)t cerrounbet morben.*) oie roerben morgen con metnem Ojeim jum TOttageffeu etn* gelaben merben. 3l)r ^Setter ^aul ift aud) eingelaben roorben ; abet er nrirb $u §aufe bleiben. ©uftat> Ibolpfj, $6utg son on 3ebermamt t>erad)tet ju merben. 3)iefe Arbeit ift fefyr (much) betimnbert roorben. SDte SCrbeiten ber ffraulem 9?ofa roerben aud) berounbert tcerben. £>ie $erfd)roorung be§ (Satalina roare melteidjt nid)t entbecft roerben, menu G>icero nid)t CEonful getcefen mare. JMtf&ftGe. 50. 1. I am praised by my teacher. We are loved by our father. You are esteemed by your neighbour. This house has been sold. The garden will also be sold. The enemy was (or has been) beaten (gefd)lagen . .) . A new plant was much (feljr) admired by everybody. The picture of Mr. T. will be ad- mired. The brave soldiers were praised by the general. Have many soldiers been killed? Charles and I are invited to (jit) a ball. Your sister and your cousin would also be invited, if they were**) here. Such a deed must be rewarded. That *) or nmrbe (was) toerttmnbet. — **) See the foot-note p. 78. 132 Lesson 22. man was formerly not esteemed. The flatterers ought to be despised. Carthage ($arti)ago) was destroyed by Scipio Afri- canus. The house is burnt down (aBgeBrannt) . 2. The child could not be saved. The castle was built in the year 1622. The stranger has been killed in the forest. Many soldiers have been wounded in the last battle. Clever men are always sought [for] . Rome was at first governed by kings. Henry IV. was loved by his people. His name is still esteemed. The industrious will be rewarded. Caesar was murdered by Brutus. Why am I not invited? This is an action to be praised.*) I wish, James (3afoB) may (mod)te) be rewarded for his fidelity [Xxeut, /.). The most diligent pupils will be the most (am metften) praised. At (3n) the battle of (Bet) Narva 2 the 3 horse of Charles XII. t was killed under him. Conversation. 33on teem toirb 31)r ©oljn ge* (§r totrb eon fetnen Severn ge* tieBt? fteBt, toeit er fletgig tft. 3ft er and) Belo^nt toorben? (Stl;atemen^rei§be!ommen(got). SBetdje ©olbaten toerben getoBt? SDte taeferen. 2Bann teurbe bte ©djtactyt Bet 5lm 18ten 3uut 1S15. SBaterloo geltefert (fought) ? SSer teurbe Befiegt (defeated)? 3)te granjofen tourben Befiegt. SBann toirb btefeS §au8 eer* (£$ teurbe fdjon gejlctn eerfauft !auft toerben? (or ift . . . toorben). SBteoiel teurbe bafttr Bejafytt? 34 ntau ^ en ^ ^er^unbert ©ulben. SBtrb ber ©arten baju (with it) 9Reht, btefer (it) tetrb BefonberS gegeBen toerben? (separately) eerfauft toerben. Swollen ©te btefen 9tod)nttttag 3d) toiirbemtt31men aeljen, toenn einen ©eajtergang mit un$ t^nicfytjumTOttageff en (dinner) mad;en? Bet £>errn %. etngelaben tocire. SBon teem ift $artl)ago jerftort $on bem romifdjen (Sonful ©cipto toorben? 2lfricanu8. SBarum ift btefer Sttann geftraft G?r fyat etne gotbene lUjr geftofyten toorben? (stolen). Sett teem ift (Safar ermorbet SSon 23rutu8 unb (SafftuS, unb toorben? ehttgen anbem. Son teem tft bte 35erfcfytoorung $onbemrbmtfd)en(£onfui(5tcero. (Satattna'S entbecft toorben? 3ft biefeS £au§ fdjon alt? ©« teurbe tm 3aJjre 1741 erBaut. 2Bar £>einrtcfy IV. eon $ranf* 3a, er tear ber Befte tonig unb retd) etn guter $omg? teurbe eon fetnen Untertfyanen (subjects) tote etn $ater gelieBt. 2Bte ftarB er? (£r teurbe eon SftaoatUac ermorbet. *) See the foot-note **) p. 126. 133 Twenty third Lesson. ON THE PBONOUNS. German pronouns are divided into six classes, viz. : 1) personal, 2) interrogative, 3) demonstrative, A) posses- sive, 5) relative and correlative, 6) indefinite pronouns. 1. Personal pronouns. $krfonftc6e giirtoorter.) § 1. These are: t<$ I; buthou; er he; fie she; e$ it; XDXX we; \l)x (®tc) you; fie they. They are declined as follows: 1st personal: id) I. Sing. N. id} I iYwr. tint we G. meiner*) of me unferer (unfer) of us D. xsxxx to me, me un8 to us, us A. mid} me. unS us. 2nd personal: bu thou. Sing. N. bu thou PL i\)x (ye) or Sie you abt iljr eure 23itd)er? §aben ©ie Or)re §3iia)er? § 3. In the following expressions the construction of the two languages is different. it is we ro it fittb e3. It is I td) bin t3. it is he (she) ev (fie) ift eg. It was I id) Xoax e3. it is you ©ie ftnb e3. it was you ©ie toaren t§ ic. Personal Pronouns. 135 Interrogative. Is it I Bin id? e§? I is it we finb toir e§? is it he ift er e3? | is it you ftttb t. (St toBte un§. ©ie loBten ifyn roegen (on ac- count of) feineS gteigeS. 3d) roerbe morgen etnen Srief an tt)n fdrceiBen. 3d) £enfe an (of) btdj, — an «. ben $ut). Do you see that flower? I do not see it. ©efyen ©ic biefe SBlume? 3d) fe^e fie ntdjt. Will you buy the house? Yes, I will buy it. 2Botten©tet>aS$au«fcmfen? 3a, id) toiff e3 fanfen. In the plural it does not change, as there is only one form for all three genders, viz. ace. \xt; dat. tfynen: I will see them id) toitt fie fefyen. I give them bread td) gebe ifynen 53rob. § 5 . The pronoun e $ , when it expresses a thing, is only used in the nominative and accusative cases. In the genitive it is replaced by beffen or beffelbett (see § 8). $6 ift gems neu ** * 8 q 1 "** 5 new - 3d) Ijabe e§ (^4cc) getauft I have bought it. 3d) toetg e£ {Ace.) I know it. St bebarf befjen or bef|elben he requires it. § 6. It is referring to a person, is always C$ tji. Ex. : It is my brother t& ift mem SBrnber. They are, when followed by a noun taken in a definite sense, is translated: e3 finb. For example in answer to the question: Who are they WtX finb fie? we say: They are my brothers (sisters) &c. (S§ finb metne S3riiber (©djtoeftent) k. § 7. The pronoun of the third person C$ etc., either singular or plural, is hardly ever used with a preposition preceding, when it represents an inanimate object or an idea. Commonly the adverb ba, which coalesces with the preposition, is used instead, both for the dative and accusative, corresponding with the English words there- with, thereof, therein, thereupon 8fc, as: *) When it stands before the verb, it is Nominative. **) When it stands after the verb, it is Accusative (masc. = U)n) . Personal Pronouns. 137 jDamtt with it or with them, bartn in it or in them, baburd) through it or them, baboit of or from it or them, barauf upon it or them. bavatt# from it or them. bajlt to it or to them, babet \ . .. , ., baran J at xt or at them ' bavitber about or over it, them, barunter among them, bafiir for it or them. Exa-mples. 2Btr fhib bam it (Dat.) jufrteben we are contented with it. 28te ©tele ftnb bar in {Dat.) how many me in it (therein) ? 2Bir roerben b a ruber fpvedjen we will talk about it. Note. A similar contraction takes place with the adverb !jier with prepositions, as: fytermit herewith or with this; I)tertit in this; Ijierfco n of this; Jjterauf , IjierauS, Ijierbet, fyteriiber tc* § 8 . The pronoun of the third person, c t , fie, e 3 A in all its cases, is sometimes replaced by bet felbe, bte* felbe, ba$ felbe (lit. the same). This is chiefly the case when a misunderstanding might happen, or to avoid em- ploying together two words of similar sound, as : ifyltt ifyn or ti)n tf)nen. Ex. : 3d) fyabe btefelben ntd)t erljalteu. I have not received them. (Soft id) tfym ben ©tod geben? am I to give him the stick? 3a, gebert 3fyre ^Biic^er in 3t)rem 3^ mm ct? 3a, fie ftnb bar in. SSMen ©ie biefeS Sncfy lefen? 3d) toitt e3 3bnen tetfyen. 3d) f,abe e8 [mtr] gefauft. (Sr ift felbft gefommen. 3d) bin eg. 5ft fie eS? 3a, fie ift e8. ^arl ber 3 w ^fte fleibete (dressed) fid) felbft [an]. !£)er 5frtabe I)at fid) nid)t getoafdjen. 3d) bad)te ntd)t bar an. 2Btr ftnb bam it jnfrieben. $)er ©raf ^at e$ felbft gefagt. 3d) roeig 1#td)t« baton. JtttfgftB*. 52a. Where is my grammar? It is not here, I have not seen it. Who has taken the apple of the child? I have not taken it. Have you seen my pencil? I have not seen it. Have you lost your stick yourself? No, my son has lost it. I will go myself (§ 11). This wine is very good, I can recommend it (§ 8) to you. Will she bring it to you? Yes, she will bring it to me to-morrow. Jesus has given (gegeben) us the command: »Love thy neighbour as thyself« (§11 Note), but many people do not mind it (ad)ten utd)t bavauf). Do you know anything (iotffen cfter. 3ft fie e§ »trHi* (really)? 3a, fie ift e§ nurHtd). SBotten ©ie ben 23rief ffyretben? ^ein,mein©olntnmbifm fdjrciben $ann idj e8 felbft tfjun (do) ? 9?ein, en ? Hfttttoem ae^enen. <5$eljt fonft 3emanb (anybody Sfteine yiifyten (nieces) (Emma unb else) mit 3fynen? Suife gefyen audi mit mir. SBoUen ©ie fo gut (kind) fein, @8 t^ut mir leib (I am sorry), mir biefeS 23ud) ju leifyen? id} faun e3 3fmen tudjt leifyen. SBarum fonnen ©ie e8 mir nidjt SBeil id) e3 ber ^raulein ©rim leifyen? cerfprod^en (promised) fyabe. 1?Ber hrirb mtS begfeiten (ac- Unfer gveunb $• toirb un§ be* company)? gteiten. $ennen <5ie jenen ^remben mit 3d) fenne iljn nicfyt; tdj Ijabe iljn bem grauen §ut? nie (never) gefefyen. Twenty fourth Lesson. 2. Interrogative pronouns. (^ragenbe gihtoikter.) These are: 1) 2Bet who? 2Ba§ what? Declension, N. h>er who? G. toeffen whose? D. toem to whom? A. toen whom? n>a3 what? toejfen of what? nmS to what? nm8 what? 2B e t ? applies to persons without distinction of sex ; Ina 8? to inanimate objects. Ex.: 28 er ift ba? who is there? 2Ber ^at biefeS getfyau? who has done this? ffikffen §ut ift ba§? whose hat is this? 2Bem goben ©ie biefen^ing? to whom do you give this ring? 2Ben yat er gefragt? whom has he asked? 2Ba8 braudjcn <3ie? what do you want (need)? 293 a $ fucfyt er? what is he looking for? 33on to a 8 fjaben ©ie gef proven? of what have you spoken? Note. When such direct questions are placed in dependence on a preceding verb, they become »indirect questions«. Then, the verb comes last, as: 140 Lesson 24. SBtffcn ©te, roer btefeg gefagt fyat? do you know who said this? ©agen ©te mtr, xvai ©te gefefyen Ijaben tell me what you saw. 3etgen ©ie mtr, roaS ©tc gelefen fyabcn. Show me what you have read. 2) Seller? n>etd?e? metres (bon)? which {of)? and 2BaS fur etner, e, $? wAatf sortf? The latter is used without a substantive : SBetcfyer son 3fyren ©>ofyrten? which of your sons? SBetcfyeg ©on btefen 23itcfyem fyxben ©te getefcn? Which of these books have you read? §ter ftnb jroet 9£after'mef[er; roelcfyeg rooflen ©tc r)abeu? Here are two razors; which will you have? ©He Jjaocrt etnen ©tod 5 oerloren? 2Bag fitr etnen? You have lost a stick? What sort of a stick (was it)? NB. What before a noun is not a pronoun, but an interro- gative adjective, and already explained p. 69, 70; & 141, 2„ 3. Demonstrative pronoun ($im»ei[cnbc giirroiJrter.) 1) The demonstrative pronouns masc. ©tcfcr jener jberjentge (ber berfelbe ber namltdje (ebenberfelbe ber anbere masc. N. ber'jemge G. begjentgen D. bemjemgen A. benjentgen JV.ber*) tf.beffen D. bem A. ben fern. btefe jene biejentge bte btefetbe bte namttdje ebenbtefetbe bte anbere 2) Declension of berjeni(je. Singular. fern. neuter. biejentge bagjentge that berjentgen begjemgen of th. berjentgen bemjenigen to th. btejentge bagjentge that. 2) Abridged form bte bag that beren beffen of that ber bem to that bte ba3 that. are : neuter. btefeg this one. jeneg that (that one), bagjentge I that (of), the one. bag J (French : celui, celle) m bagfelbe bag namttcfye ebenbagfelbe the very same.) bag anbere the other. the same. Plural for all genders. bte jenigen those _ berjentgen of th. benjemgen to th. btejentgen those. bte those ber erf) of those* ben en to those- bte those. *) To distinguish this demonstrative pronoun from the definite article, more stress must be laid upon it. +) Sometimes also ber en. Ex. 3$ ^abe beren jroet (two of them). Possessive pronouns. # 141 Examples. Wltin <5tod unb berjemge (or t>er) mehteg 33ruber«. My stick and that of my brother (or and my brothers). (Sr fyctt fetn@e(b unb bagjemge (or bag) femeg^rteunbegberloren. . He has lost his (own) money and that of his friend (or his and his friend's money). Observations. 1) When the demonstrative pronoun this or that is not immediately followed by its subject, but is separated from it oy the verb to be, as for instance: vthis is my hat«, it takes in German the neuter form of the singular btefeg, with no regard to the gender or number of the noun. This little sentence must therefore be translated: btefc£ tft mem §Ut, although £mt is of the masculine gender (see also p. 69, Note 1)*) It is the same in the interrogative form : 3ft btef eg -3fyr §ut? — Instead of btefeg we often abbreviate, and say Meg or bdS or eg. Ex.: This (or that) is my dog btef eg (notbiefer) tft meht §uub. This is my daughter biefeg or bag tft meute £od)ter. Are these your brothers? fhtb bteg (bag) 3fyre ©ruber? These are his gloves bag (bteg) fhtb feiue § gebrad)t? i 3dj fdjreibe an metnen $ater, bn fdjreibjt an betnen (ben betmgen), Robert fdjretot an feinen. SDic ©efunbfyeit be8 $or* toerS l)at grogen (Stnflug (influence) attf bie be8 ©etfteS. 2Ba§ fott taj fagcn? 2Be(cfye3 toon btefen 2Keffern toollen ©ie laufen? 33on ioaS (tootoon) fpredjen ©ie? ^ufjjaOe. 54. 1. Who comes there? It is my friend Charles. Whose son is he? He is the son of Mr. It. To whom do you send this parcel? I send it [to] the bookseller. Who knocks at the door? To (an, ace.) whom have you written a letter? Of (toon) whom have you bought this black cloth? Whom do you blame? I blame my servant. To (mit) whom do you speak? Who is that young man? He is my nephew. What have you found in the garden? Which [m. stuff.) of (toon) these three sticks is the longest? This one is longer than that. Here is your pocket-book and that [of) your brother. That is right. 2. I have lost my [own] book and that of my sister. This is not my, pen ; this is my brother's [that of my br.). Are these your shoes (®d)m)e) ? No, they (e8) are my cousin's [those of my c.) . Your coat is old, mine is new. His house is small, yours is very large. My son does not work so much as yours. His ink is not good, ®urs is much better. Which is the highest mountain of America? Is that your garden? Yes, it is mine ; it [m.) is not so large as yours. Whose umbrella is this? Is it (e$) yours? No, Sir, it is not mine, it is Henry's [that of H.). If you do 3 not 4 fmd *your 2 stick, take mine [Acc.)^ 5. Relative pronouns. ($8ejiigft$e gilrttbrter.) These are: 1) nnlcfyer, n>e{d;e, t»e($e$ [who, which, that) (without a note of interrogation) , and 2)ber, fcie,ba$. 1) Declension of tt)dd)cr, weldje, tt)e(d)e$. Singular. Plural fern. neuter. for all genders*. masc. N. toetcfyer toeldje toeldjeS who, which G. beffen ber en beffen whose, of which D. toetdjem toeldjer toelcfyem to whom or which A. toelcfyen toetcfye toelcfyeS whom, which. toelcfye beren toelcfyen toeldje. 144 • Lesson 24. 2) Declension of the relative ber, Me, baS. JV. ber bte ba$ who, which, that G. beffen ber en beffen whose, of which D. bem bet bem to whom, to which Ji. ben bie baS whom, which, that, bte beren benen bte. They must agree in gender and number*) with, the noun they refer to. Ex. : $)er SJfamt, toelcfycr or ber . . ., | bte $ran, roetd^c or bie . . ., baS 23ucfy, toeldjeS or ba£ . . ., J bte S3iict)er, toelcfye or bie . . . It is peculiar to them to place the verb at the end of the sentence (or clause), Ex. : jDaS ©elb, tteldjeS tdj in ber ©trage gefunben Jjafce. Observations. 1) In English the relative pronouns whom, which, that, though understood, are sometimes left out after the noun; in German they must always be added, as : The boy I saw with you yesterday (instead of whom I saw) . 2)er $nafce, ben or n>elcfyen id) geftern bet 3fynen fafj. Here are the books you have ordered. §ier ftnb bte 23iid)er, roe!cr)e or bte <5te fcefteHt fyafcen. 2) The genitive beffen, beren, beffen, always precedes the word by which it is governed, like whose in English : A tree the branches of which are cut off, &c. (Sin 23aum, beffen 3Icfte afcgefyanen ftnb. 3) In the employment either of toelcfyer, toelcfye , fteldjeg or t»er, bte, bag, no difference is made between persons, animals or things. The only difference lies in euphony; the former has the advantage of emphasis, as it consists of two syllables ; the latter that of brevity, and is to be regarded as an occa- sional substitute only. Ex. : §ter tft ber 2Betn, ben (or toeldjen) ©ie Beflcflt fyaben. Here is the wine you have ordered. 2)er Warm, toelcfyer (or ber) mir bag 23udj fcradjte, bag (or tt>eld)e3) er gefunben Ijatte. The man who brought me the book (that) he had found. Note. SDer, bte, bag is always used after the personal pro- nouns, especially when these pronouns, for the sake of em- phasis, are repeated after the relative, as: *) not in case. Relative pronouns. • 145 3$ ber (not tocfcfyer) fo toiet fttr tyn t&at. I who did so much for him. 2Btr, bte Voit jcfct jung ftnb we who are now young. 4) The German relative pronoun roelcfyet or bet connected •with nidjt answers to the English conjunction but after a negative sentence, as: (£« gteftt fetnen SDlenfdjen, bet nidjt feme geljler $at. There is no man but has his faults. 5) When the relative pronouns are preceded by preposi- tions, they are often contracted with the latter, so that the pronoun takes the form of i»o« or toot* (before a vowel) and the preposition follows it, answering to the English whereof, whereby, wherefore ifc. The verb goes last. Such are: SBojlt to which or to what. roetauS from which or what, ttobutd) by which or what. roottn in which or what. iDomtt with which or what, rootitfcet at (over) which or what. TOoBet at which or what. tttorauf upon which or what. tuofiil* for which er what. roorcm at which or what, tttotooit of which or what. rootltntet among which. Examples. §tet tft bet ©d)(uffel, roomtt 1 id) trie STfyute gebffuet fya&e. Here is the key with which I have opened the door. 2)te ©lafet, rootauS 2 nrit gettunfen Ijctben, finb jetfctodjen. The glasses, out of which we drank, are broken. £>a8 3^ mmc % too tin 3 id) fdjlafc, tft fefyt fait. The room in which I sleep, is very cold. NB. As we see in the foregoing examples, the relative pronoun, even in its contracted form, requires the verb always at the end of the clause or sentence. 6) These contractions may be also used interrogatively, as: 2Bomtt (or mtt xoa$) fyafcen <£te bte Xfyiite geoffhet? With what have you opened the door? SSotoon fptecfyen ©te? of what are you speaking? Note 1. The real signification of these contracted words depends on the meaning of the preposition governed by a verb, as : What do you think of, must be translated: n) or an benfen ®te? because the German verb benfen requires the preposition an. Note 2. Persons cannot be alluded to in this manner, as: Of whom are you speaking, must be rendered: 23 on to em fyrecfyen ©ic? not SBoaon foremen ie? Words. *£>te ©tammattf the grammar, bet <&&)V&,ma&)e.x the shoemaker. t>a8 ®ebtd)t [pi. — e) the poem. ^tememb nobody. 1) or mtt ttefefyem. 2) or ait8 hjeWjcn. 3) or in tteld^em. OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 10 146 Lesson 24. jetgen reg. v. to show. bie Shtfgaoe the exercise, oerfceftern reg. v. to correct. genommen taken. gelie^en lent [Part. past). lefcteS 3af)T last year. Reading Exercise. 55. §ter ift t»er $nabe, tceldjer feut 23ud) oerloren Ijat. $)a ift DaS feud), toetdjeS (or bad) er oerloren I) at. $ennen eld)er (not »cr) tugenbljaft ift, nrirb glitdlid) fein. He who is virtuous, will be happy. Sttejentgen, n>etd)e tugenbljaft teben, fmt toetfe. They who live virtuously, are wise. SHejentgen or (Solcfye {viz. £l)iere), toelcfye im SBinter fd)lafen. Such (animals) as sleep in the winter-time. 2) Both or either may be declined according to the verb they depend on: 3d) gebe eS bemjenigen, tueldjeu id) am meifteu liebe. I give it to Aim whom I love most. 3d) fome benjenigen ntdjt, ten (toeldjen) [Ace.) ©temeiuen. I do not know him whom you mean. 3d) fenne biejenige (/.) ntdjt, tie [Nom.) ten S3rief brad)te. 3) The expression referring to a preceding neuter noun is in German baSjentge, tt>e(d;e$ that which. Ex.: $)a«ienige [viz. 23ud)), toeltfyeS id) eben lefe. That which I am reading now. 4) That which in a general sense is ba$, U>a$. Ex.: 3)a«, toaS fd)b'n ijt, ift nid)t immer gut. That which is fine, is not always good. 5) The correlative £)er{entge, toetdjer referring to a person, is sometimes contracted into 3GB e r , and £) a $ , tt>a$ into 2Ba£. Both require the verb at the end of the clause, as : 2Bet tugenbfyaft lefct, ift glitdttd). He who lives virtuously, is happy. SBctS Won ift, ift nidjt immer gut. What is fine, is not always good. 6) When toer and U)Ci$ are used in a general sense; they answer also to the English whoever, whatever. Ex. : 10* 148 Lesson 24. 2Ber &u fctel bebenft, nrirb toeing tetften. (®$intr-« fro. xtn.) Who (ever) considers too much, will perform little. 23 a $ geredjt tft, oerbtent Sob. Whatever is just, deserves praise. 7) 2Bcr and ma 8 are sometimes rendered more em- phatic by adding the words immer, aucfy or aucfy nur, audi) immer, as: 2Ber (and)) immer or toer aud) nur = (3eber, ber), whoever. 2Ba$ auc^ (immer) or maS aud) (nur) = 2lfle$ mag, whatever. 2Ber and) immer btefeS gcfagt l)at whoever has said this. 2Ba3 ©tc aud) gefefyen Ijabcn (mogen). Whatever you may have seen. Words. S)te $fli$t the duty. bte SBafyrfyett the truth. erfitum to fulfil, main* true. toerbtenen to deserve. efntid), red'tfcfyaffen honest. ba8 33ertrauen the confidence. flud^en to curse. baS ©Ia$ the glass. fegnen to bless. btefen^orgen adv. this morning. fyafjen to hate, tlutn to do. gebacfen baked. baS §eer the army. ber 2Betjen the wheat. nadVlaffig careless. l;art hard. baS $orn, ber Sftoggen the rye. unroifjcnb ignorant. tfyeuer dear. Heading Exercise. 56. IDerientge, meld-er vetd) tft, tft ntd)t unmet jufrteben. 3)te* jentgen, me(d;e unjufrteben ftnb, ftnb ntdjt glikfttd). 2Ber fetne ^flicfyt erfiitlt, tft ein redjtfcfyaffener SDJann. iUebet eueve ^etnbe; feguet bte, bte eud) ftudjen, tlntt ®ute$ ben en, bte eud) Ijafjen. (£r fagte nur, n>a$ er mupte. §ter ftnb eintge gebern, metdje molten ©ie I'aben? -3d) und bte ne^men, toeldje am bartfien tft. $Der $onig, beffen§eer gefd'lagen murbe (defeated), i ft geftofyen (fled). ®te Altera, ber en ftnber geftraft murben, futb nad'lafftg. SSovubet bettagen ©tc ftd) (complain)? jUtfoaOc. 5Ca. He ivho 3 will !not 2 learn will remain ignorant. What is true to-day, must also be true to-morrow ! They who do not speak the truth, deserve no confidence. I will give this book to him who is the most industrious. The little girl with whom Mary played yesterday, died (ftatb) this morning. The boy who found (fanb) the gold watch, is honest. The man whose name was written in my pocket-book, is arrived. Here is the glass out of ichich the king has drunk (getvunfen) . Who is the happiest man? He who is the most contented. The bread on which (iooOon) we live, is baked of (clVL$) wheat and rye. Lesson 24. 149 Conversation. 2Ber Ijat immer gemtg? 2)er jnfriebene Sftenfdj. SB en fyaben <5ie' getat>ett ? Sfteme trage ©djnterin. 2Ba$ tmtnfdjt ber Sttenfdj am 3)a«, n>a$ er tyofft (hopes). meiften ? 2Ber !(opft (knocks) an bie &$ ift ber ©dmeiber, toefdjer 3Ijren Satire? neuen Sftotf bringt. SSte§ toerben ©ie tlmn? 3d) twcig ntcfyt, roaS id) tlmn foil. 2Beffen ©djreibbnd) ift btefeS? (£« ift baS 3!>re3 ©d)iiler«. 2ln toen fcfyreiben ©ic biefen 3d} fdjreibe tl;n an metnen Seller. ©rfcf? 3ft 3fyr ©o^n alter al8 meiner? 9?ein, ber meinige tft jitnger. SBie alt ift er? (gr tft 11 3afyre att. §ter tft cut §nt, tft e$ ber 9Mn, ba8 ift nid)t ber meinige; 3fyrige (or 3fyrer) ? metner ift gan^ nen. <3inb bag 3fyre §anbfdntljc? 3a, bag finb meine. $on (on) toa8 leben bie <5d)afe? $on ®raS nnb §en (hay). Wlit t»a§ (SBomtt) Ijaft bn ben 3d) Ijabe tljn mit meinem ©totfe $naben gefd)(agen (beaten) ? gefd)lagen. 3ft biefer ©artett jn oerfaufen SDiefer nid)t, aber ber meincS (to be sold) ? 9?ad)bar8. 2Ba8 fagte 31jnen ber S3ebtente? (£r fagte mir, roa§ er geljort fjatte. 2Beld)e 9ttenfd)en finb bie nn* SDtejenigen, roeld^e mit 5Hlem un* gtitdttdjften ? gufricbcn ftnb. 2Bo ift ba$ ®(a$, an8 toeldjem 3d) t>abe eS in ben ©djranf (cup- (tooranS) id) getronfen fyabe'* board) geftellt (put). 2Bar e« nid)t meineS? -ftem, e3tt)arba$be3§errn@run. Reading -lesson, ©in tourer ilopf unb cut tooljlfctlcr. (A dear head and a cheap one.) Unter ber Sftegie'rung 1 be$ tefcten $onig3 oon ^olen brad) 2 etne ©mpormtg 3 gegen ifyn anS 2 . Sitter con ben (Smporern 4 , ein polnifdjer ®raf, fefete einen -PreiS oon 20,000 ©utben anf ben $opf be$ $onig8, nnb Ijatte fogar, (even) bie ^red)^eit& e$ bem $onig felbft m fdjreiben, nm 6 tfm $u erfdjreden. 5tber ber $onig fdjrieb? ifjm ganj faltblittigs fie fotgenbe Shttioort: „3fjren $rtef fyabt id) rid}tig« erl) alien 10 nnb gelefen. @8 i>at mir met 35ergnttgen gema^t (given), ju fel)en, baft metn 5?ovf y^nen fo met toertfyi 1 ift; ic^ cerfidjere 12 <5ie, fiir ben 3^)rigen witrbe id) f einen §eHer 13 geben." 1) the reign. 2) broke out, from au§brecf)ett ; irr. v. (Nr. 19). 3) an insurrection, revolt. 4) rebel. 5) impudence. 6) in order to frighten him. 7) wrote, from fdjnxtben irr. v. (82). 8) quite coolly. 9) duly. 10) received. 11) worth. 12) assure. 13) farthing. 150 Twenty fifth Lesson. 6, Indefinite pronouns. (UttbefHmmte gurtoortcr.) I. They are: •Jftan one (French on), they, people. (Stnanbet each other, one another. •3et>ermann everybody, every one. ■3emanb somebody, some one, anybody, ^iemaitb nobody (not — anybody). ©etbft (felber), . . . self (myself &c). (StftaS something, anything. 9itd)t$ nothing (not — anything). @ar tlic^tS nothing at all, nothing whatever. Observations. 1) 2ft ait, which is expressed in English by one, they, people or by the passive voice, occurs only in the nominative case, and governs the verb in the singular. Ex.: SJtait f a 9 1 *) people say, they say. 2£emt man fcanf tft when one (or a man) is ill. Sftan Ijat Urn gelobt he has been praised. 9Dian ift gtMltcfy, ftenn man jufvteben tft. One is happy, when one is contented. Note 1. When another case is required, it is borrowed from (gtner, e, 8. Ex.: SBcnn matt cittcn ^mtitb tocrttcrt, [o tfyut c8 (Shtem Ictb. When one loses a friend, one is sorry for it. Note 2. One's before a substantive, is translated in German with fetn [his). Ex.: It is better to lose one's (his) life than one's honour. (§s tfl beffcr, fetn Scbctt al§ feinc (Sfyre jtt toerltercn. Note 3. Ones self is translated fid) fetbjt or only ftcb. not fefbjt without fid). Ex.: One must not praise one's self man mug ftdj tttctyt (felbfl) toben. 2) (Etnanbct is invariable and both dative and accusative: ftaxl unb 2Bttt)e(m trauen emanbev (dat.). Charles and William trust one another. SDiefc Bremen lieben etnanber [ace). These ladies love each other. 3) ©etbft or felber is indeclinable, and stands ekhei immediately after a substantive or a personal pronoun, as* *) Observe that with matt the verb is in the singular. Indefinite pronouns. 151 ter better felbft, id) f etbpt f nnv felbft or fetber , or nearer the •end of the sentence (see the 23rd lesson, §11). Ex. : £)er better bvacfyte feinen ©oljn felbft. The father brought his son himself. 3d) Jjabe e8 felbft (or felber) gefd)en (not midj felbft). I have seen it myself. 2Bir gfou&eiw* jefct felbft (not unferfelbfi) .*) We believe it now ourselves. Note. The adverb felbft means even, as: ©elbft feme SBritbcr even his brothers. 4) Sebevmann everybody, takes 8 in the genitive; in the other cases it remains unchanged, as: ©uteS tfynn ijj 3ebermctnn8 $fltd)t. To do good is every-one's duty. ©ebett ©te Sebermann (Dot.) toaS ©tc tljnt fdjntbig ftnb. Give everybody what you owe him. 5) Semanb and Sfctemanb take e8 or 8 in the genitive; in the dative they may take en or remain unaltered; the accusative is like the nominative, as: 2)a$ ift 9ttemanbe8 (9ttemcmbS) ©efdnnacf. That is nobody's taste. Sfftem 9fod)bar letljt S)tfemanb(en) (not ^temanbem) ©clb. My neighbour lends money to nobody. 3$ l?abe Semanb (— SRiemanb) angetroffen. I have met somebody ( — nobody) . 6) Not — anybody and not — anything are translated ^t i t * ntanb and SKtdjtS.' Ex. I have not seen anything id) Ijabe -ftidrtS gefeljen. II. The indefinite numeral adjectives are also used as indefinite pronouns, when the substantives are dropped. We repeat them here: 3eber, e, 8 or em 3ebei"**) each, every one. diner, Sine, SineS one, some one. ®cr 2(nbeTe, bte 5lnbere, ba§ Slnbere the other. 3)er Sine — , ber 5lnbere the one — , the other; phir. bie (Sin en — bie ^nbeven some — , the others. (Stnige some or a few. *) The personal pronoun with self in not repeated in German, as: We ourselves tt»tr felbft. **) 3ebh)cbcr and ctn Scgli^cr (each) are antiquated. 152 Lesson 25. (Stnige — , $nt>cre some — , others. 9ftcmd)er many a man; plur. 3J?cmd)e some. S3etbc both; both of them. SBtel much; plur. 33iele many. Sfteljrere several. — Witty more (is indeclinable). SDic 2Mften most (of them). SBenig little; j^wr. SBemge few. (a little tin tocntg.) 2ttle« everything; plur. Slfle all. ber Stautlidje {neut. baft 9?amltd)e) the same. Seiner, $eine, fietneS none, no one. Svgenb (Shier, e, any one. Obs ervations. 1) 3cber, ayjcmdjer and Neuter, e, 8, are declined like btefer, btefe, btefeS; viz. : G. 3ebe8, 9ttand)e«, Seines. £. Sebem, 2Hand)em, Setnem. ^4c 3eben, 9ftand)en, ^ehien. 2) The English pronoun one, plur. ones, after an adjective is not expressed in German, the termination of the adjective being a substitute for it. Ex. : I have a grey hat and a black one. 3d) fyabe einen gvanen §ut unb e tit en fd)toar$en. Two old lions and two young ones. 3^et alte Soften nnb $ wet junge. 3) 3lUe§ to a 8 (or 2itte8 ba8 toa«) is the English all that or only a//. Ex. : £)a8 ift SllleS, toaS id) I)aoe that is all I have. Note. 2lUe3 toa8 is declined as follows: G. 2Hk8 beffen, n>a« ... of all that . . . D. Mem (bent), iua8 ... to all that . . . A. 5lHeS \va$ or Sltttf ba8, x»a$ . . . all (that) . . . 4) The indefinite pronoun some, when referring to a pre- ceding substantive, may be translated in different ways. When it replaces a singular, we may say in German accord- ing to the gender: loetd)eit, toeld)e or loeld)e8; in the plural: toddje, etmge or bctOOil. Frequently however it is not ex- pressed at all. Ex. : Will you have some beer? Yes, give me some. SBotlen ©ie 33ter fyaoen? 3a, geoen ©te mit ioeld)c8, or only: geben ©ie mix*. Have you bought some tobacco? Yes, I have bought some. §abeu ©tc Xabai gefcnft? 3a, id) fyabe (toeldjen) gefouft. Have you some or any more of these cigars? £>aben ©ie nod) oon biefen (Sigavven? Indefinite pronouns. 15$ Yes, I have some still {or a few more). 3a, id) fyabe nod) toeldje (einige, bason) or even: id) fyafce nod). 5) Any, in an interrogative sentence, is generally not trans- lated. When equivalent to every, it is rendered by jebcr: You will find it in any shop. ©ie toerben eS in jebem ^aben fuiben. Words. £)er GHjrift the Christian. ber $(a{3 the place. ber getter the fault, mistake, gelefyrt learned, a$\ bag ©ennfjen the conscience. gefprod)en spoken. t>ie ©timme the voice. erfyalten {part.) received. bte (Stfafyrmig experience. bte SBelt the world. bet 23ote the messenger. beneiben to envy. ber $vei8 the prize. tbbten to kill, nie never. id) bin fd)nlbtg I owe. oerlaumben to calumniate. t>or'fid)ttg cautious. antoenben to employ. ' fteften to put (upright). gefd)lagen beaten, fyofiid) polite- Reading Exercise. 57. Wan ift gliicflid), toenu man jufrieben ift. Sttan cjtaubt e$ nid)t, tuenn man eg nid)t fiel)t (sees). ©oldje £)inge fiefyt man nid)t jeben £ag. £)ie jtoei Sfrtaben fyaben einanber g,efd)tagen. 23e$af)len ©ie Sebevmann, to-:g ©ie il;m fdjulbig finb. 9ctemanb ift jo gelefyrt, bag er 2tfleg toetjj (knows) . $)et toafyte (Sfytift beneibet bag ©liicf -Jftemanbeg; er oetlenmbet 9Uemanb. £lopft 3emanb? 3d) ljore Semanbeg ©timme. 3d) time nie (Sttoag gecjen metre ©ennffen. 23enetbe nid)t bag ©tiid $lnberer. 3eber (or etn -3eber) fyat feine Seller. SWandjer fauft nnb bejafylt ntd)t. Sfteljrere fyabett ben namlid)en fjc^lcr gemadjt. $iele oon meinen greunben finb aeftorben (died). Unfer greunb fprtd)t t>on 2lftem. Reiner ift olme Seller, feiner ton nng fyat ben "jpretg getuonnen (won). £ttfga6e. 58. 1. One is unhappy, when one 2 is * discontented. These* young people love each other. (The) animals eat (freffew) one another. Be polite to (gegen) everybody. Has the man killed anybody? No, nobody. One should not speak much of (Don) one's self. I have seen nobody. Is there (giebt eg) anything prettier (neut.) ? I have spoken of nobody. Have you received anything? No, Sir, I have not received anything. Do (tfyltn ©ie) nothing against your conscience. Every one who knows the world, is cautious. Have you many friends ? I have only a few. 2. Put these books each in (an) its place. The one- goes, the other comes. Some are too (git) young, the others are too old. Both are dead. Many a man drinks more than 1 54 Lesson 26. he wants (bebarf). I know several of (fcon) them. No one has helped me (mtr gefyotfen). Do not speak evil (23ofe§) of ■others. Tell me all (II. Obs. 3) you know (n)a§ ©te nnffen). I have sold all. One must not kill one's self. The messenger -said the same (neut.). With money 2 one *can do 5 much good tele ©djitfer? < 3d) fyafce meln*ere. ©egen toen foil man fjofltd) feint ©egen Sebermann. 2Ba3 tljim biefe Seute? (Sintge lefcit, Slnbere fdn*etben. Steben bte 93vnber etnanbev? 3a, fie lieben cinanber. SBer ift ofyne ftcfyler? Reiner (-fttemanb). SBer nritl (wishes) gludUdj fein? Scbcnnann rotCC e3 (so) fetn. ^emten ©te §errn 23raun ober 3d> fenne 23etbe. ©te voofynen §ertn ©riht? Setbe in metnem §attfe. ^oJnVfotttd)bie23ud)erftcflen? ©teftcn ©te jebeS an fetnen $tafe. SBcr bat ba? ©elb bc$al)(t? (Sinige fcon nnferen greunben. ©oil man oon $nberen 33ofe3 SDtan fctt fcon 9itemanb (or con (evil) reben? 9?temanben) SBofeS reben. Con toft* fpvedjen ©te? 2£tr fpredjen toon 2lflem. 5fi3ie ©tele §iite fyaben ©te? 3d) l)abe jnset: etnen alten unb etnen neucn. ©tnb 3fyre $>ute M»fttj ober 3a) fyabe etnen fd)\oar$en wife etnen cjran (grey)? c^rauen. 35on went fyaben ©te btefen 33rtef $on3emanb, ben ©te ntd)t fennen. evfyalten? Twenty sixth Lesson. IRREGULAR VERBS. (Uuregdmafjige 3 e itofater.) (Ancient or strong conjugation.) Those verbs are commonly called irregular (unveget* tna^tcj) which deviate from the formation and conjugation of the modern or regular verbs. They are indeed suffi- ciently regular after their own fashion of conjugation. However as the term irregular has hitherto been adopted, we cannot help using it too. They amount to 161. The deviation from the modern form takes place only in the Irregular verbs. J 55 Imperfect and the Past participle; all the other tenses ^.re formed in the same manner. 1) The terminations of the Present tense of the ir- regular verbs are the same as of the regular verbs, but several change, besides, in the second and third persons singular and in the Imperative mood, their radical vowel 4 into a, and C into t or ic, as: 3d) fcfyfoge, bu fdrtogjt; — idj gebe, er giebt (gtbt). — ©tcB. 2) The peculiar character of the Imperfect Indicative •of the irregular verbs consists in their adding no termina- tion at all to the root, but in changing its vowel, as from $eben, Imp. id) gob. The difference of the vowel causes sthem to be divided into four conjugations, according to the prevailing four vowels a, \, and u. 1) Those ancient verbs with the vowel a in the Im- perfect, compose the first conjugation (geben — id) $tib) ; 2) those with i or ic the second (fd)teiben — id) fcfyrieb) ; 3) those which take the third (fefyiejjen — i<$ fd)o§) and 4) those which take u the fourth (fd)lagen — icfy fd)(ug). The 3rd pers. sing, of the Imperf. is always like the first. 3) The Imperfect of the Suhjunctive mood is formed by adding e to the Imperfect Indicative, and modifying the vowel, when it is a, or U r as: -3d) gabe, bu gabeft, er gabeK. (toemt \&) gabe). 4) The participle past of all verbs of the ancient form ends in m instead of t, as : gegcben given ; g e f d) r te * ben written, &c. ; but as the vowel does not always remain the same in the participle past, the two first conjugations have three subdivisions or classes, accord- ing to the prevailing vowel of the Participle past. Remarks. Strictly speaking, only verbs having d t t, et arid t for their root-vowel can be ancient or irregular verbs. By ano- maly or bad orthography, however, a few verbs with h', o t D r atl and U have also crept in. To facilitate somewhat the study of these verbs, we think it useful to give the following general hints, before we -enter upon the particulars. 1) Ancient verbs having a in their root, retain this vowel In the Part. past. The Imperfect takes either ic or U, as: 156 Lesson 26. Blafen to blow. Imp. blteS. Part, geblafen. tragen to carry. Imp. trttg. Part, getragen. 2) Those having C for their root-vowel, take in the Im- perfect either C or 0. In the Participle past the 13 first verbs (p. 158 & 159) take C, Nr. 14 & 15 a, all the others o, as: geben to give; gab — gegeben fedjten to fight; fod)t — gefod)ten. 3) Ancient verbs having Ct in their root, change it into- t or tC f both in the Imperfect and Part, past, as: bet^en to bite; bip — gebtffen btetben to remain; blteb — gebltcben. 4) Ancient verbs having ic in their root, change it into C t both in the Imperfect and Part, past*) as: fdjUeften to lock; fdjlog — gefdjtofjen. 5) Ancient verbs the root of which is itlb r tltg or xnt have in the Imperfect a and in the Part, past it, as: fiuben to find; fant> — gefunben futgen to sing; fang — gefungen Conjugation of an irregular verb (1st Conj). ©eben to give. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. Present Tense. •3d) gebe I (may) give t>u gebeft thou mayst give er gebe he may give tt>ir geben we may give [ii)x gebet) ) ©ie geben | ? ou m ^ S lve fie geben they may give. Imperfect (Preterite) . 3d) ga&C**) I might give, I gave tat g&beft thou mightst give et get be he might give fair gaben Ave might give ©ie^ oten^ j >' ou mi S ht S ive fie gaben they might give. 3dj ^jebe I give t>u gtebft thou givest er giebt he gives imr geben we give (il;r aebt) j ye give ©ic geben } you give fie geben they give. 3d) gab I gave bu gab ft thou gavest er gab he gave toir gab en we gave U)r gabt j ye gave ©ic gaben j you gave fie gaben they gave. *) With the exception only of Itcgen to lie (see Nr. 12, p. 159) **J Used especially after wenn if. (wenn t$ e$ tym go be.) Irregular verbs. 157 Compound Tenses. Perfect. 3d) I)abe . . gegc&en I have given t>u fyaft gegeben thou hast given et Ijat gegeben he has given :c. :c. Pluperfect. 3d) fyatte gegeben I had given btt fyatteft gegeben thou hadst given K. K. i'Yrs^ Future. 3d) toerbe . . geben I shall give tm t»tr ft geben thou wilt give er totrb geben he will give hnr toerben geben we shall give ibr toerbet qeben ) .« • @te werten fl c6«i J >' ou wlU glve fie toerben geben they will give. Second Future. 3d) toerbe . . gegeben fyaben I shall have given bn toirft gegeben fyaben thou wilt have given 2C. :c. First Conditional. 3d) tcitrbe . . geben I should or would give bu tourbefl: geben thou wouldst give er toihbe geben he would give tint toiirben geben we should or would give K. 2C. Second Conditional. 3d) toitrbe . . gcgeben fyaben I should have given bu toitrbeft gegcben fyabcn thou wouldst have given. :c. K. Imperative Mood. ©ieb give (thou). (er fott geben let him give.) geben nnr or taftt un3 geben let us give. atbtt or geben <5te give (you). fte foflen geben let them give. Infinitive Mood. Pres. geben or ju geben to give. Past, gegeben fyaben or gegeben ju tyaben to have given. Participles. Pres. gebenb giving. Past, gegeben given. 158 Lesson 26. We subjoin now the irregular verbs according to> their respective conjugations and classes, numbered in succession from 1 to 163, and followed by an alphabet- ical list. First Conjugation. Imperfect with a. First Class: Past Part, with c. Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect a Past Part. e 1. ©cfcett to give. gieborgib id) gafc, fcu gcgcBcu gebet or ■ gabft, er gab, given, geben ©te roir gaben ic. give Subj. id) $ ah c. Conjugate in the same manner : aU6'$ebcn 2 ) (sep. v.) to spend (money) ; bergeben (insep. v.) to forgive (Part, p.) toergefceu* not toergcgebcn) ; juritcf'ge&cn to return, to give back, &c. 3d) gebe, bu gtebft, er tjtebtora,tbt,tmr geben, 1 ) t^v gebet (©te geben), fie gebett. 3d) effe, feu tffeft, er igt, »ir effen, tljr effet, fie (©te) effen. 2. (gffett to eat. tg, — effet, effen ©te. id) ag I ate. PL rotr agen. £«*£/. id) age. gegeffen eaten- 3. fyreffeit to eat (of animals), to devour. 3dj freffe, t?u frtffeft, cr I frig, ltd) frag. I gefreffen jrigt, nnr jrefjen :c. I freffet. I Subj. id) frage. I eaten. 4. Sfteffett to measure. 3d) meffe, bit nuffeft, er 1 mtg, nteffet, I id) mag. I gemeffen migt, nnr mefjen k. | meffen ©te. I Subj. id) mage. I measured Thus is conjugated: ab 'meffen to measure, to survey. 5. Sefen to read. 3$tefe, bn lief eft, ertiegt, I ties, lefet, I idj iaS. lutr lefen k. I lefen ©te. I £w6/. id) lafe. Thus: Uor'Icfen to read to some one. 6. ©eljcn to see, to look. 3d)fefye,bnfteftft, erfte^t, I ftel) , fetjet, I id) f a$. U)ir feljen :c. I fefyen ©te. I Subj. id) fafye. gelef en read. gefeben seen. Thus: cm'fefyen to look at; auS'fefyen to look (like or — well). 1) The plural is always like the Infinitive. 2) The compounds of these verbs , are either separable or inse- parable. Separable verbs take the augment g e between the prepo- Irregular verbs. 1st Conj. 15Qs Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. a Past Part. c 7. Xxttttl to kick (also to step, tread). 3d) trete, bit trittft, er I tritt, tretet, I tc^ trat. Igetreten,. tritt, tow treten :c. I treten ©ie. I Subj. id) trate. I Thus: ab'treten to resign, yield; f emtrcten to step in, enter. 8. jG)Cltcfett*) to recover from illness. ■3d) genefe, ton genefeft, er I genefe, I id) genag. Igenefen genefet, nrir genefen :c. I genefet. |ASW;/.id)genajse.| recovered.. 9. -j-Gkfdjdjett*) to happen. <5$gefd)icl)t,(fie)gefd)et)en.| — I e$ gefd)al). | gefdjeljen*. 10. SBergeffcn to forget. 3d) fcera,effe, bn cergijjeft, I t^evgig, ltd) © e r g a g . I d e r g e f f c a er fcergtfct, mx toergefjen. I fcergeffet. I S. id) toergajje. I forgotten.. 11. 23tttClt to beg, ask or request. 3d)bitte,bnbitteft,erbittet, I bitte,bittet, I id) hat. I gebeten toir bitten, tipc bittet ic. I bitten ©ie. i Subj. idj hate. I begged^ 12. ffiiegcn to lie. 3d) liege, bnliegft,er liegt, i liege,Iteget, I id) lag I lay. I gelegen. mx liegen, tf)r lieget :c. | liegen ©ic. I Subj. id) lage. I lain. Thus: f uutctUe'gen to succumb. Part. p. uutcrle'gen. 13. fSttjCtt to sit. 3d) ftfce, bn JJfccft er ftfct, I fifce, fifeet, I id) fag I sat. I gefeff en~ nrir fifcen, iljr ftfcet k. I fifcen ©ic. I Subj. id) fSge. I sat. Thus: beft^eu to possess. Imp. id) befafj; Per/, id) fyaU befeffen.. 14. j er $etnb the enemy. me 9?aupe the caterpillar. letfe low. balb soon. "fcer 5htd)en the cake. nod) ntd)t (nte') not yet (never). ber ©tord) the stork. nod) fetne not yet any. "ber Ionian' the novel. ber Corner the Roman. t>er $ome't {2d decl.) the comet, bte £ugenb virtue. Reading Exercise. 59. 1. ©eben ©te mtr etne ante gefcer. 3ft etn ^reunb gab mix etnige Skater. §aben ©te tf>m btefetbcn juritcf' gegeben? Dcod) ntd)t. 2Ba3 ift jener $nabe ba? (5r tgt $trfd)en. 3d) Jjabe nod) fetne gegeff en. 3)er Sttann ag $u (too) tuel. ®er i)d)fe f rigt @ra§ unb £>eu. 2)ie 'Pferbe fyaben alien §afer .a,efreffen. SBarum meffen Sie btefeS £ud)? 3d) nritt e3 •fcerfaufen. SBarum HeSt ber ©filler fo letfe? (5r §at etne fd)ioad)c ©ttmme (voice). $ortge§ (last) 3al)r (a$ er tauter. 'Der bltnbe Sftann fteljt ^td)t^. ©tefy, l)ter ftnb betne 23itd)er. ^>aoen ©te ben ©tord) gefer;ert? 2Bir fafyen ilm ntdjt. -3d) Ijabe nod) me etnen (Sle^anten gefefyen. 2. 3emanb ift auf mctnen gujj getreten. £>er franfe tjt genefen (8). 2>ie(e3 gefefytcfyt (9) in ber EBrft (world), toa§ man ntd)t cerfiefyen fann. §aben ©te gegtaubt, bag bteS gefd)el)en nrnrbe? 3d) fcergag, 3Ijnen ju fagen, bag tdj 3l)ven grcunb $arl ge* ^efyen tjabe. 3d) fyatte ba§ Sort oergeffen. ©er 33ebtcnte ftanb an ber £fyitre; p>d anbere Scanner ftanben Bet tfym. 2)er anuc iO?ann bat mid), tfnn $u fyelfen (help) ; er $cit attd) anbere Seute ge* 4>eten. 3)er 9tabc fag auf etnem fyofyen SBaum, id) toetg ntd>t, tote lange er bort (there) fag. 2Bo lag ber Styfel? (Sr lag tm ©ra«. ^nfgaOe. 60. 1. Give me two florins. When (toann) will you * return 2 them [to] ime? In a few days (Dat.). The countess gave the poor man {Dat.) a shilling. God (®ott) has 4 given ( 2 the) Irregular verbs. 1st Conj. 1(31 3 reason to * mankind. I eat bread and cheese. Thou eatest bread and butter. The children ate cherries. I saw you 2 eat i grapes (£ranben) ; were they ripe? Eat of (Don) this cake, it*) is for you. The oxen eat (3) grass and hay. The caterpillars ate (3) all [the] leaves of (Don) that tree. The cat has eaten (3) the mouse. I gave her (Dat.) a flower. "What does Miss Eliza read? She reads a novel by (Don) Sir Walter Scott. Have you read Lord Byron's poems (©ebtdjte) ? I have not yet read them, but I shall read them soon. 2. Have you ever (je) seen a comet? Yes, I saw a beautiful comet. The young man does not see the danger in which he is [placed]. Young lady, read only good books. Beneath (unter) the sun (Dat.) 2 n othing * happens without the will (2BiUen, m.) of God. What has (ift) happened? An old man stood on the (am) shore and cried (toehltc). Close to him (ncbcn tfym) sat two little children, and a dog lay (12) beside (neben, Dat.) them. The poor man begged me, to (jtt) give him a few florins. Fabricius possessed (13) such (fo) great virtues, that (bag) even (fetbft) the enemies of the Romans 2 respected ihim. Second class: Participle with o. Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. a Past Part. o 16. SBefefjlett (Dat.)**) to command, to order. 3d) befeljle, bn beftefylft, Ibeftefyl, lid) befall. I befofylen ex befiefylt, totr befefyten. I befefyfet. I S. id) befar)Ie. I ordered. Thus: empfcfj'len to recommend; Imp. em^fafyl, P. p. empfofy'len. 17. 23ergen or SBerbergen to hide, to conceal. 3d)Derbera,e,buoerbtraJt, I toerbtrg, j td) oerbaro,. iDevborgen erDerbtrgt,nnrDerbergen. I oerberget. I tf.tdjDerbarge. | hidden. The root berg en (to hide) is only used in poetry. 18. i Serpen to burst. 3d) berfte, bn berfteft, erlberfte, ltd) bar ft. I gebovften berftet, totr bevften :c. I berftet. I S. id) barfte. I burst. 19. S3red)en to break. 3d) bredje, bn brtd)ft, erlbrid), lid) brad). I gebrodjen brid)t, h)tr bred)en k. I bred)et. \S'. id) brad)e. I broken. Thus: ab'bredjen to break off; au$'bred?en to break out; imter* bre'djen to interrupt (P. p. imteibro'tt)en) ; jerbredjen to break to pieces, Part. p. jetbro'djen. *) See p. 136, 1) — **) (Dat.) means: The verb governs the person in the Dative; to order something means beftetten, reg. v. OTTO, German Conv. -Gram mar. 11 162 Lesson 26. Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. a Past Part. 20. Srefcfjett to thrash. 3d) brefd)e, bubrtfdjeft, er I brtfd), I idj brafc^ or I gebrofdjen brtfdjt, uur brefdjeu :c. I brefdjet. I .brofdj. I thrashed. 21. f (£rf djretfett *) {neuter) to be frightened. 3d) erfd)rede (I am frigh- 1 erfdjrtcf , tdj erfcfyracf erfdjroden tened), bu erfd)ttdft, er erfdjredet. I was fright- frightened, erfdjrtdt, urir erfdjreden. ened. NB. When erfdjreden 2 ) is an active verb, meaning to frighten some one, it is regular, like the simple verb fdjredm. 2 ) 22. (Seftett to be worth or estimated. 3dj gelte, bit crtttft, er I — fid) gait. Igegolteu. gilt, totr gelten :c. I — I S. id) galte. I Thus: toergelten to return, to render. P. p. toergoltcn. 23. (SJefcafyren to bring forth. 3d) cjeBare, bu geBterft, fie I — I id) (jefcar. I geooren gebtert, hnr gefcaren :c. I — I 8: td) gefcare. I bom. 24. §elfett {Bat.) to help, assist. 3$ Ijelfe, bu #lffi, er |#lf, $elfet, I tc6> T)alf. kefjolfcu ljUft, xoxx Ijetfen :c. I fyelfen <8te. I #. id) fyalfe. I helped. 25. Sftefjmett to take. 3d) nefjme, bu utmmft, lutmm, . ltd) na\)m. er utmmt, totr uetymeit. |neljmeti©te.l S. id) ualjme Thus: afc'ncfymen to take off; cm'nefymen to accept; auS'neljmen to except; fyerauS'nebmen to take out; unternefymett to under- take {P.p. unteinom'men) ; toeg'nefymen to take away; juriid'a nefymen to take back. 26. ft ad. I geftoden fttrft (ftecft) , Voir ftecfen jc. I I I stuck. stuck. NB. The active verb jlerfen 2 ) (to put) is regular. 30. Stefjfett to steal. 3d) ftef>fe, bu fttel)(ft, er i (Ue$l, I id) ftaJjI. ftiefjlt, toir fte^en :c. | fte^iet. I S. id) ftafyte. 31. fSterbcn to die. 3d) (terbe, bu ftirbft, er I fttrB, I id) ftarb. I ftir bt, nrir fterben k. I fterbet. I tf.tdjftarbe.*) | 32. SSerberben to spoil, to ruin. 3d) fcerberbe, bu ©erbirbft, I fcerbtrb, | id) oerbarb. ercerbirbt, nnrcerberbeu. I cerberbet. IxS'.tdjfcerbarbe.*) 33. SSerBeu to enlist, to sue. 3d) toerbe, bu voirBft, er i rotrb, i id) roarb. xoixht, rcir rcerben :c. | toerbet. | S. id) roctrbe. Thus : ertoerben to acquire , Imp. ertoarb. P. p. ertoorben. 34. SSerfen to throw, fling, cast. 3d) toerfe, bu roirfft, er I ttrirf, I id) roarf. | getoorfeu nnrft, tcir roerfeu k. I roerfet. | S. id) roarfe. I thrown. Thus: toeg'toerfen to throw away; Imp. ttmrf . . weg; um'toerfen to upset; Dertter'fen to reject; fcov'toerfen to reproach. 35. Sreffen to hit. 3d) treffe, bu triffft, er i trtff, I id) trctf. i getroffeu trtfft, ttnr treffeu jc. | treffet. \ S. id) trafe. hit. Thus: -J-em'treffen to arrive; iibertref'fen to excel, surpass. Imp. iibcrtraf; P. p. iibertrof'feit; an'treffen [Ace.) and f ju- fam'mentreffen (mil) to meet, to have a meeting. 36. S3eginnen to begin. 3d) begtmte, bu begiuuft, I begtmte, I id) begctuu. I begouueu erbegtuut,ro.begimteuK. | begtmtet. I /S'.idjbegawte. I begun. 37. ©ettiittttett to win, to gain. 3d)geuwme,likebegtwteu.| geuumte. | id) getoctuu. I getoomteu. 1) Pronounce ftacfert (e). 2) Pronounce ftedett. *) Old form : jtttrbe, toerbiirbe. 11 164 Lesson 26. Indicative Present. Imperative Imperfect. a Past. Part. o 38. 9ttmten to leak, to flow. 3d) rinne, bit rinnft :c. | rinne. | id) rann. 39. ©ttttteu to meditate, think. 3d) finne, bit finnft :c. | ftnne. | id) fann. Thus: ftdj befmnen to reflect, to recollect. 40. (Stinnett to spin. 3d) fpinne, bit ftwmft :c. | fpinne. | id) fpann. 41. fSdjuimmtett to swim. 3d) fdmrimme k. I fd)ttrimme. |id)fd)toamm. |gefd)n>ommen 42. f^ommett to come. 3d) fomme, bn fommft, I uomme. |id)famlcame.| gefommen er fomnit :c. lfommen©te.l id) fame. I come. Thus: -f-an'fommen to arrive, ©cfommen to get. | geronnen. | gefonnen. | gefponnen. Words. 2>er $einb the enemy. ber QDieb the thief. bag 9ioI)r the reed, cane. bag (5t3 ice. ber ©tern stone. bet 2)catrofe the sailor. bie £afje the cup. bletd) pale. ber §auptmann the captain. bag ©Cto£^r {pi- — e) the musket. ber ©d)a£ the treasure. Der Sftann the husband. bie (srbe the earth. ber 2ft orb er the murderer. ber £)old) the dagger. ber (Spiegel the looking-glass. ber ©tad)el the sting. bag 3nfefr' (GW — g) the insect. bie S3iene the bee. bie SBunbe the wound. bag 3*^ tne mark, target, goal. ber $lad)g the flax, tobt dead. labett irr. to load. gel;ord)en to obey. Reading Exercise. 61. 1. 2Ber befiefylt ben ©olbaten? 3)ie Dfpsiere befallen ben ©olbaten, ben $einb an'jugretfen (to attack). S)er $i5ntg fyat befofyten, bag ein neuer $alaft gebaut toerbe. 3)er £)ieo ijatte fid) l)inter einer SDcauer oerborgen. 2Mn ©ofm, toawm oerbirgft bn bein ©eftcfc>t (face)? 3)ag (Sis ift geborften. $)ag kofyr biegt fid) (bends); aber eg brid)t ntdjt. ®er 23ebiente Ijat bie £affe jerbrodjen. 3m Winter brifd)t man bag ©e= traibe (com). S)te $ran erfdjratf (21), ate*) (when) fie ir>reit 9flann fo bleict) f afy. 3cbermann tear bariiber erfdjroden. 2Bag fyaben ©ie in ber Sotterie getoonnen? 3d) l)abt fynnbert ©uU ben getoonnen. *) When {= as) with an Imperfect or Pluperfect following is translated ol$, with other tenses ioentt; in both cases the verb stands last. Lesson 26. 165 2. 2Setm bit betnem 9?acfc£ctr ljUfjt, nnrb er Mr audj nueber ^elfen. 23er ©raf Ijat totelen airmen gefyolfen. < £)a§ finb tjat toaS !0leffer genommen. 28avum nafymen ©te e§ ntdfyt toeg (away) ? 3$ fcegcmn gevabe (just) metne Arbeit, al§*) ber ^rembe etntrat (came in). 3)te 9ftcttrofen fdjtoammen itfcer ben Slug. 3)te alte $rau Ijat $lad)3 gefponnert. 33on n>a§ fyaben bte Seute geftorocfyen? ©te fagen, bag ber $i$mg geftorBen tft. 3Mn ftreunb i ft com ^ferbe gefaHen (fallen) unb fyat ben (his) Uxm geftvocfyen. 2Bet l)at biefen (Stein j^etoorfen? (Sin ^nabe toarf U?n in ba$ ^enfter unb jet&rad) bte ^cfyetBe (pane). Jiuf^aee. 62. 1. The general commands ; the soldiers must obey. Who has ordered you {Dat.), 2 to ($u) 3 do ithis? The captain ordered me 3 to load Uhe 2 musket. Many treasures are hidden in the earth. The murderer hid his dagger under his coat. Who has broken my looking-glass? The servant broke it (see p. 136, 2) this morning. We must always return (Nr. 22) good for good (®itte£ ntit ©utent) . The duke was born in the year 1775. Mary ivas {has been**) stung by a bee. The sting of the insect stuck (29) in the wound. Frederick II., king of Prussia, died on the 17th [of] August 178G. 2.. »The child is not dead,« said Jesus to (ju) its father, »it sleeps (fd)ldft).« The boy spoils (32) his books; he has also spoiled his clothes ($Ietber) ? Of whom have you spoken? We spoke of (toon) Columbus. The soldier threw (34) 3 a way (tt)eg) ihis 2 gun. Who has thrown the stone into the window? I do not know who (ttoer) f ) 3 has 2 thrown lit. Have you hit (35) the mark? Yes, I have hit it. Can you swim? I swam 2 over 3 the 4 river * yesterday. Who has spun the flax? My wife ©tau) has spun it last winter. She began the {Ace.) day after Christmas (2Betfynad)t) . The unhappy men threw themselves (fid)) at the feet (jit ben ^itgen) of the king. Third class: Past Participle with u. The verbs belonging to the third class of the first Conjugation, having the past participle with it, are easily recognised. All have their root in in followed by b, (J or f (tnb, ttt$ if ) or inf). They are not irregular in the Present tense, nor in the Imperative mood, and consist of the following eighteen (43 — 60) , with their different compounds. *) See the foot-note p. 164. **) Passive voice; see the foot-note 2, p. 168. -r) See p. 139 }> Note. -{--J-) S3 r in gen is the only one of these verbs that does not belong to this class. Its conjugation occurs p. 121, § 6 and p. 122. 166 Lesson 26. Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. Past Part. u 43. S5ittbcit to bind, to tie. 3d) binbe, bn binbeft, er I btnbe, I id)banbltied. I gebimben binbet, nrir btnben k. | binbet. I id) banbe. bound. Thus: an 'btnben 1 ) to attach; toerbinben to oblige, to join, to dress (a wound) (P. p. toerbunben). 44. fjtttbcit to find. 3d) finbe, bu finbeft, er I ftnbe. I id) fanb. I gefunben finbet, nrir ftnben. I S. id) fan be. I found. Thus: erftn'ben, crfanb, erfunben to invent; empftnben to feel. 45. -f-SdjUHttbett to disappear, to vanish. 3d) fd)nrinbe. | fd)nrinbe. I id) fd)n)anb. |gefd)ttmnben Thus: -J-fcerfc&ttHn'ben to disappear. Part. p. feerfcfytuunben. 46. SBtnben to wind. 3dj nrinbe. I nrinbe. | id) roan b. | genmnben. Thus: iibemrinbett to overcome, conquer. P. p. iiberoHin'ben. 47. f ^rittgen to force one's way. 3d) bringe. I bringe. | id) brang. I gebrnngen. Thus: -}-burd)bringen to penetrate; -J-eiK'bitngen to enter by force. 48. fCBeUltgen {impers. with dat.) to succeed. (SSgeluigt mir I succeed, e$ gelingt itynt he suc- ceeds, K. eSgelangmiri e8 ift mir I succeeded, gehmgen I S. eSgelange.l have succ. Thus: fmijsttng'en to fail. P.p. mtfjimtg'en. 49. RHttgett to tinkle, to sound. 3d) Hinge. | Hinge. | id) Hang. I geHungen. 50. 9Ungen to struggle, strive for, wring. 3d) ringe. I rtnge. | id) rang. | gernngen. Thus: crrtngcn to obtain, conquer. NB. Umrtng'en to surround, from the noun bcr 9ftng, is regular. 51. ©djtutgen to sling, to twine. 3d) fd)Unge. | fd)linge. I id) fd)lang. I gefd)lungen. Thus: fcerfdjltng'en to devour; umfd)ling'en to embrace. 52. Sdjunngen to swing, wave, brandish, wield. 3d) fd)nringe. I fd)nringe. | id) fdjtoang. |gefd)n)ungen 53. ©ingen to sing. 3d) finge. I finge. | id) fang. I gefungen. 1) See the foot-note*) p. 158. Irreg. verbs: 1st Conj. 3rd class. 167 Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. a Past Part. u 54. -J- Sprtngen to spring, to jump, to crack. $$ foringe. | fprtnge. | id} f prang. I geforungen. Thus: f fyerauS'fyringen to jump out; j- jertyring'sn to burst. 55. |©in!cn to sink. -3d; ftnfe. | ftnfe. I id) fan!, I sank | gefnnlen. Thus: tyerab* or tytna&'finfen to sink down; ffcerfmfen to sink. 56. Srinfen to drink. 3d} trtnfe. I trhtle. | id) tranf. | getrunfen. Thus: fer'trmfen to be drowned; ftd) betrint'en to get drunk. 57. Btttttgen to force, compel. 3cb 3»tngc. I jnnnge. | id) jtoang. | gejronngen. Thus: bejttmtgett to conquer; erjttnngen to obtain by force. Note. The three following defective verbs belong also to this class, but are seldom used: 58. SDtngen to hire a servant. P.p. gebungen. It has also the regular forms: Imp. btngte; P. gebtngt. 59. ©djtnben to flay. P.p. gefdjunben. 60. ©tinfcn to stink, — ftanf. P.p. geftunfen. Words. 3>er ©artner the gardener. ber §aaa,, ber 3 aun tfte hedge, bie ^uact the ball, bullet. bte 23m|t the chest, breast. ba$ <3d)teJ5pufoer gunpowder. tie gahlte the flag, standard, bev 23lumenfran$ the garland, ber $affee the coffee. cine ©tecfnabel a pin. ba§ Stent) (the) misery, ber 23ucfybinber the bookbinder, fete 23nd)brucferhmft the art of ber ©tl'ttf the cord, string. ba§ 23oot the boat, [printing. baS Steb the song. erfttngen to resound, fdnniicfen to decorate, to adorn, unterfyalten to amuse, enjoy, ber -3ctger the hunter. freitt>tCtig voluntarily, bte ©angertn the songstress. fyitbfd) pretty, nice, fine. . bag Sttelj the deer, roe. corftcfyttg cautious. Reading Exercise. 63. 1. $)er ©artner fyat bag 23aumd)en an etnen ©tod ge* bunben. 9ttan cerbanb bte SBunbe beS ©otbaten. -3d; fanb ba3 $tnb fd)Iafenb nnter einem 23anm. 23ertfyolb ©djn>ar$, etn 3)eut[d;er, erfanb ba8 ©dn'ejfyufoer im 3ahr 1380. Unter bcr Sftegte'mng (reign) Mart's VII. (be8 ©tebentcn) bran gen bte (Snglanber in Oranfretd} etn, unb fanb en nnr etnen fdjtoadjen 168 Lesson 26. 2Btt?erflant> (resistance). £)te Sfrtgel tft burdj bte 53ruft be3 Officers gebrungen. £>a$ ^ferb f prang iiber emeu brettett ©raben (ditch). 2. $)te £rom»eten erftangen, bte ifrtfynen nmrben gefdjnmngen, al8 ber $atfer nafyte (approached). ©ofrateS tranf ben ©iftbedjer (hemlock-bowl) , unb ftarb ben £ob be8 ©eredjten (just) . §at er i^n fretttriflt*} getrunfen? Sftan r)at ifjn gejtoungen, btefeS ju tlum. 3)a8 (Scfytff i ft gcfunfen. 2Bte ^aben ©te fid) geftern 5lbenb miter* fatten? 2Btr fyaben gefptett, gefungen unb getrunfen. £>te 2ftabd)ett fyaben SBlumenfranje genmnben, urn bte ^ciufer ju fdjmitden. jlufgaOe. 64. 1. I do not find my stick. I found these violets in your garden and tied them [together] in a (Ace.) bunch (<3trauJ3, m.) . Where did *) Louisa find that pin ? She (has) found it in the street. They found a purse of (mtt) gold. Which bookbinder has bound your pretty book? It was Mr. Long, who 4 lives Un 2 (the) 3 King-Street. I succeeded (48) in catching (ju fangen) the thief. He was 2 ) immediately (fogletd)) bound with cords. Miss Emma sang a fine song. The songstress has sung ad- mirably (ttmnbevfefyon) . Would you like 3 ) to drink a glass [of] wine. I thank you, I have already drunk two cups [of] coffee. The ladies drank tea and ate cake. 2. The cat sprang over the table. A German, called (■iftamen§) Gutenberg, invented the art of printing. The deer had (tear) sprung over the hedge, when (a(8) the hunter came. The boat sank before our eyes. She (e§) would not have (feht) sunk, if the captain had been more cautious. Lord Byron swam across the (liber ben) Hellespont. The poor woman wrung her hands in despair (in SSerjftJetfhtng) . »(The) misery forced (57) me to steak , said the thief. Misery should force nobody (,) to do wrong (Unrecfyt). My friends have forced me (,) to become [a] soldier. Beading -lesson. $er Ijmtgrtge %xabtt. The hungry Arab. (Sin 2lrctber fyatte fid) in ber SBitfte (desert) oertrrt 1 ; er Ijatte fctt (for) mefjreren £agen 9Gtd)t8 gegeffen unb fitrcfytete toor (of) §unger $u fterben. (Snbltdj 2 tarn er an etnen t>on (to one of) jenen 93runnen 3 , too bte ^aranw'nen tfyre $ameete tran* fen 4 , unb falj etnen lebernen ©ad* auf bent (Sanbe Itegen(b). 1) wandered, lost his way. 2) at last. 3) well, fountain. 4) to water. 5) a leathern sack or bag. 1) Translate has . . found. 2) Here and in the following 10 Exercises the Passive Voice (p. 124) is indicated by printing the verb to he in Italics. 3) See p. 89, 1st Cond. 2ftod;ten <5ie gem . .? Irreg. verbs: 2nd Conj. 1st class. 169 (5r lj oB (or uafjm) ifjn auf e unb befii^lte 7 ifju. „@ott fet £)anf !'* riefs er au$, „Da8 9 finb SDattelu 10 eber §afelniifje." 3n biefer fitgen ^offnung 11 Be-eilte er fid) (he hastened), ben ©ad ju cffnen 12 ; aBer er fant) fid) in feiner (Srftartuug 1S getdu(d)t (disappointed). £>er ©ad tear nut ^crlen 14 gefitUt." £)ann nmrbe er traurig 15 unb fan! (fell) anf feine $ntee unb Bat ©ett, bag er U)n toon feiner ^cotf)^ retten (save) nnb ifym fitffe 17 fcfyideu mcd)te (would) . ©em ®eBet' is rourbe export, yiafy einer ©tunbe fant ber 3)cann juriid, 19 toeld)er ben ©ad toer* lor en (lost, 125) ljatte, anf etnem .^ameel rettenb (riding), unt 2ft tfm m fud)en. Sr u>ar fetjr glitdfid), U)n roieber 20 m finben, ljatte 9Hitleto 21 mtt bent armen SraBer, erquirfte 22 tfm tntt ©peife 2 * unb £ranf, fefctc ibn ju fid? 24 anf fetn ^atneet' unb fefyrte 25 jit ber ^araroane jurucf. 6) auf'fyefcen (141) to pick up, take up. 7) to touch, to feel. 8) auS'rufeu (110) to exclaim. 9) see p. 141, Obs. 1. 10) dates. 11) sweet hope. 12) to open. 13) expectation. 14) pearls. — 15) sad, sorrowful. 16) distress. 17) help. 18) prayer. 19) back. — 20) again. 21) compassion. 22) refreshed, supplied. 23) food. 24) with himself. 25) juriid'fe^reu to return. Twenty seventh Lesson. Second Conjugation. The second Conjugation is characterized by the sound t in the Imperfect, which is either a short i, or a long t spelt ie. The Past Part, takes the same vowel i or it as the Imperfect; only in the 3rd class, the vowel of the Infinitive is retained. Most verbs of this Conjugation are recognised by the radical diphthong et. First class: Imperfect and Past Part, with t. Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. i Past Part. i 33eij?ett to bite. Beige, I id) Big, I bit Beiget. I Sub. id) Bifje. 61. 3d) Beige, bu Beigeft, er Betgt, roir Beigeu :c. 23eftetgett (fid)) to apply one's self. 62. 3d) Befleige mid), bu Be* fleigeft bid), er Befteigt fid), ttrir Befteigen un8 k. Befleifjebid), Befteigen ©ic fid). td)BefUgmid) I applied my- self. gcBtffen bitten. Befliffeit applied. The other form of this verb: fid) Beftet'gtgen is regular. 170 Lesson 27. Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. i Past Part. i 63. i^rfclei'djett to turn pale. 3d) erMetdje, bu erbletd)ft, I erbteic^e, I idj erblid)'. I erblidjen. ererbleid)t,nnrerbietd)en. I erbleidjet. I S. id) erbfidje. I Thus: -f-toerbfeidjen to fade. P. p. toerblicfyen. The simple verb bteicfyen (to bleach) is regular. 64. GJretfcit to grasp, gripe. 3d) greife, bit crmfft, er i greife, i id) griff. • i gegrif f en grctft, unr greifen ic. | gretfet. | S. id) grtffe. | grasped. Thus: begret'fen to understand, to comprehend; crgvct'fcn to seize {P. p. crgriffen); an'grctfen to attack {P. p. an'gcgviffen). 65. ($Uctd)Ctt (Bat.) to resemble, to be like. 3d) gteid)e, bit gfeidjfi, er i gletdje, i idj gUd). igegltd)en. gleidjt, roir g(eid;en k. | gleid)et. | S. id) glidje. ] Thus : fcerglci'cbcn to compare. Imp. i$ t>erglt#. P. p. Derglic&en. 66. f^IcttClt or ttltSjjleiiett to glide, slide, slip. 3d) gleite, bit gletteft, cr i glette, ] id) glitt. igeglitten gleitet, ttnr gletteu :c. | gleitet. | S. id) glitte. | slipped. This verb sometimes occurs as regular : Imp. gtettete etc. NB. beg let ten (to accompany) is regular: Imp. id) beglettete, Past p. begieitet, and takes tyaben. 67. Shtetfett to pinch. 3d) fnetfe, bu frtetfeft, er i fneife, I id) f xxif f. i gefniffen fneift, nnr fneifen k. | fitetfet. | pinched. NB. Another form: fnetpen (to pinch) is regular. 68. Sctbett to suffer. 3$ leibe, bu leibeft, er I letbe, | id) titt I gelitten leibet, xoxx letbeu k. | leibet. | S. id) titte. | suffered. Thus: crlctben to sustain. Imp. erlttt, Part. p. erlitten. 69. SPfctfeit to whistle. 3d) vfeife, bu pfeifft, ev I pfetfe, l id) pf iff- Igepftffen pfetft, nnr pfeifen k. I pfeifet | S. td) pfiffe. I whistled. 70. 9ietj?Ctt to rend, tear. 3d) retfjc, bu retgeft, er I xd$t, I idjvijj, I tore. | geriffen reifjt, hrir veifeen :c. I reiget. I S. id) riffc. torn. Thus: jetrei'fjen to tear to pieces, Imp. jerrijj, P. jcrrijfen ; entretfe'en to snatch away from. Irreg. verbs: 2nd Conj. 1st class. 171 Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. Past Part. i i 71. iSftetieit*) to ride, go on horseback. 3d) tette, bu reiteft, er I rette, I id) rttt. I geritten. rettet, loir retteu k. I reitet. I S. id) rt tte. I Thus : f toorbet'retten to ride by : ftyasteren retten to take a ride. NB. bereiten to prepare (form bereit ready), and fcor'bereiten to prepare (before hand), are regular. 72. Sdjfeifctt to sharpen, to grind. 3d)f$letfe, bufaletffc er I fd>teife f i id) f^tiff. I gcf^ttffcn. fdjteift, nnr fd)leifeu k. I fd)letfet. | NB. The verb f djleifen to demolish, to drag along, is regular. 73. f^djletdjeit to sneak or steal into. 3d) fd)letd)e, bit fd)letd)ft, I fd)Ieid)e, i id) fd)Ud). i gefd)Ud)en. er fd)letd)t, nrirfd)letd)eu. I fd)letd)et. | 74. ©trCtd)Ctt to strike, rub (see Nr. 81). 3d)jlretd)e, buftretdjft, er i flreidje. i id) ftrtd). I gefiridjen. jtretd)t, nrir ftreidjen k. | Thus: au«'ftretdj>en to cross out; an'ftretcfyen to paint; unter» flrei<$en (P. p. uutevftrt'cfcen) to underline. 75. ©rfjmcifjCtt to fling, to turn out. 3djfdjmet6e,bufdjmetj$eft. | fdjmeige. I 107 fcfymtg. | gefdjmifjen. 76. ©djuciben to cut. 3d) fdjnetbe, bit fdjneibeft, 1 fdntetbe. I id} fdjnttt. 1 gefdjnitten. erfdjneibet, hnrfd)tteiben. | I Thus: ab'jdjnciben to cut off. P. p. ab 'gefcfynitten. 77. fSdjrettett to stride, to step. 3dj f cuvette, bu fdjrettefhc. I fcfyreite. I id) fdjritt. | gefdjritten. 78. ©treitCtt to quarrel, dispute, fight. 3d) ftreite, bu ftrettefl ic. | ftrette. I id) jtrttt. I geftritteu. Thus : beflrei'ten to contest, to dispute. 79. iSSeicfyett to yield, give way. 3cfy toeidje, bu toeidjji ic I toetdje. I id) raid). I geroidjen. Thus: -}-au8'* or ab'tt>eta)en to deviate; fttitroet'cfyen to escape. NB. toe id? en (to soak) is a regular verb. *) 9teiten in an active sense is only used in: ein ^3ferb reiten, then it takes fyaben: 3$ b,abe biefeS $ferb geritten. 172 Lesson 27. Words. $)a$ 23ein the leg, limb. fcorberetten (reg.) to prepare. ba8 Sager the camp. bemevfen {reg.) to perceive. t?er Jpauptmann the captain. »erg(eid)en (65) to compare. ber $ft the branch. t)er ©tern the star. ber £)mdfefyler the misprint. ber Settler the beggar. ber §elb the hero. bte Ueberfefcung the translation. bte diamine the flame. legen (reg.) to lay, to put. ber $ampf the combat. ba3 ©titd' the piece. begvetfen (64) to comprehend. baS Sftaftr'nteffer the razor. baS (Signal' the signal. ergretfen (64) to seize. T>a8 ©cfytoert the sword. IjmauS'fdjmetjjen to turn out. Reading Exercise. 65. 1. £)er jnnge Mann Ijat ftdj teh% beftiffen, £)eutfcr) $u. lemen. 2)er §unb fyat mid) in ba8 SBeht gebtffen. 2)aS 9ttab* djen glttt au3 nnb brad) em SBem. -3d) toare and) anSge* g lit ten, roenn man mid) ntd)t gefyatten (held) fyattt. 3)tc gembe fatten ba§ £ager angegrtffen (64). S)er §auptmann er griff feme ^iftoten. £)ie £od)ter gtei d)t ifyrer 9J£ntter. SDte armen ©efattgenen fyaben mel gelttten (68). 3)er ©turm §at triele Slefte oon ben SBaumen abgeriffen. 2. Sftctne ©cfyulje finb jerriffen (70). 2Barnm bift bit fo fdjneH geritten? Hnfere ©olbaten fyaben rote (like) §elt>en geftrttten; aber fie finb enbltd) bent ftetnbe gennd)en. 2)er SBtnb pftff bnrd) bie 23anme. (Smtge 2)rutffel)ler ijaben fid) in ba§ 23nd) etngefd)ltd)en (crept in). 3)a3 $tnb r)at fid) in ben ginger gefdjmtten. 3)ou Ontrote fd)Uff fern ©djroert nnb befall fehiem£)tener©and)o$anfa, fid) ju etnent neuen fampfe fcormberetten. ^Ittftja6c. 66. 1. The dog bit me. He bites everybody. Has he bitten you also? William Tell perceived a large fiame; but he could not comprehend whence (ttofyer') this signal came. Day dawns (@8 nJU'b £ag) ; the stars have faded. The young gentleman applied himself to learn French. I have compared my translation with yours, and found only two mistakes in it (see p. 137). Our dog was torn [to pieces] by a wolf. The traveller cut a piece of meat and laid it on his (Ace.) bread. Have you made (cut) my pen? Be so kind [as] to make it. The hunter strode (77) across (itber) the field. 2. Your penknife is not sharpened. The thief opened the door and stole (73) into the house; but he was soon seized by a servant and turned out (IjmaitS*). During my illness 2 I J have suffered much. Did you suffer much pain (<3d)mer$en, pi.) ? Who has whistled? Charles has whistled with a key. The beggar's coat was quite (getgt he is silent. Imp. id) fd)nneg, I was silent. — Per/, id} §ahz gefdjnriegen, I have been silent. Thus: berfd)toet'geu to conceal, to keep secret. 95. fiSteigctt to mount. Imp. id} ft leg. P. gefttegert, mounted. Thus: fab'fteigen to dismount, alight; ffytnab'fteigen or fyerab= fteigen to descend, to get down; T^inauf'ftcigen to mount, to ascend; crftetgen to mount, to climb up. 96. ^cifietl 1) to bid; 2) to be called. Imp. id) fyteg, I was called. Part, gefyetgert. Thus: terpen to promise. P. p. toerfjeijjen. 174 Lesson 27. Words. 3)er SSerfaffer the author. ber ftfacfyS the flax. bie ©ttmme the voice. ber ©tpfel the top. bie ©onne the sun. taut loud. bie $iifte the coast. fyell brightly. tie ©eite the page, side. beleibigen, reg. v. to offend. bie ©efd)td)te history, story. an'geben to mention. ba8 SBitlet' or Sriefdjen a note, retten to rescue, to save. etn ©d)afer a shepherd. Wttg violent, heavy. berubmt famous, nur only. jorntg or bofe angry. ber better the cousin. Reading Exercise. 67. 1. 2Bo btteben ©ie fo tange? -3dj btieb jtoei ©tunben in bem faffeeljauS. 2Bie lange ift 3fyr ^reunb geblteben? (§r tft nur eine ©tunbe gebtieben. s IBer Ijat jeneS 23ud) ge* fcfyrieben? 3d) fenne ben S3erfaffer nid)t; fein -ftame ift auf bent 23ud)e nicfyt angegeben. SBarum fyaben ©ie ben Umgang (inter- course) mit bief em Sftanne nid)t gemieben? © d) r e i e n ©ie nidjt fo laut. -3cb fyabe nidjt iaut gefdjrteen. 2Bie fyeigen ©te? 3d) ^etge griebrid). 2Bie Jjtefc Sljre Gutter? ©ie^ieg (SUfa* Bed). SBenn ©ie gefdjnnegen fatten, [fo] toitrben ©ie -ftiemanb beleibigt Ijaben. 2. £)er gerettete Sftann prie3 ®ott mit lauter ©timme. £)er Sfteifenbe toar anf ben 23erg geftiegen; al8 (when) id) Urn ba falj, ftieg id) aud) Ijinauf. £)ie ©onne fd)ien fefyr toarm, al8 hnr ben 23erg ^tnabftiegen. 2Ber tjat 3fjnen biefeS ©etb gelieljen? 2ftein Sftad)bar lieij e3 mir unter ber 33ebingung (condition), bag id) e$ ifym in ad)t £agen (in a week) luieber juriidgebe. ©in ^ef tiger ©turm trteb unfer ©d)iff an bie ^iifte. 2Bte lange finb ©ie auf bem Sail geblteben? 2Bir blieben MS Sflitternadjt (till midnight). JUtfrjaOe. 68. 1 . Remain here till (M8) to-morrow. How long did your cousin stay? He stayed an hour. I write a long letter; yesterday 2 I * wrote three pages; to-day 2 I 1 shall write two more (hod) Jtoei). That English history is written by a fa- mous author. I wrote a note to him. The shepherd drove the sheep into the fold (in ben ^ferd)). This year 2 the 3 flax thas (ift) not thriven. Why did the boy cry so loud? The son said: »Dear father, pardon me (Dat.) this fault ;« and the father pardoned him. The three men (banner) in the furnace ®euerofen, m.) praised God with a loud voice. 2. I lent my book [to] some one, but I cannot remember (id) fann midj nid)t erinnern) who it was. You have perhaps lent it to (Dat.) Mr. S. That may (fann) be. The sun shone brightly. All animals and plants seem to be created (gefd>affen §U fein) for (the) man (mankind). The king seemed to be Irreg. verbs: 2nd Conj. 3rd class. 175 angry. If he had been silent (gefdjnnegen) 2 he * would not have offended him. Speaking (Inf.) is silver; silence (<3d)U)et* gen) is gold. How high did the traveller mount? He as- cended (mounted) to (bt8 auf) the top of the mountain. Third class : Verbs having a, 0, ftlt or u for their radical vowel. They take in the Imperfect ie, but retain in the Past Part, the vowel or diphthong of their In- finitive. In the 2nd and 3rd person of the singular they soften their vowel. Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. ie Past Part. a 97. 931ofCtt to blow. 3d) Mafe, bu Blafeft, er hla$t, nrir btafen, U)r blafet, fie blafen. Mafe, blafet. i^ blteS. #. tcfy bltefe. rjcBlafcu*) blown. 98. S3raten to roast. gebraten roasted. 3d) brate, bu Bratft, er brate, id) bvtet. brat (or bratet) , nrir bratet. S. id) briete. braten, tljr bratet :c. 99. -j-gatten to fall. 3d) fafle, bit falljt, er i fade, i id) ftetl fell. I gefallen fcUIt, nrir fallen jc. | faCCet. | S. id) fiele. fallen. Thus: •f-fyeraVfaUett to fall down; P.p. fyercuV.qefaU'ett ; gefaflen to please ; -f-einfatten to occur to the mind ; mi&fafleu to displease ; fjerfaKen to decay. 100. gang en to catch. 3d) fange, bu fangft, er I fange, i id) fieng or i gefangen fangt, tiatr fangen :c. I fanget. ftng. caught. Thus: an 'fangen to begin, Past Part, an'gefangen; em* pfan'gen to receive. 101. § alien**) to hold, to consider. 3dj fyatte, bu Ijattft, er I Ijalte. i id) Ijielt I geljatten fyatt, nrir fatten :c. | I held, took. | held. Thus: ab'fyalten to prevent; auf'fyaften to detain; etn'fyalten to stop; be fatten to keep; er fatten to receive {P. p. erfyalten). Observe that all the irregular verbs which have a in their root or infinitive, retain this a in the Participle past. **) fatten with the preposition fur answers to the English to consider as, to think, to take for. Ex.. 3d) fyalte tfyn fur etuen el)rud)en Sftann, I consider (think) him (to be) an honest man. 176 Lesson 27. Indicative Present. j Imperative. Imperfect. ic Past Part, a 102. -j-^attgcn to hang, to be suspended. 3d) fyauge, bu fyangft, er I Ijcmge. I id) Ijieng I geljcmgen Ijangt, nnr fycmgen :c. I I I hung. hung. Thus: ab'fyangen or abfyangcn (toon) to depend upon. NB. $atigcu to hang up, is regular. P. p. gefyangt. 103. £ttf[ett to let, *) to leave. 3d) laffe, bu lafjeft, er I laffe or lag, | id) lieg I let. I gelaff eu let, lagt, nnr laffen tc. | laffen ©ie. I S. id) liege. | left. Thus: ttcrtaffen to leave (a place), forsake, quit; P.p. Dcrfajfett.; 311 'laffen to admit; aud'tafjen to leave out; jurM 'laffen to leave behind; fyinterlaf'fen {inseparable) to leave behind (in death). fi£. SSeran' laffen (to cause) is regular. Imp. id) fceianlajjte. 104. $atf)ett (Dot.)**) to advise. 3d) ratlje, bu ratljft, er I ratfye. I id) rietlj i geratl)en rati), hnr ratfyen k. I | I advised. advised. Thus: erra'tfyen to guess; afc'ratfyen to dissuade; derratfyen to betray. 105. ©rfjlafctt to sleep. 3d) fd>lafe, bu mm, er I fdjlafe. I id) f d)lief I gefd)lafeu fd)laft, toir fd)lafen k. |fd)lafeit©te.| I slept. I slept. Thus: fein'fcfylafen to fall asleep. Per/, ia) bin eiugefa?lafen. 106. fSaufcn to run. 3d} laufe, bu laufft, er I laufe. I id) lief. i gelaufen lauft, nnr laufen JC. j I I run. J run. Thus: fentlau'fen to run away. 107. £>aucn to hew, cut down. 3d) f>aue, bu fyaueft, er i fyauc. I id) fyiefc j gel)cmen fyaut, nnr l)aueu k. I cut. hewn. Thus: ab'fyauen to cut off; jerfyau'cn to cut to pieces. 108. f®d)Cit to go. 3$ getyc, bu gefyft, er gefyt, I getye. i id) gteng or I gegangcn toir gefyeu tc, I gefyen ©ic. | giug I went. I gone. Thus: faug'gc^fn to go out; •J-fyinem'getyen to go in, to enter; •J-forfgefjen to go away, to leave ; -J-toergefyen to vanish, to pass ; •j-fccrfct'gefyen to pass by; -j-surud'getyen to go back; f£a$iereu gefyen to take a walk. *) To let a house means bermtetfyen. *) See the 22th lesson, § 7. Irreg. verbs: 2nd Conj. 3rd class. 177 Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. ie Past Part. geftogen. 109. ©tofictt to push, thrust. 3dj ftoge, bit ftogefi, er I ftoge. I id) ft teg. ftofct, xo'xx ftegen k. | Thus: an'fto&en to hurt; fcerfto'Een to reject, cast out, expel. 110. 9htfen to call. •Sdjrufe, burufft, erruftic. | vufe. | id) rtef. | gerufen. Thus: auS'rufen to exclaim; jurM'rufen to call back- Words. bte 9Jcaj;tgung temperance. bie 2lnget the fishing-rod. bag 9ce£ {pi. — e) the net. fod)en {reg. v.) to boil, maduig mighty, balb soon. bag Stater {pi. — e) the beast. Unit) wild, fcfytoad) feeble, jafynten to tame, bcfreten to deliver, to release, toerbaunt banished, exiled. 3)er 28tnb the wind. ber ©d)ioager the brother-in- ter Sftatfy the advice. [law. bag ©d)toert the sword. bag tfotopoelj the head-ache. ber Sityrer the leader. ber fntfdj the stag, ber %$ad) the brook, bie SBeigfyeit wisdom, bte @ered)tigfeit justice, bie £ugenb virtue. Reading Exercise. 69. 1. $)er 28inb Blcigt nid)t ftarf; geftcrn bit eg er ftarfer. ;Der $od) fyat bay $Ieifd) nid)t gut (well) gebraten. 2)er 3$ogel fie( tobt toon bem ©aunt. Wit ©toed: (bacon) fangt man 2Raufe. (Sin £i3n?e tourbe in einem 9ce£e gefangen, bannlam eine Wlau$ unb befreite ilm. Siir toen Ijaltft (take) bu ntid)?^ -3d) e x ^ t e 1 1 einen SBrtcf toon metnem ©djtoager. (Sin ©d)toert Ijing uber bem $otof be^ £)amofle». 3Bag ratten ©ie mix; foE id) bleiben ober geljen? Sflan rietfy il)m, fyier $u bleiben. SHefeS tear eiu fd)ted>* ter 9fatf); eg rourbe beffer fiir ifyn getoefen feist, fortjugefyen. 2. 2)er §err rief jetnem Wiener, liefer fragte fetnen §errn (master) : £>aben ©ic mid) gerufen? £)ag £inb fdjlaft. 3)er £obte (SDcann) tag ba, alg toenn (as if) er fd)Hefe. §aben ©ie bie (efcte 9cad)t gut gefd)lafen? 3d) fycibe nur rcenig gefd)lafen, toeit id) ^otoftoelj (a head-ache) fyatte. 9Qcau He J ifyn ntd)t fortgefyen, loeil er ju fd)toad) frar. SSenn ber $nabe nod) einmal (again) an ben £ifd) ftogt, [fo] ioirb er beftraft toerben. SBarum laufcn bie £eute (people) fo jufammen (together) ? 9)can I)at einen £>ieb ge*- fangen. ©inb ©ie aud) gelaufen? 3d) lief mitberSftenge (crowd). Jlttfga6e. 70. 1. The wind blows hard (ftar!) ; yesterday 2 it iblew not so hard. Is this meat boiled or roasted? It is roasted. The OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 12 178 Lesson 28. gardener fell from the tree. Had (nmre) he not 2 fallen idown, 2 he i would have caught the bird. Fifty soldiers with their leader were 1 ) caught. The stag came out of the forest and went to the (an ben) brook. The hunter catches the wild beasts, but he cannot tame them. The Romans considered (101) wisdom 2 ), justice and temperance as (fur) the greatest virtues. 2. The fish are 1 ) caught with nets and fishing-rods. I advised him (Dat.) to go to America. How long did you sleep (Perf.)t I slept seven hours. The girl ran to ($u) her mother and told her (U)r) what 2 had$) * happened (9). The old man was 1 ) pushed out of the house. Cicero left 4 ) Rome ffiom) , when (ctl8) he saw, that (baf$) his enemies 2 weie- 1 mightier (,) than his friends. Alcibiades was banished from Athens (cw8 2lu)en'), but he was soon 2 called iback. 1) See the foot-note 2, p. 168. — 2) Put the definite article see 38th lesson, § 1. — 3) 'to have' printed in Italics is to be translated with f e in. 4) to leave a place = toerlaffen (not (affen). Beading- lesson. • ®oS5tu$iV3 ^Sferfc* Kosciusco's horse. $o$sut8fo, ber eble ^ole, oolite (wished) etnft 1 etnem ©etji* Itcfyen 2 in ©olotfyurn (Soleure) eintge $lafd)en guten 2Betne& fdjtden. (£r toaljlte 3 baju etnen jungen 9Jlann, ytamtn& Qtltatx, unb Her)' itym fiir bie Sftetfe fein eta,ene3 (own) Stettpferb. — 2H8 2>dtnex juiikHam, fagte er: „2fteui ftelbrjerr 4 , id) roerbe 3l)X ^ferb ntd)t ttieber 5 retten, tt>enn 6 ©te mtr ntti^t 6 jugleidj'* 3fyre S3i3rfe (purse) letfyen." — „2Bte meinen ©tc ba$" (what do you mean by that)? fragte £ognu§fo. 3eltner anttoortete: „&obauV al8 (as soon as) etn firmer anf ber Sanbftvages f etnen £mt ab'narjm 9 , unb urn etn 2Umofen 1( > bat, ftanb ba$ ^jerb augenbttcfttd) u fttH, unb gtng 12 nidjt con ber ©telle «, big (till or before) ber Settler 13 &tm% em* pfangen (100) fyatte; uub aid ify aft metn @etb auSgegeben (spent) fyatte, fonnte tdj ba$ ^ferb nur jufrteben ftetten 14 unb toortoartS brtngen 15 , tubem id) micfy fteUte (by pretending), bent Settler StiuaS jit geben. 1) one day. 2) a clergyman. 3) he chose for this purpose. 4) general. 5) again. 6) fteun . . . ntdjt conj. unless. 7) at the same time. 8) road, highway. 9) abnefymen to take off. 10) for charity, alms. 11) immediately. 12) toon ber ©telle gefyen to stir from the spot. 13) beggar. 14) to satisfy, content. 15) get him on. Twenty eighth Lesson. Third Conjugation. The third conjugation has both in the Imperfect and Past participle o as characterising vowel. Irreg. verbs: 3rd Conj. 1st class. 179 First class : Such verbs as have ie for their radical vowel : Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. Past Part. 111. 23iegen to bend. 3$ btege, bu biegfl, er I btege. I id) bog i gebogen biegt, toir biegen k. I I bent. bent. 112. S5tCtCtt fdat.J to offer. 3d) biete,bu bieteft , er i Mete. I idj bot I geboten btetet, toir bieten K. I offered. offered. Thus: on'bteten to offer; P. p. angeboten; Oerbte'tcn to forbid. 113. SSetrtegen, SBetrugen to cheat, deceive. 3d)betritge, bubetttigft, er I betvitge I id) betrog. I betrogeu betriigt, toir betriigen k. I (betriege) . I deceived. NB, The simple verb tr ii gen occurs only in the present tense. 114. igttcgen to fly. 3dj ftiege, bu fltegft, er i fliege. I id) flog i geflogen fltegt, totr ftiegen :c. I flew. flown. Thus: -Hort'fltegen to fly off; ftoeg'fttegcn to fly away. 115. jS'lic^ett to flee. 3d) fliefye, bu flteljft, er I ftiefye. I id) ftolj flteljt, toir flie^en it. I fled. Thus: ientfltc^cn to run away, to escape. P. p. entftoljen. 116. fgHeftctt to flow. 3dj fliege, bu fliegeft, er l fliege. i — flog fltegt, totr fliegen k. flowed. 117. JJrierett to be cold, to freeze. 3d) friere, bu frierft, er I — i id) fror friert, totr frieren :c. I was cold. _ Thus : f gefrie'ren to freeze ; ferfrte'ren to freeze to death. 118. (Uemeften to enjoy, to eat. 3d) geniege, bu geniegeft, I geniege. I id) genog ergeniegt,toirgeniegetuc. I I I enjoyed. 119. ($Keftett to pour (to cast). 3d) giege, bu giegeft, er i giege. I id) gog gtegt, toir giegen k. I poured. geflofyen fled. geflofjen flowed. gefroren frozen. genoffen enjoyed. gegoffen poured. Thus: cms 'giegen to pour out; be§tegen to water; fid) er giegen to empty one's self; bergie'fjen to shed. 120. f^rtedjett to creep, to crawl. 3d) fricdje, bu frted)ft, er I Medje. I id) frcdj I gefrodjen friert, toir rrtedjen ic. I II crept. crept. 12* 130 Lesson 28. Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. Past Pari. 121. Sfttedjen to smell. 3d) ried)e, bit ried)ft, er I rted}e. I id) rod) I gerodjert ried)t, roir ried)en :c. I I smelled. I smelled. 122. ©rf)tefiett to shoot, to fire, to kill. 3d)fd)ie£e, t>u fd^iegeft, er I fdjiege. I id) fcfyojj I gefdjoffen fdjiegt, nrir fdjteften :c. I II shot. I shot. Thus: befd)ie'fjen to bombard; crfd)te|cn to shoot (to kill). 123. ©djltegen to lock. 3d) fdjtiege, bit fd)ltegeft, I fd)liege. I id) ftfylog I gefd)(of|eu erfd)Ue£t,mrfd)Uejseii2C. I I I locked. locked. Thus: &e|d)tte'J3en to conclude, resolve; em'fd)lte&en to shut up, to enclose; cm§'fd>lietjen to exclude; fcevfcpe'jjen to lock up; auf'f$ltej3en to unlock; su'fdjttefjen to lock. 124. SSerbrtefeen to vex. 3d) terbriege, bu fcer* I fcerbrtege. I id) fcerbrog. I fcerbroffeu briegeft, er fcerbriegt. I I I vexed. 125.' SSerliereu to lose. 3d)fcerliere, bufcertierft, er I fcertiere. I id) fcerlor | cerloren fcerltert, roir fcerliereu k. I II lost. lost. 126. SBiegen to weigh, to be of weight. 3d) loiege, bu rciegft, er I — I id) to eg I geroogeii toiegt, loir ioiegeu :c. I weighed. I weighed. The active verbs wdgcn ito weigh, to ascertain weight) and er too g en {to consider) have the Imperf. and Part, past like roiegen. Imp. n>og (or rocigte). P. geroogen, ertoogen. The active verb re teg en [to rock) is regular. 127. 3icl)Ctt to pull, to draw. 3d) jielje, bu jtefyfi, er I $ier)e. I id) jogldrew | gejogeu jtefyt, roir jiel^en :c. I or pulled. | drawn. Thus: an'jte^en to put on; auS'jteljm to take off. 128. ©rfjiefceu to shove, push. Imp. id) fd)oB. Part. gefdjobeu. Thus: toerfd)teben to put off. 129. ©tebcit to boil, to seeth. Imp. id) fott. Part, gefotteii. 130. i©^rief?en to sprout. Imp. — fprog. Part, gefprcfjen. 131. iStiebcu to fly off (sparks). Imp. ftob. Part, geftobeu. 132. Sriefen to drop, drip. Imp. id) trof. Part, getrieft (reg). Irreg. verbs: 3rd Conj. 2nd class. 181 Words. £>er 3ltbe the Jew. bie Sap the weight, burden. ber ^rteben peace. ber ©djnee (G^n. — 8) snow. bie $artoffe( the potato. ber n?o\ft, i fdjtoore. I id) fd) to or (ori gefd)rooren. er fdjtoort, nrir fd)tooren. | I td) fd)tour). | Thus: befdjtofl'ren 1) to confirm by an oath, 2) to conjure, entreat. 149. 2BcBett to weave. 3d) toebe, bu toebft, er I toebe. I id) toob. i getooben. toebt, toir toeben :c. I The following verbs of this conjugation seldom occur: 150. (Srfitrcn (erftefen) to elect, choose. Imp. id) erf or. Part. erforen. 151. ^flegen to treat. Imp. td) fcflog. Part, gepflogen. NB. $flegcn is regular, when it signifies to nurse; and also in the meaning of gcrcolmt fein to be accustomed. 152. Cllteflctt to spring forth. Imp. quod. Part, gequollen. 153. ©rtttfen**) to drink, lap like brutes. Imp. id) foff. Part. gefoffen. 154. (Sdjntutbcu to snort. Imp. id) fd)uob. Part, gefdmobex Words. £)er £orb the basket. ber £ob the death. ber <5teiu the stone. ba8 ^euer fire, freubig joyfully. *) <3augen (to suck) is sometimes used as a regular verb. **) ©aufen is applied only to animals. 184 Lesson 28. bte Sftagb the maid-servant. bag 2td)t the light, candle. bag §eer or bte 3tvmee the army, bag Bern the leg, limb. bie 2(fd)e {sing.) the ashes. fdjtoer heavy. bag Xud) the cloth. me never. ber §ontg honey. oevbtenen to deserve. bag featerlanb the country. tapfer bravely. Reading Exercise. 72. 2Bag betoog ben ^Dialer, bte ©tabt gu oerlaffen? 3d) toet§ ntd)t, wag tfyn (bap) be too gen fyat. $)ag $euer ifUerlofdjen. SDie Htfyener (the Athenians) fyaben in ber <2d)tad)t bet SOfaratfyoit tapfer gefodjten. liefer &cxh ift fd)led)t geflod)ten. ^omieu ©te btefen (Stem fyeben? 3d) Ijabe ifyn fd)on aufgefyoben. 3d) ftnbe ifyn md)t fo fd)toer. $)er $nabe fyat gelogen. 2Bann toerben Sljre (3d)afe gefdjor en toerben? 3mnad)ften (next) 2ftonat £)er ©dntee tft auf ben 23ergen gefd) molten. 33ortgeg (last) •Satyr fdjmotj er tm 9)conat 3itft. £)te mngen Seute jogen (marched) freubig in bte ©d)lad)t; fie fdjtooren, $u fiegen (to conquer) ober $u fterben. <&ttfga0tenfte tetftet (renders). 14) mixed themselves. 15) liquid. 16) transparent matter* 17) discoverers. 18) valuable. 19) material, object, article. Twenty ninth Lesson. Fourth Conjugation. This conjugation consists only of nine verbs having' a for their radical vowel. Here the distinguishing vowel in the Imperfect is U; the Past participle retains the radical vowel a of the Infinitive. In the second and third person of the Indicative Present five of them change their a into a. Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. u Past Part. a 155. 85a faljre, bit fafyrft, er I fat)ve. ltd) ful)r I I gefafyren fafyrt, nnr fasten 2C. I drove, went. | driven. NB. This verb has also an active meaning : to lead the horses ; it then takes I? a ben in the comp. tenses. Thus: -J-auS'fafyren or -J-tyajteren fafyven to take a drive; j-ab'- fctfyren to start, to set out; erfafyren to learn. P. p. erfafyrm. 157. ®rabeit to dig. 3d) grabe, bu grabft, er j grabe. I id) grub I gegraben grabt, nnr graben k. I I I dug. dug. Thus: bcgta'bcn to bury. Imp. id) begrub. P. p. begrabcn buried. 158. Sabett to load (a gun). 3d> labe, bu (abeft, er I late. ltd) (ub | gelaben*) iabet (labt), nnr (abeu K. I I I loaded. loaded. Thus: bek'beu to load; einiafcen to invite [P.p. eingela'fcen). *) ©e lab en means laden as well as loaded. 186 Lesson 29. Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. u Past Part. a 159. ©djaffett and erfdjaffett to create, make. 3d) fdjaffe, bu fdjaffft, er | fdjaffe. | id) fd)uf (or l affen k. I I erfdjuf). |" crfc^biffcn). iV2?. ©djaffen to work and its compounds are regular , as : an'* fd)affen to get; fcerfctyaffen to procure; afc'faaffen to abrogate. 160. (Sdjlageit to beat, to strike. 3d) fdjlage, bufd)lagft, er I fdjlage. I idfy fd)tug i gefd)Iagen f d> I a g t , hrir fd)tagen :c. |. I I struck. beaten. Thus: ab'fd;kgen 1) to knock off, 2) to refuse; erfdjla'gen to slay; Imp. erfcfclug; auS'fctylagen to decline: jerfdjla'gen to knock to pieces. 161. £ragen to carry, to wear, to take. 3d) trage, bit tragft, er I trage. i id) trug I I getragen tragt, hnr tragen k. | wore, carried. I carried. Thus: crtra'gen to endure, to bear; ftdj bctra'gen to behave; bet'- tragen to contribute ; ab 'tragen to clear the table ; to wear out. 162. f 28nd)fett to grow, wax. 3d) road)fe, bit toacfyfeft, er I toad)fe. I idj toud)8 re ad) St, roir road)fen :c. I I grew. 163. SSftfdjett to wash. 3d) n>afd)e, bit roafdjeft, er I toafdje. I id) h>uf d) rcafd)t, nrir tt>afd)en tc. I I I washed. Thus: au«'roaf$en to wash out. I geh)ad)fen grown. I getoafdjen I washed. Words. j£)er 93S(fer the baker. ba$ £)aiivpfboot the steamboat. bie (Stfenbaljn the railroad. b« $itd)8 the fox. erne §oijle a den, cave, ber Stobtertgraber the grave- digger, sexton. ba§ ©rab the grave, ber $utfd)er the coachman. ber £)tttttibit3 the omnibus. ber 2Bagen the carriage, coach, ber barren the cart. ba8 Sod) the hole". t>ie SBunbe the wound, jet) en Sag adv. every day. fca« £afdjentud) the handkerchief, ber SD^ufifler)rer the music-master. ba$ 3fltttagef[ert dinner, ber SfrtegSminifter the minister of war. baS ©eftd)t the face. ba^ ©prtd)tt>crt the proverb. bie (Std)e the oak. tief deep. bie $ano'ne the gun, cannon. t>rad)tig elegant, ltnartig naughty, fdjmitfcig dirty, tangfam slow, slowly. ltufd)Ulbig guiltless, innocent. pflanjen to plant. Lesson 29. 137 Reading Exercise. 73. 1. §eute Ijaben ttrir $ucfyen gebatfen. SBarum bacft 3br 9Zad)bar !ein 93rob mefyr? 2Seit er fein Sttefyl ijat. £)ie na$fte HBocfye toirb er nneber bacfen. £>er $ cnig fafyrt mit fedjS $fer* 1>en. 2Bofyin' fa!jren fatyre nac£> Mn. ©eftern fu^r mein $reunb bafyin (there). 5ft er mit- (by) bent £>ampfboot gefafyren (gone)? &ein, mtt (by) ber (Sifenbafyn. £)er gudjS grabt ftd) eine ipbfyle. £)er STobtengraber Ijat ein ©rab gegra* ben. Sin (Sfel nmrbe mtt fcielen ©atfen be tab en; aber ba (as) er bte Saft (load) ntcfyt tragen fonnte, nmrbe fie auf einen 2Bagen a,elegt (put). 2. Xragen dfy bin unfdmtbtg an bem SBfate biefeS ©erecfyten (just man). Die S^eepftanje n>acfy§t in (Sfyina. griper (formerly) to>ud»8 ber £abaf nid^t in £)eutfd)(anb ; aber jefct nnrb toiel Zaiat ge^ftanjt. 3)iefer 3imgling ift fefyr gettadrfen, feit (since) id? ifyn nidjt mefyr (last) gefefyen \)abe. -3m Wnfang fc^uf ©ott pummel unb (£rbe. i)ie 2Bett ift toon ©ott au$ $id?t$ gefcfyaffen toorben. Jiitfga6c. 74. 1. The baker has baked no bread to-day; he does not l>ake every day. The coachman drives too fast ($u fdmell). We went (drove) (156) in an omnibus. The prince drove in an -elegant carriage with four horses. The fox digs a hole in the ground (SBoben, m.). The savages (SBUbett) dug a deep hole. A poor child was buried in the snow. Are you loading the gun? It is already loaded. The cart is too heavily laden. The minister of war has invited all [the] officers to fount) dinner. In the beginning 2 God 1 created heaven and earth. 2. Why do you beat the child? I beat it, because it 2 was l naughty. (The) dogs are often beaten. Cain (£aln) slew (160) his brother Abel. Our music-master 2 always * wears -a grey hat. Two soldiers earned the officer out of the battle and washed his wound. One hand washes the other, says a German proverb. Henry, wash your face, you are dirty. Are my handkerchiefs washed? No, Sir, not yet, they will be washed to-morrow. The oak grows very slowly. These vio- lets have grown in my garden. Conversation. [Comprising the four Conjugations.) 2Ba8 effen ®te ba? 3d) effe gleifeb unb 23rob; e* ift mein Sxufyftutf. 28er Ijnt e3 Sfynen gegeben? 3$ ^abe e3 (mir) gefauft. ©aben ame!u ftennen &ie eintge Don iljnen ? 3a, idjfennebiemeiftentoonilmeu. ■3ft 3I)r 23ater toon feiner langen ©ott fei 3)aitt! er ift ganj (quite) $ranfljett genefen (8)? genefen. 28o ift ber 2Birt^ (landlord)? St ift au§gegangen ; aber cr totvt> id) mug il)m ettoaS fagen. Bait) nrieber suritdfommen. 23a3 ift gefdjefyen, bag ba§ $olf (Sin banter (bricklayer) ift oom fo jufammen (together) tauft? $>ad)e gef alien. &at er fid) oerle^t (hurt)? 3a, er Ijat ein S3ein gcbrocfyen. 2$er Ijat 31jnen befobten, meine Memaub befall e$ mir; id) tvug ©tiefel $um ©d)ul)mad)er jn fie baljin, toeit fie jeriffen ftnb. tragen? §at man 31jren Dting ioieber (Sr lag auf bent SBoben, Winter beat gefnnben? 2So lag er? ©djranfe (press) toerborgen (17). 2$er fanb itjn? 2)te 2ftagb fanb it)n, at« fie ba£ 3immer fcu^te (cleaned). §aben ©ie 3f)re Ul)r rtic^t meljr? S^eirt, fie ift mir geftoljlen roorben. Sooon fprid)t biefer SJcamt? (£r fpridjt oom friege. §at ber $rteg fd)on begonnen? 9tein, aber er n)irb balb beginnen. ^Bift bn fcertounbet? $at 3e= (Sine 23iene fyat mid) in bie 2£ange manb btr (5tn>a3 (any harm) (cheek) geftodjen, unb }e§t ift getl)an? fie gefd)tootlen. <5ttdt ber ©tad)el (the sting) 9tfein, man I)at ilm gleid) (im- nod) barin ? mediately) fyerauSgejogen (127) ... 28a8 tt)ut biefer Sttann Ijier? (Sr fangt $ogel. §at er fdjon einige gefangen? 3d) glaube, er Ijat erft (only) toenige gefangen. 3ji ber 2)teb ergriffen (caught) 3a, man ergriff ifyw, att er au$ toorben? bem §aufe fdjlid). 2Ber fyat biefe $eber gefdjnitten? 3dj felbft l)abe fie gefdmitten. 3n toa$ finb ©ie gefaljren? 3d) fufyr in einem SBagen. 2£ann f)at ©ott bie 2£elt er* £)ie 23tbel fagt: 3m Infang fd)uf ■•fdjaffen? ©ott §immel nnb (Srbe. Sarum ftnb bie $luffe unb 23ad)e 95>eit ber ©d)nee anf ben S3ergen (brooks) fo angefd)n)oHen ? gefdjmofyen (146) ift. 2Ber Ijat ben 23rief auf bie 3)er S3ebtentc trug iljn fcor einer ^$oft getragen? Ijalben ©tunbe bafyin' (there). SaS t^at ber, Ihtabe am SBrwt* (Sr U)ufd) feine §aube unb tranf nen (spring)? 28affer. So tjaben ®ie biefe fd)b'ne Silie ©ie ijt in meinem ©arten gc* gefunben? toadjfen. SBarum ^>aben ©tc ba§ Staffer (S« toar nic^t rein (clean). -3d) au^gegoffen (119)? begog 31jre SBlumen bamit. Irregular verbs. 189 fatten ©te fd)oneS SEBetter ju 3)ie (Sonne fdn'en tyxxlid), at8 toir (for) 31pm ©pajtergang anf anfingen (began) , ten 23evg $u t>en ,$onigftnfyH erfteigen; aber Bait) tarn em ©emitter (a thunder-storm), unt) nrir roaren ge^roungen, tote* t>ev fyerab (down) ju gefyen. Additional Remarks to the irregular verbs. As the learner has already observed, some of the irre- gular verbs also change their radical consonants either in the Present, Imperfect or Participle. We subjoin here those little irregularities : 1) In the present tense: 3d) nclnne, bit nimmft, er nintmt (double m). id) fd)ette, er fd)itt | id) fyalte, cr fyalt I instead of fd)eftet, fyalttt, ratbet :c. id) xafyt, er rati) | (lose the termination t). id) gelte, er gilt I 2) There is further an old form of the third person sin- gular of some verbs, with the diphthong cu f which still occurs in poetry, viz. : (Sr fleugt, freud)t, beut, fleitftt, geufjt for fliegt (flies), friedjt (crawlsj, bietet (offers), fliefjt (flows), giefct (pours). 3) In the Imperfect tense: 3d) ljie&, gefcaiien from fycuten (takes a final b). id? trof, getroffm from treffen j ,, f . th , ■ . id) fd)uf, gefd)affen from fd?affen ( (l08e one ] ln tne Im P>- id) fam, gefommen from fommen (loses one m in the Imp.), 4) In the Imperfect and Participle: 3d) bat, gebeten from bitten (loses one t). id) fafj, gefeffen from fi£cn (changes Jj into jf). id) ftanb, gejtanbcn from [tebett (changes I) into nb). id) titt, gelitten from teiben j (change b into id) fd)nitt, gefd)nitten from fd)neibeu \ two t'«;. id) Vf»!f» ge^fiffen from tfetfen ) id) fd)liff, gefd)liffen from jdjleifen > (double their f). id) griff, gegriffen from greifen j id) jog, gejogen fr° m wfytn (changes t) into g). id)fott, gefotten from fteben (changes b into double tt). 5) There exist some older forms of the Subjunctive mood of the Imperfect, which still occur now and then, viz.: 3d) befofyte instead of id) bcfcifyte; toerbiirge for fcerbarge. id) ftiinbe for id) ftanbe; id) ftiirbe for id) ftarbe. id) tmbiube for fcerbarbe; id) getocnne for getoanne. ■ 6) The regular verb f rag en, to ash, has for the Imperfect tense, besides the regular form id) fragte, an old form id) 190 Lesson 29. frug; Sub/. td)friige; thus also: — fcfyaUen resound: fcfyolt and fdmauben snort: fdjnob. 7) Some regular verbs have a second participle of the ancient form which is commonly used as an adjective. Such are: SSertoorren confused, from toeraurren (reg. v.) to confuse, flatten (reg. v.) to split, fatgen (reg.v.) to salt, tttctfykn (reg. v.) to grind, fid? tocrtuegen to dare. rdd)en to revenge. gefyalten split, gefaljen salt, salted gemctfylcn ground fcertuogen dared, gerod)eit avenged An alphabetical list of all the irregular verbs. KB. Simple verbs which are not found in considered regular. Compound verbs under their primitives. Infinitive. Saden to bake ♦bebiirfen 2 ) to need, like biirfen Pres. id) fcebcnf befefyfen to order, to command befletfjen, fidj, to apply one's self begmnen to begin beifjen to bite beftemmen to press bergen to hide, to conceal fberften to burst, to crack befimten, fid), to meditate beju3en to possess betriigen to cheat, to deceive betoegen to induce btegen to bend bteten to offer btnben to bind, to tie bitten to beg, to request Majen to blow -rbletben to stay, to remain braten to roast brecfyert to break *brennen 2 ) to burn *brmgen to bring *£>enfen to think bingen to hire (a servant) brefcfyen to thrash fbringen to press forward, to urge brcmg dm^fangen to receive em^fefylen to recommend this list, are to be must be sought for Imperfect. Part. Past. Nr. bud [Udtt) gebadcn 1551) beburfte beburft — befabt befol)fen 16 befltfe befltffen 02 begann m begounen 3& gebtffen 01 bcttomm bcftommen 134 barg geborgen 17 barft geboiften 18 befann befonnen 39 befaft befeffen 13 betrog betrogen 113 bemog betoogen 133 bog gcbogen 111 bot gcboten 112 banb gebunben 144 bat gebeterr 11 btteS geblafen 97 biteb geblieben 80- brtet gcbraten 98 brad) gebrodjen 19 branute gebrannt — brad)te gebrad)t — bad)te gcbac^t — (btngte) gebungert 58 bra]dj (brofd)) gebrofdjen 2a brcmg gebrungen 47 em^fing entyfangen 100 entyjafyt emj)jol)len 16 1) These figures indicate the number of each of the irregular verbs from p. 158 to 180. 2) The verbs marked * are partly irregular (see p. 121, § 0). Irregular verbs. 191 Infinitive. Imperfect Part. Past. iVr. em^ftnben to feel entyjaub empfunbcrt 44 fcntrmncn to escape entrann entronncn 38 ferbleidjen to turn pale crb(td) erblidjen 03 cifiiren to choose erfor erforen 150 ferfofdjen to become extinct erlofdj ertofdjen 135 *erf$atten to resound erfcbctt (erfd^aflte) erfdjottett 136 T-crfc^recfcn to become frightened erfd?tacf erfdjrotfett 21 ertoagen to consider em? eg ertoogen 126 cffen to eat a* gegeffen 2 ft$afyren to drive fu^r gefabrett 156 -{-fatten to fall ftel gefaflen 99 fano.cn to catch fteng gefangen 100 fed)ten to fight mt gefod^ten 137 ftnben to find fanb gefunbcn 44 flecfyten to twist flod>t geftodjten 138 ffltegen to fly ffofl geflcgen 114 -fflie^crt to flee flof? gcflobat 115 •j-fliefeen to flow M gefleffen 116 freffen to eat = to devour frag gefreffert 3 frteren to freeze fror gefroren 117 ©abrm to ferment go^t (gctyrte) gegofyren 139 gebaren to bring forth gebar geboren 23 geben to give gab gegeben 1 gebteten to order, to command gebot geboten 113 fgebeifyen to thrive gebtef) gebieben 86 •j-gefatten to please geftel gefaflen 99 -j-geben to go gteng gegangcn 108 •j-getingen to succeed getang getungen 48 geften to be worth gait gcgolten 22 -J-genefen to recover genafe gcnefen 8 gemeften to enjoy gcnofj genoffert 118 fgeratfyen to fall or get into gertetb geratfyen 104 -j-gefdjefyen to happen gefdjal) gefdjefyen 9 gerohmen to win, to gain geioatm gctoonnen 37 gtefjen to pour goS gegoffert 119 gletdjjen to resemble gttdj gegltcfyen 65 •{-gleiten to glide, slide, slip gtttt gegtitten 66 igttmmen to burn faintly glomm gegtommen 140 graben to dig grub gegraben 157 gretfen to gripe, to grasp Sriff gegriffen 04 fatten to hold f)tdt geljalten 101 •Hjangen to hang fyteng gefangen 102 fyauen to hew f)teb gebauen 107 fyeben to lift ^ob gefyoben 141 fyeifcen to be called, to bid bie§ ge^cifan 96 tyelfen to help w gefyolfen 24 *$ennen to know fartntc gefannt — f fUmmcn to climb flomm geflommcn 140a fttngen to tingle, to sound flang gcfltmgcu 49 fneifen to pinch fntff gefitiffett 67 fretjdpen to scream frijc§ geiafdjen 88 102 Irregular verbs. Infinitive. Imperfect. Tart. Past. Kr. 4-Iommen to come Urn gefommen 42 ffricdjen to crawl, to creep frod> gefrocfyen 120 £abcn to load tub gefabcn 158 laffen to let, to leave Itefj gelaffen 103 flaufcn to run lief gdaufen 106 letben to suffer litt gditten 68 let^cn to lend lieb geliefycn 87 lefen to read laS gelefen 5 fitcgen to lie lag geiegm 12 liigen to tell a lie log getogeu 142 SHeiben to shun, to avoid mieb gemteben 84 mclfen to milk molf (mettte) gemotfeit 143 tneffen to measure mafj gemeffen 4 mifjfatten to displease mtjjfiel mtftfafleu 99 Stefymen to take naljm genommen 25 *nemten to call nctimte genannt — ipfctfcn to whistle £ftff ge^fiffen 69 Vflegen to entertain, nurse j>flog gepflogen 151 iprcifen to praise, to extol j>rie8 gejmefen 91 Ductlcn to spring forth quott gequoHen 152 JHatfyen to advise rtetl? geratfycn 104 rciben to rub rieb gcricben 81 rrifjen to rend, to tear rtfj geriffen 70 freiten to ride (on horseback) ritt geritten 71 *rcnncn to run, to race rannte gerannt — rted)en to smell rod? gerodjen 121 ringcn to wrestle, to wring rang gmmgcn 50 rinnen to leak, to flow ratm gcronncn 38 rufen to call rtcf gcrufcn 110 Saufen to drink (of animals) Toff gefoffen 153 faugen to suck (also regular) fog gefogen 144 fcfyaffen to create fcfyuf gefdjaffen 159 fdjeiben to separate fdjteb gefdneben 85 fcfyeincn to seem, to shine fdnen gefdjienen 9;i jd;dten to scold, to chide fdklt gefrf;olten 26 fdbeercn to shear fcbot gefctyorcu 145 fd;teben to shove, to push fd?eb gefd>cben 128 fdjieften to shoot fd?ofc gefdjoffen 122 jdjinben to flay — gefdmnben 59 f&tafen to sleep fcbltef getrfjlafen 105 fd?tagen to beat, to strike f(^lug gefdjlagen 160 -Hdjleidjen to sneak, to steal into fd?lid? gefdjlidjen 73 fcfcteifcn to sharpen, to grind fcfyttff gefdjliffen 72 fcfyltefcen to lock, to close f^tojj gefdjloffen 123 fdjlingen to wind, to twist fd;lawg gefcfytungen 51 fcfyrndfjcn to fling, smite fdjmtfj gefdimiffen 75 fdj>md$en to melt, to smelt fdjmolj gefdjmotien 146 fdmauben to breathe, to snort fdjnob gefdmoben 154 fdmctbcn to cut fdnittt gefdjnitten 76 fdjreiben to write f&vteb geicfyrieben 82 fcjiretcn to scream, to cry fd)rte gef$rieen 88 Irregular verbs. 193 Infinitive. Imperfect. Part. Past. Nr. •ffdjrctten to stride, to step faritt ge|*rttten 77 ftfywetgen to be silent f*»icg gef^miegcn 94 fcfynxlien to swell fctytooll gcf^rootten 147 i-fctynnmmcit to swim fcfytoamm gefctytoommert 41 -J-fctyivinbtn to vanish fcfytoanb geftfyrounben 45 jdjttnngen to swing, to brandish f($n>ang gef<$r»ungen 52 jcfyrooiett to swear fdjroor gef<$r»orert 143 •fcbcn to see M gefefcrt 6 *fenben to send fanbtc gefanbt — ■fieben to boil fott gefotten 129 fingen to sing fang fan! gefungen 53 fftnten to sink gefunten 55 finnen to meditate farm gefonnett 39 -ffifcen to sit fafi gcfeffen 13 tyeten to spit foie gefpiem 89 fjnnnen to spin foatm gefponnen 40 ■fjpredjen to speak frradb, gefproctyen 27 jjmcfjen to sprout ftrofj geforoffen 130 -j-fpringcn to spring fyrang gefyrungert 54 ftecfycn to sting pa* geftoc^en 23 ■j-fteden to stick fiatf geftocfen 29 4fiel?en to stand ftanb geftanbert 14 ftefylen to steal Ml geflobkn 30 4fteigen to mount fftevben to die tfteg gefiiegen 95 jtarb gcftorben 31 fftieben to fly off j^ob geftoben 131 fttnfen to stink flanl gefmnfett 60 ftofjen to push fKefe geftofeen 109 ftreidjen to rub find? geftrtttyert 74 jireittn to quarrel ftritt geftrttteii 78 Sfyun to do tfcai getfyatt 15 tragen to carry, to wear trug gctragert 161 treffen to hit, to meet traf gervoffen 35 tretben to drive trieb getrieben S3 f tretcn to tread trat getreten 7 triefen to drop, drip trof • getrteft 132 trinfcn to drink tranf getrunfen 56 tritgen to deceive (trog) (getrogen) 111 IBerbergen to hide, conceal toerbarg tcrborgcn 17 toerbieten to forbid berbot fcerboten 113 toerberben to spoil, to ruin berbarb Derborbcn 32 fcerbrtefcen to vex tocrbrofj toerbroffen 124 fcergeffen to forget toergafj totrgeffen 10 toerltcren to lose bertor fcerlorcn 125 *i>ermogen {Pres. tdj toermag) id) bermoerjieVen 90 -}-2Badjfen to grow ttmc$8 gelradjfen 163 toagen to weigh toog getoogen 126 H>afd?en to wash rcu'fd) gcroafc^en 162 OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 13 194 Lesson 30. Infinitive. Imperfect. Part. Past. JVK tccben to weave tt>ob gettoben 149 -f-teetdjen to yield ttnd) geroicfyett 79 toetfen to show toteg gennefen 92 *tt>enben to turn toanbte getoanbt — tocrben to sue toarb getootben 3a *t»erben (anx. ver b) to become (ttjarb) tourbc getootben — toerfett to throw n>aif geworfen 34 toiegen to weigh toog gewogen 126 hnrtbett to wind toanb genmnben 46 * to iff en to know (Pres. i$ tbcijj) nmfjte gercufjt — Seifyen to accuse &te^ gqicf>en 90 iiefyen to draw, to pull jog gejogen 127 jtttngen to force, to compel jroang gejtoungcn 57 Thirtieth Lesson. INSEPARABLE VERBS. (Untrennbave 3^ittobrter.) Most German verbs allow of certain prefixes or pre- positions to be placed before them. Unaccented particles or prefixes assimilate themselves with the simple verb so as to form one inseparable combination, such as : hqafytn to pay> id) hqafyt I pay; id} be^lte I paid. Verbs of this kind are called inseparable verbs. Their particular character is as follows : 1) The prefixes remain attached to the verb through its whole conjugation. 2) The prefixes are always unaccented. 3) They do not admit of the syllable $e in the past Participle, as: Bejaljlt' paid (not gebe^afylt). 4) The sign of the infinitive, $u is put before the combination, as in English: £U Bejctfyten to pay. Theii conjugation depends on their being regular or irregular. — There are eleven inseparable prefixes • Be, emp, er, ge, mife, bull, cnt r fcer, $er, gutter and totber**) four last prefixes serve to compound a noun or sy are accented, as: bcr 2Rifj'muty ill-humour; *) # When the an adjective , they mife'giinfltg envious; bte 2Mma$t authority; bottfommen perfect; ber 2Bt'ber|>fU$ contradiction, bte £m'tertift cunning, artifice. Inseparable verbs. 195 1. Conjugation of a regular inseparable verb. SBebetfen to cover. Present. 3$ beberfe I cover bu bebecfft thou coverest er bebecft he covers roir bebecfen we cover ©ic bebecfen you cover fie bebedeu they cover. 2C. K. 2C. 2C. Imperfect. 3>ct) fcebecfte I covered bit bebecfteft ic. er bebecfte nur bebecften <5ie bebecfteu fte bebecften Perfect. 3'ma§en to presume, guess id) mutfymajje itjctt'ctfcrn to emulate id) trctteifere banb'fyabento handle, maintain id? fyanbfyabe toct'tcrleucfyten to sheet-lighten eg toettcrfeuc^tet toeif'fagen to prophesy i<$ ttmffage Note. The two verbs to ill f a Ij ' r e n {to comply with) and f r o $ • locfcn {to exult, to shout), may either take or omit the prefix gc in the participle, which may be tmllfafyrt' or geftttt'fafyrt; frofylodt or gefrojjfotft. The former is best, toil! and frofy being unaccented. gelteb'foSt. gelufttoanbclt. geargttitynt. geredjtfertigt. gemutfymajjt. getoettctfert. gefyanbljabt. geroetterleudjtet gemciffagt. Words. 2)ag Sanb the land. bag ©liicf fortune. bag Safter vice. bte ©tubten pi. the studies. ber 5IuffeI)er the overseer. ber 2Beg the road, way. ber Saner (/>/. — n) the peasant. bebanen to cultivate. bag ©efcacf the luggage. bet ©ebartfe the thought. bag 23etragen the behaviour. erratben [ir. v. 104) to guess. bag £>ertrauen (the) ^nfidence. erobern reg. to confer, take. befallen («r. 101) to keep. oerfpredjen («r. 27) to promise. entfa^CIt reg. to abdicate, resign, gitnftta favorable, adv. — ly. begun jitgen reg. to favour, beraitben reg. to rob, to deprive, bettolmen to inhabit, befolgen reg. to follow, befjent reg. to amend, befdnnu^en reg. to soil, jerftrenen reg. disperse, scatter, trie fttttt the chain, trie <5d)etbe the pane of glass, ber dauber the robber, ganj, ganoid) entirely, quite. nad)fyer adv. afterwards. Reading Exercise. 75. 1. $)er ©d^itee bebetft bte Chbe tm 2Btnter. £)te fletgigen fitter toerben bet oljnt. SDiefe 23ud)er gef alien mir ntd)t. £>te $etnbe eroberten bte ©tabt. 3d) erfannte (2>te ntd)t gletd) (directly), toeil eg bunfel toar. 93ef)atten er ©artner r)at oergeffen, metne jnngen ^ftanjen jn begiejen. 2. £)er $onig V* 5 U ©nnften (in favour of) fetneg ©oljneg bem Sfyrone entfagt. $)er ©ofyn beg Sorb $. Ijat feme ©tubten 198 Lesson 30. gaitj oema^lafftgt. ©err SBdfer fyat mem 23ttcfy fe^r gitnfttg be* urtfyetit. 2)te guten Sftenfdjen oerabfdjeuen ba§ Safter. 3)tc ^ca^* ridjt »on bem <8tege (victory) ber ^einbe fyat etnen grojen ©djreden (panic) oerurfctcfyt. $)er Sufferer tyatte fetn ©efdjaft (business) ganj oemacblaffigt. £>er jutige Wtam recfytfertigte t>a§ $3ertrauen, ba8 loir in tljn fe^ten. JlufflaGe. 76. 1. Water covered the land. You lose your friends. I had not received your letter. Good children obey their {Dat.) parents. This young man was much (fefyr) favoured by (the) fortune. The peasants cultivate their land. The road is planted (bebflcmjt) with walnut- (SGttfj*) trees. A robber has robbed me (Ace.) of my luggage (Gen.). You have guessed (104) my thoughts. The boy promised me (Dat.) to amend his behaviour. We have lost our money. The child has soiled its dress. I will keep this book. Have you executed the orders (SBefdjte) of the king? 2. I was*) deceived (113) by my neighbour; he deceives everybody. Carthage (^attfyctgo) was destroyed by the Romans. I have received several letters from America. Do not con- tradict your teacher (Dat.). Have you breakfasted? I break- fast every morning at nine o'clock. The dog broke (tore, 70) his chain and ran off (fort). Your boots are torn, shall I take (trctgetl) them to (ju) the shoemaker? A bird flew (114) against the window and broke a pane of glass. Afterwards 2 nobody iknew (,) who 3 had 2 broken Ht. I was*) not (or have not been) informed of (boil) the death of Mr. Graham. The robber was condemned 2 to ^be * hanged (Pass, voice). Conversation. 2Ba8 tfyateit tie getnbe? ©ie eroberten tie ©tabt. 2Ber beioofmt jeneS (Scfylog? £)er oftrd*ifd>e ©raf 5. 3ft er reid)? 9flcm fagr; ba£ er fer)r reicfy tft SBarum fyat ber ©artner tie ©r J^atte feme £tit ; er toirb fie SBIumeii ntdjt begoffen? btefen 5lbent> begieften. 2Ba3 »erfpradj ber Sfriabe? (Sr oerfyrad), fid) m beffern. 2Ber toon 3>ljnen fyat mir ttnber* 9ftemcmb oon utiS fyat Sljnen fprocfyen? loiberforocfyeii. £at btefer Sflaim fetn ©efd;aft 9ceuver fyat eg ganoid? ocrnad)* beforgt (attended to)? ISfftgt. §aben ©te einen Srief con 3d) erfyalte oft 23rtefe con iljm. •Severn ffreunbe erfyalten? §aben er btefeS ©lag ^etn, mem§erc, ten to go away; cm-faiiflcn to begin. When conjugated in the Present and Imperfect of the Indicative, and in the Imperative, these prepositions are detached from the verb, and placed at the end of the clause, as : Present: td) gelje btefen Slbenb tutS; Imperfect: id) gtttg geftern tvidjt an$; Imperf ®el)cn ©te mit mtr an§. Sawgcn ©te jefct an. The prefix remains with the verb in the Infinitive, in those tenses formed with the Infinitive (1st Future and 1st Conditional), and in both Participles. Ex. : anfangen to begin; Put. i<$ toerbe anfangen; Part. pres. anfangenb. In the Past participle the syllable Qe is placed between the particle and the verb, as: an*$e*fangen, auSgegangen. The same rule applies to the word „£U", when this is required in the Infinitive, as: an*$u*fangen, auS^ugefyen :c. The accent of the separable verbs is double, one on the separable particle, the other on the verb, as: an'fang'en. Conjugation of a separable verb. 9lbfd)reiben (id) fdjrieb . . ab, — abgefdjrteben) to copy. Present. 3dj fdjretbe . . . ab I copy hnr fdjreiben . . ab we copy bu fd)retbft . . . ab thou copiest (Ujr fdjreibt . . ab) ye copy er ftiyretbt . . . ab he copies ©te fdjretben . . ab you copy fie fdjretbt . . . ab she copies, fie fd)reiben . . ab they copy. 200 Lesson 31. Imperfect. 3dj fdjirteb ... ab I copied hrir fdfyrteben . . . ab we copied bit fdfyrtebft . . . ab :c. (tfyr fcfyrtebet . . . ab) :c. er fpfyrteb . . . ab :c. ©ic fcfyrtebeu . . . ab tc. fie fdjrteb . . . ab jc. fie fdjrieben . . . ab k. Perfect. 3d) fyabe . . abgefdjrteben I have copied, &c. Pluperfect. 3d) fyatte . . abgefdjrteben I had copied, &c. 1st Fut. 3d) toerbe . . abfdpiben I shall copy, &c. 2nd Fut. 3d) fterbe abgefdjrteben fyaben I shall have copied. 1st Cond. 3d) toitrbe . . abfdjretben I should copy, &c. 2nd Cond. 3d) toiirbe abgefdjrteben Ijaben I should have copied. Imperative. the evening. ba8 (Concert' the concert. ab'brennen to burn down. bte -IRotfy the distress, need. -f-anf'gefyen [of the sun) to rise* bte 3cid)rtung the drawing. fd)led)t badly, fd)on already, bte ©ouue the sun. SJtorgenS adv. in the morning. Reading Exercise. 77. 3dj ferret be bte Slufgabe ab. 2Ber fd)rteb btefen 23rtef ab? fart fyat tjjm abgefefyrteben. 28ann fin 3 en ©ie an, ifyit abjufdjretben? 3d) fyabe aeftern Slbenb angefangen unto f a^re btefen 2ft org, en fort. 2[Sir famen um fyalb fedj« Ufyr fyter an. £)a$ 2ftdbd)en fd)lojj bte Satire ju. -3d) nefynte 3I?r git* ttgeS (kind) 2lnerbteten mit 23ergnitgen an. ©teljet auf , £tnber, eS tft £>tit. ®^ e ^tnber ftnb (have) bent (Sfel nadjgetaufen. $)a8 ganje SDorf tft abgebrannt. 3d) gtng ntd)t auS, toett id) franf toar. §aben &e 3tf>ren ^reunb fortbegtettet (seen . . home)? $iird)ten ©tc 9ctd)t3, to) fte^e Slnten bet! £ttfga0e. 78. I copy all my letters. Are you going (go you) out? Yes, I am going out. My brother has set out (1) for (nacfy) London this morning. The concert begins (2) at 7 o'clock. Assist (5) your neighbour in his distress. Pray (SBttte), introduce (16) me to your friend. In summer 2 the 3 sun irises at three o'clock in the morning. The sun has (ift) risen beautifully. Leave out (4) this page ((Seite). Have you copied the letter? It is already copied. Take your drawing away. Our friends went away from (toon) here at six o'clock. Do you not take me with [you]? I accept (2) your offer with great pleasure. The young man has spent (19) his time very badly. The doctor 202 Lesson 31. imparted (13) this news [to] me (Dat.). Do not detain (3) him [any] longer. Put on (2) your shoes. How have you spent your evening yesterday? I was (gone) out. He was not yet dressed (2). 2. Compound separable particles. 1. 93eoor': fbeoor'fteljen to impend. Pres. td) ftefje . . beoor. 2. babet': babet'ftefyen to stand close by. Pres. id) ftefje babet. 3. bafyer'! fbafyer'fommen to come along. Pr. id) fontrne baljer. 4. bafyin': |bai)in'eUen to hasten away. Pres. id) etle bafyin. -5. barnieber': fbarnieber'ttegett to lie down. Pr. id) liege b. 6. barauf': barauf BefteX?eu to insist on. Pr. id) beftefye barauf. 7. bacon': babonlaufen to run off. Pres. id) taufe bafcon. 8. baoor': baoorfteflen to put before. Pres. id) ftetle . . baoor. 9. ba$u' or I)in$u: basu'tfyun to add. Pres. id) tfyue . . baju. 10. bajtoifefyen': ba$nrifd)enlegen to put or lay between. 11. empor': empor'ljalten to hold up; empotfjeben to lift up. entge'gen (towards): entgegengefyen to go to meet, entjtoei': entstoet'fcr/lctgen to strike asunder (in two). erab': Ijetab'ftetgen j to get down, Pres. id) fteige fyerab. inab': Ijinab'ftetgen J to descend. * * * Ijiuab. ierauf': fyerauffteigen ) to ascend, * id) fteige fjerauf. inauf: fyinaujftetgen j to mount (up) . * id) fteige fyinauf. erauS': j fyevausntfen to call out. * id) rufe fyerauS. IjinauS': \ Ijhiau3* or IjerauStragen to carry out. herein': Ijereht'fommen to come in. Pres. idj fomme herein. 21. Ijinein': In'netn'ge'ljen to go in. Pres. idj gelje Ijmein. 22. fyerii'ber: j fyeriiber'fommen to come over. 23. fyinit'ber: j fyeriiber'* or Ijinubev'toerfen to throw over. 24. berun'ter: berunter'flteften \ ' a , 25. ^inun'ter: ^inuntcr'fftcpcn j to flow down ' 26. fyeran': Ijevan'fommen to approach. Pres. id) fomme Ijerau. 27. fyerbei': fyerbei'rufen ) to call Pres. id) rufe fyerbei. 28. ^erju': fyerju'rufen j (towards you) . * id) rufe Ijerju. 29. fyerum': fyerum'tragen to carry about. Pr. id) trctge fyerum. 30. fyeroor': Jjeroor*bringen to produce (to bring forth). 31. fyinioeg': Ijinloegneljmen to take away. 32. fyinju': -Hjtmu'etfen to hasten thither. 33. iiberein': fiibereiit'lommen to agree. Pres. id) fomme ubereiu. 34. um^er': uudjer'* or Ijerum'fdmjeifen to ramble about. 35. ooran': ooran'geljen to precede. Pres. id) gefye ooran. 36. oorau§': ) fcorauS'* or oorljer'fagen to foretell. 37. oorljer': ( corner 'ioiff en to foreknow; oorljer'fefjen to foresee. 38. toorbei': ') oorbei* or ooriibergefyentopassby; oorbetfaljren 39. oorit'ber: j to drive by; ooriiber^ieljen to pass or march by. 40. juriid': ^uruef'fommen to come back; juriid'fdjren reg. to return; jimicf'fdjideit reg. to send back, to return. Separable verbs. 203 41. jufammen: ijufammenfommen or ijufammentreffett nut to meet with; jufammenbringen to collect; jufammcn* fe^en reg. to compose. Note 1. Most of these compound particles serve to attach to the verbs the idea of peculiar locality , whereas the simple ones give the verbs a more general meaning. For instance : 3lnfommen means to arrive; but beranfomnten to draw near you. anflegen to impose, to inflict; but barauf*, berauf* or binauf* tegen means to lay on (upon or in) certain place. anSgeben to go out (for a walk); — berauS* or binauSgeben to go out (of a room, a house where you are &c). ^USrufen means to exclaim, to proclaim; but berauSrnfen to call out (of a certain place), unterlafjen to omit; but fyemntertaffen to let down. fcorstefyen to prefer; but fyerfcorjiefyen to draw or pull forth, &c. Note 2. Some of these particles, simple or compound, may also be prefixed to inseparable verbs, as: an'fcertrauen to intrust; an 4 ' befetylen to recommend; auS'toerfaufen to sell off; toorauS'bejabJen to pay in advance. — In this case the separable particles are transposed in the above mentioned tenses, the inseparable ones remain. In the infinitive the ju goes between the two prefixes. Such inseparable verbs, when compounded with a separable prefix, are thus conjugated: Tres. 3d? toertraue . . an. Part. an'»ertraut. Inf. an'jubertrauen. • 3$ befeble . . an. Fut. id? toerbe anbefeblen. P. icbfyabean'befoblen. « 3cb bejafyle . . toorauS. P. fcorauSbejablt. Inf. fcorauSjubejabfen. Note 3. The following verbs which were formerly written as two separate words, must be treated as separables : Infinitive. Pres. Part. past. -^ebl'fcbfagen*) fail, miscarry id) fcbfage . . fcbl feftfgefcbtagen. ^ret'tyrecfyen to acquit id? fyredje . . fret freigetyrod;en. -rgtetaVfommen to equal ^eft'fc^en to fix, appoint tcb tomme . . gtetd) qleid) g e fommen. ta) fefce . . feft feftgefefct. iieb'baben to love tcb jjabe . . licb liebgebabt. ijitfl'icfctDetgen to be silent id) fcbtt?etge . . ftitt fiiflgefebttnegen. ^latt'ftnben to take place tcb ftnbe . , . ftatt ftatt gefunben. ttatyr'nebmen to perceive id) nebme . . toabr roabrgenommen. Observations. 1. The separation of the preposition from the verb can only take place in principal sentences, as: 3d) fd^retbe etnen 93rief ctb jc. In sentences, beginning with a relative pronoun or a subordinative conjunction, **) requiring the verb to be at the end, the prefix remains before. Ex. : *) When spelled separately, the three first verbs have a dif- ferent meaning, viz. : fefyl fcblagen to strike false, to miss one's blow; fret f £red)en to speak frankly ; gfeicb f onimen to come directly. **) Such as: tt»enn if; Weil because; ali when; ta as; fcajj -that, &c. (See the 36th lesson p. 240.) 204 Lesson 31. £)er 23i*ief, to eleven idj jefct a&fcfjrei&e. • The letter which I am copying now. 3d) teimfdje, bag ©tc fyente ntd)t auSgeljetu I wish you would not go out to-day. 21 18 id) in ?an3 anfaw :c. When I arrived in Paris &c. 2Benn <3te ju mel ®elb auStjeben. If you spend too much money. 2) Particles compounded with fyer (such as fyerab, Ijerein, Ijemnter 2C.) denote motion towards the person who is speaking ; while those compounded with fyttt (tytltab, fymetn, fytnunter K.) denote the contrary motion or direction away from the speak- er. Ex. : ^ommen er 2trjt ift eben corbeigegangen- Lesson 31. 205 Jtttfga6e. 70a. The ball rolled 3 down Uhe 2 hill (ace). The luggage was carried out. We have (fint>) ascended (on auf, ace.) the tower. Much rain produces weeds (Unfraut, sing.) . The hunter rambles •about (in) the forest. Captain R. has (ift) just ridden past. I had no time to carry the child about. The messenger brought the letter back. Great changes have taken place (Note 3) in the administration (©taat§-$ertt>attung) . Mr. Murray is an excellent physician; he has entirely restored my health. I agreed (33) with the bookseller for (toegen) a new grammar. We met (41) with some friends in Paris. The plan which we had made, has completely miscarried. I have just (eben) sent back the books you had lent me. If yau refuse*) him such a trifle (^tehugfett) , 2 he iwill be very discontented. If I in- troduce (1, 16) you [to] the count (Dat.), 2 you iwill probably be invited to (jum) dinner. When**) Mr. Grove was introduced to the Bishop, 2 he > recognised an old friend in him. Conversation. £o6eH ©te 3fyre Ueberfe£nng fcfyon abgefdjrieben? "Urn toiemel Ufyr gefyen te Sonne anf? SBirb ber Officer fyente Ijter Corbet 'reiten? -3ft ber SBcbicntc fdjen jnriid* gefommen? 2Ber fyat 3Ijnen biefe 9fa$ri$t mttgeffyettt? 28ann fangt ba8 Sweater an? §at bet ©dmeiber meinen 9?cd mitgenommen? 2Bte lommt bteferjmnb 1) terser? $3er gefyt bemDfyetm entgegen? 3d) fdjreibe fie eben ah. 3d) toerte audi b t e oon geftern abfefyreiben. $eute'gefye id) ntdjt anS. 9cetn, tdj Ijatte feine 3 e *t ^ u ^* sugefyen. 3d) gebenf e (intend) , morgen ftfil) abjnreifen. "Die Antler Ijat e$ anSgefteibet. 3a, fletben ©tc fid) an. •ifttemanb nimmt fyter ettoaS toeg. 3m ©ommer geljt fie nm 3 UIjt be8 9#orgen8 anf. SSermutfyttd), benn (for) er rettet jeben £ag Ijier fcorbet'. 9?ein, er bletbt immer fo lange an$. 5Dcetn ^effe £nbnrig petite fie mtr mtt. (S3 fangt im SBtnter nm fedjs Uljr, im ©ommer urn fieben UI)r an. ©r l)at ifjn mitgenommen; aber ntd)t juruefgebradjt. ©r ift mtr nadjgelanfen. $arl unb id) gefyen tl)tn entgegen. *) See p. 203. Observations, 1). **) 9HS, see the foot-note *) p. 164. and p. 204, 3rd Ex. 206 Lesson 31. §at bag GEoncert' geftern fiatt* -Kern, e$ ftnbet erfl (only) Ijente gefunben (taken place)? ftatt. ^onnte man biefeS corfyer'fefjen ? ©enug, e$ roar letcfyt corfyerjufefyen. 2Boflen in ben ^elbern tljut ber ©trocco oft grogen ©cfyaben 1 ' 9 ; er t>er* fengt 2 <> ba3 ©ra8 unb bie ^flanjen fo, bag man fie $u ^uloer jerreiben 21 !ann, als toenn fie auS einent fyeigen £>fen fduien. @lurflid)ertoetfe 22 toefyt er ntcfyt gan$ nafye am SBoben 2 *. 2)ie Seute, toe(d)e in bem $etbe finb, loerfen 24 fid) beferoegen auf ben SBoben nieber 24 , unb fo t£>ut er tlnten f'etnen ©djaben (harm). 1) plague. 2) especially. 3) to blow. 4) baucrn to last. — 5) despondency. 6) dejection. 7) relaxed. 8) enervated. 9) energy. 10) erfterbcn to die away, cease. 11) dangerous. 12) consequence. 13) followed. 14) fid) jmudjtcfyen to retire. 15) to hang, cover with. 16) in the absence. 17) openings. 18) mats. 19) much damage. 20) to singe, scorch. 21) to grind, rub to powder. 22) fortunately. 23) ground. 24) to prostrate one's self. Thirty second Lesson. Neuter and intransitive verbs. (•fteutrafe 3eitttorter.) Neuter verbs are those which ascribe to the subject a state or condition, which is neither active nor passive; and intransitive verbs are those which express an action that does not pass over to an object. Of the first kind are: Ufy ftefye I stand; id) fi^e I sit; id? liege I He, &c. Neuter verbs. 211 Of the second description are : id) g e I) e I walk ; t<$ tomme I come; idj fa^te I drive or ride in a carriage. Their conjugation does not differ from that of the active verb, except in the compound tenses where they are mostly*) conjugated with the auxiliary fetn (to be). We subjoin here an example of a regular and an ir- regular intransitive verb. 1. Oftetfen to travel. Indicative. Present. 3d) reife I travel. Imperf. 3d) retSte I travelled. Perfect. 3d) bin geretSt I have bubtftgeretSt [travelled er ift geretSt (or geretft) tmr finb geretft jtfyr fetb geretSt (ren ju arbeiten. ffortfa^ren to go away in a carriage. Ex: 2)ie 3)ame tftf. 14* 212 Lesson 32. 2nd Fut. 3d) toerbe gerex^t fein I 3^ toerbe gereiSt fetit bu tmrft geretft fein k. | bu toerbeft gereist fein :c. 1st Cond. 3dj toitrbe retfen I should travel. 2nd Cond. 3d) toiirbe gereiSt fein or idj toare gereist k. Infinitive. ©ereiSt fein or §u fein to have travelled. Present. Imperf. Perfect. go- went Q&tym to go. 3d) ge^>e. 2. 3d) gefye I 3d) tjhtg I v bu gtngjt, er ging k. 3d) Bin gegangen I have bu btft gegangen [gone er ift gegangen nnr ftnb gegangen en. 1st Cond. 3fy toiirbe geljen. 2nd Fut. 3d) toerbe gegangen fein. 2nd Cond. 3d) toitrbe gegangen fein or id) toare gegangen :c! Infinitive, ©egangen fein, to have gone. Note. From their nature, these verbs cannot have a passive voice. Some of them, however, occur as impersonal verbs in the third person singular of the passive form, as: (S8 totrb geftnodjen, — geladjt, — geretSt jc. There is talking, — laughing, — travelling &c. Pluperf. 1st Fut. 3d) ginge. 3eid)en to deviate. nab 'reif en*) to leave, set out, an'fommen to arrive. [start, auf'ftefyen to get up, to rise. Kauf'toadjen*) to awake. RauS'arten to degenerate. auS'gleiten to slip, itbegegnen**) to meet, happen. Meiben to remain, to stay, berften to burst, baoonlanfen to run away. entlaufen to abscond. Beiten to hasten, einbringen to penetrate. einfd)kfen to fall asleep, entlommen to escape, entfltefyen to run away. erbleid)en to turn pale, erfdjeinen to appear, erfdjrecfen to be frightened, ertrtnfen to be drowned, fafyren to drive, fatten to fall. *) Those preceded by R are regular, all others irregular. **i 53egcgnen takes also tyaben with the ace. Neuter verbs. 213 Bfaufen to rot. Bjlattern to flutter. fltegen to fly. fce|en to flee, fltefeen to flow. Bfota,en {dat.) to follow, gebetfyen to prosper, to thrive, gefyen to go. £% I t0 8ucceed/ genefen to recover. geratfyen (in or unter (SttoaS) to get into, to fall among, aefdjefyen to happen, ijinautgeljen or*|teigen to go up. jjtnuntergefyen j to get down, ljinabftetgen j to descend. Etlettein j to climb fltmmen j fommen to come, slant) en to land, go on shore, laujen to run. Rtttatfcfytren to march, teiten to ride, to go on horse- Bteifen to travel. [back, arennen to run. Btotten to roll. Broken to rust. sfdjettern to be wrecked, to founder. fd)letd)en to sneak, slink, fdjmeljen to melt. fd)toimmen to swim, finfen to sink, fpajteren gefyen to walk, fpringen to leap, to burst, ftefyen to stand, fterben to die. liftiir^en to fall, to rush, uberetn 'fommen to agree, nm' fommen ) to perish, unter'gefyen J to set (of the sun). Bfcevfcovren j to dry, BOertoelfen ) to wither, oerfdjeifcen to expire, fteigen to mount. oerjd)toint>en to disappear, oorbet*, ooittbeic'gefyen to pass to ad) fen to grow. [by. Btoantevn to wander, toeicfyen to yield. toert>en to become, to get. R$urud'fefyren ) to return, juvudfommen ) to come back. Besides these, most of the above verbs when compounded with other prefixes, but not preceded by be.*) 4. By a change of the vowel or a consonant, tran- sitive verbs with a causative signification have been formed of the following intransitives. Whereas these latter are mostly irregular and take fctlt, the former are all regular and conjugated with tjabcu. Intransitive (with fetn). i(5tnfd)fafen to fall asleep: fertttnfen to be drowned: ffabren to drive: if alien to fall: ifltegen to flow: -ffyangen to hang (suspended) tauten to sound: Transitive 8f regular (with fjabcn). eitlfcfylafent to put or lull asleep, ertrcinfen to drown, fiifyren to guide, to lead. fSUen to fell, to cut down, flo^en to float. Jj&ngen to hang up. lauten to ring the bell. *) The prefix Be gives an active sense to the verb, as: ft«U gen intr. to mount; bcfiei gen act. to ascend; befolgento follow; befomnun to get, &c. All verbs with be take &aben A except begegnen, when construed with the dative. 214 Lesson 32. Intransitive (with fein). ittegen to lie: ffcfynnntmen to swim: ifutfeit to sink: iftfcen to sit: ffprtngen 1) to leap, to jump, 2) to burst, to crack: tftefyen to stand: iftetqen to mount: •j-terfcfynrinben to vanish, dis- trtnfen to drink j [appear: toiegen to weigh, I (take fyaben) to be of weight J Transitive 8f regular (with |aben). (egen to lay, to put. fcfytoemmen to (make) bathe, to water (horses). fcnfen to (make) sink. fefcen to place, to set. fyrengen or auffprengen to break open, to blow up. ftetten to put upright, to stand, ftetgem to raise, to enhance. berfd^toenben to waste, tranfen to water, toagen to weigh = to ascertain weight [Part, geioogen). Words. ©tc ©du'lbtoacfye the sentinel, ba$ £fyor the gate. [sentry. ber $nafl the report, crack. ba$ Unternefymen ' the under- taking, enterprise, bie 2lcfytung esteem, ber Sftitbitrger fellow-citizen, ber §oljfyauer the wood-cutter, bte Sufte the coast, shore. t>ic 2abung the cargo, load, bet ©raben the ditch, bie 0amtlie the family. & as? i *•-*•**■ ber Sob en the ground, floor, bie ©efaljr the danger, ber ©flatoe the slave, bet Coffer the trunk, ^u SBctt" gefyen to go to bed. riird)terltc| dreadful, fu'evfyer hither, miibe tired, borficfyttg cautious, fyoftanbifd) Dutch, geftcfynlid) generally. Beading Exercise. 82. 1. 2)a8 5Bud> Uegt auf bem $ifdj(e). 3$ fdjltef nnter einem 33au-m. SDic on ber (Srbe berf(fyn>nnben, n>etd)c in friifyeren (former) 3etten barauf gelebt Jjaben. (Sin ^ouanbifdjeS @$iff ift an ber titfte Slfrtfa'S Lesson 32. 215 gefdjeitert; bte ganje Sabung tft untergegangen. $>er grijgte Xfyetl ber 2ftannfcbaft (crew) t ft (have) umgef ommen ; nur eintge Wla* irofen, toeldje an'S Sanb gefdjroommen ftnb, fyaben ftcfy gerettet. JtufgaDe. 83. 1. I travelled in Spain. Our uncle (is) arrived yesterday. The child has fallen into a deep ditch. We sat round (um) the table. The candlestick stands on (auf, dat.) the table. The little boy sits on the chair ; his mother placed (f efctc) him on it (barauf) . Many English families live *) in Germany and Italy. The books lie on the table; I laid them on it. How did you (fyaben ©U) sleep last night ¥ I slept pretty (jtemltdj) well ; I was tired when (at3) I went to (ju) bed ; I had worked very hard (ftarf). At what o'clock did you (ftnt) ©te) fall asleep? I fell asleep at half past eleven. The slave has hardly (faitm) escaped. 2. The purse has fallen to (auf) the ground. The regi- ment has marched 2 ) nine hours a (ben) day. The peasants have gone to (in bte) town. The servant has jumped out of the window of the third story (©tod, m.). Nothing important (2Btd)ttge3) has happened. These plants have not thriven in our garden. The glass has burst (cracked). They (matt) have broken open (p. 214) the door. The dog has swum over the river. Did you water the horses? How many pounds does the trunk weigh? We have not yet weighed it; I think it weighs sixty pounds. Weigh it, if you please (gefatttgft). A man was (tft) drowned. Conversation. 2$a8 tft gefd)el)en? (S3 1 ft etoaS 2Btd)ttge8 gefcfyeben. Um toteoiel Ufyr ftnb ©ic ton 28tr ftnb um fyaih fecfys abgereif't. Sranffurt abgereif't? 2Bamt ftnb ©ie fyter ange- ©egen jc^n UI)r. fomnten? SBann fteljen ©ic beS 2ftorgen§ ©eioofynltd) um 6 Uljr ; aber fyeute auf (get up) ? bin id) um 7 Ufyr anfgeftanben. SBarum ftnb ©ic fo erfcfyrocfen? 2Btr fyaben etnen fiivcfyterltcfyen .^natt gefyort. ©tub ©te fte allctn nad) S3riiffel ^ein, metn Sruber ift mttge* geretSt? jjangeu. SBotten ©ic etn toenig nut unS 2Btrt>anfen^nen, totrfinbbtefen fyajteren gefyen? ^ftorgen fdjon gegangen. SBann i ft 3tyr ^reunb juritd* 5Sor bret 2Bod)eu (-—ago): abcr gefefyrt? er ift ntcfyt fyter aebtteben, cr tft nrieber abgereif't. 1) T© live (in a country) means Icben, to live in a house etc., is translated ftefmen. — 2) See p. 121, 4). 216 Lesson 33. 2Bte fommt eS, bag btefer 33aum $)er $>ol$aner Ijat iljn gefattt. umgefaKen ift? SBarum ift (has) btefe ^amiltefo 2Beit ber SBater ntcfyt arbetten arm geftorben? toottte. 2Bo fyaben <5te btefe $arte ge* ©ie tft aufbemSoben (floor) ge* funben? tegen (or fte tag anf bem 99L). 2Ber fyat fie bafyin getoorfen? 3d) farm e8 ntd^t fagen; metteicfyt (perhaps) tft fte Ijtnuntergef alien . $at man bte $ferbe getranft 3a, ber fetattfnedjt (hostler) bat (watered)? fie eben (just now) getranft. Thirty third Lesson. IMPERSONAL VERBS. (Uityerfimlidje 3etttoorter.) True impersonal verbs have, as in English, besides the Infinitive, only the third persen singular throughout. Most of them are the same in both languages, as: Infinitive. Present. Dfagnen to rain. e$ regnet it rains, fdjneten to snqw. e§ fdmeit it snows, fyageln to hail. e8 fyagelt it hails, bonnern to thunder. e$ bonnert it thunders. bUfcen to lighten. e8 blt£t it lightens, gefrteren to freeze. eS gefrtert (frtert) it freezes, retfen to he a hoar frost e3 reift it is a hoar frost, tljauen to thaw (& to dew). e8 tfyant it thaws, tagen to dawn. e$ tagt it dawns, geben (there . . to be). e8 gtebt there is. They are all regular verbs except e$ frier t; (P. ge* f rot en, seep. 179. Nr. 117) and e$ gtcbt {Part ge geben). All are conjugated with the auxiliary Ijaben. Ex.: (S8 ^at geregnet, e$ fyat gebonnert, e$ tjat gebltfct :c. Table of Conjugation. 1. or eS ^atte gefd^nett J Subjunctive Mood. bag e$ fdjnete. bag e* fdntet(ejte. bag e$ gefcfyneit fyabe. bag e$ gefcfynett fyatte. bag e$ fd^neten tcerbe. @3 gtcfct (or gtfct) there is, there are. e$ gtebt there is, there are. e$ gab there was, there were. e§ i)at gegeben there has (have) been. e$ fyatte gegeben there had been. e$ nrirb geben there will be. eS roiirbe geben (e8 gabe) there would be. e$ nrirb gegeben fyaben there will have been. e$ toiirbe gegeben fyaben there would have been. eS mag or farm gebeu there may (can) be.) Observations. 1) There is, there are, must be translated e$ gtc6t r when is expresses indefinite existence without mentioning a distinct (small) place. It always remains in the singular, and takes its object in the accusative. Ex. : (58 giebt gute imb fdjledjte 23itd)er. There are good books and bad ones. QN gtebt Seute, toelcfye bie ©cfyonfyett ber Xngenb fcorjteljen. There are people who prefer beauty to virtue. (£« gtebt $ogehtefter,*) tecldjc egbar fmb. There are nests of birds which are eatable. 2Ba$ giebt e$ 9?ene$? what (is the) news? (5$ giebt nicfytS 9teue8 there is no news. NB. With c8 giebt, the e$ is never dropped. 2) There is has also the meaning e£ tft r there are C8 ftttb, there was C§ war, pi. there were C$ Warett. This is always the case, when a definite existence, in a distinct small place or space, is expressed. With this, the noun is in the nomi- native case. Ex. : *) It would be the same to say: (§8 gtebt SScgdnejl'er in 2tme- rifct or in 3nbien or in biefem Sanb, because America or India &c. is not a small [narrowly circumscribed) place. 218 Lesson 33. (5$ tft ein SSogel in bent $afig. There is a bird in the cage. (§3 war fein SBafjer in bent ®ta$. There was no water in the glass. (ga ftnb fl>ti 23i>gel in bent $aftg. There are two birds in the cage. (§3 ift fein *pfofc ntetyr cmf biefer S3an!. There is no more room on this bench. NB. When there is hfc. in the sense e$ ift, is used in the interrogative or inverted form, the t% is dropped. Ex.: 3ft 2Bein in jener glafAe? Is there any wine in that bottle? 2Bie fciele $oge( ftnb in bent $aftg? How many birds are (there) in the cage? 3) To indicate weather or time, impersonal sentences are formed with e8 ift, as in English: ldgt jcl)n Ufyr it strikes ten o'clock. e8 lautet the bell rings. e8 fangt an it begins. e3 tf'6xt auf it ceases. e$ er^eKt it is evident. e§ niifct 9lityt$ it is of no use. e$ fcebarf it requires. e$ !ommt barauf an it depends. el ift f ein3«etf el there is no doubt. Reflected impersonals. 5) Others occur impersonally with a personal pronoun: a) With the accusative. e§ jammert mid) I pity. e3 efelt mid) it disgusts (me). e3 argert mid)*) I am vexed. e3 Dcrbrtcgt raid) it vexes me. eg nmnbert mid}*) I wonder. *58 freut midj*) I am glad. *§ rent mid) I repent. e$ fdmierjt mid) I grieve, eg fvtert ntidj*) I am cold. €3 fcfyaubert mid}*) I shudder *) These five marked*) are used also personally, viz. : 3$ |«ue mid), id) fticre, id) wunbcrc mid), ia) fdjaubere, id} Srgcre mid) :c. Impersonal verbs. 219 e3 f/ungert mid)*) I am hungry. e3 biirftet mid)*) I am thirsty. e$ Icmgmeift mid) it wearies (me). e3 fd)ta8 fefytt 3r/nen? what is the matter with you? nrie gefyt e3 3I)nen? how are you? e3 gefyt mir gut I am well. 6) By a transposition of the subject after the verb, the latter takes sometimes an impersonal form both in the singular and plural, the- (first) place of the subject being filled up by *8 (in English there). This however is rather poetical, as: (S3 tarn ein 2Banberer bie ©trafje entlang. There came a wanderer along the road. (S3 gingen brei 3ager auf bie 3agb. Three sportsmen went shooting. (S3 ftelen £agelforner fo grog tone £auben*(Sier. There fell hailstones as large as pigeons' eggs. 7) The impersonal form appears also in the Passive Voice of active and neuter verbs f) in the 3rd person as: (S3 mirb in $>eittfd)(anb tnel gefumgen unb getanjt. or: Wlan fingt unb tanjt ciel in £)eutfd)lanb. They sing and dance much in Germany, or: There is much singing in Germany. (S3 murbe mel gegeffen, aber meljr getrunfen. Much was eaten, but more drunk. (S3 ttnrb ©iel ton bent $rieg gerebet (or gefprod)ejt) . There is much talking about war. *) (§8 bwtgert mid) and c« biirftct mid) are used only in poetry; the common prose expression is : id) bin Ijungrtg ; id) bin fouftig ; or id) fyabt Jpunger; id) tyabt ©urft. **) We cannot say: id) bin ttxirm; we may say also: id) I)abt tt>arm ; the best way is : e8 ift mir toatm. Likewise do not say : i tf) b in {alt; but: id) fyabt fait or id) friere, or e$ friert mid). f) Like the Latin itur, venitur, ventum est (see the Note p. 212). 220 Lesson 33. Words. £)a8 §olj the wood. bag balb fyageln. (£§ toare gut, toenn eS fdmeite. (£8 roiirbe fct)tieten, toenn e$ ntcfyt fo fait toare. (Sben (just now) r)at e8 getomiert. (£8 toirb nod) metjr bonnern. £>te $ci(te ift oorbet (over), e$ tfyaut. 3dj glaube, bag e8 morgen tfyauen nrivb. (5s rent mid), bag t tyabe WcbtS aef^ort. £aben ©te ben SBttfc gefefyen? 3a, e3 fyat fefyr {tar? geblt^t. ©lauben ©ie, bag e3 fyeute Wafyt 3d) gtaube ntdjt, bag e3 gefrteren gefrteren nrirb? nurb; aber e3 nrirb fdmeten. 2Bte gefallt e$3fmen in Scnbon? (S3 gefaUt mtr fefyr n>ol)l. Jpat e3 31)rem 23ruber in 2(me* (S3 fdjetnt, bag e3 tljm fe^r gut rtfa gef alien? gef alien ljat. -3ft e3 fait? S^ein, c« ift nic^t mefyr fait, geljtt (Stn>a3 an btefem ®elbe? 3a, e3 fefyien bret Scaler. <9lauben ©te, bag ba3 SBetter (S3fd)etntmtrfo; roentgftenSfangt fid) anbern (change) hrirb? e3 an, roarm ju roerben. SBtrb e3 btefeS 3al)r guten 2Betn $)te Sttebleute (vine-growers) geben? fagen, bag eS fe^r triel 2Betn ^eben n>irb. Oeniigt e3, metnen *Kamen ju ^etn,©temuffenaud)ba« Saturn untetf djretben ? Beifugen (add the date). 2Ba3 fefylt timt? (S3 fetylen tym tletber unb ©eft). 2Ba3 fcerbrtegt ©te? (S3 cerbrtegt mid), bag idj $u §aufe bletben mug. 2Ba3 ift 3Ijnen gefd)el)en? (S3 fdjnrinbelt mtr. 23arum finb ©te fo traurtg? (S3 foment mid), bag id) metnen treuen 3)tener fcerloren fyahe. 3ft nod) pafc fiir mid) auf bte* 2Btr toerben 3^nen (for you) fer 23anf (bench) ? ^$lalj mad)en. <3Hebt e3 ettoa3 9?eue3? 3d) toetg 9ctdfyt3, al3 (except) bag iperr 23. geftern geftorben ift Reading -lesson. $ie 25icnc unb bte %anbt. The bee and the dove. (Sin 23tend)en fie I in etnen Sad) 1 . S)te3 fal) oon oben 2 etne £aube; ©te brad) etn 23Iattd)en con ber Saube 3 1) brook. 2) from above. 3) arbour. 222 Lesson 34. Unb roarf'8 tfyr ju. 2)a3 S3tend>en fd)toamm barnad) 4 Hnt) I) a If fid) gtiicfttd) au« t>eut 23ad). — 9?ad) furjer 3etl ttcfclbc Xaube er frieblid)* auf frer Saube. £)a 6 fd)Ud) em 3ager lets 7 Ijeran Unt> legte feme fjlintc an 8 . ©cfyon fyatte er ben §afyn 9 gefpamtt: $)aS 23iend)en fam unt> ft ad) il)m in fcie §anb; $uff! gtng fcer (2d)uj$ baneben (aside); SDte £aube flog ba&on. — 2Bem banfte 10 ftc ti)t Sebett? 4) after or to it. 5) quietly. 6) then. 7) softly. 8) bte %litttt anlegen to aim, or to take aim at. 9) ben $afm fyemnen to cock the gun. 10) banfen (instead of toerbanfen) to owe. Thirty fourth Lesson. REFLECTIVE VERBS. (3uriicfbe$ugndje 3«to>3cter.) 1) When the action of a verb returns upon the sub- ject from which it proceeds, the verb is called reflective or reflected. Such verbs are therefore conjugated with two pronouns, one the subject and the other the object. The latter stands commonly in the Accusative, with a few verbs in the Dative, as: 3d) betrage mid) I behave {myself). ©r jetdmete fid) au§ he distinguished himself. All such verbs are conjugated with the auxiliary fjafcen. *) This reflective form is very extensively employed in German, whilst in English most of these verbs are used in the neuter sense, i. e. without an objective personal pronoun, as: I rejoice idj freue mtdj. Conjugation of a reflective regular verb. 6td) freuen to rejoice, to be glad. Indicative Mood. Present. Imperfect, 3d) freue mi d) I rejoice btt fceueft bid) thou rejoicest 3d) freute mtdj I rejoiced bu freutejt btdj thou rejoicedst *) The only exception is ftc$ bettmfjt fctn to be conscious of, which has in the Present tense: id? bin mir kttmfjt, and in the compound tense: tc^ bin mir bettmfjt getoefen ic. Reflective verbs. 223 Present. er freut fid) he rejoices fie freut fid) she rejoices man freut fid) people rejoice nnr freuen un8 we rejoice i^r freuet eud) ) ye rejoice td) anffyatten to make a stay. ftd) oeetlen to make haste. *fid) beftnben to be (in health) . fid) befletgtgento apply one's self. fid) befyelfen to make shift. *fid) beftagen (fiber ace) to com- plain of. *fidj beffimmern (um) to care for. fid) belanfen > (auf) to amount. fid} bemad)ttgen to seize, to take possession of. *ftd) bemiUjen to endeavour, to take the trouble. 5* Bowmen j to behave *nd) betragen ) fid) befmnen (fiber) to reflect. fid) bemerben (um) to apply for. *fid) bficfen to stoop. fid) einlaffen (in) to enter upon. fid) entfyaften {Gen.) to abstain. *fid) entfd)ltef$en to resolve, to make up one's mind. *|M) erbarmen {Gen. or fiber) to have mercy on. ftd) eretgnen to happen. *fidj erfreueri (Gen.) to enjoy. *fid) ergeben to surrender. ftd) erljolen (toon) to recover from illness. *fid) ertnnern {Gen.)*) to re- collect, to remember. *fid) erfdtten to catch cold. fid) erfunbigen to inquire. *ftd) ffirdjten (cor) to be afraid. fid) gebutbett to have patience. *fid)gemblnten(an) (with the ace) to accustom one's self to. fid) cjramen to grieve. *ftdj t r r e n f ) r . v . to be mistaken . fid) ffimmem (um) to grieve for. fid) ndfyern (Dat.) to approach. fid) ndfyren (ton) to feed on. fid) rdd)CU (an) to take revenge. *ftd) fd)dmen (fiber or Gen.) to be ashamed. fid) fe^nen (nadj) to long for. *ftd) fe^en to sit down. fid) ftetlen to feign, pretend. fid) unterftelj'en to dare, venture. *fid) unterfjalten (fiber) to con- verse, to amuse. fidj oertrren to go astray. *fid) oerlaffen (auf) {with the Ace.) to rely (depend) on. f f) *) ©id) crinnern takes also the preposition an with the Accu- sative, when things are spoken ef, as: 3d) euttttere mid) nut 93er» gnUgen an jencn'Sag (or jeneS Sages). •f) 1 am mistaken id? irre mid). Per/, idj fyabe mi$ getrrt. ■HO SScrlaffcn, without fidj, means to leave. Reflective verbs. 225 fid) ©erfeljen (in) to mistake, fid) fcerf paten to be (too) late, ftd) cerftelten to dissemble, fid) fcorberetten to prepare. *fid) toeigern to refuse, fid) ttnbeife^en {Dat.) to oppose. *fid) nmnbern (fiber) to wonder, fid) jutragen to happen. Remark. Reflective verbs are sometimes employed to express the passive voice, as: S)er ©djliiffel fyat \\$ gefunben the key has been found. 2>ie 5£l)firc offtiete ftd) the door (was) opened. 4) The following eleven require the pronoun in the Dative : fid) fcerfdjaffen to procure. e mir ein I imagine. 5) Some phrases with reflective verbs : 2Bie beftnten <2ie fid)? how do you do? 23emfil)en Sic fid) nid)t do not take the trouble. ©eben ©ie fid) Sftfifye take pains. (§r erfyolt fid) tangfam he recovers slowly. 3d) erinnere mid) fetneS SftamenS I recollect his name. ©ie irren fid), mein §err you are mistaken, Sir. (Sr fyat fid) ganj ueranfcevt he is quite altered. 3)a6 SBetter anfcert fid) the weather changes. ■3d) begebe mid) nad) §ranffurt I go to Frankfort. (Sr bevuft fid) auf mid) he appeals or refers to me. •3d) entljalte mid) t>e3 SBeineS I abstain from wine. (£3 ereignete fid) it happened. SfiBit f fit) (en wi8 gtfidUd) we feel happy. !£)ie £t)fire offnete fid)* the door opened. 9?et)tnen ©te fid) in %$t take care, be careful. ©eijjen ©te fid) sit down, take a seat. SDie <&ad}t bexfyait fict) fo the matter is so. ©ie jerftrenten fid) they dispersed. SBenben ©ie fid) an ten $6nig. Apply (address yourself) to the king. ©ie r&d)ten fict) an ifyren geinfcen. They revenged themselves on their enemies. OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 15 226 Lesson 34. Words. £)er Sflntlj the courage. bte SRedjnmtg the account, bilL ftd) cmSjetdmen to excel. ber SSorgefefcte the superior. auf'ftefyen to get up. baS 23etragen the behaviour. Serueifen to prove. ^aufig frequently. uber^engen to convince. nnfcfyulbig innocent. ba$ Urtfyett the sentence. Certfyeibigen to defend. ba8 SSorfyaben the design. anf'geben to give up. bie SKm)e rest. ^ nrtljeilen to judge. bie ^ufmtenfyett satisfaction. betreffen, angeljen to concern. oertounben to wound. oermeiben to avoid. bic Nation', pi. — en, nation, ©erlefcen to hurt. Reading Exercise. 86. 1. ©ie irren fid), mein §err; id) bin nid)t ber (the one), ben ©ie fud)en. 23er$etl)en ©ie, id) Ijabe mid) nnxflidj (really) geirrt. -JfttttiabeS xeidmete fid) in ber ©dj(aa)t Bet 9D?aratl)im an«. ©etcoljnen ©tc fid), friu) anfeuftefyen. $)er SBoIf naljerte fid) mir auf (within) jefyn ©d)ritte (paces), SDtttljrtbateS &er« tljeibigte fid) mit grojjem Sttutfye gegen bte Corner. 2Senn ©ie ft a) iiber (at) ba§ ©lucf 2lnberer frenen, fo betoeist biefeS, bag ©ie etn gute« §erj fyaben. 2. 2Bir Ijaben nn$ bemiu)t, tr)n con feinem Unrest (of his being wrong) ju ubevjeugen; aber er fonnte fid) nid)t entfdjttcjjen, fein ^ovfjaben attfeugeben. £)er $ontg toetgerte fid), ba8 Urtfyetl jn nnterfd)retben. ©ie tciirben fid) beffer beftnben, tuenn ©ie ft a) getoofynten, ^aufiger in ber frifdjen Suft foajteren $u gefyen. 3d) tdjne mid) nad) Sftnlje. -3d) toerbe mid) bemiifyen, 2ltte8 jn Sljrer 3ufrieben^eit ju ©ottbringen. -3d) hmrbe mid) fd)amen, fo ett»a$ (such a thing) §u tl)un. 2>er jnnge 2ftann l)at fidj immer gnt betvagen. Jtitffla0e. 87. 1. We rejoice greatly (fefyr) to see you. I am mistaken. You have also been mistaken. I wash myself every {ace:} day. Charles has wounded himself with his penknife. AH nations long for (nad)) liberty. The enemies have surrendered (themselves) 1 ). If they had not surrendered (themselves) > 2 they 1 would have all been killed 2 |. Dear Sir, have mercy on me (meiner) . Nobody must imagine himself to be without faults. That man Avas a bad father; he did not care for (nm) his children. I recollect to have seen that lady, but I cannot, remember her name {Gen.). As (tote) I see, 2 you * enjoy (a) ; good health {Gen.). 1) Remember that words enclosed in a parenthesis (. . .) ar© to be translated, and words in brackets [. . .J are to be left out. 2) Second Conditional, see p. 126. Lesson 34. 227 2. The bill of my tailor amounted to a hundred and fifty florins. I hastened to pay it, as soon as (fobalt) aU) I 2 got (befam) * money. Young people must not take the liberty (,) to judge of (itfcet, Ace.) things which do not concern them. A good Christian does not revenge himself on his enemy. We were mistaken in (in) the name of the street. Do not feign [to be] 1 ) so innocent; be ashamed of 2 ) your behaviour and resolve to avoid 2 such *a 3 fault 4 for the future (fihtfttg). He who is conscious (fid) benrngt tft) of having (to have) done his duty, C$fttd)t, /.) may quietly await (entgegenfefyen) the judgment (bem Urtfjetl) of his superiors. Conversation. 3d) freue mid), ©te $u fefyen, -3d) banfe 3I)nen, tc^ befinbe mem §etr; tote beftnben mid), @ott fet 2)anf! fel)r ©ie fid)? toofyl. 2Bie befinbet fire Gutter, balb I)ter* 3d) voeig nid)t, toann fie fommt, j)er fommen? aber id) fel)ne mid), fte $u fel)eu. SEBarum finb ©te md)t fritter 2Bir l)aben un$ im Salbe cerirrt. getommen? 1) See the foot-note 1) p. 226. 2) fidj [djamen {to be ashamed) governs either the genitive case or the preposition ubtt with the Accusative. 15* 228 Lesson 35. 2Berben er (Shrift fid) an fetnem $ein, (SfyriftuS Ijat a,e(ei)rt, bag 5etnbe rad)en? man feine ^ehibe iieben foG. Heber luaS (moritber) beflagt d)ften§, beftenS, fd)cnften§, fpateftenS :c. 2) Adverbs of manner or of time are sometimes placed in English before the verb ; in German they must always follow it. Ex. : My friend gladly accepted the offer. SQtein $reunt) naljm fca3 2Ineibteten gem an. I never go out id) gebje nie '. friifjer, efyer sooner, earlier. Ijernadj' j afterwards, nacfy'fyer j after (adv.). fpdter later, etnft, etnftmatS once, etnmal once, one day. *) Those marked -J- are used with verbs of motion or direction ; those with -J--J- both for rest and motion; the others not marked, are used only with verbs denoting rest. **) The adverbs tyhtcmf, fytnetn, fyerein, fyeraug 2C. are to be con- sidered as separable prefixes, and are frequently preceded by a sub- stantive with the prep, ^u, as: (§r fatu $ur ($tt bcr) £l)iire herein. 2)er SSogel flog 5 urn ^enfter fytnauS through the window etc. Con- cerning the difference between fyer* and I? in*. See p. 204, Qbs. 2. 230 Lesson 35. tie it lid) the other day. ^«f|latel y ,oflate. nnlang|t ) a little while ago, »or ^urjem J not long ago. ** X * tt ! before *\ jutoor j Deiore - ) f ttnf tig , in 3^ unf t for the future . mand)mal 1 ^Moetten \ sometimes, bt&oetlen J bann nnb toann now and then, oft, oftmalS often, tyanfig frequently, felten seldom. ©on nun an from this time forth, ©on je£t an henceforth. fett bent since then, gletd) j directly, fogtetdj j immediately. Bait) soon. bait) — bait) sometimes — some- times. 2lnfang3, juerft at first. 3ule£t at last. biSfyer hitherto, till now. btS je£t as yet, till now. uneber again, erft only, not — till, enbltd) at last, at length. bamafe } then ' at that time * tmmer, aHe^eit always. auf or fiiv tmmer for ever. etnfttoetlen ) ,., nnterbefjen ( me * nwh ^. fd)on, berettg already, ever. nod) still, yet. nod) etnmal once again, once more. nod) ntd)t not yet. nod) nte never before, never yet. Ijeute to-day. geftent yesterday. ©orgeftern the day before yester- morgen to morrow. [day. morgen frii^ to morrow morning. itbermorgen the day after to- morrow. (ange, lange £tit long (time). ftitnbltd) hourly, tagtid) daily. monatltd) monthly. ja'fyrltd) yearly. attmaltg j by degrees, nad) nnb nad) j gradually. getoofynltd) usually. ©lofcttd) suddenly. g(etd) or gleid) nad^er presently. augenb(tdltd) instantly. f©ovnftretd)$ at full speed. 3. Adverbial expressions of time. 3m 3a§x in the year. im ©ommer in summer. am Sftovgen, be3 9ftorgen8**), or 9ftorgen8 in the morning. SfltttagS or urn Sfttttag at noon. 2>ormtttag§ in the forenoon. 9?ad)mtttag$ in the afternoon, am 2lbenb, beS 2tbent>3, or SlbenbS in the evening. in time, betimes. ur red)ten 3 e ^ >et getten am STag or bet Sag by day. bet Wad)t f WafytS by night, am SHenftag on Tuesday. ©onntagS on Sundays, jnm erften SD^ate j for the first jnm exftenmal j time. ba$ nad)fte Sftal the next time. *) The English before is adverb when found after its noun. Ex.: An hour before eine ©tunbe Oorljer or gutter. When it pre- cedes the noun, it is preposition and means to or. Ex.: Before an hour o r cincr ©tunbe. When before begins an sentence, it is con- Junction and translated: beoor or efye. (See p. 240, a.) **) The Genitive of nouns is used for adverbs of time , when the time is indefinite. Adverb*. 231 jum lefctenmal for the last time, urn 1 (em) Ufyr at one o'clock, tm 5lnfatig in the beginning, am (Snbe at the end. am jefmten Sftai ) on the 10th ben lOten 9ftai ] of May. btefen*) 3)?orgen this morning. eineS SageS**) one day. eineS 5lbenb8 one evening. Ijeut JU Sage now-a-days. nad^fter Sage one of these days, um £)ftem about Easter, gegen 11 Ufyr about 11 o'clock, ein tuenig cor 10 W)r ) by ten bi$ xdm Uljr j o'clock, bet (©onnenaufgang at sunrise. Bet Sage&mbrucfy at day-break. Dor 8 Sagen a week ago. fcor 14 Sagen a fortnight ago. ^Ur 3ett in the time. bt8 jefct nodj nidjt not as yet. erft morgen not till to-morrow, brei Sage lang for three days. felt bret Sagen these three days, jtoeimal be? Sage§ twice a day. einen Sag nm ben j every anbern, afle 2 Sage j other day. attc Saqe ) , jeben*) %ag j ever y da ?- ben gan^en Sag all day. fyeute iiber 8 Sage this day week, fyente iiber 14 Sage this day fortnight. Sag fitr Sag day by day. auf etnige g>tit for a while, eine 3eitlang for a time, bon 3^tt $n &it from time to time, oor Qtittn in old times, an etnem fcfyonen Sftorgen on a fine morning, in etner fatten Sftatfyt on a cold night. Words. S)er ^aufmann the merchant, ber S)ienft the service, ber Soffel the spoon. bie 5Innei the medicine, ber S eu 3 c tne witness, bie §anblnng the action. ba§ £ager the camp, bie (Scfe the corner, ber ^farrer the clergyman, ber Settler the beggar. fnd)en to search. fyoffen to hope. iibel getaunt ill humored, cross, grogmittln'g magnanimous, gen- erous, afletn alone, hnflfemnten welcome, gefadigft if you please, ein'nnuigen to consent, belaftigen to annoy, to trouble. unanffyortid) incessantly, alfo, fotgtid) consequently. Heading Exercise. 88. 1. SMjer fommen <5ie? 3d) !omme bon 2Cten. £)er Sflann, roeldjen ©ie fncfyen, roofynt nidjt In'er; er toofynt toeit oon fyter. S)er $nabe fiel riidioarts in ben ghtj}. 3d) fag anStoenbta, bei (with) bem $ntfd;er; bie S)amen fagen inioenbig im JDmmbuS. ^ling^nm toaren geinbe. Sftan ftefyt biefe vroei jungen §erren immer beifammen. Sflein §an§ ftefyt reacts, ba$ Sfyrige lints. S)er §err ift ntd)t w §aufe; fncfyen e fcergeffen. Wltin £)tener credit ntc* natltdj je^n ©ulbett, atfo jaljvltd} gufammen Ijutttert unb jtoattjig @ult>en. 9?euitd) toar tdj 3 cu S e e tner grofemutfytgett §t fcerlaffen. ®er SDffljtet rttt fportiffretdjs tn'« Sager ter getnbe. ^ufoaDc. 89. 1. Where is my stick? You will find it there in the corner. I beg your pardon (id) bitte um SSerjetbmtg), it is not there; it must be elsewhere. You are welcome everywhere. Where (whence) does the letter come from? It comes from America. Come down, if you please. I could find him no- where. Where is my dog? It is out of doors. The house- of the clergyman is very far off. I was not at home. You may go home. I have heard it somewhere. Have you searched everywhere? The one came hither, the other went thither. 1 could open the door neither (tt)efcer) from within nor (nod)) from without. Do as if (al8 toetm) you 3 were [Subj.) lit 2 home. 2. Did you know him formerly? Yes, I have known him long. I shall be 2 at (jit) your service i directly.*) He was not often happy, because (toett) he 2 was Udle. He is more frequently at (tit) the coffee-house, than at home. She has arrived sooner than I. She is 2 better l to -day*) than she was yesterday. Go 2 away Unstantly. My uncle will al- ways be satisfied. Could you not come earlier? The next time 2 I 1 shall**) be 2 here ibetimes.*) I am seldom alone. Have you seen our friend lately? Yes, I saw him the other day; and I hope I shall see him 3 again Wery 2 soon. At present 2 we lare incessantly annoyed by beggars. I am in the habit (tdj) pftege) of seeing him (to see him) now and then. 4. Adverbs of quantity and comparison. 28te? how? mef)t more. tctefctei, nne fe^r? how much? nod) ) some more, fctel much. nod) mel)i 4 ) any more. *) Adverbs of time precede all other adverbs or adverbial expressions. Time before place. **) Observe that when an adverb or adverbial expression (see p. 230) begins the sentence, the verb precedes the subject (see p. 76,3). Adverbs. 233 nod) Jtoei two more. am mciften most. beinafye, faft almost, nearly. nut, Mo$', aHein only. mciften § mostly. Ijod)ften$ at the highest, at most. toenigftcnS at least. fydteftenS at the latest. anbet# otherwise. fonft ettoaS anything else. fefyt, tecfyt very or much. JU, JU fefyt too or too much. JU Otet too much. ntd)t8 nothing. gat nicfytS nothing at all. fein — mefyt no more — . ettoaS something. cm toeing a little. fyinldngtid) sufficiently. genug enough. faum scarcely. einigetmanen ) , k »*<~in^~*~z*„ I somewhat. getoi|]ermagen ) .jtemltd) tolerably, pretty. ungefcifyt, ettoa about. um Dtet ) by far, Bet toeitem j by a great deal, um bie §dlfte by one half, nod) einmal fo j twice as, $toeimal fo j as . . . again, getabe precisely, exactly, just, fonft ntdjtS nothing else. fo, ebenfo so, as, thus. eben fo fefyt as much, ebenfo toenig — al$ no more — than. ebenfaflS, gteicfyfaflS likewise. gleid)fam as it were, um fo mefyt the more, um fo toeniget the less, fogat', felbft even, ganj quite. gdn$lid) wholly, entirely. OotlenbS completely, quite, gain unb gat thoroughly, tfyeiltoeife, u)eil$ partly. befonbetS ) especially. inSbefonbete ) particularly. t)auptfad)lid) chiefly, ubevfyaupt at all, generally, im Mgemeinen in general. 5. Adverbs of affirmation, doubt and negation. 3a, ja bod), bod) yes. ja toofyt o yes, certainly. afletbingS by all means. jebenfallS at all events, getoig surely, certainly. ftd)et(id) ) to be sure, fteilid) j of course, fiittoatjt', toal)tlid) truly. toitf(id) ) really, in bet £f)at ! indeed, getn or getne*) willingly, ungetn unwillingly, nein no. toabvfdjeinlid) ) , , , tennutbUd) f P robabl y- toal)tt)aftig truly, jufdttig by chance. meMcfyt, ettoa perhaps. fd)toet(id) hardly, scarcely. o^ne3toeifet without or no doubt, aetqebenS, umfonft \ . oetgeblid) ;f 5 P vam * butd)auS' absolutely, quite, aud) nidjt nor — either, nor. nid)t einmal not even. niemalS or nie never. nid)t mefyt no more, nimmetmefyt never more. nidjt not. gat nicfyt not at all. feineStoeqS \ , im ©egentbeit on the contrary. butdjauS nify j b ? no means ' melme^t rather. 6. Adyerbs of interrogation Sann (toenn) when? toegljalb' toatum why? toegtoe'gen wherefore ? *) See the foot-note p. 234 and Conversation p. 236. end. 234 Lesson 35. tote how? tote lartg(e) how long? tote fo how so? too where? tote fctel(e) how much (many)? toofyht' whither, where? tote ttel . . nod) how much more? toofyer' whence? toie mele nod) how many more? tootmrd) by what means? etc. 7. Adverbs of order. (SrftenS, fiir'S (Srfte first (ly). bretmal three times. gtoettenS secondly brtttenS thirdly. tiertenS fourthly &c. fctner further. fyernad) hereafter, afterwards, bann, fobamt then, etnmal once, jtoctmal twice. Note. In German there is otermal four times. [more, nod) etnmal once again, once nod) jtoeimat twice again, guerft' at first, jule^t at last. etnertet of one kind, the same, gtoeterlet of two kinds, aflerlet of all kinds, also another way of forming adverbs; namely by adding the word „toetfe" to various sub stantives and adjectives, as: STbeUroetfe partly. *) ftutfroetfe piece-meal, baufentoeife by heaps, in crowds, mafjenroeife in masses, firomroeifc by streams. beerbenroetfe in flocks. trofcfemoctfe by drops &c. ntoglic^cnocifc possibly, gfiictfidjernmfe fortunately, unglutfltdjerrocife unfortunately. 8. Degrees of comparison. Besides the adjectives used as adverbs, which admit of a comparison, the following true adverbs are also subject to the degrees of comparison: Comp. Superl. fceffer better. am beften or auf'S 23efte the best, fritter ) sooner, jam et)eften the soonest. efyer j ere. jbatbtgft very soon. **) (I like) Ueber (I like am Uebften (I like best), better) . 2Bor/l well. balb soon, gem willingly, oft often. fefyr very. itbel, arg evil, oiel much. toentg little. b'fter oftener. arger worse. mefyr more. (toentger j \ (mmber) i less ' am r)auftgften the oftenest. fycd)ft, aufeerft extremely, am argften the worst, am metften most. am toentgften the least. (am mtnbeften.) *) The Latin partim, frustatim, gregatim Src. **) ©cm, Ueber, am lie b ft en correspond with the English I like, I like better, I like best, and are mostly connected with a verb, as : 3$ tytcfe gern I like to play or playing. 3dj tanjc Ueber I like better to dance or dancing. 3$ gefye am Ucbften fpajieren I like best walking. Lesson 35. 235 Words. !£>a§ ©priicfyteort the proverb, gefdn'cft skilful, foften to cost. ber yitbd the mist, fog. fcon 9?euem anew. fc&3 3 u fa mn tentref(en meeting, angreifen to attack. ba§ ©efid)t the face, counte- ftiflen to appease, to quiet. flug wise, prudent. [nance. r>er})fHd)ten to engage. ba$ 23erfpred)en the promise. gefyorcfyen to obey. ba§ SD^uvren the murmurs. bte Wlcite the mile. ber 25orfd)tag the proposal. treulid) faithfully. fcerberben to spoil. entlommcn to escape. erftaunt surprised, astonished. oertoerfen to reject. tboricbt \ . , r v i. rtcfettq correctly. tumm j 8tu P ld > f00hsh - au3fe|en to look. unfcorfidjttg improvident. Reading Exercise. 90. 1. 2Bic Ijaben err? <5tf)T gut, t# banfe 3fynen. 233te ctel @ett> fyaben ©ie? 3d) Ijabe ntdjt "old, td) fyabe fel)t tcentg. (Sin beutfd)e3 ©prudjtoort fagt: „3 U toenig unb ju x?tcl cerbirbt afleS ©ptel." 2$etB ber $nabe genug? (£r tioeig gar SfcidjtS. 2>erjeuige tcivb beu $rci« erf/alten, roeldjer am beften Icfcn unb fdjreiben tann. £>er 9?ebel t ft nad) unb nad) cer* fd)ttmnben. Sttan t/at mir nid)t etnmal geanttoortet. $eht SDZenfc^ !ann immer gliitfltd) fcin. SBerben r nod) bvei Sage $u gefyordjen. %m britten Sage fafyen fie rotrfltd) Sanb. jUtfgafie. 91. 1. When will you set out? To-morrow or the day after to-morrow. He has been here at least*) three times. Charles is improving (mad)t fyortfdjritte) , especially in (tm) German. That is 2 beautiful * indeed. We were attacked unawares [VLXl* fcei'f efyenS) , and have scarcely escaped. We went there by turns*) (abloed)f elnb) . He will (@g rotrb tljm) by no means succeed. Our meeting was quite by chance (jufaHig). I am not at all surprised at your saying so (ba§ ©ie JC.). How much do you charge (forbem) for it? It will cost you twenty florins at most (at the highest). It is about thirty miles off (roeit). *) See the foot-note *) p. 232. 236 Lesson 35. 2. It is not otherwise. At present 2 I *want nothing else. At first 2 I l thought I knew his face. If we have given a promise, let us faithfully keep (Ijalten) it; else (fonft) 2 we 1 shall certainly lose our good name. We dine precisely (pttnft- ltd)) at four o'clock. I think he will not willingly do it. Perhaps 2 you i would do better not to reject his proposal. He writes less correctly than his cousin. Miss Mary is less happy than you think. It is quite in vain to talk to (mtt) this man; he will never listen to you (auf <3ie fyb'ren). Conversation. 2Boljer fommen ©te, mem 3$ fcmme Don $oln (Cologne) » grreunb? §aben ©ie biefe SReife ju (on) ^ufj ober |u Sagen a,emacbt? 3ft Sfyre ©d)toefter $u £aufe? So ift 3fyr 23ruber? 2Bann !ommt er nad) §aufe? 3d) fyabe ©ie tange ntdjt ge* fefyen; too toaren ©te? 2£ie mete Sorter foil id) lemen? 2Bie ftnben (like) ©ie ba$ §au3 beg $errn 33.? SBoUen ©ie auf midj toarten (wait for me)? SDtefer 23rief ift nidjt fcfyon ge* fdjrieben. 2Bie fo'mmt bW ©prid)t biefer SJtomi (Sngltfc^? 2Bann ertoarten ©ie 3ljren greunb ? 23irb er allein fommen? ©eljt ber Sfrtabe gern (does he like) in bie ©cbule? (Sffcn ©ie gern(e) ©d)in?en (ham) ? 9?ein, $u (by) Staffer; id) reife Ueber ju SBajfer al8 $u Sanb. 9?etn, fie ift au3gegana,en. (Sr ift fyeute toaljrfdjeinltd) in un* ferm ©art en. (Sr toirb gegen adjt Uljr fommen. 3d) toar metftenS ju §aufe; id) toar nidjt gan$ tool)l. 2Benigften3 jtoei ©eiten (pages) . (5$ ift intoenbtg fefyr fd)on ; aber auStoenbig fiefyt e$ alt auS. (Sin toenig, aber nidjt lange. 3d) Ijabe ilm ju fd)neflgefd)rieben. @r fpridjt feljr gut. 3dj ertoarteilmbiefen^adjmittag. (Sr toirb otelleidjt feinen ©oljn mitbringen. (!DeS) 3ftorgen3 getter gem in bie ©djule; aber -ftadjmittagS fpielt er (ieber. 3a, aber id) effe Ueber 33raten (roast-meat) . Reading -lesson. $er banfbare Some. The grateful lion. (Sin armer ©Haoe, ber au3 bem £>aufe feineS §errn entflofyen toar, tourbe jum £obe oerurt^eilt (condemned) . Sftan fitfyrte ilm auf einen grogen ^lafc 1 , toeldjer mit einer 2Rauer umgeben toar, unb lie§ emeu furdjtbaren Sotoen auf ilm toS (loose). Xaufenbe oon 2ftenfdjen toaren 3eugen (witnessed) btefe$ ©djaufpielS (sence). I) square. Conjunctions. 237 SDer Sitae fyrcmg grimmig,2 cmf ben armert 9ftenfd)en; a£er jlofcltcfy felieb er ftefyen, roebelte 3 mit bem ©djroeife, ljityfte 4 toott greube urn tfyn Return tmb ledte U)m freimbltd) bte §cinbe. Seber* marm toernmnberte fid) 5 rmb fragte ben ©flatten, tote baS fomme 6 . £)er ©flatte er^afylte goIgenbeS : ,$18 td} nieinem Jperm entlaufen roar, tterBarg, id) mid) in einer §ofyle 7 mitten in einer SBitfte 8 . 2)ann !am auf eintnal biefer Soroe herein, roinfelteQ unb jeigte ntir feine STa^e 10 , in roeld)er ein aroger 2)orn ftacf. 3d} jog i^m* 1 ben 3)orn fyerauS, unb con ber 3ett an (forth) tterforgte 12 mid) ber Sorce mit 2Bilbttreti3, unb roir leBten in ber §i^te frieb* lid) beifammen. S3ei ber Ie£ten 3aa,b rourben roir gefangen unb ton einanber getrennti 4 . 9cun freut ftd; ba$ gute £l;ier, mid) toieber gefunben ju fyaBen. StfleS SBoIf roar iiber (at) bie £>anfoarfeit biefeS roilben £f;iere8 entjurft* 5 unb bat laut urn ©nabe^ fiir ben ©flatten unb ben 2croen. SDer ©flatte rourbe freigelaffen 17 unb reidyttd) befd)enft 18 . 2)er £oroe folgte i^m roie ein treuer §unb unb olici immer fcei iimt, olme 3emanb ein Seib (harm) ju t^un 19 . 2) fiercely, furiously. 3) to wag (with) his tail. 4) to jump. ■5) to be astonished, tt) to come to pass. 7) cavern, cave. 8) desert. 9) to whine. 10) paw. 11) for him. 12) to supply. 13) game. 14) separated. 15) delighted, enraptured. 16) pardon. 17) set free. 18) rewarded. 19) see the 44th lesson. Thirty sixth Lesson, On the Conjunctions. (SBon ben SBinbcroertern.) Conjunctions are particles, which serve to connect words with words, and sentences with sentences, in order to bring them into a certain relation with one another. This relation can be very different; it may express either a mere connection, an opposition, a con- dition, comparison, cause, consecution of time, just as in English. They have a great influence upon the position of the verb ; we therefore divide them into three classes accord- ing to their governing the construction. 1. Class: Co-ordinative Conjunctions.' The following seven conjunctions do not alter the construction. unb and. after or atteht but. ober or. fonttera but (after the neg. not.). benn for, since. fcrocf;l — al$ both — and. 238 Lesson 36. Examples. 3d) mug ju §aufe BtetBen, benn id) Bin ft an!. I must stay at home, for I am ill. £)er ©trang $t fttegen. The ostrich has wings, but he cannot fly. Note. 21 bcr is sometimes placed after the subject or even after the verb, without altering the sense. Ex. : 2)er Skter aba fpradj but the father said. 2)er @trau§ fyat jttffleC, cr fattrt afccr nidjt fttegen. Observations. 1) ©onbem contradicts one of the members of the pre- vious negative clause; it can only be used, if the antecedent clause contains the negation not, and in a clause which has not its own subject and verb, completing only the first. Ex. : 9Ud)t tdj bin Irani, fonbern tnetn 23ater. I am not ill, but my father. 3d) Ijatte U)n ntdjt fiir BoSljaft, fonbern fitr narrifdj. I do not think him malicious, but foolish. 3d) fteBe ntd)t feme Softer, fonbern fetne Sfttdjte. I do not love his daughter, but his niece. 2) But when the second clause has its own subject and verb, CtBer must be used, even after a negation. Ex.: 3d) IjaBe ifjn ntdjt felfcfx gefetjen, aBer tdj IjaBe U)m ge* fdjrteBen. I did not see him myself, but I wrote to him. (Sr tft nod) ntdjt angefommen, aBer totr ertoarten tint jeben 2lngenBItcf. He has not yet arrived, but we expect him every moment. 3) If the antecedent contains no negation, but must always be translated aBer or atletn, both of which are indifferently used. Ex. : (£r toollte anffteljen, aBer (or afletn) er lonnte ntd)t. 2. Class: Adverbial Conjunctions. Like all other adverbial expressions, the following adverbial conjunctions require the inversion, that is an exchange of place between the subject and the verb, when they begin the sentence or clause. bann, ba then. 2Hfo so, thus, therefore, aud) also, too (and) ntd)t nor), aufjerbettt besides, moreover. Balb — Balb now — now; sometimes — sometimes. b age 'gen j on the contrary, Ijtngegen \ on the other hand. bafyer', befjtoegen ) therefore, on ba'runt, bef$alB j that account. Conjunctions. 239 bemnad) accordingly, bennod) and yet, still. beffen*un'gead)tet nevertheless, beggtetcfyett likewise, befto ) the — (wit A a follow- ttm fo J ing comparative). bod), jebodj, j yet, still, gletd)too!()l j however, enttoeber — (ober) either — (or) . fertter further, fotgltd) j consequently, mitljttt | accordingly, inbeffen, unterbefjen meanwhile, faum scarcely. ntdjt nur ) (not only ni(^taHetn!-fottbcrttaud)j — but ntd)t blog J ( also. ntd)tg*beftOstoentger nevertheless, rtod^ nor. and) — nid)t nor. jefct, nun now, then. fo, so, thus. fenft else, or else, otherwise. tfjetlg — tfjeitg partly — partly, iiberbtejj besides, moreover, itbrtgeng as for the rest, how- Otetmefyr rather. [ever, toeber — nod) neither — nor. jtoar indeed, it is true. Examples. 2)Mne ©djtoefter tft franf, alfo (or beg'ljalb, beg'toegcn, ba'rum, ba'ljer, mit'ljttt, fo(gltd)) f ann fie ntcfyt abreifen. $aum Jjatte er btefeg 28ort gefprod)en . . $)od) (jebod), inbeffen) to at eg fd)on fpat getoorben. Werner fyatte eg otet geregnet. 3toar fonnten toir ntdjt feljen, toer eg toar; aber (aHetn) toir erfannten feine ©timme (voice). Words. $)te (Sdjtoagerin the sister-in- fd)aben to injure, hurt. [law. bte 9?al)rung the food, ber ©tpfel the top, summit. ba§ SRofyr the reed, cane, fid) btegen to bend. TUljtg quietly, nag wet. ermaljnen (Ace.) to speak to. Oeru)eibtgen to defend, protect, ertoarten to await. oerfd)toenben to waste. ber Sttitfdmter the school-fellow, bte 9?ege{ the rule, fort'fafyren intr. to continue. bag gemetne $olf the populace, begegnen to meet. Reading Exercise. 92. 3dj Ijabe ben 93rief gefdjrieben, nnb metn 23ruber \)at tljn abgefd)rteben. <5te miiffen mir bag 23ud) juritefgeben, ober id) toerbe eg bent Secret fagen. £>te $tnber !onnten bte ^trfdjen ntdjt effen, benn fie toaren nid)t reif. roir fatten f pie It en, lafen unfere greunbc (not unfere ^rennbe lafen) bie geitungen (newspapers). Observations on some of these Conjunctions. 2H3 when, as, than. 1) This conjunction has different meanings. When begin- ning a sentence, or clause of a sentence, it denotes time and signifies when or as. The English when, followed by an Imperfect or Pluperfect Tense, is therefore always rendered by the German al8 with the Imperfect or Pluperfect, as: 2tt£ ber $rinj bie Sfyitre gefd)toffen fanb, flopfte er :c. When the prince found the door locked, he knocked. 3113 er feme 9iebe geenbigt fyatte, — When (as) he had finished his speech — . 2) After a comparative, or after fo or ebenfo before an adjective, a 18 answers to the English than and as, for instance: $art ift grower aU Subroig Charles is taller than Lewis. 3d) bin nid)t fo gelefyrt al8 (or hrie) on er nod) jung ift, fyat er (bocfy) fdjon graue §aare. Although he is still young, he has already grey hair. So so, if, as. 1) The conjunction fo is not to be confounded with the adverb fo which modifies the adjectives following it (fo grog, fo fd)b'n K.) or signifies »in this manner. « — ©0, as a con- junction, stands before a verb and at the beginning of the second clause of a compound sentence, when the first member begins with toenn, ba, obgteid), obfdjon or obtoofyt, but it has no particular meaning (like then). 2Benn eg regnet, fo gefyt man nidjt fpajterett. When it rains, (then) people do not go to walk. Conjunctions. 243 SBenn ©ie fritter gefommen toaren (or SBa'ren ©ie fritter ge* fommen), fo fatten ©ie mid) nod) $u §aufe angetroffen. Had you come earlier, you would have found me at home. Dogteid) er feloft arm toar, fo unterftu£te er bod) bie airmen. Though he was poor himself, he assisted the poor. It appears from these examples that this fo cannot be translated into English except perhaps with then. The purpose of its being used in German is easily understood. Those mem- bers of the above sentences which begin with fo, are the chief members, and should, properly speaking, stand before the other clause which begins with a conjunction. The strict arrangement of those sentences would be: Wan geljt ntdjt fpajieren, toenn e§ regnet. ©ie fatten mid) nod) $u §aufe angetroffen, toenn ©ie fritter gefommen toar en. (£r unterftu^te bod) t>ie airmen, obgleid) er fefbft arm toar. Hence we see that in the above sentences a transmutation of both clauses has taken place, which is indicated by fo. It is how- ever not at all necessary to express it: we may just as well say: Setut eS regnet, gefyt (instead of fo gefyt) man ntdjt ffcajieven :c. 2) ©0, denoting if, is antiquated, and found in a few old phrases only: ©o ©ott toil! if God please. 3) ©0 before an adjective, followed by and) = however, is a compound conjunction and found p. 246, b) & 247, 7). 38amt? toetut, att* The English conjunction when corresponds with three German words, viz.: to an n? toenn, aU. a) toamt? 1) 2Bann is interrogative in direct and indirect questions: SSamt toerben ©ie fommen? when will you come? ©agen ©ie mir, toann ©ie fommen tooflen. Tell me when you will come. 2) SBann answers also to the English when = whenever, or every time when, as: ©ie fonnen e3 fd)icfen, toann ©ie tooflen. You may send it when (whenever) you like. b) tuemt. 1) 305 enn corresponds with the English when used with a present tense, and is therefore peculiarly fitted to convey general ideas, whereas al§ relates to a particular event. As often therefore as when is connected with a Present, it is to be translated in German toenn. 1 ) Ex.: 1) In this sense toann is also used. 16* 244 Lesson 36. 2Benn id) an ber 2lrbett Bin, ftebe id) feme 23efud)e. When I am at work, I do not like visitors (company). 2Benn bie Setbenfdjaften fyeftig finb, tft t>ic Stugenb in ©efafjr. When the passions are violent, virtue is in danger. 2) 2$ en It in a conditional sense is if. 2Benn ©te ntdjt fommen fonnen if you cannot come. 3) When if is used with an Imperfect tense, this must be in German in the Subjunctive mood. Ex. : (gg tocire mir lieB, toenn er fame. I should be glad if he came. c) aU. % 1 g refers to a particular event which is past, and re- quires the verb in the Imperfect or Pluperfect (Obs. 1, p. 241). 211 g id) franf tour be, fd)id'te id) nad) bem Slrjte. When I became (fell) ill, I sent for the physician. 211 g (Safar fcon 23rutug ermcrbet tourbe . . When Caesar was slain by Brutus etc. Words. £)ag ©efcingnig the prison. bie @ang the goose. ber ©tern the star. cmStoetdjen avoid. ber ©ipfel the top. iiberfaUen to overtake, attack. bag ©etoitter the thunderstorm, bie ©efafyr the danger. ber £auf the bargain. fid^erltct) surely. btenen to serve. ftoren to disturb. bunfel dark. logbred)en to break loose. fyerannafyen to approach. pUinbern to pillage, plunder. anjtefyen to put on. gegentoartig present. gefunb in good health. Reading Exercise. 94. 1. 2llg id) nacfy §aufe tarn, gtng idj ju SBett. 3dj fd)lief nod), atg mein ©ebienter in'g gtmmer trat - ©obalb (alg)*) xti) ben S3rtef empfangen I)atte, relate id) ab. £)ie ©olbaten pliinberten bie ©tabt, big ber ©eneral ein 3iet (stop) fefete. SBarten <5ie, big id) angefleibet bin. 2) a ber Abetter fet)r ftetgig toar, (fo) tourbe er gut be^afytt. 3)ie S)iebe toerben in bie ©efangniffe ge* brad)t, bamtt fie md)t mefyr ftefyien. Gslje (or bettor) bag finb (ein neueg tletb an&teljt, mug eg fid) bie §anbe rein toafdjen. (So lange bie S!ttenfd)en gefunb finb, benfen fie felten [baran], bag fie and) franf toerben fonnen. 2. SDcan toeig nid)t, ob bie ©terne betoolmt finb, ober mdjt. 3d) fprad) mit ifym, obajeid) (or obfdjon) id) iljn mdjt fannte. $aum fatten toir ben ©tpfet beg 23ergeg beftiegen, alg bag ©e* toitter logbrad). (Ss ift ein leister fauf, toenn greunbe burdj *) with j>r without at§. Lesson 36. 245 @iite getoonnen roerben. 3)ie gegentocirtige £tit ij* bie fcefte, t»eil fie unfere eigene (own) tft. 3)ie ftilben ©cmfe finb fc^tcer gu fd^tegen , toetf fie fdpett unb fe^r I)od) fliegen. 2Senn man bie ©efafyr fyerannafyen fiefyt, fo fann man if)r anSfteiajen ; after toeira fie nnS fd)(afenb uberfattt, mirb fie nn§ fid)erftcfy uerberfcen. Words. Alone attein. to inform fcenadjricfyttgen. to put out an$(i$fd)en. the language bie [with the Imperf. tone ioenn ) Subj.) ati bag but that, but. atiftatt bag instead of. fctS (bag) till, until. jbamtt - - ntd)t lest [Subj.) . tttt %0$L (bag) in case. je , befto the , the [with a comparative). je itad)bem' according as. gtetd) tine, fo tine just as. oljne bag without . ., unless, but that.i) felbft tijenn even if. fo bag so that. tine - - aud) ) however . . . {with f — aud) \ an adj. between) . fo fefyr - - aud) much as. fioenn - - ntd)t ( , „. ftoofcrn -- md)tj unless2 )- jtoemt - - aud) ^ .„ f toenu - - ateid) e ;! n \ Oorauggefe^t,bag | supposing, tioemx -- nur (provided (that), fiueuu - - aud) nod) fo though or if ever so . . Utn . . JU (with the Inf.) in order to. Note. Besides these, notice the expressions: ba '0 It bag, ba* burd) bag, bamtt bag, bartn bag :c. which have no equivalent in good English. See less. 45, p. 321. Observations. 1) Lest in the sense: for fear of after a negative clause, is sometimes translated au§ $urd)t (bag) : I did not go there, lest I should disturb him. 3d) sing uid)t bafyut au3 gurdjt, ilnt $u ftorett. Lest after the verb to fear (fiird)ten) is rendered simply by bag : I feared lest he should die id) fitrdjtete, bag er fterbeu modjtc. 2) Those of the above conjunctions marked f require the second component to be placed after the subject, and if there are personal pronouns, also after these, as: ©efyett ©te fdjnell, bamtt ©te nidjt iiberrafd)t toerben. Go quick, lest you be surprised. 1) The French sans que. 2) Unless means also : e$ fci betm bag, but this is rather antiquated j it occurs often in the Lutheran translation of the holy Bible. Compound Conjunctions. 247 SSetttt er mid) ntd)t bqafylt K. unless he pay me etc. SBenn er and) nod) fo triete 23iid)er fyatte :c. Though he had ever so many books etc. 3) 5tt $ bag is used after a negative clause with the word ant>er3, when it answers to the English but or but that, be- fore which otherwise is understood. Ex. : I don't know but [that) he is alive still. 3d) toetg ntd)t auberS, a 18 bag er nod; lefct. 51 ( § bag is further used to render the English Infinitive after too ... for . . . l) Ex. : This news is too good for me to believe it. £>tefe 9?ad)rtd)t tft jn gut, a 13 bag id) fie glauoen tonnte. 4) The dashes after je — indicate that the whole first clause is to follow before befto. Ex.: 3e meljr ©te lernen, befto mefyr totfjen ©te. The more you learn, the more you know. 5) ©0 tote is equivalent to gteid)nne, as: ©o tote bie (Sonne tfyre ©trafylen auf bte (Srbe fenbet. As the sun darts his beams to the earth etc. 2)er 2Mb, fo tote jebe anbere £etbenfd)aft :c. Envy as well as every other passion etc. 6) Dfyne bag corresponds with the English but after an excluding negation, as: Not an hour passes but I see him. G?3 oergefyt feme ©tnnbe, ofyne bag 2 ) id) ifjn felje. 7) 2Bie . . . and), fo . . . aud), take the adjective and the pronoun between them, as: 2Bte retd) an6^ [or fo retd) and)) 3l)x 33ater fetn mag. However rich your father may be. ©o fdjim e8 and) fetn mag, fo !ann e$ mir bodj SfctdjtS nitfcen. However handsome it may be, it cannot be of any use to me. 8) The dash between fo feljr — and) indicates the place for the personal pronouns. With this no adjective is used. ©o fefyr id) tljn and) gebetcn l;aee. Much as I have begged him. If the subject is a noun, fo feljr and) need not be separated. ©o feljr and) mein SSater tint gefcten Ijat. Much as my father has begged him. 1) The French pour que. — 2) The French sans que. 248 Lesson 36. c) Relative Conjunctions. All adverbs of interrogation have in indirect questions (see p. 139, Note) the value of relative conjunctions ; there- fore they require the verb at the end of the clause, as : 2Bcmn when, toarum why. Se> a egen } wherefore - tote how. toieotet how much. tote iange how long, toortn wherein, too where. tooran K. toor)er whence. toobet. toofytn where-to. toobon. tooburcfy whereby. toorauf. to omit with which. tooumter. auf toeld)e SBeife in what manner etc. Examples. 3cfo r)abe U)n gefragt, to ann tdj u)n ju §aufe finben toerbe.*) 3d) toetg ni&jt, to arum er meinen 25rtef ntdjt erfyatten Ijat* £)arf id) fragen, toie (ange ©te ba geblteben fint>? ©te fonnen btetben, too ©te ftnb. Stiffen ©te, tooher er fommt? £>tefe3 tft ba$ §au8, toobon ©te geftern gefprod)en haben. Note. Observe that the whole verb of the first clause, must precede the relative conjunction. It would be wrong to say: $)arf td), totebiet ©te be^ahtt fyaben, frag en? Ex.: I have not been told where he has gone. 9Jicm bat mir ntdjt gefagt, toofytn er gegangen tft. not: 2ftan bat mir md)t, toofytn er gegangen ift, gejagt. Words. £)te 23etetbtgung the insult. bie Suft the air. trie Unruhe uneasiness. gehord)eri to obey, tafterhaft vicious. ertangen to obtain, ungefefyteft awkward. ba§ fijfegetb the ransom, broken to threaten. bet Sftttlnn fame, renown. Reading Exercise. 97. 1. (£8 fdjeutt mir, a (3 toenn (or aU ob) idj btefen §errn fd)on gefefcen ijatte. SDiefe SBelcttotgung ift §u grog, alSbagtd) fdjtoetgen fonnte. 3d) toetg ntd)t auberS, aU bag fetn @efd)aft gut ^et)t. 9ftetn Setnb hat mid) ju fet)r beleibtgt, a(8 bag td) u)m ber§eu)en f Smite. $ar( fptelt, anftatt bag er feme Slufgabe lernt. SSSarten ©te, bt§ bag id) fertig bin. Sftelnnen ©te etnen 9£egen« fdjtrm, bam it ©te ntdj t nag toerben. -3d) toerbe ifym bie Srlaub* nig md)t geben, toenn er aud) nod) fo fehr hittet. 3elafter* hafter bte 9ttenfd)en ftnb, befto mehr Unruhe fjaben fte. 2. 3e tatter bte Suft tft, befto mehr totegt fie; je toarmer fie ift, befto letdjter ift fte. ©te toerben belohnt toerben, jenad)* *) The direct questions are : Sann tt>ert>e id) tyn JU £>aufe finben ? — SBarum f>at er meinen 23rtef nitt)t erbalten? etc. Lesson 36. 249 bent ©te ftetgig finb. liefer jimge $ftenfd) ift fefjr imgefdjicft; er nimmt nie (£th>a« in bte §anb, ofyne bag et e3 serbrid^t. Sir lonnen biefe 2Utf.gabe nic^t ntadjeti, toenn ©ie un3 nid)t Ijelfen. 3e ntefyr ©ie mir broken, b efto toentger toerbe id) -31jnen gefyordjen. 2)er ©efangene toirb feine gretljett nid)t ertcmgen, tocnn et nic^t ein I)ol)e3 Sofegelb hqafyt. 2$ie grog aud) ber SRuljm biefeS ^iirften fetn mag, ber feineS $ater$ tear nod) grower. Words. To marry Ijetratljeit. to practice ilben. the assistance ber Seiftcmb. to hurt fdjaben, ttefye tfmn. careful »orfid)ttg. to disappear cerfd)tmnben. the price ber ^preiS. low nieber. to perish fum'fommen. frequently fyciuftg. somewhere irgenbtoo. <|lttfga6r 23ncfy $u* 3e efyer ©ie e3 fywt, befto ange* rndfd)tc¥en? nefymer toirb e3 mir fein. 3ft ber $ranfe anfgeftanben? 3a, obgtetcfy ber Hr^t e$ tym toer* boten tyat. SSiffen ©ie , toarum er ntdjt 9cem, er Ijat e$ mir ntd)t gefagt. lommt? 251 Thirty seventh Lesson. ON THE PREPOSITIONS. (S5on ben SorwSrtem.j Prepositions are particles which serve to show the relation which exists between a verb and a noun. This relation being of different kinds, the prepositions destined to indicate it, govern different cases, namely the Accu- sative, Dative or .Genitive case. 1. Prepositions with the Accusative case. ofyne without, but for. um about, round, at. £)urcfy through, by. fift for. gegen*) towards, against, to. nuber against. Further four compounds which follow their substantives : fytncmf up.**) I fytnburd) through, fyinab, ^munter down. I entlang along, um . . Return round. Examples. jDuvd) ba8 23jor through the gate. Qwcfy tt>eld)e Sttttten by what means? %UX 3fyre ©djwefter for your sister, ©egen mid) against me. ©egen ba8 ©ebtrge towards the mountain. Dime emeu pfennig without a penny. Um t>ie ©tabt fterum) about the town. Um ben j£tfd) round the table. SSiber fern en SBtflen against his will. £)te ©ttege fytnctuf, — fytnunter up stairs, down stairs. SDen $tu$ entlang along the river. — 2)en SBinter Ijintmrdj. 2. Prepositions with the Dative case. auS out of, from. aujer except, besides. bet near, with, by, at. btnnen within {for time). mtt with. nad}***) after, to, according to. ncid)ft, junacfyft next to. nebft, fammt together with. fett since, for. Don from, of, by. con — an from, since. JU to, at. — biS JU as far as. *) There is also an old expression: gen £tmmcl up to heaven, for gegen ben pummel. **) These words are only considered prepositions when an Accusative is joined to a neuter verb. Ex.: ©efyen @te bie ©tiege fytnauf. ***) 9iatt) is sometimes placed after the noun, when no time is denoted but when it means according, Latin secundum. Ex. : 3)em 9Jamcn nadj> by trie name. 2)em 2ttter nacfy according to age. 252 Lesson 37. Further the compounds, which follow their nouns: jufotge*) according to. autofoer m °PP 0Sltl0n > guroiuer contrary to. entgegen against (to meet), gegenitber ^opposite, gemaft according to. Examples. 2tu3 bettl §aufe (®arten) out of the house, from the garden. 2lu£er ehtem Coffer besides a portmanteau. 23et mehtem $reunb at my friend's (with my friend). Set unferer Munft on our arrival. SBtnnen roentgen Sftmuten witliin a few minutes. 23t§ $u bent nad)ften 2)orfe as far as the next village. Wafy ber ©d)lad)t after the battle. 9cctd) btefer 9ie«el according to this rule. %lad) metner 2)cehtung in (according to) my opinion. 9fttd)ft (junMjft) bent §itgel next the hill. Sftefcft (fammt) metnen ^htbern together with my children. ©ett jener 3ett Slnce (from) that time. 23on metnen ©Item by (from) my parents. 55 on £htbfyett an from childhood. (£r fam £U mit he came to me (to my house). 9ttetnen SBefeljlen entgegen against my orders. £>em 9£atl$aufe gegenitber opposite the town-hall. -Severn SBunfdje gemajj (jufolge) according to your wish. £)em SBefe^I be3 &ttg3 ptotber contrary to the king's order. Words. 3>et §trf(f) the stag. bte (Stc^e the oak-tree, rufyen to rest, rotten to roll. bte 23ritcfe the bridge. ber 3 u 9 X)D 9 e ^ tne bird OI> ber S3eute( the purse. passage, ber 23ote messenger, ber ©trom the stream, ber ^rufyltng spring. fpctjteren geljen to walk. ber $fcm the peacock. ber §itge( the hill. Reading Exercise. 100. (Sin ^anartenoogel flog bnrd) baS ^enfter unb fefcte fid) anf einen S3aum. ®er £nabe Ijat gegen ben SBaum gefcfyoffen. ©et fyofltd) gege'n 3eberntann. £)er §nnb lief mefyrere SIftate nm ba3 §au3 (fyerum) unb fud)te f einen §errn. £)er §trfd) rufyete tm ©fatten enter (Stdje. 2)te 3 u 3*%el fcertaffen un3 tm §erbft (autumn) unb fefyren tm griujltng ju un§ suriicf. ^ofept) toar toctt)renb etntger jjett @ftat>e Bet ^ottpfyar. £>te gamtde be£ Sorb 33. loofyut anf bent Sanbe.. £)er $fau tft ber fcfyonfte unter ben SSogeut. *) 8U f o I g e is generally employed with the Genitive case, but when placed after the substantive, it governs the Dative. Ex. : Prepositions. 253 ilufftaOc. 100a. 1. I went through the forest. This book is for your brother. Go round the garden. I got this packet (^adcfyen) by a messenger, it is for you. Let us walk through the town. Nobody can swim against the stream. The ball rolled 3 down Hhe 2 hill. 2. Somebody has taken my purse out of my pocket. Lord E. wishes to go to France. He will depart within the next week. I shall go out after (the) dinner. Where does that gentleman live? He lives near the bridge, opposite the church. Contrary to the order of the queen 2 the 3 lady Ueft the palace. 3. Prepositions with the Genitiye case. um — totflen for the sake of. unbefcfyabet without prejudice. ungead)tet notwithstanding. tmtoett (unfent) not far from, toermcge by means of. fcermtttetft (mtttelft) by means of. toafyrenb*) during. toegen**) on account of. jufolge according to. 3Irtftatt or ftatt instead of. augerfyatb without, outside, tnnevfyalb within (place). cfcerfyalB above [higher up). Uliterfyalb below (lower down). btefjettS on this side of. jenfettS on the other side of, langS*) along. [beyond. tro£*) in spite of. Examples. Slnftatt etneS 33rtefe§ instead of a letter. 2IuJ3ert)aIb ber <2>tabt without (outside) the town. £)tefjett§ beS f?Iuffe« on this side of the river. 3enfett$ be8 SfteereS beyond the sea. 3nrierljalb ber 2ft cuter within the wall. Dberfydb ber SSriirfe above the bridge. Untetfyctlb be^ 3)orfe8 below the village, etc. Besides these, there are some antiquated prepositions, viz: fyaiber or fjalben on account of, for the sake of; fraft by power of; laut according to. Ex.: 3fyrer (Sfyre fydber or fyalben for the sake of your honour. 2aut beg fontgIid)en 95cfefyl§ according to the king's command. 4. Prepositions with the Dative and Accusative. There are nine prepositions, which govern sometimes the dative, sometimes the accusative. The dative is re- quired, when the ruling verb signifies a state of repose; — the accusative , when it denotes a motion from one *) Iang8,tro£ and fa a fy r e n b are sometimes used with the dative, as: trofc meirtem SBefefyl in spite of my order; roctfyrenb bcm SRegen. **) toegen may be placed after its noun, as: roegert metner dfyre or metner (Ifyre to eg en on account of my honour. 254 Lesson 37. place to another, or direction towards a place. This dis- tinction may be rendered more evident by applying the questions where ? or in what place f and whither, or to what place. Take for instance the sentence: The book lies on the table. You ask : WTiere or in what place does it lie? The answer is in the dative: £)a$ 23ttd? Uegt auf bem £tfcfy; auf governs the dative here, because the verb to lie indicates repose or rest. But : JPut the book upon the table is translated : Scgetl @te ba$ iBitd? auf b e u £tfd?. The question is here : where- to (whither) or to what place? — The answer is: auf ben £tfcfy, with the accusative, because the verb (egeu (to lay or to put) implies a motion from some other place to the table; the book is to be moved to the table. These nine prepositions are as follows: 2ltt at, on, close to. auf upon, on. gutter behind. ttt in, into, to. tte&Ctt by the side of, near. itDer over, above, across. Utttcr under, among. Dor before, ago, outside. Sttrifdjett between. Examples. 2Btr jte^en an bem $ug (Dot.) be§ 23ergc8. We stand at the foot of the mountain. 28tr ftetlten un« au bag (Ace.) £fyor. We placed ourselves at the gate. dx fyatte eiuen §ut^ auf bem $opf (Dat.). He had a hat on his head. <3e£eu ©te ftd) auf btefen <5tuljl (Ace). Sit down (place yourself) on this chair. 2)ie fyifct)e lefceu tu bem (tut) Staffer. The fish live in the water. £)a3 ttub ift iu bag (tn'«) Staffer gefaUeu. The child has fallen into the water. £>er §of ift nt'btn bem £aufe. The yard is near (or by) the house. 3d) tegte ba$ 23ud) ue&eu mid). I laid the book beside me. 2Biv fe^teu iiber beu ^luf} we crossed the river. 3)er §uub Y\to>t uuter bem Xtfcfy. The dog lies under the table. S)tc $a§e frod) uuter bag Sett. The cat crept under the bed. Prepositions. 255 3d) ftanb dot bent 51 uf gang*) ber (Sonne auf. I got up before sunrise. $)te Sruppen ritcften bor t>te ©tabt. The troops marched to the tawn. groifcfyen bent §ngel unb bent SBatfy. Between the hill and the brook. §dngen ©te ba$ 23Ub jroifdjen bie jrcei ftenfter. Hang the picture between the two windows. Note. To fix a distance, the prepositions: nad), ju, an, auf, $ht« ter, in, bor may be preceded by bi8, answering to the English as far as or to, as: btS nadj 9?om as far as Rome; bi§ an bie or bi$ jur ©renje to the frontier ; bid auf ben 23erg to the top of the mountain. Observations. The chapter on the prepositions is no doubt one of the most difficult of the German Grammar, and the proper use of them requires an intimate acquaintance with the character of the German language. The peculiar nature of every ex- pression , particularly of the verb, is to be considered, and the prepositions therefore cannot always be rendered literally. Reserving further »Remarks« for the Second Part, we give here some hints which may direct the pupil, how to translate pro- perly the English prepositions most in use. at before a Proper name is rendered by in when the place is on the same level with the speaker, and by auf, if it is higher up, as : at Paris tn5$art8; he arrived at the village er lam in bent £)orfe an; at the hotel im ©aftfyaufe; at the castle auf bent ©cfytog. Observe the following locutions with at and to; With to be [dot.). "With to go {ace). at the market attf bent Waxlt. to the market auf bctt Wlaxft. at the ball auf bent 23att. to the ball auf ben 93att. at the post-office auf ber $oft. to the post-office auf bie ^3oft. at the chase auf ber 3agb. to go hunting auf bie 3agb gefyen. Denoting the hour of the day or night, at is um or also am, as: at three o'clock um (or am) brei W)r. — at the beginning is: im Slnfana,; at the end am (£nbe; at the age of sixty years im Sitter bon 60 Saljren; at home ju §aufe. by with the Passive voice is translated con, as: I am loved by my father id) roerbe *>on meinem SSater aelteot. — by with a place is oei or neoen: by the bridge neben or bet bet 23riicfe. — Denoting a means, it is burd), as: by force burd) ©e»att; by practice burd) UcSung. — By land or water is translated: ju Sanb ober $u Staffer. ') 93or, in and an used for time, always take the dative. 256 Lesson 37. in answers to the German tit with the dative, denoting rest: I found it m my pocket in mehter £afd)e; I was in Heidelberg id) tear in §etbelBerg,. Further: in German anf SDeutftfy or im 3)entfd)eit (no>t in SDeutfdj). in the country is anf bent Sanbe, whereas 'to go into the country' signifies anf ba3 Sanb gefyen. into is the German in with the accusative denoting motion: Put it in or into your pocket fteden ©te e§ in 3 tyre £afd)e. on meaning upon, is the German anf, as: on the table anf bent £tfd), or when motion is understood: anf ben Xifd). Meaning close to, it is an, as: Frankfort on the Main ^ran!* furt ant 9J?aht. Denoting time, it is also rendered by an: on what day an freld)em £age? on Tuesday am SDtenftag. Other expressions are: on my arrival Bet mehter Slnhtnft; on this occasion Bet biefer ©elegenfyett ; on horseback jn^ferb; on that condition nnter biefer 23ebhtgnng. to, denoting a direction to a place bearing a Proper name is nad): I go to Paris, to America etc. id) gefye nctd) -Paris, nad) Slmertfa K. To go to a person or a person's house is jn: I go to him or to his house id) gel)e £U il)tn; to my aunt's jn mehter Xante. To, denoting a direction to a place higher up than the speaker is, means auf, as: to the castle anf ba$ (2d)fofj. Denoting a direction to a place (common name) to is translated an with the accusative, as: to the railway an bie (StfenBalm; to the bridge an bte Sriide. When synonymous with into (inside), to is translated in with the accusative: I go to church id) gefye in bte £ird)e; let us go to the hotel toir rootlen in ben ©aftfyof gefyen. with is commonly mtt, when used with verbs of motion as: I go with my friend id) gefye mtt mehtem ^reunbe. But when it means at somebody's house, shop, country etc., it is Bet: he lives with me er rool)ttt Bet ttttr; with us (in our country) Bet mt8; does he dine with you? fpetSt er Bet 3ljnen? (Further examples on the use of the Prepositions are found in the II. Part. Less. 49.) Words. S)te toetje 9inBe the turnip. bte SrtauBntjs permission, ber 33efel)l the order, command. coUf'ommen perfect, ber <3d)rtftftefler the writer. bte fjfefiung the fortress, bte SSorftcllnng remonstrance. bte $apelle the chapel, fett roann how long? ber SBerfajt the loss. bag Sanbgut the estate. ba§ ©opfya the sofa, ber £opf pot. !(ettem to climb, ber fjujjpfab the foot-path. cmSlaufen to set sail. Betrad)ten to look at. ber Stnftng the influence. erfafyren to learn, to hear, fid) berfammeln to assemble. fd)aarentr>etfe by troops. Lesson 37. 257 Reading Exercise. 101. SDtc $od)tn §at gelbe Sftiiben (carrots) gefodjt anftatt tuetger Sftiiben. £>te $)amen finto langS be3 SlujjeS fpajteren gegangen. 23or fedjS Ufyr toerbe tdj ntdjt nad} £aufe gefyen ; toarten ©te 6t« tnorgen. SBegen be8 hribrtgen (contrary) 2£tnbe§ fonnte ba§ ©djiff ntd)t austaufen. ©eit toann (how long) toofynen ©te in btefem §aufe? ©eit $tt>ei 9ftonaten. Set SageSanbrudj gtngen folumbug unto feme ©efatyvten an'S Santo unto natymen 23efi£ (possession) t»on toer Otafel im tauten toe§ ^ontgS fcon ©panten. SBaljrenb totefer Qteremonte fcerfammetten fid) tote Snbtaner fdjaarenn>etje urn tote ©panter unto betradjteten fcatto tote fremben toetgen Scanner, Balto tote fcfyhnmmenben §aufer, auf n>eld)en fie iiber toa§ SSfteer gefommen ttaren. iiufaade 102. 1. I shall take my umbrella instead of my stick. May I send my daughter instead of my wife ? Why did you go to Baden? I went there on account of my health. There are a great many foreigners (fefyr totele Sfrembe) at Baden during the summer. During winter there are fewer. The Royal garden is outside the town. Mr. R. lives on the other side of the river. According to an order of the Emperor Napoleon, 3 several French writers *were 2 obliged (mugten) to leave France, notwithstanding their remonstrances. We obtained the per- mission by means of the influence of our aunt. Richmond lies 12 miles above, and Greenwich 5 miles below London bridge (toer Sonboner 23rii(fe). Nothing is perfect on this side the grave. Not far from the hill stands the chapel. He takes a walk notwithstanding the bad weather. The garden is situ- ated (ttegt) outside the town. 2. He is a rich man in spite of his great loss. Who knocks at the door? Put the flower-pot before my window. To (an) whom (Ace.) did you write a letter? I wrote to (an ace.) the Duke of Wellington. I found this ring before the sofa. Who laid this book on my table? The servant stood at (an) the door of the house and looked (fafy) after the birds. This old man is above (fiber) ninety years old. The enemy lay six months before the fortress which was built on the mountain. Men do much for the sake of (be§) money. The prisoner looked up to Heaven. According to the king's com- mand the troops must march. The castle of the duke is on the other side of the river. Along the river [-side] there is a foot-path (gujjpfab). Conversation. 2Bo n>of>nen (live) ©te? Sty toofyne bet toem ©d)loffe. 2Md)e3 tft toer fd^onfte unter j£>er ^fau gilt (is considered) fur toen $ijgetn? toen fawnften unter ben SBogcfa. 3Bo leben tote 5lffen? 3n Ijetgen Santoern. OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 17 258 Lesson 37. SBoln'n flog bet $anarientoogel? (5r flog auf emeu SBaum. 2Bo fag er nad^er? Sr fag auf bem £)acfy. 28ann toerlafjen bte 3 u 9 i30 9 e ^ 3m §erbft (autumn), toot bem Ghtrotoa? 2lnfang be$ SBinterS. 2Bofyin fliegen fie? 3n fiibtidje (southern) £anber, meiftenS nad) 2lfrifa. 2Ba§ ^at bie tod)in gefofy? ©etbe SRufcen ftatt tartoffetn. §aben ©tc meinen ipunb nidjt 25odj, er ift eben urn bag $au$ gefefyen? gelaufen. 2Bo finb ©te btefen Bergen 3d)I)abeeinenie fo traurig? SBegen eineS grogen SBerlufteS, bet mid) betroffen fyat. 2Bo finb ©tc bem Jperrn -ft. 5luget^aIbber©tabt,bem33a^n^of begegnet (met)? (railway-station) gegenitber. SGBo^tn gefyt ber tod)? (Sr gej>t auf ben SDcarft. SBofyin teist bet ©raf? (St reist auf bag Sanb. 2Bo lebt 31jre £ante? ©ie lebt im ©ommer auf bem Sanbe, im SSintet in bet ©tabt. Reading -lesson. $a§ jerfiroc^ettc |>ufctfen» The broken horse-shoe. ©in 33auet ging mit feinem ©ofyn, bem Iteinen SfyomaS, in bie nad)fte ©tabt. „©iefy"\ fagte et untertoegg ju ifym, „ba ttegt ein <&tM toon einem §ufeifen auf bet Srbe 1 , fyebe 2 eg auf unb ftetfe eg in beine £afa)e." — Ml" toetfe^te^ Stomas, „eg ift ntdjt bet Wltye toertf) 4 , bag man ftdj bafitt bitdtV £)et $ater emnberte^ SJttdjtS, nafym bag (Sifen unb ftedte eg in feine £afd)e. hm nacfyften 3)otfe toetfaufte et c« bem ©dmiiebe filr btet §efler (farthings) unb faufte tirfdjen bafiit. §ietauf fefcten? fie ifyren 28eg fott. UDte §i£e 8 toat feljr grog. Wlan fafy toeit unb Brett » ioebet §aug, nodj 2Batb, nod) Duette* . ifyomag ftatb beinafye 11 toot 2)urft 12 unb fonnte feinem 23ater faum folgen. 2)ann lieg ber tefetere, toie burd) 3 u f a ^ 13 ^ e ™ e ®itf$z fallen. £f)omag fyob 2 fie gierig 14 auf unb ftedte fie in ben SJhtitb. (Sinige ©djritte 15 toeiter lieg ber 33ater eine jruette firfdje fallen, toetdje £fyomag mit berfelben ©iertgfeitie ergriff. SDte3 bauerte fort 17 , bi§ er fie attc aufge^oben fyatte. 21(8 er bie lefcte gegeffen fyatte, toanbteber 35ater fid) $u tbm ^in unb fagte: „emt! on! forwards! o toet)e! o dear! alas! 2ld)tuncj! take care! attention! patfd)! pat! o SSunber! o dear! piff! pctff! bang! e)? She has not much, she has not enough. — Have you any morel wine? I have some more 1 wine. — Have you any more money? I have no more money (fettt @ett) tnd)r). — Which volume 2 of my work 3 have you? I have the second. — Have you as much 4 gold as silver? I have neither 5 gold nor silver. — Have you as many 4 stockings 6 as shoes? I have more stock- ings than (ctl8) .shoes. — Has this soldier as much courage 7 as I [have]t He has quite as much. — Has the foreigner 8 [a] mind 9 to buy this house? He has [a] mind to buy it. — Have you [a] mind to make (ju fcfyneiDen) my pen? I have a mind to make it, but I have no time. Has your cousin [a] mind to sell his horse? No, he has no mind to sell it, he will keep 10 it. 1) any more = nod), see p. 296, 13. 2) ace. 23anb, m. 3) SBerf, n. — 4) efeenfotoiel. 5) neither . . . nor tteber . . . nod). 6) ©trfintyfe. — 7) 2Ruty, m. 8) ber ftrembe. 9) Sufi, f. 10) beaten. 3. Am I (§afce id)) right to take* a walk? You are quite right. — 7* he wrong to spend 2 his money. He is wrong to spend too much money. — To (jit) whom do you wish to go? I wish to go to my uncle'*. — Is your brother at home? He is not yet at home, but he will soon come home. Do you wish to speak to (nut) some one? Yes, I wish to speak to some one. — To whom do you wish to speak? I wish to tpeak to your aunt. — Do you wish to drink (some) red wine? I shall drink white wine. — What does the little girl wish to drink? She wishes to drink some milk. — Are you going $ home 4 ? Not yet, but in an hour. — Do your boys go to (in trie) school? No, they have private lessons (•|3rh)at'ftunt>en). — Who wishes to write a letter? My daughter wishes to write several letters. — To (an) whom {Ace.) will she write? She will write to her [female] friends. — Who shall takes these letters to the post-office (auf trie $oft)? The servant must take them there 6 . 1) etnen ©Jx^ier'gang ju ma^cn or foajieren ju geljen. 2) auS'ju* gefcen. 3) ©efyen @ic? 4) nad) £au8. 5) tragen. 6) ba^in'. 4. What have you to do (tfjun)? I have to write a French exercise 1 . — What has your brother to do? He has to do 2 his 1) Slufgafce, f. 2) jit madden. Promiscuous Exercises. 261 German exercise for to-morrow. — What did the English- man answer you (Dat.) ? He answered nothing. — Did (fyat) he not say, he would come to (§u) me? No, Sir, he said nothing at all 3 . — Where is the child of my neighbour? It is in your garden. — Have you many flowers in your garden? We have all kinds 4 of flowers. — Are you in want of (bxcmd)eit eil. 6. Do you find what you are looking 1 [for]? I find what I look for. — Who was looking for me? Your master looked for you. — Can the cook find (,) what he looks for? He cannot find it. — What is he doing? He is killing a chicken 2 . — Are you going for 3 anything? Yes, I am going for some- thing. — Tell me what you are going for? I am going for [some] meat. — For* whom does your mother send 5 ? She sends for the cook (f). — Do you learn German?' I do learn it. — When (toatm) did you begin 6 to learn it? I began it two months ago. — Do you speak French? No, Sir, not yet ?, but I am learning it. — How many lessons have you 1) to look for = fud)en. 2) cm £afynd)en. 3) to go for =* §ofen. 4) nad) toem? 5) fctytcfen. 6) angefangen. 7) nod) md)t 262 Lesson 37. a (til ber) week? I have a lesson every other day. — Are these gentlemen English 8? No, they are Scotchmen 9. — Do they study German? I do not know, but I believe [they do]. — What does your pupil need? He needs a new book. Does he need anything else 10 ? Yes, he needs a new coat and a pair of boots. 8) subst. (not adj.) (Snglanber, see p. 65, 8. — 9) (gc^otttanber. 10) fonft (Strcas. Does the foreigner intend i to stay here? No, he intends to depart. — When do you intend to sell your house? I intend to sell it to-day. Whose cloak is this 2 ? It is mine. — Whose hats are these 2 ? They belong 3 to tfc.3 Englishmen. — What book do you read? I read a novel 4 by Sir Walter Scott. — Do you know that man? I do not know him. — Have you seen him already? I have seen him somewhere 5 . — Where have you been? I have been at (the) church. — Where has your mother been? She has been also at church. — Has your sister ever (fd)on) been in France? She has never been there. '■ — Does she intend to go there? She intends to go 3 there 6 * next 2 year. — Were you at the ball last night 7? I was not there. — Will there be a ball this evening? It will not take placed — When were you at (in) the theatre? I was 2 there l yesterday. 1) to intend = gebenfen, fcor'tyaben, gefonnen fcin. 2) see p. 69, Note I. 3) ge^oren {Bat.). 4) 9toman' m. 5) trgenbtoo. 6) bafyht *= thither. 7) geftern Slbenb. 8) ftattfinbcn. 8. Can you swim as well (gut), as a sailor 1 ? I cannot swim so well as a sailor. — Can this boy swim better, than I? He can swim better than you. — At what o'clock did Mr. Green breakfast? He (has) breakfasted at nine o'elock. — Did he dine 2 before (elje) he left 3? No, Sir, he left before (toor prep.) (the) dinner. — Have you told it [to] me (dat.) ? I told it you the day before yesterday. — Which words have you written? I have written these three words. — Which book have you read? I have read the book . . you have lent me. — Are your shoes mended 4 ? They are not yet mended. — Are your handkerchiefs and your stockings washed 5 ? Neither the one (bie einen, pi.) nor the others are washed. — Why do you not eat? I do not eat because I am 6 not hungry. — Why are you not hungry? Because I have eaten some bread and ham 7 . — Are you thirsty 8? I am not thirsty, I have drunk some beer. 1) cm 9Jiatro[c. 2)fyeifen, reg.v. 3) to leave = ab 'ret 'fen. 4)gefndt. 5) getoafdjen. 6) verb last, see p. 240, 3. 7) ©cfytnfett. 8) burfitg. Promiscuous Exercises. 263 9. Is your servant a good one? He is a good one. — Is he as good as mine? I think he is better than yours. — Are you satisfied with him? I am quite satisfied. — Do you like 1 fish? Yes, I like fish but I like fowl 2 better. — Does your aunt like mutton 3 ? She likes roast mutton and roast veal 4 . — Do the pupils like* to learn by hearts? They do not like learning by heart, they like 6 writing better 6. — To (an, Ace.) whom do you address 7 your letters? I address them to a friend. — Do you admire this work 8 ? I do ad- mire it. — How do you amuse the ladies? I play [on the] piano (flatter). — Have you helped your sister [Dat.)*! I could not help her. — Have you asked 9 [for] wine? No, I have ordered 10 tea. — Have you bought this map 11 ? I have borrowed 12 it. — Have you satisfied your relations 13 ? They ask 9 nothing. — Has the boy fed 14 his birds? He feeds them every morning. — Did you guess (ijahtn ©ie . . erratfyeit) the riddle 15 ? I could not guess it. — Have you sold your field 10 ? I do not intend to sell it. 1) (Sffen fie gern . . . 2) effe Ueber ©epget. 3) $ammrffleif<$. 4) ^albfleifdj. 5) Semen . . gem auSmenbig? 6) fte fcfyreiben lieber — 7) abrefftren. 8) 5lrbeit, f. 9) to ask for = toerkngen reg. v. [Ace). — 10) befteflen reg. v. 11) £anbfctrte, f. 12) entfetynen r. v. 13) Serteanbtcn. 14) to feed fiMern, reg. 15) bag ftat^fet. 16) baS ftetb. 10. Have you lost (the) hope 1 ? I 2 never Hose hope. — Has the gardener planted some trees? He has planted many trees. — Has the soldier cleaned 2 his gun 3 ? He is just (efcen) cleaning* it. — Why has the tailor not cleaned the coat? Because I have not sent it [to] him. — Has the cook roasted the hare? He will roast it to-morrow. — Has the maid washed her gloves? She has washed them. — Where are my boots? They are at (bet) the shoemaker's. — Why does Mary open the window? She likes fresh air 4 . — Why does she shut the door? She will (ttriU) not 5 have a draught . — Has (ift) the man got up early? He has got up late, because he is ill. — Will he not put out 7 the fire? No, he wants it still (nocfy). — What does he boil? He boils potatoes and carrots. — Did you empty 8 the bottles? All [the] bottles are emptied. — Are they clean? They are very clean; you may put in 9 what you like (tooHen). 1) bie $offnung. 2) rctnigen. 3) ©cttefyr, n. 4) = he cleans. 5) 2uft, f. 6) nota = fetnen. 6) 3ug, m. 7) auS'tofc^en. 8) ton, reg. v. 9) fyinchltfyun. 11. Is the little boy dressed? He is dressed. — Has he dressed himself (fid) felBft) ? Yes, he dressed himself. — Were his. shoes cleaned? The servant has cleaned them. — Did 264 Lesson 37. he wash his hands? He has washed his face and his hands. When did (tft) the ship set 1 sail? The ship (has) set sail the day before yesterday. — Do your friends travel by (jtt) land or by sea? They travel by land. — For (auf) whom (Ace.) do you wait? I wait for my coachman. — Have you spoken about the matter 2 ? We had no time to speak about it 3. — Have you learnt reading of (con) him? I learnt it of his brother. — Do you know your lesson? I think I know it; I have taken 4 pains. — Does the pupil read well (gut)? He reads pretty (jtemttcfy) well. — How many pages 5 does he write every day? He writes only one page, and that is enough. — Have the boys done 6 their exercise? They are doing them still 7. — Which verb 8 have they learnt? They have learnt an irregular 9 verb. — Have they written it? No, they must not write it. 1) to set sail = -J-ctb'fegetn reg. v. 2) ii&er bte @ad)e. 3) about it, see p. 136, § 7. 4) I take pains tdj gebe mir 9Jiiifye. 5) ©cite, f. 6) gemadjt. 7) no$. 8) ba8 £eim>ort. 9) unregelma&ig. 12. Which 1 is the best place? The first place is the best. — At what o'clock do we dine? We dine at one o'clock. — What kind of meat is that? This is mutton. — How much do you charge 2 for (the) dinner 3? One shilling. — Is dinner ready ? Yes. — Where is my dog? It is before the door. — To whom (dat.) does that house belong? It belongs to Mr. Lion. — Is that true? That is quite true. — Did you understand me? Yes, Sir, (I did]. — Is the carriage come? The carriage is not yet come, but the horses are come. — What (tote) do you call 4 this country? It is Bavaria 5 . — Will you come with me? I have no time. — Have you been at (auf, dat.) the post-office? I shall go 2 there * directly (gfetcfy). — Are there [any] letters for me? Not to-day. — What do you think of (toon) this letter? I cannot understand it. — When shall we set off6? In a few days. — Will you take a walk 7 in the garden? With great pleasure, if you will go with me. 1) See p. 141, 2. — 2) forbem, toertangen. 3) ba8 Hfttttageffett. 4) nennen. 5) SBatyent. 6) abreifen. 7) ctnen (Spajier'gang ma a) en. 13. Did i you tell him to come (bag er foutmeu foil) ? Yes Sir [I did]. — Did (tft) she get up early? She got up very late. — Why has this boy no handkerchief? He has lost it. — What is the price of that cloth 2 ? This cloth is very cheap (tool)lfet() ; it costs four florins. — Can you not take less? I cannot give it cheaper 3 . — Have you no better 4 ? I have [some] better, but it is dearer. — How is the weather to-day ? 1) Transl. : have you told. 2) Xudj, n. 3) ttofytfeifer. 4) fern 6e[fere«. Promiscuous Exercises. 265 It is very fine. — Shall we have fine weather to-morrow? I am afraid it will rain. — Is (the) dinner served 5? The servant is serving it. — Shall I give you some soup? Yes, Madam, if you please. — Do you like fruit 6? I like it very [much]. — Will you have some potatoes? I shall take some. — Do you breakfast, before 7 you take a walk? No, I take a walk before I breakfast. — How long were you ill? I was ill [for] a fortnight (14 Stage). — Have you been at (auf) the market? I have not been there. — Has your aunt been in (auf) the country? She has not yet been there, but she will go soon. Has shebeen anywhere? She has been with (bet) her cousin 8 . 5) to serve = auf'tragen, ir. v. 6) bag Dbft. 7) Conjunction etye or befcor'. 8) Soufmc. 14. Who has burnt 1 my letters? The servant has burnt them. — Has Charles torn his coat? His brother has torn it. — Has the boy broken a chair? he has broken a table and a chair. — Is your neighbour as poor as he says? He is not so poor. — Does your tailor make good coats? He makes good and bad [ones]. — Have you consulted 2 your friends? They were not at home, when (ctl8) I called 3 on them. — Have you paid [for] the wine? I have paid [for] the dinner, but not [for] the wine. — Did (§at) the servant light 4 the (t>em) professor down stairs? Yes, [he did]. — Where were (ftttt)) you born? I was born in Italy. — In which of (fcott) these streets does he live? He lives in (the) Frederick- Street. — How will you spend 5 this evening? I 2 hardly *know it myself. — Will you go to 6 the play with me? I thank you; I shall be ready at seven o'clock. — Is tea ready? It will be ready in a moment. — When may I send you this letter? Whenever 7 you please. — Where shall (foil) I send it to? I will give you my direction 8 . 1) toerbrennen, see p. 121. 2) fcefragen reg. 3) I call on or upon = them, 3$ befudje ftc. 4) fytnunter teud)ten reg. 5) $u'brtngen. 6) tn8 Sweater. 7) ftann e« Sfynen gefaftt(or icann ©te tooflen. 8) bte $breffe. 15. When will you set out for (ttadj) Paris? The day after to-morrow. — May I trouble * you with a letter? I shall take 2 it with great pleasure. — Will you sup 3 with me? I thank you, I am engaged 4 , it is impossible for me. — When shall I see you again ? I will call upon you this evening after (the) supper. — Will you play [at] cards? 5 I play very in- differently 6 . — Do you like" 1 to play [at] whist? 8 Yes, I like it. — How high do you play? As high as you please. — How many points 9 have you? I have only seven points. — 1) befafttgen, bemiifyen. 2) mtmefymen. 3) ju 5lbcnb effen. 4) ab$z* fatten. 5) flatten pi. 6) aletc>ltig. 7) I like to play id) finete gem. 8) S^ift. 9) ber %untt, @tt$. 266 Lesson 37. Any news ((StttJttS -iftetteS) of (Don) your brother? I have not heard from him [for a] longtime. — Were many spectators 10 there? There were a great many [there]. — Will you soon go into (cmf, ace.) the country? I intend setting out 11 in a week. 10) 3uf$aner. 11) afcjureifen. 16. Will you help me [to] work? I am sorry, I have no time. — Will you have the goodness to pass 1 that plate to me? With much pleasure. — When shall we go [to] bathe? This evening, if you like. — How is your grand-mother? She is not quite well, she has caught 2 a cold. — How does Mr. Gray look 3 ? He looks very well; he is in very good health. — Why did he send for the physician? His daughter is ill. — Of (an) what illness did (tft) your neighbour die? He died of apoplexy 4 . — Why does this little girl cry? What has happened [to] her? She cries because her mother died yesterday. — Why do you laugh at (itber ace.) this man? I do not laugh at him, I laugh at his dress 5 . — Do you know this professor? Yes, I know him very well. — Is this bread sufficient for you? It is quite sufficient for me; but not for the children. 1) retdjien. 2) to catch a cold = fidj erf (if ten or ben ntg §einrtfte detail. Summer is lovely and warm. £)er ©ommer tft (ieBltcfc unb toarm. April was wet and cold ber SfyrU tear nag unb fait. 7) Before the following and a few similar substantives : 2)er 9ftenfd) man, mankind. ba§ ©litcf fortune, happiness, bie ^ftenfefyen men. bag Unglitcf adversity, misfor- bte Seute people. bag ©djtcffal fate. [tune. bag gritljftiicf breakfast. bie 3^it time. bag S^tttageffen dinner. bag ©efefc law. ba« 2Ibenbefjen supper. bie 9fattur nature, ber Sfyee tea. ber §tmmel heaven, ber £)urft thirst. bag Se&en life, ber § un 9 er hunger. ber £ob death, bie ©tttc custom. ber $rteg war. Hence: after dinner nacfy bem SD^tttageffett. 8) In the following phrases: ®te metfien 9ftenfd)en most men. (Sr toofynt in ber ©tabt he lives in town. 2)ag $tnb tft in ber <5d)ute the child is at school. 3)er 3frtafce ger)t in bie ©cfyule the boy goes to school. 3n ber $trcfye at church. | 3n bie Hirdje to church. 9) In German the definite article replaces the English indefinite article when the price of wares is indicated: ®ret ©djtftinge bag ^3funb three shillings a pound. ©ecfyg ^fennige (18 !r.) bie (£tte sixpence a yard (an ell). 10) The definite article is also employed instead of the possessive adjective in sentences like the following: Use of the article. 271 $ctrl fyctt baS 23ein geBtodjen Charles has broken his leg. 3dj fyaBe mir (mid)) in ben ftinget gefdjnitten. I have cut my finger. ■3d) Ijatte metn ©cfyioert in bet §anb. I had my sword in my hand (see Less. 41, II). Repetition of the article. 11) The definite as well as the indefinite article must be repeated before each substantive in the singular, when several of them follow in succession; if they are in the plural, one article may serve for all. Ex. : £>aS 9fteffet nnb bte @aBef, bet Soffel unb bet Seller. The knife and fork, the spoon and plate. (£tn ©djufymadjet, ein ©djneibet unb ein §utmad)et fajjen in etnem 2Bttu)3fyaufe. A shoemaker, tailor and hatter sat in a tavern. SDte 33tttbet unb ©d)n)eftetn the brothers and sisters. £)te 2Btefen unb (bte) $etbet the meadows and fields. Position of the article. 12) The article always precedes not only the sub- stantives, but also the adjectives and adverbs before them. The exceptional position in English after both, half, double, quite, too, so, as and how, is not admitted in German. We say: Both the pupils bte Beiben <2d)iHet. Half an hour etne IjcttBe te £tagjjett ift etne Bofe (£tgenfd)afti. £>te etBt) ift oetteist 4 . S)te ^iitften finb 9D?enfdjen unb !onnen ntd)t tmmet t)elfen. 3n Stalten ift bet ©inter tttdjt !alt; bagegen ift bet ©ommet feljt fyeig. 2)aS 51Benbeffeu unb bet %\)tt finb Beteits. SDte (Stbe unb bet §tmmel finb ba§ SBetf ©otteS. 2>ie 9?atut ift ein offeneS 23ud). fommen <2>te nad) bem gtuJjfhH ju nut, obet toeun ©ie UeBet 6 toofleu, nad) bem SJctttagefjen. 2. 2Bteoiel foftet bie ftlafdje? 3)te gtafdje foftet etnen JjatBen ©ulbeu. 2Bteoiet foftet bie (Site con btefem £ud)e? 3d) 1) quality. 2) meekness or gentleness. 3) united. 4) from home. 5) ready. 6) like better. 272 Lesson 38. toerfaufe e3 ju (fur) fiinf ©ulbett t>te (Stte. 3)tefer $nabe fyat ben 2Irm gebrod)en; feine efter fyat ficfy au3 Unad)tf am! ett 7 in bte §anb gefdpttten. -3d) fyabe etnen <3tod, etnen Sftegen* fdn'rm unb ein Siafiermeffer 8 gefauft. £)er (Sdjntev fyat etne ^atbe ©ette 9 auStoenbtg (by heart) gelernt. 3cfy fyabe U)m bte bo^pelte ©umme bejafylt. 7) from carelessness. 8) razor. 9) page. JtitfgaOe. 104. 1. Time is precious. Fortune is changeable 1. Spring is a fine season 2 . Horses are useful animals. Iron and copper 3 are more useful than gold and silver. Adversity borrows 4 its (his) sharpest sting (©tadjet, m.) from our impatience. Ingratitude dries up (ttertrocfnet) the fountain 5 of all goodness. Concealed 6 hatred is more dangerous 7 than open enmity. Learning is an ornament (,3ierbe) to youth (Gen.) and a comfort pEroji, m.) to (of) old age 8 . 2. Employment is necessary 9 to man ; if agreeable, 2 it Us a pleasure; if useful, 2 it Us a happiness. Industry is the true 10 philosophers' stone (©tent ber SBetfen), which turns n all metals into gold. The sweetest salve ((Scttbe, f) for misery 12 is patience, and the only (etnjtge) medicine 13 for want (tie ;ftotfy) is contentment. Tea is ready. Nature is contented with little, but the cravings of luxury (fete SBebiirfntfJc be$ 8urn§) are boundless 14 . Those who wish to study history, ought to begin with ancient history. 1) toeranberttd). 2) 3aljre8$ett, /. 3) ba8 $u£fer. 4) borgen, cnt* tefynen. 5) bie Duette. 6) toerborgen {Part. p.). 7) gefafyrlicfy. 8) old age ba$ Sitter. 9) niJtfytg. 10) toafyr. 11) roelc^cr . . . toertoanbeft. 12) ba8 (Slenb. 13) Slrgnei, /. 14) grenjentoS. II. The article is omitted: 1) Before names of materials when taken in an in- definite sense, no particular kind, measure or quality being meant. This form is called in French y> sens par- titifnj the substantive not being taken in its whole extent. When we say: 3dj fyabe ©olb unb ©tlber I have (some) gold and silver; er fyat gletftfy unb SBrob he has (some) meat and bread, we do not mean all the gold and silver all the meat and bread, but some of it. This relation is often expressed in English by the word some (or any) preceding; in which case the substantive is used with- out the article in German, as: SBetn wine or some wine. papier (some) paper. Staffer some water. 3)tnte some ink. 23rob unb S3uttet (some) bread and butter. Omission of the article. 273 2) After the word all atfe (in the plural), and some- times after both fcetbe. Ex. : All the boys aHe SfrtaBen. Both the sisters &eibe ©dnseftevn. Note. When the article is expressed with luute, it must precede, and fcetbe takes tt r as: Both the sisters bte betbcn @($»efkrn. 3) The indefinite article is omitted in the expressions many a (manner, e, $) and no less a (fetn geringerer). Examples : Many a flower mandje SBmme. He was no less a man than the bishop. (Sr tear fein gevingever SSlam att ber SBifctyof. 4) In the plural all kinds of substantives may be used without the article, as in English, when understood in an indistinct and general sense. Ex. : $ebern jaJ. pens. | (Ster eggs. Scanner nnb gvauen (or SBetber) men and women. $naben nnb -ERabdjen boys and girls. ©cfyafe, $iU?e, £)d)fen sheep, cows, oxen. Note. Some before a noun in the plural is generally translated etnige, as: Some friends cintge greunbe; some papers etnige 3" s tungen k. 5) The article is sometimes omitted before the names of the cardinal points of the compass: Sftorben (fitter* nacfyt) the north; ©iiben (SDftttag) the south; Often (9D?orgen) the east ; SBeften (3l6enb) the west, when these words are preceded by the preposition gegen or rtacfy, as: Sftufjknb liegt gegen Often Russia lies towards the east. Without the preposition gegen, the article is used: SDie (Sonne gefyt im 2Beften nnter the sun sets in the west. 6) As in English, it is usually omitted in proverbs: Sh'ttmtfy tft feme ©d>anbe poverty is no disgrace. 3nfrtcbeiu)eit gel)t iibcr SKetdjtijnm. Contentment is better than wealth. 7) In such questions as : Is the river a deep one ? the article a as well as one is omitted. We simply say: 3ft bet $ln& tief? 8) In the inversion of the Saxon Genitive , when it precedes the substantive by which it is governed : OTTO. German Conv.-Grammai-. 18 274 Lesson 38. (gbuavb'S Gutter nnb OtaxVS Xante. Edward's mother and Charles' aunt. 3n metneS OjetmS (or £)nfel§) §an$ in my uncle's house. 3f)re3 ;iftad)bar$ ©avten your neighbour's garden. Note. This Saxon Genitive can only be used when the word in the Genitive expresses a person ; and it should not be made use of after a preposition that governs the genitive case , nor after another Genitive. Ex. : By means of my uncle's influence — cannot be translated: fcermittelfi mctncS Dfyetm* (SmftuffeS, but: fcermtttelfi be8 (SinfmffeS meineS OfyetmS. 9) After the Genitive of the relative pronoun in the singular and plural. Ex. : £)er $nabe, bef fen SBater Iran! Itegt. The boy whose father lies ill. S)ie 33(ume, beren ©djonljett fo fe^r benmnbert tmrb. The flower, the beauty of which is so much admired. 10) No article in the following expressions: 3u Sanb by land. in Olmmadjt fallen to faint, JU Staffer by water. swoon, ju ^ferb on horseback. ©cfyyecfen etnjagen to terrify, ju ^ug on foot. £fyeU nefymen (an) to take part. JU 2Baa,en in a carriage. 5ibfdn'eb nefymen to take leave, jn ©dnff on board ship. ©efafyr laufen to run a risk, fcor §nnger of (with) hunger. Wd;t fyaben or geben j to take cor 4>urft of thirst. ftdj in %&}t nefymen ! care, bet Xag by day. ©ebutb fyaben to have patience, bet 9fad)t by night. SJttttetb fyaben to have com- mit SBergniigen with pleasure. passion. anS 33erbrnJ3 from vexation. urn SSerjetfynno, bitten to beg one's au§ §af$ from hatred. pardon. Sftedjt fyaben to be right. ©lanben f^enfen or beimeffen to Unrest fjaben to be wrong. give credit. §una,er fyaben*) to be hungry. §ufe letften to render assistance. 2)nr|t fyaben*) to be thirsty. ©efeUfdjafttetften keep company, jn 2fttttag, effen (fpetfen) to dine, jn §tlfe fommen to come to one's jn Sfyetl roerben {dat.) to fall assistance or help. to one's lot. m 23ett gefyen to go to bed. jn Sflafyt (2lbenb) eften to sup. £ro$ bteten to bid defiance. (fetn) 2$ort fatten to keep $u ©runbe aefyen to perish. one's word. jn ©fanbe fommen to succeed. £nft fyaben to have a mind. $u©tanbe bringen to accomplish. Sftecfyenfdjaft geben or ablegen to (Srroafynnng ttynn to mention. render account, account for. um SKatfj fragen to ask foradvice. or fyungrtg fetn; burfitg fetn. Lesson 38. 275 Reading Exercise. 105. 1. 3$ Ijabe ^leifd) unb SBrob gegeffen. ©eljen ©ie auf ten Sttarft unb faufen ©ie Sutter unb (£ier. £eifyen ©ie mir einige ftebern; id) mug einige 23riefe fd)reiben. 5lmerifa liegt aegen 2Beften. (Snbe gut, 9ule« gut. ©etoalt 1 gefyt fcor 9ted)t. 3n meineS ©rcgcaterS ©arten ftefyt ein alter 92ugbaum, beffen ©tamm (trunk) gauj Ijoljl 2 ift. §ier ift ba§ 23ud), beffen $er* faffer ©ie fo fefyr beftuubern. SSotlen ©ie fcfyon 2lbfd)ieb nefmten? SKeifen ©ie ju $ferb ober $u 2Sagen? 3cfy reife ju gug. 2. ©ie miiffen ©ebulb baben. §aben biefe §erreu 2Betn ober 23ier getrunfen? ©ie fyaben fed)« $(afd)en SBein unb einige ©lafer SBier getrunfen. Dtetfen ©ie $u SBafjer ober ju £anb? 3d) reife ^u Sanb. 3« Staffer lauft man ©efafyr, ju ertriufen 3 . ©ie fyaben 9^ed)t. §aben ©ie fcfyen fcon S^ren fjreunben Wbfdneb genommen? 9?ccfy nidjt; aber id) tuerbe e§ morgen tfyun. QfrStt* lent (Stifabetfy ift in £)immad)t gef alien. -3ebermann Ijatte Wit* leib(en) mit ifyr. 1) power. ' 2) hollow. 3) to be drowned. <&ufgrt0e. 106. 1 . We had some cheese, bread and butter. Do you want anything? Yes, I want some sugar and coffee. America lies towards the west. Contentment goes before (iiber) wealth. Henry's cousin is very ill. The boy whose books werei found under the table, has been^ punished for his carelessness 2 . Charles has gone to bed. I have read all the letters which your brother wrote (has written) to (an) my sister. My uncle {has) travelled a great deal (Diet) by water and by land. Am I right to take a walk? Yes, you are quite right. 2. Is he wrong to spend 3 his money? He is wrong to spend too much money. At what o'clock do you dine? We dine at five. Dinner is ready. Are you hungry? I am hungry and thirsty. I do not like to go out by night. This gentle- man has German lessons 4 , but I believe 5 , only twice a (in ber) week. I beg your pardon, he has a lesson every other day 6. I must take leave of (con) you. What 7 a mistake 8 ! What beautiful peaches 9 ! How much do they cost a piece (costs the piece)? She is 2 so 3 kind !a 4 lady. Macbeth was not willing 10 to commit 11 so great a crime 12 . 1) Passive voice. 2) 9tod;taffigfett , Uuad^tfamfett. 3) auggeben. 4) ©tunben. 5) glauben. 6) see p. 231. 7) roa8 fiir cm. 8) gefyler, m. 9) qjfirftdj, m. 10) to be willing = Gotten. 11) begefyen. 12) SSer* bred)en, n. Reading - lesson. S)a8 boWefte SSerbredjen. The double crime. £)rei (Sintoolmer fcon SBalf reiSten mit einanber; fie fanben einen ©c^a^ 1 unb tfyetlten Ujn. ©ie fefcten bann i^ren 2Beg fort, 18* 276 Lesson 38. tnbem 2 fie fid) itber ben ©ebroud) (use) unterfyielten 2 , toefdjen fte toon ij)ren 9?eid)ti;iimern modjen tooHten. 2)ie SebenSmittel 3 , toelcfye fte mit fid) genommen fatten, tooren oufgejeljrt 4 , fie fomen itber* em 5 , bog (Siner toon tfnien in bie ©tobt gefyen foute, urn toeldje (some) jn faufen, unb tog ber Oungfte btefen 5luf trag 6 iiber* nefymen 7 fottte; er gtng fort. UnterrcegS fagte er ju ftd) fetbft: ..SKun bin td) retd); ober id) loitrbe toiel reidjer fern, roenn id) ollein getoefen toore, al8 ber <5d)ot> gefunben nmrbe . . . £)iefe jroet 2ftenfd)en fjoben mir meine $fteid)tf)itmer entriffen. $onnte id) fie nid)t nrieber befommen (get) T £)o3 loiirbe mir leid)t fein : id) biirfte (need) nnr bte 2eben§ntittet toergiften*, bie id) foufen foil; bei (upon) meiner dlMUfyx toitrbe id) fogen, bog id) in ber ©tabt (ju Sfttttag) aefpei^t t)abe; meine ©efofyrten 9 toitrben ofyne SDHgtrouen booon efjen, unb fie toitrben fterben. 3d) fyobe jefct nnr ben britten 2^ei( be3 $0i% fiir fid) oUein ^u befommen. SSo^ toottte er bei feiner 9xiicJ!er)v $)og er fd)on in ber ©tobt ge* ju feinen ©ejol)rten fogen? foei^t ^obe. Genitive of substantives. 277 SBeldjen (Srfoig (result) Ijoffte (Sr Ijeffte, feme ©efafyiten ftitrben er son biefen Shorten ? bann ofyne Stttfetrauen t>ie t?er- gtftcten ©yeifen effen. 2Ba$ fatten tote fcetben SInbevn ©te toottten tint ermorben, roemt rcafjrenb fetnev 2l~bteefeiu)ett er §nrndfame. fcerafcrebet (agreed) ? 3u toetcfyem 3n:ede (purpose) ? Urn fetnen Zt)eii beS ©d)a£eS fur fid? befyalten j$n fonnett. $iU)rten fie tfyren (Sntfdjlug an£ 3a, fie tebteten U)ren ^ameraben. (carry out)? 2BaS tfyaten fie bann? ©te agen toon ben (Spetfen. 2Ba§ rcar bte Sotge babon? ©ie ftarBen an bem ©tfte. 2Bcm gc^ovte bann ber (5d;at3? (£r gefyorte s Jttentanb. Thirty ninth Lesson. Remarks on the Genitive of substantives. 1) The pupil knows already, that one substantive gov- erned by another, is generally expressed by the genitive, as: £)er §unb (whose tneffen?) fees Partners, bte flatter be$ HpfetfcaumeS ; ba$ £)acfy be$ §ait[e8 :c. ; or expressed by the Saxon genitive, in which the article of the nominative is omitted, as: £)e8 ©arttterS §nnb, be3 $na6en g(et§, be8 giivjten SBunfcfy. SCadenftein briidte be3 tatferS Sanber nut be3 $aifer$ ©ccr. (€d)i(let.) 2) A great number of substantives connected with another noun by means of the preposition of, are ren- dered in German by compound substantives. Such are : $)te SBaljrljettSttefce*) the love of truth. bte £)td)tfmtft the art of poetry. ein tinmen fvanj a wreath of flowers. bctS enb§ or am 2(6 enb in the evening. $)retmat be3 3aljre3 three times a year. (SineS £age3 one day. SRetneS 2Bif[en3 to my knowledge. ©erabeS (geraben) SBecjeS straightway. £angfamen (S^rttteg with tardy step, at a slow pace. Note 1. Feminine nouns require a preposition, as: 3»ctmal in ber 2Bod)e twice a week. Note 2. However, when the time is distinctly expressed, the accusative is required, as: 2)iefcn 2ftorgen this morning. | Scben Sl&enb every evening. 2) en (or am) jdmten Suit on the tenth of July. - Sefctcn (naa)ften *.) ©omttag last (next &c.) Sunday. 3$ ertoarte metnen greunb jeben StugenHtcf. I expect my friend every moment, @tc fyat find ©tunben {Ace.) gefctytafen. She has slept (for) two hours. 4) But the English preposition of does not always denote a real genitive. When the names of countries, towns, villages and places, also of months are connected with their generic names, they stand in the nominative, being considered as apposition to them. Ex.: 2)te ©tabt Sonbon (not £onbon3) the city of London. 3)a3 fontgvetdfy (Snglanb the kingdom of England. S)tc Unbevfitat Jpetbelfcera, the university of Heidelberg. £)er SSKonat 9ttat the month of May. 2)ev acfyte Wax% (not con Wartf the eighth of March. 5) This is also the case after words importing measure, weight, number, quantity ; the preposition of is not to be translated : (Sin ®(ct3 SBaffev a glass of water. ©in ^pfnnb SBntter a pound of butter. 3n>et •Pfnnb gletfd) (not gletfdjeS) two pounds of meat. Sine gtctfdje SSein a bottle of wine. 3^n ©Ken Zud) ten yards of cloth. Humbert Salter Sat $ en a hundred bushels of wheat. Sin Regiment' ©o (bat en a regiment of soldiers. Sine Jpeerbe affenbfien. 2) cine SluSbe^nung Sen. 3) Ouabrat'meUcn. 4) 53ier. 5) See p. 140, 2. 6) The sign of the genitive, of, must be translated &S Sttetlen. At a distance of six miles. (St fkrb im filter Don fiebenjtg 3afyren. He died at the age of seventy years. c) Before the names of metals and other materials, if the adjective be not preferred: (Sin ©djtff Don (Stfen*) a ship of iron. (Sin Secfyer Don ©otb a cup (goblet) of gold. (Sine 23tlbfctule (or etn ©tanbbUb) Don 2ttarmor a statue of marble. *) Or: cm etfcrncS ©$tff, cin golbener $8e$er, eine marmonte ©UbfSutc. 280 Lesson 39. d] Before nouns in the partitive sense not expressing measure : 3)er SSerfcmf toon SBiicfyern the sale of books. £)te Wofyt toon ©tabten the vicinity of towns. (Sine <&ad}t toon gertngem SBeiu) a matter of little value. e) After the demonstrative, relative and indefinite pro- nouns, after the cardinal and ordinal numerals, and the superlative degree, of is mostly rendered by toon, though the Genitive may also be used.*) Ex. : 3)erjentge toon -S^ren ©dutlern, toeldjer :c. (that of your p.) SBelcfyer toon btefen 5ftannern? which of these men? (Stntge toon metnen tftennben*) some of my friends. £er sefynte toon bretjtg ©djitlent of 30 scholars the tenth. 3)ie fdjonfte after ^ranen or j the handsomest of all SDte fcfyonfte toon aEen $vanen j women (ladies). 7) The English genitive of the participle present, replacing a substantive, when governed by another, is expressed in German by the Infinitive with $u: £)te $nnft $n tan^en the art of dancing. £>a§ ©efyetmntg retd) $n loerben the secret of becoming rich. 8) Of preceded by a substantive formed from a verb requiring a preposition, is translated in different ways according to the meaning of that preposition ; no certain rule can be given for such case: 3)er ©ebanfe an ©ott the thought of God. 3)te %uxd)t toot bent £obe the fear of death. 2)te Stebe jum Seben the love of life. $n$ Sftanget an @elb from want of money. Reading Exercise. 108. SDte fontgtn toon (£ng(anb ift ftotj anf tfyre Marine (navy). Ttan bant je£t ganje ©ifyiffe toon (Stfen. -3ft biefer 9ftng toon ©olb ober toon ©Ufcer? & ift toon @olb. 2Beld)er toon btefen fnaben l)at ben erften $vet8 erfyatten? (S3 toar 3ultu$; er toar ber erfte toon fiinfetg ©djiilern. 3)te $unft jn ring en 1 ift fetyr alt; fie bUU)te 2 am meiften bet (with) ben alten ©ried)en. £>a$ SBerlangen (desire) nad) SRetdjtJjmn toeranlafjt (induces) btefen Slttann, fo grogarttge 3 ttnternefynmngen $n ntad)en. SHe Siebc 1) to wrestle. 2) flourished. 3) grand, great. *) This is a matter of euphony. We may say as well : (Stnigc meincr greunbe, bie meiften Sfyrer ©filter; but it would be less harsh to say bie meiften toon Sfyrcn 6d)iilern. SSetcfyer 3t;rer <8>d;iU cr would be intolerably harsh. Lesson 39. 281 jum 2cbeti ift alien Sttenf&en angefcoren 4 , bagegen fete gurdjt tor bem £obe ift ifynen anerjogen 5 . 4) innate. 5) imbibed by education. £ttfga6e. 108a. 1. Two of (ton) my brother's children have died. The queen of England has married 1 Prince Albert. We saw a large fire at (in) a distance of about (nngefafyr) seven miles. Grateful nations 2 erect 3 statues of bronze ((£r$) or stone [to] their great men. Emily was the handsomest of all the young ladies [present] at the ball. None 4 of my friends has written to me. On the tenth of July, 2 I * shall make a journey of fifty miles, to see (um . . . JU befudjen) a gentleman of high rank (9iang) , who is a Frenchman and the father of nine children. 2. Most of the pupils were not prepared 5 for the lesson. Which of the (man-) servants is 6 to go? Some of the finest houses of the town are burnt down 7 . My friend has discov- ered 8 a new way 9 of catching fish 10 . The habit 11 of taking snuff (ju fdntU^fen) is very common in Germany. The traveller urns obliged to return for (auS) want of money. When nothing but (al§) the fear of (the) punishment 12 2 prevents 13 ius, from •acting wrong (Unredjt JU ttmn), 2 we iare guilty 14 in the eye 15 of God. 1) ge&eiratyet. 2) bte Nation. 3) errtdjten. 4) Reiner sing. 5) fcor* fcercitct. 0) is to fcu\ 7) afcgefcrannt. 8) entbedt. 9) 2ftetf?obe, f. 10) gijd&e, pi. 11) bic ©ctoofyn&eit. — 12) ©trafe f. 13) unS toerfyin. bert. 14) faulbig. 15) in ben 2fagen ©otteS. Reading -lesson. ^tyfjonS ber gitnfte* HtyljonS V., $i3nig ton feagonien, genannt ber ©rog* miitfyige 1 , toar b« £elb (hero) feineS SatyrfutnbertS. (5r bad)te nur [bar an], 2Inbere gliidlitt) jn madjen (of making). 3)tefer gfttjl ging gern 2 otme ©efolge (suite) unb jn gu& burdj bie ©tragen feiner Jpanptftabt. %{% man tfnn einft 23orfteUungen 3 madjte iiber 4 bte ©efafyr, toeld)er [Dat.) er feine $erfon au^fe^te^ antroortete er: „©tn SBater, nsetcfyer mitten nnter feinen ftinbern nmfyer'geljt 6 , ^ a t 9ftd}t$ ju fitrdjten. Sttan fennt folgenben 3 U 9 7 , *°h feiner ^reigeoigfeit 8 : 2H8 einer ton feinen ©djafcmetfltern 9 itym eine 6umme ton tanfenb £>ufatcn brad)te, fagte ein Cffijier, toeldjer efcen jngegen 10 nmr, ganj leife 11 ^u Semanb: „2Benn idj nnr biefe ©umme fyatte, nmrbe id) gtitdtid) fein." — „3)u foEft e3 (so) fein!" fprad> ber $onig, toeldjer e3 gefyort Ijatte, nnb (leg ifyn biefe tanfenb £>nfaten mit fid) nefymen. 1) generous. 2) liked. 3) to remonstrate. 4) concerning the danger. 5) to expose. 6) walks about. 7) trait, instance. 8) muni- ficence. — 9) treasurer. lOj present. 11) low. 282 Lesson 40. $nd) ber folgenbe 3^3 5 eu 9 t12 bon femem eblen (Sljarafter: (Sine mit 2ftatrofen nnb <©o(Daten belabene ©aleere^ ging unter; er Befall, ujnen §ilfe m bringen; man jogerte* 4 . £>ann fyrang SttyfyonS felbft in ein 23oot, inbem 1 * er ju benen, roelcfye fid) tror ber ©efaljr fiircfyteten, fagte: „3d) rotft UeBcr tljr ©efafyrte^, aid ber 3"W alter17 t^vc« £obe$ fein." 12) proves, gives witness. 13) galley. 14) to hesitate. — 15) saying. 16) companion. 17) the spectator. Conversation. SSer roar SltyljonS V.? (Sr roar $imig toon 2trragonien. 2Bie rourbe er genannt? (Sr Ijteg ber ©rogmutfyige. 2ln roaS bad)te er nur? habere gliicflid) ju mad)en. 2Bte ginger gem burd)bie©tabt? Ojne ©efolge nnb ju fyujj. 2Beld)e S&orjteflung mad)te man 2)ag er feine $erfon einer ©efaljr tym bef^alb? au$fe£te. 2Ba§ antroortete er baranf? (Sin 33ater Ijat nnter feinen $tn* bern ;ftid)t3 $n fitrd)ten. 2Ba§ brad)te ein (3d)a£meifter? (Sine ©mnrne son tanfenb^Dnfaten. 2Ber roar gerabe (just) jugegen? (Sin Dffijier. 2Ba§ fagte biefer Dfpjter leife 3d) roitrbe gliicfltd) fein, roenn id) in f einer ©egenroart? biefeS @elb fyatte. 2Ba$ fagte baranf ber $6nig? 2Benn biefe ©ummc anfe, aBer id; fonnte tfyn ntd)t feljen. I was in his house, but I could not see him. 4) When the English could is conditional, meaning: would be able, then it is translated fonnte: dx fonnte, loenn er toollte. He could (he would be able) if he would (liked). 5) If ' ' could" depends on a preceding verb of affirma- tion fagte 8fc, i. e. in the "oblique narration", it is rendered by fbnne or fonnte (see lesson 43, III). Ex.: (£r fagte, er fonne (or fonnte) ntd)t fommen. He said he could not come. 6) In speaking of languages, fonnen signifies to know or to be able to speak: fonnen ©ie tfranjoftfd)? Do you know (or speak) French? •iftetn, id) fann ntd)t ftranjofifd); after id) fann Gxngttfd). No, I cannot speak French but English. Note. I cannot help or forbear means id) faun ntd)t umfyht. Ex.: I could not forbear laughing. 3d) fonnte nid}t umbin', $u ladjen. or: 3d) fonnte mid) beS £aa)en8 nid)t enttjatteu. II. On mogen, rootten, im 23egrtff fetn* 1) 9ft gen expresses that the speaker has no objection to another person's doing anything: (St mag ben ©tod Mjaften he may keep the stick. ©te mb'gen ben 53rtef fefen you may read the letter. Note. In this sense the Germans often use fonnen: 2)u fann ft ben @torf flatten, ©ie fonnen ben 93ttcf lefenic. 2) It denotes a possibility granted by the speaker: (Sr mag ein efyrltdjer Sttann fetn he may be an honest man. (£8 mag toafyr fetn it may be true. 284 Lesson 40. 3) It denotes an inclination of a person spoken of (similar to to like gern too Hen). Ex.: (5r mag feinen SSetn trinfen he does not like to drink wine. 9ftag fie ntd)t tanjen? does she not like to dance? 3d) Ijatte tfyn feljen mbgen I should have liked to see him. 4) When may expresses a wish, it is translated in singular mod) it (not mag) and in plur. m 5 g e n <3 1 e ! or molten ©ic! Ex.: 2Ki5gen (or mod/ten) ©te gUtdltd) f etti I may you be happy! 5) To be going or about to do something is translated in various ways, commonly by eben too I (en, tttt SDegrtff fetn, or auf bem s #unft fteljen (to be on the point of) . Ex. : (St tottX eben abretfen or er fteljt auf bem ^unfte, aBjitreifen. He is just going to set out. 3d) rootlte eben anttoorten. i (5r tear im 23egrtff ju fpredjen. I was about to reply. | He was going to speak. 6) 2BoIIeti denotes sometimes an assertion. Ex.: &axl to ill e3 gefyort Ijaben. Charles affirms that he has heard it. Reading Exercise. 109. $annft bu mtr fagen, nmrum bem SBrubcr morgen nidjt $u mtr fommen fann? 2)er $nabe fann ba§ 23ud) betjalten, id) Ixavidje e3 ntd)t meljr. SBenn unfere ©olbatett bte ©tabt be* fyaupten 1 fonnten, fo toare ber ©teg 2 ntd)t jtoeifelfyaft 3 . $onneu ©te tJDeutf d) ? 9Geui, id) farm e8 nod) ntcfyt; abev id) (erne e8. 3d) fyatte bort fetn mbojen. 211$ id) im 23egrtff tear, ba3 genftaf ju offnen, h?ar 2We§ ftiH. -3d) tooflte eben in ba£ S3ab geljen. 3d) bin im SBegriff, nadj (Sngtanb §u reifen. Wlaw ir>oIlte fidj eben ju £tfdj fe£en, atS ber ©cueral tn'S jammer tra t- 1) hold. 2) the victory. 3) dubious. £ttfga6e. 109a. Can you come to-morrow instead of to day? No Sir, I cannot. You may stay 1 where you are. Have you learnt your lesson? I could not learn it, I had no book. I would learn it, if I had a book. The man could not lift (auffyeben) the stone. Do you intend 2 to go to America? I was just about correcting your exercise, when your father came 3 to see me. I had [a] mind (Suft) to call 3 upon him (U)n JU be* fnd)en), but my mother did not wish it. 1) See p. 248, Note. — 2) to intend means gebeufen, fcor'fyaben, beabftcfyttgett and gefonnen fetn. — 3) to come or go to see and to call upon (on) a person both mean: 3entcmb befud;en. 285 m. tfaffcn. The verb {of fen is often used as auxiliary verb, when joined to another verb, and requires the following Infinitive without jit. 1) It signifies to let, to suffer, to permit. 3d) laffe ifyn*) fdjlafett I let him sleep. £affen €>ie mid) gefyert let me go. 3d) f)abe U)tt gefyen lafjen I have suffered him to go. 2) It signifies to leave: Safjen ©te baS bletben leave that alone. 3) It signifies to make, to get: G?r Uefc mid) erne gan^e ©tunbe teartett. He made me wait a whole hour. (Sr lieg tl)n fetnen 3 d ™ Wen- He made him feel his anger. 4) When in English the veibs to have or to get have an accusative after them, followed by a past participle, = 'to have (or get) a thing done', they are rendered by (affctl with the following verb in the Infinitive: 3d) ttrifl mem §0(3 fagen taffen. I will have my wood sawn (or sawed). 2Bo laffen ©ic 3fyre 23iid)er bint) en or ehunnben? Where do you get your books bound? Wlan liejs U)n fyereumtfen they had him called in. 3d) fyabe em $aar ©dmlje mad)en laffcn. I have got (had) a pair of shoes made. 5) It corresponds with the verb to cause, to order ; but in German the following Infinitive must always be in the active. Examples : 2Bit liefcen feinen greuriD fommen. We caused his friend to come. 2)er 9ttd)ter lief; ben 23iefc cerfyaften (or artetiren). The judge caused the thief to be arrested. 6) It signifies to bid (r)eigen) , to tell: Saffen ©ie bie $)ame fyevemtreten bid the lady walk in. (Sr ttej} (or r)teg) ben 23oten braujjen roarten. He told the messenger to wait without. 7) As an auxiliary to the Imperative mood, laffett is used only for the Jlrst person plural of that mood: *) The object of faff en is mostly in the ace. When there are two objects, the person is in the dative, the thing in the ace Ex. : Saffen @ie mir [dot.) baS *8ud). 286 Lesson 40. Saffen ©te unS erne £affe Slaffee trinfen. Let us take (drink) a cup of coffee. %a§t un8 ftngen nnb taujen let us' sing and dance. 8) With the reflective pronoun fid), it involves the idea of: it can he or may be: (SS Vafyt fid} md)t oegvetfen it cannot be understood. £)ariiber lagt ficfy SSiele^ fagen of that, much might be said. Reading Exercise. 110. 2Bw ttegen bie ttnbev fcU adjt Ul)r fdjlafen. 3cfy toerbe c» ton bent ©djreineri macfyen (affen. 2Ber fyat btefeS §an3 bauen lajfen? SDietn 9?ad)6ar fyat e3 fiir fetnen ©ol;n banen (affen. Sag ben fntfdjer 2 anfpannen 3 . £)er 9ftd)ter Keg bte ©efangenen cor ftd) fomnten. $tan §evr, ©te fyaben un« lange toavten lafjen. Saffen ©te mix ben ©djnetber rnfen 4 . 2Ber fid> betriigen^ iagt, oerbtent betrogen jn toerben. 2)er Sefyrer fyat feme ©filter etne engltfdje Ueberfe^nng mad)en laffen. Saffen ©te mtS eaten ©pa* jtergang madjen. $)er 35ater Iteg baS $tnb tanfen 6 nnb tfym ben Sftamen Sftarte geben. Saffet bte $tnber r)eretnfonmten. 3)a3 lagt fu$ (§ 8) ntcfyt Ijoffen. 3)a lagt ftcfy ntd)t$ u)un. 1) the joiner. 2) coachman. 3) to put to. 4) to send for. 5) to deceive (here to be deceived}. 6) to be christened. jUtfga6e. 111. Let me do it. I let him work six hours every day. Let me go. Let us take a walk. Let the old man sit [down]. Her father allowed her to marry. The governor 1 caused the murderer to be arrested (§ 5). The admiral caused the crew 2 to disembark (anSfcfytffen) . You must have a new house built (§ 4) . The mother made her child pray 3 every morning and evening. Where do you have [get) your books bound? I get them bound by Mr. Long. Bid the gentleman come in. Who shall (foil) pluck 4 the cherries? I will have them plucked by John. Have you had the general invited? Yes, I have sent him an invitations. This cannot be proved 6 (§ 8). That pDa) cannot be helped. 1) 2)er ©tattyafter. 2) bte SWonnf^aft. 3) fceten. 4) tflikfen. 5) etne (Sintabung. 6) betoetfen. IV. On fotten (muffen). The employment of this verb differs also in many respects from the English: 1) It signifies a moral necessity, equivalent to the Eng- lish shall in the 2nd & 3rd person, or to I am to id) f o I ( : £)n fotlft titdjt fteljlen thou shalt not steal. Auxiliaty: foKcn. 287 3)u f o U ft betnen 9?cid)ften liefcen, hrie bid) fetbft. Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thyself. 2Ber foil e§ tljun, er ober id)? who is to do it, he or I? Wdn eutfd) lernen. My son ts to learn French and German. 3d) follte urn oier Uljr afcretfen; afcer e§ tear ntd)t mogttd). I was to leave at four o'clock, but it was not possible. 2) In the Imperfect and Pluperfect it denotes a duty = / ought to: Q?r fotfte fehte ©djnlben beaten. He ought to pay his debts. (5r fyattt feme ©d)ntben fceja^Ien fallen* He ought to have paid his debts (see p. 90, §. 5). ©te fatten 31jre Seftion lernen follen. You ought to have learnt your lesson. -3d) Ijtttte geljen follen I should (ought to) have gone. 3) The Imperfect follte is used after h>enn, to express a chance, or an event which is not quite certain: SBenn er lommen follte, fo fagen ©te il)m btefeS. If he should (were to) come, tell him this. 2Benn eS reanen follte (or ©otttc eS regnen), fo toerben ton* ju ipaufe bleiben. Should it rain, we shall stay at home. 2Betm tdj tljn fe()en follte, fo h>erbe id) tljm bte SBaljrIjeit fagen. If I should see him, I shall tell him the truth. 4) ©oil, pi. follen, means sometimes is or are said*), supposed or reported, but only in the Present tense. The other verb may be in the Past. Ex. : $)a§ jEeftament foil falfd) fetn the will is said to be false. Sr foil in 2lmertfct geftorben fetn. He is said to have died in America. 5) © 1 1 e n is sometimes used elliptic-ally, an Infinitive being understood: §ter iji Ant, »a* foil er (i. e. tl)im) ? Here is Charles, what is he to do? 2Ba§ follen btefe 2Borte (i. e. Ijetgen or bebenten) ? What is the meaning of these words? 2Ba3 follen btefe flagen (i. e. ^elfen, nii^en)? Of what use are these complaints? *) in Latin dicitur, traditur etc. 288 Lesson 40. Beading Exercise. 112. 2Btr f often ©ott fiircfyten unb tteben. 1)u foftft tud)t« 23ofe3 Don beinem SRadjflten reben. <5te follten ©ott banfen, bag ©ie an3 biefer ©efafyr gerettet 1 roorben finb. 2Btr f often burd} Slnbercr ^efyler lernen, nnfere etgenen ^u oerbefiern. &)u fyatt eft btefem SJcamte nidjt trauen 2 f often, (laligula Befall, bag bte Corner iljm gottUdje (5b,re ertoeifen 8 foftten. 5bte Stteiifdjen follten fid) nicfyt iiber bte SBorfefyung 1 beflagen, toentt fie fcurtfy ifyre etgenen ^efyler tetben. 2)er Prattle fyatte 5 nod) (more) otel 5lvjnei nefymen mitffen, ttenn er rttdjt geftorben toare. ®er ©raf foil anf ber 3agb fetn. (5r foil fic^'in bte ©unfH be3 atten $ontg3 etngefcfytidjen 7 fyaben. Sftorgen foil (§ 4) ber tetig in bte einrtdj barf btefeS 23ucfy ntcr/t bejjalten. Henry is not allowed to keep this book. $)ie $inber biirfen btefen Sftadjmtttag fyajteren gefyen. The children are allowed to take a walk this afternooA. a3 man benft. People dare not say all they think. 3) It answers to the English need (= fcrcmcfyetl) : ©te biirfen ntd)t bariiber flagen (or braud;en ntc^t . . $u fiagen). You need not complain of it. 28tr burften*) fiir %lid)t$ forgen; 5Wc§ roar berett. We had no need to care for anything: all was ready. 4) The conditional biirf te can be used to denote what the speaker thinks probable or possible: £)tefe *yrage biirf te (tootyl) iiberftiifftg fern. This question may (or might) (possibly) be superfluous. Reading Exercise. 114. franfe ^erfonen biirfen btefe ©peifei ntcr/t effen. 3d) barf fetnen SBein trin!en. ©te biirfen btefen S3rtef lefen, roenn ©te tootlen (like) . 3>cr ©efangene burfte fein 2Betb unb feme $tnber ntd)t mefyr fetjen, bebor er auf ba$ ©cbtff gebradjt rourbe. £>arf id) ©te morgen befudjen ? 3)iefe SWcib^en roerben Ijeute nidjt auf ben 23afl gefyen biirfen, ruenn U;re aflutter nid)t beffer totrb. 9ftan barf trmt 2 nur tn'S ©eftdjt fefyeu, fo eilennt man ben 2)teb. £)arf man in ben fonigitdjen ©arten tytneingefyen ? Sebermann barf fytnetngefyen. £>arf man fragen, an roa3 ©te benfen? (£r biirfte biefeS rcefyt ntcfyt roagen (dare). $)er #ranfe fyat feme Signet nernnen rooUen, aber er fyat gemufst. ©te biirfen nidjt tn btefeS 3tmmer gefyen. 9ttemanb barf fytuetngefyeu. 1) food, dish. 2) See p. 291, 2. Jutfga6<. 115. Charles may play. We dare not invite him. May I see, what you are writing? The pupils have not been allowed to go out. May I ask, why not? He dares not look* in my face 2 . How could he undertake 3 this, without 4 mentioning it to his father? We shall probably 5 not be allowed to buy these books. You need not pay the waiter^. The children are not allowed to play in this room. He might (biirf te) have been mistaken (fid) getrrt b/aben). Have you been allowed to read the letter of your aunt? Yes, I have been allowed to read it. 1) fcl>en. 2) ©eftc&t, n. 3) untemetymen. 4) otyne c3 . . . $u fageu. 5) fcai;rfd)'emit($. 6) tfcttncr. *) It would be hetter to say: SBtr fcrau^ten fiir SfactyW ju forgen or n>ir gotten fiir 9?tdjt3 ju forgen. OTTO. German ConY.-Graromar. 19 290 Lesson 41. Reading-lesson. $te fed)S SSortfetm ©cd)« 2BortIein nefymcn mid) in Slnfyvnd) 1 jeben £ao/. 3d) foil, id) mnfc, id) fann, id) told, id) barf /id) mag. 3d) foil ift baS ©efefc, oon ©ott in'* ©crj gefdjrtefcen, 3)a$ 3^ e ^ 2 ^ na * 3 toclc^em id) bin fcMt mtr felbft getriefcen. 3d) mug, ba8 ift tic (Sdjranf 4 , in 5 toefafcer mtd) bie 2Belt SBon einer — , bie 9tatur oon anb'ter — <3eite pit. 3d) fann, ba$ ift baS 9)?a§ bet nut fcetlielj'nen « Shaft, $)er £l)at, bet ftertigfeit", ber tunft unb 2Biffenfd)aft. 3d) toil I, bie l)od)fte fatia 1 ift biefeS, bic mid) fdjmitdts, £)a$ ift ber gretfceit ©tegel, bent ©etfte aufgebrudt». 3d) barf, bag ift jualcid) bie 3nfd)vift 10 bet" bent (Siecjel, 23ei'm 12 aufa,etl)anen £l)or ber ftrctfyett aud) ein Sftiegel 13 . 3d) mag, bas enblid) ift, to>a3 jnnfdjeu alien fdjuntmut. Sin nnbcftimmteS 14 , bad ber 2lna,enblid ceftunmt. 3d) foil, id) mug, id) fann, id) unit, id) barf, id) mag, jDie ©ed)fc itel)tuen mid) in 3lufyrud) jeben £ag. 9'inr tocnw $)uis feXbft mid) lefyrft, toeig id), toa» jeben £ag 3d) foil, id) mug, id) fann, id) hull, idj barf, idj mag. 1) claim me. 2) the goal, aim. 3) towards. 4) the bounds, limits, constraint. 5) within. 6) granted. 7) dexterity. 8) adorns. 9) impressed, stamped. 10) inscription. 11) round or upon. — 12) on the open door. 13) bolt. 14) something vague, undefined. 15) thou, o God. Forty first Lesson. Remarks on the use of the Pronouns. (See the 23rd, 24th and 25th lessons.) I. On the Personal pronouns. 1) After a personal pronoun of the 1st or 2nd person, singular as well as plural, the same pronoun is repeated after the relative ber, bie, bag (see p. 144, Note). Ex. : ■3d), ber id) Urn fenne I who know him. 2)u, ber bit U)n nid)t fennft you who do not know him. 9Bir, bie nnr utna, ftnb we who are young. 2) The genitive case of the personal pronouns occurs mostly after verbs governing the genitive, and in con- nection with numerals : (§r fpottcte m einer he mocked me. 3d) erinnere mid) f einer I remember him. Unferer jeljn ten of us. | iljrev jtoanjio, twenty of them. Possessive pronouns. 291 Note. This genitive is likewise joined with the prepositions tijcgcn, fyalfcen and tciflen, in which case the r is changed into t, as : meinetrcegen on my account ; 3>l;rcnt)egen on your account ; Ex. : 3cfc tljateg urn feinett»iHeu (tyremnflen). I did it for his (her) sake, &c. 3) The dative and accusative plural of the reflective pronoun (ft c^) may take a mutual signification, meaning one another. Ex. : $)ie jftei ©cfytoeflew gleidjen fid) (or eincmber). The two sisters resemble one another. 3)tefe Seute Befd^tnt^fen fid) (or eincmber). These people abuse one another. II. On the Possessive pronouns. 1) The possessive adjectives mem, bem, fern, tC. are not so often used in German as in English; they are com- monly replaced by the article, when there is no doubt of the person meant by the speaker, especially when parts of the body are spoken of. Ex. : I have broken my leg. 3d) fyabe ba$ (not mem) 23em gefcvodjen. The king held the scepter in his hand. 3)er Iftmig r)ie(t ba$ ©center in t>er §ant>. She put her handkerchief before her eyes. ©te Ijtelt U)v £afd)entud) cor tie (or ifyre) 2htgen. 2) When not only possession is implied, but when a strong reference to the subject is expressed, the possessive adjective is replaced by the personal or reflective pro?ioun and by the definite article before the substantive. Ex. : 3d) fyahe mid) in ben finger gefdjnitten. {Lit. I have cut myself into the finger.) i have cut my finger. ®er $nabe mug fidj bie §anbe luafdjcn. The boy must wash his hands. a§ 2ftabd)en fiel auf bte $ntee nnb betete. (Siner metner fcetteru ift geftern geftorben. £)iefer ©tod tft mein. 3d) ftanb an bent ^enfter nnb fyattt ein 23nd) in ber §anb. 31jr finger clutet 2 ; fyaben t or Mfce. 4) tfrone, f. 5) ©center or Stpttx, n. 6) ©coulter, f. .7) ©^neebaU, m. *) mein is used here as an adjective. **) at us may be translated either with the Genitive unfrer or better with the preposition fiber with the Accusative. +) See II, 2, first Ex. 293 III. On the Relative pronouns. 1) The relative pronoun ttefdjerorber must take the first place in the accessory sentence, and can only be preceded by prepositions; therefore, when in English a noun precedes the genitive of the relative pronoun, the former takes its place in German after the pronoun, losing at the same time the article: I have some rings the price of which*) I do not know. 3dj fyaht etnige §tu\$t, beren ^3 ret 3 id) ittdU fenne. We went to a house, from the windows of which [from whose windows) we saw it. 2Btr cjingen in em §au3, auS beff en genftern nrir eS fal)en. A machine by means of which one can fly. Sine 2ftafd)tne, toermtttetft beren man fliegen fann. 2) The genitive of the relative pronoun preceded by all is translated in the nominative : He had five children all of ivhom died in their infancy. (Sr Ijatte fitnf $tnber, fete alte in tfyrer finbfyeit ftarfcen. 3) This is also the case when all precedes a personal pronoun : All of us nur We. all of you ©tc afle. I all of them fie ctfle. 4) The correlatives such as, when equivalent to those who are rendered in German by btejemgen (or bic) tt)e(d)e : Such as are poor bie, tt>eld)e arm finb. Note. The form fo, in the place of h>eld?e [plur.) is obsolete, as: 3Son Men fo (= bic) ba famen among all that came. 5) When such is followed by a noun, it is considered as an adjective and translated fold); but then the fol- lowing as to must be rendered by the conjunction b a 6 : I placed myself in such a posture as to have a view over all. 3cfy t>erfe^te mid) in etne foldje ©tcttung, bag id) Wt iifcer? fefjen fonnte. Reading Exercise. 118. £)er (Snglanber, beffen eld)e id) befteflt (ordered) fyaoe, toevbe id) genng Befyalten. JtwfgaGe. 118a. That is the goal 1 for (nad)) which he strives 2 . A bird whose wings have been clipped 3 , cannot fly. It is an illness against (gegen) [the] progress 4 of which [against whose pro- gress) one cannot apply 5 remedies 6 too quickly. Charity 7 , the practice 8 of which is our duty, makes us good and happy. We call that heavenly 9 body 9 , by the brightness 10 of which our eyes are dazzled 11 , the sun. Such as are good and in- dustrious, may go home with me. I found myself in such a position 12 as to observe all that went on (fcorgtng) around me. 1) ba« 3tcl. 2) flrcben. 3) fcefdjnttten or gttfufct. 4) gortjdmtt, m. 5) onnjcnbcn. 6) £eilmittel, n. 7) btc ©armtyerjigfeit. 8) 2to8ubimg, f. 9) £immel8lor£er, m. 10) ©fans, m. 11) fcerblenbct. 12) ©teltung, f. IT. On the Indefinite pronouns. 1) The German all, when in the singular of the masc. and neuter gender, and followed by a possessive adjective, is not declined: 21U metn ®elb all my money. 3d) But all metneS ©elbeS {Gen.) fceraufct tuorben. I have been robbed of all my money. Sftit all meinem @efD {da, ) with all my money. But in the feminine gender and in the plural, it agrees with its noun: (£r Ijat alle fetrte ©uppe toerfd)iittet. He has spilt all his soup. 5111c biefe 23aume all these trees. | {Gen. aUcr biefer S3.) 2) The English all in the singular, when it denotes the whole of a thing or period must be translated ganj: All the world bie gan$e 233elt. All the year ba$ ganje 3atn\ All day ben ganjen £ag. | All night bie gan^e Wafyt. 3) In this signification, when placed before names of countries and towns, ganj [all] remains unchanged in all the cases : All England would rise gang Gxnglanb ujuvbe aujftefyen. In all France in gan& ^ranfretdj. All Paris ganj ^aviS. Indefinite pronouns. 295 4) 51 He $ means commonly everything ; but it is some- times applied to persons in an entirely general sense: 5ule# fjreut ftd) everybody rejoices. 2We8 fliefyct everybody flees. 5) 51 lleS to a 8 is in English a// that or only a//; 2£Ue8, to a 8 id) gefefyen l;abe all I have seen. 6) 3ebet {every), when denoting time, may be also rendered by the plural a lie: Every day jeben £ag or alte £age. Every year jebe3 3enig Beit I have little time. §ctben ©ie to tele ^vennbe? have you many friends? 5d) fyctbe nur taeniae greunbe I have but few friends. SBenige (or toenige £eute) roiffen ba$ few people know that. 8) (gin ttoenig {a little) is indeclinable as in English: ©eben ©ie mir ein toenig ©alj give me a little salt. 9) #)eibe (both) is sometimes used without a substan- tive, as : 33eibe finb tobt both are dead. — It never admits of a genitive after it. Ex. : 2Bir 33etbe both of us. fie 93eibe (or bie 23eiben) both of them. 5Ditt nn« SBcitcn with both of us. 3n bicfen beiben $>anfent in both of these houses. Note. The English both — and is a co-ordinative conjunction and is rendered by joroofyl — al« (see p. 237, 1). Ex.: Both silver and gold forcofyl (gilber aU ©otb. 10) Either (einer toon beiben) and neither (feiner toon b ei ben). It must be observed, that in German „beibe" is mostly dropped, and that either of must be translated „ einer toon", when two people are spoken of. Ex. : Either of them einer (or fem. eine) toon U)nen. Neither of my sons f einer toon metnen (2) ©cfynen. On neither side cmf f einer ©cite. 11) The indefinite pronoun either*) preceded by not is always f einer toon beiben; not any is fein; not anybody ■iftieinanb; not anything 9ft$t$. Ex.: *) The negative adverb not (nor) — either is translated ait<$ n i 6) t. Ik. : I have not seen him either tc$ fyabe tyn a u d) n t c$ t gefefyen. 296 Lesson 41. I do not know either of them id) fenne fetnen oon 93eiben. We have not had any tint fyctben fetnen (or e, 9) gefyabt. Have you not heard of anybody*) fyaben ©te oon 92temanb I did not buy anything id) Ijabe 9?td)t3 gefauft. [gefyort? 12) O t h e r is commonly translated ber anberc; an- other tin atlberer. But when it signifies a second or a third thing of the same kind, it is translated Jiod^ Ctrl: Take another glass of wine. SMnnett ©te nod) etn ®(a« 2Betn. Will you have another cup of tea? SMen ©te nod) cine £ajte £fjee? 13) Something similar takes place with more; before a noun, not followed by than, it is translated nod): Have you any more horses? Ijaben ©te no dj $ferbe? He has too more children er l)at nod) Jtoei £iltber Take some more cherries nefymen ©tc nod) etntge $trfd)en. Give me a little (or some) more sugar, ©eben ©te mir nod) ctn toentg jjucfev. 14) When used negatively, more (or also loriger) is rendered by m C Ij r , but the German m C § x follows the noun : He has no more money cr fyat fetn ©elb metjr. We have no more horses totr Ijaben feme ^ferbe mdjr. The boy has no longer a father. $)er $nabe Ijat fehten $ater meljr. Reading Exercise. 119. ^efymen ©te bctS ganje ©titd? 9cem f tdj braudje nur roentge ©Hen. ©anj $ari« toar erleucbteti. SDiefe ^flanjen finbct man in gan& £)eutfd)tanb. 2Btr mugten ben ganjen £ag arbetten. 3d) fann Sijnen ntdjt MeS erjaljlen 2 , teas id) ertebt (experienced) Ijabe. 2Btr ftnb attc retd)ltd) befdjenfts toorben. 2Btr aHe toaren bungrtg unb burfttg. Sine %xa\i l^atte etue §enne, toeldje alle £age em St tegte. §err 9KtC(cr tft mit mt« 93etben nad) ^artS geretSt. (Siner oon dud) mug fterben, faate ber dauber ju un§. 2BoHext ©tc nod) emeu Styfel fyaben? $eht, id) banfe, tc^ effe fetnen meljr. 28te otete ©d)iUer Ijaben ©te nodj? 3d) fyabc nod) yefyn. §err 8. Ijat fetnen 23ebtenten meljr. 1) illuminated. 2) relate. 3) rewarded. er SBeife antroortete tbm, ofyne ftd) jn eutviiften 6 : „&a§tt idj e3 £>tr ntdjt, bag bu mir eS jeifdjlagen rourbeft!" (g^iftet roar tntrner oergimgt, felbft (even) in ber ©ffaoerei, „3d* bin", jagtc er, „an ber ©telle, too bie 93orfeljunrad)men (2700 granfen) oerfauft. 1) master. 2) endure. 3) blow. 4) leg. 5) the bone. 6) to grow angry. 7) Providence. 8) principal doctrines. 9) to for- bear, to abgtain. 10) resource. 11) to practise, to carry out. — 12) to accuse. 13) ambition. 14) insatiable desLes. 1*5) reason. 16) earthen. 17) night-watch. 18) enlighten. Conversation. 2Ber roar (Sptftet? (gtn^ilofo^' unb em©ftaoebe8 (SpaofyvobituS. 298 Lesson 42. 28ar fetn §err gittig gcgen U)n ? 2H3 biefer ifym einft fyeftig cmf ba3 23ein f d)(ug, fe>a3 fagte er ? 28a3 t^at aber (Spci ©nmblefyren? 3ft e3 t>ic 2lrmntfy, bie un$ unglitcflid) mad)t? SBann ftarb (Spinet? 2Bie teener nmrbe feme irbene Sampe fcertauft? •ttein, er tocu fyartljerjig nnb gremfam. (Sr nxtrnte Urn, bag er iljm ba3 53ein nid)t ^erbredjen foflte. <5r berbeppeUe feme ©tretd)e nnb $erfd)lug ifym nnrftid) ba323ein. 9?ein, er annrortete ganj rufyig, bag er e8 U)m boranSgef agt fyabe. •Deem, er untertoarf (submitted) fid) rutytg feinem ©djirffal. (Sr fagte : „3d) bin an bcr ©telle, toofyin bie SSorfefyung mid) ge* fefct fyat." „993iffc ju bntben imb bid) ju entljalten. ■i)Hd)t bie 2famtu), fonbern unfere 23egierben. Unter Partus SmrctiuS, in einem fefyr fyofyen filter, ftitr 3000 £)rad)tnen. Fortj r second Lesson. Use of the Tenses of the Indicative Mood. The use of the German tenses differs very little from that of the English. It presents therefore few difficulties. I. Present Tense. 1) For the Present tense we have only one form, viz. : 3d) tefe I read, I do read, I am reading. 3d) fd)reibe I (do) write, I am writing. 3d) effe nid)t I do not eat, &c. The English form / am reading, writing , eating, fyc. must always be translated in the same manner : icfy ( e f e , id) fd)reibe :c. Sometimes when the continuance of the action is desired to be stated, the adverb eben, or ge* rate, or je^t (just, now) is added. Ex.: 3d) frirt)fht(fe eben I am breakfasting. (Sr fd)Icift (jefct) he is sleeping. 2) The same is to be observed through all the tenses * Imp. 3d) fritf)ftutfte (gerabe ob. eben) I was breakfasting. Per/. 3$ tyctbe ben garden £ag gelefen. I have been reading all day. Use of the tenses. 299 3) The Present tense is sometimes employed for the Future, if near at hand, and the time indicated by an- other adverbial expression: 3d) reife trie) en 2T6enb ab I shall depart this evening. 3n bvet £ctgen fomme id) t»iet?er %uxud. In three days I shall be back. 4) The Present tense is used in German in connection with the word f cfy o n or feit, for the English Perfect or Compound tense, when the latter expresses that the action or state still continues, especially in the question how long and the answer to it. 2Bie lemge ftnb <5te fdjoit Ijter? How long have you been here? Wit lange (em en ©ie fd)on $)eutfd)? How long have you been learning German? 3d) lerne e§ feit adjt Sftcnaten. I Aavc £«en learning it these eight months. §aben ©ie btefen SBefeicwten fdjon (ancje? (not gefyafct.) Ifatrc you ^ae? thk servant long? 3d) fyabe U)nfd)on &ftei 3af)ie (or feit jtoet Sateen). I have j&ad him Mese two years. II. Imperfect Tense. This is the narrative tense, and its use does not differ at all from the English. Ex.: 3efuS fymd) jn feinen 3iingern ic. Jesus spoke to his disciples &c. It is always used after the conjunction al& [when, as). Ex.: 5113 id) tfyn f emmen fat> when I saw him come (coming) . 2Btv gtngen fpajieren, toafyrenb nnfere grennbe Garten fpielten. We took a walk, whilst our friends were playing at cards. III. Perfect Tense. 1) The Perfect tense, or Compound of the Present tense is used to express an action or event perfectly ended, without any reference to another event happening at the same time. It often corresponds with the English Imperfect : 3cty fyobe Styren 23rief rtdjttg emyfangen. I have duly received your letter. $)er Slrfceiter tft retd)ltd) belofynt ttorben. The workman has been (was) amply rewarded. 300 Lesson 42. 28ie lange ftttfc ©te in SDeutfdSlanb getoefen?*) How long were you in Germany? 2) It is further employed for the English Imperfect in those eases where the time of the action is recent, and sometimes in accessory sentences: 3d) bin geftern auf bem SaHe geioefen (or idj tear . . .)„ I was at the ball yesterday. 3cb Ijabe ©te lange nic^t mclJT gefeljen. It is long since I saw you. 3) In most short questions and answers : £aben ©te fd)on ($u Stttttag) gefpetSt (dined)? §d) Ijabe urn 4 Ufyr gefyeUt (I dined &c). 2Bamt fint> ©te angefontmen? (when did you arrive?) 3d) bin urn 10 tUjr ange!ommen (I arrived at 10). IV. The Pluperfect Tense is employed as in English: 2(13 (tftodjbeut) id) bte 3eitung 8 e ^f e tt Ijatte, ging id) au$. When (or after) I had read the newspaper, I went out. (£r Ijatte rcafjrenb be8 ©emitters gefdjlafen. He had slept during the thunderstorm. Note. In subordinate sentences, the auxiliary Ijatte or tt)at is sometimes left out, particularly in poetry. Ex. : Unb als cr faum ba8 SBort gcfpvori)en (i. e. Ijatte). Scarcely had he spoken the word. Unb el)' iljm nedj ba« SBort cntfatten (i. e. mar). (gdjitur.) And before the word had escaped (his lips). Heading Exercise. 120. 1. 3)ie ©tabt 9?om liegt anf fieben §iige(n. Wad) bem 2Btnter fontmt bev grilling. 3)er Shtabe fdmeibet (makes) feinc gebern felbft. 2)te Sltmut!^ 1 rooljnt oft neben bem Ueberftuffe 2 . Sftorgen 2lbenb reife id) nadj ©tragburg; rooflen ©ie mid) be- jjleiten? SDiogene3 roefynte in eincm gaffed Sti) fenne (I, 4) ttjn feit feiner ^inbljeit. $)urd) tuen rourbe $bel getb'btet? 2>ie Snben tootjnten juerft im Sanbe ®6fen; fyentadj jogen 4 fie in baS 2anb$anaan. $orbm2£od)enljatber3ager einen£trfd)5 gefd)offen. 1) Poverty. 2) abundance. 3) tub. 4) went, moved. 5) stag. *) Or ttmren ©fe. Your stay in Germany is perfectly ended; you are no more in Germany, when the question is asked, just as in French: Avez-vous ete or etiez-vousf — Sic fonge ftirt ©te bo gctoefeu answers to the English: How long were you there? (see III, 2). Lesson 42. 301 2. Sir toerben ba8 Sftefyl ton etnem anbern SBatfer Taufen. $aben <5>te 3I;re Arbeit geenbtgt? 2Bir fyaben fie nod) nicfyt ge* enbtgt. 9ttan fyat atte £)ffi$tcre beftraft, n>eld;e bie ^aljnen fcer* laffeu Ijaben. £)te Sorter fatten burd) ifyren ©tolje ben $onig ©c[ofti*t8 gegen fid) aufgebradjt 7 , bcr in (Sg^pten Ijerrfdjte unb fo aide 9?eid)c8 erobert Ijatte. 3d) ^atte metne ©efdjafte* fdjon fceenbigt, ate id) Ofyren 23rief elicit. TO er mtr bie @efd)td)te tqahU Ijatte, fc^Uef er etn. (S3 fyat biefeS Safyr ntdjt mefe Xrauben gcgeben. ©obalb id) mein ©elb erljalten Ijabe, toerbe id) biefe <£tabt fcerlafjen. 6) pride. 7) irritated. 8) kingdoms. 9) business. £nffla0e. 121. 1. What are you doing? I am reading a very amusing! book ; you must read it also ; to-morrow I shall send it [to] you. Napoleon the First died in the year 1821. My friend has published 2 a new English grammar. The servant has killed his master 3. Were you ever in France? No Sir, I intend 4 to go there next year. After I have read the book, you siiall have it. We waited [a] long time for you (auf ©te). I have been writing letters all day. When shall I have the pleasure of seeing you? I have always received 5 him kindly. These two men will have done their work when you return. 2. To-day Ave shall have our dinner at six. He has lived (lives, I, 4) long in Switzerland. I lived long in Switzer- land. Is it long since you breakfasted? It is an hour and a half. I perceived (III, 2) it the other day 6. I have perceived it for (since) several days. I wore"! that coat two years. I have worn this coat nearly two years. How long did you wear these boots? They are worn out (abgetragen) . How long have you lived in this house? I have lived in it these (fett) three years. Have you known these people long? I have known them [for] many years. 1) unterljaltcnb. 2) berau«gegeben. 3) #eir. 4) beabftt^tige. — b) empfangen. 6) neuud). 7) tragen. Reading-lesson. @imge 3M9* 1 ait* bem fieben $eittrtd)$ 4>c5 SStertcn. SDte beviifymte ©diladjt toon Sort) oUetn Jonnte ben -iftamen §etnrid)3 be8 SBierten unfterblidj macfyen. TO Jpeerfiifyrer 2 unb a(3 ©olbat jeigte er eben fo met ©efd)tcfttd)fett3 al$ £apferfeit. §3or bem 93egtnn be8 £reffen3 4 burd)fd)ritt er bie Sfteiljens mit etner Ijeitern 9ftiene, toeldje ben ©teg corfyer cerfiinbete, unb fagte $u feinen £ru»pen: „$tnber, toenn bie ©tanbar'ten end) fe^len^, fo fcerfammeft eudj um meinen toeifcen ^eberbufd) 7 ; ifyr voerbet tljn immer auf bem 2Beg ber (to) (Sljre unb be8 $uljme8 finben ; ®ott 1) trait. 2) as a commander, general. 3) skill. 4) battle. 5) ranks. 6) fail. 7) plume. 302 Lesson 42. ift fiir un«." — Wad) etniger £tit glaubte man, er loare im ©d)tad)tgetihnmel 8 umgefommen. 2113 er loieber $um $orfd)eiu (J fam, mit bem 23(ute ber getnfce bebedt, (o nmrben feine ©olbateu £etben. £)te SSeibmibeten 10 nmrben in ©tiirfe gefyauen. £)er Sttar* fdjatt toon ©iron fommanbtrte bag SRefer&eforpS unb fyatte, ofyne eben in ber §ifce beS ©efed)te3 ju feiu, einen grogen SlntljeU 1 * am ©iege. (5r rounfdjte 12 bent $ontgmit biefen Sorten ©Uicfi 2 : „©ire, ©ie Ijaben fyeute getfyan, toaS Siron tljun foUte, unb 93ircn, toaS ber $onig tfyun follte." 3)tc 2ftilbe be£ ©ieger* crJB^tcis ben Sftufym be$ SriumpfyS. tf 9?ettet bie graujofen", fdjrte er, inbem er bie g(itd)t(inge 14 oer* folgte. Wc biefe 3 u S e ntaten 15 ben grogen Sftann, toetd)er bie $uuft befag, bie §erjen ju gennnnen. 2ftan mug befonberS bie ©euugtfyuung 16 betounbew, toetdje er bem Jperrn »on ©Romberg gab. SDtefer ©eneral ber beutfdjen £>itf3truppen oerlangte etnige Sage »or ber ©d)lad)t bie Sofynung " feiner Sruppen. 3)a« ®elb mangelte 1 *; eine SBetoegung beS Un* toillenS 19 reigt ben $onig I)in: „9&e", anttoortete er, ,§at ein 9ftann oon muti) am Sage tor etner <5&)iad)t ®elb oerlangt." 5Sott SKeue 20 iiber biefe frdnf'enbe 21 £ebf)afttgfeit ergriff er, urn fie nrieber gut 511 madjen 22 , ben 5lugenb(id, loo 23 man fampfen soottte 24 . „$>err 0. ©djomberg," fagte er, „td) fyabe ©ie oor etuigen Sagen beleibigt. £>iefer Sag ift otefteid)t ber tefcte meineS SebenS : id) nritl nid)t bie (Sfyre eineS (SbetmanneS mit mir nefymen; id) fenne 3fyr SSerbienft 25 unb 3I;ren Sttutlj; id) bitte ©ie urn 93er* jet^ung; umarmen ©ie mid)." ©Romberg anttoortete il)m : „Q?3 ift toafjr, bag 3l)re iJttajeftat mid) (e^tfyin 26 oertounbete; Ijeute tobten ©ie mid) ; bemt bie dfyre, bie ©ie mir antfyun 27 , jttnngt mid), bei biefer ©elegenljeit fiir ©ie ju fterben." £)er brabe jDeutfdje jetdjnete fid) auq toirfli-d) 2 « burd) feine Sapferfeit 29 auS, unb tourbe an ber ©eite be3 $omg$ getobtet. 8) din of battle. 9) to re-appear. 10) the leaguers. 11) share. 12) to congratulate. 13) to enhance. 14) fugitives. 15) to paint, describe. 16) satisfaction. 17) pay. 18) failed, was wanting. — 19) anger. 20) repentance. 21) offending rashness. 22) to repair, make up for. 23) when. 24) they were going to fight. 25) merit. 26) the other day. 27) show, do. 28) indeed, really. 29) bravery. Conversation. SBeldje ©djladjt t)at ben SGameu £)ie ©djtadjt bet 3brtj. £>einrid)'$ IV. unfterbftd) ge* mad)t? 2£a§ jeigte er babei? (Sben fo oiet ©efd)id(id)feit alQ 9ttutf) unb Sapferfeit. SBelc^e 2Borte fprad) er oor ber 2Benn fie ifyre ga^nen oerlieren, ©d^(aa^t ju feinen ©olbaten? foflten fte fid) urn feinen toeigen geberbuftt^ f^aaren (collect). Subjunctive after conjunctions. 303 2Ba3 fur etn ftiiljrer (guide) nmrbe btefer it)iten fetn? 2Ber fommanbirte ba§ Referee* Wit toeldjen Shorten toihtfdjte btefer bem ^b'ntg ©liicE ju fehtem (Siege? 2Bte toar er a($ ©teger? 2Bte jetgte er btefeS? 2Bte benafym (behaved) er ftd) gegen ben ®eneraf t>. <2d)om* berg? £>atte er U)n befetbtgt? S3et toeldjem Slnlajj (occasion) ? 2Bann fndjte er fetn Unrest nneber gnt ju madjen? 2£a$ fagte er $u tfmt? 2Bar toon ©Romberg baburcfy befrtebtgt? 2Ba3 fur em (Sdjidfal (fate) fyatte er bann? 2Bar ©Romberg etn granjofe? $>er gitljrer jn SKnljm unb Sljrc. 3>er 9ftarfd>aU 23tron. „(3tre," fyrad) er, „©te Ijaben fyente getfyan, tr>a§ S3 iron fyatte tlmn foUen." (£r toar fc^r milbe. (£r rief ten ©otbaten ju, bag fte bte ^ranjofen retten fotlten. (Sr gab it)m erne glanjenbe ©e= nngtlutnng. 3a, ber $ontg Ijatte Unn etnen nnoerbtenten 33ornmrf gemacfyt. 91(3 ber ©enerat etntge Sage toor ber ©djtadjt bie Soljmmg fitr feme Jrappen cerlangte. -3m 2(ugenb(icf tor bent 23egmn ber eutfd)er. Forty third Lesson. On the Subjunctive Mood. The subjunctive mood is employed when the speaker wishes to express uncertainty or doubt of the reality of an action or a statement. It is used in German : 1) after some of the conjunctions; 2) after certain verbs; 3) in the oblique narration. I. Subjunctive after conjunctions. § 1 . Only a few of the conjunctions require the verb in the subjunctive ; viz. : 304 Lesson 43. a) b a m i t' [that, in order that) and bamit'...ntcfyt {lest) : ©agen ©te e3 iljm, bamit er e8 totffe. Tell him, that he may know it. 93erftecfen fie fid), bam it man <3te nidjt Ijier {tube. Hide yourself, lest they find you here. b) to c n n (if) , and o&, */* or whether, but ora/y when used with an Imperfect or Pluperfect: 2Benn er meljr ©elb Ijatte if he had more money. SBenn er md)t franf toiire if he were not ill. SBenn id} U)n gefefyen fyatte, fo toiirbe id) e$ iljm gefagt fyaben. If I had seen him, I should have told him. 3d) fragte iljn, ob er jufrieben toare. I asked him if he was contented. c) at$ toenn, tote toenn or aU oB (as tf) : (5r fiefyt an8, a!3 toenn (or tote toenn) er franf to are. He looks as if he were sick. (53 Ijat ben Slnfdjein, alS ob eg fait toerben toiirbe. It seems as though it would become cold. § 2. If the conjunction toenn is understood, the verb remains in the Subjunctive, but is placed at the beginning of the sentence, as in English. Ex. : §atte id) ©etb, fo toiirbe id) etn $ferb fanfen. Had I money, I should buy a horse. 23 are id) nid)t franf, fo toiirbe id) mit 3lmen geljen. Were I not ill, I should go with you. SSiigte er, bag id) fyter bin, . . If he knew, that I were here &c. Slufftdjen toiirbe (SngtanbS ganje 3ngenb, (Safye ber 23vttte fetne $ontgtn. (s^nitr'* 2Hr. Stiller ^ier ift, fo toiirbe id) iljn befndjt (called upon) Ijaben. • Subjunctive after verbs. 305 Jtufga6c. 122a, I take medicine that I [may] recover 1 . He speaks aloud [in order) that every -one may hear him. Send him away lest he [should] be found here. I should be happy if I had as many books as you [have]. If he were rich, he would buy a carriage and horses. The hypocrite 2 speaks as if he were religious 3 . I should go to Paris myself if I had time. He spoke as if he were commanding it. Many a man would live happier, if he were contented. Your pupils would have made more progress (govtfdjritte gemacfyt fyaben), if you had adopted 4 another method 5. 1) gettefen. 2] ber $eu$fer. 3) fromm. 4) att'nefymen. 5) 2Kettyobe, f. II. Subjunctive after certain verbs. § 3. After verbs of advising, legging, commanding, wishing, permitting, hoping, fearing Sfc, the verb in the dependent sentence beginning with b a g , stands or ought to stand in the Subjunctive. Ex. : SBttten ©ie Sfyrett $ater, bag er Sfytten ©eft) gebe. Beg your father to give you some money. 3d) erlanbe (or ratty e) ntd)t, bag er nad) ^art§ gelje. 3d) ertaube ttym ntdjt, nad) ^aris ju geljen. I do not permit (allow, advise) that he should go to P. SBiinfdjen ©te, bag id) nad) bem ^rjte fd)icfe? Do you wish me to send for the physician? § 4. After befefylen (to command or to order) and fa gen (to tell) the auxiliary foil (if the verb is in the present tense), or fo litt (after the Impf.) often replaces the Subjunctive. 3d) befaljt, bag bte to relate or tell, &c, when used in the Imperfect. In such quoted assertions or quotations, the verb in the dependent clause is in the Imperfect or Present Subjunctive, whilst in English the Imperfect Indicative is used. Ex. : (Sr fagte mtr, bag feme ^flutter Jranf fcore (or fci) (— ba§ fie ftopfwelj Ijatte or IjaBe). He told me, (that) his mother was ill — had a headache. 3eift, baft er fommt. 3dj rouftte, baft er SSort fatten roirb. 3$ tear iikrjeugt (convinced), baft er e8 getfyan Ijatte. § 9. As in English, the conjunction b a ft (that) can be omitted ; but then the order of the words is the same as in English ; the verb does n o t go last : 3d) glanote, er to are (or f ci) aBgeret$t (for baft er — toare). I thought he had set out (or left). £3er ^aufmann fceljanptete, bag ©etb f et (or to are) falfdj. The merchant stated that the money was false. § 10. As has been shewn in the above examples, the Present and Imperfect of the Subjunctive are indiffer- ently used. We may say, it is a matter of euphony. With regular verbs however, where the Imperfect tense of the Indicative does not differ from the Imperfect of the Subjunctive, the Present tense is preferred for the third person sing., the Imperfect for the other persons. Ex. : (§r fagte, baft er mid) fudje (or fud)te). He said that he was looking for me. 3d) fragte ben faufmann, totectel ba$ ^pfunb fofte. I asked the merchant how much a pound cost. •3d) gtaubte, ©tc toe Hi en (not tooEen) mid) betrugert. I thought you would cheat me. (§x fragte mid), toarum idj ntdjt nadj bem 9lr$te fdjtdte (not fdjttfe). He asked me why I did not send for the physician. § 11. The Subjunctive is sometimes used to express a command or wish, and replaces in some cases the third person of the Imperative: Imperative Mood. 309 3eber tlj>ne feme ^ftten erlangt 4 I) a be. £>er ©eneral bdjanptete, bag ber gricbc gefd)Ioffen 5 fet (or ber ^rtebe to are gefcfyloffen) . 2. Sttan Ijat mtd) oft oerfidjert 6 , bag bte ©litcf f ettgtetten 7 btefer SBelt nnr oon htrjer 2>aner finb. gtirft, man totrb 3)tr fagen, bn fet eft aflmad)ttg; man totrb 2)tr fagen, £)nfeteftoon SDetnem 35ol!e angebetet^. §altet tmmer, toa§ tfyr oerfyrocfyen fyabt ; aber oerfprecfyet -fttd)t$ nnbebadjtfam^. ©otbaten! lagt nnS toor* toartS marfd)tren; lagt nn§ fiegen ober fterben. 2Btr toollen etn toenta fpaueren gel)en. (Sr ift ber §errio, er tfyue 11 , toaS tfym gefcuft. ©ott farad): „(£« toerbe Sidjt, mtb e3 toarb Sidjt." D batten bod) 2ltte toie bn nnb id)! SSare er bodj (O that) anfridjtig 12 ! D bag bie $ontgin nod) lebte! 1) injustice. 2) learnt. 3) fame. 4) obtained. 5) made. — 6) assured. 7) enjoyments. 8) to adore. 9) inconsiderately. — 10) the Lord. 11) he may do. 12) sincere. Jtttfgaflc. 127, 1. My brother told me that he had lost his purse. He pretended 1 to be right (that he was right). What did your friend tell you? He told me that you should (§ 4) come to see him 2 some day (etnmal). The advocate declared that he could not do it. I thought that he was mistaken. She told me that the tree was in blossom 3 . They (3Ran) said we could not rely 4 upon him. People said that the king would come to-morrow to (in) this town. Did you believe that I had advised him {dat.) to do so (baS) ? I knew (§ 8, Note 2) that he was ill. We thought he was a clever physician. We all hoped that our father might recover 5 , but in vain 6 . -2. Were but (bod)) all men as honest as they ought to be! I did not pretend 1 that your brother was {had beeti) at the play 7 yesterday. He said that his brother had (a) great in- fluences with (bet) the duke. Were you not afraid 9, that he might steal your money? The duke ordered that they should (§ 4) help the poor man. May God preserve 10 us from (cor) war! Form 11 your mind and (your) heart, while you are 1) beljcutyten. 2) to come to see = befu^en. 3) TOttye. — 4) rely un8 . . toertaffen auf (Ace). 5) genefen. 6) umfonft. 7) tm Sweater. 8) (Sinfmfj, m. 9) to be afraid = fiirfyen. 10) betoken. 11) bitten. Lesson 43. 311 young. Mary told her maids, that she would have leftl 2 them this dress rather (Iteber) than the plain garb 13 which she wore {Per/. Subj.) 14 the day before, but that it was ne- cessary for her to appear at the ensuing solemnity (Bet bet betoorfteljenben f^eterltd/fett) in a decent habit is. 12) fcinterfoffen. 13) bag einfad&e ©etoanb. 14) getragen fyatte. — 15) anftanbtge tfteibung. Reading - lesson. $ie gc^ritfte %xtut. Fidelity tried. 2)er tfaltfe Sftutetoeful Ijatte emeu auSlanbifdjen i Sltjt, 9ta* mens £>ona'tn, n>eld)en er ftegen feiner gvogen ©elefyvfamfett 2 feljr eljrte. (Sinige §ofleute marten ifym biefen SWann toerbadjtig 3 unb fagten, er fonnte fid) auf feme £reue ntdjt roo^l toerlaffen (rely), toett er em 2mSlanber 4 fet. 2)er $atife nmrbe uurufytg 5 unb toottte ifjn priifen 6 , in toie fern btefer 2lrgn>ol)n 7 begriinbet loare. (Sr lte§ ilp ju fid) fomnten unb fagte: „§onain, id) fyabe unter metnen ©mint 8 etnen gefal)rftd)en $emb, gegen toeldjen tdj h)egen feineS ftarfen SlnfyangeS 9 feme ©etoaftio aebraud)en fann. ©a^>er befefyle i$ 2)tr, bag 3)u etn feineS ©ift beretteft, ba8 an bent £obten feme ©tourii toon fid) mritcftaffen nrirb. 3d) ttoiU tljn morgen jn etnent ©aftmafyl (banquet, dinner) emtaben, unb mid) feiner anf (in) btefe SBetfe entlebigen 12 ." §onam anttoortete mutf)ig : „9fletne SEBtffenf djaft erftretft 1 3 ftd) nnr anf Slrmeten, bte ba8 Seben evfyalten H , anbere fann id) ntd)t bereiten. -3d) §aht mtd) and) nte bemitfyt, e3 ju krnen, toeil id) gtaubte, bag ber 33el)errfd)er ber toaljren ©laubtgen « feme fotdjen ^enntniffe toon nttr forbern (require) toiirbe. 2Benn id) pterin Unred)t getfyan fyate, fo erlaube nttr, ©etnen §of m toerlaffen." Sttutetoeml ernnberte, ba$ f ei nureineleereSntfdnttbtgungi 6 ; toer bte Ijetlfamen 9Jctttel fenne, ber fenne aud) bte fd)abttd)en. (Sr hat, er brofyte, er toerftorad) ©efdjenfe. Untfonft; §onatn blteb bet feiner Smttoort. (Snblid) ftettte ftd)i 7 ber Saltfe erjitrnt, rief bie 2Bad)e nnb befall, biefen nnberfyanfttgeni 8 Sttann tn'S ®e* fangnig ju fiirjren. 5)a« gefdjal); aud) rourbe etn $unbf d)after 1 9 unter bent (Sd)eme 20 eineS '©efangenen jn tljm gefefct, ber tfyn au3* forfcfyen nnb bent taltfen toon Wlem, n?a§ §onam fagen toiirbe, $ftad)rid)t geben 2 i fotlte. 5lber§onam toerriet^22 m itfement2Borte feinent SD^itgef angenen 23 , toarunt ber $ altfe auf i^n jiirne 24 . 5lHe§, toa^ er fagte, toar, bag er unfd)ulbig 25 toare. {To be continued). 1) foreign. 2) skill, learning. 3) made him suspicious. — 4) foreigner. 5) uneasy. 6) try. 7) suspicion. 8) governors. — 9) party. 10) use no force. 11) trace. 12) get rid of him. 13) to extend. 14) preserve. 15) commander of the faithful. 16) ex- cuse. 17) to feign. 18) obstinate. 19) a spy. 20) appearance. 21) to inform. 22) to reveal, betray. 23) fellow-prisoner. 24) to be angry. 25) innocent. 312 Lesson 44. Conversation. 2Ba8 fitr etnen 2lrjt Ijatte ber (£r fyatte etnen fremben Slrjt Ma* $altfe Sttutetoeful an feinem mens §onain. §ofe? 2Ber macfyte tt)n fcerbadjttg? (Stntge netbtfcfye (envious) §of* lente. 2tuS roeldjem ©runbe? 2Betl er cm 2in§lanber tear. 2BaS befdjlog begfyalb ber $alife (Sr befd^tog, tlm $n priifen (or tim $u tlum? auf bie ^robe ju ftetten) . 2Ba3 ©erlangte er con §onain? (£r fotte etn fetneS ®tft beretten, urn etnen (Srntr $u fcergtften. SBann foUte bie ^ergiftnna, 2lm nadjften £aa,e bet etnem ®aft* ftattftnben? mafyle. SGBaS anttcortete §onain ? 2)ag er btefeS ntcfyt toerftelje, unb bag e$ etn fd^ledjter ©ebraucfy fetner 2Btffenfd>aft fetn nmrbe. 23ar ber $altfe mit btefer %nU ^ein, er beftanb (insisted) anf toort jnfrieben? feinem S3ef e^te ; erbat, erbrofyte nnb oerfprad) U}m @efd)enfe. ®ah §onain anient na<$? (Did 9tan, er btteb ftanbfyaft (firmly) H. yield?) bet fetner totoort. 2Ba3 t^at ^nlefct Sttutetoefut? (gr tteg U)n tn'S ©efangnig fe^ert. 2Bar §onatn alletn im ©efang,* SKe'tn, etn $nnbf d)after nmrbe &n nig? u?m gefefct. 2Ba3 foUte btefer t$un? (Sr foOte bem flattfen eon Mem 9?adjrtd)t geben, t»a3 §onatn fagen toiirbe. $laa,te ber Str^t iiber bie Un* 9tan, er fagte nnr, bag er un* a,eredjtta,teit beg taltfen? fdmlbig fet. Forty fourth Lesson. ON THE INFINITIVE. I. The Infinitive used as a substantive. § 1 . The Infinitive is sometimes used substantively, either with the neuter article b a £ , or sometimes without it, whereas in English the participle present is met with : ®a« SKeiten tft etne angendpe S3etuegnng. Riding is an agreeable exercise. 2) a 8 Sefen ermiibet bie Slngen reading fatigues the eyes. ®eben ift feltger al3 n el) men. It is more blessed to give, than to receive. Note. Concerning the Participle present with of before it, see p. 313, § 5 and p. 319, § 5. On the Infinitive. 313 II. The Infinitive without $u. § 2. The Infinitive without JU is used after the aux- iliaries of mood {often, motten, fbnnen, mogen, mitffen, biirfen : 2Btr fonnen ©eutfdj fpredjen we can speak German. § 3. Further with the following verbs : fdjett, fyoxttl, fi$(en, tyetgen (to bid), macfyeti, laffen, lerncn,(e^ren and Ijelfen. Ex.: •3d) \al) bte $rran fcorbetgetjen I saw the woman passing by. £)ie Wott) Ier)rt beten need teaches to pray. 9Mn ©ofyn lernt (Sngttfd) tefen. My son learns to read English. Man tyteg ben ^naben 1)tnau3gel;en. They bade the boy go out. 3d? fyorte metnen $reunb in etner ©efettfdjaft ftngen. I heard my friend sing at a party. (Sr Ueg ben Wlann Ijereinntfen he had the man called in. Note. The above verbs, with the exception of fitr)(en, lefyren sometimes also ternen and fyoren, have the peculiarity that in the compound tenses they are used in the Infinitive instead of the Par- ticiple past, when they have another Infinitive before them. Ex. : Jpafcen @ie bag 93ud) liegett fefjen (instead of gefefyen)? 2ftcm fyat mid? rufen 1 af [en. 3d) fyabe fie ftngen ^iJren (or geljiiJrt). 2)er 9ftann fyat mix arbeiten \) el fen. 2Btr l)aben granjofifdj tyredjen kitten (or gelernt). 2Bo fyabett @te U)n fennen gelernt? Where have you made his acquaintance. § 4. The Infinitive without ju is further used in some particular expressions with the following verbs : 23letben: ttegen bleiben, fifcen bteiben, ftefyen bleiben. (eg en: f deafen legen. lepren: fdpiben lefyren, lefen lefjren, jetdjnen (to draw) leljren :c. geijen, reiten unb fasten: fpajteren geljen, fyajteren rettert, fpajteren fasten (to take a ride, a drive) ; fcfytafen geljett, betteln gefyen (to go begging) ; baben ge^en (bathing) . NJB. These verbs always retain the Participle past in the compound tenses. Ex. : 3$ fyabe ba8 $mb fdjon fctylafen gelegt. SJiefer Secret fyat mid) fd)relben gelefyrt. 2ftem §eft tft auf bem Stifdje ttegen geblteben. SStr fmb fpajteren gefafyren, — geritten — , gegangen. III. The Infinitive with ju. § 5. The Infinitive with ju is used, when it depends on a foregoing substantive: 314 Lesson 44. §aBen ©ie Suft (a mind), in'3 Sweater ju geljen? (tr fyatte nid)t ben SRntfy, iiBer ben $(ng ju fcfytmmmen. SSann toerbe id) ba§ 33 er gnu gen fyaBen, ©ienrieber jnfefyen? § 6. After Adjectives which are susceptible of a government {regime) : SDtefeS ©ebid)t ift leid)t ju I em en. £)iefer 23rief ift fd;n>er ju lefen. 3(fy Bin Begierig (anxious), jn erfaljren, toer e$ getfyan Ijat. § 7. After a// o^Aer verbs except those mentioned in § 2 — 4, $u is used, whereas in English the dependent verb is sometimes in the Participle present: (Sr fing an JU lacfyen he began laughing. 3d) fiwfytete, ju fpat $n fommen (to be too late). SBann toerben ©ie anffyoren ju fcfyreiBen? When will you cease writing? 3)er ©fla&e BemiU)te fid), bie ©unft feineS §errn jn erlangen. The slave endeavoured to obtain the favour of his master. £)er ^apitan iiBerrebete ben gremben, mit u?m $n gefyen. The captain persuaded the stranger to go with him. § 8. When the auxiliaries fyaBen and fein are fol- lowed by an Infinitive, it takes j u : $$ tyaBe $id)t8 ju tfmn. £aBen <5>ie mir (SnuaS ju fagen? 2Ba§ ift ba ju tfynn, — $u gtanBen, — jn anttuovten? (S8 ift jn Bebanern, bag biefer Sttann geftorBen ift. It is to be regretted that this man has died. Note. The Infinitive after the verb to be, is in English commonly taken in the passive voice: in German it must be in the active voice. Ex. : It was »ot to be avoided e8 tear ntd?t gu toermeiben. His death is to be feared fein £ob ift $u fiirdjten. That book is not to be had jeneS 33udj ift nid)t gu fyabett. A change is much to be wished for. (Sine SBeronbcrung ift fctyr gu tt>iinf<|en. Reading Exercise. 128. S)a8 ©cfynnpfen 1 ift eine fdjledjte ©etooljn^ett. 3** fc tet (too much) f deafen ift eBen fo nngefnnb, al8 jn met effen. 3cfy fyaBe ba§ 23ncfy nodj nicfyt lefen fonnen. §aBen Uttel f unfer Sefcen &u fcerlangeru, tft, jeben 2mgenMtcf s beg £age3 gut anjutoenbetx 6 . 3dj Jjaoe feine @offnung meljr, memen bertorenen ©oljn nrieber m finben. 2) a sword. 3) safe. 4) to destroy. 5) moment. 6) employ. jutfgaOe. 139. Eating and drinking make one ((Stnett) sleepy. To speak too much is dangerous. The laughing of these people is very unpleasant 1 . I bade him do it. I saw him take it. They could not make me laugh. Learn to do good (®ute$). Have you seen the young girl dance? No, but I have heard her sing. When our friends help us to work, we ought to be grateful 2 to them. Let us take a walk. Shall we have the pleasure of seeing you to-morrow? I have no mind to make the bargain (ben £>cmt>el einmge^en), for (au8) fear of losing it. The slaves had no desire (Shift,/ 1 .) to run off (fort), knowing (as, (bft) they knew) what 3 the consequence 4 would be. I am eager 5 to learn music. He was near (nctlje bctrcm) dying. The pupil was tired 6 of reading German (to read G.). What have you to do? I have a letter to write. A pardon 7 is not to be hoped [for]. 1) mtemgenefym. 2) bcmf&ar. 3) toe(cfye8, see p. 141, Obs. 2. — 4) bte ftotge. 5) etfrig. 6) miibe. 7) SBegnabtgung, f. The Infinitive with ju after prepositions. § 9. The Infinitive with JU is further required after the prepositions anftatt [instead] and oljne (without) : Slnftatt 3 it lacfyen, toemte er. (£r gmg cms, oijne mid) $u frageit (without asking me). Sftcmcfye Seute roerben gefyajjt (hated) ofyue e3 jit oevbtenen. IY. The Infinitive with urn — $u. § 10. It is required after substantives and verbs, when a design or purpose is expressed, answering to the English for , or in order to (the French pour) . Ex.: §ctBen ©te ©elb erfyaften, urn em ^Pferb xu faufen? •Scfe Braucfye papier, urn emen 33rief ju foremen. 3$ treife, um bte Sett $u fefyeu. §11. After adjectives preceded by g u (too) ; or fol- lowed by genug: ©te tft j it juxtg, um bkfe Slrbett jit bemefyten (to do). §err 2L tft md)t retd? genug, um btefeS Scmbgut (estate) ju faufeu. 316 Lesson 44. V. The English Accusative and Infinitive. § 12. The Infinitive used in English with an Ac- cusative after the verbs to know, to desire, to wish, to mean 8fc. must be changed in German into a subordinate clause with bag, in which the Accusative governed by such a verb appears as the Nominative. For instance the following sentence : We know him to be a bad general, is translated in German, as if it were : We know that he is a bad general tint ttttffen, bag er Cttl fcfylecfyter ®e» neral tft (Indie. Pres.) . Ex. : I knew the captain to be a good rider. 3d) tougte, bag ber §auptmawt em guter better tear. I wish her to do the work. 3d) toimfdje, bag fie bte 5W>ett u)ue (or tljim modfyte). We desired our friends to come in. 2Btr toiinfdjten, bag uttfere ifreunbe Ijeremfommen molten. TI. The elliptical Infinitive. § 13. The Infinitive after the words how, what, where, must be completed in German with a subject and an auxiliary: fotlen, mitffen or fomten. Ex.: I do not know where to go. 3d) toetg md)t, toofyin td) gefjeu foil. Show him how to do it. 3eigett ©ie ti)m, t»te er e§ madjeu foil. Reading Exercise. 130. 3lnftatt ju arbetteu, gtua er fpajteren. (5$ Ijat aufgeljort $u reguen. 3d) freue mid), $u ^orert , bag 3fyr ©olm fotd)e (Sfyren* Bejeuguugeu * empfangen §at. $)er 23ofe Ijat ;fttu)t« ju fyoffen. 3d) r)atte 9ttd)t§ nut btefem fd)Ied)ten Sttenfd^en $u fd)affen (do). SDtefer franfe tyat mete ©djmer&en ju erbulben 2 . $)er §auptmann tear ju mitbe, um ©te fo f^at ju befud)en. ©er $ftd)ter ^at ben ©efangenen tn'8 ©efangntg fufyven laffen. £)u btjt ntct>t tmlrbtg* genug, um btefe SBetolmung ju empfangen. 9ttetn -iftadjfcar Ijatte bte 2tt>ftd)t, 4 fete §au$ ju cerfaufen, um feme ften. 6) mid) nad) . . . ju fefynen (refl. v.). 7) bo« SSater* tanb. 8) auSjurufyen. 9) Slnjrrengungen. 10) ju feebauera, Inf. act. — 11) to be ashamed = ft# fdjamen. 12) geflefyen. 13) ber @trom. — 14) rctfeenb. 15) toertefcen. 16) bte ^flid&ten. 17) G^rift (2nd. decl.) Reading -lesson. $te ge^riifte %xtVLt. (©djlufj.) yia&i etntgen 9ftonaten Itcg (had) bet ftaltfe tljn totebet toot fid} tufen. %\x\ etnem £tfd} lag etn §aufen ©olb, 3)iamanten unb foftltcfye ©toffe: abet baneben ftanb ber ©enfer 1 mit einer ©etget 2 in ber 3 §anb nnb einem ©tfytoerte unlet bent 3 2ltme. „2)u r)aft nun &t\t genua geljabt," ftng 9ftutetoefu( an, „um 2)tdj ju bebenfen 4 nnb bag Untedjt (fault) £)ehtet SBtbetftoanjttgfett 5 etnjufefyen. 9?un roal)(e: enttoebet ntmm btefe $ftetd)tfyiimet nnb tl)ue metnen SBttten, ober bereite 2)td) ju etnem fdrinttofttdjen 6 Xobe l" 5lber §onatn anttoottete : bte ©cfyanbe liege nicfyt in ber ©ttafe, fonbern in bent SBetbred^en. (5r tonne fterben, ofme bte ©fyte fetneS ©tanbeS? unb fetnet SBiffenfcfyaft ju beflecfens. 2)et $altfe fet bet §ett fetneS £eben8; et tfyue 9 , toa8 tfym gefatle. „®el?t fytnauS!" fagte bet $attfe ju ben Umftefjenben ; unb at8 et aMn toat, tetd)te et bent getotffenfjaften 10 §onatn bte §anb unb ftotad): „§onatn, id) bin mtt £)tt jufrteben; 2)u btft metn ^teunb unb id) bet 2)etntge. Sttan f)at nut 3)etne £teue toetbad)ttg gemacfyt: id) mugte (I thought I must) £)ehte (Sljtttdjfett totiifen 11 , unt getotg ju toetben, ob td} mid) tootffommen auf &)td) toetlaffen tonne. 9^ttt)t aU etne 23eto1mung, fonbetn a(3 etn 3etd)en 12 ntetnet ^teunbfdjaft toetbe id) <£)tt btefe ©efdjenfe fenben, bte 2)eine 9?ed)t* fd)affeni)ett ntd)t toetfiifyten 13 fonnten." ©o ftotad) bet $altfe unb befall ben SDienetn, ba8 ®oft>, bte (Sbelftetne unb bte ©toffc in §onain'$ $au$ ju ttagen. 1) the executioner. 2) scourge. 3) his. See p. 291, 1. 4) to consider. 5) obstinacy, stubbornness. 6) shameful. 7) profession. 8) to stain. 9) See p. 309, § 11. — 10) conscientious, honest. — 11) to prove, put to a proof. 12) token. J 3) to corrupt, bribe. 318 Lesson 45. Conversation. 2Bie lange blieb £>onaiu im (Sinige donate (lang). ©efangnig? TO Sttutetseful tfyn toieber rufen lieg, n>a$ jeigte er tt)m? fyatte ber £>enfer in ber §anb? 2Ba§ fyatte er unter bent 2lrm? 2BaS serlangte nun ber fatife con feinem 5lrjte? 2Ba8 anttoortete iponain? SBaS fe^te er nodj lu'nju (add) ? $itgte (submit) er fid) enblidj in ben SBitten be$ flaltfen? 203te belofynte 9ftuteU)ehtl U)n bafiir? 2Bie nannte er ifm? Unb toie baeigte (show) er iljm feine 2)anfbarfeit? 5luf ber einen ©cite einen £ifd> mit ®olb unb SHamanten, auf ber anbern einen §en!er. (Sr fyatte eiue ©eigel in ber §anb. (gin ©cfytoert. §onatn foflte toctfjlen jttrifdjen 9tod)tt)um unb bem £obe. £)te ©djanbe liege nicfyt in ber ©trafe, fonbern im 53erbred)en. 2)er $alife tljue, n>aS ifym gefalle. 9£ein, er Mieb ftanbljaft bei feiuer 2Beigerung (refusal). (Sr fagte, bag er mit ifym jufrieben f et , unb geftanb ifym, bag er ilni nur fyabe pritfen ttoflen. (Sr nannte ti)n f einen $reunb. (Sr ftejj bag @otb, bie (Sbelfteine unb foftbaren ©toffe in§onain'3 SBofynung bringen. Forty fifth Lesson. On the Participle present. The Participle present, which is formed of all verbs by adding the syllable c n b to the root, is much less used than in English, and is often very differently employed. § 1. It is used as an adjective qualifying a substan- tive. Ex. : (Sin tr>einenbe§ $inb a weeping child. (Sine Uebenbe SRutter a loving mother. 2)te aufgeljenbe (Sonne the rising sun. 2)ie ermunternben SBorte the encouraging words. Several Participles therefore, by being constantly used in this manner, have quite lost the nature of a verb, and are used as true adjectives, taking also the degrees of comparison: 23elefyrenb instructive. briicfenb oppressive, betriibenb afflicting. ermiibenb fatiguing, bringenb pressing. fliegenb fluent, flowing. On the Participle present. 319 Ijhtretgenb overpowering. certejjenb offensive, retjenb charming. mtterfyaltenb amusing, &c. Comp. ermitbenber; Sup. bet, bte, bag ermiibenb ft* k. ; as: (Sine ermubmbere 9?etfc a more fatiguing journey. § 2. The German Participle present is seldom used as such. Neuter verbs, however, may be employed so, when joined adverbially to another verb, in order to express manner or state: Sacfyetxb fagte er $u mtr k. laughing he said to me &c. ©te gittgen fd)it>etgettb fort they went off in silence. Note. Poets also occasionally use an active verb in the Par- ticiple present, with its government before or after it. Ex. : 3fctrof(u$, bent Itefcett g^unbe gefyorcfyenb (obeying). 31jtt umgiirtenb (girding) mtt bem £cibenfd)n>crt. 9Jitt ben £anbeberntamt ©uteS tfyut. I see a woman selling cherries. 3d) felje cine Sfrcm, toelcfye tirfcfyert fcerfcmft. § 5. The English Participle present, when depend- ing upon a noun and preceded by the preposition of must be translated with the Infinitive and £U: (See p. 314, top.) The art of writing bte ^itttft ju fd) ret Beit. The pleasure of seeing you ba3 $ergnitgen ©te JU fefyen. § 5a. The same is the case when it depends on another verb : It began raining e$ ftttg an JU regneit. He ceased speaking er Ijorte cmf, ju fpredjett. I risked losing my life. 3d} Uef ©efafyr, meitt £eBeit ju fcerlterett. § 6. This is also the case when the Participle present is immediately preceded by the prepositions on, upon, in, with, without, instead of and near (rtafye baratt) : 320 Lesson 45. I have decided on doing it {to do it). 3d) fyabe befd)loffen, eS ju tt)tm. He insisted upon seeing me. (§r beftanb barauf, mid) ju fefyen. He left without paging er gtng fort, ofyne $u Beja^Ien. The boy is playing instead of learning his lesson. 2)er $nabe fptelt, an ft at t feme 2lufgabe m lernen. Reading Exercise. 132. §err SCRiiGer roar em forgenber 1 SBater unb em liebenber ©atte 2 . $)a§ feilb fteHt (represents) etn tad)enbe§ $mb nor. 35te fotgenbe Slufgabe ift gu itberfe^en. (Sanrpe'3 SKobinfon (Srufoe ift em fe^r unterfyattenbeS unt) belefyrenbeS 23ud). 3)a3 23aben ift ge[wtb. S)a§ ,3etd)iien iP e * ne cmgenefynte 33efd)afttgung 3 . £)a§ Sadjen manner Seute ift unangenefym. fatten ©te bie (Sfyre, feme 58e* famttfcfyaft 4 gu madjen? £)a8 ©pa^ierengeljen ift fiir mid) fetjr ermitbenb. Sefen unb ©d)retben ift fiir atle Seute notfytgs. SJieinc $rau liebt ba§ 9?aud)en ntd)t. 3d) fanb eine 5lafd>e, toeldje rotben SBetn entfytelt 6 . ©ie ftng eben an, einen 33rtef ju fcfyretben. 3d) toar nafye baran, nad) toertfa augjuroanbern 7 . ©ie miiffen fort* fafyren, (Snglifd) ju lernen. 1) caring, careful. 2) husband. 3) occupation. 4) acquaintance. 5) necessary. 6) contain. 7) to emigrate. Jlufgade. 133. I am going to Paris in a few days. I saw the dying old man. You will find the word on (attf) the following page. That was a very fatiguing journey. My friend lives in a charming country 1 . Hiding (§ 3) and dancing are good bodily 2 exercises. Is learning necessary for young people? The burden 3 is oppressive. Clouds 4 are formed 5 from the vapours 6 arising 1 ('§ 4) from the earth. I have seen a book containing 8 beautiful poems. Alexander asked his friends standing (§ 4) about his death-bed 9 , if (ob) they thought they could find a king, like him. She was near dying. He told me trembling, that he had lost all his money. 2 Speaking Hhus, (§ 2) she stab- bed 10 herself. Eliza, 2 weeping * bitterly n , threw herself into the arms of her mother. The father stood mourning 12 by the tomb 13 of his son. The surgeon 14 began, dressing (m fcerbmben) the wound is. The rising (§ 1) sun disperses 16 the fog 17 . 1) ©egenb, f. 2) for^erItd)c Uebungen. 3) bte Safl. 4) bte SBotfen. 5) gebilbet. 6) SMinfle. 7) auffteigen. 8) cnt&alten. 9) fein Kobtfcett. 10) erbotdjen. 11) bitterly. 12) trauernb. 13) an bent ©rab. 14) bcr SBmtbarjt. 15) SBunbe, f. 16) toertreiben. 17) 9?ebet, m. § 7 . But when in English a possessive adjective pre- cedes the Participle, with or without a preposition, this participial substantive must be expanded into a clause in German, and translated with a con/unction correspond- On the Participle present. 321 ing to the preposition; viz. with of and at corresponds bag; with without o I) n e b a g ; with before e Ij e or B e fc o r ; with against b a g e g e n bag; with by b a b u r $ bag; with orc or upon baranf bag; with from baton bag. The possessive adjective is changed into a personal pronoun. We noticed his looking at her. SBir bcmerften, bag er fte anfaf). We heard of his becoming a soldier. 2Bir fyorten, bag er ©oltoat getoorben roar*). I spoke of [my) going to Paris. 3d) fprad) bacon, bag id) nad) *Part$ gefyen tooHte. I have nothing against your going there. 3d) fyabe SttdjtS fcagegen, bag ©ie baljtn geljen. The landlord insisted on our talcing horses. 2)er SBtrtlj beftanb barauf, bag nrir ^ferbe neljmen foUten. § 8. When a noun in the Genitive is joined to the possessive adjective, it becomes in German the Nomi- native or subject of the second clause: I wrote without my father s knowing it. 3d) fdjrieb, ofyne Dag me in 23ater e3 tmtgte. He wished to copy the letter before his uncle's seeing it. (Sr toottte ben SBvicf abfdwetben, efye fetn Dnfel tt)n fcu)e. • § 9. All other prepositions joined to a Participle present, must in any case be expressed by a correspond- ing conjunction with the Indicative. Ex. : Besides her being rich augevbem bag fte md) ift. He saved himself by jumping through the window. (Sv rettete fid) baburd), bag er au$ bem genfter fprang. The prisoner was hanged for killing a man. £>er ©efangene tcurbe gefyangt, toM (or baf iir bag) er etnen Sftann getobtet fyatte. You must have perceived it, while speaking with him. ©te miifjen e8 bemerft fyaben, toaljrenb ©ie mit tfym fpradjen. After having (I had) gone over the bridge, I had a splendid view into the valley. 9Z ad) bent tdj bte 23riide paffivt ^atte, r)atte id) etne Ijerrftdje 2lusfid)t ra'« 2fytl. After having received my money, I paid my creditors. 9tod)bem to) metn ©elb erfyalten fyatte, bejafjlte id) metne ©(dubtger. *) Literally: that he had become. OTTO. German Conv.-Grammar. 21 322 Lesson 45. § 10. When the Participle present is used by itself, i. e. without a preposition, to denote cause, reason or time, as in Latin and French, it must always be replaced by the corresponding conjunction with the finite verb. When the Participle expresses cause or reason, the corresponding conjunctions are: ba (as or since) meil (because) or tnbem' (since, as). — For time: a($ (when); ttacfybem (after) or tnbem (as) must be used: a) Participles expressing reason and cause: This being the case. $a btefeS ber gaU tjt (or tear). Wishing to see him, I went to his house. $a id) tl)n jit fefyen h)iinfd)te, gtng id) in fetn $au«. Not having found him, I went there a second time. Sflii| U)n nid)t angetroffen fyatte, gtng id) nod) eutmal fjtn. My mother being ill, she cannot go out. 28 etl (ba) meine Gutter fran! t ft , (fo) fann fie ntdjt anSgefyen. b) Participles expressing time: Going to the castle, I was overtaken by the rain. 2H3 (tnbem) id) cwf ba$ ©d)tog ging , ionvbe id) oom 9?egen ito erf alien. Having spoken so long, he was tired, •ft ad) bent*) er fo lange gefprodjen Ijatte, toar er mitbe. The town being taken, the soldiers pillaged it. •ft ad) bent bie S>tabt erooevt toar, plimberten fie bie ©olbaten. Reading Exercise. 134. 3d) laS bie ^ettmtg, oljne bag er e§ oemerfte. 2Btr foradjen bacon, bag nriv nad) 2Bten geljen iootften. £)er ©duller nmrbe aeftraft, toeil er trage getoefen ift. (Srtoaroofe 1 itber mid), bag td) U)n getoecft r)atte. 3d) tear geftern in 31jrem §aufe, ofyne <3te nt fefyen. $)nrd) ba§ 23eoBad)ten 2 biefer SKegeln fann man otele §el)ter oermetben. 3d) toevbe fpajteren geljen, nadjbem id) meine ©efdjafte fceenbigt Ijabe. -3d) fanb btefeS ^acfcfyen btefen Sftorgen, alS (on) id) an3 bem §aufe ging. £>a id) ftnbe, bag e3 mtr unmogltd) fetn totrb, metn 93evfpred)en jn fatten, fo neljme 3 id) metn'SSort jnritcR 1) angry with. 2) to observe. 3) to retract. JlttfflaOe. 135. 1. She noticed my looking at her. She cannot endure 1 his going away. I am sure (3d) toetg getotg) of his having *) The subordinate conjunction: nadjbem, generally requires the Pluperfect of the Indicative. Lesson 45. 323 done it. I am rejoiced at hearing of him. The overseer 2 re- pented 3 having been so cruel with (gegen) the slaves and began treating 4 them with more humanity 5. Hearing the noise ° of the cannon, we started 7 up. Having seen him, I went to his brother. We form our minds [sing.)% by reading (§ 9) good books. We have obtained peace by making great sacrifices 9 . You will learn to speak French by writing it. The setting 10 sun indicated 11 that it would be useless 12 pursuing 13 the fugi- tives 14 . Having*) taken leave 15 , he departed. Being poor, he had been neglected 16 . Having no money, I could not (cannot) depart. Having told his ridiculous 17 stories, 2 he iwent 4 off (fort) 3 laughing. Mary and her brother Henry, perceiving a pretty butterfly 18 , endeavoured (fudjten) to catch it. Conjecturing w £§ 10, a) that I was [Subj.) rich and finding that I was ignorant, he thought it would be easy to deceive me. The old man having spoken thus, the assembly 20 dispersed 21 . 1) ertragcn. 2) Slufjefyer. 3) bereute, baft. 4) befyaubeln. 5) 2ftenfdjltd>- fcit. 6) ber 2)onner. 7) auf'ftrmgen. 8) btlben unfern ©etfl. 9) to make sacrifices Dpfer bringen. 10) untergefyen. 11) an'jetgen. 12) umuifc. 13) tocrfolgeu. 14) g{ud)tlinge. 15) 21bfd>ieb. 16) toemadjlafftgt. 17) lad)cr- W$. 18) ber ©d)metterlmg. 19) toevmutljen. 20) bte SJcrfammfong. 21) to disperse augetnanber gefyen. Reading -lesson, fttttblidje Siefce* Filial love. (Sin beritymter preujjtfdjer ©eneral' tear in feiner Sngenb ©bel* htabe 1 an bent £ofe $rtebrtd)3 be3 ©rogen. 6r t)atte fetnen 33ater ntetjr, unb feme Gutter nctyvte fid) 2 1 ummer(td) 3 in tyrem SStttiuen* ftaube 4 . 2H3 etn guter ©01)11 toihtf d)te er, fie unterftm^en s ju !6nnen ; aber t>ou feinem geringen ©exalte 6 fonnte er -ftidjts entbeljren 7 . 2)od) fanb er etn Sftittel, (5twa3 fiir fie juertoerben. 3ebe -ftacfyt mugte namltd) etner oon ben (Sbelfnaben in bent 3^tter cor bein ©djlaffabtnet be3 $i$ntg$ toadjeu, um tym auftntoarten 8 , loenn er (SttoaS oerlangte. 2)a3 2Bad)en roar SDcancfyen ju befdjtoerltd), unb fteiibertrugen 9 bafjer, toenn tyre Sttetye 10 tarn, tyre SBadjen Slnberen. ®erarme(5bel?nabeftng an, btefe2Bad)en fiir 5lnbere$u itbernefymen; er tourbe bafur bejatjlt, unb ba3 ©e(b, toelcfyeS er bafur etytett, fparte er jufammen 11 nnb fd)tctte e3 bann feiner Gutter. (Stnmal fonnte ber $ontg ntd)t fdjlafen unb tootlte fid) (SttoaS corlefen laffen 12 . (Sr flingelte 13 , er rtef: aber ^temanb tarn. (Snbhd) ftaub er felbft auf unb gina, in ba8 ^ebenjtmmer, um ju fefyen, ob fetn "$age ba toare. §ter fanb er ben guten 3>itng* ling, ber bte Woa&je itbernommen ^ufaten, \tedt tljm eine in jebe Stafd)e unb legt fid) nrieber fdjlafen. $(3 ber (Sbelfnabe ertt>ad)te unb ba§ ©elb in feinen £afd)en fanb, fonnte er tuofyl benfen, looker e3 gefomnten ftar. ©r freute fid) $toar fefyr bariiber, toeil er nun feine Sautter nod) beffer unter* mi|en fonnte; aber er erfdjracf aud) $ugleid>, roett ber $onig ifyn fd)lafenb gefunben fyatte. to Sftorgen, fobalb er jum $6nig fam, vat er bemutfytg 16 urn SSergebung roegen feineS £>ienftfeb{er8 17 unb banfte if>m fiir ba8 gutige ©efcbenf. £)er gute ®onig tobte feine !inblid)e Siebe, ernannte 18 ttjra f ogteid) jum ii Dffaitt unb fd)enfte ilnn nod) (besides) eine ©umme ©elb, urn fid) m(e$ anfd)affen 20 ju fonnen, toaS er fiir feine neue <^tefle braud)te. £)er tre[f(id)e ©ofyn ftieg fyernad) immer fyofyer 21 unb biente unter me^reren preugifdjen $onigen al$ ein tapferer ©eneral bi8 in fein fyofyeS filter. 14) to stand, to endure. 15) to earn. 16) humbly. 17) fault in service. 18) to name, to appoint. 19) see p. 335, § 3. — 20) to procure, to buy. 21) higher and higher. Conversation. 2Ba$ n>ar ein preugifcfyer ©enerat (Sr ttar (Sbelfuabe an bent §ofe in feiner 3>ugenb? ^riebrid)3 be8 ©rogen. §atte er bamalS feine ©Item ©ein $ater lebte nid)t meljr ; aber nod)? feine Gutter. 2Ba8 n>ar fie alfo (then)? ©ie n>ar eine SSttttoc. fonnte ber ©oljn fie unter* 23on feinem ©exalte !onnte er eS ftii^en? nicbt tljun. 2Belad)te er? 2lnber©teIleanberer(Sbe{lnaben. SSarunt U)ad)ten fie nid)t felbft? (S« n?ar i^nen ^u befdjtterlid). SS5a§ ntad^te er ntit bent ©elbe, Sr fd)icfte e§ fetner Gutter, urn ba§ er auf biefe 2Betfe ernjarb ? fie ju unterftu^en. 21(8 ber &6nig einntal nid^t (Sr !liugelte unb rief. fd)(afen fomtte, n^a§ tr)at er? %l$ 9Ziemanb !am, toaS t^at ©r ftanb auf, urn $u fe^en, ob er ? fein -fage int ^Sorjimmer toare. 2Bag fa^ er l?ier? 2)er gute bungling fag fd^lafenb ant £ifd)e. On the Participle Past. 325 :ffiaS fyatte er fcor ftd) liegen ? (Stnen angefangenen 23rtef. 2lnn>ert tear btef er SBrtef gertdjtet? %n feme Gutter. 2Ste lautcte toer Stnfang ? „SDtefc« ift fdjon tote torttte Sfaidjt, toag id; fitr ©eft) tua^e." Stemel I)atte er fd)on ertoorfcen? 3 e *w £Mer. 2Becfte toer $omg tljn auf? 9£etn, er ltef$ ttjtt fdjlafen. 2Ba3 t^at er itbertoteS (besides)? ©r fyolte $toet Gotten £>ufaten unto ftecfte ti)m erne in jetoe Xafdje. 21(3 toer (Etoelhtabe ertoacfyte, tt>a3 (5r tear ^nfangS erfdjrocf en, freute empfanto er? ftdj aBer tood) itber toa§ ©olto. 2Sarum tear er erfdycocfen? SBett er einett SDienftfefyter be* gangen (committed) fyatte. 2Ba3 u)at er am 2ftorgen? (§r bat toen $cntg urn $ergcbung unto toanfte Ujm fitr toa3 ©efdjenf . 2Bie beteteS U)m toer $6ntg fein ©r mad)tcu)n junt Dfftjter unto 2Bot)(teot(en (favour)? fd)enfte tfym eine©umme@elto. 2Sa§ teurtoe fyciter (afterwards) (£r ftieg nad) unto nad) hunter l)o* au8 (of) Ujrn? fyer, unto teurtoe jttle^^eneral. Forty sixth Lesson. ON THE PARTICIPLE PAST. 1) The Participle past is frequently used as an ad- jective, is declined as such, and even admits the degrees of comparison : £)er geltebte 55ater the beloved father. (Sin gefegneteS Santo a fertile (blessed) country. (Sin getoritcftere$ 33c If a people more oppressed. $)er geefyrtefte -Profeffor the most honored professor. 2) Sometimes it becomes a real adjective and allows the syllable un to be prefixed, which renders it nega- tive, as: 33efannt known. unbefannt unknown. Semttteit wealthy. unbemtttelt without means. beritfymt renowned. unfceriUjmt unrenowned. gefd)tcft skilful, clever. ungef deleft awkward, geteofynt accustomed. ungeteolmt unaccustomed, gelefyrt learned. ungelefyrt unlearned, &c. 3) The Participle past of some neuter verbs which express motion, occurs together with the verbs font men and g e I) e n instead of the Participle present, as : £)er $nabe fain gelaufen, gerttten, gefprungen, gefafjren. The boy came running, riding, Zfc. 326 Lesson 46. Thus further geffogen, gefcfymommen, gefrod)en :c. fontmen. In the same way is formed the expression fcerloten gefyen to be (get) lost. Ex.: Sine SBrteftafdje tjt fcerloren gegangen (has been lost). 4) It is sometimes used absolutely, replacing a short sentence, as : gefe^t or angenommen suppose ; anSgenotnmen excepted; abgejefjen fcon or . . abgerecfynet not reckoned; ju* gegeben granted (for: tsenn man anmmrnt, abftefyt, gugteBt) . 5) It is also employed in a few expressions only instead of the Imperative mood. In English, the Participle present, with a negation, is sometimes used in a similar manner : UmgeMjrt! turn about! — anfgefdjant! look out! auSgetrnnfcn ! empty your glass! ntd)t mefyr getoeint! no more crying now! ntd)t geplaubert! no talking! On the Future participle. There is in German a Gerundive or Future participle of the Passive voice, answering to the Latin Participle in -dus (laudandus, a, um), which is formed of the Par- ticiple present (fobenb) by placing jit before it = ju lobcnb. It is used adjectively and therefore declined. Its place is always between the article and the noun. Ex. : 3)a8 JU lobenbe £inb the child [that is) to be praised. $)te ju fyoffenbe ©rate the harvest {that is) to be hoped for. £>er ju furdjtenbe Unfatt the accident {that is or was) to be feared. Beading Exercise. 136. 1 . Sttetne geltebte Xante ift geftorben. Unfer fcevefyvter •Profeffor ift Iran?, ^petev ber ©tofte mar ber gcbttbetftc 1 flavin in Dtugtanb. 9?ero mar ber gefurtfytetfte romtfd)e .ftaifer. $)er fyeute gefaflene (Sdjnee ift piti $ng ttef. 2)emoftt)ene3 tear ber berulnntefte gried)tfd)e Sftebner 2 . 2)er ®ret3 gtng gebiidt (stooping) an einem ©tabe nnb bctteltc. £)te a§ getoregte §erj fiil)Itfid) erleidjtert am tfyeifnclmtenben 11 23ufen eineS geliebten $reun* be$. ©eriU)rt 12 toon ben Shorten be$ alten 9ftanne3, offnete er tote STfyiire nnto (teg Km eintreten. £)er arme ©tutoent, all femes ®el* be3 beraubt, fefcte betriibt 13 fehten 2Beg fort, bis er, in einem 2)orfe angefotmnen, gan^ ermitbet fid) auf eine San! 14 fefcte. 9) hail. 10) destroy. 11) sympathising. 12) touched, moved. 13) sadly. 14) bench. JUtfflaBe. 137. 1. Mr. A. is a renowned painter. If you study much, you will become a learned man. He stood there quite puzzled 1 . This man died unknown and unrenowned. The knight 2 re- turned discouraged 3 and dejected 4 . The most honored man is not always the best man. The most learned people write often the worst hand 5 . Arrived at (in) the village, he proceeded (gtng er) to (in) the inn 6 where nobody recognised 7 him; he was so changed 8 and sunburnt 9 . The life of every man is a continued 10 chain of incidents 11 . Beloved and esteemed by everyone, 2 the 3 old man idied at the (im) age of ninety years. 2. The problem 12 to be solved^ has been communicated [to] all the students. It is a fact 14 not to be denied ^ f that no man has any claim 16 to perfection i7 . My neighbour came running to inform 18 me that the queen had arrived. The prince came driving in a coach with six horses. The danger to be avoided 19 is not yet over (tooriiber). Do you understand the sentence 29 to be learnt? "Where is the boy [who is] to be punished? Protected 21 by an almighty 22 God, 2 we l may go through, this life without fear, if we do not deviate 23 from the right path. Well begun, half done {won), is a German proverb. 1) P. p. toerlegcn, toern>irrt. 2) ber SRitter. 3) entmutfyigt. 4) nte* bergefd)kcjen. 5) #anbfd)rift, /. 6) ©aftyau*, n. 7) erfennen. 8) toer* a'nbert. 9) fonn»tocvbrannt. 10) fortgefejjt. 11) toon SBorfaflen. 12) Slufgabe. 13) jnlofcnb. 14) 2tyttfa<$e. 1 5) ju Icugncnb. 16) Slnffcrud) auf. 17)33o£C- fommenfyctt. 18) fecnacfyridjtigen (ace). 19) tocrmctben. 20) ber ©at}. 21) beftUfet. 22) aflma^ttg. 23) abtoct#en. Reading-lesson. $er Sftatm ntit ber etfernen WlaSU. The iron mask. (Simge donate nad) bem £obe beS ^arbinalS Sfta^artn ereignete fid) in ^ranfreid) eine 53cgebenr)ett *, tr>elcr)e ntdjt it)re3 ©letcf/cn 2 fyat. (Sin unbefannter ©efangener, ber grower al$ ge* roef/nlid), jung nnb toon ber fd)b'nften unb ebelften ©eptalt 3 roar, tourbe ntit bem groftten ©efyettnntg 4 in ba3 ©d)lo§ ber @5anft* 9ttargaretf;en=-3nfel im ^rotoencer Stteerbufen 5 gefefytdt. liefer ©efangene trug unterroegS eine SCftaSfe, beren $tnnftud 6 &tai}U febem 7 fyattt, toeldje if/m bie ^retfyeit Uefeen, nut ber %Jla%tt auf 1) event, occurrence. 2) its equal. 3) form, figure, stature. 4) secrecy. 5) bay. 6) chin-piece. 7) spring. 328 Lesson 46. feinem ©eftdjte ju ef[en. £)er 23efefyt tear gegeben toorben, ttm $n tobten, toenn er fid) entbedfte. Sr blieb auf ber 3nfel, bis etn £>fft$ter, 9?an:en8 ©atnt*9War3, im 3ar>re 1690 jnm Dberauffefyer* ber SBaftifle ernannt tourbe. liefer Officer fyolte tt)n ton ber ©t. 2ttara,aretljen*3nfel ctb unb fitfyrte ri)n, immer oerlarot 9 , in bte SBaftiUe. feurj tor feiner SBerfefcung 10 befudne ifjn bet 9Kat* quiS ton Souoots anf biefer 3nfel mib fprad) mtt ifym ftefyenb nnb rn.it einer ^Idjtung 11 , bte an (5t)rfurd)t grenjte (came near to veneration) . SDiefer Unbefannte tourbe in bte SBafHfle gefii^rt, too er eine Jo gute 2Bof)itung role in etnem $a(aft erfyiett. 9&an oerfagte 12 U)m SfctdjtS ton bent, toa3 eroerlangte; er fanb fein grogtcg 53er* gniigen an fefyr fetnem 2Beifeeug 13 nnb an ©ptfcen 14 ; er foielte anf ber ©uttarre. 9J?an fyielt it)m einen fefyr guten Xifdj, nnb ber £)berauffel)er fefcte fid) felten tor il)m. (Sin alter 2lr$t auS ber S3aftide, ber oft biefen Sftann in feinen Sfranfljetten beljanbelt 15 Ijatte, fagte, bag er nie fein ©efid)t gefefyen fyaU, obfdjon er oft feine Sunge nnb ben 9?eft feine« $ oroerS unterfudjt l)atte. (Sr toar augerft fd)5n getoad)fen (well made) , fagte biefer Sfrjt ; feine §aut toar etn toeing gebraunt; er erregte 16 Sntereffe burd) ben Stolen 17 £on feiner ©timme; nie beflagte er fid) itber feinen .Suftanb 1 *, unb lieg -ftietnanb merfen 19 , toer er fein fihtnte. (To be continued). 8) overseer, governor. 9) masked. 10) removal. 11) respect. 12) to deny, to refuse. 13) linen. 14) lace. 15) to attend. — 16) to excite, cause, raise. 17) mere. 18) condition, state. — 19) to guess, to perceive. Questions. NH. The pupil is now requested to seek the answers to the following questions in the above Heading Exercise. 2Ba§ begab ftdj balb nad) bent Xobe beS farbinaly 2)ca$arin? 2Ber tourbe anf ba$ ©d)tofj ber ©t. 9ttargareu)en*3nfet ge* 2Bo liegt biefe 3nfet? 2Ba3 tmg ber ©efaugene beftanbig? 2Bie lange blieb er anf ber 3nfel? 2Bof)in fufyrte tyn ©aint*2K««? 2Ber Ijatte ti)n tor feiner 33erfefcwtg befnd)t? Wit ^atte er fid) gegen ifyn benomnten (behaved)? 2Ba§ er^ielt ber Unbefannte in ber SaftiQe? 5ln toaS fanb er fein greeted SBergnitgen? 2Ber be^anbelte ifyn in fetnen tranujeiten? 2£a3 fagte biefer tot oft? SBoburd) erregte er Sntereffe? 329 Forty seventh Lesson. Remarks on the Adjectives. 1) The qualifying adjective which is placed before its substantive, as in English, agrees with its substantive in gender, number and case. In poetry however many exceptions to this rule are found. Such are: ©in 9?D$teht rotf) a little red rose. £)ic 23ttrfe fret lint) feffettoS (free and unrestrained). $letn Volant) instead of t>er Heine Sftotanb, k. 2) A number of adjectives admitting a government [object) take it either in the accusative, in the dative, or in the genitive. I. Adjectives which govern the Accusative. 1) Adjectives implying weight, measure, age, value, generally with a numeral preceding, require the accu- sative and are placed after their case. Such are: er heavy, weighing. tang long. 6rett broad, wide. alt old. Ijod) high. ttef deep. crroj} great, large, tall. ttjertl) worth, &c. Examples. 3)er ©tein n>ar jeljn ^fmtfc*) fd)n>er. The stone weighed ten pounds. £)te 9ftauer tft jtuan^tg g«6*) tong. The wall is twenty feet long. £>ie $rau nmr fed^tg 3al)re alt. The woman was sixty years old. 2) When qualifying, together with their government they precede the substantive and agree with it (see p. 332, V.). Ex.: §ter tjt em jefyn $funb fdjtoerer (Stein. Here is a stone weighing ten pounds. ©« bauten eine fyunbert $ug langc 9D?auer. They built a wall a hundred feet long. II. Adjectives which govern the Dative. angemeffen appropriate, suitable, anjenefym agreeable, anftcjjto, offensive. Hbgenetgt disinclined. dr)ltlict> like, resembling, angeboren innate. *) Not in the plural (see p. 52, § 15). 330 Lesson 47. befanrtt known, begreifltd) conceivable, beqttem ) convenient, befyagltd) \ comfortable. befd)n)erlid) troublesome, banffcctr grateful, bienltcfy serviceable. e W\ .. r - ! peculiar, etgentimmhd) j r fremb strange. gefyorfam obedient. SSX l f ™ ble - genetgt inclined. gen?ad)fen equal to. gtetd} like, equal, gnabtg gracious, kind. fyettfam salutary. tafttg troublesome, burdensome. I th I dear, tfyeuer ) mogttdj possible. Wimogttcfy impossible. nadjttyetltg | prejudicial, detri- fdjablidj | mental, hurtful. ttofye near. tiot^ig necessary. nitfcttd) useful. treu, getreit faithful. iiberlegen superior. perfyaf$t odious. fcortljetfljaft advantageous. toiflfommen welcome. jutvagltd) conducive, beneficial. These adjectives as well as their contraries formed by prefixing urt, as: mtafynttd), unbequem, untreu K. require the person or object in the dative w r hich must precede. Examples. 3)er ©oljn ift (or fiefyt) fcincm $ater almUcfy. The son is like (resembles) his father. 2)ie Siefce 311 ber f^reir)eit ift bem Sfteitfdjen angeboren. The love of liberty is innate in man. £)te Slrbett roar ben ©o lb a ten lafttg (or befdjroerltd)) . Working was troublesome to the soldiers. 2)a3 93aben ift ber ©efnnbfyctt fel;r juttaglid). Bathing is very conducive to health. (53 roar mtr unmogltdj ju fommen. It was impossible for me to come. Reading Exercise. 138. 2)tefe Shtget ift mefyr als $d)n $funb fdjtt>er. 2Bte lang if* btefe ©trage? ©ic ift adjtbnnbert mib jroanjta gug lang. S)te ^etnbe gruben etnen jt»olf ^ufj bretten ($raben, 2luf bem ^lafce 1 fte^t etne ungefafn: 2 tner^tg gujs fyofye SBUbfaiu'e 3. SDtefe ©efdjtcfyte ift aflen ^ranjofen roofyl befannt. $n ^ e * e ff en if* *> er ©efunbfyett nadrtfyetltg. $)er fomglDar biefem §ofmann 4 feljr geroogen. ad;e Sunge {Sing.). Adjectives which govern the Genitive. log rid of. mad)ttg master of. mtibe, fcttt tired of, weary. fd)ulbtg guilty. tfyeUfyafttg participant, iiberbriifjtg tired of, weary. toerbacfyttg suspected, toerlufttg having forfeited, toiirbtg, toertf) worthy, worth. III. SBebitrfttg ( in want of, benotfyigt ( in need of. betonj^t conscious. etngebenf mindful. fafytg capable, able. getoarttg expectful of. getotg, fitter certain, sure. IJabfyaft getting possession of fmtbtg acquainted with. and those of the above adjectives which admit the prefix Utt, denoting the contrary, as: nnbetougt, Wieingebenf (unmindful), unfafyig, unfnnbtg, unfcfyntbtg, nntoiirbtg k. NB. Observe that here, also, the object precedes the adjective. Examples. 2)te 9lrnten ftnb be8 ©etbeS bebitrfttg (benotfytgt). The poor are in want of money. £)er 23ote tear be§ 2Bege$ mcfyt funbtg (or unfunbig). The messenger was unacquainted with the way. 3)er ©eneral tear be$ 23erratfy8 toerbadjttg. The general was suspected of treason. 3d) bin be8 Arbeit en 8 mitbe I am tired of working. IT. Adjectives with Prepositions. 2td)tfattt auf {ace.) careful of. bange to or (dat.) afraid of. befd)(imt lib et [ace.) ashamed of. begtertg nacfy desirous of. Bejrett toon ) rid of, fret toon j free from, c^rgeijig nad) desirous of. emtofangttdj fiir susceptible of. emtoftnb(td) fiber [ac.) sensibleof. etferfud;tig itber (ac.) jealous of. ettel anf [ace.) vain of. erntiibet toon fatigued with, fafyig $u able, capable of. frof> iiber [ace.) glad of. fmd)tbar an productive of. gtertg nad) covetous of. 332 Lesson 47. gletdjgUttg gegen indifferent to. gefiit)Uo§ gegen insensible of. graufam gegen cruel to. ijoflid) gegen civil, polite to. tiadjlajstg tn [dot.) careless of. ret4 an [dat.) rich in. ftolj auf [ace.) proud of. iiberjettgt o It convinced, sure of. nnbefannt mtt unacquainted. ummffent) in {dat) ignorant of. oevfdjtoenbertfd} mtt prodigal of. jroeifefljaft iib er(acc) dubious of. jufricbenmit contented, pleased, satisfied, unjufricben mit discontented, displeased with. NB. With these, the adjective may precede i'or follow the object. Examples. (Sgt/pten ift frudjtbar an SaumtooGe. Egypt is productive of cotton. £)er -Smtglmg n>ar begiertg nadj ^enntniffen. The youth was desirous of knowledge. Y. Adjectives with a complement. The complement, which in English follows an attri- butive adjective , is, together with the latter, placed be- fore the substantive, immediately after the article: (Sin btet getefeneS 23ud) a book much read. (Sin mtt 2Betn gefiittteS ©la$ a glass filled with wine. £)er bnrd) dlu\c geftctrfte $orper. The body strengthened by repose. (Sin nad) ^enntntffen begtenger 3imgttng. SDte bem Sttenfdjen angeborene Siebe ^ur $reU)eit. Reading Exercise. 140. 3cfy bin mir fetner ©djulb 1 betongt. $)ie ^uStoanberer blteben tmmer tfyreS 23atertanbe3 eingebenf nnb toaren mentals gtetdjgUtig (indifferent) gegen baS <5d)tcffat beffelben. 3eber 9ftenfcfy mu| ftetS be$ £obe3 getoarttg fetn, benn ber Sob oerfefyont 2 ^temanb. $)te ©ante erfdjratf fo fel)r, bag fie ber fdjenS miibe, fo fprad) ber ftitrft $n feinen e toertfy (worth the trouble), btefen 23rtef nodj einmal abjufdjmfcen. £>ie Srrauen fcflen rttct)t eiferfiidjtig fetn itber tljre banners. (Sin nut feinem ©djidfale 6 jnfriebenev Sftenfd) tft tmmer gtiicftidj. 1) guilt. 2) to spare. 3) deed. 4) warnings. 5) husband. 6) fate. £uf$a8e. 141. We are always mindful of our duty K They were not quite sure of their advantage 2 . Oh tell us, how have you Lesson 47. 333 become 4 master (mftdjtig) i oi 2 the 3 castle? I am tired of reading. The young man was not capable of 2 such 1 a deed 3 ). He who kills a man, is guilty of a great crime 4 . I am not pleased 5 with your behaviour. I am quite convinced of his innocence 6. England is rich in coal 7 . The foreigner was ignorant of the language of the country; he was therefore soon tired of his stay 8. 1) «ppi$t, f. 2) Sorttyeit, m. 3) tyat, f. 4) 2krbred)en, n. 5) jufrieben. — 6) Unf^ulb. 7) flo^ten, pi. 8) 2fafent$att, m. 142. Young people should be civil to every-body. I am satisfied with my pupils. The boy is fatigued with running. Human life is never free from troubles 1 . Many men are dis- satisfied with their condition 2 . Those who commit suicide 3 must be very tired of their lives {sing.). Let us never do anything in secret 4 , of which (tooriiber) we should be ashamed, if \l became known. At last I feel myself rid of that tedious 5 disease. It is my duty to tell you, that you are totally 6 ignorant of (tit) the most important 7 facts 8 of history. I do not like persons who are cruel to (cjegeil) animals. The tailor showed me a letter (p. 332, V.) written by his son. A man well instructed (unterrtd)tet . .) in (the) history, judges 9 the events 10 with impartiality 11 . He who is unmindful of his domestic 12 duties and not careful of his children, is an enemy to [Gen.) his family 13 and his country; he is guilty of great sins 14 the consequence 15 of which (pl.) lb he cannot foresee 10 . 1) 2JMil?e, SBefdjtoerbe, f. 2) bte Sage. 3) ctnen ©elfcjlmorb begetyen. 4) im ©efyeimcn. 5) tangroetfig. 6) ganj. 7) toidjttg. 8) £l)atjad)en. 9) to judge beitrtfyetten. 10) bte Qretgniffe. 11) Unj)artfyetlitt)fett. 12) $au8tt§. 13) gamUtc, f. 14) efiube, r. 15) beven golgen, pi. 15) see p. 293, § 1. — 16) fcorberfel;en. Heading-lesson.' $er SRctrn ntit ber etfenten $Ra§fe. (©djlug). 2)tefer Unbefannte ftarb tm Safyre 1703 unb rourbe bet Wafyt tm tirdjfyof 1 ber ^auls^f arret 2 begraben. 2Ba3 ba§ Srftaunen tterboppelt, ift, bag ju ber gett, al« man tr>n nad> ber ©t. 9ttar* garetfyen=3nfet fd)icfte, fetn angefcfyener 3 Sftann in (Suropa oer* fd)U)anb. Unb bod) roar btefer ©efangene ofme S^etfe! etn feller; benn $otgenbe3 fyattt ficfy in ber erften 3eit, al« er auf ber Snfel wax, jugetragen 4 : £)er £)bcrauffefyer ftellte felbft bte ©cpfjetn auf ben £tfdj, unb na^bem er tlm etngefcfylofjen fyattt, gtng er roeg. (Sirtft fcfyrtefc ber ©efangene (5troa§ auf etnen filbernen teller unb noarf ben Seller jum fyenfter lu'nauS, gegen etn ©cfyiff, tnelcfyeS am Ufcr lag, faft am $uge beg £(mrme3. &er Sifter, bent biefeS ©d)tff gefyorte, fanb ben Setter, fyob ifm auf unb bracfyte tim bent 1) churchyard. 2) parish. 3) distinguished. 4) happened. 334 Lesson 48. Dberauffefyer juriicf. Srftaunt fragte liefer ben Sifter: „§aben ©ie gelefen, n>aS auf btefem £euer gefdjrieben ftet>t, unb fyat Semanb tlm in 3fyren §anben gefefyen?" — SHefer Sttann nmrbe fejigefyatten 5 , bis ber 53Cuffe^er ftdj tt3o^( toerfidjert Ijatte, bag er ntdjt lefen fonnte, unb bag ber £efler fcon -fttemanb gefefyen n>or* ben tear. „©efyen ©te," fagte er, „r gUtdltdj, bag ©ie ntd)t lefen !i3nnen." §err fcon (Sfyamittart tear ber te^te 2Rimjlcr, toeld^er biefeS fonberbaree ©eljeimnig nntgte. 2)er Sftarfdjaff Sa ^euulabe, fetn ©cfynriegerfolm 7 , bat il)n bet feinem £obe auf ben $nieen, iljm anjujeigen, toer ber 2ftann tuare, ben man nie anberS mnnte, a(§ unter bem tauten: „£>er Wlann nut ber etfernen SttaSfe." dfyamittart anttoortete ifym, bag e3 etn ©taatSgefyeimnig fet, unb bag er einen (Sib geleiftets fyabe, e$ nie ju entbeden. 5) arrested. 6) strange. 7) son-in-law. 8) taken an oath. Questions. 2Bann ftarb biefer Unbefannte? # 2Bo nmrbe er begraben? 28a8 trug fid) e'inft auf ber 3ufe( $u? £Ba$ fagte ber Dberauffefyer ju bem ^ifdjer? 25aS gef djafy bann biefem Sftanne? 2Bie (ange tuurbe er feftgefyalten? Wit n>etd)en Shorten nmrbe er enttaffen (dismissed) ? 2Ser tear ber 2e£te, ber biefeS ©efyeimnig nmgte? SBeldje 2Tnnrort gab (^amillart bem 2Rarfd)atf 2a fteuitlabe? Forty eighth Lesson. On the Governments of Verbs. The usual way in which the object is connected with active verbs is by the accusative case, as : 3cfy fiebe ben $ater, mx (oben bte ©djtiler, (Ste lefen ba$ 23udj. But there are also some verbs, the government of which is connected either by means of the nominative or the genitive, or dative, or by prepositions (see p. 341). As they diifer most from the English, they must be separ- ately mentioned. I. Yerbs which in German govern the Nominative. 1) The nominative case is required by the following verbs : (Sein to be. toerben to become, to get. bletben to remain. fd)einen to appear, to seem. fyeigen to be called, to bear a name. Verbs with the dative. 335 Examples. 9tapcteon tear em grower ^eftljerr (general). £)er junge Sflenfdj tft ©oibat gefrovben. £)a3 fd)emt em guter ^plan (ju fein). 2) By the passive voice of the following verbs, which, in the active, govern a double accusative : 9£ennen ) t ii Ifdjelterttr. v. to abuse, call names, tyeifcen ! ' |fd)tmpfen to insult. 3) The verbs: to appoint emennen; to elect ern)afy(en; to make macfyert, governing in English two nominatives in the passive voice, require in German the preposition JU with the article in the dative. Ex.: §exr 51. tft 3 urn §ctuptmann ernarmt toorben. Mr. A. was appointed captain. (£r tft jum Softer gemacfyt toorben. He was made a doctor. Note. The verbs er flat en {to declare) and fjaltett (to consider, to think), require the preposition fiir. Ex.: He was declared a thief er ttmrbe fiir etrtett 2)teb erflart. Palmer was found guilty palmer tourbe fiir fdjulbtg erflart. I consider that day lost id) fyatte biefen Sag fiir toerloren. II. Verbs which in German govern the Dative. 1) The following verbs , most of which govern in Eng- lish the accusative, when, in German, they are followed by one object, require the person in the dative: 9lbratt)en to dissuade. atttWorten to answer. anfyemgett to adhere. ctnftefyen to suit. fcefefytett to command, order. fbegegnen*) act. v. to meet, occur, to encounter. fe8 fcegegttet impers. v. it hap- pens. -j-cwSroetdjen **) to evade, avoid. berjagen to please. ffcefommen (n>ot)( or gut) to agree with a person's health. fbeDovfterjen to impend, betfttmmen j to agree with beipfttd)ten i some one. -j-betftefyen to assist, ban fen to thank. btenen***) to serve. brotyen***) threaten. ieinfaUen to occur. einleud}ten to be evident, ientftteljett to run away, jentatyu > to avoid -renttemnten \ 4 ientrtnnen J to esca P e « f entfeufen to abscond. *) begegnen is also used with the ace. ; then it takes fyaben. **) Those marked with -j- are conjugated with fctn [to be). ***) bebienen, bebrofyen and befelgen take the ace. 336 Lesson 48. entfyrecfyen to answer the pur- pose, to correspond with, to accord. erlauben to allow, permit. fefylen, mangeln to be wanting. find) en to curse. tfolgen*) to follow. frijfynen to indulge (passions). gebiifyren to be due. gef alien to please, mtjjfallen to displease. gel)ovd)en to obey. gel) even to belong. fgcltngen to succeed [impers.). genitgen to suffice. geretcben to redound, conduce. gejtcmen or piemen to become, to be seemly. glelcfyen to be like, resemble. glauben to believe. ijelfen to help. fyultngen to do homage. leud)ten to light (down stairs). mifltrauen to mistrust. mtttfyetlen to impart. fid) n&fyern to approach. and many more of these verbs nad), toor, nii^en to be of use. pafjen to fit, suit. ratten to advise, fdjabett injure. fd)ehaen to seem. |d)metd)eln to flatter, fteuern to check, to remedy. frozen to bid defiance, to face, trauen (certrauen) to trust, funterltegen to succumb, cerbieten to forbid, fid) untettnerfen to submit, ftjorange^en to precede, fcorbeugen to obviate, prevent, fcortoerfen to reproach, toefye tfywt to hurt, injure, -ptoetdjen to give way, to yield. fnnt>evfal)ren to happen, -rttnberfieljen ) to withstand, fid) toiberfefcen j to resist, oppose. n)ti>erfpred)en to contradict, tinflfafyrento comply, to indulge. ti)ol)(«h)ollento favour, wish well, jufyoren to listen to. Ijufommen to fall to one's share, to be due. compounded with bet, entgegen, nnt>er, ju. Examples. SttefeS $lett> pagt mtr md)t this dress does not suit me. 3d) bin iljm btefen Sttorgen begegttet (met). 3d) fttmme bem Sftetmer coElommcn bet. I entirely agree with the speaker. £)er $rieg brol)t btefem Sanbe war threatens this country. SBoHen ©te mtr fyelfen? will you help me? Observations. — As these verbs are not transitive, they cannot be used in the passive voice, except sometimes in the third person (see p. 130, § 7) ; the passive sentence is there- fore, in German, to be changed into a corresponding active sentence. Examples: He was readily obeyed man geljord)te iljm berettnnlltg. We were displeased with their society. 3l)re @efetlfd)aft mtgftel unS. *\ See the foot-note***) p. 335. Lesson 48. 337 2) The following verbs which have two governments, a person and a thing , require the person in the dative, the thing in the accusative. The dative precedes the ace. : ndjmett to take from a person. fagen to tell. fefyenfett to present with, give. fdjtden to send. fdjutben, fdmlbtg fetn to owe. ft el) ten to steal from. berbanfen to owe. berjettjen to pardon. berfc&affen to procure. borlefen to read to a person. totbmen to devote, dedicate. jeigen to show. mfd)retBen to ascribe, impute. 5lBf(fylagen to refuse. anBteten to offer. au3fe£en to expose. Brtngen to bring, empfefylen to recommend, letljen to lend, entreigen to snatch away, er^cifjlen to relate, to tell, genmfyren to grant. geBen to give. erfparen to save (trouble), letften to render, to loan. Itef em to furnish, provide. Examples. ©eBen ©tc bem $naBen*) ba8 23ud). 3d) entrig (snatched away from) bem ©olbaten ba8 @en>eJ)r. ©agen ©te miv bie SSaljrfyeit (truth). (Sr fdjenfte bem ftnaBen einen ©ulben. Reading Exercise. 143. 1. Sfteht 93ebtenter ift ein eljrltcfyer Wlaxm. (Sin Sfctrr BleiBt tmmer ein Wan. 3)a« fcfyeint ein gtttrfltajer ©ebanfe 1 . 9ttetn 9?effe ift Ofpjtcr geroorben. 2)er ^rembe ttmrbe fiir etnen 23e* tritger 2 erflart. 3d) ^abe meinem gveunbe aBgeratljen, btefeS SSerf fyeraugjucjeBen 3 . 2Ba8 ljat man 3fynen geanttoortet? 2ttan Ijat mir cjar 9hd)t8 geantroortet. £)tefe 2BoImung ftefyt mir ntdjt on; fie tft m Hein fiir mid). 2113 ber Sttebner geenbtgt Ijatte, jtimmte flpfttdjtete) tfjm bie gan$e $erfammlung Bet. £>er fyiirft afynte 4 bag UngUitf nid)t, roeldjeS iljm Bebovftanb. £rtnfen er StteB tft bem ©efangntgroarters entlaufen. 3dj Begecmete Ijeute etnem meiner alten §reunbe, roeld)er gefonnen tft, in etniger 3«tt nad) 3talien ju retfen. 3d) rtett) ifym feljr, feme fRetfe tttdjt lange ju berfd)teBen 9 . (5r jeigte fetnem gtemtbe*) bie SBttbet. 1) idea. 2) a cheat. 3) from publishing. 4) to anticipate. 5) attachment. 6) passage. 7) treatise, essay. 8) jailor. 9) to put off. *) Observe that in German the dative precedes the accusative. OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 22 338 Lesson 48. JlitfgA6t. 144. 1. Henry is a little boy. John has become [a] soldier. Aristides was called the just. My neighbour was abused [as] a cheat (33etrii$er) . Is it true that your cousin has been appointed a judge? I will make him my (jit mehtem) friend. What has happened to you? What did you answer your master? The captain threatened the soldiers. Nobody has ordered the man to open the gate *. It was impossible for me to resist his requests 2 . This circumstance 3 must displease the merchant. We should always assist our neighbours when they are in want of 4 assistance. To whom does this hat belong? It belongs to the hatter; he brought it to me that I might buy it. Why do you not answer your master (teacher) when he questions 5 you? He always bids defiance to his enemies. 2. To (Um .. ju) escape (the) death, he seized a plank 6. Let us follow this example 7 . I met him at the town gate 8. Why did you not thank your teacher? I have not met him these (fcit) several weeks. The beggar approached me in a suspicious manner (auf etne ©erbacfyttge 2Beife) . Children must obey their parents. The slave hardly escaped his pursuers 9 . How is your uncle pleased f) with (in) Frankfort ? He is very well pleased f). If you will listen to me, I will read you a chapter (ettt $apttel) of Macaulay's History of England. Show me your paintings 10 , and I will show you my drawings tt. Could you lend me a dollar or two? I will lend you them, if you will give me them back to-morrow. Show the stranger the way. Do not believe this liar* 2 . l)ba82:^or. 2)btcS3ttte. 3) Umjtonb, m. 4) to be in want = braud&en (Ace.). 5) fragen (ace). 6) etn 33rett, n. 7) ©eiftriel, n. 8) ba« @tabttyor. 9) bcr SSerfoIgcr. — 10) btc jffiaferet, ba8 ©emafbe. 11) 3eid)nuna,. 12) bcr Siigner. III. Verbs which in German govern the Genitive. 1) The following verbs take their object in the gen- itive ; some of them may also take a preposition : SBebitrfen*) (tdj Bebctrf) to need, to be in want, ermangeln to be void. [of. (jebettfen to remember, think barren if) to wait patiently for. ladjett**) to laugh. fd}0ltetl*) to spare, fpottett**) to mock. f) See p. 219, b, and p. 221, Conversation. *) bebiirfen takes sometimes, and fc^oncn mostly, the accusative. **) &tdjen, fyotten and fid) fcfyamen prefer the preposition fiber with the accusative. •HO barren may take the prep, auf with the ace. Verbs with the genitive. 339 2) The following require the person in the accusative, and the object in the genitive, which follows : 3lnHagett ) to accuse of, befd)itlbtgen j to charge with, berauben to rob, to bereave, entbtnben to release, absolve, etltflctben to deprive, divest, entfyefcett to exempt from. 3) The following reflective verbs govern the object in the genitive: entfe^ett to dismiss, remove, iiberfyeben to disburden, spare, to dispense, uberfitljren to convict. ©erfid)ern to assure, ttmrbigen to favour. fidj ermnern*) to remember. fid) enttooljuen to disaccustom one's self, fid) erbarmen to have mercy, fid) ertoefyren to ward off, keep away, fid) erjreuen to enjoy, fid) ritfymen to boast of. fid) fd)amen**) to be ashamed, fid) fcerfdjen to await, fid) t>erjid)era to make sure of, to secure. ©tdj atmefymen to interest one's self for, take care of. fid) bebtenen to make use of. \) fid) beftetgigen or befleigen to apply one's self, ftd) bemadjttgen to seize, to take possession of. jldj ent^atten to abstain from, to forbear, tcfc entlebtgen to get rid of. td) entfd)Iagen to part with, td) entjumen to recollect. 4) Observe also the following peculiar expressions with the genitive: $unger« fterben to die of hunger. (SineS plokftdjett £obe8 fkrben to die a sudden death. ©etneS SSegeS gcfyen to go one's way. ©te ftnb bc8 £obeg 1 you are a dead man ! ©ute8 9Jhttl)e8 fetn to be of good cheer. S)er SRufye £flegcn to take one's ease, to rest. S)er 2Jieinung (or) 2Utftd)t fetn to be of the opinion. SBittenS fetn to purpose, to intend, to be willing. 3De8 3tcte8 tterfeblen to miss one's aim. t ». M^rlW | * " »* worth the troub.e. (Stnen be« 2aube8 toertoetfen to exile some one. ©etneS SlmteS awten to attend to one's office or business. Reading Exercise. 145. 1. 3d) bebaif 3fyre« 23eiftanbe8 jefct ntcfyt meljr. 2Btr tooHen be8 empfatigenen 23ofen md)t gebenfen. 2Btr barren nodj ber (Snt* fdjeibimg 1 . 2Ba# fur eineS 3Serbredjen§ tft btefer 9ttatm angeflagt? Sttan flagt U)n eraeS 2ftorbe§ 2 an. 2Btfl)elm ift etiter Uttroafn-fyett ilberfuljrt tuorben. 30X [dat.) ©id) fitrdjten to be afraid of. Jtttem „ tremble. 13) ju is ©efyen to go to (a person). | ace. is required fid) nmnbern to fid) freuen „ nad)benfen \ fid) befinnen j " fid) unterfyalten , r fyerrfd)en fidj fdjamen „ fid) argern by: wonder at. rejoice „ reflect on. converse, reign over, be ashamed of. be vexed at. required by : fid) ftreiten to dispute, fidj betoerben „ apply for. required by: befreten to liberate. abiDeid)en „ deviate from. fid) nafyren „ feed on. is required by : fid) Ijiiten to beware of. toarnen fr caution. required by: mad)en to make. Reading -lesson. ^belmiit^tge &remtbfd)aft be$ beutf^en ®aifer$ ftaxtt V. TO far! V., t»eld)er f pater beutfdjer taifer tourbe, nad) bem £cbe fetneS ©rogfcaterS, beS $6ntg8 fterbtnanb, nad) 5ERat)rtt> retSte, um con bem tontgretd) ©panten 23efi£ ju nefymen, ^atte er einen franjofifdjen ©vafen, be 33offu, in feinem ©efolge. SDie ungetob'lmUdje ©roge* biefeS jungen Cannes, feine forperlidje ®e* u>anbtl)eit (dexterity), n>etd)e tfyn $um tteff lichen better mad)te, feme jucorfommenbe 2 SttenftbefUffenljett 3 unb feine iibrtgen (other) licbenSttmrbtgen (Sigenfdjaften fatten U)n bem taifer fo lieb gemad)t, bag er immer bet tfym bteiben mugte. (5mft Ijatte taxi eine groge Sagbpartie 4 ceranfiaUet* nnb fefcte 6 einem (Sber (boar) tief in ben 2Ba(b fyinein mit folder ^ifce nad), bag er ben 2Beg cerfefytte (lost), unb 9Hemanb iljm ju foigen toagte, al$ 7 be 23offu. 2lber biefer Sftann I;atte ba§ Unglucf, fid) an einem fcergifteten £>otd)e ju fcerttmnben, n>eld)en er nad) ba* maliger 8 ©etoofynfyett ber fpantfd)en 3ager bet fid) trug. ©obatb $arl ba$ Slut bemerfte, n>eld)e$ {etn Stebling 9 fcerlor (lost), fragte er iljn erfefyroden, ob ber (Sber tfyn fcernmnbet Ijabe. £)er ©raf erja^lte, roaS tljm begegnet nmre, unb fiigte bei, bag er 9ttemanb at8 7 fid) felbft 53orn>uvfe ju madden 10 fyabe. Lesson 49. 343 £)er $ontg fcmttte feljr tooljt bte tBbtlic^e SStrfung 11 be8 ©tfteS, foBalt) e8 ttt'8 33(ut itbergegan$en toare. Urn fetnen Steb* ling ju retten, bad)te er ntd^t an bte etgene SebenSgefafyr ; er fprang bom $ferbe, Befall and) bent ©rafen afynjtetgen 12 nnb fid) ganj fetnem 2Bttten jn nntertoerfen 13 . 3)er ©raf mad)te «oar (£tntoenbnngen 14 ; aber ber ®ontg beljarrte 1 * auf bcm ebeut iSnt* fdjiuffe, fetnem $rennb ba$ Seben $n retten, ober mtt tfym $u fterben. ©r rig bte ^tetbung fcon ber SBnnbe toeg,, fog ba3 93lut jn nneberljolten Sftalen 16 an8 nnb fpte e3 toeg. £>tefe entfcfyloffene unb fyod^erjtge §anbutng betolmte ben fontgltdjen ftrennb mtt ber ffreube, fetnem ifrennbe ba8 Seben gerettet §n ijaben, oljtte xiafy tljetttge gotgen fitr ba8 fetntge. 2Ber fottte ntcfyt btefe loafyre, anfopfernbe 17 ftrennbfdjaft eine3 ber ma^ttgften §errfd)er 18 ber ©rbe betonnbern! 1) uncommon tallness, size. 2) obliging. 3) readiness in serv- ice. 4) a hunting party. 5) to arrange. 6) nactyfefcen to pursue. 7) but. 8) in use at that time. 9) favourite. 10) to reproach, to blame. 11) effect. 12) to dismount. 13) submit. 14) objec- tions. 15) to insist. 16) repeatedly. 17) self-sacrificing. 18) ruler, monarch. Questions. 2H8 ber $ontg fterbtnanb i)on ©pcmten flarb, toer erbte (inherited) ba3 $b^tgretd)? SCarnrn retSte $art nadj Uftabrtb? 2Ber tuar in bem ©efolge $arls be8 gitaften? 2Celd)e (Stgenfdjaften jetcfyneten ben ©rafen be 23offn au«? 2Ba3 aefdfyafy etnmd bet etner arogen 3agb? 2Ba3 fitr etn Unglitcf fyatte be 33offu? 2113 ber $ontg ba3 93lnt bemerfte, toaS fragte er? TO tfarl erfufyr, toaS bem ©rafen begegnet toar, toa8 be fdjlofc er ju tfmn? 2Ba§ tfyat er at«bann? 2$a§ befall er bem ©rafen jn tljitn? Sottte be S3of[u e$ butben? 2lnf n)av3 bebarrte (or beftanb) ber $ontg? Inf toeldje UBetfe rettete $arl bem ©rafen ba8 Seben? 2Ba8 mnfj man in biefem gatte betonnbern? Forty ninth Lesson. REMARKS ON THE PREPOSITIONS. The use of the prepositions is of too various a nature to allow of its being determined by definite rules. Their departure from the original signification can only be shown by examples, and by observing certain ex- 344 Lesson 49. pressions. We accordingly add the following supple- mentary examples to Lesson 37 and L. 48, IV. I. On the use of some German prepositions. Sin. This preposition signifies commonly at Ex. : Semanb flopft an bie Xfyiive somebody knocks at the door. Other significations: (§:r ftarb a n ber (Sfyofera he died of the cholera. ©id) anlefynen an {ace.) to lean against. 2Bir gtauben an ®ett we believe in God. 2ln 3>emanb (ace.) benfen to think of some one. 3ttetfeln an (dat.) to doubt (of). ©id) tadjen an (dat.) to take revenge on. (§3 ift an nur jn fyielen it is my turn to play. ©in 23rtef an mid) (or fur mid)) a letter for me. 21 n ben Ufern be§ 9?I)em8 on the banks of the Rhine. 3dj IjaBe an ityx gefefyvieften I have written to him. tfranffurt am (an bem) Wlain Frankfort on the Main. SDjetl an einer <&atf)t nefymen to take part in something. 2lu3 Wlanad an ®elb for want of money. SRetd) an &erftanb rich in wit (sense). 21 n bem 2lrm ergreifen to seize by the arm. 21 n ber §anb toerttmnben to wound in the hand. QJuf (generally ow or upon), as: S)a§ 23udj Uegt auf bem £tfd) the book lies on the table. Further expressions: 21 uf ba8 Sanb gel)en to go into the country. 21 uf bie ^3oft geljen to go to the post-office. 21 uf ber 3fagb fetn to be out hunting. 21 uf metne Soften at my expense or cost. (5$ fommt auf ©te an it depends upon you. 21 uf ber ©trage in the street. | 2luf &etfen abroad. ©id) auf ben 2Beg mad) en to set out. 2luf &ttoa% (ace) 2ld)t gefcen to pay attention to something. 2Tuf atte galle \ . * , , . 2luf }eben gatt j a ' a11 events ' at any rate ' 2luf morgen for to morrow. 2luf furje &t\t for a short time. 2luf bem Sanbe in the country. 2luf 23efel)l be$ $iSmg$ by the kings command. 2luf btefe 2Beife in this manner. 2luf nrie lange?/or how long? 2luf immer, auf ettrig /or ever. On Prepositions. 345 Sluf ber 2Belt in the world. 2luf bet 9tetfe — travelling. £)a8 Ijetfet ouf SDeutfd) . . . that is in German. (S« ift bvet Stevtel auf fed)§ Ufyr it is a quarter to six. Qlu$ (generally out of or from) as : 3lu8 bem 3i mm er out of tne room. 5lu8 <8(^\Ddd)e from weakness. 2Ba§ terirb au3 mtr toerben what will become of me? 2lu3 $urd)t fterben to die from or twVA fear. 2lu3 ©rfa^tung /rom experience. Slug 35evfer)en by mistake, through inadvertence. 3tu§ ber 2ft obe o«* of fashion. 2fa$ bem $)eutfd)en m'S ftranjofifdje uberfefcen. To translate from German into French. 23ei (generally at, near, by) : Set btefen Shorten at these wdWs. Set tneiner Smfunft on my arrival. Set 9tocfyt fy night. Set 3 e ^ *» {good) time, betimes. Stetben ©te bet mir stay with me. Set £ofe feiu to be a* court. 3n ber ©d)fad)t bet Sftavengo at the battle o/" Marengo. Sei outer ©efuubljeit feiu to be in good health. Sei 4age3*$nbrud) at day-break. Set Ijeflem Xaat in broad day-light. Set Xag uub bet $ad)t by day and by night. Set £td)t arbeiten to work by candle-light. Sei ber §aub fiiijven to lead by the hand. Sehn ©j>iel at play. 3d) rief itjn bet feinem tauten I called him by his name. $)tefe§ ftet)t bet 3t)nen that depends upon you. 3d) f)(tb e tew ® e ^ ^ m ™ * nave n0 mone y about me. Set ftifdje feiu to be at dinner. | Set UU8 with us. Set ben 9tomem with or among the Romans. T)Vitd) (generally through), 3d)' bin burd) beu 2Mb gegangen. I have gone through the forest. 3)urd) etu Srett through a plank. £>urd) fteld)e3 9)ttttel? £y what means? 3dj nmvbe burd) emeu ^Pfetf bertountet. I was wounded by an arrow. !£)te gan^e 3 e ^ fyiuburd) during all the time. gun (generally for). (Sin SJttttel fur (or gegen) ba8 Baljmccfy. A remedy against the tooth-ache. 346 Lesson 49. <5tud fur <3tiicf piece by piece. 2Bort flit SBott word for word. 23itrgen fiir (SttoaS to answer for. <3ie forgt fur 3lfle8 she takes care of everything. ©eg en (generally against, towards). ©egen trie Sftauer against the wall, ©egen fe$3 Ufyr oy six o'clock. 9#Ubtfyattg gegen bte Written charitable to the poor, Unempftnblid? gegen insensible fo. ©egen baare Soejafytunj /or cash. (58 f inb gegen jvoei <£>tunben it is about two hours. S£aub gegen atle SBttteit deaf to all entreaties. 31jr Uebel tft jfttcfyts gegen bct8 fetntge (or femes). Your illness is nothing compared with his. 3tt (generally in or into) m 3n ^tanfretcfy w France. | 3n JPartS m Paris. 3m $riil)ltng m spring. | 3n etnem £on tw'M a tone. 3fn ber ©djule fetn to be a* school. 3m (Smft seriously, in earnest. 3n 23erjtt>etflung fetn to be in despair. ©tdj in ten finger fdjnetben to cut one's finger. 3m 93egrtff fetn or ftefyen to be on the point. 3n bie ftlutyt jagen or f(fy(agen to put fo flight. 91&&) (generally after). Waif §cmfe gefyen to go home. 2)er 2Beg nad) ber <5tabt the way to the town.. 3$ gelje na-cfy SBten I go to Vienna. yia§ 23elteben as you like. Sftacb metnen S3efe^len according to my orders. yiaq SSerlauf toon atoet SWonatcn after two months. 9lacfy (or in) afyfyabettfcfyer £)rbnung in alphabetical order. 3emcmb fragt natty 31)iien somebody asks for you. Uefctt (generally over). Ueber ben Men 53ergen over the high mountains. Ueber ben fthtg fefcen to cross the river. SBerfitgen ©ie iiber metnen 23eutel dispose of my purse. (53 tft iiber etn fyctlbeS 3aljr it is above six months. §eute iiber ad)t £age this day week. 2)en ©ommer iiber during the summer. ©tcfy iiber ©ttoaS (fcer)tt)unbern to be astonished at. ©torf ftegt iiber bent gluffe. [strength. The village is situated over the river. On Prepositions. 347 Um (generally round or about). Um'8 $euer Return about the fire-place. 3d) totfl tlm um Watt) fragen I will consult him. 3dj bttte <5te um SSerjeiljung I beg your pardon. Um ©elt> fpteten to play for money. •» Um hJteotel Ufyr? at what o'clock? Um cin Uljr at one o'clock. (53 tft um iljn gefd)efyen it is over with him. SBefiimmern <5ie fid) nidjt um mid) don't care for me. (St Ijctt ftcfy feljr um mid) terbtent gemad>t. He has had a great deal of trouble with me. £)tefer 28eg ijt um jtuet ©tunben (Snellen) furjer. This road is shorter by two leagues (miles). Unter (generally under) . Unter ber SRegterung $arl8 be8 ©vogen. in the reign of Charlemagne. Unter $tt>olf Sfa^ren under twelve years. 28a3 fitr em Uuterfdjteb unter (jtoifdjett) . . . What difference between . . . Unter btefer 23ebmgung on that condition. Unter <5ege( gejjen to set sail. Unter btefen fzftannern among these men. td) fiirdjten t>or to be afraid of. ©dnutt ©or ©dfyrttt step by step. ©id) ©or (SttoaS fyitten to beware of. SSor ber ©tctbt toolmen to live outside the town. SBor ^reube toemen to weep with joy. 2$or tlnfer Uegen to be at anchor. 348 Lesson 49. 3u (generally to). 3" jetter 3 e ^ at ^ at time. £>ie £iebe jum SRvfym the love of glory. 3ur 3 e ^ beS 2Iuguftu« a/ the time of Augustus. 3u §aufe fein to be a* home. 3d) begab mid) ju ifym I went to him. 3u SBette geljen to go to bed (to sleep). 3u SBagen in a carriage. | 3 U ^Pferb on horseback. 3u $ufj on foot. | 3 U gtetdjer 3 e ^ a * tne same time - 3« Sfyren ber $onigin in honour of the queen. £u Sanb unb JU SBaffer by land and by water. 3um ©litcf fortunately. | 3 um 33etfptel for example. 3u biefem ©ebraud) (3toecf) f° r this purpose. 3um ©efangenen madjen to make prisoner. £)a§ Sftag ju einem $leibe neljmen to take one's measure. Beading Exercise. 147. 3d) benfe oft an ©ie. 3d) fonnte meine 9teife ntd)t fortfefcen au& Mangel ait ©elb. 2)ie ©d)iffe ftnb bereits auf fyoljer ©ee. £)ie $ogel, roeld^e un8 im §erbfte oerlaffen, fel)ren im ftriifyltng wtM. (5$ toar im ©ommer con 1840. 3jt ber §err ju §aufe? yJein, er ift auSgegangen. (5r fpet^t fyeute in ber ©tabt. 3dj bin auf offener ©trafce befdjtmpft 1 toorben. 3)ie ftetne ©d)aar mad)te fid) 23afyn 2 burd) bie ^einbe. 2Kein t ©djtoager toirb f^ateften^ in brei £agen anfommen. SBatjrenb biefeS ganjen SftonatS Ijat e8 nidjt ein einjtge§ Sftal gere^net. £)er §unb {prang unter bem £ifd) Ijeroor. Som (Srften bt8 jum Sefcten. ©ett toann ift Suite etne SBaife? ©ie ift e$ feit ifjrer Smbljett. $nfang8 fatten bie Corner fetne ^eftungen 3 ; fie fe^ten ifyr ganjeS SSertrauen auf ifyre §eere 4 , toeld)e fie IcmgS ber gluffe legten, too fie oon (Sntfernung 5 gu (Sntfernung SHjurme errid)teten 6 , urn bie ©olbaten barin unter* jubringen 7 . 1) to insult. 2) way. 3) fortress. 4) army. 6) distance. — 6) to erect. 7) to shelter. 148. SUeranber ber ©roge ftarb in ber SBlfttlje be8 SebenS. Slefop blithe &ur 3cit ©olon'S. $or brei £agen Ijaben mx einen 2Boif erlegt 1 . 3d) toerbe oor ad)t £agen nid)t auSgeljen; ber Slrjt Ijat e$ mir oerboten. 3d) toerbe ©ie rad) ben 9#arft»reifen bejafylen. ftranj ber (Srfte tourbe in Statien gefangen unb nac^ ©oanien abgefii^rt. ©egen 3lbenb fa^ man am §immel eine feurtge £ugel 2 . Wdn 33ater ift urn jtoet U^r abgeret^t. 33 ei feiner Slbreife toar bie gan^e ^amitie oerfammett 3 . ©r toirb in ^5ari§ oon feinem 33ruber mit offenen Hrmen emofangen toerben. ©inb ©ie ju Sanb ^terl^er gefommen? Sa f id) btn mit ber (Sifenbalm gefommen. 3Jlan mug nic^t au§ (Stgennufc 4 ba8 ®ute t^un. 1) killed. 2) globe. 3) assembled. 4) selfishness. On Prepositions. 349 SRetfen Bit ju $ferb ober ju SBagen? JMneS ton betben; tdj teifc ju, ©dn'ffe. 3d) banb em Safdjentud) urn feitien 2Irm. 3)a3 $tnb toetnte toor greuben 5 . §etbetbercj liegt an ben Ufern 6 be8 ^ete«. 5 ) joy- 6) banks. II. How to express some English prepositions, above. Above, when it expresses time or number, so as to signify more than or longer than, is rendered in German by fiber or meljr aU. Ex.: The fight lasted above four hours. 2)a8 ©efecfyt bauerte fiber (or mefyr al$) ©ter (Stunben. It is above (over) twenty miles from here. (58 ift liber (meljr at$) jroanjtg SMten con Ijier. about. About: 1) in the sense of round is to be rendered by um; 2) in the signification: concerning, it is fiber: 3) in speaking of things which people carry about them, it is translated bet. Ex.: 1) All thronged about the prince. 5We brcmgten ftcfy um ben gm:(ien. 2) I will speak to him about this affair. 3d) toerbe iiber btefe 2lngelegeiu)ett mit tljm fpredjen. We shall consider about this matter. 2Btr tuerben iiber btefe <&a&iz nadjbenfen. 3) I have no money about me. 3d) §aU fein ®etb bet mtr. at. At: 1) is most commonly rendered by bet or an with- out or with an article ; 2) after nouns or verbs denoting derision, anger, surprise, joy, sorrow 8fc. at is rendered by tiber with the accusative ; 3) at is translated bet, when, in English, it precedes the words house etc., either ex- pressed or understood. Ex. : 1) We were at dinner. 2Bir hwren betm (or am) Sfttttageffen (bet £tfd)). 2) She laughed at him fie (adfyte iiber tt)n. I am surprised at what you say. 3d) bin erftaunt fiber ba«, n>a8 efy, 3afynn>elj Jjaben :c. Ex. : I have constantly a pain in my head. 3dj Ijafce immer ^opftoelj. 2) /w after words denoting hurting, wounding fyc. and preceding a possessive adjective with any part of the body, is to be rendered by a n with the definite article : The child fell down and was hurt in his shoulder. 2)a8 £inb pet unb oertounbete fid) an ber ©gutter. 3) In adverbial expressions of day-time, in is expressed in German either by a m or by the Genitive case with or without the article. Ex. : In the morning am Sftorgen, ilftorgenS or be$ SCftorgeuS. In the evening am Slfcenb or 2lbenb« or be$ $benb8. on or npon. 1) On or upon is most generally aitf. Ex.: He climbed upon (up) the tree er fletterte auf ben 33aum. 2) On or upon after the verb to live is rendered toon : The prisoner lives on bread and water. £>er ©efangene lebt ©on 23rob unb SBaffer. 3) After to play, on is not translated at all. Ex. : You play on the violin, and I play on the piano, ©ie fptelen SBtottne unb td) fptele ^footer.* 4) The preposition on before the days of the week and with dates is translated am. Ex.: Come on Sunday fommen ©ie am ©onntaa,. On the twelfth of May am (or ben) jtootften 2ttat. oyer. This preposition is commonly rendered in German by fiber, but it must be expressed by Ooritber or ooroei (seldom au$), when it denotes an action ended. Ex.: As soon as the rain will be over. ©obatb (ate) ber 9tea.en ooritber fetn nrirb. Is dinner over? ift bag SMttageffen Ooriiber? Church is over (out) bie Wafyt tft au8. 352 Lesson 49. with. 1) With is rendered by tot after the verbs to starve, to die, to perish 8fc. Ex. : He died with cold er jtctrfc nor $alte. Note. To die of is translated fterfcen an. Ex.: He died of his wounds er ftarb an feincn SSunbcn. 2) With must not be expressed after the following verbs : to meet with fcegegnen (Ace.) ; to trust with anner* trauen ; to reproach with fcortoerfen ; to agree with toofy( obet gut fcefommen. These German verbs govern the person in the dative, and the object in the accusative without a preposition. Ex. : He trusted me with his son. (£r nertrante mir fetnen ©otyn an. I reproached him with his ingratitude. 36) tnarf iljm feme Unbanffcarfeit cor. Remark. Prepositions are placed in German before the interrogative and relative pronouns which they govern; in English they are sometimes placed after: Whom do you speak tot mtt toem fpredjen @ie3 What's that for? $U »a« if* t>a8? The man whom you are interested for. SDer Sttann, fitr ben ©te fid? tntereffiren. jtnfga6e. 149. 1. Where are you going? I am going into the country. Goethe died at Weimar in the year (tm Saljre) 1832. My friend arrived in the beginning of summer. Is this book to (nadj) your taste i ? No, I do not like it (It does not please me) . I met that gentleman on my journey in Italy. The poor man had to choose between slavery 2 and death. Why has she been so unjust towards her parents? Did you arrive before or after four o'clock? Before the church there are three high poplars 3 . I found this letter among my papers. Whisky 4 is the source of great evils 5 among that people. They (man) told me amongst other [things] that the ship had been taken by the enemy (pi.). 2. He has sold all his horses except one or two. I went from Hamburgh to Altona. Now we turn to (towards) [the] south. Among the German merchants in London, there are many beneficent 6 men. He lives with his brother. The tailor will come to your house to-morrow. Where do you come 1) ©efdjmacf. 2) ©Itafcerei. 3) ^apptMumt. 4) kr 23ramttwem. 5) Uebet. 6) too^attg. Lesson 49. 353 from? I come from my aunt's. The wooden horse was outside the walls 7 of Troy 8. The patient is at present out of (auger) danger. Nobody besides myself was present 9 . Out of (fcon) sixty soldiers who tried the attack 10 , twenty five fell into the hands of the enemy. The dog sprang [out] from under the table. 7) aftauern. 8) £roja. 9) gegentoarttg. 10) Smgrtff, m. 150. 1. My father was not above twenty two years old, when he was married 1 . My uncle's country-house 2 is very hand- some, but it cost him above eighty thousand florins. It is above a year since my friend set off for 3 America. Rome was built by Romulus. The poor man was driven 4 out of his house by his creditors 5 . I will get up to morrow at six o'clock. Were you at Mrs. D.'s ball last night? I will pay you at the end of this month. I rejoice greatly at your good luck 6. She always smiles 7 at everything which is said. Where was your sister this morning? She was at her aunt's. My box 8 is one foot and a half deep [by] two wide and four long. Harold was wounded by an arrow 9 . 2. William the second was killed by an arrow in the New- forest. Charles was wounded in his arm and not in his leg. I have very often [a] tooth-ache, [fr^ora] what instrument does your sister play? She plays on the piano. Men (man) do not live only on bread and meat, but on the grace 10 of God. That happened on the 12th [of] March. I am in the habit 11 of taking a cup of coffee, as soon as (the) dinner is over. When you meet with a poor man, 3 never * reproach 2 him [with] his poverty 12 . France extends 13 from the Rhine to (bt§ JU) the Atlantic Ocean. What does he complain 14 of? 1) to be married = ftdj toerfyeiratfyen. 2) SanbfyauS. 3) nadj. 4) tretben. 5) ©taubiger. 6) ©tthf. 7) tadjem. 8) bie fltfte. 9) bcr *Pfeif. 10) bie ©nabe. 11) to be in the habit getoofcnt fetn or pffegen. 12) 8rmttt&. 13) ft$ erflredcn. 14) Hogen iiber [Ace), or fi<$ beflagen. Beading- lesson. £uca$ Sranad). 2uca« $ranad) toar ntdjt nur ber arogte Scaler feiner &ext, fonbern aucfy etn 2ftann son eblem §er$en unb grogem SBerftanb. (Scfyon in feiner Sngenb tsenbete er feme 3ett fefyr gut an, unb baljer lam e8, bag er trie! friifyer etn niifcltcfyer Sttenfcfy nmrbe at« Slnbere. 3m nennjelmten Safyre fetneS liters lernte 1 tfyn ber ^urfiirft (Elector) con , „toar ac^t 3af)re ait ©« getang mir nidjt efyers, (Sure Sttajeftat fttttfi^eit $u madjen, al$ bi§& 3fyr §ofmeifter 9 fcerfdjiebene 28affen an bie 235anb Ijangen lieg. SBafyrenb <5k biefe friegerifdjen Snftrumente mit un* certcanbten (fixed, staring) Slugen betradjteten, Ijatte id) Stit, 3\)x 93Ub $u enttuerfen 10 ." — „S3tttc (ask) bir eine ©nabe con mir au3, Scaler !'* fagte ber $aifer. SDemiitljig pet ifjm ^ranad) ju ^itgen unb hat, mit Straiten in ben ^ugen, nid)t urn etne tete ber ^aifer an ben Scaler? 2Ba§ anttoortctc t§m ^ranad)? 2Be(d>e @nabe hat ftd^ ber Wlaltx uon bem ftatfer au§? ©etua^rte i^m ber ^aifer feine SBittc? 2Ba^ fagte er ju i^m? 2Bie eljrte ber ^urfiirft ben Scaler, nadjbem er feine ^tei^eit ttieber erlangt Ijatte? 355 Fiftieth Lesson. On Construction (SBortfolge). German construction differs very much from English, and requires great attention. Every trifling deviation cannot be explained, but the principal rules must be stated here. I. On the principal or simple sentence. A. The common construction. As in other languages, the essential components of a principal sentence are the suhject and predicate or verb : 2)a3 $tnb ftyaft. | £>aS fttnb tft tranl. Further there are the objects or governments, and the ad- verbial enlargements. The object is twofold, viz. the direct one i. e. the Accusative, Dative or Genitive, and the in- direct (with prepositions). The adverbial enlargement is of different kinds, viz. : of time, of place , of manner fyc. Ex. : ®ct« ttnb ift frattf getoefen. | 3)er fnafce fdjlagt ben §unb. 2)er 23ote fcrad^te metrtem $ater einen 23rief. 2)er ffrembe tooljnt in etnem ©aftljof (hotel). ®er ffrembe reiste geftern itadj ^3art3. $)er ©artner fd>icfte mtr fyeute bte erften 23(nmen au§ metnem 2lm SKanbe be3 23acfye3 ftefyt ein fteineS §an3. [®arten. Rules. 1) In the regular order, the subject, which may be a substantive or a pronoun, begins a sentence and there- fore stands in the first place, then the verb (predicate) or its substitute (the auxiliary) follows in the second, and the object in the third place. Ex. : 12 3 2)er $nctfce fucfyte fetnen Sftng. 2) The adverbial of place comes last of all. If the sentence contains also an adverbial of time, this must precede the accusative (object) . Ex. : £)er Sfrtafce fudjte g eft em fetnen Sting nBeraH. 3) With compound tenses the complement of the aux- iliary, be it a Participle or an Infinitive, comes after the predicate, object and adverb, generally in the last place of the sentence. Ex. : 3dj bin lange tranf gctoefen. 23* 356 Lesson 50. £)er Sfrto&e §at ben §unb auf ben $epf gefcfylagen. 2)er SSater toirb in einigen £agen fcon $ari8 jnritcffommen. 4) When there are two objects in a sentence, generally that of the person [Dat.) precedes the thing. Ex. : 2)er Secret pattern ©cpler {Dat.) ein23nd) {Ace) gelieljen. The master has lent the pupil a book. (Sic IjaBen ben.armen Sftann (Ace.) feinem ©deflate (Z)«0 They have left the poor man to his fate. [iiberlaffen. 5) When the two cases are both persons, the accusa- tive generally precedes the dative. Ex. : 3dj Ijafce 3f)ren ©o^n t>em giirften empfofylen. I have recommended your son to the prince. 6) When one of the two objects is expressed by a personal pronoun, it must precede the noun. Ex. : §err $eter §at mir ein ©efdjent gemadjt. Mr. Peter has made me a present. (£r Ijctt bir (Sljnen, ifym, tljr h.) einen guten Vtafy gegeben. He has given you (him, her etc.) good advice. §ctben ©ie e8 Sfyrem greunbe erjcifylt? Have you told (it) your friend? 2)er 93vtefbote Ijctt nn8 (Sljnen, iljnen) etnen 23rief gebrcttfyt. The postman brought us (you, them) a letter. 7) When both objects are personal pronouns, the smal- lest comes first; when both of them are monosyllabic the accusative comes first : St ljat fie (or e8) ft)nen (end?, 3tynen) gejeigt. He has shown it to them (to you). 3dj famt mid) feiner (ifjrer) nidjt erinnern. I cannot remember him (her). 3d) fjct&e fie U)m (not i^m fie) gejeigt. I have shown them to him. (Sr fyat fid) {Ace.) mir fcorgefteflt. (See 5.) He has introduced himself to me. Note. 2ft ir and bit, however, may occur indifferently be- fore or after the accusatives e$, ifyn, fie. Robert Ijat e8 mir (or mir e8, or mir U)n) gelieljen. Robert has lent it to me. 8) The adverbial expressions of time, viz.: true ad- verbs as well as substantives with prepositions denoting a time, generally precede the object (unless it is a pro- noun without a preposition , see 9), and take the third place, immediately after the predicate or auxiliary: On Construction. 357 3d) Ijabe geftem etnen 23rtef an ttjn (see 14) gefdjrteben. Sttein SBruber tarn btefen 9ftorgen fcon §ambnrg jnriid. 2)er ©eneral nrirb etltgft ettten 23rief an ben gftrjten fenben. Sty Ijabe nenttdj metnen $reunb 21. gefefyen. Mr toerben in bret £agen nacfy §ambnrg reifen. §err duller nrirb in etner ©tnnbe ba3 ^atfet erfyalten. 9) Adverbs of time cannot precede personal pronouns without a preposition. These always come first. Ex. : 3d) Ijabe tljn (or fie) Ijeute itidjt gefeljen. (§r nrirb nn8 ((Sud), ©tc) mot gen befndjen. 10) Adverbs of manner follow the direct object (ace.) : <5ie Ijaben 3Ijren 23rtef fd)5n gefdjrteben. 11) Of all adverbs and adverbial expressions those of place are the last and should be placed close to the Parti- ciple, when the verb stands in a compound tense: $)er Sftamt l)at Ijeute ba$ ftnb itberatl gefndrt. 2)er $nabe Ijat feine Kufgabc fer)t fdjon gefdpeben. 2Btr Ijaben nnfere ^fttdjten mit ^r en ben erfMt. 3)te ^etnbe Ijaben ba3 ©an8 au{ alien (Setten nmjtettt. The enemies have surrounded the house on all sides. 12) But when the verb is in the Present or Imperfect, such adverbs must come last: 2)er 2ftamt fudjte fetn $tnb fiber all. SBir erfitttten nnfere ^5fttd>t mtt grenben. £>te $etnbe nmfteQten ba3 §an8 anf alien (Set ten. Note. Adverbs never precede the verb standing in the Present or Imperfect, as: I always say id) fage ttttnter. 1 3) Adverbs of place and manner (not time) are there- fore generally placed after the negation ntd)t. Ex.: $)er $i3ntg tft ntdjt Jjter getoefen. £)er $i5ntg tft fyeute ntdjt fyter getoefen. ®er 33ote Jjat ntdjt tang genug getsartet. 2)a8 ©djiff tft ntdjt fdjnell gefaljren (or gefegelt). 3fyr S3rief tft ntdjt fd)6n gefajrteben. 14) Pronouns with a preposition follow the adverb and the object: 3d) Ijabe geftern btefeS 23ud) bet 3ljnen gefeljen. 15) Of two adverbial expressions of time the true adverb precedes the other formed with a substantive: 3d? toerbe m erg en urn jetjn Uljr abretfen. §err $L. gel)t imnter be$ 2(benb8 fpa^teren 358 Lesson 50. 16) The negation ntcfyt always follows the direct object (Accus.). Ex.: 3d) finbe mem gebermefjer nid)t. 3d) fann mein gebermefjer nicfyt ftnben. 3d) ^aBe mem §et>erntefjer nitfct gefunben. grtebrid) lernte feine 9IufgaBe nia^t gut. £)er 2ftinifter Ijat bie deputation nod) nicBt emtofangen. The minister has not yet received the deputation. Note. In questions however nidjt sometimes precedes the object. We say: Jpafcen ©te ba§ 33u&) ntd)t gelefen? but §afce id) ntc^t bas 9?ed?t, [o ju tyanfcetn? 17) But when the object is preceded by a preposition, which is called indirect object, the negation nt<$t goes before it. Ex. : 2Bir ftoreefcen nid)t toon biefem SBucr). ©toiele ntcrjt mit bem SDcefjer. | ©efyen ©ie ntdjt in ba« §au«. 2#an ^at ben 3)ieB nidjt im belter gefunben. Reading- lesson. 2>er cblc Offtgier. 3n bem ler^ten $viege, ben graufretd) gegen ©toanien fiifyrte, fatten bie beutfd^en £>ilfgtiutotoen etn ©tabtcfyen an ben Ufevn beg fpanifdjen ftluffeS £ajo Befe£t, aBer nur eine fd;toad)e 23efat5ung (garrison) toon 22 5fiann bartn gelafjen. £>iefe rourben auf &\x* reben 1 ftoantfdjer ©olbaten ton ben (Sinroblmem ermovbet. 9?ur etner entfam 2 unb Bradrte bie 9?ad)rid;t toon ber Blutienn £)eutfd)e toaren au§gefd)tdt, ben fdmtapd>ften Sob U)rer i&riiber ju radjen, unb ifyr 2lnfiifyrer roar im gamen §eer al$ einer ber tatoferften, entfdfyloffenften » unb mut^igften £)f* fijiere Befannt. 2lBer er tear nod) mefyr al$ ba§. ©ein eble§, menf&enfreunb* lidjeS £ er 5 rourbe mit ©raufen 9 erfiiflt, als er ben 2luftrag i<> toer* naBm. 2)od) fonnte unb rooflte er iljn nid)t aBfefynen 11 . 2)a8 nalje fdjredlidje <2d)icffal fo toieler ungludlid)er Sftenfdjen, bie an bem Sftorbe grogtentljetfs unfdmlbtg roaren, ergreift feine ebie @eele. 8u)on fteljt er im ©eifte bie ©tabt auflobern 12 , Ijort ba8 $lage* gefd^rei ber grauen, ba« 3fammergef^rei 13 ber tinber unb ©reife, 1) persuasion. 2) to escape. 3) vengeance. 4} company. — 5) to turn. 6) despair. 7) goods. 8) resolute. 9) horror. 10) order. 11) to decline, to refuse. 12j to blaze up. 13) lamentation. On Construction. 359 ba§ Sftodjem 14 ber orfte1)er unb bte 23ett>eljner jene3 $(efier3 immer benommen? 2Ba3 begefjrte bafelbft ber Jpauytmamt? 2Ber beglettete iljn? B. On the Inversion. The foregoing rules refer to the regular and com- mon construction. This regular arrangement of words, however, may be frequently inverted, by removing one of the parts of speech from its usual place to the be- ginning of the sentence. 1) The inversion of the subject and predicate (verb) ap- pears as in English: a) In interrogative and exclamatory sentences: ©lauben ©tc btefem -iDcanne? do you believe this man? §at ber ^ottjetbtener ben $)teb gefangen? Has the constable caught the thief? 360 Lesson 50. (5 o lite ber Sflann e$ getjort Ijaben? Should the man have heard it? 2Barnm Ijat ba8 $tnb getoeint? why did the child cry? b) In imperative sentences, where however in the singular the pronoun-subject is seldom expressed: $ange (bn) an JU lefen begin (thou) to read. £efen a tljn (e8) 9ftemanb gefefjen Ijatte (for Sftiemanb u?n or e8) . 2Benn 3tynen em fd)ted)ter dlafy gegefcen totrb. — 4) The inversion of the adverbial expressions. Ad- verbial expressions of all kinds, especially those of time, very frequently begin the sentence, when much stress is to be laid on them. Here, too, the verb goes before the subject. Ex. : On Construction. 361 $)ief en Sttorgen ging §err ©riin art metnem §anfe corbel. This morning Mr. Green passed my house. ^rennbltdj briicfte fie mtr bte §anb. In a friendly manner, she shook my hand. Ueoeralt finbet man bte ©pnren ber SBei^ett ®ottc3. Everywhere man finds the traces of the wisdom of God. Unter bent grogen ©tetne kg erne flange. Under the large stone, [there] lay a snake. 5) According to the stress laid upon the words, the following and similar sentences may be expressed in various ways : 2Btr fonnen biefeS 33uct) in Sonbon ntdjt oefommen. $)tefe§ 23ndj fonnen nnr in Sonbon nid)t befommen. 3n Sonbon fonnen nnr btefeS ^8uct) ntdjt befommen. •Sftetn ^rennb f)at geftern nad) tangent §arren ben erfefjnten 23rtef oon feinem 33ater erfyalten. After waiting long, my friend received yesterday the wished for letter from his father. ® eft em fjat mem ftrennb nac^ langem §arren ben erfefyntett 23rtef toon fetnem SSater erfyalten. ^adt) langem barren tjat geftern mem^rennb ben erfetjnten 23rtef oon fetnem $ater erfyatten. S)en erfefjnten 23rtef oon fetnem $ater t)at mem ftremtb geftern nadj langem §arren erfyatten. II. Accessory sentences. I) An accessory sentence is a completing addition to one member of the principal sentence in form of a clause,*) and always begins either with a relative pronoun or a relative adverb. The order of the subject, object and adverbial undergoes no change in accessory sentences; only the verb (predicate) leaves its usual place for the end of the sentence. When compound, the participle or in- finitive precedes the auxiliary. Ex. : $)er 25em, weld) en tdj oon 3t)nen fanfte, ift ntd)t gnt. The wine which I bought of you, is not good. £)a$ 33nd), ba$ id) oerloren r)atte, ift ioteber gefnnben. The book I had lost, has been found again. *) For instance, in the sentence: I found a bottle containing on , the two latter words containing poison are a completing ition t q^o ttle. If you give them the form of a clause = which ained Jftum toetdjje ©ift etttfytdt, you have an accessory sentence. 362 Lesson 50. 2)er ©tod, to omit id) u)n fd)tug, ift §erbrod)en. The stick with which I struck him, is broken. 3d) fragte ifyn, to arum er fo ernft to a re. I asked him why he was so serious. 2) When there are two Infinitives (one Infinitive for the Participle), the auxiliary Ijaben precedes the two: £)a$ £afd)entud), roeld)e§ id) Jjabe toafd)en taffen. S)cr 23ad), in toeldjem (too) id) tfm fyatte baben fefyen. Sfcadjbem id) ifjn Ijatte rufen fyoren. Jtufgafle. 151. London is a very large town. I have bought a beautiful garden for my children. We have had clear days but dark nights. We cannot see all the numberless (jafyUofen) stars. Henry was to-day more industrious than yesterday; he will be the most industrious to-morrow. They went away from here at four o'clock. He often visited us formerly. They entered 1) (in) the wood and 2 soon ! perceived the habitations 2 ) of men. I do not know the man whom you are speaking of. The first battle (which) they fought 3 was with the Saracens 4 . I did not know who it was. To be sure (©etutjj), I have told it (to) him. I am infinitely obliged 5 [to] you. I was wander- ing 6 through the street with a heavy heart. Finally ((Snbltdj) we discovered 7 the truth. I have not been anywhere (no- where) . — Prosperity 8 gains friends, and adversity tries (prttft) them. Without a friend the world is but (nur) a wilderness 9 . — What does this man teach your children? He teaches them [to] read and write. The tempest 10 increased 11 , and the ships lost sight of each other (oevloren . . . cm$ bem ©efttfyt). 1) to enter eintrcten. 2) SBo^mtng. 3) ttefcrtt. 4) ©ara$enen. 5) im» enbftd? oerbunben. 6) toanbern. 7) entbecfen. 8) bag ©liicf. 9) 2Mb; nijj, f. 10) bcr abe auf bem nad)ften 2£eg nad) bem Softer ^ $u fliid)ten. 3)er 3"3 5 beginnt, bwdj ben $ftonbfd)ein begiinfttgt. SJciitter, u)re ©anglinge^ an bev Sruft ober auf bem 9?iicfen, er* offnen ben 3^8 ; b'anlbare (Sortie tragen bie gutter. <&o getangen 1) companion. 2) disguised. 3) slipped out. 4) destined, see p. 332, V. 5) procession, march. 6) baby. Lesson 50. 363 (reach) fie an ba$ Softer, mo ber $rior fie nut feinen Sftondjen gaftfrennblicfy i aufnimmt. SSafyrenb beffen I?at bet rcadere §aupt* mann feme Seute anf einem anbern SBege gegen bie ©tabt gefiibrt. (5r lajjts pc unningen, bocfy fo, bag jener Beg jnm Softer offen WicB; et befiefytt t>en juritdgebltebenen Sftannern augerfyalb bet ©tabt ©trofy nnb §ot$ anfeutfyiitmen 9 . (§3 gef dn'efyt *<\ un t Bait) lobern *uf aflen ©eiten Ijelle, Ijolje glammen in bet Sttorgenrctfye anf; aber ^tnter bent genet rdjten ftdjer bie fcerfdjonten (spared) §aufer nnb §ittten, unb — an ^lunberung nnrb nid)t gebadjt. 9?acfy $n>eiftunbigem 23ranbe nnrb ein Gntbote 11 an ben ©eneral gefefyidt, unt *ftaa)(ag 12 ju erbitten. 3)iefer fefyrte mit bem 23efel)le $urud, bag bie ©tabt big SDiittag brennen niiiffe **. ©ogteid) rctrb ber itbrige SBorratV 4 *>on £olj nnb ©trofy $ur Unterfyaltnng 15 be8 fteuerS Ijerbeigefdjafft nnb baS ©ebalfe 16 einiget offentticfyen £anfer, bie man, nm bod) (StmaS ju jerftoren, niebergeriffen 17 fyatte, mirb jn gteidjem &toede fcerbraudjt. (Snbltd; fdjlagt bie jroolfte ©tnnbe nnb giebt ba$ Sdfytxi juw Slbjngeis, bet etnem roaljren ^riumplmtge gleidjt; benn nnter ben Saufenben ift nidjt (Siner, ber nicf/t greubentljranen roeint. SSegleitet ton ben mann* Udjen 33etool)nent ber ©tabt, roetcfye ben ©olbaten bie ©emefyre nnb 2omifteri9 tragen, fie mit iljren SDanffagungen nnb ©egenS* mitnfdjen 20 iiberfdnttten 21 , gelangt ber bunte 22 §aufe $um ftofter. £)te »on bem fernen gener erfdjredten ©reife, Setber nnb $inber eilen ben ^ommenben mit angfttidjen $ragen entgegen. ?Iber batb nnrb ber fitrdjterltdje 3^ e if el23 i ux frofylidjen 24 ©enngfyeit, ate fie erfufyren 25 , bag ber eble ftauptmann nid)t nnr u)r Seben, fonbern aud) U)re §aufer nnb ©itter gerettet fyabe. ©te fatten tor il)m nieber, fte luff en tfjm bie §anbe; er fann fid? ber tebfyafteften Sugerungen 2 ^ be3 SDanfeS fawn ertoefyren 27 . 7) hospitably. 8) causes, see p. 285, 5. — 9) to heap or pile up. 10) they do so. 11) courier. 12) pardon. 13) see p. 305, § 3 and p. 307, § 7. — 14) store. 15) to support. 16) timber. 17) pull down, demolish. 18) departure. 19) knapsack. 20) bless- ings. 21) load. 22) the mingled troop. 23) doubt. 24) joyful. 25) learn. 26) manifestations. 27) to keep off. Questions. 2Bann lefyrte ber §anptmann jnritd? 2Ba8 murbe au$ feinem 23egtettet? SBettfye (Stnlabnng entfyiett baS ©cfyretben be§ $rior§? 2Bie mar ber 3 U 9 t>* x $(itd)tftnge befd)affen? 3Bie Iteg ber £anptmann bie bebro^te ©tabt umrtngen? 55on ma§ lagt er ein $ener anmac^en? SBrannten bie $a'ufer? 5ln ma§ mtrb ntd)t gebaa^t? 2Ba8 gefd)ie^t nad^ jmetftiinbtgem SBranbe? SQBel^e 5lntrcort Uadjtt ber (SUbote? 2Ba3 gefc^ie^t nun ferner? 364 Lesson 51. 2Bem gletd)t ber 2Ib$ng bet Xrnppen? 311$ bte ©otbaten abjogen, n>a3 tl)aten bte banner? 2BaS tfjaten fete ©retfe unb ^rauen, al« man betm Softer an* 2Ba8 Ijatte t^nen ber cblc §auptmann gerettet ? _ [tangte? {To be continued.) Fifty first Lesson. On the compound sentence. After having explained the simple sentence with its components and enlargements, we proceed to a short exposition of the compound sentence. The compound sentence is formed: I. by co-ordination, II. by subordination. I. Co-ordinate compound sentences. (^a^erbmbungen.) There are three ways of co-ordinating sentences: a) They can be placed simply beside each other without any connection. Ex. : £)te Sftofje hnefyerten, e8 fdmtetterten Xrompeten; Die ftafynen ftatterten, bte ftafyrt toarb angetreten. 3d) evjafytte tfym 2lUe3; er nmftte nod) 9ttd)t3 bacon, ©efyen <5te red)t§, id) toerbe itnfS gefyen. &) They are connected by a demonstrative pronoun : $art ber ©roge nnb Napoleon toaren jroet madjttge $rteger; jener oerbanb (joined) bte grogte SBetstjett mit ber grofjten Xapferfett; btefer eroberte faft ganj (Suropa. ©a§ ©tttcf nnb bte Sugenb ftnb ntdjt tmmer oerbunben; bte$ nrirb burd) bte ®efd)td)te alter 3eiten beftattgt. Note. Sentences joined by a relative pronoun are not con- sidered as compound, but as accessory sentences (seep. 361). 3d) fyabe ba8 SBudj getefen, toefdjeS @te mir geUefyen fyaben. c) By means of the co-ordinative conjunctions (see p. 237) : nnb, obex, aber, attetn, fonbern, benn, fotooljl — ate. Ex. : £)er 2Btnter merging, unb ber ^ru^ling tarn. "Winter passed and spring came. 3cfy oerfaffe ©tc jefct, aber tdj toerbe balb juriirffe^ren. I leave you now, but I shall soon return. $arl nmrbe ©olbat; benn er tear ber SDftgfyanbfang itberbrufftg. Charles turned soldier; for he was tired of ill treatment. Compound sentences. 365 3dj tocllte nad) (Snglanb retfen ; afcer id) fyatte nid)t ©elb genug. (Sr fonnte md)t fommen, benn er toar franf. SBergniigungen finb fur ben 9ftenfd)en nctfytoenbtg ; aflein fte bitrfen nid)t mit Unmagtgfeit genoffen toerben. 2)ie armen 9tafenben fatten nid)t nur lein ®elb meljr, fon* bera, tt>a3 nod? fd)ttmmer i»ar, bie £eben§mittel toaren ifynen audj au$gegangen. c?) By means of the adverbial con/unctions (see p. 238) : 3d) ernmrte einen ©aft ; begtoegenmug td) $u §aufe oiet&en. SDiefe fteber tft ju I)art, begfyalb taugt fie ntd)t $um ©djretben. (£r tyat midj $vax fd)n>er beteibtgt ; beffen=ungead)tet will id) ifym cerjeifyen. 33ergnugungen finb fur ben 5DZenfc^en notfytoenbig ; jebod) b iir fen fie nicfyt mit Unmafjigfett genoffen toerben. 2)er Sftenfd) mug fid) felBft bd)errfd)en fonnen, fonft nnrb er fcd)errfd)t. II. Compound sentences with subordinate clauses. (©a^gefUge.) 1) These consist of two essential parts, the principal sentence and subordinate sentences. Their connection is effected by the subordinative conjunctions (see p. 240 — 247). All the subordinate clauses are characterised by the following particulars : a) The verb is removed to the end: (£8 war 9?ad)t, aU id) in Sonbon anfam. b) In compound tenses the auxiliary follows the participle: (Sr hntrbe freigelaff en , nad)bem er feinen $ag uorge* jeigt I)atte. c) In separable verbs the particle is not separated: (Sr erfufyr e3 nid)t, to>eil er nid)t auSgtng. d) All the depending cases are placed between the subject and the verb: $)u tmirbeft ifym jiirnen, toemt er jefct btefen SBrief ®arT8 beinem $ater jeigte. 2) The subordinate sentence may be the first member as well as the second ; if it is the first, the subject of the second, which is the principal one, is removed after the verb. This change is often indicated by the little word fo, which must not be translated: (5r a,ab ben 3lrmen -ifttd)^, toetl er getjig roar. or: 2Beif er geijig to a r, gab er ben 5Irmen 9?td)t3. Because he was avaricious, he gave nothing to the poor. 366 Lesson 51. £>bfcr)on ber SIngeffagte feine llnfdjuib betfyenerte, (fo) tourbe er bod) $nm £obe oernrtfyetlt. Although the accused man asserted his innocence, yet he was condemned to death. 21(8 man tt)n fragte, roobnrd) (burdj toa$ relat.) bieS ge* fdjefyen fei, anttoortete er 9ttdjt8. When they asked him, how this had happened, he an- swered nothing. Sttein Ojeim tft an$ $mertfa gefommen, um feine gamUte 5U fyolen. My uncle has come from A. in order to fetch his family. 3d) fann feine 23iid)er faitfen, ba tdj fetn ©etb f)abe, or 2) a icfy fetn ©e(b fyahe, fann xti) feine 23itd)er fanfen. 2)aburdj, bag nrir ba$ Safter fyaffen (by hating vice). Be ft at fen (strengthen) rotr nn$ inberStebe juriugenb. 3) When the pronoun of the subordinate sentence re- presents a person or inanimate object, or abstract idea of the principal sentence, it is carried to the principal and the substantive to the subordinate: Dbfdjon ber Sftann fefyr arm tft, tft er bocfy red)t gUtdltjfy. ©eitbem Styx 23rnber bet mtr roar, fyabe id) tfyn ntcr)t tote* ber gefefyen. In the latter two sentences the words rf ber 2ftann" and ,$I)r 53rnber" should, properly speaking, have their place in the principal sentences, and „er" in the subordinate, as : 2)er 2ftcmn tjt bodj red?t glitdUd), obf^ou er fe^r arm tft. 3a; Ijabe 3l)ren 93mber ttiajt toteber gefeljen, feitbem c r bet mtr tear. 4) The subordinate sentence may also be inserted between the words of the principal sentence , without affecting the order of the latter. Ex. : 3d) erfnrjr fogtetd), aU ity in 2ftitndjen anfam, baS Un* glitd meineS grennbeS. 5) The two conjunctions toettn and bag may be omitted ; in this case the verb is not removed to the end: §atte idj e$ gefefyen, fo roiirbe id) e8 oerboten Ijaben. dr fagte, er fyabe ^opftoet) (instead bag er $o»ftoer) tjabe)* 6) Very often two or more subordinate and accessory clauses appear in a compound sentence ; but this makes no other change in the arrangement of words than if only- one were there. Each of them takes its proper place. We subjoin here some enlarged compound sentences, the words forming the principal sentence being indicated by italics : Compound sentences. 367 Examples. I. 1. -3d) b el) a note, bag biefer Selbljerr, toeldjen $Ttte betonn* bern, fetn $aterlanb Ijatte retten fonnen, toemt nid?t fcie 9ftenge ber Sreinbe jeben 2$tberftanb unmogUdj gemadjt Ijatte. — 2. §einrtd) ber Sotoe tonrbe in bie s #cr/t erflart (declared in outlawery) , toeit er fetnen $aifer oerlaffen fyatte, at3 btefer mit ben Sombarbifdjen ©tabten famufte, toelcr/e fid) ber faiferlid)en Dber(;errfd)aft ju ent* uel)en (withdraw) ftrebten.— 3. Sine 9ftai(dnbifd)e ©efanbt* fd)aft oon fed)$el)n abeligen SD^dnnern, an beren 3 giebt ©egenben ber (Srbe, fo toie 3 e ^en in ber ©efd)id)te be3 einjelnen Sttenfcfyen nnb ganjer Golfer, in benen bie guUe ber SebenS* frafte gfeicfyfam (as it were) itber if)re £>dmme getreten ift, nnb too mit jeber Xfyat ba$ SBermogen jum Xi)iin, mit bem ©eitng ba$ ©efynen (desire) fid) fteigert. — 3. ^(ato er^afytt, bag ©ofrateS anf einem ^elbjuge, ben er mit 2Hcibiabe3 gemeinfdjafttid) macfyte, oon bem atljenienfifdjen §eere gefef)en toorben fei, toie er einft einen ganjen Sag nnb eine 9fatd)t lang bis an ben anbredjenben 9ftorgen nnbetoegttd) anf einer ©tette ftanb, mit einem SBltae, toeldjer an* jeigte, bag er fefjr angeftrengt iiber einen ©egenftanb nad;bad)te. — 4. 2Benn aucf> (though) einige Xfyiere an ©eftatt bem $ftenfd)en afjnlid) ftnb ; toenn Slnbere ifm an $i>rp erf raft, an <3d)arfe einjelner ©inne iibertreffen (excel) ; toenn nod) SInbere merftoiirbige SBetoeife oon fhtgljett geben: [fo] bleibt bod) jtotfdjen ifjnen nnb bem 9ftenfd)en eine unitberfteigticfye ^(uft, iiber toelc^e bie Xfyiere fic^ anf feine 2Beife an^nna^ern oermb'gen, toeil i^nen bte $ernnnft, nnb beren (its) 2tn3bmd, bie @orad)e, fe^(t. Jlufga6e. 152. This being resolved 1 , my wife undertook to manage 2 the business herself. The horse was unfits f or the road, as wanting an eye. Leaving my cloak behind me , I set out 4 to view 5 the town a little. As I was going across 6 one of 1) befctyfoffen. 2) ous'fii^rcn. 3) untaugftdj. 4) ma$te tc§ mt# auf ben 2Beg, urn. 5) betradjtcn, befeljen. 6) iiber. 368 Lesson 51. the principal squares 7 , I was followed by 8 a little boy, who insisted on cleaning 9 my boots. He was provided 10 with a footstool 1 ! and with brushes; and I do not doubt [but] that he would have polished 12 my boots admirably. However I had neither time nor inclination 13 , and as (bet) this was the case, I declined 14 the honour. The boy followed me through several streets, and I never stopped 15 but (ofylie bag) he put down (nteber fteflte) his stool and wanted (toou'te) to begin. When he had exhausted 16 his powers of persuasion 17 and found me deaf 18 to entreaty 18 ) ihe 2 departed in search of 19 ) a less ob- stinate 20 subject 21 . 7) $ain>t»$l%. 8) transl. : 3 a 4 little 5 DO y i followed 2 me . . . See p. 336, Obs. — 9) £m)en, toidjfen. 10) aerfe&en. 11) gufr @d)emel, m. — 12) toidtfen. 13) no$ Sufi. 14) aB'tetynen. 15) ftetyen BleiBen. 16) erfc^tyft. 17) fetnc UeBciTebungSfunf*. 18) tcmB gegen atte bitten. 19) urn ... in fud?cn. 20) cigenftnmg. 21) einen . . 9fteufd)en. Reading - lesson. 2>er eMe Officer, (@<$fag.) jDann trttt 1 ber $rtor, etn efyrnmrbtger ©ret8 in a3 loir 2)ir an* Bteten fonnten. 3d) felBft fyaBe nur btefeS £reuj 2 mit (Sbel* ftetnen, ba3 tcfy al§ 3 ei( i) en metner SBiirbe 3 trage; ntmm e$, tag mtcfy e3 £>ir unu)angen, ntcfyt atS etn ©efdjenf, fonbern al$ etn 2lnbenfen an bte oergangene $ad?t. 3^ ar Jteren fdjon ^toei anbere (Sfyrenjetdjen 4 3)etne 53ruft; bed) fet baS brttte, ba§ bte SDrenfdjfyeit £)tr toetfyts, 3)ir ntd)t mtnber (less) toeru)! 2Befye6 bem £apfern, ber ntdjt menfdjtidj ift ; aBer ©egen uBer jeben $rieger, ber fo fort* fafyrt, Sttenfd) ju fetn. SDarum fegnen 2)td) bte ©eretteten, barum fegne id) 2)id), barum fegne 7 $)td) ©ott! — " 2)er §auptmann rig ftcfy ttef erfd^uttert 8 to§ unb fefyrte mit f enter Braberi ©djaar 9 in ba8 2ager juriid $Ber tote toarb tt)m ju Sftutfyeio, al8 er am anbern SKorgen con etnem fetner ftreunbe erfufyr, bag ber franjofifdje ©enerat bon bem SBorfafl u unterrtd)tet fet! Wie SDfftjtere toaren bon btefem jur £afel etngelaben; ber §auptmann burfte ntcfyt fe^len. tflit mannltdjer ^affung 12 unb geftdrft bon bem 58enjugtf etn 13 fetner Ijod$er$tgen Zfyat, gtng er enter mellet^t ente^renben 14 ©trafe entgegen, toetl er ben S3efe^l fetneS 33orgefe$ten 15 ntc^t Befolgt ^atte. S)er ©eneral empfing 1) came to meet. 2) cross. 3) dignity. 4) decoration, badge of an order. 5) to dedicate, to devote. 6) Woe ! 7) see p. 309, §11. 8) moved. 9) troop. 10) how did he feel? 11) event. — 12) countenance, resignation. 13) consciousness. 14) dishonouring, infamous. 15) superior. Promiscuous Exercises. 369 Urn rait Ijofyem (Srnfte unb nrinfte 1 ^ ifym in ein -iftebensimmer. Mit flopfenbem ©erjen fofgt ber §auptmann. ©ie finb afletn. Sefet ergretft ber ©enerat feme §anb, bticft tint nut feudjtem 17 Singe eine SBeile an, retgt tfyn an fid), nmarmt ifyn mit §ejtigfeit 18 nnb fpttdn: „©ie t>erfte^en midj!" £)ann fel)rte er mit iljm jnr @e* fcttfd>aft snrutf. 2Ber mcd)te 19 ntd)t fo gefefylt, tter mcd)te ntd)t fo geftraft fyaben! 2)er §auptmann fdjicfte ba§ 5ft:en§ fetnen SBertoanbten 20 nnt) fdn'ieb Dabet : „£>a§ ift tie einjige S3eute 21 , bie id; in ©pa* men gemad)t ^abe nnb madjen roerbe. Ungern trenne icfy mitfr bacon. SSerfauft e3 unb beja^tt baton raetne ©djnlben, bie id} fyintertaffen fycibt." — SDie $ern)anbten fatten after fd)on langft bie ©d)it(ben bqafyt nnb benwfyren baS $ren$ nnn aU einen ^amiltenfcfyafc 22 . 16) to beckon. 17) moist. 18) violence. 19) would not like. 20) relations. 21) booty, spoil. 22) heir-loom. Questions. 2Ber trat bent §anptmann entgegen? 2Bte rebete ber ^prior ben §auptmann an (address)? 2Betd)e§ 5lnben!en (token) gab er it)m? 28a3 gefcfyafy am anbern SDcorgen im Sager? 28ie ging ber §anptmann ju feinem ©eneral? 2£a3 fyatte erjn fitrdjten? 25ie empftng i|n ber ©eneral? 2Be(d)e$ n>aven feine SBorte? 2Ba3 fdjrieb ber §auptmann an feine S3ern>anbten, al§ er ba8 ^reuj nad) j)aufe fdu'tftc? 2Ba3 fatten bie 2>ern)anbten fcfyon corner getfyan? 2Ba§ ift au§ bem ^reuje getoorben? Promiscuous Exercises for Translation and Conversation. (Continuation from page 266.) 18. Are you acquainted with the French captain M.? Yes, Sir, I made his acquaintance last year at Baden. — Has the servant cleaned my spurs 1 ? He is still cleaning them. — Has the butcher bought fat 2 oxen? He has bought fat oxen and cows, but no calves, nor 3 sheep. — Is this the coach- office 4 ? Yes, Madam, here it is. — When does the stage- coach 5 starts? There is one in the morning at seven o'clock, and one in the evening at six. — How many places have you left (iibrig) in the evening coach? 7 There are only two left. — 1) ©pornen. 2) fett. 3) unb feine. 4) bie gatyrpof*. 5) ber (Stf. toagen or ^ofttoagen. 6) abgcljen. 7) ber Slbenbtoagen. OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 24 370 Promiscuous Exercises. I want three, can I have them for to-morrow? Yes, you can have them. — How much do you charge 8 for a place? Three florins and a half. — Do (the) children pay full 9 price ? No, children pay only the half price. — When must I send the luggage 10 ? An hour before the coach starts 6 . — At what o'clock shall we arrive at B.? In the afternoon between three and four. — Shall we pass 11 through S.? No, you leave the town to your left. 8) toerlangen. 9) ben ganjen or tooflen ^vetS. 10) bo8 ©e^acf. 11) fommeit, jjafftren. 19. What is his manner of life 1 ? He lives very retired 2 . — What services does he render 3 his fellow-citizens 4 ? None, that (fototel) I know [of]. — Is he resolved to sell his estate 5 ? He will sell it, if he finds a purchaser 6 . — How much does he ask for it? He asks 5000 pounds. — How long have you been in Germany? I have been here these three months. — How much do you pay a month 7 for your lodgings 8 ? I pay a hundred florins a month. — How many rooms have you? I have five rooms, viz.: a parlour (23efltd);$tmmer) , a dining- room, and three bed-rooms. — What curtains 9 have you? I have white and red curtains. — Have you your own furni- ture (9D?0De(, pl.)1 No, I have hired it {pi.) — How much do you pay for it? A hundred and twenty florins for six months. — How many English miles 10 make one German mile? Six English miles are equal 11 to one German mile. — How far is it from Heidelberg to Frankfort? It is ten German miles or sixty English miles. — Were your parents in Switzerland last year? They were not there last year, but they intend going there this year. 1) btc 2cBcn*»cifc. 2) jttritefgejogen. 3) leijtot. 4) ber SJtttburger. 5) baS ©ut or Sanbgut. 6) $aufer. 7) tnonatltd). 8) SBofymmg, sing. 9) SBortyang, m. 10) btc Httettc. 11) gietdj (Dat.) 20. To whom have you presented 1 your flowers? To the lady who came to see my sister. — What wine is that? Good old Rhine wine 2 . — Where can I buy good ink? The stationer 3 in William-Street sells very good ink. — Which do you prefer, veal or mutton? I like both, but I prefer ham. — What have you bought in this shop 4 ? I bought steel-pens and pencils. — Where have you seen the finest horses? In England. — Is there an English physician in this town? Yes, there are two English physicians and a French one here. — Is [there] good wine to be had 5 here? 1) iifccrret($en or f^enfen. 2) Sftfyeintocm. 3) ber ^apter^anbter or ©ctyretBmatertaftenfyanbler. 4) Saben. 5) ju fyafcert. Promiscuous Exercises. 371 Yes, but bad beer. — How much richer are you than your neighbour? I need 6 not tell you. — Which flowers are finer than mine? The flowers of my (female-) neighbour are much prettier. — Which edifice 7 is the highest in the town? The church is the highest. — Why do you not let him alone (geljen)? I want to speak to him. 6) idj fcraud?e. 7) ©efcaube, n. 21. Has the coachman put the horses to 1 [the coach]? No- body has ordered it. — Have you sent for the music-master? Yes [I have], but he is not at home. — Is it allowed to speak to (mit) the prisoners? That cannot be allowed. — May the tailor come in? He may come in. — Does this young man smoke cigars? Yes, he smokes every day five or six. — Have you already spoken to the advocate 2 ? I spoke to him, but he would (tuoflte) not hear me. — Who can judge 3 a person 4 without knowing him? Nobody should do so (ba8). — Are you not allowed to play in this room? No, we must play in the yard. — Did (tjat) the lady allow the children {dat.) to play in her room? Yes, she did, but only [for] an hour. — What shall I say of such behaviour 5 ? You must blame 6 it. — What am I to do? You are to work instead of playing. — Ought 7 I to have gone to Baden? Either to Baden or to Ems. — Are these men really so selfish 8 ? They (c8) are the most selfish men I ever have known. — Is anybody knocking 9 ? Yes, some one has knocked at (an) the door. — Who is there? It is 7, your friend B. — How do you do? I thank you, I am quite well. 1) an'foamten. 2) bcr Slbtoofat'. 3) be*uttfyeUen. 4) etnen 3ttenfd)en. 5) baS 93enefymen or ©etragen. 6) tabeln. 7) See p. 90, 5. — 8) etgennih}ig. 9) Itotfen. 22. (On verbs governing the dative: see p. 335.) Why did you not thank your master? I have not seen him since last week. — What is the matter with you (t»ct$ fefytt Sfyrten) ? I am not quite well. — The father would no more believe his son, because he had told a falsehood. — Do not wish him anything bad. — This cloak belongs not to you, it belongs to the doctor. — What did the baron present (fdjenfen) to his niece? He presented her [with] a new bonnet. — I wish you [a] good morning. — To which physician did you send your card? I sent it to Dr. Murray. — Have you anything to tell me? Yes, I have a word to say to you. — What is it? I must tell you alone. — Do you understand what I say? I understand you well. — Why don't you answer me (dat.)f I do not know what I am to 24* 372 Promiscuous Exercises. answer you. — What do you mean by that (Dcmrit) ? Nothing that (roa$) concerns 1 you. — What is your age (How old are you)? I am fifteen years old. — How old is your brother? He is near 2 eighteen. — I thought he was* older. 1) betrcffen {ace). 2) fcetnatye. 3) to are (see p. 307, § 7). 23. (ON MEETING.) Good morning, Sir. — I have the honour to wish you [a] good day. — How do you do 1 to- day? I hope you are in good health. — I am very well. — How does your father do? He is not quite well. — How do all the family do? (or How do they all do at home?) I thank you, all are in good health. — How is Mrs. R., your aunt? She is a good deal (toiel) better. She is tolerably 2 well. — She is rather 2 unwell. She is very ill. — What ails her (fet)lt tfyr) ? (What is the matter with her?) She has got a cold (fid) erfaltet). I am very sorry to hear it. — How long 3 has 4 she been (fd)ort) ill (unwell) ? I did not know that she was ill. — What is her illness? She has a fever 5 . — Does she take anything for it? The doctor attends 6 her every day. He says that it will not be of any consequence (fcon ©ebeutimg). So much the (2)efto) better. I am 7 very glad to hear it. 1) ft<$ befmbert. 2) jtemlic^. 3) fctt roartn. 4) see p. 299, 4. — 5) ba8 ftiefcer. 6) frefu<$en. 7) m freut mi$ fefyr. 24. (NEWS.) Is there any news 1 to-day? Do you know anything new? What news can you tell us? I know nothing new. There is no (md)t3) news. I have not heard of anything. — Did you read the news-papers? What do the papers say? I have read no paper to-day. Did you see that in a paper? It is only mentioned 2 in a private ("jprifcat'*) letter. — This news 3 wants 4 confirmation 4 . I have that news 4 from (cm$) a good authority 5 . I have it from the first hand. — Has that news been confirmed? That news has proved (fid) Ctl§ . . gejetgt) false 6 . — Is war still spoken of (do people still talk of war)? No, people speak no longer of it. — Have you heard any- thing of (Don) your brother? I have not 7 heard from him these 8 two months. He has not written for (fett) three months. I expect a letter from him every day. 1) etroas 9*eue8. 2) attaint. 3) 9?ac$rt($t, f. 4) bebarf ber 53c« ftatigwtg. 5) Duefle, f. 6) faff<$. 7) 9tt$t8. 8) fcit. 25. (BREAKFAST AND DINNER.) Have you breakfasted? Not yet. You come just in time (gerabe red)t) ; you will breakfast with us. — Breakfast is ready. — Do you drink Promiscuous Exercises. 373 tea or coffee? I prefer coffee. — Which shall I offer you? Here are rolls 1 and toast 2 . — What do you like best? I will take (of) both. — How do you like (ftnbeit ©tc) the coffee? Is it strong enough? It is excellent. — Is it sweet enough? I find it quite sweet. — At what time do we dine to-day? Do we dine at five o'clock? No, we shall not dine before six o'clock. — Shall we have anybody at dinner to- day? We expect Mr. Black and Miss White. — What have we [got] for our (jum) dinner? Shall we have any fish? There was not a fish in the market. — What shall I help 3 you to 3 ? Will you have some soup? I thank you, I will trouble you for (bitten um) a little beef. It looks so very nice. — Which way (2Bte) shall I cut it? Any way (2Bte ©ie toolkit). — Will you have it well done (toeidj) or underdone 4 ? Rather well done, if you please. I do not like it underdone. I hope this piece is to your liking 5 . It is excellent. Now I am going to send you a piece of (con) this pie 6. I had rather take a little piece of that pudding 7 . Try 8 both. — Shall I send you a slice 9 of this leg of mutton (§ctmntel3* feule) ? Give me but very little of it. You eat nothing. I beg your pardon, I am eating very heartily (mit gutem 5lp|)ettt). 1) 2Rttdjfcvobe. 2) gevBftete ©robfdjnttten. 3) toorlegen. 4) toenig gefocfyt, ^atbroetc^. 5) na<$ 3(;rem ©efdjmacf. 6) *paftcte, f. 7) ber Rubbing, $fo8. 8) toerfud)en. 9) eine ©djnttte. 2G. (TRAVELLING BY RAIL-ROAD) (mtt ber (StfenMjn). I intend to set off to-morrow for Paris. At what o'clock does the first train 1 start 2 ? Here is the time-table 3 for the summer with the fares f^retfen). — The first is a mixed (gemtfcfyt) train and goes very slowly. — Does it stop often? It stops at every intermediate station (^toifdjenftcttion) , and is liable 4 to all sorts of delays 5 . — The next train goes much faster. — Where is the railway-station 6 (depot)? Near 7 the gate on the right hand. — Where do you get the tickets (SBtttctte) ? The first opening 8 on the left hand is for the second and first classes, and the next for the third. — How are the second class carriages made? They are covered in (gebecft), and have windows or slides 9 on (an) the sides. — Are the seats 10 stuffed 11 ? No, only in the first class carriages you find stuffed seats. — What have I to pay? Fifty francs for yourself and five francs for your luggage 12 . — Where is my luggage? The porter is just taking it from the scales 13 and bringing it out (l;etau$). — Will he place it on the top 1) bcr 3«9- 2 ) ab'gefyett. 3) ber ftafyi^tcm. 4) unterrcovfett. — 5) SSerjogerung. 6) SSa^nbof, m. 7) fcei. 8) ©falter, m. 9) <5$ie&* fenfter. 10) @U3, m. (or Sauf, f.). 11) gepoljiert. 12 ) ©epacf, n. — 13) btc SSkage, sing. 374 Anecdotes. of (ofren cmf) the carriage in which I have taken my seat? No, Sir, all [the] luggage is put into the luggage-van 14 . Now, farewell i5 . 14) ber ©e^acftoagen. 15) SeBcn ©ie ttofyl! Anecdotes for Translation into German. A sick man being asked i, why he did 2 not send for (nad)) a physician, answered 3 : »Itis, because I have no mind (Suft), 2 to 3 die iyet« (fdjon). 1) 9U3 cm . . . gefragt tourbe, see p. 322. 2) verb last. 3) In German, the pronoun er (he) must be added, when a sentence begins with a subordinative conjunction. 8. Milton being asked by (ton) a friend, whether (oB) he would instruct 1 his daughters in the different 2 languages 3 , replied 4 : »No, Sir, one tongue 5 is sufficient 6 for a woman. « 1) unterrtcfyten. 2) toeifdneben. 3) ©J>rad)en. 4) see 1, Note 3. 5) bie 3"nge, bie @£ra$e. 6) gemtg. 3. An Irishman meeting i another {Dat.) asked him: What has (ift) become 2 of (cm§) our old friend John ? »Alas (acfy) ! my dear,« replied the other, »poor John 3 was* condemned 5 to be* hanged, but he saved his life by dying 7 in (htt) prison 8 .« 1) 2118 em Srfanber . . . fcegegmte. 2) gctoorben. 3) put the defi- nite article. 4) Passive voice. 5) P. p. toerurtfyeilt. 6) gefyaugt $u roerben. 7) ba'tmrd;, bafj cr . . fkr& K. (see p. 321, § 7). 8) ©e* fangnifc, n. 4. Socrates being asked by one of his friends, which (roelcfyeS) 3 wasi) Hhe 2 way, to gain 2 ) a good reputation 3 , replied 4 : »You will gain it, if you endeavour 5 to be, what you desire to appear 6 .« 1) roare, see p. 141, Obs. 2. — 2) ju ertoerben. 3) etnen gutcn 9hmen, m. 4) see above 1, Note 3. — 5) ft(fy kmiifyen. 6) fcfyeinen. 5. An Alderman i) of London 2 once i requested 2 ) an author 3 ) to write a speech 4 for him to speak 5 at Guildhall. »I must first dine with you«, replied he, »and see, how you open your mouthy in order to know, what sort of 7 words [will] fit it 8 .« 1) SKatfyS&err. 2) bitten, irreg. v. see p. 159. — 3) (Sdjrtftftefler. 4) etne 9iebe. 5) tvetc^e er in ©. fatten noHte. 6) 2)mnb, m. 7) toa« fur SiJrter, s. p. 69, 2. 8) fiir tfyn paftm. Anecdotes. 375 e. An old philosopher 1 observing a young man, who 2 had 2 too 3 great la 4 volubility 3) of tongue 4 , spoke thus to him: »Take notice 5. my friend, that nature 6 has given us two ears, and but (rntr) one mouth, that 7 ) we [may] 2 listen imuch, and 2 speak * little. « 1) ) bie 9iad)rt$t bon. — 7) Rafter, n. 8) Summer. 9) ba« @rab. 10) 3$ bitte urn SBcncifyung. 11) tragen, ir. v. — 12) ytxMt, f. 9. A nobleman of N. standing at a window, and seeing (saw how) an ass-driver i beat his ass unmercifully 2 , cried to him 3 : »Have done 4 , have done, rascal 5 , else (fonft) 2 I l shall have you whipped 6 .« The ass-driver answered: »Pardon, good Sir, I did not know, that my ass had friends (relations) 7 at court (bet §ofe).« 1) (Sfettreiber. 2) unbarmfyerjig. 3) rief cr i&m ju. 4) tytfren @ie anf. 5)@erftf<$. 2) i ^itofo^Vr m. 3) ouf rceldje SSeife. 4) tantniffe, pi. 5) 3d? fc^cimte mid? me. — 6) to ask questions = fragcn, or gragert fleCCcn. 7) ltntttffcnb. 12. A traveller came into the kitchen 1 of an inn 2 on (In) a very cold night, and stood so close 3 to the fire, that he burnt 4 his boots. A man who sat in the chimney-corner 5 , cried to him, »Sir you'll burn your spurs 6 presently 7 .« — »My boots, 2 you imean, I suppose (ttermutfyttd)) ?« said the gentleman. »No, Sir, « replied the other, »they (btefe) are burnt already. « 1) bie flildje. 2) SBirtf^twuS. 3) nafye bet {Bat). 4) au'brennen, see p. 121, 6. 5) $amm'*(Scfe, f. 6) (gpornen. 7) gtei^. 13. A blacksmith 1 of a village murdered a man, and was condemned to be^ hanged. The chief peasants 3 of the place joined together 4 and begged the judge that the blacksmith might not suffer 5 , because he was 6 necessary to the place which could not miss 7 a blacksmith, to shoe 8 horses, mend 9 wheels etc. 10 But the judge said : »How 3 then ican 2 I fulfil 11 ) justice? « A labourer answered: »Sir, there are two weavers 12 in the village, and for so small a place 2 one 13 ) Us enough, hang the other, a 1) @<$mieb. 2) See Nr. 3, Note 6. — 3) bie toornetymflen 33auent. 4) traten jufammen. — 5) ben £ob md)t feiben modjte. 6) Subjunctive. 7) entbeljren [Ace.). 8) urn . . . &u befd?(agen. 9) SRaber auSbcffcrn. 10) unb fo toetter. 11) Doflflrecfen. 12) SSeber. 13) Nom. masc. see p. 108, 1. 14. A gentleman who had lent a guinea for two or three days to a man whose 1 promises he had not much faith in 1 , was very much surprised to find, that he very punctually kept 2 his word [with] him. The same gentleman being some time after 3 desirous 4 of borrowing 5 a larger sum 6 ), » 4 No,« isaid 2 the 3 other, »you have deceived 7 ) me once, and I am resolved 8 that you shall not do it a second time (Wlal, n.).« 1) beffen 93ertyredjurtgen er ni#t traute. 2) to keep = fatten. 3) adv. natter'. 4) I was desirous of, i<$ toimj^te. 5) jit borgett, 6) ©umme, f. 7) getaufdjt. 8) cntftyoffen. Anecdotes. 377 15. A young fellow 1, having been very extravagant 2 , wrote to his father for (urn) more money, and used 3 all means; but nothing would prevail (fyelfen) . At length he very ingeniously 4 wrote to his father, that he was 5 dead, and desired (bat) him to send [up] money to (um . . ju) pay [for] his burial 6. 1) 2ftcnfd) or Sftantt. 2) berfdjtoettberifd). 3) gefcraud^ett. 4) toifcig or fmnreta;. 5) Subj. 6) SBegrabntjj, n. 16. A very poor inhabitant of N. finding one night 1 thieves in his house, said to them, without being concerned 2 at it: »I do not know, what you look [for] in my house by night 3 , as 4 for me 4 , I cannot find anything in it 5 in broad day-light 6 . « 1) etnmat SftadjtS. 2) ofyne bariiber ju etfdjreden. 3) Bet 92ad)t. 4) toas mta) betrifft. 5) See p. 137, 7. — 6) Bei ^ellent £age. 17. A rich farmer 1 in Devonshire made a will 2 in which 3 the following 4 article was found (ftctttt)) : »I bequeath 5 to John Wilkes, late 6 member of Parliament for Aylesbury, five thou- sand pound sterling, as (ale) a grateful return 7 for the cour- age with which 3 he defended 8 the liberty of his country, and opposed (J the (Dat.) dangerous progress 10 of arbitrary power n .« 1) ^adjter. 2) £eftammt, n. 3) see p. 145, 5 (ttortn.) — 4) bcr fofgenbe Stttfef. 5) termad)cn. 6) toormaitgem s #at1ament8*9ftitgUeb. — 7) 23crgettttng. 8) fcertfyeibigen. 9) ftdj . . . ttnberfefcte. 10) gortjdjvttt, m. 11) Mmi-*£efijdjaft, f. 18. The Emperors, Theodosius, Arcadius and Honorius wrote Ho (an) 4 Rufinus 2 the 3 Praetor: »If anybody speaks ill (33ofe$) of ourselves or of our administration 1 ), 2 we iwill not have' 1 ) him punished. If he spoke through levity 3 , he ought to be despised 4 . If it be 5 through madness, he ought to be pitied 6 : if it be (is) an injury 7 , he ought to be pardoned 8 ( 2 one 1 should pardon him (Dat.). a 1) Stegie'rung. 2) faffen; see p. 285, 4. — 3) am fieid&tfttm. — 4) berad;tet toeiteu. 5) tcenu e8 au8 SBabnfmn gefdjjiefyt. 6) bebauert toerbm. 7) 33efeibigung. 8) see p. 130, § 7. 19. A countryman, who was passing i over the Pont-au Change 2 at Paris, perceived no wares 3 in several .[of the] shops 4 . Prompted 5 by curiosity, 2 he * went near (jtt) a broker's 6 ) shop. »Sir, « asked he, with a silly 7 look 8 , » tell me what goods 3 you sell.« The merchant who wished, to amuse himself at the 1) ging. 2) bte (£ljange*23rii(fe. 3) SBaaren, pi. 4) 2aben, pi. Saben. 5) $ngetvieben toon fteugicr. 6) Rafter. 7) etnfatttg. 8) SBUcf, m. 378 Anecdotes. man's expense 9 , answered: »I sell asses' heads 10 «. — »Faith (toafyvltcfy) «, replied the contryman, »you must have a great demand for 12 them; for (beiltl) I see but 13 one left (iibrtg) in your shop.« 9) aaf fioflen be« 2Ranne«. 10) <§fe(3fotofe. 11) Waterage (/.). 12) barnacty. 13) nur. 20. Some courtiers made reproaches 1 to the emperor Sigis- mond, because 2 , instead of having* his vanquished enemies put to death (tobten), he 2 loaded 4 them with favours 5 , and put them in a situation 6 to hurt 7 him : » Do I not destroy 8 my enemies, a said he, »by making 9 them my friends™?* 1) ©ortoilrfe. 2) toett er. 3) faffen (see p. 285, 4). — 4) iiber- fyanfen. 5) ©unftbeaeigungen. 6) Sage, f. 7) fcfyaben {Bat.). 8) jer* jioren. 9) see p. 321, § 7 & 9. — 10) jn; see p. 335, 3. 21. Malec, vizir (93e$ter) of the Caliph 1 Mostadi, had just obtained 2 a victory 3 over the Greeks {ace), and had taken 4 their emperor in a battle. Having 5 had this prince brought 5 into his tent (3^ »•) he asked him, what treatment 6 he expected from the conqueror. »If you make war 7 like (tote) a king, « answered the emperor, » send me back again : if you wage 7 it like a merchant, sell me: if you make 7 it like a butcher 8 ; slaughter 9 me.« The Turkish General sent him back without a ransom 10 . 1) bcr $altfe (2nddecl.). 2) errtngen, gctotnnen. 3) @ieg, m. — 4) gcjangen gen om men. 5) Sftadjbem er . . . fyatte brtngen laffen (see p. 362, 2). — 6) cine 93ef>anblung. 7) tfrieg fu^ren. 8) bcr Wlt^Qtv. 9) f$iad)ten. 10) cm Sb'fegelb, n. 22. Some Frenchmen, who had landed on the coast 1 of Guinea, found a negro 2 -prince seated 3 under a tree, on a block 4 of wood for 5 his throne; three or four negroes 2 , armed 6 with wooden pikes 7 served for 8 his body-guard 9 . His sable 10 majesty 2 anxiously 11 ) * enquired 12 ) : »Do they 13 talk much of me in France ? « 1) St&ftt, f. 2) ftcger. 3) ftfeettb. 4) fcoljMod. 5) tfatt feme* £(jrone8. 6) betoaffnet. 7) pie, San^e, f. 8) ate. 9) Seifctoactye. — 10) fajtrarj. 11) nengterig. 12) fragte. 13) man. 23. The Duke ctf Ossona, Viceroy 1 of Naples, had gone on board 2 the gallies of the King of Spain, on (an) a great holi- day, to indulge 3 himself in a right which he had to set a slave at (in) liberty. He questioned several of them, who 1) 33t$ef8mg toon Stteatoet. 2) auf btc ©alccrcn. 3) urn ctn 8k$t an8*ju=u6en, toeu^eS. Anecdotes. 379 all endeavoured to excuse themselves, and convince him of (toon) their innocence. One alone 2 ingenuously 4 ) Confessed 5 ) his crimes 6 , and said that he was deserving 7 [of] a still greater punishment. »7wrn 8 this wicked fellow awaya said the Duke, »lest he (bctmtt er nid)t) [should] pervert® these honest people. tel. 10) anrebcn. — 11) ©egner. 12) = with me mtt mir anberS ju fe&ten al$. — 13) ©ift, n. 14) nnfdjablid). 15) auf gfeid)em SBoben. 16) toerftyfaden. 17) iibrig taffen. 18) beigetegt. 25. A beggar 1 ) soliciting 2 ) 2 alms (um em $Hmofen) [of] 1 Dr. Smollet, he gave him, through inadvertence 3 , a guinea 4 instead of a shilling. The poor fellow, who was lame, hobbled 5 after him, and pointed out 6 the mistake 7 . »My God, « remarked Smollet to a friend, who was with (bet) him, »what a wretched 8 lodging has honesty 9 taken [up with] ! « Thus saying 10 and adding 11 another to it, he returned 12 the guinea to the over- joyed (ubergtudltdjen) and grateful beggar. 1) Settler. 2) bitten. 3) ou« SSerfe^en. 4) ©ninee', f. 5) finite ifym na$. 6) erflortc. 7) ben Srrtfntm. 8) etenb. 9) bie Qfrfityfcit 10) Snbem er ic. 11) unb nocfy eine baju fiigte. 12) juruefgeben. 26. A little girl, five years old, was equally 1 fond of 1 her mother and grandmother. On (fen) the birth-day of the latter, 1) liebtc gletcfy fe^r. 380 Anecdotes. 2 her ^mother i said to her: »My dear, you must pray 2 ) to God to bless 3 your grandmamma, and that she may live 4 to be very old.« The child looked 5 with surprise at her mother, who perceiving it, said: »Well 6 ! will you not pray to God to bless your grandmamma, and that she may become very old?« »Ah, mamma !« said the child, »she is very old already, I will rather 7 pray that she may become young. « 2) to pray to God = either ©ott bitten or ju ©ott fceten. — 3) baft cr . . . fegue [SubJ.) 4) fefyr alt tt>erbc. 5) to look at = an- fet)en, sep. v. 6) (Si! 7) Uefcer. 27. The late 1 General Schott, so celebrated for his success 2 in gaming 2 , was one evening playing very high with the Count d'Artois and the Duke de Chartres, at Paris, when a petition 3 was brought up 4 from the widow 5 of a French officer, stating 6 her various 7 misfortunes 8 , and praying relief 9 . A plate was handed 10 round, and each put in (t)tnetn) one, two, or three louisd'or; but when it was held 11 to the general, who was going 12 to throw for a stake (®a£, m.) of five hundred louis- d'or, he said: »Stop 13 a moment, if you please, Sir, here goes 14 for the widow !« The throw 15 was successful W ; and he 2 instantly 17 ) i swept (fd)ob) the whole into the plate, and sent it down [to] her. 1) fcerftorfcen. 2) toegen femes ©IMS tm ©fciel. 3) eine $8ittfd?rift. 4) tyerauf. 5) SBBltttoe. 6) to state bartegen (see p. 319, § 4). — 7) manmgfacty. 8) UngUidSfaU'e. 9) urn Uttterftufcung. 10) tyerum- gereidjt. 11) toorgefyaiten. 12) tm SSegrtff tear (see p. 284, 5). — 13) fatten @ie . .! 14) biefeS gilt. 15) ber SSurf. 16) gliidtUd^, er* folgretdj. 17) fogletdj. 28. Dr. Radcliffe 2 once 1 refused i) to take a fee 2 for 3 attending a friend during a dangerous illness. Upon (itad)) his recovery, however, the patient presented the proper 4 amount in a purse, saying: »Sir, in this purse 1 have put every day's fee 5 , and your goodness must not get the better of my gratitude. « The doctor eyed 7 the purse, counted the number 8 of days, and holding out 9 his hand, replied : » Well, I can hold out no longer ; singly 10 I could have refused them for it a twelve- month 11, but altogether they are irresistible l 2 .« 1) to refuse = ftct) toetgern. 2) ein £onorar'. 3) bafiir . . bag er. 4) entfrredjenb. 5) ba8 §onorar fur jeben Sag. 6) to get the better of = iikrftctgen {ace), or grofjer fein ate. 7) betradjtete. 8) 3at)l, f. 9) au§r)atten. 10) etnjetn. 11) cut flanjeS Satyr tang. 12) mtttnberftetyltd). 29. Sir Isaac Newton's temper i is said (fott) to have been so equal 2 and mild, that no accident could disturb 3 it; a remark- able instance 4 of which (bacon) is related as (tote) follows: 1) ba« ©cmutty. 2) gfetctymintyig. 3) ftfrcn. 4) SBeifotel, n. Anecdotes. 381 Sir Isaac had a favourite 5 little dog, which he called Diamond. Being one evening called out of his study 6 into the next room, Diamond remained behind (B lief; 2). Jttvucf) . When Sir Isaac returned, having 7 been absent but a few minutes, 2 he ihad the mortification 8 to find that Diamond had overturned 9 a lighted 10 candle among some papers, which were the nearly finished 1 ! labour of many years. The papers soon were (jlanbetl) in flames, and (were) almost consumed 12 to ashes. This loss 13 , 2 from 14 Newton's advanced age, iwas irrepar- able 15 ; but, without punishing the dog, 2 he * exclaimed: »0, Diamond I you (bit) don't know what mischief 16 you have done!« 5) cm 2tebfirtg8*$unbd)cn. 6) (gtubier'jtmmer, n. 7) rtctd)bem er ttur. 8) ben aSerbrufj. 9) umgcttorfen. 10) brcurtenb. 11) toottenbet. 12) gu 9I)d)e toerbrannt. 13) bcr 33ertuft. 14) toegert 9?.*8 Ijoljen 2ttter8. — 15) unerfefctidj. 16) ba§ Un&ett. The prince of Conti being 1 highly pleased with 1 the in- trepid behaviour of a grenadier at the siege of Philipsburgh, in 1734, threw him a purse, excusing 2 the smallness of the sum 2 it contained 3 , as 4 ) [being] 2 too 3 poor J a 4 reward for such courage. Next morning, the grenadier went to the prince with two diamond rings and other jewels 5 of considerable 6 value. »Sir,« said he, »the gold I found in your purse I suppose 7 you intended 7 for me; but these 2 I i bring back to you, having 8 no claim to them (2lnfyrud) fcarauf).« — »You have doubly deserved them by your bravery, and by your honesty,« said the prince, » therefore you may keep them.« 1) h)eld)cm ba8 unerfcfyrccfcrte SBenefymeu . . . fefyr gefiei. 2) inbem er ftd) roegen ber germgen ©umme entfd)ulbigte. 3) bie cr entfyieft. — 4) ol8 etne. 5) 3uroe'ien. 6) betrad)t(td), bebeiitertb. 7) beftimmten ©tc tocrmuu)tic$. 8) see p. 322, § 10, a. 31. Casimir II, King of Poland 1 , received a blow from a Polish 2 gentleman, named 3 Konarsky, who had lost all his money while playing 4 with the prince. Scarcely was the blow given, when 5 , sensible 5 of the enormity of his crime, he betook 6 himself to flight; but he was soon apprehended 7 by the king's guards, and condemned to lose his head. Ca- simir, who waited for (ctltf, Ace.) him in silence (silently) amid his courtiers, as soon as he saw him appear, said: »I am not surprised at (fiber) the conduct 8 of this gentleman. Not being able 9 to revenge himself on (art bent) fortune, it is not to be wondered 10 [at], that he has ill-treated 11 his friend. I am 1) ^olcrt. 2) £omif#. 3) 9?amertS. 4) see p. 321, § 9, 3rd. Ex. 5) aU er, im SSeronfjifetrt bcr ©rtffje ... 6) fid) ouf bie §lud)t begab. 7) ergriffen. 8) ba8 SBcrragert. 9) S)a er fid) ttid)t . . . formte. 10) see p. 314, § 8, Note. 11) mtfjfyanbcln, insep. v. 382 Anecdotes. the only one (fcet ehtjtge) to blame in this affair 12 , for I ought not, by my example, to encourage 13 a pernicious practice 14 , which may be the ruin of my nobility 15 .« Then turning 10 to the criminal 17 , he said: »I perceive, you are 18 sorry for your fault 18 — that is sufficient [enough)] take your money again, and let us renounce gaming 19 for ever.« 12) @a$e. 13) ermutfytgen. 14) cine toerberb(i$e ©etuoljnljett. — 15) 2lbel, m. 16) inbem er ftdj . . . toanbte. 17) Skrfcrecfyer, 18) 3fyr gefyler tft Sfynen leib. 19) auf ba§ orin. 7) ifym *piafc madjen. 8) brangte ji<$. 9) ju ben 33ait= fen. 10) gebrangt. 11) aitfjer ^affnng. 12) bent ©eladjter be8 gan^en ^ubtifums. 13) ber@baf3, @d)erj. 14) beftimmt. 15) f#lt<$, ftdj brangte. 16) Sacebamonier. 17) evgriffen toon. 18) (Sntartung. 19) 23etfatt, m. Dialogue. 383 old man cried out : » The Athenians understand what is good, but the Lacedaemonians practise 20 it.« 20) iifcen e8 Ct) 2 it 3 was l I whom thou hadst decreed to die (jum Xobe fcenirtfyeUt) . It were not just that Damon should suffer, to 11 free me from that death which was not for him, but for me only. Dionysius. But thou sayest that it is as unjust to inflict 12 death [upon] thy friend. Pythias. Very true, we are both innocent, and it is equally 13 unjust to make (tafjen) either of us suffer 8. Dionysius. Why dost thou, then, say that it were wrong to put 14 him to death instead of thee? Pythias. It is equally unjust to inflict death either on Damon or on myself; but I should be highly culpable to let Damon suffer that death which the tyrant had prepared for me. Dionysius. Dost thou return hither to-day with no other view than to save the life of thy friend, by losing thy own? 1) ©ettfam! 2) i# tyiett eg nfc&t furmb'gttd). 3) see p. 315, §10. 4) ©efangettfd)aft. 5) Slfcftdjt. 6) gamiften^ngefegenfyetten ju orbnen. 7) Sefcetoofyl \n fagen. 8) to suffer = ben £ob erletben. 9) meljr. — 10) tote. 11) see p. 315, § 10. — 12) bem §v. ben Sob aufjuertegen or ben gr. . . . fytnsurtdjten. 13) ebenfo. 14) to put somebody to death = (stnen [Ace.) fyhtrid)ten tafjen. *) This piece may be translated more freely. 384 Dialogue. Pythias. I return, in regard to 1 thee, to suffer a death which it is common 2 for tyrants to inflict ; and with respect to Damon, to perform my duty by freeing him from the danger which he incurred 3 by his kindness to (gegett) me. Dionysius. And now, Damon let me speak to thee. Didst thou really not fear that Pythias would never return, and that thou wouldst be put to death for him? Damon. I was but (nur) too well assured, that Pythias would return: and that he would be more anxious 4 to keep (fatten) his promise than to save his life. Would to Heaven (oolite ©ott) that his relations and friends had detained aim by force? 5 He would then have lived for the comfort * and benefit^ f good men; and I should then have had the satis- faction 7 of dying for him. Continuation. Dionysius. What? art thou not fond of (liefcft bu — md)t) life? Damon. No; I am not, when I see and feel the power of a tyrant. Dionysius. It is well! Thou shalt see him no more: I will order thee to be put 8 to death (fyinvidjten Iaffen). Pythias. Pardon the feelings of Damon, of a man who feels for his dying friend; but remember that 2 it 3 W as *I, who was devoted (geftetfyt) by thee to (bent) death. I come to submit to it (mid} tfmt ju unterroerfen), that* I may (urn — $u) redeem my friend. Do not refuse me this comfort in my last hour. Dionysius. I cannot endure (tetben) men who despise death and defy 9 my power. Damon. Thou canst not endure virtue. Dionysius. No. I cannot endure that proud, disdainful (l)0(ftmutfyige) virtue, which contemns life, which dreads not pain, and which feels not the charms 10 of riches 11 and pleasure. Damon. Thou seest, however, that it is a virtue which feels the dictates (©efcote) of honour, justice, a«nd friendship. Dionysius. Guards, take (fitfjtet) Pythias to execution 12 . We shall see whether Damon will still despise my authority. Damon. Pythias, by returning to submit 13 himself to thy pleasure 14 has merited his life, and [deserved] thy favour, but I have excited 15 thy indignation i« 7 by placing myself in 1) in SBegug anf . . . 2) turn: which tyrants commonly inflict (aufertegen). 3) in roetdje cr . . . geratfyen tft. 4) bafc i&nt mefyr baran gdegen ware. 5) mit ©eroalt. 6) gum Xrofle unb $um SSo|(e. 7) ©e* frtebigung. 8) see p. 316, § 12 — 9) trofcen [Dat.). 10) SRctjc. — 11) &ei#tljum, m. sing. 12) jum £obe. 13) ftc§ untertoerfen [refl. v.). 14) mUtiix, f., Stflen, m. 15) erregen. 16) Uuttntten, m. Dialogue. 385 thy power, in order to save him. Be 2 satisfied, *then (atfo), with this sacrifice 1 , and put me to death. Pythias. Hold, Dionysius; remember, it was I alone that offended thee; Damon could not. Dionysius. Alas, what do I see and hear? — Where am I? How miserable, and how worthy to be so (e§)! I have hitherto known nothing of (con) true virtue. I have spent my life in darkness and error 2 . Not all my power and honours are sufficient to produce love. I cannot boast 3 of having 4 gained a single friend in the course 5 of a reign of thirty years, and yet these two persons 6, in private life 7 , love one another tenderly, 2 fully i confide 8 in (aitf) each other, are mutually happy, and ready to die for each other. Pythias. How couldst thou, who 9 hast never loved any person, expect to have friends? If thou hadst loved and respected men, thou wouldst have secured 10 their love and respect. Thou hast feared and oppressed 11 mankind (bte Sttenfdjetl) , and they [both] fear and detest 12 thee. Dionysius. Damon, Pythias, condescend 13 to admit me as a third friend in a 3 connection 14 iso 2 perfect 15 . I give (fcfyenfe) you your lives {Sing.), and I will load 16 you with riches. Damon. We have no desire to be enriched 17 by thee; and as to 18 thy friendship, we cannot accept or enjoy it, till thou become good and just. Without these qualities, 2 thou 1 canst be connected with none but (mtt -ifttemctnb CtlS mtt) trembling slaves and base flatterers 19 . To be loved and esteemed by men 20 of free and generous minds 20 , thou must be virtuous, kind, just; and know 21 [how] to live on a sort of equality (auf gteicfyem ^uf$e) with those who share 22 and deserve thy friendship. 1) Dfcfer, n. 2) 3rrtfyum, m. 3) to boast = ftdj riiljmett {reft, v.) 4) see p. 319, §5.-5) &mf. 6) ^erfonen. 7) tm ^rttoctt'lekn. — 8) toertrauen. 9) bu, bcr bu, see p. 290, 1. — 10) fi^erltd) ertoorben. 11) unterbriicft. 12) berafcfdjeuen. 13) fetb fo gut or getualjrt mir bte 23ttte. 14) SBimb, m. 15) tooflfommm. 16) iiberfyaufen. 17) fceret^ent. 18) as to toctS . . . betrtfft. 19) @<$meid?ter. 20) *>on frctfmnigen mtb ebelmutfyigen 2ttcinnent. 21) toerfktyen. 22) tfyetfm. More such pieces will be found in the little vol- ume: Materials for translating English into Ger- man by Dr. Emil Otto, (3rd Edit.) which is to be considered as a continuation of this grammar. OTTO, German ConT.-Gramraar. 25 386 Materials for conversation. Materials for German conversation. l. SSct§ Ijaben ©ie ba? SBa§ roollen ©ie faufen? §aben ©ie (Sttoa§ gefauft? SSieotel (t»a§) foftet bag a§ s £funb foftet jroet ©ulben. 3a) ftnbe ba§ fe^r tljeuer. 2>a§ ift fefjr roo^lfeil (or billtg). §aben ©ie 3fyr ier ift frtfa)e§ Gaffer. £ragen©te biefenSriefaufbie^oft. 28a§ fagen ©ie? 3a) fage 9Ha)t§ (gar fttdjtS). 9fltt mem f»red)en ©ie? 33erfteE»en ©ie toa§ to) fage? 3d) oerftelje nia)t 2Ule§. What have you there? What do you wish to buy? Did you buy anything? How much a pound? Two florins a pound. I find this very dear. This is very cheap. Have you sold your horse? I have not yet sold it. Will you not sell it? Yes, I will sell it. Why will you sell it? I want some money. Bring me some bread and butter. I have eaten enough. Did you drink a glass of wine? Here is some fresh water. Take this letter to the post-office. What do you say? I say nothing (at all). To whom do you speak? Do you understand what 1 say? I do not understand all. SBa§ oerlangen ©te? 2Ba§ tounfdjen ©ie? 3d) oerlange SftajtS. £aben ©ie bie ©i'tte. ©ie tourben mid) fefyr oerbtnben. ©ie finb fer)r §utig. 3£a§ fua)en ©te ba? 3d) fua)e metne U^r. SSa§ rooUen ©ie tfmn? SSa§ maa)en or tfjun ©ie ba? 3a) leme meine Shifgabe. 3a) toerbe el mit ©ergnugen tlmn. SSiffen ©ie, ob er fommen rctrb? 3a) toetf e§ nia)t. 3a) toeijj nia)t§ baoon. $ennen ©ie biefen 2Rann? 3a) fenne u)n fefyr gut. 3a) fenne iljn oon ©e[id)t. 3a) fenne tfjn ma)t. What do you ask for? What do you wish for? I (require) ask for nothing. Have the goodness. Be so kind. You would oblige me very much. You are very kind. What are you looking for? I am looking for my watch. What are you about to do? What are you doing there? I am learning my lesson. I shall do it with pleasure. Do you know, if he will come? I do not know — (it) . I know nothing about it. Do you know this man? I know him very well. I know him by sight. I do not know him. Materials for conversation. 387 3. ©lauben ©ie ba§? ©lauben ©ie ba§ (bod)) nidjt. 3a) glaube e§ nid)t. 2>a§ tft maljr. 25a§ ift 28al)rl)eit. 3a) bin 3brer 9ftetnung (2lnfid)t). ©te fnaffen, ©ie fdjerjen. ©tnb ©ie mit iljm sufrteben? ©inb ©te befriebigt? SBtr ftnb bamit jufrieben. 3d) bin 3l)r 2)iener. 2)a§ ift allerltebft. 28ela)e§ SSergnugen! 28ela)e ftreube! Do you believe this (so)? Do not believe that. I do not believe it. That is true. That is truth. I am of your opinion. You joke. Are you contented with him? Are you satisfied? We are contented (with it). I am your servant. That is charming. What pleasure! What joy! 4. 28er ift bet? (53 i[t mem 23tuber $arl. 28 o I) in' geljen ©ie? Sir geljen tn'3 Sweater. 28 o I) in' gelit bie flodjin? ©ie gefyt auf ben 2Jtarft. 28orjer' fommen ©ie? or So fommen ©ie t)er? 3d) fomme nu§ ber ©djule. 2Bir fommen au§ bem Concert'. ©ie fommt oon bem 33all. ©ef)en ©ie jet3t nad) £aufe? ©eljen ©ie nidjt fo fdmell. fthtfyen ©ie ein menicj au§. fommen ©ie balb roieber. ©efyen ©ie fyinauf — Ijtnunter. ©elje fort! ©efjen ©ie fort! Who is there? It is my brother Charles. Where are you going? We are going to the theatre. Where does the cook go? She goes (is going) to the market. Whence do you come? Where do you come from? I come from school. We come from the concert. She comes from the ball. Are you going home now? Do not go so fast. Rest a little. Come back soon. Go up (stairs), go down (stairs). Go away! Be off! (leave). 5. ©utcn SKorgen (Sag), mein §err. ©uten $benb, mein §err. ©e§en ©ie fid). ^elimen ©ie $fofc. Sie befinben ©ie fidj ? ©efyr gut, ia) banfe 3£;nen. Unb ©ie (felbft) ? SSte cjer>t e§ 3tmen? 9Wdjt fe^r gut. 3iemlid) g,ut. 3eigen ©ie mir gefaHigft. 3d) bitte ©ie or bitte, fagen ©ie mir. <§>ehm ©ie mir. Seifyen ©ie ilmt. 9ftad)en ©ie mir ba§ SSergnugen. 3d) bitte ©ie barum. 3d) banfe 3f)nen. ©et)r oerbunben. Good morning, Sir. Good evening, Sir. Sit down, be seated. Take a seat. How do you do? Very well, I thank you. And you (yourself) ? How are you? Not very well. Tolerably well (pretty well). Show me, if you please. Please tell me. Give me. Lend him. Do me the pleasure. I beg you. I thank you. Very much obliged to you. 25* 388 Materials for conversation. 3ft £err W. ju £nufe? 3a, er ift ju £aufe. ©inb ©te ein 2)eutfd)er? 3d) bin ein (Snglanber. SDiefe 2>ame ift etne (Snglanberin. Sieoiel 1% ift e3* (S3 ift fpat, eg ift neun \Xfyx. Sann merben @ie auSgeljen? 3dj roerbe urn 10 Ufyr au3gef)en. Urn Ijalb ad)t Uf)i\ Urn brei SSiertel auf fieben or ein SSiertel nor fteben. Urn ein SSiertel auf fecp or Urn ein SSiertel nad) fiinf. «Punft 7 u&t. Urn SDftttag. Urn gwolf W>r. Urn 9ttitternad;t. ©eftern 9)?orgen. ©eftern $benb. $orgeftern. £>eute. — Sflorgen. flftorgen frul). Uebermorgen. 33or adit, triersefyn £agen. 3n fedjS Sod;en. 3n etnigen £agen. S5on einem Sag pm anbetn. Is Mr. N. at home? Yes, Sir, he is at home. Are you a German? I am an Englishman. This lady is an Englishwoman. 6. What o'clock is it' ; ? It is late, it is nine o'clock. At what o'clock do you go out? I shall go out at ten o'clock. At half past seven. At a quarter to seven. [ At a quarter past five. At seven precisely. At noon, at twelve. At midnight. Yesterday morning. Yesterday evening, last night. The day before yesterday. To-day. — To-morrow. To-morrow morning. The day after to-morrow. A week ago, a fortnight ago. In six weeks. In a few days. From one day to another. 7. Sa3 fur Setter ift Ijeute? (S3 ift fd)one3 (fd)Ied>te3) Setter. SBa3 fur lierrlictjeg Setter! (S3 ift fe&r fceijj (warm) — (fait) . (S3 regnet. (S3 ift nur ein ©djauer. ©3 ift feljr roinbtg. £>aben ©ie (or 3ft 3l)nen) roarm? §rieren ©ie (or Ijaben ©te fait)? Sirroerben ein ©emitter befotnmen. (S3 bonnert. — (S3 blifct. $aben ©ie ben Conner geprt? Seldj' ein fdjoner SRegenbogen! (S3 gefyt ein falter Smb. 3)er Sinter fommt tjeran. (S3 gefrtert. (S3"{5at btefe 9?adjt gefroren. (S3 ift glatt ju gefyen. (S3 fd)nett (e3 fdllt ©dmee). ©te ©onne fd)eint. 3m ©onnenfdjein. 2)te ©onne geljt unter. 3m SD?onbfct)etn. How is the weather to-day? It is fine (bad) weather. What beautiful weather! It is very hot (warm) — (cold). It rains, it is raining. It is but a shower. It is very windy. Are you warm? Are you cold? We shall have a thunder-storm. It thunders. It lightens. Did you hear the thunder? What a beautiful rainbow! It is a cold wind. Winter draws near. It freezes. It has frozen last night. It is very slippery. It snows. The sun shines. In sunshine. The sun sets. In the moonlight. Materials for conversation. 389 3)ie ©onne gef)t nradjtig auf. (S3 ift bunfef (iRad^t). (S3 ift feller, lifter £ag. The sun rises beautifully. It is dark (night). It is bright day-light. Idiomatical Expressions. SGSer Ijctt e§ SFmen gefagt? 2Sa3 foil ba§ Ijeifjen? SBie nennt man (rote Ijeifst) btefeS 3 3Ba§ ift ju tlmn? Sag fatten @te bauon? S)a§ freut mid) feljr. (S3 tljut mir fef>r Ieib. 3dj fyabe Sangeroeile. 3ag gel)t ©ie SttdjtS an. SBa§ fefclt 3lmen? 3d) §abe flopfroelj. 3d) !)<*&* cincn bbfen ginger. @§ fel)lt mir 9Hdjt§. §aben @ie (Mb bei ftdj? @ie feljen gut au§. SBollen @tc mir ©efeUfdjaft leiften ? (S3 ift Beit $um (Sn en. 3ft ber Xtfdj gebedt? 3)a§ Sffen ift aufgetragen. £ragen (beden) @ie ab. Who (has) told you? What is the meaning of that? What do you call this? What is to be done? What do you think about it? I am very glad (of it). I am very sorry. I am weary. It is I. It is we (us). I go to meet my friend. Go your way. That does not concern you. What ails you? What is the matter with you? I have a head-ache. I have a sore finger. Nothing is the matter with me. Have you any money about you ? You look well. Will you keep me company? It is time for dinner. Is the cloth laid? Dinner is served up. Take away the things. 3m Hnfcmg. Saffen @ie mid) geben. Sajfen ©te meine 33ud)er liegen. 3)iefe SWufter finb nidjt iibel. 3Jtir ift 3Ule8 einerlei. ©inb @ie fertig* 3dj bin mit metner Slufgabe fertig. 25a§ nrirb 3I)nen roof)l befommen. 2)a§ SBier befommt mir nidjt gut. 3d) fyahe mir bag 33em gebrodjen. 3d) bin (mare) bemafye gefallen. (Sr uerbient fein 93rob. SSie gefdllt e§ 3fynen Ijier? SESte gefdllt 3l)nen biefe ©tabt 1 <5§ gefdllt mir fel;r rootyl r)ier. SSSo fmb mir fteljen geblieben? At the beginning. Let me alone. Let my books alone. These patterns are not amiss. It's all the same to me. Have you done (are you ready) ? I have done my exercise. I am through with my task. That will agree with you. Beer does not agree with me. I have broken my leg. I had nearly fallen. He gets his living. How are you pleased here? I am very much pleased with this town. I like this town very much. Where did we stop? 390 Materials for conversation. <£x fpielt gerne. £aben @ie 9?ad)ridjten t)on tlnn? 3d) l)abe lange 9fci<$t§ non ifnn gel)6tt. 3d) roetfe nidjt, roa§ idj bauon flatten (or ben!en) foil. He likes playing (gambling). Have you any news of him? I have not heard of him for a long time. I do not know what to think of it. (S3 fragt 3emanb nad) 3l)nen. SBer l>at nad) ntir ^efragt? SBer roartet auf mtdj^ SSarten @te ein roenig auf mid). SSer Ijat au3 btefem @Ia§ gettunfen ? §aben @ie 3l)re Sfaftdjt gednbert? Sbaben @ie nod) (§troa§ au fagen? Zfyun @ie, roa§ ©ie rooUen. 2Tuf jeben gall. 2Ba§ ben 33rief 3I)te§ ©oljneS be* trifft - S)em fei, rote iljm roolle. (Sr mad)t fid) ©ebanfen baruber. 2)a§ i[t feme flunft. 92el)men ©te ftdj in 2td)t. 3d) mill e3 barauf antommen laffen. (§r ift bet beutfdjen ©prad)emdd)ttg. !ann tlmt bie ©tint bieten. roerbe ©ie naa) £aufe fiilnm Somebody asks for you. Who has asked for me? Who is waiting for me ? Wait a moment for me. Who has drunk out of this glass ? Have you changed your opinion? Have you any more to say? Do anything {or as) you please. At any rate, at all events. As to the letter of your son — Be that as it may. He troubles his head about it. Any one can do it. Look about you. Take care. I will take my chance of that. He is master of the German lan- guage. I can face him. I shall see you home. 3d) fcmn tnidj mo)t t>on il>m Io§* madjen. S3Ieiben ©ie md)t §u lanae auS. 3l>nen nllein fcmn e§ gelmgen. 2tuf mehter Uljr ift e§ trier Uljr. (§r naljm e£ mit ©eroalt. <§r ift oon ©eburt ein granjofe. ©te ift triel fytibfdjer al£ il)te ©djroefter. ©te mogen allein gel)en. (Sr gel)t nad)fte3 3al)r auf Sftetfen. 3d) roar im Segrtff, roegpgeljen. SBor alien ©ingen oergeffen ©ie ba§ nidjt. ©te ift liber jroanjtg. ©egen (Stnbtud) ber 9^adt)t. SSir roollen etnen ®ang urn bie ©tabt madjen. ©oil id; ilm bacon benadnudjttgen? 3d) fonnte mid) bes Salens nidjt entfyalten. 3d) roitrbe 9Hdjt§ babei gerotnnen. 2)a§ rotrb red)t or gut fein. I cannot get away from him. Do not stay beyond your time. None but you can succeed. It is four o'clock by my watch. He took it by force. He is a Frenchman by birth. She is prettier by far than her sister. You may go by yourself. He goes abroad next year. I was about to go away. Above all, don't forget this. She is above twenty. About the close of the evening. Let us take a turn about the town. Shall I send him word about it? I could not forbear laughing. It would be no advantage to me. That will do. Materials for conversation. 391 5. 3d) bin nidjt reidj genug, urn etne fold;e 5lu§gabe ju madjen. S£a3 fyaben ©ie am Sluge? (S3 fefylt i^r immer (5troa3. £affen ©ie fid) t)on mir ratten, ©ie tourben nidjt iibel baran tljun, baljtn ju geljen. 2)iefe§ i[t fdnner gu erlangen. 2Kit leister 2Ru&e. !Wadj tricler SDKtlje. ©r raeifj fidj in 2Hle§ gu finben. ©o niel id) roeifj. ©o oiel id) mia) erinnere. 3d) roerbe fo frei fein, ©ie ju be= fudjen. Jpeute uber ein 3al)r. SBann roerben ©ie roieber jurud* !ommen ? (£§ ift mir urn fo lieber. 3d) fann ilm ntdf>t auSftefyen. SBenn id) i^m je begcgnen follte. 3Ba§ liegt mir baran? ©lauben ©ie, fo leidjt baoon ju f ommen ? I cannot afford to spend so much. What ails your eye? She is ever ailing. Be advised by me. It would not be amiss for j^ou to go there (you had better go). That is haid to come at. With no great ado. After much ado (or trouble). Nothing comes amiss to him. As far as I know. To the best of my remembrance. I shall take the liberty to call on you. By this time twelve months. How long will it be before you come back? I like it all the better. I can't abide (bear) him. If I ever chance to meet him. What care I? Do you think to come off so? 6. ©ie miiffen e§ tljun, ©ie mogen molten ober nid)t. 3d) bin baju geneigt. 3d) frage nidjt§ barnad). tfefyren ©ie fid) nidjt baran. ©oil id) ilm tyolen laffen? 3ft baZ 3l)r (Srnft? SSenn e§ 3l)nen gefallt, fo ne^men ©ie e§. 9ta, roa§follbtefe§ 3Hle3 bebeuten? 3d) modjte roiffen, roa§ bag ift. 2)a ftecft (Stma§ baljinter. 3d) Ijalte (neljme) ©ie beim SBort. 3$ !ann SRidjtS bafut. SUtan !ann nidjt ba^inter tommen 3d) neljme e§ mdjt f o genaumit ilnn. 2Ba§ mollte id) bod) fagen? 3a) t)obe 9Hd;t§ baran au^ufefcen. SBtr miiffen un§ beljelfen. 2>ie <5ad)t fyat ntd)t ciel auf fid). 2)a§gel)t nidjt mitred)ten2)ingen ju. £)a§ Jjat 9tf#t§ ju fagen. 2>a§ tyut ftid)t§. (S3 gefa)iel)t ilrni red)t. S)a§ fann mir Sfttemanb oerbenfen. Willing or unwilling, you must do it. I am inclined that way. I do not care. Never mind that. Shall I send for him? Are you serious? If you like it, take it. Well and what of all this? I wonder what this is. There is some mystery about it. I take you at your word. That is not my fault. I cannot help it. You cannot get at it. I am not so strict with him. What was I going to say? I find no fault with it. We must make shift. It is of no great consequence. It is not at all right about it. That does not signify. No matter for that. It serves him right. No one can blame me for that. 392 Materials for conversation. @idj ben $onf $erbred)en. @ie toerben auSgeladjt metben. urd) ©djaben wirb man Hug. (Sljrlidj roafyrt am langften. 2lUe3 f)at feine Be- etle mtt SSette. $ufgefd)oben ift nidjt aufgefyoben. SDrnfiiggang ift aller Softer Sfafang. S3iele §anb' madjen balb ein (Sno. 2)a§ Serf lobt ben SKctftcr. grifdj gemagt ift tjalb gettjan. JrtfdJ becjonnen, tjalb geroonnen Slrmutl) tft feine @d)anbe. SBie geroonnen, fo jerronnen. Sie bte Arbeit, fo ber Mjn. Sie ber §err, fo ber 2)iener. i«otr) fennt fein ©ebot. (Sine ©djroalbe madjt feinen ©om= mer. (Sin Ungliid fommt nte atletn. SlUjwriel ift ungefunb. (Sin gebrannteS $tnb fd^eut ba3 geuer. Man proposes, and God disposes. Experience makes a man wise. Honesty is the best policy. All in good time. The more haste, the worse speed. Delaying is not breaking off. Idleness is the root of all evil. Many hands make quick work. The work recommends the master. Well begun is half done. Poverty is no disgrace. Lightly come, lightly gone. As the labour, so the reward. Like master, like man. Necessity has no law. One swallow makes no summer. Misfortunes never come singly. Too much of one thing is good for nothing. A burnt child dreads the fire. Seber roetfc am beften, mo berer) hunger ift ber Bcfte $odj. 2>ie Beit bringt 3tofen. Set liigt, ber fttefclt. Set juerft fommt, ma^lt juerft. 25en ©eleljrten ift gut nrebigen. 3eber ift fid) felbft ber Md)fte. SBeffer (StroaS, aB 3ttdjt8. tleme £onfe laufen balb uber. 9?ad) Sftegen folgt ©onnenfdjein. 2Korgenftunb f)at ©olb im 2JIunb. (S3 ift nid&t Me§ ©olb, roa§ glanjt. Uebung mad)t ben 2Jtetfter. S93ie man's tretbt, fo geljt'3. None knows so well, where the shoe pinches, as he that wears it. Birds of a feather flock together. What the heart thinks, the mouth speaks. A good stomach is the best sauce. Time and straw make medlars ripe. Show me a liar, and I'll show thee a thief. First come, first served. A word to the wise. Charity begins at home. Better aught, than nought. A little pot is soon hot. After the storm comes a calm. Early to bed and early to rise makes a man healthy, wealthy and wise. All is not gold that glitters. Practice makes perfect. Do well and have well. Materials for conversation. 393 Unredjt ©ut gebetljt nidjt. Unfraut uerbtrbt ntdjt. Sfteue 25e)"en tefyren gut. (Snbe gut, Me£ gut. Ill gotten wealth never prospers. Ill weeds grow apace. A new broom sweeps clean. All's well that ends well. Easy conversations. 1. SSer Hopft on bte 2#ure? Ser i[t ba? %Ra<§en ©ie auf. 2)er ©d)luffet ftecft. ©inb ©ie nod) im S3ett? ©teljen ©ie auf. @S ift geit aufjuftefjen. (S3 ift feller Sag. SGBatum fteljen ©ie fo fp&t auf? 3d) bin oorige SRadjt lange auf* gebueben. 3a) bin fefyt fpat in'§ S5ett gegangen unb Ijabe fcr)Ied)t gefdjlafen. SBann ftefyeu ©ie geroofynlid) auf? Urn fieben !U)r. Unb urn ttrieoiel Ufyt finb ©ie I;eute aufgeftanben ? 3d) ftanb mtt ©onnenaufgang auf. 3d) fdjlafe ntdjt gem lange. Who knocks at the door? Who is there? Open the door. The key is in the door. Are you in bed still? Get up (rise). It is time to get up. Tis broad day. Why do you rise so late? I sat up late last night. I went to bed very late, and I slept ill to-night. What time do you generally get At seven o'clock. t u P ? And you, at what o'clock did you rise to-day? I got up with sun-rise. I don't like to sleep long. 2. Semen ©ie 2)eutfdj? 3a, mein §err, id) leme e». Wan fagt, ©te fpredjen fe&r gut 2)eutfd). 3d) oerftelje e§ beffer, al§ id) el fpredjen fann. SBerftefyen ©ie, roa§ ©ie lefen? 3a, tnetn £>err, id) t)erfter)e alle beutfd)en 33ud)er. ©agen ©ie mir etnmal, tt)ie nennen ©ie biefe3 auf (Sngltfd)? 3a) glaube, man nennt e3 . . . ©predje idj gut au3? 3iemlid) gut. ©ie beburfen nut nodj ein roenig Uebung. 9Hd)t§ uritb olme SUtufye exlangt. Do you learn German? Yes, Sir, I learn it (I do). It is said that you speak very well German. I understand better, than I can speak. Do you understand what you read? Yes, Sir ; I understand all German books. Tell me, what do you call that in English? I believe they call it . . . Do I pronounce well? Pretty well. You only want a little more practice. There is nothing to be got with- out pains. 394 Materials for conversation. 3. 9flein£err, fmb @ic ein (Snglanber? 3a, metn £err, 3bnen su bienen. ©predjen @ie 2)eutf<$? 3d) fpredje e3 etn roenig. SBie Iange f inb @ie fdjon in SDeutfajlanb? 3el)n donate, ©ie fpredjen jtemlia) gut 2)eutfd) fur biefe furje Beit. 3a) Ijabe f eine gertigfeit im ©predjen. 2)iefe roirb mit ber 3^it fommen. ©agt Sfuien 3^r Mjrer nidjt, bo^ ©ie immer 2)eutfdj fpredjen muff en ? 3a, ntetn £err; er fagt e§ mir fe^r oft, aber id; mage e§ nid)t. ©Iauben ©ie mtr, feten ©ie ritljn unb fpredjen ©ie, olme ju be-- forgen, ob ©ie etnige getyler madden ober ntdjt. SBenn to) fo fpredje, fo rotrb mid; 3ebermann au§lad)en. 2>iefe§ f)at 9ttdjt§ ju fagen; aber id) glaube e§ nidjt. SBiffen ©te ntdjt, bafj, urn gut fpredjen ju lernen, man anfdngt, fd)lec|t 3U fprea)en? Sir, are you an Englishman? Yes, Sir, at your service. Do you speak German? I speak a little. How long have you been in Ger- many? Ten months. You speak German pretty well for this short time. I have not the facility of speaking. That will come in time. Does not your master tell you, that you must always speak German? Yes, Sir, he tells me so very often, but I dare not. Believe me, be confident, and speak without minding whether you make some mistakes or not. If I speak so, everybody will laugh at me. No matter for that, but I think not. Do you not know, that to learn to speak well, one begins by speaking badly? APPENDIX. A PEW SPECIMENS OF GERMAN POETICAL LITERATURE 1. $ ©rja|>Iuttgen. 1. 5Da0 ptjndjen unb bet jDiamant'. (Sin fcerfyungert §iil)ndjen fanb (Stnen fetnen SDtamant' Unb toerfdjarrt 1 tfm in ben (Sanb. „9)?6djte bodj, mid) jn erfren'n," ©pradj e8, „btefer fd)6ne . £agebotn (died 1794). 2. Sew ^cd^lein. 5Du SBadjtein, fxlbet^eU nnb ftar, ®n etlft toorii&er tmmerbar, $lm Hfer fte^' id), finn' 2 nnb finn'; 2Bo fommft bn ^er'? 2Bo gefyjt bn §UT? „3$ fomm an8 bnnfler ^elfen ©07008; Stfein £auf 3 gefyt itber 23tum' nnb 9ftoo8; Sluf metnem (Spiegel 4 fdrtoebt fo nttlb £)c§ blauen §immet8 freunbtid) 33tlb. !D'rum Ijab' tdj frozen $tnberftnn; (S8 tretbt midj fort, roeig nicfyt roofytn. 2)er 5 mid) gernfen au8 bent ©tern, 3)er, ben!' ic^ ; roirb mein %tyxtx fetn." ©otfce. t 1832. 3. 5Der (Ddjfe uni) bet Cfcl. £)d)8 nnb (Sfel janften fid} 6 8ei'm ©pajiergang nm bie SBette: 2Ber am metften 2Bet^ett fyatte; Reiner ftegte, Reiner arid). — (Snblidj !am man itberein 7 : $5a§ ber Sotue, menn er tooflte, Sttefen ierber)errfd)er$ Xfyrone, £)er mtt einem eblen §o!jne 8 5Inf bag $aar fyernieber bttcft. 1) to hide. 2) think. 3) course, way. 4) mirror. 5) he who. 6) quarrelled. 7) came to the agreement, agreed. 8) scorn. 398 A few specimens of German poetical literature. (Snbltdj fortdjt tie Sttajeftat £,\i toem (Sfet unto bent barren 1 : „3f)r fetb afle 33ett?e barren." — • 3eber gafft tyn an 2 unto gefyt. «pf«ff«i t isok 4. Ber iinabe un& Mc Satteln. ©in tnaBe ag, rote oiele SfrtaBen, SDte £>attetn fiir fein Men gem 3 , Unto urn be$ ©uten tie! $u IjaBen, @o pftanjt er einen $)attetfern 3n femes Waters Slumengarten. — $)er S3ater fafy ifym tacfyetnb $u Unto fragte: „$)attem oflanseft tou? O ttnto, toa mugt tou (ange marten; 3)enn miffe! biefer etole 23aum £ragt oft nad) ^oanjig 3aljren faum $)te evften f enter ftigen griidjte." — tart, toer jtdj tocffen ntdjt fcerfaf) 4 , "Stanto SfnfangS ganj Betroffen toa; ®od) Balb mtt frofyltdjem ©eficfyte dlu\t er: „£)a$ foil mid} nidjt fcertoriegen; — 23elofmt tote 3 e ^ nur 5 meinen ftfetg, (Bo lann idj \a toereinft ats ®rei«, 28a8 jefct toer tnaBe pflanjt, geniegen." ipfeffti. 5. 5Der ,/ifdjer. ©ag etn $ifd?er an toem 23ad), »oHte ftifdjlein fangen; $5odj e§ BUeB toen ganjen £ag leer tote 2tnget fangen. (Sntoltdj jucft 6 e8, unto er faf) $ifd)(etn jappemto 7 fdjtoeBen. ©ottoenrotljlid) Ijing e8 toa, fleJjt' tfm um fetn SeBen. „SteBer Sifter, lag mid) lo$," fpradj'8 mtt gtattcn Shorten, „2ag mid) in toer SBeGen ©djooS, Bis td) grog geroortoen." , r §ifd)lein, toaS lann nidjt gefdjelj'n, Ijier fyitft fetn SBeflagen. Sieg' id) jefct totdj toietoer gefy'n, mod)t' ju t>tet id) toagen." „£)enfe tood), tote ftetn id) Bin; l)afl }a faum toret 23tf[en 8 . ?ag mid) in tote gtutl) ba^tn; totrft mid) nid)t oermiffen." „2Betl tou gar $u nietolid) Btft unto fo jung am 2eBen, ©ei toir eine fletne f^rtft 9 nod) oon mir gegeBen. 2Bir(t tou aBer groger fein, toenf an toetne 2Borte. ©telle bid) jum $ange ein l)ier an toiefem Drte." 1) ox. 2) to gaze at. 3) liked very much, was fond of. - 4) to expect. 5) instead of menu mtr, provided. 6) to bob. - 7) wavering, trembling. 8) bite. 9) delay. A few specimens of German poetical literature. 399 grBIjUdj fyrang feaS ^tfcfylein fym in fete SBeflenfitfyle i f Zxitb mtt Ijetter'm, froijem (Sinn feme luft'gen ©pie(e. TO ein 3afyr ttoritfcer tear, feadjt' e8 fetner SBorte, ©tellte ftdj feem Otfdjer fear an feem alten Ortc. 3)odj fe e r fprad) : „2BeU feu f o treu an feem SBort gel)angcn, Sag tdj bid) anf tmmer fret, wttt fetcfy mentals fangen." toff tilt 6. 9Dcr toet^e ^irfd). (£$ gtngen feret 3ager teol)( auf fete 23trfd) 2 , ©te tooflten erjagen feen rcetgen §trfdj. ©te fegten fid) nnter feen £annenoaum, ©a fatten feie 2)ret etnen fettfanten £raum. ®cr @rfle. TOr Ijat getraumt 3 , idfy ffopf auf feen 23ufd) 4 , 2)a raufcfyte feer §trfdj IjerauS, Imfd), ^ufd> ! 2)cr Btoette. Unfe at« er fprang mtt feer §unfee ®ef(aff 5 , £)a brannt' id) 6 ifym auf fea8 Sell, piff, paff ! S)cr SDrtttc. Unfe a!8 tdj feen §trfd) an feer (Srfee fatj, £)a ftteg' 7 id) luftig in'8 £)orn, trara! ©o lagen fte fea unfe fpradjen fete 2)rei, £)a rannte feer toetge §irfd) fcoroei. Unfe efy' fete feret 3ager itm red)t gefelj'n, ©o tear er fea&on (off) itber Xiefe unfe §et)'n. §ufdj, ljufdj! piff, paff! trara! 8 . a*uni. 7. Afoi>\ Slefop gtng etnjt nadj etnem ©tafetdjen Ijin. (Sin SSanfe'rer fam unfe griigte iljn — Unfe fragt': „2Bie lange, greunfe, Jjafc' idj ju gelj'n 93t« ju feem ftleden 8 feort, feen tetr toon 2Beitem fe^'n?" — „®ef)!" fyrid)t Utefop. — Unfe er: „2)a$ teetg id) teofyl, 3)a§, teenn idj teeiter fommen fofl, 3dj gefyen mug; aflein feu fofljt mtr fagen: 3n tetemel ©tunfeen?" — „Sfl\m, fo get)'!" — ,3$ fefye teot;I," SBrummt fyter feer ftremfee, „feiefer $erl 9 ift tofl; 3dj teerfee -ftid)t8 ton ifjm erfragen;" 1) the cool waves. 2) hunting. 3) I dreamt. 4) to beat the bush. 5) barking. 6) I fired at him. 7) I blew. 8) town. 9) this fellow. 400 A few specimens of German poetical literature. Unb bre^t jtdj roeg unb ge^t. — „§e," ruft Hefop, „em 235ort! groei ©tunben brtngen bid) an ben beftimmten Drt." £)er 2Banb'rer bletbt betroffen fteljen. JSi," ruft er, „unb rote roeigt bu'8 nun?" „Unb rote," uerfe^t' 5Iefop, Jonnt' id) ben $u8fprudj tfyun 1 , S3et>or id) beinen ©ang 2 gefeljen?" — snuiai t i8ii. 8, 5Der iBlink ml i>cr £al)mc. SSon Ungefaljr mug etnen 231inben (Sin Saunter auf bev ©tra&e finben, Unb 3eber Ijofft fd)on freubenfcofl, 2)ag ifyn ber inb're leiten foil. „£)ir," fprtd)t ber Salnne, ^Betjufte^en ? — 3d) armet 9)cann lann felbft nid)t gefyen. 2)odj fd)eint'8, bag bu ju einer 2aft (Sin $aar gefunbe (Scfyuttern tyaft. (Sntfd)ttege btdj, midj fortjutragcn, ©o roitt tdj bir bie 2Bege 3 fagen; tg blieb, tylan roarf tote (Srt>c gar burd)'3 ©teb Unt) jog bie §arfen freuj unb quer ?Rad> jebem Stetndjen bin unb t;er. 2!Kem ba \uavb fein ©djafc serfpitrt Unt> 3eber fyielt ftrfj angefuljrt 1 . £>od), !aum erfdnen ba§ nad)fte 3al)r, So nafnn 2 man mit Srftaunen roafyr 2 , 2)af$ jet>e Sftebe bretfad) trug. ®a tourben erft bie ©ofme Hug, Unb gruben nun, Satyr em, Satyr au3, S)e* er §immet fttirmt mit 2£mb unb $ftegen; £)enn fttirmifrty foflt' e3 tyeute feirt. 2)er SBanb'rer fefct, mit bitt'rer $(age : SDafc 3 eu§ wfo Siei§ 4 bie 5ftenfrtyen plage, jJDie fau're Stteife miityfam fort. orty 28inb unb 3teg>>n ftnb jmotber; 3)er ^feil 9 fattt matt 10 oor bem barnteber, 2)em er baS £>erj burd)botyren foil. „D £tyor," lagt 3euS fid) jornig ^orert, — „2Btrto bid) ber matte -pfeil nun letyren, £)b id) bem (Sturm $n fciel erlaubt? 1) deceived. 2) they perceived. 3) stormy. 4) on purpose. 5) rages. 6) a blasphemy. — 7) relaxed , slacked. 8) he views and aims. 9) arrow. IOj powerless. OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 9 ft 402 A few specimens of German poetical literature. §att' tdj btr ©onnenfdjem gegeben, <§o Ijatte bir ber $fet( bag Seben, 2)a« bit bet ntdjt nm aUeS ©oib. |)ort nut! (Stnft jagten tt)ir §ufaren 2)en $emb nad) $erjcn«lufl 6 ; £>a fdjofj ein ©nnb oon 3anttfd)aren $)en §auptmann in bte 23ruft. 3d) Ijob tfyn flngS anf meinen ©d)immel 7 — (£r Ijatt' efc audj getfyan — Unb trng u)n fort auS bem ©etiimmel 8 3n etnem (Sbelmann. 3a§ ©olb mugt bn bem SBtrtfje fdjenfen, 2)er bretmal ^liinb'rung Ittt — 1) how do you like ? 2) Turkish Pasha. 3) after-grass. 4) ranks. 5) pension, half-pay. 6) with pleasure. 7) grey horse. 8) din. A few specimens of German poetical literature. 403 <2o badjt' tdj; unb jum Ingebenfen ^al)m tdj bte ^fetfe nut. 3d) trug auf alien meinen S^S 1 ^ 1 <3te rote ein §eittgtlmm, 2Btr molten roetdjen ober ftegen, 3m ©ttefel mtt fyerum. $or ^rag sertor id) auf t)er ©tretfe 2)a8 33ein burdj einen ©^ug, $)a griff id) erft nad) meiner SPfetfe Unt) bann nad) metrtem $uj$." — „3fyr rii^ret, greunb, mtd) bis ju 3^^ en > £) fagt, rote Ijiefe ber Sttarm? 2)amtt audj metn §erj tljrt serefyren Unb tfm beroeinen farm." „9ttan Ijieg iljn nur ben tapfern SBaltfyer, £)ort lag fein ©ut 2 am 9ftjein." — „!3£)a8 roar metn $ater, lieber liter, Unb jene3 ®ut tft metn. $ommt, $reunb, 3fyr foUt bet mtr nun (eben! ^ergeffet (Su're 9cott)! $ommt, trirtft mtt mtr son 2Baftfyer'§ Sfteben 3 , Unb egt oon 2Baltf)er'S 25rob!" „9cun, tepp 4 ! 3fyr fetb fetn roacfrer (Srbe! 3d) jtefye morgen ein, Unb <5uer 2)anf foil, roenn tdj (terbe, £>ie liirfenpfetfe fetn!" 1) campaigns. 2) estate. 3) vines. 4) well. 2. Sieber unt> (Slegtetu 1. Dcr .Sdju^e. 1 Wlit bem $feit unb 33ogen SDurdj ®ebirg unb Stfyctl, $ommt 2 ber Scfyiifc gejogen 2 gritty am Sftorgenftraljl. 2Bte tm SKeid) ber Siifte $6nig tft ber 2Beit> 3 , 1) the shooter, archer. 2) walks, out. 3) as the hawk is a king in the air, &c. 26* 404 -A- few specimens of German poetical literature. 3)ur<$ ©ebirg unb $ tiiftc §errf d;t t>et ©djiifce fret. 3fyn gefyort t>a§ SBette 1 ; SBaS fern ^Pfeit erretdjt, 2)a§ ift feme 8eute, 2BaS ba treu^t 2 unb fleugt 2 . St. ». Skillet, t 1805. 2. ©tfunben. 3$ ging im 2Balbe fo fiir mtct) Inn, Unb SRtdjtS su fucfyen, bay tear metn ©inn. 3m ©fatten fat) id) ein SMumdjen fte^'it, 2Bie ©rente teud^tenb 3 , loie Sleuglein fd)bn. 3d) iootlt' e8 bredjen, ba fagt e$ fetn: „©ofl id) junt SBelfen 4 gebrodjen fetn?" 3dj grub'8 mit alien ben SSurjtehi au8; 3nm ©arten trug tdj'3 am fyiibfdjen §au$. Unb pflanjt' e$ toieber am ftillen Drt 5 , 9htn toacfygt e§ toieber unb bliUjt fo fort, q)*;| ( . tissi 3. 4)erbplttft. 23alb faEt con fatben .S^eigen 5>a« lefcte 23latt fyerab; £>te SBufdj' unb SSaloer fdjtoeigen, SDtc SBelt ift tote ein ©rab. 2Bo finb fte nun geblteben 2)ie 5}6g'lein alT, bie lieben? 5ld>! fte fangen erft fo fcfyon! — 2)er Sftetf 6 fyat fte oertrieben 2Beg iiber £l?al unb §or)'n. Unb bange 7 toirbS unb banger Unb bV in %d% unb §ag; 3)te Dcadjte toerben longer Unb fiirjer totrb ber Sag. 2)ie ©anger ftnb toerfdjtounben 3n btefen triiben ©tunben, ©ucfyen ^ruljling anberStoo; Uno too fte ben gefunben, SDa finb fie toieber frolj. 1) space. 2) obsolete forms for frtec&t and fiiegt (creeps and flies). 3] shining, glittering. 4) to wither. 5) place. 6) the hoar frost. 7) sad, dull. A few specimens of German poetical literature. 405 Unb roenn con falBen 3 TDe ^9 ert £)a§ k&c 33latt nod> fattt, SBertn SBiifdj' unb 2Mbet fdjtceigen, 21(8 ttauette bie Selt, £)etn $ritl)(tng fartrt nidjt fd)ftmben! 23au' il)n in §et3enSgtunben *, (Set tu felBet bit bein ©tiitf! ©o fannft bu grilling ftnbeit 3n jebem 2higenB(icf. Hoffmann ». fcallerSlefc en, 4. ft)mtcrlte&. 2Bte ruijeft bu fo fttde 3n beinet roeiften §itlle, 3>u miittetlidjeS 2anb ! 2Bo ftnb bie fttitfylingsltebet, 2)eg ©omntetS Bunt ©eftebet Unb betn BeBliimteS $eftgen>anb 2 ? $)u fdjiummetft nun entfteibet; $ein Samm, fein ©cfyafletn tuctbet Un\ beinen 2Iu'n 3 unb §6fy'n. £)et SBcg'tein Steb fcetftummte ; $ein S3ien(ein meljr, ba§ fummte; Dod) bu Bift audj im 2Bintet fd)8n. Die 3^^' unb 2lefte fcfcimmetn 4 Unb taufenb Stdbter flimmern 5 , Bofyin baS luge Blttft. Set t^at betn SBett Beteitet, Die Decfe bir geBteitet 6 Unb btdj fo fdjon mtt 9?etf gefdnnitdt? Det gute SSater btoBen $at bir betn .ttetb gerooBen; (St fdtfaft unb fdjlummert mdjt. er. f 1845. ftifdjerfnabc (fxngt in bent $a§n). (£8 lac^ett bet ©ee, cr labet 1 jum 23abe, 3)er $nabe fdjlief em am grimen ©eftabe; 3)a Ijort er em felingen 2 rote gloten fo fug, 2Bie ©timmen bet (Sngel im $arabie§. Unb tote er ertoacfyet in feliger Suft, 2)a fpielen bie SBaffer il)m urn bie 23ruft. Unb eg 3 ruft au8 ben Siefen: SietV fnabe btfl nietn; 3dj locfe ben ©djafer, ici) jie^ iljn Innetn. fyittt (fmgt auf bem SBerge). 31>r fatten 4 , IcBt tool)l, 3fyr fonnigen SBetben 5 ! £)er ©enne 6 mu§ fdjeiben, $)er ©ommer ift t)in. 2Btr faljren ju SBcrg, roir fommen toieber, 2Benn ber $ufut* ruft, toenn ertoad)en bie Steber. 2Bcnn mit SBhtmen bie (Srbe fidj fletbet neu, 2Benn bie SBriumlem flicfcen im lieblidjen 9#ai. 3l)r fatten, lefet tool)!, 3t)r fonnigen SBetben ! S)er ©enne mufj fdjeiben, £)er ©ommer ift Inn. Soger (ftngt auf bem $elfcn). (58 bonnern bte §ol)en, e8 jittert ber ©teg 7 , •ifticfyt grauet bem ©djut^en auf fdjtoinbltcfyem 2Beg; , (§r fdjreitet fcerroegen auf gelbern toon ©«, $)a pranget fetn §ritt)ttng, ba griinet fein Sftei3. Unb unter ben Biijen ein nebltges 3Jleer # (Srfcnnt er bie ©table ber 2ftenfd)en nicfyt met)r: 3)urd) ben SKig nur ber 2Bolfen erblicft er bie 2£e(t, £tef unter ben Saffern bag griinenbe ^elb. €d)iliII). f 1805. 1) for tabet ein invites. 2) a tone, sound. 3) e§ ruft = a voice, a call is heard. 4) ye meadows! 5) pasture. 6) the herdsman, cow-keeper. 7) wooden-bridge. A few specimens of German poetical literature. 407 6. 3d)laf etu, nteiit ijerj. ©djfof em, mem §erj, in $rieben! $)en miiben SlugcnUben 1 £)er 23lumen I) at gebradjt (SrqutcfungStfyau * bie 9?ad>t. ©djlaf em, mem £>er$, in grteben! 2)aS Seben fdjlaft ^tenteben, £)er Sttonb in flitter $rad>t, Sin Sluge ©otteS, roacfyt. ©cfylaf cm, mein §er$, in ^rieben! 23on gurdjt unb ©ram gefdjteben 2 ; £)er 3 SBelten Ijat bebacfyt, ^immt 4 aud) ein §erj in 2fd)t 4 . ©djlaf ein, mein §erj, in fjrieben! SSon bofem £raum gemteben, ©eftarft son ©laubengmadjt, 33on ©offnung angeladjt. ©djlaf ein, mein §erj, in ^rteben! Unb menn bir ift befdjieben £)er STob fyier in ber s Jcadfyt, ©o btft bn bort 5 ermadjt. Hudert. 1 186«. §oret, ma8 idj eud) mill fagen! 3)ie ©tocf l)at ,3elm gefc^tagcn. Sefct betet unb bann gel;t ju S3ett; SDodj ti3fd)t bag 2id}t au3, el)' tfyr gel)t; ©cfylaft fanft unb mofyl! 3m §tmmel mac^t (Sin flares Slug' bie ganje Wadjt. §3ret, wa$ id) eucb mill fagen! £>te ©locf bat (Slf gcfdjlagen. Unb roer nod) bei ber Arbeit fdjrotfct 6 , Unb mer beim fartenfm'el nod) fifct, £)em fag' icfy'8 laut unb beutlid) nun: '3 ift I)ol)e 3 e it, nun au^urufy'n. §oret, maS id) end) mill fagen! i)te ©locf Ijat S^olf gestagen. 2Bo no$ in ftiOer SQcttternadjt 1) the night has brought refreshing dew to the weary eyelids. 2) separated. 3) he who. 4) takes also care. 5) in the other world. 6) to sweat; here: to work hard. — 408 A few specimens of German poetical literature. ©n franfeS §erj tooll Summer roadjt, ©ott geb' it)m Sroft 1 , oerleify' ifym 9tul)' Unb fitfjr'8 bem fanften en $atertanb? 3jV« ^ommerlanb? 2Beftyfyalentanb? 1) comfort. 2) cunning and advice. 3) sneaks. 4) yet, if it be so. 5) let him go home. 6) care. 7) dawns. 8) gnaws. 9) fellow, man. 10) rely. It) hovers. 12) lives to see. 13) the sea-gull. 14) Styria. 15) forges. A few specimens of German poetical literature. 409 3ft'g, too toer ©anto toer SDunen 1 toefjt? 3ft'«, too tote £)onan Braufento 2 gd)t? £> nein! o item! k. jc. 2Bag tft toeg ©entfdjen SSatertanto? ©o nenne mtr toag groge Santo! ©enng, eg tft toag Defterreidfy, 2ln ©iegen unto an (Sfjren reid). O nein! o nein! :c. ic. 2Ba§ t|i te8 Seutfdjen SSatertanto? ©o nenne mir toag groge Santo! 3ft'g Santo toer ag Santo nnto 93olf geftel' mit tool;l. 2)otfj nein! toodj nein! tc. jc. Sag tft toes 2)eutfd)en 93aterlanto? ©o nenne entolid) mtr toag Santo! (So toett tote toeutfdje 3 un 9 e Hingt Unto ©ott tm ©intntel Sietoer [tngt: 2>ag [oil eg fein! toag foil eg fein! QaS, wacfrer 2)eut[d)er, nenne toein! 2>ag tft toeg £>eutftf>en SSaterfanto: So (Sttoe 3 fcfyttort toer 3)rucf toer §anto, 2Bo £reite fyell oom 5Iuge oli£t 4 , Unto Siebe ttxtfm tm §evjen ft£t: QaS foil eg fein! t>a« [oil eg fein! 3>ag, ttacfrer 2)cutfdjer, nenne toein! $)a% $an$e £)eutfd)lanto [oil eg fein! £> @ott! oom §immel ftet)' toarein; Unto gieo nng arisen toeutfdjen SDlufy; 3)aft nrir eg ItcBcn treu nnto gut! 3)ag foil eg [ein! toag foil eg [etn! %)a% ganje ©eutfcfylanto [oil eg [ein! (S. SR. 9lrnM. f 1800. 9. £ai)tfd)C0 Dolkslicb. 2Bo ftcfy n>al$t 5 toer grihte dtfytin $on toem ©ee Sig an toen 9ftatn, 2Bo toer n ftc^ grabt: £>a liegt unfer toeut[d)eg 23atoen, ^letnoto 6 afler toeutfc^en ©taaten. 1} downs 2) foaming. 3) oaths. 4) flashes. 5) to roll. R) jewel. 410 A few specimens of German poetical literature. 2Bo ber Senj in 23tittljen prangt, 2Bo btc SKeb' am §itgel ranft 1 , 2Bo ber @td)»alt> macfyttg tfyront, 9?etd)e $rucfyt ben $let§ belotmt, 2Bo t>ie 23erg' in 2Botfen baben 2 : 2)a erftrecft fid) unfer S3aben. 2Bo ber (Sonne mttber ©trafyt, £eud)tenb itber 23erg unb £fyal, Sftetft ben eblen golb'nen 2£ein; 2Bo bte Suft fo frtfcfy unb rein: — £)a§ tft nnfer fdjimeS 23aben, Sflug ju Sufi unb $reube laben. 2Bo ber ©taub' an ©otteS 2Bort SBurjelt feft an jebem Drt, 2Bo ber ©taubenSfyafj nidjt brennt, 2Bo man SBruberltebe fennt: 5Da gibt'3 reidje SiebeStfyaten 3 — £reu unb fromm tft unfer 23aben. 2Bo ©eroerb 4 unb §anbel bitten, '$ ©eijt 1) twines. 2) bathe. 3) works of love, charity. 4) trade. 5) railways. 6) draws. 7) all is well. 8) beam. 9) rules. A few specimens of German poetical literature. 411 griebridj, ber ber ©iit'ge Ijeigt; ©rolj'n ©efafjren ober ©djaben, SBenbet 1 er fie aB 1 »on 23aben. ©ott etfjalt* ba8 fd)6ne S3anb gtoifcfyen giirft unb SBaterlanb! ©liidUd) ffttyft fidj 23aben8 ©ofyn S3 on ber §iitte bis jum Scroti, Unb empfieljlt in ©otteS ©naben gilrjl unb SBolf im Sanbe 23aben. emit otto. 10. (Sebet maljrtnb tor 3d)lad)t. 5?ater, id) rufe bidj! SBritflenb umtoolft mid) ber £)ampf ber ©efd)il$e 2 , ©priifyenb un^ucfen 3 mid) raffelnbe SBlifce. Senfer ber ©d)(ad)ten, id) rufe bid)! 23ater, bu ftiljre midj! SSater, bu fiiljre mid)! Sufyr' mid) jum emt(fyen 2 jtrtot. (Stifle ftnft aug nnbettolften Stiffen, Sangfam jtefy'n bte §eerben toon ten Xrtftett 3 , linb ber mitbe Sanbmann ei(t ber 9?ulj' (Seiner toaterlidfyen §ittte $u. §ter auf btefen tt>alb*umfran$ten §ofyen, Unter Sritmmern ber $ergangenfyett, 2Bo ber SSorroelt <3($auer 4 mid) umtoeljen, Set bteg Sieb, o SBefymntfy, bir gemeifyt! Srauernb benf tdj, n>ag toor grauen 3ab,ren ©iefe morfefyen Ueberrefte toaren: (Sin betfyiirmteg Sd)lo§, tooCC Sttajeftat. 9luf beg 2Sergeg gelfenftirn' 5 erijoljt! £>ort, too urn beg ^pfetlerg bnnfte Xritmmer £raurtg ttgtoetnb ftd) ber Stolen fdjltngt, Unb ber 2lbenbrotf)e tritber et§ bem nafyen .^anttof entgegenfdjttoofl. „3teV in $rieben," ftoradj ber greife 6 $rieger, 3fyn umgitrtenb nttt bem §elbenfd?ttoert ; „$e1jre nimnter, ober fefyr' atg Sieger; ©et beg 9?ameng bemer 3Sater n>ertl)!" Unb beg eblen Sitngltngg 2Iuge ftomfyte 7 SEobegflammen ; feine 2Bange glitfyte ®Ietdj bem aufgebtitfyten Sftofenfyatn 3n bet Sftorgenrotfye ^$urtourfd)ein. Sine ©onnertoolfe flog ber fitter 2)ann rote SRidjarb Sb'menberj jur ©djtadjt: ©leidj bem Sannenrcalb tm -Ungetrntter SBeugte ftdj toor ifym beg e§ £errlid)feit, Unb toirb einft toieber !ommen mit ifyr ju feiner £dt. 3)er ©tufyt ift etfenbeinern 2 , toorauf ber $aifer fifct; 2)er £if<$ ift marmelfteinera, toorauf fein §au»t er ftii§t 3 . ©ein 53art ift nid)t ton ftladjfe, er ift toon ^euerSglutfy 4 , 3ft burd) ben £tfcfy getoad)fen, toorauf fein finn auSrufyt. 1) enchanted. 2) of ivory. 3) leans. 4) red like fire. 414 A few specimens of German poetical literature. (Sr nttft aU tote tm £raume, fein Hug' Ijalb offen jtoinft; Unb je naa) tangem Sftaume ev einem fnaben roinft. (§r fprtdjt im ©djlaf ^nm ®naben: ©elj' Ijm oor'3 ©cfytofc, o 3^erg, Unb fiefy', ob nodj bie Sftaben fyerfttegen urn ben 93erg. Unb loenn bie alten Sftaben nod) fltegen immerbar, ©o mug id) audj nod) fd)tafen oer^aubert Imnbert 3afjr. St. JRucfert. 2, 5Dcr danger.*) „2Ba8 IjbY id) bramjen oor bem £fyor, 2Ba3 auf ber SBriitfc flatten? Safet ben ©efang tor unferm £)fyr 3m ©aate toteberfyatten!" £>er $6nig fpradj'8, ber ^age lief; S)er tnabe lam, ber $onig rtef: ,$a§t mtr herein ben 2Uten!" ©egritget 1 fetb mtr, eble §errn, ©cgriigt tljr, fd)6ne £)amen! 2Beld)' reid)er §tmmel! ©tern bet ©tern! 28er !ennet ifyre -iftamen? 3m ©aal 00U ^rac^t unb £>errtt<$fett ©cfyliegt 2htgen eud); fyter ift nicfyt &tit, ©id) ftaunenb ju ergo^en." 2)er ©anger briidt' bte $ugen ein, Unb facing 2 in ooflen £onen; £>ie fitter fd)auten 3 mutfytg brein, Unb in ben ©djoog 4 bte ©djonen. 3)er $6nig, bem bag £ieb geftet, Steg ifym pm £of)ne fur fein ©piet, Sine golb'ne $dtt bringen. „$)te golb'ne &ette gieb mtr nid)t; ®ie $ette gteb ben bittern, 33or beren fiiljnem 2lngefid)t £)er $einbe Sanjcn fplittern. ®ieb fie bem Tangier, ben bu fyajt, Unb lag il)n nod} bte golb'ne Saft 5 3u anbern Saften tragen." „3d) finge, toie ber 9$og.el fingt, 3)er in ben 3*oeigen toofynet; 1) be saluted. — 2) played. 3) looked round. 4) lap. 5) burden. ') The minstrel. -See the translation in the Key. A few specimens of German poetical literature. 415 2)aS Sieb, baS au« ber fteljle brtngt, 3ft 2otyn, ber retdjtidj tofynet. $)odj barf tdj bitten, bxtt" id) (£m«: Sagt mir ben Beften Secret 2Betn§ 3n purem @olbe reidjen." G£r fefct' iljn an, er tranf tljm au$: „D £ran? octl fiiger Sabe! O looljl bem fyocfybeaUtdten §au8, 2Bo bag tft 1 ttetne ®a6e! Srgefyt'S eudj tooljl, fo benft an mid), Unb banfet (Sott fo toarm a(S id) f^iir btefen Zxxrnt end) banfe." ®sti?e. 3. 3Der (Erlkimig. 2 2Ber reitet fo foat burd} ftadjt unb 2Binb? (S3 tjt ber SSater nut fetnem $tnb'; Sr Ijat ben $naben tool)! in bem fat'; (Sr jagt tf)n ftdjer, er Ijalt iljn toarm. „9JMn <5oInt, toa$ birgft bu fo Bang bein ®eftd)t?" — „©ief)'ft 23ater, bu ben CSvlfonig ntd)t? £)en (Srlenfontg mit £ron' unb ©dnoetf?" — „9Dcan ©oljn, e$ ift ein 9cebelftveif 3 ." „£)u liebeS $tnb, fontm' gel)' mit mtr! ®ar fd)bne (Soiele fpief id) mit bir; Sftandj' bunte 23lumen finb an bem Stranb'; 9ftetne Gutter tyat mand)' giitben' ©etuanb." „$ftem 33ater, metn SSater, unb fyoreft bu ntd;t, 2BaS Ghtentenig mir leife oevfprtdu?" — „©ei ruljtg, bleib rufytg, metn $mb! 3n biirren Slattern faufett ber SBtnb." „2BitIft, fetner $nabe, bu mit mtr gefy'n? 2fteine Stouter {often btdj marten 4 fdjon; 9Keine £bd)ter fufyren ben nadjtlidjen SReify'n Unb toiegen unb tanjen unb fingen bidj ein 5 ." — ..Sftein 23ater, metn $ater, unb ftefyft bu ntdjt bort (Srtfb'nig'S £bd)ter am bitfter'n Drt'?" — „Wltin ©ofyn, mein Sofyn, idj fe^' e« genau; (§8 fdjeinen bie atten SBeiben fo grau." 1) where this is considered a small gift. 2) The Fairy king. 3) a misty cloud. 4) wait upon. 5) sing into sleep. 416 A few specimens of German poetical literature. „„3d) lieb' bid), mid) rei$t betne fd)one ©eftalt; Unb btft bu nidjt rotflig, fo braud)' id) ©eroalt."" — — „9#etn SSater, mein 23ater, }e$ fagt er mtdj an ; (Srtfontg fyat mit ein SeibS 1 getfyan." £)em SBater graufet'8 (shudders), er reitet gefdjroinb; (5r Ijalt in ben airmen bag adjjenbe $inb, <2rretd)t ben ©of 2 mit 9Hm)e unb 9totl): 3n feinen airmen bag $inb mar tobt. Gitbe. 4. 3Dcr rridjfle JmJL „§errlid)", fpradj ber giirji fcon ©adjfen, „3jt mein 2anb unb feme yjlafyt. ©ilber I)egen 3 feme Serge 2BoIjl in mand)em ttefen ©d;ad)t 4 ." J&efyt mein Sanb in ityp'ger Suite," ©pradj ber furfiivft won bent 9ft;ein, ©olb'ne ©aaten in ben Sbalem, 5luf ben 23ergen ebier SBein." „@roge ©table, reidje Softer," Subroig, §err w 23atern, fpradj, „®d)affen 5 , baft mein Sanb ben eu'ren Sci)l nid)t ftefyt an ©djafcen nadjV (Sberfyarb, ber mit fcem 33arte, SSBurtemberg'S geltebter £>err, ©prad): „9)cem Sanb fyat fteine (Stable, £ragt nid)t SBeige, filberfd)roer; 5Dodj ein Sfteinob 7 fyalt'S toerborgen: 2)aj} in SBalbern, nod) fo grog, 3d) mein §aupt fann fiifynlid) legen Sebem Untertljan in <5djoo§." Unb eg rief ber §err son ©adjfen, 2)er toon 23aiern, ber com ^ein: „®raf tm 93art, 3fyr feib ber reidtfte, (Suer Sanb tragt Sbelftein." 5 tVW 5. 3Ul>rca0 Ijofcr. 3u Mantua in Sanben £>er treue £>ofer roar; # 3n Mantua jum Xobe fjtiljrt tfyn ber geince ©djaar; 1) injury. 2) farm, house. 3) to conceal, contain. 4) shaft, mine- pit. 5) cause. 6) fteljt nad? = is inferior. 7) jewel. A few specimens of German poetical literature. 417 (*3 Blutctc ber S3riiber §er§, ©anj 3)eutfd)fenb, a&)\ in ©djmadj unb Sdmterj! 2Htt tljm ta« Sanb £»rot. S)te §cinbe auf bent 9?iicfen llnbreaS §ofer gtng 2Htt rubtg. feften ©djritten, Sfym fd) ten ber £ob gering ; £)en Sot, ken er fo mcmdjcSntal S5om Sfelberg gefd)tdt in'S Sfyal 3m Ijeifgen Sanb Sterol. 2)od) a(§ au« ftevfergfttectt 1 ■3m feften Sttautua S)tc treuen Saffenbriiber 2)ie §anb' er ftreden fafy, £>a rief er font: „®ott fei mit cudj, 2Jiit bent oerratVnen beutfdjen Stteid) Unb nut bent 2anb Sfyrot!" 2)em £ambour tottt ber SBirbcl 2 9cid)t unterm ©djlagel 3 tor, TO nnn 'InbreaS £ofer ©cfyritt burcfy bas finfTre £I)or ; SInbreaS nod) in 33anben fret, SDort ftanb er feft auf ber ©aftet, £)er Sftann toont &mb Sterol. ®ort foil er nteberfmeen ; dx foradj: „3)a3 tl)u' id) nit! 2M fterben, tote id) ftefje, 2Bttt fterben, tote id) ftritt. 6o n)ie id) fteij' auf biefer ©dianj* 4 , ©3 W mein guter $aifer granj, Wit tljm fein Sanb ZytoV." Unb »on ber §anb bie 33inbe 9cimmt iljm ber Corporal, $nbrea3 £ofer betet 5Iflt)ier junt lefctcnmat; ®cfnn ruft er: „9htn, fo trefft midj red)t! ©ebt fteuer! — 2td>! toie fd)ie§t ifyr fd)led)t! Slbieu, ntetn Sanb £i)rol!" 3. sDUfep. 6. Jtas £ic5 nam brawn Mann. ©er £l)amotnb 5 fam loom SttittagSmeer 6 Unb fdmob 7 burd) 2Betfd)lanb 8 tritb' unb fcud)t; 1) grated windows of prisons. 2) the tattoo. 3) stick. — 4) redoubt. 5) the south wind. 6} the Mediterranean. 7) blew. 8) Italy. OTTO, German Conv. -Grammar. 27 418 A few specimens of German poetical literature. $)te SBotfen flogen »or tljm tyer, 2Bte roenn ber 2Botf tie £eerbe fdjeudjt 1 . (Sr fegte bie $elber, jerfcradj ben 5*orft; 5luf (Seen unb (Stromen bag ©runbetS boxft 2 . 51m §od)gebirge fd)tnot$ ber ©dntee; 2)er (Sturj con taufenb 2Baffem fdjoll 3 ; £>a8 Stefentfyal begrub ein (Bee, SDeS SanbeS §eerftrom 4 roucfys unb fdjroott. £od) rollten bie 2£ogen, enttang ifyx ©Ict$ 5 , Unb rollten geroattige gelfen toon GEt8> 5Iuf 'jpfeitern unb auf 23ogen fdjroer, 3lu8 Duaberftein fcon nnten auf Sag etne 23ritde briiBer fyer, Unb mitten ftanb etn §au3djen b'rauf. §ier roofmte ber ^JoHner mtt 2Bcib unb $inb. — ,£) 3oflner! o ijottner! entfleud) gefd)roinb! — (S$ brofynt' unb brofynte 6 bunrpf Ijeran; Saut Ijeutten ©turm' unb 2Bog' urn's §au8. $)er goflner fbrang jum Slaty fn'nan Unb blicft in ben Sumult fyinauS. — w 53avm^et5tger §tmntd! erbarme bid)! SBerloren! Serloren! 2£er rettet mid)? j£)ie ©cfyoHen rollten ©tog auf ©tog 7 2ln beiben (Snben, ^ter unb bort; 3erborften unb sertriimmert fd)og (Sin ^fetter nad) bent anbern fort. SDer bebenbe .SoUiier wit ^ e ^ u "b ^ n *>, (Sr fyeuite nod) tauter at3 (Sturm unb 2Binb. §od) auf bent fernen Ufer ftanb (Sin ©dnoarm fcon ©affem 8 grog unb ftetn, Unb jeber fdjrte unb rang bie §anb; £)od) mod)te 9ftemanb better fein. 2)er bebenbe 3^^ er mit 2B C & unt5 ^ n ^ 3)urd$culte nacfy Sftettung ben ©tnrm unb 2£tnb. Sftafd) gattopirt ein ©raf fyeroor 3luf fyofyem SKog, ein ebler ©raf. 2BaS fytelt beS ©raf en §ant> empor? ©in 33eute( roar eS, »ott unb ftvaff. „3roci^unbert pftoten 9 ftnb jugefagt ®em, roeld^er bie Sftettung ber Irmen roagt!" 1) to scare. 2) for barft, burst. 3) sounded, echoed. 4) main- stream. 5) bed. 6) to sound dully. 7) one pushing another. 8) gaper. 9) guinea. A few specimens of German poetical literature. 419 Unb immer Ijb'Ijer fdjmott bie $tutlj, Unb immer laitter fd)nob ber 2Bmb; Unb immer tiefer fan! ber SDhitlj. — „D better! o better! fomm' gefdmnnb!" ©tet* ^feifer bet ^feiler jerborft unb bradj; 2aut frad)ten unto ftiirjten bie Sogen nadj. „§aflol)! Ijallol)! ^rifd) auf, gemagt!" £od) fyiett ber ©vaf ben ^preig empor. (Sin 3eber fjort'S, bod) 3eber ^agt ; 2(u3 £aufeucen tritt Reiner oor. 23evgeben3 burdjfyeutte mit SBeib unb $tnb 2)er 3^ner nad) Sftettung ben ©turm unb SSinb. ©ielj', fdjlicfyt 1 unb red)t ein 23auer§mann 51m 2Banbeiftabe fdjritt bafyer, •Uttt grobem $ittel angetfyan 2 , 2ln 2Bud)3 unb tottfc fyocfy unb fjefyr. (§r I)i3rte ben ©vafen, Dewafym fein SSort Unb fdjaute baS nafye ^erberben bort. Unb fitfyn, in ©otteS 9?amen, fprang (Sr in ben nadjften $ifd)erfalm. £ro§ 2Birbet 3 , ©turm unb 2Bogenbrang $am ber (Srretter gliidtid) an. 2)od) mefye! ber -ftadjen mar aflju ftein, Urn better Don Slflen jugteidj ju fein. Unb breimal jmang er feinen $al)n, £rofc 2Btrbel, ©turm unb 2Bogenbrang; Unb breimal fam er gliidtidj an, 23i3 ifym bie Sftettung ganj gefang. $aum maren bie Sefcten an fidjem ^3ort, ©o roUte ba$ lefcte ©etrummer fort. „§ier," rief ber ©raf, „mein matf'rer gveunb, §ier ijt ber $rei§! tomm Ijer! ^imm l)in!'* ©ag an, mar ba% nidjt brao gemeint? — S3ei ©ott! ber ©vaf tvug fyoljen ©inn; $)od) fyofyer unb f>imm(ifd)er, mafyrlid)! fdjtug S)a8 $er$, ba3 ber SBauer im fittel trug. „9D?ein Seben if* fiir ©olb ntc^t feil 4 . Slrm bin id) jmar, bod) ^aft id) fatt. £>em 3ctlner merb' (Su'r ©elb ju £f)eit, 1) simply and plainly. 2) dressed. 3) whirlpool. 4) venal. 27* 420 A few specimens of German poetical literature. 2>er $aB' unb ©ut cerloren l)at!" en 9?iiden unb ging bason. Sutget. t i"9l gu 2)tont)8, t>em Styrarmen, fd)ltdj SDcorcg, ben ©oldj tm ©etoanbe; Stfjn fdjtugen bte §ajcfyer 2 in 23anbe. „2Ba8 tooflteft bu mit bem ®old)e? fprtdj!" (Sntgegnet tfym fiufter ber 333ut1)ertd). — „3)te ©tabt com STtyranncn Defrcten!" ffiat foUft bu am $reuje Bcveuen." „3d) Bin," fpridjt jener, „$u jterfcen bevcit Unb fcttte ntd)t urn mein Sekn; S)odj totflfi bu ©nabe 3 mtr gefcn, 3d) fletye btdj urn bret £age £tit, 5Bi8 id) bie ©djtoefter bem ©atten gefreit 4 . 3d) laffe ben greunb bit als 53urgen, 3fyn magft bu, entrtnn' idj, enmn-gen." 3>a Icidjelt ber fontg mtt arger Sift 5 Unb fpridjt nad) fuvjem SBebenfen : „jDret £age mill idj btr fdjenfen. 2)odj urifie: tocnn fie »evftrtd)en, bte gvijt, (SI)' bu jurfldl mir gegeben 6ift, ©o mufc er jtott bctner erblaffen 6 , 2>od) btr ift bte ©trafe crlafjen." Um> er fommt jum greunbe: „£>er JTcmg gebeut 7 , £)ag id) am treuj mtt bem Seben S3e5ar)te ba$ fre&elnbe ©treben 8 ; 5)odj idIII er mtr gonnen bret Sage g>tit, 23t$ id) bte <5d)tt>efter bem ©atten gefreit: <&o Bletb' bu bem $i5nig jum "ipfanbe, 93i§ td> fomme, ju lijfen bte 25anbe." Unb fdjtoeigenb umarmt tfm ber treue grcurtb Unb liefert ftd) au§ bem Shjrannen; ®er $lnbere jie^et bon bannen. Unb d)t ba3 brttte SJiorgenrott) fdjetnt, 1) the hostage, security. 2) the guards. 3) a favour, grace. 4) wedded, married. 5) maliciously. — 6) die. 7) orders. 8) at- tempt. A few specimens of German poetical literature. 421 §at er fdjnefl mtt bem ©atten tie ©d)toefter oeretnt; (Sttt Ijetm nut forgenber ©eete, $)amtt cr btc fyrtft 1 ntdjt oerfeljle. £)a gte&t unenbltdjer 9iegen Ijerab; 23cn ben 23ergen ftiirjen bte Dueflcn, Unb bte 23adje, tie ©trome fdnoellen. Unb er fommt an'S Ufer mtt toanbernbem &tcih — 2)a retget bte 23ritdt ber ©trubel Jjtnab, Unb bonnernb fprengen bte 2Bogen $)e8 ®en>6lbe3 fvadjenben 23ogen. Unb trcfttoS irrt er an UferS Sftanb, 2Bte toeit er and) fpaljet unb bltdCet Unb bte ©ttmme, bte rufenbe, fdjttfet; 2>a ftcget fein -ftacfyen oom ftdjern ©tranb, 2)er dm fefce an ba§ getoiinfd)te 2anb; $etn (Sniffer lertfet bte $afyre 2 , Unb ber tottbe (Strom totrb jum SJfeerc 3 . 3)a ftnft er an'§ Ufer unb toetnt unb flefyt, £)te §anbe jum 3eu$ 4 erljoben: ,P Ijemme bc8 ©tromeS £oben! (gs etlen bte ©tunben, tm SDfattag ftdjt SDte ©onne, unb toenn fie ntebergefyt: Hub id) !ann bte ©tabt ntd)t erreidjen, ©o mug ber $reunb mtr erbletcfyen 5 ." 3)odj ftadjfenb erneut fid) te8 ©trome$ SButfy, Unb 2BelIe auj SBefle ,$errtnnct, Unb ©tunbe an ©tunbe entrtnnet. SDa tretbt $n bie tngft, ba fafet er fid) SD?utl> Unb rotrft fid) Innetn in bte braufenbe g(utl; u Unb tbetlt mtt geioalttgen. 5lrmen £)en ©trom, unb era ®ott §at (Srbarmen. Unb getohmt ba$ Ufer unb etlet fort Unb banfet bem rettenben ®otte; $)a (turret bie raubenbe Sftotte 7 §eroor au$ beg 2Ba(be3 nad)tUdjem Drt, SDen ^fab ifmt fperrenb, unb fdjnaubenb Wloxt> Unb tyemmet beg 2Banberer8 ©tie 8 9fttt brofyenb gefdjtoungener &eule. 1) the appointed term or day. 2) the ferry-boat. 3) like a sea. 4) Jupiter. 5) perish for me. 6) the roaring stream. 7) a band of robbers. 8) speed. — 422 A few specimens of German poetical literature. „2Ba3 rooflt ifyr?" ruft er, bor ©djredcn bletdj, „3d> fyaU yiid)t% att mem Seben, 2)a8 mn§ td) bem .fimige geben." Unb cntreigt bie teule bem 9}ad7ften gtei<$: „Um be8 ^reunbe§ roillen, erbarmet end)!" Unb bret, mit geroaltigen ©treidjen, (Srtegt er 1 , bie anbern entroeicfyen 2 . Unb bie ©ennc toerfenbet gtiifyenben 33ranb, Unb fcon ber unenblidjen Sftiilje (Srtnattet, ftnfen tic ®niee: „0 Ijaft bit mid) gnabig an$ daubers §anb, 2ln8 bem ©trom mid) gerettet an'S Ijeittge 2anb Unb foU fyier *>erfdmiad)tenb toerberben, Unb ber greunb mir, ber liebenbe, fterbenl" Unb f>ord)! ba fprubeit 3 e8 fttBertjea @an$ nafye, true riefetnbes $ianfd)en, Unb ftifle fyalt er, ^u lanfdjen 4 ; Unb ftefy', cms bem gelfen, gefcfyroafcig, fdjnefl, ©pringt muvmelnb fyerfcor em lebenbiger Oucfl, Unb freubig biidt er fi(f> nieber Unb erfvifdjet bie brennenben ©tieber 5 . Unb bie Sonne blidt 6 burdj ber Stocige ©rim Unb matt cmf ben glanjenben fatten ©er 33anme giganttfdje ©djcttten; 3n>ei SBanberer fiefyt er bie ©trage giclj'n, SBitt etlenben 2aufe8 t>oriiber fliefy'n, 2>a fyort er bie 2Borte fie fagen: „3efet mirb er an'8 tren$ gestagen 7 .' 4 Unb bie Wngft befliigelt 8 ben eilenben gu^, ■31)n jogen ber ©orge Oualen: 2)a fdntnmew 9 in t(benbrotf)$ ©trafylen $on feme bie 3^" ent0 *>on ©tyrafuS, Unb entgegen fommt iljm "jpfyiloftratna, jDc8 §aufe8 rebltdjer fitter, 2)er erfennet entfefct ben ©ebteter: „3itriid! ^n retteft 11 ben grennb nid)t mefyr, ©o rette bag eigene £eben: £)en Sob erleibet er eben. 33on en?er!" ruft er, erroitrget! 2)a bin id), fiir ben er gebiirget 6 !" Unb (Srftaunen ergreift ba$ SSolf umljer, 3n ben airmen liogen ftdj 33etbe Unb tuetnen Dor ©dnrterjen unb greube. £>a fiefyt man fern $htge tljranenleer, Unb jum ^cntge bringt man bte SBunbermafyr' 7 ; 3)er fiifylt etn menfdjUdjeS Sftufyren, Sa'gt fdjnctt ©or ben £fyron fie fiifyren. Unb bltcfet fie lange oevnmnbert an, jD'rauf fyridjt er: „<£« tft eud) gelungen 8 , 31jr fyabt baS £>er$ mtr be$roungen; Unb bte £reue, fie tft bod) fein leerer 2BaI;n 9 , ©o nefymet audj mtcfy jum ©enoffen 10 an: 3<£) fci, geroafyrt mtr bte 23itte, 3n eu'vem 33unbe ber SDrittc." gr. t>. sdjuur. 8. SDer King &C0 JJoli)kratC0.*) G§:r ftanb auf femes S)a^e§ 3^ n "cn, Unb fd)aute nut sergnitgten bin." „£>u fyajt ber ©otter @»nft erfafuen; jDte * oormats beineS ®teid)en toaien, a ftetlt fid?, oon Sftilet gefenbet ©in 23ote bent £tirannen bar: JBajj, §crr, beS £)pfer$ 2)tifte 2 fteigen, Unb nut be§ Sorbcers ntuntern ^etgen 33e!ranje btr betn fihftlid) §aar. ©etroffen fan! ber getnb oom er Ureter 6 nte befiegte ©djaaren 33ebrauen 7 bid) mit tfriegSgefaljren, (Sdjon nafye ftnb fie biefeiu ©tranb." 1) those who. 2) incense. 3) message. 4) the shouts. 5) dock. 6) the Cretans. 7) old form for bebretyen threaten. A few specimens of German poetical literature. 425 Unb el)' ifjm nod) ba$ 2Bort cntf alien, £)a ftefyt man'8 con ben Stiffen tuaflen, Unb taufenb (Stimmen rufen: „<5ieg! SSon geinbeS ^otl) finb toir befreiet, 3)ie -Ureter l)at ber (Sturm jcr jlreuct : Sorbet, geenbet tft ber $rteg." $5a8 Ijort ber ©afijreunb mil (£ntfe£en: ..gtoafyr, id) mug bid) glitcf(td) fd^d^en ; 2)od)," fprid)t er, ^jittr' id) fur betn £ei(. SDxtr grauet 1 cor ber ©otter 9Jetbe, £)e$ SebenS ungemtfdjte greube 2Barb fetnem 3rbifd)en 2 ju £f)eil 3 . ,#u<& mir tjt SHIeS toofjl geratljen: Set alien metnen iperrfdjertfyaten SSeglettet mid) be§ $immels §utb; £)od) fyatt* idj einen tfyeuem (Srben, S)en nafym mtr ©ott, id) faf) ifyn ftevben, 2)em ©litcf bejafylt 1 idj nteine ©djulb. SD'rum totUft bu bidj tor £etb oetoaljren, ®o fte^e ^u ben Unftdjtbaren, £)af$ fie jum ©lite! ben ©djmerj Krleilj'n. 9^0 dj Metnen falj id) frb'ljltd) enben, 5lnf ben mit intmer boflen £m it *> e n 3)te ©otter il)re ©aben ftreu'n. Unb toemt'S bte ©otter nid)t getoafyren, ©o ad)t' auf betne§ greunbeS Sefyren Unb rufe felbft ba$ Unglittf Ijer; Unb roa3 t>on atten beinen ©djfcfcen SDein §er$ am Ijodjften mag ergofeen, £)a3 nimm unb totrf'8 in btcfcB 2Keer." Unb jener fprtd)t, oon gurdjt be\oegct: „$on 5lflem, toa8 bte 3nfet fyeget, 3ft btefer Sfttng mem fybd)fte$ ©ut. 3»ijn votCC idj ben (Srinntyen 4 roetfyen, £)b fie metn ©lite! mir bann oerjeUjeu," — Unb toirft ba8 $(emob in bie gfutlj. Unb bei be8 nad)ften SftorgenS Sidjte, $)a tritt mit frb'pdjem ©eftd)te (Sin gifd)er bor ben gitvften fyin: 1) I am afraid of, I fear. 2) mortal. 3) 311 Stfyeil ioerbcn to fall to one's lot. 4) the Avenging Goddesses, Eumenides. 426 A few specimens of German poetical literature. „§err, btefen gtfd) fyaV id) gefangen, 2Btc feiner nod) tn'g 9cefc gegangen, £)tr jum ©efdjenfe Bring' in in be$ gifdje* Sftagen 2 , £)! ctjne ©renjen 3 tft betn ©turf." §ter roenbet fid) ber ©aft mtt ©raufen 4 : „<3o !ann i^ fyter ntd)t langer fyaufen; ■Sftetn greunb fannft bn ntd)t toetter fetn; 2)te ©otter tooflen betn 93erberben: %cxt eu" id), ntd)t mtt bir ju fterben." Unb fyradj'S nnb fdjiffte fd)nefl fid) em. e^uut. 9. £oiumbtt0. „2Ba3 nnflft bu, gernanbo, fo triib unb bletdj? S)u brtngft mtr traurtge Sftaljr!" — ,$d), ebter gelbfyerr, berettet eud) ; 9ftd)t langer bejafym' id) bag §eer! SBenn jefct nidjt bte $itfte fidj jetgen ttrid, ©o fetb tfjr etn Dpfer ber 2ButIj; ®ie forbem laut toie (Sturmgebrufl 5 T>eS ftelbfyerrn fyetttgeS SBlut." Unb elj' nod) bem fitter bag 2Bort entflolj'n, 3)a brangte bte Sftenge fidj nad); £)a ftiirmten 6 bte 5frteger, bte hmtljenben, fd)on ©teicfy 2Bogen tn'g fttHe ©emad), 33er$n)etflung tm nnlben, oerlofdjenben 7 23ltd, $luf btetdjen ©eftdjtem ben £ob: „33erratljer! too tft nun betn gtetgenbeg 8 ©Uicf? Sefct rett' ung com ©tafet ber $otfy! „£)u gtebft ung ntd)t (Spetfe, fo gteb ung betn Slut! 23fot!" rtefen bie e8 fyerrltdjen 2)utber3 ©effytf! SDte ©onne fan!, ber ©dn'mmer 3 roidj, 3)c« §elT?en SBrufl roarb fc^roer ; 2)cr ®iel turdjraufdjte fcfeauevlid) £)a8 roette, roitftc Wtm. SDte ©ternc jogen pit! fyeranf, SDodj ad)! fetn §offnung§ftern ! Unb »on be« ©d)tffe8 b'Dem Sauf 23(ieo Sanb nnb s J?ettung fern. ©etn treueS gernroljr in ber §anb, 3)te S3ruft tooH ©ram, burd)road)t, Watf) 2Beften blicfenb unocrroanbt 4 , 2>er §ett> bte buft're Wafy. „9?ad) 2Beftcn, o nad) SBeften Ijin Seflitgle bid}, metn tiel! £id) griifct nod) fterfcenb §er$ unb ©inn, 2>u, meiner ©eljnfudjt 3i c * ! „1)o(^ milb, o ©ott. t>on £Hnune(8l)ol)'n 23licf auf mcin 55otf fyerab, Sag fie ntd)t troftfroS nntcrgclj'n 5m roilben ftdttfyengrab!" ©o ftorad) ber £>clb, toon SKtttctb roeid) 5 . 2>a, fyord)! roetd)' etltger Xrttt! „9todj einmal, gernanbo, fo tritb nnb Mctdj? 28a3 bringt bein oebenber ©d)rttt?" 1) coast. 2) Let the . . . morning inform, tell us. 3) day- light. 4) staringly. 5) moved. 428 A few specimens of German poetical literature. ,$cfy, ebler ftelbljerr, e$ ift gefdjefy'n ! Sefet fjeBt fid) ber oftttd)e Strafyl!" — „€>ei rufyig, mein SieBer, auf tjtmmlifdjen §ofy'n (Sntfpringt ber BeleBenbe ©fta$l; (£8 roaftet 1 bie 2ltfmad)t toon $o( ju $of, 5D?tr tenft fie jum Xobe bie 23alm." — ^Seb* too&l benn, mein gclb^crr! SeB' ettng n)ol;ll 3d) fyore bie (Sdjrecfttdjen nafy'n!" Unb efy' nodj bem fitter ba8 2Bort entflofy'n, £)a brangte bie Sttenge fid) nad) ; ©a ftromten bie trieger, bie toiitfyenben, fd)on ©leidj 2Bogen in'8 ftiKe ©emacfy. „3fdj tuetg, toag ifyr forbert, id) Bin Bereft: 3a, toerft mid) in'8 fdjanmenbe 9)ceer! $)od) toiffet, bag rettenbe 3^ if* nity *»<&• ©ott fdjiifce bid;, irrenbeS §eer!" $)umpf 2 fUrvten bie ©djtoerter; ein toufteg ©efd/vei (Srjuflte nut ©ratten 3 bie Suft; 3)er (Sb(e Berettete fttfl fidj unb fret 3um SBege ber flutfyenben ©ruft. ©eloSt 4 tear nun jefceS gefyetltgte 23anb; ©cfyon fafy fic£> jura fd)tt>inbelnben Sftanb ©er treffltdje gutter gevtffen — unb: 2anb! Sanb! rief e$, unb bonnert' e8: Sattfc! Sin glanjenber ©tretfen, mit $urpur gemalt, (Srfdjtett bem Befliigelten 33lirf; 33om ©olbe ber fteigenben (Sonne Beftrafylt (Srljob ftdj bag tointenbe 5 ©lud: 2Ba$ !aum nod) geafmet 6 ber jagenbe ©inn, 28a3 mutfyoou' ber ©roge gebadjt, — <5ie ftnrjen $u $uj$en bem @errltd)en f)tn, Unb preifen bie gottlidje Wlatyt. e u i f e anb. $on ber ©time |eijj Sftnnen mug ber ©dnoetg, ©oH bag SGBcrf ben Stfetfter icben ; SDod; ber ©egen lommt ton oben. gum 2Berfe, bag loir ernft bcreiten, ©ejtemt ftdj toofyl ein cvnflcS 2Bort; 2Benn gute SKeben fie begtetten, £)ann fliegt bte Arbeit munter fort, ©o lagt un« jefct mtt gfetg betrad) ten, S3a§ burcfy bie fdjvoa^e £raft eritferhigt; £)en fd)Ied)ten 9Jcann mug man oeradjten, ®er nie beba^t, toa§ er toflbrtngt; ■ £>a8 ijt'8 }a, toa§ ben 9ftenfcfyen jieret, Unb baju ioarb ilmt ber SSerftanb, Stofc er im innern ©erjen fpuret, 2Ba3 cr erfd)afft mtt f eater §anb. i) goal, object. 2) to hover around. 3) magie light, charm. 4) arisen, produced. 5) (§t*»a8. 6) deceives. *) See the translation in the Key. 430 A few specimens of German poetical literature. 9cel)met §ol$ t>om gtdjtettjtomme, £)od) redjt troden tagt eg fein, $)afe tote eingepregte ^tamme ©djtage ju bent <&d)Xoa[fy fyinetn! ^ocfyt beg tupferg Jpret ! ©dmefl bag 3"™ ^crBci, ©aft fete jafye ©todenfyeife gUegc nadj t>er redjten SBetfc! 2Bag in beg £)ammeg ttefer ©rube 2)ie §anb mit geuerg*$tlfe fcaut, §odj auf toeS £fyurmeg ©iorfenftu&e, i)a toirb e§ toon ung jeugen taut. •Kodj bauern tcirb'g in fpaten Xagett Unb riifyren meter 3ftenfdfyen £)fyr, Unb toirb mtt ben 23etvitoten flagen, Unb ftimmen ju bet Inbadjt (£fy or. 2Bag unten tief bent (Srbenfofyne 2)ag toecfyfelnbe 5krfyangni($ bringt, 2)ag fdjtagt an bie metaE'ne $rone f SDie eg erbaulidj tocher ffingt. Setge 23(afen fefy' id) fpringen; 2Bofyl! bie Sflaffen finb im gfujj. Safct'g mtt 2ifd)enfal$ imrdjbringen, £)ag beforbert fdmett ben ®ug. 2tud) t>om om SJcabcfyen reigt fid) jtotj ber flnaba @r ftiirmt in'g Sebeu tuilb fyinaug, SDurdjmifct bie 2Belt ant 28anbevftabe, gremb fefyrt er tyemt in'g 33ater^aug. A few specimens of German poetical literature. 431 Unb Ijerrttd), in ber 3ugenb ^rangcn, 2Bie em ©ebiib au$ $tmmels*§i5fy'n, 9D?tt jitcfyttgen, t>erfd)amten 28angen ©ieljt er trie 3ungfrau fcor ftcfy ftefy'n. $)a fagt em namenlofeS ©efynen $)e$ SimgttngS £>erj, er trrt attehi ; 9Iu8 fetnen 2lugen Bremen Stljranen, (Sr fltefyt t>er fritter nutben Dfaify'n; (Srri3tl)enb fotgt er tfyren ©puren Unb tft son tfyrem ©rug begtiicft; !Da§ ©djonfte fud)t er auf ben $(uren, SBomtt er feme Siebe fdjmiicft. £>! jarte ©efynfudjt, fiigeS £offen, £)er erften Stebe gclb ne 3 e ^ .2)a« 2Iuge ftefyt ben §tmmel of fen, (£g fdjtoelgt bag §er$ in ©eltgfett. O! bag fie enng grimen bltebe, $)ie ft^ene £tit ber jungen Stebe! £>enn too baS ©trenge mit bem 3 a * teu > 2Bo (StarfeS ftcfy unb 2ftttbe« paarten, SDa gtbt eg etnen guten £lang; 2)'rum priife, roer ficfy erotg btnbet, Ob fidj ba§ §er$ jum §er$en ftnbet! £>er 2BaI)n tft furj, bte 9fau tft lang. $5te Setbenfdjaft flteljt, 2)ie Stebe mug bletben; SDte 231ume toerblitfjt, $)te ^rudjt mug tretbcn; 2)er $ftann mug fytnaug 3n'§ feinblidje &ben, 9flug umfen unb ftreben Unb pflanjen unb fcfyafjen, ©rliften, erraffen, 5ftug tocttcn unb roagen, £)aS ®(M ju erjagen. SBofyt! 9to fann ber ®ug begmnen; er fteffel fict> entrafft, (Stnfyertvttt auf ber etg'nen ©pur, ®te frete £od)tcr ber -ftatur. SBefye, toenn fie to^gelafjen, SBacfyfenb, ofyne Stberftanb, 2)urdj bte ootfbetebten ©affen SBdljt ben ungefyeuren 23ranb! 2)enn bte (Stemcnte Ijaffen £>ag ®ebt(b ber SDcenfcfyenfyanb. $us ben SBolfen quttlt ber ©egen, (Stromt ber Sftegen; 2luS ber Solfe, o^ne 2Bafyl, 3udt ber ©trafyl! §ort tfyr'S rotmmern l)od) com £fyurm? £)a8 ift ©turm! 9?ot^, rote 23htt, Oft ber §tmmel; £)aS ift ntd)t be« £oge« ©tutfy! 2Beld>' ©etttmmel ©tragen auf! £>ampf roatlt auf! gtacfernb fteigt bte ^euerfaufe, £)urcfy ber ©trage lange £tilt 2Bad)§t e$ fort mtt 2Btnbegette ; focbenb rote au« DfenS Sftadjen ©liify'n bte Siifte, S3al!en fradjen, ^Pf often fturjen, ^enfter fltrren, ' iftnber jammern, SD^iitter trren, £fytere nnmmem Unter £rummern: 2lfle« rennet, rettet, pdjtet, Sagged tft bte Wafy gettdjtet; SDurd) ber §anbe lange ^ettc, Urn bte SBette, ftUegt ber Sinter, $c§ tm 33ogen ©prtfcen Oueflen SSaffersoogen. A few specimens of German poetical literature. 433 §cnlenb fommt ber <5tnrm geflegen, £)er bie glamme Branfenb fucfyt. $raffelnb in bie biirre grncfyt gaflt fie, in be$ ©peidjerS 9?aume, 3n ber ©parren biirre Dannie, Unb at§ tooflte fie tm SBefyen mit fty fort ber (Srbe 2Bnfy SReigen in geroalfger gludjt, SBadjSt fte in be8 §tmmet^ §6^en Sftiefengrog ! §offnung§lo$ SBei^t ber 9flenfc^ ber ©otterftarfe ! SD^iigig fteljt er feine SBerfe Unb fcenmnbernb untergefyen. 2eergefcrannt 5fft bie ©tatte, SBitber ©turme raufyeS SBettc. 3n ben b'ben genfterljb'fylen 2$>oIjnt bag ©vauen, Unb be8 Jpimntels SBolfen fdjanen §odj Ijinein. Sinen m& 9lafy bem ©raoe ©einer §aoe (Senbet nod) ber SD^ertfc^ WxM ; ©reift frofylid) bann $um SBanberffaDe. 28a8 genera 2BntIj ifym audj geranbt, Sin fitter £roft ift tfym geblieoen: (Sr jatjlt bie §anpter fetner Sieben, Unb ftefy' ! fljm feJjlt !ein ttyeureS Qauyt. Nun &erbrecfjt mir ba§ ©ebanbe, (Seine Stbfify fyat'S crfuttt, £)ag fid) §erj nnb 2luge roeibe 5ln bem toofylgelung'nen S3ilb. ingt ben §ammer, fdjnnngt, 93i8 ber Mantel fyringt! SBenn' bie ©led' foil anferftel)en, Sflug bie gorm in ©tilde gefyen. 2)er Stteifter fann bie $orm jerbredjen Wlxt toeifer §cmb $nr redjten 3ett; £)odj toefye, toenn in glammcnbadjcn OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 23 434 A few specimens of German poetical literature. 2)aS glity'tibe £r$ ftcfy felbft oefreit! 93linbtt>ittf)enb mtt bes $)onner§ fracfyen 3erfprengt e8 ba§ geborft'ne §au8, Unb tote cm§ offnem ©ollenracfyen ©peit e$ 93erberben ^tinbenb au8; 2Bo rofje frafte ftnnloS roalten, SDa fann ficf> !em ©ebilb geftatten; 2Benn fidj bie Golfer felfrft befrei'n, SDa fann btc SBoIjlfaljrt ntcfyt gebeify'n. 2Befj\ roenn fidj in bem ©cfyeoS ber ©tabte 2)er ^euer^unber ftiU gefyauft, , £>a8 SSotf, jerreigenb feme Sette, 3ur (Sigenfnlfe fd)recf(id) greift! 3)a jerret an ber ©(ocfe ©trangen $)er Hufrufyr, bag fie ^eutent) fdjaflt, Unb nur geroeifyt ju ^rtebenSftcmgen 2)ie Sofung anfttmmt ^ur ©etoalt. fjrei^ext unb ©leid^ett! ^ort man flatten; £>er rufy'ge 23iirger greift jur SBefyr. S)ie ©tra§en fuUen fid), bie fatten, Uno 28itrgerbanben jte^n umijer. 3)a roerben SBeiber ju §tianen Unb treiben mtt (Sntfefcen ©djer^: •Iftocfy judenb, mtt be§ ^antljerS ,3^uen, ^erretgen fie be$ $einbe$ ©erj. 9itdjt« ©eiUgeS ift mefyr, e« lefen ©icfy atte 33anbe frommer ©djcu; £)er ®ute raumt ben ^lafc bem 23i>fen, Unb afle Safter tualten fret. ©efaljrlid) ift'8, ben 2eu ju roecfen, SBerberblidj ift beS SigerS 3 a ^ n ; 3ebod) ber fcfyrecflicfyfte t>er ©irecfen, 2)a$ ift ber Sttenfdj in fcinem 2Bafyn. 2Befy' benen, bie bem (StmgbUnben ;De« SicfyteS §immetSfacfet leilm! ©ie flrafylt ifym mdjt, fie fann nur jimben Unb afcfyert ©tabt' unb Sanber ein. $reube Ijat mir ©ott gegeben ! ©e^et! tone ein golb'ner ©tern '2lu8 ber §itlfe, blanf unb ebcn, ©cfyatt ftd) ber metall'ne tern. iBon bem §elm jum $ran$ ©pielt'8, roie ©onnenglanj. A few specimens of German poetical literature. 435 2ludj beg 2Ba^en§ itette te IteBenbe ©euteme. Unb bieg fet fortan tfyr 23ernf, 2B03U ber SD^eifter fte erfd)uf! §od) iiBer'm niebem (SrbenleBen (SoU fte tm Blauen §tmmelg$ett, £)ie -iftadjBarttt beg £)onnerg, fcBroeBen Unb graven an bte ©terncmuelt. ©oil eine ©ttmme fettt toon often, 2Bie ber ©eflirne Ijefle ©cfyaar, £)te tljren ©djifyfer toanbetnb loBen Unb fitfyren bag Befranjte Satyr. *ftur etotgen nnb ernften $>tngen ©et iljr metafl'ner Sftunb getoeifyt, Unb ftitnblicfy mtt ben f djneflen ©d;toingen 23eritl;r' tm gtuge fte bie 3ett. - £)em ©cfytdfat tet^e fte bte Bmige; ©el 6 ft ^CT5(o« r otyne 9ttttgefm% 33egteite fte mtt iljrem ©cfynmnge $)eg SeBeng toedjfetoolleg (Spiel. Unb rote ber $lang tm £)ljr cergefyet, $)er madjttg tonenb iljr entfcfyaflt, ©0 lefyre fte: bag Sftidjtg Beftefyet, 2)ag atleg 3rbifd>e tertyatlt. Sefco mtt bet ®raft beg ©trangeg 2Btegt bte ©loanna $ennebty. $ennebty. 3Ijt eilet ja, als menu iljt f^tiiget Ijattet; ©o fann id) eudj ntdjt fotgen, toattet bodj! ataxia. £a§ midj bet neuen fttetfyett gentegen, Sag mid) em $inb fein, fet e« mit! Unb auf bem gtiinen £epptdj bet 2Btefen $rilfcn ben letdjten, gefliigelten ©djrttt. 23in idj bem ftnftetn ©efangntg entftiegen? &a\t fie mid) ntdjt mefyt, bie ttautige ©tuft ? Sag mid; in soften, in butfttgen SH^ Stinfen bie fteie, bte Ijtmmtifd)e Suft. D meine tljeu'te Sabty! (Suet terfer 3ft nut urn etn flein 28enige8 ettoettett; 31jt fefyt nut ntdjt bte 9D?auet, bte un8 einfdjltegt, SBeil fie bet SBaume bid)t ©ejh'aud) toetftedt. ataxia. £> SDanf, $>anf, biefen freunbltd) gtiinen 23aumen, 3)te meineS £etfet8 Sftauetn mit fcetfteden! 3d) mitt nttdj fret unb gtud'lid) ttaumen, SBatum au§ metnem fttgen 2BaJm mid) meden? Umfangt mtdj nidjt bet toette §mtmeI§fd)oo8 ? SKe Elide, fret unb feffetloS, (Stge^en fid) in ungemeffnen Sttaumen: $)ott, mo bie gtauen ^Jebetbetge tagen, Sangt meine§ &eid)e$ ©tan^e an, Unb biefe SBollen, bie nad) Sflittag jagen, ©ie fud)en $tanh*eidj8 fetnen Ocean. (Silenbe SMfen! ©egtet bet Siifte! 2Bet mit eudj roanbette, mit eudj fdjiffte! ©titget mit fteunblidj metn -Sugenblanb ! 3d) bin gefangen, idj bin in 33anben, 5l4, id) xjah' fetnen anbetn ©efanbten ! fttet in ben Suften ift eu'te 23aljn, 31jt feib ntdjt biefet $ontgtn untettfyan A few specimens of German poetical literature. 437 2Id), t^eu're 2aty! 3l)r feib auger duty, £)ie lajtg entoefyrte ^reiljeit madjt (Sudj fd)t»armen. ataxia. SDort legt em Sifter ben 9?adjen an! S)iefe8 elenbe ^afyrjeug fonnte mid) retten, 23radjte mid) fdjnefl ju fcefreunbeten ©tabten; ©parity nafjrt e8 ben bitrfttgen S0?ann. S3elaben rooflt' id) tfyn reid) mit inber 3 un 9 e: 3efct bringet Sure 2Borte an, je§t ift 2)er Slugenbltif, ju reben! SOUrta. £>, tsarum Ijat man mtdj ntdjt toorbereitet ! 3efct bin id) nid)t barauf gefafet, }e£t nidjt. 2Ba8 id) mir al« bic Ijodjjte ©unft erbeten, 3)itaft mir jefct fd)recf(tcfy, fiird)terttd). — ftomm, &anna, giHjr' midj in'8 §au3, tag id) midj faffe, mid) (Sr^ole — 3burt) unto bie 53origen. SWarta. (5s ift nid)t barum! (Sott, mir ift gan$ anberS 3u Sflutlj — 2ldj, eblcr ©fyreroSburi), 3f)r fommt, 33om §immet mir em (Snget ^ugefenbet! — -3d) fann fie nid)t fefy'n! s Jtettet, rettet mid) $or bem ©erljajjten 2lnbliab' id} mir ©efagt unb ht'« ©ebadjtnig eingefd)rieben, 2Bte idj fie ritfjren toottte unb beroegen! SSergeffen plo&Ud), auSgelofcfyt ift 2We3, yiitytS lebt in mir in btefem Slugenbttcf, %{& meiner Setben brennenbeg ®efitf)l. 3n btut'gen §a{$ getoenbet toiber fte 5ft mir baS §erj, e§ flteljen aHe guten ©ebanfen, unb bie tit u nb bent ©efefc ber ©tunbe! <5te tft bte SRadjttge — bemittfytgt (Sudj ! Wlaxia. 33or Hjr? 3d) fann e8 ntmmermeljr! ©fyretoSburty. Shut's bennodj! r fetbft 9?ur beffereS 33ertrauen — 2)arum eben SBtrt id) oorauSgeetlt, bamtt id) (Sud) 3n ftaffung fefcen unb ermafynen modjte. 9JUria. H<$, Talbot! 3f)r mar't flctt mein greunb — ®ag 3n (Surer mtlben ©aft geblieben mare! (S« roarb mtr fyart begegnet, ©fjremSburt) ! ©fyretttSburty (i$W £anb ergrcifcnb) . SSergegt jefct 2Ifle«. $5arauf benft aflein, 2Bte 31)r fte untermurftg moGt empfangen. SKaria. 3ft 23urletgl) and) mtt tfyr, mem bofer (Sngel? A few specimens of German poetical literature. 441 Sftiemcmb Begleitet fie, al« ©raf son Sefter. 2ttarta. Sorb Sejter? giirdjtet 9Gidjt« son ifym. 9?tdjt cr 2Bifl (Suren Untergang — ©em 25erl ift e$, SDag (Sudj bie £6nigin bie 3wfammenfunft SBetmfltgt. enfart mtr oenoanbelt; 3um Ungefyeuren fyaft bu mid) getuofmt — 2Ber fid) be$ finbeS §aupt jum 3^ f e fcte, 2)er faun aud) treffen in ba§ §er$ be3 geinbes. $)te armen ^inbletn, bie unfdjutbtgen, £)a$ treue 2Beib mug idj &or beiner 2ButI) SBefdjiifcen, Sanboogt! — £)a, als idj ben SBogeuftrang Slnjog — al$ mtr bie £>anb erjitterte — $tt§ bu mit graufam teufelifdjer Sufi *) The best and cheapest edition of „SBityelm Sell" with copious English notes is by Dr. Emil Otto. Stuttgart, J. G. Cotta. 442 A few specimens of German poetical literature. Wild) jmangft, auf'8 §aupt beg $tnbe§ anjulegen — 3H$ id) unmdd)tig fle^enb tang toor bir; j£)amal3 getobt' id) mir in meinem -Snnern Sftit furd)tbar'm (Sibfdm>ur, ben nnr ©ott ge^crt, 2)aj$ meineS n ad) ft en ©djuffeS e r ft e § 3^ ®ein §erj fein fottte — 2Ba3 idj mir getobt 3n jeneS s 21ugenbltcfe§ §oflenquaten, 5ft eine fyeifge ©dmlb; id) tmfl fte jatjlen. SDu bift mein £err unb meineS $aifer$ 23ogt; £)od) nid)t ber $ atfer ^atte fid) erlaubt, 2Ba$ bu. — (5r fanbte bid) in biefe Sanbe, Um Sfted)t $u fpvedjen — ftrengeS, benn er jiirnet - 3)od) ntd)t, um mit ber morbertftfyen Suft £>id) jcbeS ©rauelS ftrafloS $u erfredjen: (Ss lebt ein ©ott ju ftrafen unb ju rad)en. tomm bu fjeroor, bu SBttngcr bitt'rer ©djmer$en, Sftein tfyeureS $tcinob jefct, mein l)b'd)fter ©d)a§ — Sin £id mill idj bir geben, ba8 bi3 jefct SDer frommen SBttte unburd)bringtid) mar — 3)od) bit foil e§ ntd)t miberftefy'n. — Unb bu, SSertraute 23ogenfefme, bie fo oft Wix treu gebient fyat in ber greube ©ptelen, 23er(aff mid) nid)t im fUrd)terltd)en (Srnft! 9cur jefct nod) fyalte {eft, bu treuer ©trang, SDer mir fo oft ben fyerben ^feil befliigelt; (Sntrann' er jefco IraftloS meinen £anben, 3d) ^abe letnen jmeiten $u fcerfenben. $uf biefe 23anf oon ©tern mul idj mid) fefcen, 2)em SBanberer jur httjett dlvfy bereitct — 2)enn l)ier ift feine §ctmatl) — 3eber tretbt ©idj an bem anbern rafd) unb fremb ooviiber Unb fraget ntdjt nad) feinem ©d^merj. — §ier gefyt 3)er forgenoolle $aufmann unb ber tetdjt ©efdjiir$te ^tfger — ber anbddjt'gc Sftondj, SDer biift're dauber unb ber fyeit're ©ptetmann, 2)er ©dumer mit bem fdnoer belab'nen 9?og, £)er feme fyerfommt toon ber 2Henfdjen £anbern, $)enn jebe ©trafce fufyrt an'3 (5nb' ber 2Be(t. ©te 3lfle jieljen tl)re8 2Bege3 fort %n ifyr ©efdjaft, unb meineS — ift ber SDcorb! . ©onft, menu ber 33ater au8$og, tiebe $inber, S)a mar ein greuen, ^enn er mieber fam: A few specimens of German poetical literature. 443 £>enn mentals feljrt' er fyeim, er brctd;t' end) ettoa3, 2Bar'£ erne fdjBne 2lfyenblume, toar'8 ©n felt ner SBcgel ober 2tmmon§l)ora, 2Bie e$ ber 2Banb'rer ftnbet auf ben SBcrgen — Sfefct geljt er einem anbern Saibtoer? nad): 2lm mtlben 2Beg ftfct er mtt Sftorbgebanfen ; SDeS getnbeS Seben ift'S, roorauf er lauert. — Unb bod} an end) nnr benft er, liebe $tnber 2lud) jefct — (Sudj ju fcertljetbtgen, eure Un[d)ulb 3n fdjiifcen m>r ber dladjt be§ Styrannen, SBiCC er ^urn 9ttorbe jefct ben 23ogen fpaunen. 3cfy lau're auf em ebles 2Bttb. — Scigt ftd)'8 !Der Sager nidjt fcerbriefcen, Stage lang Umljerjuftretfen in be$ SBtntcrS ©trenge, 93on fttti ju gels ben SBagefprung §u tfyun, §tnan ju fttmmen an ben glatten SBanben, 2Bo er ftd) anletmt mtt bem ctg'nen 23tut, Urn ein armfelig ©rattier \\x erjagen. §ter gilt e§ einen foftltdjeren $rei«, SDaS §erj be8 £obfetnb8, ber mid) null toerbcvbcn. Sttein ganjeS Seben lang I)ab' id) ben 53ogcn ©efyanbfyabt, mid) geiibt nad) (Scfyitfcenregel ; 3d) I)abe oft gefdjofjcn in ba$ ©djioar^e Unb mand)en fdjonen $rei$ mtr fyetm gebrad)t 25om greubenfdjtefcen — SIber Ijeute mill id) 2)en SRetfterfdjujj tfymt unb ba§ S3efte mtr 3m ganjen UmfvetS be8 ©ebtrgS gennunen. 3. Jtonolog au0 ^rijtller's „3ttntjfrau turn ftdj flammenb nteterlteg Unb tljm Befall, toor ^pljarao ju fteljen, 2)er etnft ben frommen $naBen Sfat'S, 3)cn §irten, ftcfy jum ©tretter auSerfeljen, $)er ftets ben Aptrten gnabtg ftdj BeroteS, (§r fpradj ju mtr auS btefeS 23aume3 Saigon: „©efy' Ijin! 2)u foflj* auf (Svben fiir mtdj jeugen. „3n rauIjeS (Srj fottjt bu bte ©tteber fdjniiren, 2fttt ©tafyl Bebecfen betne jarte 33ru(t; 9?id)t 9ftannerIteBe barf bctn §erj berii^ren 9fltt fitnb'gen fjlammen eitler (Srbenlujt; 9^te rotrb ber 23rautfran$ betne £ode jteren, ®tr Btitfyt fein fteB(td> $tnb an Reiner SBrufl ; £)od) njerbe id) mit frtegerifdjen (Sfjren, 55or alien (Srbenfrauen bid) cerHaren. „S)emt, menn im ftampf bte Sftutfytgften fcerjaaen, SBenn granfretdjS le^teS ©djtdfal nun fid; uafyt, £)ann tmrft bu metne Drtflamme tragen, Unb, ime bte retdje ©djuttterht bte <&aat, 2)en jtofyen UeBemnnber nteberfdjlagen ; Umroaljen toirft bu feine§ ©(tides Wcto. (Srrettung Bring en $ranfretd)3 §elbenfo^nen, Unb 9tt)etm8 Befret'n unb beaten $omg rronen!" (Sin Stifym ^ at *> er ©tntmcl mtr serfyeifjen, @r fenbet mtr ben ©emt, er fommt son u)m; 2ftit ©Btterfraft Beriifyret mtdj fein (Sifen, Unb mtdj burdjflammt ber SWut^bcr (SIjeruBtm; 3n'8 ftriegSgetoiiljl Ijhtein xoiti. eg mtdj retjjen, (£8 tretBt mtdj fort mit <2turme$ Ungeftitm; £>en $elbruf fybY id; madjttg ju mtr brtngen, SDaS ©^la^trog ftetgt unb bte £rompeten fltngen. A few specimens of German poetical literature. 445 (Sierter Hufeug. Sier^nter SCuftrttt.) (€c!b«ten mit fliegenben Safynen crfiiUcn ben £intcrc|ntnb. S3ot ifjnen bcr flonig unb bet £erjoa Ben Surgunb ; in ben 2lrmen beiber giivjlen licgt Sofoanna, tobtlid) »em>unbet, otjnt 3«^cn be* CebenS. ©ie treten langfam »otwart$. SlgneS ©orcl flutjt herein.) © r C I. tyx fete Befrett — 3fyr lebt. — 3d) ^a6' duty toieber! ^ontg. 3imntel3 $vtebe fptelt urn ifyre 3 U 9 C "» $etn 2ltt)ent l)ebt ben 93ufen meljr, bod) Seben 3ft nod) ju fpitren in ber toarmen ©anb. ^on tg. ©ie ift bafyin. — ©te tt)trb nidjt ntefyr ernjadjen, 3fjr Sluge toirb ba§ 3rb'fdje iridjt meljr fdjauen. ©d)on fd)toebt fte btoben, etn oevftavter ©eift, ©tef)t unfevn ©c^merj nidjt meljr unb unf're Sfteue. ©oret. ©ie fdjtagt bte 5lugen auf, fte lebt! Surg unb (erftaunt). fleljrt fte Un« au$ bent ©tab' juriicf? 3 to uigt f te ken £°*>* ©ie rtdjtet fid) empor! ©ie fteljt! 3o^anna (jtefct ganj aufgtridjtet unb fdjaut um^et). 2Bo bin id)? S3urgunb. 53et beinent $olf, 3oI)anna! Set ben 2)einen! $onig. 3n beinet ^reunbe, bcineS $onia,8 5Trmen. 3 1) a U n a (nad)bcm fte ifyn lange (tan angefe&enj . Sftem, idj bin feme 3 au ^ e ^n ! ©etotg, 3$ bin's ntd)t. 446 A few specimens of German poetical literature. $i>ntg. £>u fctft Ijetltg tote em (Sngel; 2)od) unfer Sluge tear nut 9lad)t bebedft. 3o^> antra (ju^t $eit« lafylnb umtjec) Unb Bin id) toitfltdj nnter meinem SBolf? Unb bin ntcfyt mefyr t>erad)tet nnt) fcerftogen? Wan fittest mir ntc^t, man ftefjt mid) giitig an? — 3a , jefct erfenn' id) beutUcfy rifles toieber! $)a8 ift mein $onia,! £)a8 finb $ranfreicfy3 ftatjmcn! S)od) metne galjne fety' id) nid)t. — 2Bo ift fie? 9?td)t oI)ne meine gafyne barf id) fommen; 53on metnem 2ftctfter tuarb fie mtr fcertraut; S3or feinem £I)ron mug id) fie nteberlegen ; 3d) barf fie jeigen, benn id) two, fie treu. $onig (mit abgtroanbtem ©tjtdit). ©efct u)r bte gal)ne. (SJlan rcidjt fu if>r. Sic ftetjt ganj frci aufgctidjtct, bit gatne in tct $ant> ; Ux $imtnel ift con einem rojigen £#cin fccleucfytet.) i Printed by Julius Groos at Heidelberg. A LIST EDUCATIONAL WORKS for the Study of Foreign Languages by Dr. EMIL OTTO and on the Plan of his Conversation-System. FIRST GERMAN BOOK containing Introductory Lessons to the Study of the German Language ; with Reading- lessons, a Vocabulary, and Select Phrases for German Conversation by Dr. Emil Otto, Professor of Modern Languages; Lecturer at the University of Heidelberg. 8. bound. 5th Ed. Price: 1 Mk. 60 Pf. An Elementary Grammar of the German Language combined with Exercises, Readings and Conversations by Dr. Emil Otto. 8. bound. 2nd Ed. Price: 2 Mk. German Conversation-Grammar. A New and Practical Method of Learning the German Language, by Dr. Emil Otto. 8. bound in cloth. 18th Ed. Price: 5 Mk. Key to Dr. E. Otto'S German Conversation-Grammar. 8. bound. 14th Ed. Price: 1 Mk. 60 Pf. The German Reader. First Part. Anecdotes, Fables, Descriptions, Stories and Tales, with Explanatory Notes and a Vocabulary by Dr. Emil Otto. 8. bound. 3rd Ed. Price: 2 Mk. 40 Pf. The German Reader. Second Part. Select Readings in German Literature with Notes and a Vocabulary by Dr. Emil Otto. 8. bonnd. 2nd Ed. Price : 2 Mk. 40 Pf. The German Reader. Third Part. Select German Comedies with Explanatory Notes and a Vocabulary by Dr. Emil Otto. 8. bound. Price: 2 Mk. 40 Pf. Materials for translating English into German with Grammatical Notes and a Vocabulary, by Dr. Emil Otto. First Part. 8. bonnd. 4th Ed. Price : 2 Mk. 40 Pf. KEY to these ^Materials". 8. bound. Price: 1 Mk. 60 Pf. Materials for translating English into German with Words and Explanatory Notes. Second Part containing a Series of English Conversations on various Subjects, adapted for Translation into German. by Dr. Emil Otto. 8. bonnd. Price: 2 Mk. 40 Pf. German-English Conversations (Deutsche Conversations-Schule). A new methodical Guide for learning to speak German by Dr. Emil Otto. 8. bound. Price: 1 Mk. 60 Pf. French Conversation-Grammar a New and Practical Method of Learning the French Language by Dr. Emil Otto. 8. bound in cloth. 6th Ed. Price: 5 Mk. Key to Dr. E. Otto'S French Conversation-Grammar. 8. bound. 3rd Ed. Price: 1 Mk. 60 Pf. Materials for Translating English into French with Grammatical Notes and a Vocabulary, by Dr. Emil Otto. 8. bound. 2nd Ed. Price: 2 Mk. 40 Pt. Italian Conversation-Grammar. A New and Practical Method of Learning the Italian Language, by C. M. Sauer. 8. bound in cloth. 3rd edition. Price: 5 Mk. Key to Prof. C. M. Sauer's Italian Conversation- Grammar. 8. bound. Price: 1 Mk. 60 Pf. Spanish Conversation- Grammar by C. M. Sauer. 8. bound in cloth. 2nd Ed. Price: 5 Mk. Key to Prof. C. M. Sauer's Spanish Conversation- Grammar. 8. bound. Price: 1 Mk. 60 Pf. OUVRAGES pour l'enseignement des langues etrangeres par JEmile Otto et d'apres sa methode. Nouvelle Grammaire allemande. Contenant outre les principales regies de la langue allemande, des Themes, des Lectures et des Conversations, d'apres une methode a la fois theorique et pratique par Emile Otto, Docteur en phil. et Professeur de langues a l'universite d'Heidelberg. 8. lime edit, reliee. Prix : 4 Mk. Corrige des Themes de la Grammaire allemande par Emile Otto. 8. 2me edit, cartonnee. Prix: 1 Mk. 60 Pf. Petite Grammaire allemande abregee, a Vusage des commen^ants par Emile Otto. 8. 4m e edit, cartonnee. Prix. 2 Mk. Lectures allemandes. 1. partie. Petit Recueil de versions allemandes contenant anecdotes, descriptions, fables, traits de caractere, paraboles, historiettes , contes moraux et poesies, accompagnees de notes, explicatives et d'un Vocabulaire, par Emile Otto. 8. 2me edit, carton. Prix: 2 Mk. 40 Pf. Lectures allemandes. 2. partie. Second Recueil de Versions allemandes, accompagnees de notes explicatives et d'un Vocabulaire, par Emile Otto. 8. carton. Prix: 2 Mk. 40 Pf. Lectures allemandes. 3. partie. Clioix de C'OiiildieH allemandes, accompagnees de notes explicatives et d'un Vocabulaire par Emile Otto. 8. carton. Prix: 2 Mk. 40 Pf. Conversations allemandes. Nouveau guide methodique pour apprendre £, parler allemand par £mile Otto. 8. relic Prix: 1 Mk. 60 Pf. Nouvelle grammaire anglaise avec de nombreux Exercices de Traduction, de Lecture et de Conversation par A. Mauron et Th. Gaspey. Docteur en philoBophie et Professeur a Constance. 8. relie. 4 edit. Prix 4 Mk. CorrigS des Thames contenus dans la grammaire anglaise par A. Mauron et Th. Gaspey. 8. (^rton^^Pnx^JI^MkjSO Pf. Petite grammaire anglaise abregee, a Tusage des commen9ants par A. Mauron, Docteur en philosophic et Professeur a Constance. 8. carton. Prix: 2 Mk. Lectures anglaises ou Cours de Versions en prose et en vers, tirees des meilleurs auteurs anglais et americains, accompagnees de questionnaires, de notes explicatives, et suivies d'un vocabulaire complet par A. Mauron, 8. cart. Prix: 3 Mk. Nouvelle Grammaire italienne avec des dialogues par Charles Marquard Sauer. Directeur du College Revoltella a Trieste. 8. relie'. 5. ed. Prix : 4 Mk. Corrige des Themes et Versions contends dans la gramniaire italienne par C. M. Sauer. 8. .cartonne. Prix: 1 Mk. 60 Pf. Nouyelle Grramiiiaire espagnole avec des dialogues par Charles Marquard Sauer. 8. relie. Prix: 5 Mk. CorrigS des Themes de la grammaire espagnole par C. IV! . Sauer. 8. Prix: 1 Mk. 60 Pf. Nouyelle Grrammaire russe avec des dialogues par Paul Fuchs, Prof. 8. relie. Prix: 5 Mk. Corrige des Themes de la grammaire russe par Paul Fuchs, Prof. 8. carton. Prix: 1 Mk. 60 Pf. Nuoya grammatica tedesca con temi, letture e dialoghi compilata dai professori C. M. Sauer e G. Ferrari. 8. leg. 2me edit. Prix: 4 Mk. Nuoya grammatica tedesca elementare con temi, letture e dialoghi, aggiustata ai bisogni degli allievi principianti, da Emilio Otto, Prof, di lingue moderne all' universita di Heidelberg. 8. leg. Prix: 2 Mk. Letture tedesche, Piccola raccolta di traduzioni tedesche da Emilio Otto, Prof, di lingue moderne all' universita di Heidelberg. 8. leg. Prix: 2 Mk. 40 Pf. NuoYa grammatica inglese con temi, letture e dialoghi compilata da Carlo Marquard Sauer. 8. leg. Prix: 5 Mk. 14 DAY USE RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED LOAN DEPT. This book is due on the last date stamped below, or on the date to which renewed. Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. 3 My '65s * REC'D LD MAY2K> fi ir PD ■ w O0"4, p, SEP 1 1 1Q74 1 S ifefo cm: rm MARlS'Jf i LD 2lA-60m-3,'65 T T . Gen . eral f^.?^ . (F2336sl0)476B "Krkele^ ""* 751668 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY